A 0053333

S I E M E N S
E W S D
Digital Electronic Switching System
Command Manual
CML Version 12
APS-ID: PAKCBZ1V.12
Volume 1 - 10
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Issued by Bereich Oeffentliche Vermittlungssysteme
Hofmannstrasse 51, D-81359 Muenchen
The reproduction, transmission or use of this
document or its contents is not permitted without
express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved. Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Subject to technical alterations without notice.
Copyright (c) SIEMENS AG 1998
C M L E W S D : Administration Section
ADMIN-2 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-
] ADMIN ]
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This document requires 10 50 mm binder

Order No. A30808-X3000-X500-*-99
and the accessories package for CML
Order No. P30305-V6000-Z362-*-7692
Hints for interpreting the change designations:
The designations mean:
A ] Alternation, changed
N ] New, no previous chapter
0 ] Chapter removed, no replacement
This document comprises a total of 4923 pages.
Index of Issue: Issue: Pages:
ADMINISTRATION SECTION 01 ADMIN -1... 3

LIST OF CONTENTS 01 CONT -1... 21
INTRODUCTION CML/OML 01 IN -1... 10
COMMANDS 01 -1...4646
REFERENCE LIST COMMAND - MASKS 01 TAB -1... 243
C M L E W S D : Administration Section
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ADMIN-3
Contents and Issue Information

Command Description Number Issue Command Code Pages
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3664.46 1 CAN_ACC -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3665.46 1 DISP_ACC -1... 1
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3663.46 1 ENTR_ACC -1... 2
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL 3666.46 1 STAT_ACC -1... 1
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3661.46 1 CAN_ACCTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3662.46 1 DISP_ACCTRAF -1... 1
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3660.46 1 ENTR_ACCTRAF -1... 3
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA 1589.00 1 DISP_ACDATA -1... 1
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA 1590.04 1 ENTR_ACDATA -1... 3
CANCEL COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3825.01 1 CAN_ACOLIM -1... 1
DISPLAY COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3824.01 1 DISP_ACOLIM -1... 1
ENTER COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3823.01 1 ENTR_ACOLIM -1... 2
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER 1587.05 1 CAN_ACORD -1... 2
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER 1585.05 1 ENTR_ACORD -1... 4
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER 1586.03 1 SEL_ACORD -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS 1588.00 1 DISP_ACSTAT -1... 1
ACT AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2829.00 1 ACT_ADPHMEAS -1... 1
CAN AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2830.01 1 CAN_ADPHMEAS -1... 3
DISP AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2832.01 1 DISP_ADPHMEAS -1... 5
ENTR AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2833.01 1 ENTR_ADPHMEAS -1... 3
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1518.03 1 DISP_AENTRY -1... 1
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1519.08 1 SEL_AENTRY -1... 3
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE 1515.01 1 CAN_AFILE -1... 1
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE 1514.03 1 CR_AFILE -1... 3
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1517.00 1 DISP_AFILE -1... 1
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1516.02 1 MOD_AFILE -1... 3
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS 1483.02 1 DISP_ALARM -1... 2
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE 1486.04 1 SRCH_ALARM -1... 2
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2017.01 1 ACT_ALDISP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2019.01 1 DACT_ALDISP -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY 2020.00 1 DISP_ALDISP -1... 1
CANCEL ALIAS NAME 3079.00 1 CAN_ALIAS -1... 1
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES 3075.00 1 DISP_ALIAS -1... 1
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME 3076.00 1 ENTR_ALIAS -1... 1
MODIFY ALIAS NAME 3077.00 1 MOD_ALIAS -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM MODE 771.01 1 DISP_ALMODE -1... 1
ENTER ALARM MODE 770.02 1 ENTR_ALMODE -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM PERIOD 2018.01 1 CAN_ALPER -1... 1
DISP ALARM PERIOD 2021.00 1 DISP_ALPER -1... 1
ENTER ALARM PERIOD 2022.01 1 ENTR_ALPER -1... 2
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY 2922.00 1 CAN_ALPRIO -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY 769.11 1 DISP_ALPRIO -1... 4
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY 768.11 1 ENTR_ALPRIO -1... 5
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE 3174.00 1 DISP_ALPROF -1... 1
SET ALARM STATUS 1485.04 1 SET_ALSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM TEXT 946.02 1 CAN_ALTEXT -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT 947.01 1 DISP_ALTEXT -1... 1
ENTER ALARM TEXT 943.01 1 ENTR_ALTEXT -1... 1
DISPLAY AMA DATA 528.77 1 DISP_AMA -1... 3
ACTIVATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2887.03 1 ACT_ANELEM -1... 7
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2888.02 1 CAN_ANELEM -1... 8
DEACTIVATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2889.03 1 DACT_ANELEM -1... 5
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2890.02 1 DISP_ANELEM -1... 8
EDIT ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2893.04 1 EDIT_ANELEM -1... 10
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 216.05 1 CAN_ANGCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 215.05 1 ENTR_ANGCOS -1... 7
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 214.03 1 CAN_ANGRP -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 213.81 1 CR_ANGRP -1... 9
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 222.03 1 DISP_ANGRP -1... 1
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA 2876.00 1 REC_ANGRP -1... 4
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 220.05 1 CAN_ANLCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 219.05 1 ENTR_ANLCOS -1... 1
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 218.03 1 CAN_ANLN -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 217.78 1 CR_ANLN -1... 3
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 221.03 1 DISP_ANLN -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 847.67 1 STAT_ANLN -1... 2
DISPLAY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET-VALUE 2896.04 1 DISP_ANPREV -1... 2
MODIFY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET-VALUE 2895.04 1 MOD_ANPREV -1... 2
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2902.01 1 CAN_ANTXT -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2903.01 1 CR_ANTXT -1... 2
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2891.01 1 DISP_ANTXT -1... 1
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2904.01 1 MOD_ANTXT -1... 2
CANCEL APPLICATION 1767.00 1 CAN_APPL -1... 1
CREATE APPLICATION 1769.05 1 CR_APPL -1... 6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-1 +
DISPLAY APPLICATION 1771.01 1 DISP_APPL -1... 1
MODIFY APPLICATION 1774.06 1 MOD_APPL -1... 7
ENTER APS NAME 321.01 1 ENTR_APSNAME -1... 1
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER 322.01 1 INCR_APSVN -1... 1
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE 1052.46 1 CAN_AREACODE -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA 311.46 1 DISP_AREACODE -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE 310.46 1 ENTR_AREACODE -1... 2
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE 1051.46 1 MOD_AREACODE -1... 1
CONNECT ATE 1296.10 1 CONN_ATE -1... 1
DISCONNECT ATE 1297.10 1 DISCONNATE -1... 1
ALLOW AUDIT 242.74 1 ALLOW_AUDIT -1... 2
DISPLAY AUDIT 240.70 1 DISP_AUDIT -1... 1
INHIBIT AUDIT 241.74 1 INHIB_AUDIT -1... 2
START AUDIT 239.74 1 START_AUDIT -1... 3
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION 897.01 1 CAN_AUT -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION 898.01 1 DISP_AUT -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION 896.01 1 ENTR_AUT -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS 894.01 1 CAN_AUTCL -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS 895.01 1 DISP_AUTCL -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS 893.01 1 ENTR_AUTCL -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS 1592.04 1 STAT_BA -1... 2
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT 1818.09 1 DISP_BAFAULT -1... 3
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS 1099.00 1 COM_BAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR 1089.00 1 CONF_BAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR 1109.00 1 DIAG_BAP -1... 2
TEST BASE PROCESSOR 1128.00 1 TEST_BAP -1... 1
ACTIVATE BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE MEAS. 2739.02 1 ACT_BAPERF -1... 2
DEACTIVATE BA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT 2740.01 1 DACT_BAPERF -1... 2
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE DATA 2741.01 1 DISP_BAPERF -1... 4
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1101.00 1 CONF_BCMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1112.00 1 DIAG_BCMY -1... 1
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1130.01 1 TEST_BCMY -1... 1
ACT BIT ERROR MEASUREMENT 3242.01 1 ACT_BERM -1... 6
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT 3183.00 1 DISP_BERM -1... 7
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK 593.78 1 TRANS_BUFFER -1... 1
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2445.49 1 CAN_CAC -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2444.46 1 CR_CAC -1... 2
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2447.46 1 DISP_CAC -1... 2
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2446.49 1 MOD_CAC -1... 2
ACCEPT CALL 1272.15 1 ACCEP_CALL -1... 2
RELEASE CALL 1279.01 1 REL_CALL -1... 1
SET UP CALL 1282.03 1 SETUP_CALL -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA 639.76 1 DISP_CALLDAT -1... 3
ACCEPT CALL IDENTIFICATION 1484.01 1 ACCEP_CALLID -1... 1
MODIFY CALL MONITORING 713.15 1 MOD_CALLMON -1... 2
CALL MONITORING 711.15 1 START_CALLMON -1... 4
STOP CALL MONITORING 712.15 1 STOP_CALLMON -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1945.07 1 DISP_CALLPOPT -1... 2
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1950.12 1 MOD_CALLPOPT -1... 22
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA 3387.03 1 CAN_CALLTYPE -1... 2
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA 2395.03 1 CR_CALLTYPE -1... 6
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA 3386.03 1 DISP_CALLTYPE -1... 6
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA 2396.03 1 MOD_CALLTYPE -1... 10
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR 3165.00 1 CAN_CAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR 1090.00 1 CONF_CAP -1... 1
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR 3157.00 1 CR_CAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR 1110.00 1 DIAG_CAP -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR 3161.00 1 DISP_CAP -1... 1
TEST CALL PROCESSOR 1129.01 1 TEST_CAP -1... 1
CANCEL CATASTROPHE CONDITION 253.44 1 CAN_CATAST -1... 1
DISPLAY CATASTROPHE CONDITION 254.44 1 DISP_CATAST -1... 1
ENTER CATASTROPHE CONDITION 252.44 1 ENTR_CATAST -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL BOOKING DATA 571.76 1 DISP_CBDATA -1... 1
ENTER CALL BOOKING DATA 580.75 1 ENTR_CBDATA -1... 1
CANCEL CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA 737.76 1 CAN_CBLIMIT -1... 4
CREATE CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA 736.76 1 CR_CBLIMIT -1... 4
DISPLAY CALL BOOKING LIMIT 574.76 1 DISP_CBLIMIT -1... 3
MODIFY CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA 859.76 1 MOD_CBLIMIT -1... 5
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3025.02 1 ACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3026.03 1 CAN_CBPGRP -1... 1
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3027.02 1 CR_CBPGRP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3028.02 1 DACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3029.02 1 DISP_CBPGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3030.02 1 MOD_CBPGRP -1... 2
CONT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT 328.84 1 CAN_CBPT -1... 2
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT 326.84 1 CR_CBPT -1... 4
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT 329.84 1 DISP_CBPT -1... 2
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT 327.84 1 MOD_CBPT -1... 3
DISPLAY COIN BOX PULSE 250.01 1 DISP_CBPULS -1... 1
ENTER COIN BOX PULSE 251.02 1 ENTR_CBPULS -1... 1
CANCEL CALL CATEGORY 559.00 1 CAN_CCAT -1... 1
CREATE CALL CATEGORY 558.71 1 CR_CCAT -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL CATEGORY 564.73 1 DISP_CCAT -1... 1
MODIFY CALL CATEGORY 560.70 1 MOD_CCAT -1... 1
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 928.60 1 CONF_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 921.10 1 DISP_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG 143.80 1 STAT_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER 1549.10 1 DISP_CCGPAR -1... 3
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER 1548.10 1 MOD_CCGPAR -1... 3
CONFIGURE CCNC 502.71 1 CONF_CCNC -1... 11
DIAGNOSE CCNC 503.72 1 DIAG_CCNC -1... 4
DISPLAY OST OF CCNC 506.71 1 STAT_CCNC -1... 1
ACTIVATE CCNC TRACER 779.06 1 ACT_CCNCTRAC -1... 5
CANCEL CCNC TRACER 783.20 1 CAN_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC TRACER 782.20 1 DISP_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CCNC TRACER 3509.00 1 DMP_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL CATEGORY STATUS 625.01 1 DISP_CCSTAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3378.02 1 ACT_CDS -1... 2
CANCEL CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3377.02 1 CAN_CDS -1... 1
CREATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 2393.02 1 CR_CDS -1... 9
DISPLAY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3379.02 1 DISP_CDS -1... 7
MODIFY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 2394.02 1 MOD_CDS -1... 15
DISPLAY CURRENT CDS CONFIGURATION 732.70 1 DISP_CDSCONF -1... 1
ENTER CURRENT CDS CONFIGURATION 727.00 1 ENTR_CDSCONF -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS STATISTICS FILE 2433.02 1 DISP_CDSFILE -1... 4
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3858.00 1 ACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3856.00 1 CAN_CDSPROG -1... 2
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3859.00 1 DACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3857.00 1 DISP_CDSPROG -1... 6
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3855.00 1 ENTR_CDSPROG -1... 4
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3851.00 1 CAN_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3850.00 1 CR_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3853.00 1 DISP_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3852.00 1 MOD_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
ACTIVATE CDS STATUS REPORT 2431.01 1 ACT_CDSSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS STATUS REPORT 2432.01 1 DISP_CDSSTAT -1... 2
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2791.06 1 CAN_CDTDAT -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2796.02 1 DISP_CDTDAT -1... 1
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2799.06 1 ENTR_CDTDAT -1... 7
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 952.00 1 RESET_CFOPT -1... 1
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 951.01 1 SET_CFOPT -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1208.00 1 DISP_CFT -1... 1
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1207.00 1 ENTR_CFT -1... 1
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB 648.01 1 DISP_CFTJOB -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS 3819.00 1 DISP_CHAREC -1... 20
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT RECORD 2420.03 1 DISP_CHF -1... 3
ACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2182.03 1 ACT_CHFCASE -1... 2
CREATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2181.01 1 CR_CHFCASE -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2183.03 1 DACT_CHFCASE -1... 2
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2184.02 1 DISP_CHFCASE -1... 2
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2419.03 1 MOD_CHFCASE -1... 3
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS 2186.02 1 DISP_CHFSTAT -1... 1
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS 2185.02 1 MOD_CHFSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGING FEATURES 3760.01 1 DISP_CHRGFEA -1... 1
MODIFY CHARGING FEATURES 3759.00 1 MOD_CHRGFEA -1... 2
ACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2814.00 1 ACT_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
CANCEL CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2802.00 1 CAN_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2803.00 1 DACT_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2804.00 1 DISP_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2805.01 1 DMP_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
ENTER CONNECTION LIST TRACER OBJECT DATA 2813.04 1 ENTR_CLSTTRAC -1... 7
SKIP COMMAND 1.00 1 SKIP_CMD -1... 1
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE 671.75 1 EXEC_CMDFILE -1... 3
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY 1102.00 1 CONF_CMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY 1113.00 1 DIAG_CMY -1... 1
TEST COMMON MEMORY 1131.01 1 TEST_CMY -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC MEMORY 2675.02 1 DISP_CNMEM -1... 4
ACTIVATE CCNCPATCH 2672.01 1 ACT_CNPATCH -1... 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-3 +
CANCEL CCNCPATCH 2673.01 1 CAN_CNPATCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CCNCPATCH 2674.01 1 DACT_CNPATCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNCPATCH 2676.01 1 DISP_CNPATCH -1... 3
ENTER CCNCPATCH 2677.02 1 ENTR_CNPATCH -1... 6
UPDATE CCNCPATCH 2678.01 1 UPD_CNPATCH -1... 1
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE 2450.44 1 CAN_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE 2451.46 1 DISP_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
ENTER COUNTRY CODE 2449.46 1 ENTR_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE 3508.01 1 DISP_CONFL -1... 2
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE 3507.01 1 MOD_CONFL -1... 1
CANCEL CONFERENCE 1932.00 1 CAN_CONFRNC -1... 1
CREATE CONFERENCE 1933.00 1 CR_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONFERENCE 1934.00 1 DISP_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS 1652.09 1 DISP_CONN -1... 4
RELEASE CONNECTION 1581.14 1 REL_CONN -1... 5
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT 1492.10 1 CONF_COU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT 1491.02 1 DIAG_COU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT 1490.84 1 STAT_COU -1... 1
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR 277.04 1 REC_CP -1... 4
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS 1066.20 1 ACT_CPDMPC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1068.02 1 DACT_CPDMPC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1067.00 1 DISP_CPDMPC -1... 1
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3605.00 1 DMP_CPIMDMP -1... 3
DUMP CP MEMORY 1069.20 1 DMP_CPMEM -1... 2
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3593.00 1 ACT_CPPRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH 3596.00 1 CAN_CPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3594.00 1 DACT_CPPRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH 3597.01 1 DISP_CPPRPCH -1... 2
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH 3592.00 1 ENTR_CPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3595.00 1 UPD_CPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CODE POINT 21.49 1 CAN_CPT -1... 3
CREATE CODE POINT 19.49 1 CR_CPT -1... 10
DISPLAY CODE POINT 197.46 1 DISP_CPT -1... 3
MERGE CODE POINT 387.49 1 MERGE_CPT -1... 4
MODIFY CODE POINT 314.49 1 MOD_CPT -1... 9
SPLIT CODE POINT 385.49 1 SPLIT_CPT -1... 4
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3599.00 1 ACT_CPTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3601.00 1 CAN_CPTRPCH -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3600.00 1 DACT_CPTRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3602.01 1 DISP_CPTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3598.00 1 ENTR_CPTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1805.01 1 ENTR_CQDAT -1... 4
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1807.03 1 MOD_CQDAT -1... 9
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1800.01 1 CAN_CQGRP -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1802.02 1 CR_CQGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1804.01 1 DISP_CQGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1808.02 1 MOD_CQGRP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER 383.71 1 CONF_CR -1... 2
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER 996.10 1 DIAG_CR -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER 384.82 1 STAT_CR -1... 3
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE 186.71 1 CAN_CRMOD -1... 1
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE 166.77 1 CR_CRMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE 176.73 1 DISP_CRMOD -1... 1
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1087.01 1 CAN_CSC -1... 1
CONFIGURE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1086.01 1 CONF_CSC -1... 1
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1104.02 1 CR_CSC -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 3031.00 1 DISP_CSC -1... 1
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 3033.00 1 MOD_CSC -1... 1
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1495.00 1 CAN_CSCGRP -1... 1
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1493.00 1 CR_CSCGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1496.00 1 DISP_CSCGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1494.00 1 MOD_CSCGRP -1... 1
ACTIVATE CSC-TRACER 1073.06 1 ACT_CSCTRAC -1... 3
DEACTIVATE CSC-TRACER 1074.02 1 DACT_CSCTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CSC-TRACE COMMAND 1076.01 1 DISP_CSCTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA 1075.01 1 DMP_CSCTRAC -1... 1
ACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY 2872.11 1 ACT_CSF -1... 9
DEACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY 2871.09 1 DACT_CSF -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL STATUS FACILITY 2873.09 1 DISP_CSF -1... 1
DUMP CALL STATUS FACILITY 2874.09 1 DMP_CSF -1... 1
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT 2427.02 1 CAN_CSGINC -1... 2
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT 2426.02 1 CR_CSGINC -1... 12
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT 2428.02 1 DISP_CSGINC -1... 2
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3393.02 1 CAN_CSGRP -1... 1
CONT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3392.03 1 CR_CSGRP -1... 11
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3395.03 1 DISP_CSGRP -1... 3
MODIFY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3394.03 1 MOD_CSGRP -1... 10
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3402.03 1 CAN_CSSUB -1... 17
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3401.03 1 DISP_CSSUB -1... 11
ENTER COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3400.03 1 ENTR_CSSUB -1... 45
START CSWD PROCESSES 280.10 1 START_CSWD -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL CONTROL TIME 1032.00 1 DISP_CTRLTIME -1... 1
ENTER CALL CONTROL TIME 1031.00 1 ENTR_CTRLTIME -1... 1
CANCEL CALL TYPE 562.00 1 CAN_CTYP -1... 1
CREATE CALL TYPE 561.70 1 CR_CTYP -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL TYPE 565.74 1 DISP_CTYP -1... 1
MODIFY CALL TYPE 563.70 1 MOD_CTYP -1... 3
TEST CIRCUIT TYPE 67.83 1 TEST_CTYPE -1... 6
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP 2764.03 1 CAN_CUG -1... 2
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA 2766.02 1 DISP_CUG -1... 2
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP 2768.05 1 ENTR_CUG -1... 2
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION 2770.02 1 MOD_CUGAUTH -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2898.62 1 CAN_CXCATFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2899.61 1 DISP_CXCATFEA -1... 1
ENTER CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2901.62 1 ENTR_CXCATFEA -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX CODE POINT 1338.63 1 CAN_CXCPT -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX CODE POINT 1336.68 1 CR_CXCPT -1... 14
DISPLAY CENTREX CODE POINT 1339.65 1 DISP_CXCPT -1... 4
MODIFY CENTREX CODE POINT 1337.68 1 MOD_CXCPT -1... 11
CANCEL CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1328.62 1 CAN_CXDN -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1327.64 1 CR_CXDN -1... 3
DISPLAY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1329.63 1 DISP_CXDN -1... 2
MODIFY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1747.63 1 MOD_CXDN -1... 3
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP 1318.63 1 CAN_CXGRP -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX GROUP 1317.65 1 CR_CXGRP -1... 5
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP DATA 1324.62 1 DISP_CXGRP -1... 3
MODIFY CENTREX GROUP 1319.65 1 MOD_CXGRP -1... 8
RECORD CENTREX GROUP 2953.03 1 REC_CXGRP -1... 12
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP LTG RELATIONSHIP 2900.60 1 DISP_CXGRPLTG -1... 1
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3821.00 1 CAN_CXGRPRES -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3822.00 1 DISP_CXGRPRES -1... 3
ENTER CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3820.00 1 ENTR_CXGRPRES -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX INTERCEPT 1341.64 1 CAN_CXINC -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX INTERCEPT 1340.64 1 CR_CXINC -1... 9
DISPLAY CENTREX INTERCEPT 1342.64 1 DISP_CXINC -1... 1
CANCEL CENTREX MDR DATA 3336.01 1 CAN_CXMDR -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTREX MDR DATA 1720.60 1 DISP_CXMDR -1... 1
ENTER CENTREX MDR DATA 3335.01 1 ENTR_CXMDR -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2941.64 1 CAN_CXPBX -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2943.63 1 DISP_CXPBX -1... 2
ENTER CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2945.66 1 ENTR_CXPBX -1... 5
CANCEL CENTREX PBX LINE 2942.64 1 CAN_CXPBXLN -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX PBX LINE 2944.62 1 DISP_CXPBXLN -1... 3
ENTER CENTREX PBX LINE 2946.64 1 ENTR_CXPBXLN -1... 7
DISPLAY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2326.02 1 DISP_CXSCFEA -1... 3
MODIFY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2325.02 1 MOD_CXSCFEA -1... 12
CANCEL CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1333.64 1 CAN_CXSUB -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1331.63 1 DISP_CXSUB -1... 2
ENTER CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1330.65 1 ENTR_CXSUB -1... 7
CANCEL CENTREX ZONE POINT 3785.02 1 CAN_CXZOPT -1... 2
CREATE CENTREX ZONE POINT 3784.02 1 CR_CXZOPT -1... 3
DISPLAY CENTREX ZONE POINT 3786.02 1 DISP_CXZOPT -1... 2
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT 3787.02 1 MOD_CXZOPT -1... 4
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE 410.03 1 REL_CYCFILE -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 DISCARDED MSUS 2951.00 1 DISP_C7DCDMSU -1... 1
REC CCS7 DISCARDED MESSAGE SIGNAL UNITS 1405.09 1 REC_C7DCDMSU -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 DISC. MSU 3443.00 1 DISP_C7DMDAT -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 DISCARDED MSU DATA 3444.00 1 MOD_C7DMDAT -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 485.08 1 CAN_C7DP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 1686.04 1 CONF_C7DP -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 481.06 1 CR_C7DP -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 492.12 1 DISP_C7DP -1... 2
MODIFY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 1712.04 1 MOD_C7DP -1... 3
RECORD CCS7 GRADE OF SERVICE 1398.09 1 REC_C7GOS -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 LINK 486.12 1 CAN_C7LINK -1... 1
CONFIGURE CCS7 LINK 490.03 1 CONF_C7LINK -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 LINK 482.75 1 CR_C7LINK -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK 493.12 1 DISP_C7LINK -1... 6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-5 +
MODIFY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK 1896.00 1 MOD_C7LINK -1... 1
RECORD CCS7 LINK LOAD 1401.09 1 REC_C7LLOAD -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 LINK SET 487.00 1 CAN_C7LSET -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 LINK SET 483.06 1 CR_C7LSET -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 LINK SET 495.12 1 DISP_C7LSET -1... 4
MODIFY CCS7 LINK SET 2948.02 1 MOD_C7LSET -1... 2
RECORD CCS7 LINK SET 3096.09 1 REC_C7LSET -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR.OF DPC 1711.02 1 CAN_C7LSETDP -1... 1
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LINK SET ALL DPCS 1715.01 1 DISP_C7LSETDP -1... 1
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR. OF DPC 1709.02 1 ENTR_C7LSETDP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCS7 LEVEL1 COMPONENTS 2718.03 1 STAT_C7L1 -1... 1
REC CCS7 MESSAGE SIGNAL UNIT 2923.09 1 REC_C7MSU -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 NOTIFICATION 2737.00 1 DISP_C7NOTI -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2715.00 1 CAN_C7OP -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2716.04 1 CR_C7OP -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2721.03 1 DISP_C7OP -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2717.02 1 MOD_C7OP -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTE SET 496.10 1 DISP_C7RSET -1... 1
RECORD CCS7 ROUTE SET TRAFFIC DATA 1399.09 1 REC_C7RSET -1... 4
DISPLAY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME 3407.00 1 DISP_C7SMTIME -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME 3408.00 1 MOD_C7SMTIME -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1758.00 1 CAN_C7TGREL -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1759.52 1 DISP_C7TGREL -1... 2
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1757.52 1 ENTR_C7TGREL -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREM. 2165.00 1 CAN_C7TRST -1... 1
DISP CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT 1402.01 1 DISP_C7TRST -1... 1
ENTER CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT 2164.00 1 ENTR_C7TRST -1... 3
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS (ISUP) 3492.00 1 TEST_C7TRSTAT -1... 4
TEST CCS7 TRUNK 854.51 1 TEST_C7TRUNK -1... 3
TEST CCS7 TRUNK VALIDATION 3628.01 1 TEST_C7TRVAL -1... 3
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1684.51 1 CAN_C7USER -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1685.00 1 CR_C7USER -1... 4
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1695.51 1 DISP_C7USER -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 2669.01 1 MOD_C7USER -1... 1
START DATA BASE 3568.00 1 START_DB -1... 1
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION 1251.03 1 DISP_DBSIZE -1... 1
MODIFY DB-SIZE 1079.03 1 MOD_DBSIZE -1... 1
DISPLAY DCH BOOKING 2408.01 1 DISP_DCHBOOK -1... 2
DISPLAY DCH DELAY REPORT 2409.01 1 DISP_DCHDELAY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER 998.02 1 DIAG_DCR -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR 997.02 1 DIAG_DES -1... 1
ACTIVATE DESTINATION 1799.01 1 ACT_DEST -1... 1
CANCEL DESTINATION 5.02 1 CAN_DEST -1... 1
CREATE DESTINATION 25.84 1 CR_DEST -1... 6
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION 1803.01 1 DACT_DEST -1... 1
DISPLAY DESTINATION 193.06 1 DISP_DEST -1... 2
MODIFY DESTINATION 412.85 1 MOD_DEST -1... 7
RECORD DESTINATION 261.07 1 REC_DEST -1... 5
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2957.01 1 CAN_DESTCNTL -1... 2
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2958.01 1 ENTR_DESTCNTL -1... 2
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA 1801.01 1 CAN_DESTDAT -1... 1
ENTER DESTINATION DATA 1806.06 1 ENTR_DESTDAT -1... 3
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA 1809.05 1 MOD_DESTDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 900.01 1 DISP_DEVAUT -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 899.02 1 MOD_DEVAUT -1... 1
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS 1118.00 1 DISP_DIAGSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS CP 2162.49 1 DISP_DIGITCP -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITS GP 915.01 1 CAN_DIGITGP -1... 1
CREATE DIGITS GP 992.46 1 CR_DIGITGP -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS GP 913.46 1 DISP_DIGITGP -1... 1
MODIFY DIGITS GP 1926.49 1 MOD_DIGITGP -1... 3
STOP DISPLAY 379.70 1 STOP_DISP -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 393.80 1 CONF_DIU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 995.03 1 DIAG_DIU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 356.84 1 STAT_DIU -1... 1
DISPLAY DATA LINK CONNECTION IDENTIFIER 2936.03 1 DISP_DLCI -1... 4
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT 655.03 1 CAN_DLU -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 667.05 1 CONF_DLU -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 652.75 1 CR_DLU -1... 3
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1020.02 1 DIAG_DLU -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT 649.01 1 DISP_DLU -1... 1
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT 657.05 1 EXT_DLU -1... 3
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1056.02 1 REC_DLU -1... 4
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 656.03 1 RED_DLU -1... 2
CONT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS 663.03 1 STAT_DLU -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT 670.04 1 CONF_DLUEQ -1... 2
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENTS 1022.03 1 DIAG_DLUEQ -1... 1
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT 665.08 1 STAT_DLUEQ -1... 2
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT 676.71 1 TEST_DLULC -1... 2
DUMP DLU MEMORY 1835.02 1 DMP_DLUMEM -1... 2
CANCEL DLU MODULE 654.05 1 CAN_DLUMOD -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE 668.03 1 CONF_DLUMOD -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 653.97 1 CR_DLUMOD -1... 4
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES 1021.02 1 DIAG_DLUMOD -1... 1
DISPLAY DLU MODULE 651.03 1 DISP_DLUMOD -1... 1
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 1041.05 1 MOD_DLUMOD -1... 2
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES 664.06 1 STAT_DLUMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA 849.03 1 DISP_DLUPD -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS 669.07 1 CONF_DLUPORT -1... 2
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT 661.07 1 DISP_DLUPORT -1... 2
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT 650.97 1 SEL_DLUPORT -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS 666.06 1 STAT_DLUPORT -1... 2
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1942.00 1 ACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1944.00 1 DACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1946.00 1 DISP_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER 990.83 1 CAN_DN -1... 1
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER 988.85 1 CR_DN -1... 2
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 192.82 1 DISP_DN -1... 3
EXTEND DIRECTORY NUMBER 2276.02 1 EXT_DN -1... 1
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER 989.85 1 MOD_DN -1... 3
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS 2924.03 1 REC_DN -1... 10
REDUCE DIRECTORY NUMBER 2277.03 1 RED_DN -1... 1
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1050.46 1 DISP_DNATT -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1049.49 1 ENTR_DNATT -1... 2
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2960.03 1 CAN_DNOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2961.02 1 DISP_DNOBS -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2962.03 1 ENTR_DNOBS -1... 4
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS 454.49 1 DISP_DNP -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3404.02 1 CAN_DSB -1... 1
CREATE DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3403.03 1 CR_DSB -1... 4
DISPLAY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3361.03 1 DISP_DSB -1... 5
MODIFY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3405.03 1 MOD_DSB -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3362.02 1 STAT_DSB -1... 3
CANCEL DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE 567.02 1 CAN_DTI -1... 1
CONFIGURE DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE 568.00 1 CONF_DTI -1... 2
CREATE DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE 566.02 1 CR_DTI -1... 1
DISPLAY DTI 570.10 1 DISP_DTI -1... 1
DISPLAY OST OF DTI 569.10 1 STAT_DTI -1... 2
TEST DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE 662.10 1 TEST_DTI -1... 1
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP 1791.01 1 CAN_DVGRP -1... 1
CREATE DEVICEGROUP 1793.01 1 CR_DVGRP -1... 2
SELECT DEVICE GROUP 1798.01 1 SEL_DVGRP -1... 1
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK 1794.00 1 DISP_DVGRPLNK -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK 1796.02 1 MOD_DVGRPLNK -1... 2
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1016.02 1 CAN_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1015.03 1 CR_EAL -1... 1
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1017.01 1 DISP_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EAL LEVEL 1019.02 1 CR_EALLVL -1... 1
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL 1018.01 1 DISP_EALLVL -1... 1
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8 270.00 1 EXEC_EDTS8 -1... 4
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2338.00 1 CAN_ELMSG -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2334.01 1 CR_ELMSG -1... 6
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2339.01 1 DISP_ELMSG -1... 2
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2335.01 1 MOD_ELMSG -1... 6
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2341.00 1 CAN_ELMSGERR -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2336.00 1 CR_ELMSGERR -1... 1
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2342.00 1 DISP_ELMSGERR -1... 1
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2340.00 1 MOD_ELMSGERR -1... 1
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION 647.01 1 RESET_EMERGOP -1... 1
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER 1860.15 1 MOD_EQN -1... 3
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP 345.75 1 ACT_EQTRAP -1... 13
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP 348.15 1 CAN_EQTRAP -1... 4
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA 290.06 1 REC_EXCH -1... 4
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP 940.01 1 STAT_EXCH -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION 309.03 1 ENTR_EXCHID -1... 2
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1030.01 1 DISP_EXDDAT -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1029.04 1 ENTR_EXDDAT -1... 2
CANCEL FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2792.07 1 CAN_FAICHA -1... 3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-7 +
CREATE FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2794.07 1 CR_FAICHA -1... 4
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2797.07 1 DISP_FAICHA -1... 3
MODIFY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2800.07 1 MOD_FAICHA -1... 5
CANCEL FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2793.07 1 CAN_FAUCHA -1... 2
CREATE FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2795.07 1 CR_FAUCHA -1... 2
DISPLAY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2798.01 1 DISP_FAUCHA -1... 1
MODIFY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2801.07 1 MOD_FAUCHA -1... 2
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING 279.10 1 START_FCP -1... 1
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS 1231.03 1 DISP_FCS -1... 2
CANCEL FILE GROUP 1879.02 1 CAN_FGRP -1... 1
CREATE FILE GROUP 1880.03 1 CR_FGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS 1876.02 1 DISP_FGRP -1... 1
MODIFY FILE GROUP 2328.00 1 MOD_FGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1507.02 1 DISP_FGRPATT -1... 1
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1878.01 1 RSET_FGRPATT -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1506.06 1 SET_FGRPATT -1... 3
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD 3410.00 1 CAN_FGRPPW -1... 1
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1886.01 1 RSET_FGRPPW -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1887.02 1 SET_FGRPPW -1... 2
CONFIGURE FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2917.01 1 CONF_FHM -1... 1
DIAGNOSE FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2918.02 1 DIAG_FHM -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2939.12 1 STAT_FHM -1... 1
CATALOG FILE 245.03 1 CAT_FILE -1... 2
CREATE FILE 237.06 1 CR_FILE -1... 1
DELETE FILE 235.04 1 DEL_FILE -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE 959.07 1 DISP_FILE -1... 2
TRANSFER FILE 939.08 1 TRANS_FILE -1... 9
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION 966.02 1 MOD_FILEAUT -1... 1
ACTIVATE FILE FEATURES 2382.00 1 ACT_FILEFEAT -1... 1
CANCEL FILE FEATURES 2381.00 1 CAN_FILEFEAT -1... 1
DEACTIVATE FILE FEATURES 2383.00 1 DACT_FILEFEAT -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE FEATURES 2384.00 1 DISP_FILEFEAT -1... 1
ENTER FILE FEATURES 2380.10 1 ENTR_FILEFEAT -1... 2
ENTER FILE PASSWORD 1891.00 1 ENTR_FILEPSW -1... 1
DISPLAY FILETEXT 2837.00 1 DISP_FILETEXT -1... 1
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS 3246.00 1 CAN_FILETRF -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS 2870.01 1 DISP_FILETRF -1... 1
STOP FILE TRANSFERS 3245.00 1 STOP_FILETRF -1... 1
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 958.02 1 ACT_FNS -1... 1
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT 968.02 1 CAN_FNS -1... 1
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 1508.00 1 DACT_FNS -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT 956.01 1 DISP_FNS -1... 1
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT 967.02 1 ENTR_FNS -1... 1
CANCEL FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2934.03 1 CAN_FRAMEHD -1... 1
CREATE FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2935.03 1 CR_FRAMEHD -1... 5
DISPLAY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2937.03 1 DISP_FRAMEHD -1... 1
MODIFY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2938.03 1 MOD_FRAMEHD -1... 2
REC FRAMEHANDLER 3078.00 1 REC_FRAMEHD -1... 4
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1510.01 1 CAN_FUOMT -1... 1
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1509.01 1 CR_FUOMT -1... 1
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS 1511.01 1 SEL_FUOMT -1... 1
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1512.00 1 DISP_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1513.01 1 MOD_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
ACTIVATE GENERATION 1204.02 1 ACT_GEN -1... 1
CANCEL GENERATION 1299.01 1 CAN_GEN -1... 1
COPY GENERATION 1302.05 1 COPY_GEN -1... 6
DISPLAY GENERATION 1298.02 1 DISP_GEN -1... 1
ENTER GENERATION 1081.02 1 ENTR_GEN -1... 2
MERGE GENERATION 2698.00 1 MERGE_GEN -1... 2
MODIFY GENERATION 2699.01 1 MOD_GEN -1... 2
UPDATE GENERATION 1202.00 1 UPD_GEN -1... 1
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE 692.03 1 REC_GOS -1... 4
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR 276.74 1 REC_GP -1... 4
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2834.30 1 CAN_GTCGPACD -1... 1
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2835.30 1 DISP_GTCGPACD -1... 1
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2836.50 1 ENTR_GTCGPACD -1... 3
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2617.30 1 CAN_GTCPT -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1970.50 1 CR_GTCPT -1... 3
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2641.50 1 DISP_GTCPT -1... 1
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3122.91 1 MERGE_GTCPT -1... 30
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1998.50 1 MOD_GTCPT -1... 3
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3123.50 1 SPLIT_GTCPT -1... 2
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2618.30 1 CAN_GTDEST -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1971.91 1 CR_GTDEST -1... 17
CONT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2642.50 1 DISP_GTDEST -1... 1
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1999.91 1 MOD_GTDEST -1... 18
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2619.50 1 CAN_GTDIGTR -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 1972.50 1 CR_GTDIGTR -1... 2
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2643.50 1 DISP_GTDIGTR -1... 2
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2660.50 1 MOD_GTDIGTR -1... 2
CANCEL HOLIDAY 55.02 1 CAN_HOLIDAY -1... 2
DISPLAY HOLIDAY 53.00 1 DISP_HOLIDAY -1... 1
ENTER HOLIDAY 54.06 1 ENTR_HOLIDAY -1... 2
ACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3688.00 1 ACT_HTRCDEST -1... 1
DACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3689.00 1 DACT_HTRCDEST -1... 1
DISP HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3691.01 1 DISP_HTRCDEST -1... 1
MOD HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3690.00 1 MOD_HTRCDEST -1... 2
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT 2386.03 1 CAN_IACOBJ -1... 7
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT 2385.03 1 CR_IACOBJ -1... 7
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT 2387.03 1 DISP_IACOBJ -1... 8
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2397.02 1 ACT_IACRG -1... 4
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2398.02 1 DACT_IACRG -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2399.02 1 DISP_IACRG -1... 1
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2389.02 1 CAN_IACRGPT -1... 2
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2388.02 1 CR_IACRGPT -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2391.02 1 DISP_IACRGPT -1... 4
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2390.02 1 MOD_IACRGPT -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2441.02 1 DISP_IACSCHED -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2440.02 1 MOD_IACSCHED -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS 2364.02 1 DISP_IACSET -1... 1
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS 2363.02 1 ENTR_IACSET -1... 1
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2453.02 1 DISP_IACTRADI -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2438.02 1 MOD_IACTRADI -1... 5
CANCEL INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2479.08 1 CAN_IADLST -1... 1
DISPLAY INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2480.08 1 DISP_IADLST -1... 1
ENTER INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2478.08 1 ENTR_IADLST -1... 1
ACTIVATE CALL DATA RECORDING FEATURE 835.85 1 ACT_IAFEAT -1... 5
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. FEATURE 836.80 1 CAN_IAFEAT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. FEATURES 833.01 1 DISP_IAFEAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 831.01 1 ACT_IAOPT -1... 1
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 832.01 1 CAN_IAOPT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 834.01 1 DISP_IAOPT -1... 1
RECORD ISDN BASIC ACCESS D-CHANNEL LOAD 2925.01 1 REC_IBADCH -1... 9
SWITCH OFF IDENTIFICATION TONE 2368.00 1 SWOFF_IDTONE -1... 1
SWITCH ON IDENTIFICATION TONE 46.03 1 SWON_IDTONE -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS 1591.01 1 STAT_ILAYER1 -1... 2
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION 3804.00 1 CAN_INAUTH -1... 1
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION 3803.00 1 CR_INAUTH -1... 2
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION 3806.00 1 DISP_INAUTH -1... 2
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION 3805.00 1 MOD_INAUTH -1... 2
CANCEL INTERCEPT 82.07 1 CAN_INC -1... 4
CREATE INTERCEPT 81.07 1 CR_INC -1... 47
DISPLAY INTERCEPT 194.07 1 DISP_INC -1... 11
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS 1487.03 1 DISP_INDIC -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3244.04 1 DISP_INEXDATA -1... 1
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3243.04 1 ENTR_INEXDATA -1... 1
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3169.06 1 CAN_INOVLCO -1... 2
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3167.06 1 DISP_INOVLCO -1... 2
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3168.06 1 ENTR_INOVLCO -1... 3
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2413.02 1 CAN_INSCM -1... 1
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2411.02 1 CR_INSCM -1... 22
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2414.02 1 DISP_INSCM -1... 1
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2412.02 1 MOD_INSCM -1... 22
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 3673.01 1 ACT_INSCMREF -1... 6
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2417.02 1 CAN_INSCMREF -1... 5
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2415.02 1 CR_INSCMREF -1... 6
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF. 3674.01 1 DACT_INSCMREF -1... 6
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2418.02 1 DISP_INSCMREF -1... 6
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2416.02 1 MOD_INSCMREF -1... 6
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2818.06 1 ACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2820.06 1 CAN_INSLDAT -1... 1
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2831.06 1 DACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2825.06 1 DISP_INSLDAT -1... 2
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2816.06 1 ENTR_INSLDAT -1... 8
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY 296.10 1 END_INSTALL -1... 1
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC 3170.04 1 REC_INSTAT -1... 3
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION 1214.02 1 ENTR_INSTGEN -1... 2
TEST INTERNATIONAL TRUNK 1831.10 1 TEST_INTLTRK -1... 10
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-9 +
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2819.05 1 ACT_INTRIG -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2821.05 1 CAN_INTRIG -1... 1
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2823.06 1 CR_INTRIG -1... 18
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2824.05 1 DACT_INTRIG -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2826.05 1 DISP_INTRIG -1... 2
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2828.06 1 MOD_INTRIG -1... 19
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM 1133.00 1 TEST_IO -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3154.00 1 CAN_IOC -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1100.00 1 CONF_IOC -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3158.00 1 CR_IOC -1... 1
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1111.00 1 DIAG_IOC -1... 2
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1119.00 1 DISP_IOC -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1132.01 1 TEST_IOC -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1092.06 1 CAN_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1091.06 1 CONF_IOP -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1105.10 1 CR_IOP -1... 5
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1114.06 1 DIAG_IOP -1... 3
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1120.06 1 DISP_IOP -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1134.07 1 TEST_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP 1411.01 1 CONF_IOPG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP 1410.01 1 DIAG_IOPG -1... 1
TEST IOP GROUP 1409.01 1 TEST_IOPG -1... 1
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3604.00 1 DMP_IOPIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3582.00 1 ACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3585.00 1 CAN_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3583.00 1 DACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3586.01 1 DISP_IOPPRPCH -1... 2
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3581.00 1 ENTR_IOPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3584.00 1 UPD_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3588.00 1 ACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3590.00 1 CAN_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3589.00 1 DACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3591.01 1 DISP_IOPTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3587.00 1 ENTR_IOPTRPCH -1... 2
ACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1006.03 1 ACT_IPNUC -1... 1
CANCEL PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1005.03 1 CAN_IPNUC -1... 1
CREATE PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1008.05 1 CR_IPNUC -1... 10
DEACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1871.02 1 DACT_IPNUC -1... 1
DISP PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1007.07 1 DISP_IPNUC -1... 4
MOD ISDN P DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1004.02 1 MOD_IPNUC -1... 2
TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BASIC ACCESS 1233.09 1 TEST_ISUB -1... 4
CANCEL JOB 115.00 1 CAN_JOB -1... 1
CONTINUE JOB 116.01 1 CONT_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOB 34.02 1 DISP_JOB -1... 1
STOP JOB 113.00 1 STOP_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA 1904.00 1 DISP_JOSITDAT -1... 1
CANCEL KEYWORD 818.11 1 CAN_KEYWORD -1... 3
DISPLAY KEYWORD 819.12 1 DISP_KEYWORD -1... 2
ENTER KEYWORD 817.13 1 ENTR_KEYWORD -1... 3
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1858.00 1 CONF_LAU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1859.00 1 DIAG_LAU -1... 2
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1862.00 1 TEST_LAU -1... 1
MODIFY LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT 599.00 1 MOD_LCVAR -1... 2
TEST LINE CIRCUIT 62.70 1 TEST_LIC -1... 4
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN 2983.05 1 STAT_LINE -1... 4
TEST LINE 1396.11 1 TEST_LINE -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE DATA 3712.12 1 DISP_LINEDATA -1... 1
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS 1888.00 1 DISP_LINETHR -1... 1
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS 2547.00 1 ENTR_LINETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT 843.01 1 DISP_LISTTOAN -1... 1
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2557.09 1 CAN_LMBLK -1... 8
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2558.09 1 ENTR_LMBLK -1... 8
DISPLAY LINE LOCKOUT 359.09 1 DISP_LNLCKOUT -1... 3
CANCEL LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3865.00 1 CAN_LNPDAT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3866.00 1 DISP_LNPDAT -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3867.00 1 ENTR_LNPDAT -1... 1
MODIFY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3868.00 1 MOD_LNPDAT -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3893.49 1 CAN_LNPTCPT -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3891.49 1 CR_LNPTCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3894.49 1 DISP_LNPTCPT -1... 1
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3892.49 1 MOD_LNPTCPT -1... 1
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3887.49 1 ACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3889.49 1 CAN_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3885.49 1 CR_LNPTPROF -1... 2
CONT-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3888.49 1 DACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3890.49 1 DISP_LNPTPROF -1... 2
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3886.49 1 MOD_LNPTPROF -1... 3
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3882.49 1 ACT_LNPTTYP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3883.49 1 DACT_LNPTTYP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3884.49 1 DISP_LNPTTYP -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1034.00 1 DISP_LOCDIAL -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1033.00 1 ENTR_LOCDIAL -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCATION DIGITS 419.01 1 DISP_LOCDIG -1... 1
ENTER LOCATION DIGITS 418.01 1 ENTR_LOCDIG -1... 1
CANCEL LOCKING RESTRICTION 3080.00 1 CAN_LOCKRST -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCKING RESTRICTION 3082.00 1 DISP_LOCKRST -1... 1
ENTER LOCKING RESTRICTION 3085.00 1 ENTR_LOCKRST -1... 1
RESET LOG FUNCTION 1920.00 1 RSET_LOG -1... 1
SET LOG FUNCTION 366.03 1 SET_LOG -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF LOG 368.00 1 STAT_LOG -1... 1
DISPLAY LOG ATTRIBUTES 741.00 1 DISP_LOGATT -1... 1
CANCEL LOGGING EVENTS 3081.01 1 CAN_LOGEVENT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING EVENT 3083.00 1 DISP_LOGEVENT -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING EVENTS 3086.01 1 ENTR_LOGEVENT -1... 1
MODIFY LOG FILE 1919.01 1 MOD_LOGFILE -1... 3
CANCEL LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3088.00 1 CAN_LOGOBJ -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3089.00 1 DISP_LOGOBJ -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3090.00 1 ENTR_LOGOBJ -1... 2
LOOPBACK TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BA 1228.06 1 TEST_LOOPBA -1... 3
SEND LOOPBACK 1786.10 1 SEND_LOOPBACK -1... 3
START LINE TEST 1395.11 1 START_LTEST -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS 2851.02 1 DISP_LTESTTHR -1... 1
MODIFY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS 2854.00 1 MOD_LTESTTHR -1... 10
CANCEL LTG 181.70 1 CAN_LTG -1... 1
CONFIGURE LINE TRUNK GROUP 929.66 1 CONF_LTG -1... 2
CREATE LINE TRUNK GROUP 163.85 1 CR_LTG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE LTG 980.02 1 DIAG_LTG -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG 175.70 1 DISP_LTG -1... 1
MODIFY LINE TRUNK GROUP 182.83 1 MOD_LTG -1... 1
RECORD LINE TRUNK GROUP 275.75 1 REC_LTG -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF LTG 917.21 1 STAT_LTG -1... 1
ACTIVATE LTG BREAKPOINT 786.03 1 ACT_LTGBPT -1... 1
CANCEL LTG BREAKPOINT 788.01 1 CAN_LTGBPT -1... 1
DELETE LTG BREAKPOINT 789.03 1 DEL_LTGBPT -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG BREAKPOINT 787.03 1 DISP_LTGBPT -1... 1
DUMP LTG BREAKPOINT 3510.00 1 DMP_LTGBPT -1... 1
ENTER LTG BREAKPOINT 785.05 1 ENTR_LTGBPT -1... 4
ALLOW LTG FAULT REPORT 922.10 1 ALLOW_LTGFRPT -1... 1
DUMP LTG MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3603.00 1 DMP_LTGIMDMP -1... 3
TEST CIRCUIT IN LTG POSITION 64.71 1 TEST_LTGPOS -1... 4
ACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3571.00 1 ACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3574.00 1 CAN_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3572.00 1 DACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3575.01 1 DISP_LTGPRPCH -1... 2
ENTER LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3570.00 1 ENTR_LTGPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3573.00 1 UPD_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG RESOURCES 2947.01 1 DISP_LTGRES -1... 1
ACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3577.00 1 ACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3579.00 1 CAN_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3578.00 1 DACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3580.01 1 DISP_LTGTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3576.00 1 ENTR_LTGTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL LINE TRUNK UNIT 184.74 1 CAN_LTU -1... 1
CREATE LINE TRUNK UNIT 164.93 1 CR_LTU -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE TRUNK UNIT 199.70 1 DISP_LTU -1... 1
EXTEND LINE TRUNK UNIT 195.79 1 EXT_LTU -1... 2
REDUCE LINE TRUNK UNIT 196.79 1 RED_LTU -1... 2
STOP MALICIOUS CALL ID 268.05 1 STOP_MACID -1... 1
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS 675.01 1 DISP_MAL -1... 4
SELECT DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL DATA 2763.00 1 SEL_MAL -1... 1
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 672.02 1 CAN_MALAD -1... 1
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 658.00 1 DISP_MALAD -1... 1
ENTER MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 674.01 1 ENTR_MALAD -1... 1
DISPLAY HELD MALCIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS 826.02 1 DISP_MALCON -1... 7
ACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2463.00 1 ACT_MASSC -1... 1
CANCEL MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2462.00 1 CAN_MASSC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2465.00 1 DACT_MASSC -1... 1
DISPLAY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2466.01 1 DISP_MASSC -1... 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-11 +
ENTER MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2461.02 1 ENTR_MASSC -1... 2
MODIFY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2464.02 1 MOD_MASSC -1... 3
CONFIGURE MB 923.60 1 CONF_MB -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER 977.00 1 DIAG_MB -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF MESSAGE BUFFER 919.10 1 STAT_MB -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT LTG 924.60 1 CONF_MBUL -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MB UNIT FOR LINE TRUNK GROUP 978.00 1 DIAG_MBUL -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT SPACE GROUP CONTROL 925.60 1 CONF_MBUS -1... 2
DIAGNOSE UNIT SWITCH GROUP CONTROL 979.00 1 DIAG_MBUS -1... 1
CONFIGURE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3807.00 1 CONF_MCT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3809.00 1 DIAG_MCT -1... 1
DISP. STATUS MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3808.00 1 STAT_MCT -1... 1
DISPLAY MAGNETIC DISK 961.01 1 DISP_MD -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC DISK 962.01 1 INIT_MD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1093.01 1 CONF_MDD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1115.00 1 DIAG_MDD -1... 3
TEST MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1137.01 1 TEST_MDD -1... 1
CONTINUE MDD-ACTIVATION 1203.00 1 CONT_MDDACT -1... 1
STOP ACTIVATION OF DISC 1215.00 1 STOP_MDDACT -1... 1
ACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2984.00 1 ACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2985.00 1 DACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
DISPLAY MDD AUDIT ATTRIBUTES 2988.00 1 DISP_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
MODIFY DATA FOR ROUTINE MDD AUDIT 2992.00 1 MOD_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
CANCEL MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3682.00 1 CAN_MDTOG -1... 1
CONFIGURE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3612.01 1 CONF_MDTOG -1... 1
CREATE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3681.00 1 CR_MDTOG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3614.01 1 DIAG_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3683.00 1 DISP_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3613.01 1 STAT_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGE METERS 112.78 1 DISP_MET -1... 4
EDIT CHARGE METER 517.77 1 EDIT_MET -1... 9
REGENERATE CHARGE METER 518.03 1 REG_MET -1... 1
SAVE CHARGE METER 68.76 1 SAVE_MET -1... 2
DISPLAY METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 360.02 1 DISP_METADM -1... 1
ENTER METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 1010.08 1 ENTR_METADM -1... 4
DISPLAY METER SAVE TIMES 69.01 1 DISP_METSAV -1... 1
ENTER METER SAVE TIMES 601.01 1 ENTR_METSAV -1... 1
MEASURE MFC-SIGNAL 1789.10 1 MEAS_MFC -1... 5
SEND MULTI FREQUENCY CODE SIGNAL 1787.10 1 SEND_MFC -1... 4
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2331.00 1 DISP_MO -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2332.00 1 INIT_MO -1... 2
MOUNT MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2330.00 1 MOUNT_MO -1... 2
RESET MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2333.00 1 RSET_MO -1... 1
ACTIVATE METER OBSERVATION 71.74 1 ACT_MOBS -1... 2
CANCEL METER OBSERVATION 72.73 1 CAN_MOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION 110.74 1 DISP_MOBS -1... 1
SELECT METER OBSERVATION 858.73 1 SEL_MOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION DATA 993.06 1 DISP_MOBSDAT -1... 4
CANCEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2356.00 1 CAN_MOD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2357.00 1 CONF_MOD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2358.00 1 CR_MOD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2359.00 1 DIAG_MOD -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2360.00 1 DISP_MOD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2361.00 1 TEST_MOD -1... 1
SELECT MESSAGE 1533.02 1 SEL_MSG -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE LENGTH 1911.01 1 DISP_MSGLEN -1... 1
MODIFY MESSAGE LENGTH 1912.02 1 MOD_MSGLEN -1... 2
DISPLAY MESSAGE LINK 1527.01 1 DISP_MSGLNK -1... 2
RESET MESSAGE LINK 1526.02 1 RSET_MSGLNK -1... 2
SET MESSAGE LINK 1525.03 1 SET_MSGLNK -1... 2
CANCEL MESSAGE GROUP 1531.02 1 CAN_MSGRP -1... 1
CREATE MESSAGE GROUP 1530.03 1 CR_MSGRP -1... 2
SELECT MESSAGE GROUP 1532.02 1 SEL_MSGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1529.01 1 DISP_MSGRPLNK -1... 1
SET MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1537.05 1 SET_MSGRPLNK -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE 965.01 1 DISP_MT -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC TAPE 964.01 1 INIT_MT -1... 2
REWIND MAGNETIC TAPE 963.01 1 REWIND_MT -1... 1
CONNECT METALLIC TEST ACCESS 2838.07 1 CONN_MTA -1... 1
DISPLAY METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR LIST 1612.02 1 DISP_MTAERR -1... 1
CANCEL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1096.01 1 CAN_MTD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1095.00 1 CONF_MTD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1107.03 1 CR_MTD -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1116.00 1 DIAG_MTD -1... 2
CONT-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 2362.00 1 DISP_MTD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1136.01 1 TEST_MTD -1... 1
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER 999.03 1 CAN_MUX -1... 1
CREATE MULTIPLEXER 827.01 1 CR_MUX -1... 1
DISPLAY MULTIPLEXER 828.01 1 DISP_MUX -1... 1
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER MASTER B 3108.01 1 CAN_MUXMB -1... 1
CREATE MULTIPLEXER MASTER B 3109.00 1 CR_MUXMB -1... 1
DISPLAY NOTE BOOK 505.71 1 DISP_NBOOK -1... 2
CANCEL NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1768.00 1 CAN_NEATSADR -1... 1
CREATE NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1770.01 1 CR_NEATSADR -1... 2
DISPLAY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1772.00 1 DISP_NEATSADR -1... 1
MODIFY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1775.01 1 MOD_NEATSADR -1... 2
CANCEL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL 1909.04 1 CAN_NMCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL DATA 376.92 1 DISP_NMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROLS 325.96 1 ENTR_NMCNTL -1... 3
ACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2806.02 1 ACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
CAN NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2807.02 1 CAN_NTMINFO -1... 1
CR NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2808.03 1 CR_NTMINFO -1... 3
DACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2809.01 1 DACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
DISP NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2810.05 1 DISP_NTMINFO -1... 6
ENTER NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2811.07 1 ENTR_NTMINFO -1... 3
MOD NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2812.07 1 MOD_NTMINFO -1... 2
ACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 838.04 1 ACT_NUC -1... 4
CANCEL NAILED-UP CONNECTION 839.02 1 CAN_NUC -1... 1
CREATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 837.11 1 CR_NUC -1... 4
DEACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1872.03 1 DACT_NUC -1... 3
DISPLAY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 840.09 1 DISP_NUC -1... 3
MODIFY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 841.06 1 MOD_NUC -1... 4
CONFIGURE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1811.10 1 CONF_OCANEQ -1... 1
DIAGNOSE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNCEM. EQU. 1825.02 1 DIAG_OCANEQ -1... 1
DISP OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 3616.00 1 DISP_OCANEQ -1... 3
STATUS OF OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1826.22 1 STAT_OCANEQ -1... 1
CANCEL OCANEQ VARIANT 3050.02 1 CAN_OCAVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY OCANEQ VARIANT 2892.02 1 DISP_OCAVAR -1... 1
ENTER OCANEQ VARIANT 2894.01 1 ENTR_OCAVAR -1... 1
ACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3789.01 1 ACT_OCTLOAD -1... 3
DEACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3791.01 1 DACT_OCTLOAD -1... 2
DISPLAY OCT LOADER 3790.01 1 DISP_OCTLOAD -1... 2
ACTIVATE ODR 3671.01 1 ACT_ODR -1... 1
CANCEL ODR 3670.00 1 CAN_ODR -1... 1
CREATE ODR 3667.00 1 CR_ODR -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ODR 3672.00 1 DACT_ODR -1... 1
DISPLAY ODR 3669.01 1 DISP_ODR -1... 1
MODIFY ODR 3668.00 1 MOD_ODR -1... 2
START O&M PROCESSES 278.10 1 START_OM -1... 1
CONFIGURE O&M TERMINAL 1362.02 1 CONF_OMT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE O&M TERMINAL 1360.01 1 DIAG_OMT -1... 2
DISPLAY O&M TERMINAL 3032.02 1 DISP_OMT -1... 1
MODIFY O&M TERMINAL 3034.01 1 MOD_OMT -1... 1
TEST O&M TERMINAL 1359.02 1 TEST_OMT -1... 1
ACTIVATE OPERATOR CONDITION 2421.01 1 ACT_OPRCOND -1... 1
DISPLAY OPERATOR CONDITION 2422.01 1 DISP_OPRCOND -1... 1
DISPLAY OPERATOR CONFIGURATION REPORT 2429.01 1 DISP_OPRCONF -1... 3
ACTIVATE OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT 2423.01 1 ACT_OPRCTP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT 2424.01 1 DACT_OPRCTP -1... 1
DISPLAY OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT 2425.01 1 DISP_OPRCTP -1... 1
CANCEL OPERATOR DATA 587.01 1 CAN_OPRDATA -1... 1
CREATE OPERATOR DATA 586.00 1 CR_OPRDATA -1... 3
DISPLAY OPERATOR DATA 589.02 1 DISP_OPRDATA -1... 2
MODIFY OPERATOR DATA 588.02 1 MOD_OPRDATA -1... 2
CANCEL OPERATOR LOCATION 1697.00 1 CAN_OPRLOC -1... 1
DISPLAY OPERATOR LOCATION 1699.01 1 DISP_OPRLOC -1... 1
ENTER OPERATOR LOCATION 1696.01 1 ENTR_OPRLOC -1... 3
MODIFY OPERATOR LOCATION 1698.01 1 MOD_OPRLOC -1... 5
DISPLAY OPERATOR PERFORMANCE REPORT 2430.01 1 DISP_OPRPERF -1... 1
DISPLAY OPERATOR STATUS 626.00 1 DISP_OPRSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL ORIGINATING DATA 2374.49 1 CAN_ORIGDAT -1... 2
CREATE ORIGINATING DATA 2373.49 1 CR_ORIGDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY ORIGINATING DATA 2376.49 1 DISP_ORIGDAT -1... 3
MODIFY ORIGINATING DATA 2375.49 1 MOD_ORIGDAT -1... 1
CANCEL OSI ADDRESSES 1863.00 1 CAN_OSIADR -1... 1
CREATE OSI ADDRESSES 1864.03 1 CR_OSIADR -1... 2
DISPLAY OSI ADDRESSES 1857.00 1 DISP_OSIADR -1... 1
MODIFY OSI ADDRESSES 1865.03 1 MOD_OSIADR -1... 3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-13 +
ACTIVATE OSI TRACER 1903.04 1 ACT_OSITRAC -1... 7
DISPLAY OSI TRACE DATA 1905.02 1 DISP_OSITRAC -1... 1
DUMP OSI TRACE DATA 1906.03 1 DMP_OSITRAC -1... 3
DISPLAY OSS DATA 557.01 1 DISP_OSSDAT -1... 1
ENTER OPERATOR SERVICE SYSTEM DATA 523.08 1 ENTR_OSSDAT -1... 6
COPY OSS FILE 624.70 1 COPY_OSSFILE -1... 1
ACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 949.00 1 ACT_OUTDIV -1... 2
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 950.00 1 DEC_OUTDIV -1... 1
ACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1535.00 1 ACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1721.02 1 DACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1536.00 1 DISP_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OVERLOAD 400.20 1 DISP_OVLD -1... 1
CANCEL PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2720.00 1 CAN_PA -1... 1
CREATE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2719.00 1 CR_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2722.00 1 DISP_PA -1... 1
TEST PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 1708.01 1 TEST_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PA CHANNEL STATUS 1910.00 1 DISP_PACHSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY PA FAULT 1869.01 1 DISP_PAFAULT -1... 3
DISPLAY PA LINK STATISTICS 1777.00 1 DISP_PASTAT -1... 1
CANCEL PBX 105.82 1 CAN_PBX -1... 2
CREATE PBX 104.13 1 CR_PBX -1... 85
DISPLAY PBX 170.13 1 DISP_PBX -1... 11
MODIFY PBX 551.13 1 MOD_PBX -1...138
RECORD PBX 342.06 1 REC_PBX -1... 12
CANCEL PBX LINE 77.10 1 CAN_PBXLN -1... 2
CREATE PBX LINE 76.12 1 CR_PBXLN -1...124
DISPLAY PBX LINE 168.21 1 DISP_PBXLN -1... 9
MODIFY PBX LINE 1039.17 1 MOD_PBXLN -1... 66
DISPLAY STATUS OF PBX LINE 537.83 1 STAT_PBXLN -1... 4
TEST PBX LINE 1902.11 1 TEST_PBXLN -1... 10
ACTIVATE PBX TRAP 1057.11 1 ACT_PBXTRAP -1... 13
CANCEL PBX TRAP 1059.11 1 CAN_PBXTRAP -1... 4
DISPLAY PCM ALARM COUNTER 695.90 1 DISP_PCMAC -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1900.04 1 DISP_PDCCHR -1... 1
ENTER PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1901.09 1 ENTR_PDCCHR -1... 8
DISPLAY PDC CONTROLS 2608.08 1 DISP_PDCCNTL -1... 2
ENTER PDC CONTROLS 2609.08 1 ENTR_PDCCNTL -1... 4
ACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1913.00 1 ACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DEACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1914.00 1 DACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC FEATURE INFORMATIONS 1915.00 1 DISP_PDCFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC PERFORMANCE DATA 1916.08 1 DISP_PDCPERF -1... 3
DISPLAY PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2733.08 1 DISP_PDCTHR -1... 1
RESET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2734.00 1 RSET_PDCTHR -1... 1
SET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2736.08 1 SET_PDCTHR -1... 1
CANCEL PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1943.00 1 CAN_PHONMEET -1... 1
DISPLAY PHONMEET DATA 1948.00 1 DISP_PHONMEET -1... 2
ENTER PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1949.00 1 ENTR_PHONMEET -1... 2
MODIFY PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1951.00 1 MOD_PHONMEET -1... 3
DUMP PIO STATISTICS 2580.00 1 DMP_PIOSTC -1... 1
RESET PIO STATISTICS 2582.00 1 RSET_PIOSTC -1... 1
DISPLAY PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROL 1048.11 1 DISP_PMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROLS 1040.11 1 ENTR_PMCNTL -1... 2
CONFIGURE PORT 807.10 1 CONF_PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY PORT 201.72 1 DISP_PORT -1... 1
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF PORT 600.97 1 SEL_PORT -1... 3
DISPLAY STATUS OF PORT 353.85 1 STAT_PORT -1... 3
ACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2369.01 1 ACT_PORTTRAC -1... 5
DEACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2392.00 1 DACT_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY PORT TRACER 2370.00 1 DISP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DUMP PORT TRACER 2372.00 1 DMP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
CANCEL PROCESSOR 888.02 1 CAN_PRO -1... 1
CREATE PROCESSOR 886.06 1 CR_PRO -1... 2
DISPLAY PROCESSOR 1773.00 1 DISP_PRO -1... 1
MODIFY PROCESSOR 1776.03 1 MOD_PRO -1... 2
START PROCESS 281.10 1 START_PROCESS -1... 1
RESET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1498.00 1 RSET_PROCON -1... 1
SET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1497.00 1 SET_PROCON -1... 1
MODIFY PASSWORD 41.01 1 MOD_PSW -1... 1
DISPLAY PASSWORD DATA 2857.00 1 DISP_PSWDAT -1... 1
MODIFY PASSWORD DATA 2859.00 1 MOD_PSWDAT -1... 1
CANCEL QUEUE 2882.07 1 CAN_QUE -1... 2
DISPLAY QUEUE 2885.07 1 DISP_QUE -1... 6
ENTER QUEUE 3380.07 1 ENTR_QUE -1... 12
RECORD QUEUE 3271.04 1 REC_QUE -1... 5
CONT-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CANCEL REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1832.00 1 CAN_RCU -1... 1
CREATE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1834.01 1 CR_RCU -1... 1
DISPLAY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1840.00 1 DISP_RCU -1... 1
EXTEND RCU 2559.00 1 EXT_RCU -1... 1
REDUCE RCU 2560.00 1 RED_RCU -1... 1
STATUS REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1837.00 1 STAT_RCU -1... 1
DISPLAY INTERMEDIATE RESULT OF RDS MEAS 1230.02 1 DISP_RDSMEAS -1... 2
START RDS MEASUREMENT 1232.02 1 START_RDSMEAS -1... 2
STOP RDS MEASUREMENT 1229.02 1 STOP_RDSMEAS -1... 2
DISPLAY RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1253.00 1 DISP_RECESC -1... 1
RESET RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1259.21 1 RSET_RECESC -1... 1
SET RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1264.21 1 SET_RECESC -1... 1
EXECUTE REGENERATION 611.75 1 EXEC_REGEN -1... 9
TEST ROUTING DATA BASE 3095.06 1 TEST_ROUDB -1... 26
ACTIVATE ROUTE 32.08 1 ACT_ROUTE -1... 2
BAR ROUTE 27.09 1 BAR_ROUTE -1... 2
CANCEL ROUTE 13.77 1 CAN_ROUTE -1... 3
CREATE ROUTE 10.89 1 CR_ROUTE -1... 20
DISPLAY ROUTE 206.83 1 DISP_ROUTE -1... 4
INSERT ROUTE 30.89 1 INS_ROUTE -1... 20
MODIFY ROUTE 413.85 1 MOD_ROUTE -1... 9
TAKE OUT ROUTE 31.77 1 TAKO_ROUTE -1... 2
CANCEL ROUTE SWITCH 313.79 1 CAN_ROUTESW -1... 3
DISPLAY ROUTE SWITCH 414.04 1 DISP_ROUTESW -1... 1
ENTER ROUTE SWITCH 312.80 1 ENTR_ROUTESW -1... 4
CANCEL ROUTE THRESHOLD 1792.02 1 CAN_ROUTETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1790.03 1 DISP_ROUTETHR -1... 2
ENTER ROUTE THRESHOLD 1795.03 1 ENTR_ROUTETHR -1... 3
MODIFY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1797.49 1 MOD_ROUTETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE ACCESS CODE 1829.00 1 DISP_SACODE -1... 1
MODIFY SERVICE ACCESS CODE 1830.00 1 MOD_SACODE -1... 1
RECORD DATA OF SERVICES APPL. AND FEAT. 2150.01 1 REC_SAF -1... 4
CANCEL SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1964.81 1 CAN_SCCGPA -1... 2
CREATE SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1977.81 1 CR_SCCGPA -1... 11
DISPLAY SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1989.50 1 DISP_SCCGPA -1... 2
MODIFY SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 2004.81 1 MOD_SCCGPA -1... 4
CANCEL SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3106.81 1 CAN_SCDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3107.81 1 DISP_SCDATA -1... 1
ENTER SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3105.81 1 ENTR_SCDATA -1... 4
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2038.46 1 CAN_SCFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2039.47 1 DISP_SCFEA -1... 2
ENTER SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2040.47 1 ENTR_SCFEA -1... 32
CANCEL CHANGEOVER TIMES S130 875.01 1 CAN_SCHOVTI -1... 2
DISPLAY CHANGEOVER TIMES S130 757.71 1 DISP_SCHOVTI -1... 1
ENTER CHANGEOVER TIMES S130 755.71 1 ENTR_SCHOVTI -1... 2
MODIFY CHANGEOVER TIMES S130 756.71 1 MOD_SCHOVTI -1... 2
CANCEL SCREENING LIST 2404.02 1 CAN_SCLST -1... 3
DISPLAY SCREENING LIST 2405.02 1 DISP_SCLST -1... 4
ENTER SCREENING LIST 2403.02 1 ENTR_SCLST -1... 6
CANCEL SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2041.00 1 CAN_SCRBLST -1... 1
CREATE SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2042.00 1 CR_SCRBLST -1... 2
DISPLAY SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2043.00 1 DISP_SCRBLST -1... 1
MODIFY SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2044.00 1 MOD_SCRBLST -1... 2
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1965.50 1 CAN_SCSS -1... 2
CONFIGURE SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1969.50 1 CONF_SCSS -1... 2
CREATE SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1978.81 1 CR_SCSS -1... 3
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1990.50 1 DISP_SCSS -1... 2
MODIFY SCCP SUBSYSTEM 2005.50 1 MOD_SCSS -1... 3
DISPLAY STATUS OF SCCP SUBSYSTEM 2007.50 1 STAT_SCSS -1... 2
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3148.00 1 CAN_SCSSG -1... 1
CREATE SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3149.50 1 CR_SCSSG -1... 3
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3150.50 1 DISP_SCSSG -1... 3
MODIFY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3151.50 1 MOD_SCSSG -1... 4
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1966.50 1 CAN_SCSSSD -1... 2
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1991.50 1 DISP_SCSSSD -1... 2
ENTER SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1996.50 1 ENTR_SCSSSD -1... 4
RECORD SCCP AND TCAP 2940.00 1 REC_SCTC -1... 3
CANCEL SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1967.00 1 CAN_SCTRLG -1... 1
CREATE SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1979.20 1 CR_SCTRLG -1... 5
DISPLAY SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1992.01 1 DISP_SCTRLG -1... 1
MODIFY SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 2006.40 1 MOD_SCTRLG -1... 2
CANCEL TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3398.91 1 CAN_SCTTCD -1... 1
DISPLAY TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3399.00 1 DISP_SCTTCD -1... 2
ENTER TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3397.00 1 ENTR_SCTTCD -1... 2
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-15 +
CANCEL SCCP USER 2841.50 1 CAN_SCUSER -1... 2
CREATE SCCP USER 2839.50 1 CR_SCUSER -1... 2
DISPLAY SCCP USER 2840.50 1 DISP_SCUSER -1... 2
CANCEL S130 DESTINATION DIRECTORY NUMBER 877.03 1 CAN_SDDN -1... 2
CREATE S130 DESTINATION DIRECTORY NUMBER 876.02 1 CR_SDDN -1... 2
MODIFY DDN OF S130 SUBSCRIBER 745.72 1 MOD_SDDN -1... 1
CANCEL S130 DEST. DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 986.03 1 CAN_SDDNDATA -1... 2
DISPLAY DEST. DIR. NUMBER DATA 751.71 1 DISP_SDDNDATA -1... 1
ENTER S130 DEST. DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 985.03 1 ENTR_SDDNDATA -1... 2
CANCEL S130 DIRECTORY NUMBERS 879.00 1 CAN_SDN -1... 1
CREATE S130 DIRECTORY NUMBERS 878.00 1 CR_SDN -1... 1
DISPLAY S130 DIRECTORY NUMBERS 880.00 1 DISP_SDN -1... 1
CANCEL S130 DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 882.02 1 CAN_SDNDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY S130 SUBSCRIBER DATA 883.71 1 DISP_SDNDATA -1... 1
ENTER S130 DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 881.02 1 ENTR_SDNDATA -1... 1
CORRECT SEASON 315.01 1 CORR_SEASON -1... 1
UPDATE SECURITY DATA 3087.00 1 UPD_SECDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3084.00 1 DISP_SECTHR -1... 1
MODIFY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3091.00 1 MOD_SECTHR -1... 3
CANCEL SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2765.06 1 CAN_SERVCUG -1... 2
DISPLAY SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2767.04 1 DISP_SERVCUG -1... 2
ENTER SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2769.05 1 ENTR_SERVCUG -1... 2
CANCEL SESSION 2855.00 1 CAN_SESSION -1... 1
DISPLAY SESSION 2858.00 1 DISP_SESSION -1... 1
END SESSION 45.00 1 END_SESSION -1... 1
START SAFEGUARDING SOFTWARE 632.10 1 START_SFGSW -1... 1
DUMP COLLECTED SAFEGUARDING SYMPTOMS 2817.10 1 DMP_SFGSYMP -1... 1
DUMP SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1947.00 1 DMP_SGMSG -1... 1
ACTIVATE SIGNALING TRACER 1028.81 1 ACT_SIGNTRAC -1... 3
CANCEL SIGNALING TRACER 2760.00 1 CAN_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SIGNALING TRACER 2762.00 1 DACT_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY SIGNALING TRACER 2033.00 1 DISP_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DUMP SIGNALING TRACER 2758.02 1 DMP_SIGNTRAC -1... 3
ENTER SIGNALING TRACER OBJECT DATA 2752.05 1 ENTR_SIGNTRAC -1... 19
ACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3607.00 1 ACT_SILCTRC -1... 1
CANCEL SILC TRACE EVENT 3609.00 1 CAN_SILCTRC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3608.00 1 DACT_SILCTRC -1... 1
DISPLAY SILC TRACE EVENT 3610.00 1 DISP_SILCTRC -1... 1
DUMP SILC TRACE EVENT 3611.00 1 DMP_SILCTRC -1... 1
ENTER SILC TRACE EVENT 3606.00 1 ENTR_SILCTRC -1... 1
TEST SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT 63.78 1 TEST_SLC -1... 2
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3652.02 1 CAN_SLNACC -1... 1
CREATE SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3649.02 1 CR_SLNACC -1... 9
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3651.02 1 DISP_SLNACC -1... 3
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3650.02 1 MOD_SLNACC -1... 22
MODIFY SLRAM 1080.01 1 MOD_SLRAM -1... 1
ACTIVATE S130 METER OBSERVATION 752.72 1 ACT_SMOBS -1... 1
CANCEL S130 METER OBSERVATION 753.72 1 CAN_SMOBS -1... 1
SELECT S130 SUB. WITH METER OBSERVATION 884.00 1 SEL_SMOBS -1... 1
CONFIGURE SN 926.60 1 CONF_SN -1... 2
DIAGNOSE SWITCHING NETWORK 974.00 1 DIAG_SN -1... 3
DISPLAY STATUS OF SN 918.10 1 STAT_SN -1... 1
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SN 938.00 1 TEST_SN -1... 3
DISPLAY SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 694.00 1 DISP_SNBERC -1... 1
START SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 693.01 1 START_SNBERC -1... 2
DISPLAY SN PATH DATA (TRANSIENT) 848.01 1 DISP_SNPD -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE OPTIONS 1750.00 1 DISP_SOPT -1... 1
ENTER SERVICE OPTIONS 1751.00 1 ENTR_SOPT -1... 1
CANCEL S130 ORIGIN DEPENDENCY 759.00 1 CAN_SORD -1... 1
DISPLAY S130 ORIGIN DEPENDENCY 760.70 1 DISP_SORD -1... 1
ENTER S130 ORIGIN DEPENDENCY 758.00 1 ENTR_SORD -1... 1
CANCEL TFS ORIGIN DEPENDENCY DATA 1539.01 1 CAN_SORDDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY TFS ORIGIN DEPENDENCY DATA 1540.01 1 DISP_SORDDATA -1... 1
ENTER TFS ORIGIN DEPENDENCY DATA 1538.01 1 ENTR_SORDDATA -1... 1
CANCEL SPOOLENTRY 1761.01 1 CAN_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLENTRY 1764.00 1 DISP_SPENTRY -1... 1
MODIFY SPOOLENTRY 1766.01 1 MOD_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLFILE 1765.00 1 DISP_SPFILE -1... 1
ACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1760.02 1 ACT_SPSERV -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1762.00 1 DACT_SPSERV -1... 1
ALLOW SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1083.00 1 ALLOW_SSA -1... 1
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS DATA 1121.00 1 DISP_SSA -1... 1
INHIBIT SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1123.00 1 INHIB_SSA -1... 1
MODIFY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1126.00 1 MOD_SSA -1... 1
CONT-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONFIGURE SPACE STAGE GROUP 927.60 1 CONF_SSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE SPACE STAGE GROUP 976.00 1 DIAG_SSG -1... 3
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SSG 971.00 1 TEST_SSG -1... 5
DISPLAY SSP 1654.01 1 DISP_SSP -1... 1
MERGE SSP 1125.00 1 MERGE_SSP -1... 1
RECOVER SSP 453.10 1 RECOV_SSP -1... 1
SPLIT SSP 1088.01 1 SPLIT_SSP -1... 1
SEARCH SSP 1127.01 1 SRCH_SSP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SSP 123.71 1 STAT_SSP -1... 1
TEST SSP 121.70 1 TEST_SSP -1... 1
ACTIVATE CONSISTENCY CHECK 1082.00 1 ACT_SSPCONCK -1... 1
ALLOW ROUTINE TEST 1085.01 1 ALLOW_SSPRT -1... 1
CUT OFF ROUTINETEST 1108.00 1 CUT_SSPRT -1... 1
DISPLAY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1122.01 1 DISP_SSPRT -1... 1
INHIBIT ROUTINE TEST 1124.01 1 INHIB_SSPRT -1... 1
MODIFY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1084.02 1 MOD_SSPRT -1... 3
CANCEL S130 SUBSCRIBER 748.72 1 CAN_SSUB -1... 1
CREATE S130 SUBSCRIBER 742.72 1 CR_SSUB -1... 2
DISPLAY S130 SUBSCRIBER 749.71 1 DISP_SSUB -1... 1
DISPLAY STATISTICS METER 257.71 1 DISP_STATMET -1... 1
CANCEL STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 697.03 1 CAN_STATSW -1... 2
DISPLAY STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 698.03 1 DISP_STATSW -1... 1
ENTER STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 696.04 1 ENTR_STATSW -1... 2
ACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2928.02 1 ACT_STMON -1... 6
DEACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2930.02 1 DACT_STMON -1... 6
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2932.01 1 DISP_STMON -1... 11
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2921.03 1 ENTR_STMON -1... 18
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3482.00 1 DISP_STMONINF -1... 1
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3481.00 1 ENTR_STMONINF -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER 4.79 1 CAN_SUB -1... 2
CREATE SUBSCRIBER 2.12 1 CR_SUB -1...149
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER 171.12 1 DISP_SUB -1... 12
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER 1038.17 1 MOD_SUB -1...121
RECORD SUBSCRIBER 344.74 1 REC_SUB -1... 8
DISPLAY STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER 536.76 1 STAT_SUB -1... 4
TEST SUBSCRIBER 1397.04 1 TEST_SUB -1... 4
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER DIRECTORY NUMBER 1861.03 1 MOD_SUBDN -1... 2
ACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3815.04 1 ACT_SVSUB -1... 1
CANCEL SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3817.04 1 CAN_SVSUB -1... 1
CREATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3813.04 1 CR_SVSUB -1... 3
DEACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3816.04 1 DACT_SVSUB -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3818.04 1 DISP_SVSUB -1... 1
MODIFY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3814.04 1 MOD_SVSUB -1... 3
TRANSFER SYSTEM FILES 1002.06 1 TRANS_SYFILE -1... 6
CONFIGURE SYSTEM PANEL 930.60 1 CONF_SYP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SYSTEM PANEL 920.10 1 STAT_SYP -1... 1
ACTIVATE SYSTEM LOAD DISPLAY 2561.00 1 ACT_SYSLDD -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SYSTEM LOAD DISPLAY 2562.00 1 DACT_SYSLDD -1... 1
RECOVER SYSTEM 456.10 1 RECOV_SYSTEM -1... 2
ACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3238.02 1 ACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3239.02 1 DACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
START SYSTEM UPGRADE 3241.00 1 START_SYSUPG -1... 1
MOUNT TAPE 8.01 1 MOUNT_TAPE -1... 1
CANCEL TARIFF 57.06 1 CAN_TAR -1... 1
DISPLAY TARIFF 202.03 1 DISP_TAR -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF 56.07 1 ENTR_TAR -1... 4
MODIFY TARIFF 58.05 1 MOD_TAR -1... 2
CANCEL TARIFF SWITCH 60.06 1 CAN_TARSW -1... 2
DISPLAY TARIFF SWITCH 205.06 1 DISP_TARSW -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF SWITCH 59.07 1 ENTR_TARSW -1... 2
TEST TRUNK CIRCUIT 65.72 1 TEST_TC -1... 3
CANCEL TEST POINT 198.49 1 CAN_TEPT -1... 2
CREATE TEST POINT 188.49 1 CR_TEPT -1... 3
DISPLAY TEST POINT 1216.46 1 DISP_TEPT -1... 1
CANCEL TEST EQUIPMENT 247.04 1 CAN_TEQ -1... 1
CREATE TEST EQUIPMENT 246.34 1 CR_TEQ -1... 35
DISPLAY TEST EQUIPMENT 249.32 1 DISP_TEQ -1... 1
MODIFY TEST EQUIPMENT 248.10 1 MOD_TEQ -1... 51
DISPLAY STATUS OF TEST EQUIPMENT 845.75 1 STAT_TEQ -1... 2
CANCEL TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1036.02 1 CAN_TEQDAT -1... 2
DISPLAY TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1037.00 1 DISP_TEQDAT -1... 1
ENTER TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1035.02 1 ENTR_TEQDAT -1... 2
ACTIVATE TEST PATH 842.03 1 ACT_TESTPATH -1... 1
CANCEL TEST THRESHOLD 1838.01 1 CAN_TESTTHR -1... 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-17 +
CREATE TEST THRESHOLD 1839.01 1 CR_TESTTHR -1... 4
DISPLAY TEST THRESHOLD 1841.01 1 DISP_TESTTHR -1... 1
MODIFY TEST THRESHOLD 1842.01 1 MOD_TESTTHR -1... 4
TRANSFER TEXT 1505.00 1 TRANS_TEXT -1... 1
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2772.01 1 CAN_TGCLU -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2771.03 1 CR_TGCLU -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2773.01 1 DISP_TGCLU -1... 1
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2774.04 1 MOD_TGCLU -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP DATA 1874.39 1 CAN_TGDAT -1... 7
ENTER TRUNK GROUP DATA 1875.39 1 ENTR_TGDAT -1... 65
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP 14.39 1 CAN_TGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP 11.39 1 CR_TGRP -1... 61
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP 226.39 1 DISP_TGRP -1... 7
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP 35.39 1 MOD_TGRP -1... 5
RECORD TRUNK GROUP 291.12 1 REC_TGRP -1... 5
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD 1889.00 1 DISP_TGRPTHR -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLDS 2548.81 1 ENTR_TGRPTHR -1... 3
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 721.27 1 CAN_TGTSTDAT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 722.28 1 DISP_TGTSTDAT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 719.32 1 ENTR_TGTSTDAT -1... 5
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 720.32 1 MOD_TGTSTDAT -1... 4
DISPLAY THRESHOLD 256.01 1 DISP_THR -1... 1
ENTER THRESHOLD 255.73 1 ENTR_THR -1... 1
MEASURE THRESHOLD-VIOLATION 1785.10 1 MEAS_THVIOL -1... 3
CORRECT TIME 51.02 1 CORR_TIME -1... 1
DISPLAY TIME 50.00 1 DISP_TIME -1... 1
ENTER TIME 52.01 1 ENTR_TIME -1... 1
DISPLAY TIMEOUT 767.10 1 DISP_TIOUT -1... 1
MODIFY TIMEOUT 850.10 1 MOD_TIOUT -1... 6
DISPLAY TIME JOB 259.01 1 DISP_TJOB -1... 1
CAN TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1882.04 1 CAN_TMBLK -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1883.02 1 ENTR_TMBLK -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 377.71 1 DISP_TMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 324.81 1 ENTR_TMCNTL -1... 5
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOB 1649.01 1 CAN_TOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOBS 1542.00 1 DISP_TOBS -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOB 1544.01 1 ENTR_TOBS -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBSERVATION RECORDS 2959.00 1 DISP_TOBSREC -1... 1
CANCEL TOLL CATASTROPHE 306.49 1 CAN_TOLLCAT -1... 1
DISPLAY TOLL CATASTROPHE 305.49 1 DISP_TOLLCAT -1... 1
ENTER TOLL CATASTROPHE 307.49 1 ENTR_TOLLCAT -1... 1
CANCEL TONE IDENTIFICATION 2344.01 1 CAN_TONEID -1... 1
CREATE TONE IDENTIFICATION 2337.01 1 CR_TONEID -1... 2
DISPLAY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2345.01 1 DISP_TONEID -1... 1
MODIFY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2343.01 1 MOD_TONEID -1... 2
CANCEL TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1416.49 1 CAN_TRABLOCK -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1415.49 1 DISP_TRABLOCK -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1417.49 1 ENTR_TRABLOCK -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC FILE CHARACTERISTIC 283.04 1 DISP_TRAFICH -1... 1
GET TRAFFIC FILE 286.09 1 GET_TRAFILE -1... 2
ACT TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SUMMATION 2158.00 1 ACT_TRAFISUM -1... 1
RECORD TRAFFIC FLOW 2016.00 1 REC_TRAFLOW -1... 4
CANCEL TRAFFIC MONITORING TASKS 3374.12 1 CAN_TRAMON -1... 5
DISPLAY TRAFFIC MONITORING TASKS 3375.12 1 DISP_TRAMON -1... 5
ENTER TRAFFIC MONITORING TASK 3373.12 1 ENTR_TRAMON -1... 13
DISPLAY TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT ORDERS 507.04 1 DISP_TRAMORD -1... 1
DISPLAY IRREGULARITY TRAPS 1058.11 1 DISP_TRAPS -1... 7
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE 3639.46 1 CAN_TRAT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE 3637.49 1 CR_TRAT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE 3640.46 1 DISP_TRAT -1... 1
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE 3638.49 1 MOD_TRAT -1... 2
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3643.46 1 CAN_TRATCPT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3641.49 1 CR_TRATCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3644.49 1 DISP_TRATCPT -1... 1
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3642.49 1 MOD_TRATCPT -1... 1
CANCEL TRUNK DATA 687.39 1 CAN_TRDAT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK DATA 686.39 1 ENTR_TRDAT -1... 3
MEASURE TRUNK SIGNAL 1311.10 1 MEAS_TRKSIG -1... 9
SEND TRUNK SIGNAL 1312.10 1 SEND_TRKSIG -1... 11
ACTIVATE TRUNK SUPERVISION 1850.02 1 ACT_TRKSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK METER 262.02 1 DISP_TRMET -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS 1575.00 1 DISP_TRO -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT CENTREX GROUP 2877.00 1 CAN_TROCXGRP -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT CENTREX GROUP 2875.01 1 ENTR_TROCXGRP -1... 1
CONT-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1576.02 1 CAN_TRODEST -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1562.02 1 ENTR_TRODEST -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1570.00 1 CAN_TRODLU -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1569.01 1 ENTR_TRODLU -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUP 1577.00 1 CAN_TROGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP 1558.04 1 CR_TROGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUPS 1574.00 1 DISP_TROGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJ INCOM OUTGO TRUNK GRP 1573.00 1 CAN_TROICOGT -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJ INCOM OUTGO TRUNK GRP 1559.01 1 ENTR_TROICOGT -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJ PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3069.00 1 CAN_TROPA -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3066.01 1 ENTR_TROPA -1... 1
CAN TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1561.01 1 CAN_TROPBX -1... 1
ENTR TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1560.03 1 ENTR_TROPBX -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT PBX LINE 1572.04 1 CAN_TROPBXLN -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT PBX LINE 1571.05 1 ENTR_TROPBXLN -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1564.03 1 CAN_TROSUB -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1563.04 1 ENTR_TROSUB -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1566.00 1 CAN_TROTGRP -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1565.01 1 ENTR_TROTGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNK 1568.03 1 CAN_TROTRUNK -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNK 1567.04 1 ENTR_TROTRUNK -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT V52 INTERFACE 3830.00 1 CAN_TROV52IF -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT V52 INTERFACE 3829.00 1 ENTR_TROV52IF -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 700.04 1 CAN_TRST -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT JOB 701.01 1 DISP_TRST -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 2670.05 1 ENTR_TRST -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2026.01 1 CAN_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2028.01 1 DISP_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2030.06 1 ENTR_TRSVCNTL -1... 3
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2032.05 1 MOD_TRSVCNTL -1... 2
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2027.03 1 CAN_TRSVCRIT -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2029.05 1 DISP_TRSVCRIT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRITERIA 2031.04 1 ENTR_TRSVCRIT -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3811.00 1 CAN_TRSVTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3812.00 1 DISP_TRSVTRAF -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3810.00 1 ENTR_TRSVTRAF -1... 5
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3942.00 1 MOD_TRSVTRAF -1... 7
ACTIVATE TRUNK TRAP 346.77 1 ACT_TRTRAP -1... 13
CANCEL TRUNK TRAP 347.05 1 CAN_TRTRAP -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK 15.39 1 CAN_TRUNK -1... 2
CREATE TRUNK 12.39 1 CR_TRUNK -1... 10
DISPLAY TRUNK 189.37 1 DISP_TRUNK -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF TRUNK 355.14 1 STAT_TRUNK -1... 5
TEST TRUNK 61.76 1 TEST_TRUNK -1... 13
CONFIGURE TSG 972.60 1 CONF_TSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE TIME STAGE GROUP 975.00 1 DIAG_TSG -1... 3
DISPLAY TIME SWITCH GROUP 595.03 1 DISP_TSG -1... 1
MODIFY TIME STAGE GROUP 594.03 1 MOD_TSG -1... 1
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE TSG 973.00 1 TEST_TSG -1... 5
RELEASE TEST CALL 1280.15 1 REL_TSTCALL -1... 1
SET UP TEST CALL 1283.15 1 SETUP_TSTCALL -1... 22
DISPLAY TESTING JOBS 803.01 1 DISP_TSTJOB -1... 1
CHANGE TEST OBJECT 1273.15 1 CHANGE_TSTOBJ -1... 22
CHANGE TPC TEST PORT 1784.00 1 CHANGE_TSTPRT -1... 1
DISPLAY TEST RESULTS 801.01 1 DISP_TSTRES -1... 1
DELETE TEST SCHEDULE 802.00 1 DEL_TSTSCHED -1... 1
DISPLAY TEST SCHEDULE 800.01 1 DISP_TSTSCHED -1... 1
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE 799.00 1 ENTR_TSTSCHED -1... 18
DISPLAY UPDATE 406.01 1 DISP_UPDATE -1... 1
SET UPDATE 244.71 1 SET_UPDATE -1... 1
CANCEL USER IDENTIFICATION 2860.00 1 CAN_USERID -1... 1
CREATE USER IDENTIFICATION 2856.01 1 CR_USERID -1... 2
DISPLAY USER IDENTIFICATION 2861.00 1 DISP_USERID -1... 1
MODIFY USER IDENTIFICATION 2862.01 1 MOD_USERID -1... 2
CANCEL VOICE RECOGNITION 2348.00 1 CAN_VOICEREC -1... 1
CREATE VOICE RECOGNITION 2346.00 1 CR_VOICEREC -1... 1
DISPLAY VOICE RECOGNITION 2349.00 1 DISP_VOICEREC -1... 1
MODIFY VOICE RECOGNITION 2347.00 1 MOD_VOICEREC -1... 1
CANCEL V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3534.00 1 CAN_V5CMCHAN -1... 1
CREATE V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3527.00 1 CR_V5CMCHAN -1... 3
DISPLAY V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3529.00 1 DISP_V5CMCHAN -1... 1
MODIFY V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3615.00 1 MOD_V5CMCHAN -1... 4
DISP STATUS OF V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3567.00 1 STAT_V5CMCHAN -1... 1
CANCEL V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3535.00 1 CAN_V5CMPATH -1... 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-19 +
CREATE V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3528.00 1 CR_V5CMPATH -1... 4
DISPLAY V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3530.00 1 DISP_V5CMPATH -1... 2
CANCEL V5 INTERFACE 3097.02 1 CAN_V5IF -1... 1
CREATE V5 INTERFACE 3098.03 1 CR_V5IF -1... 2
DISPLAY V5 INTERFACE 3099.02 1 DISP_V5IF -1... 1
MODIFY V5 INTERFACE 3101.03 1 MOD_V5IF -1... 3
RECORD V5.2 INTERFACE 3550.00 1 REC_V5IF -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 INTERFACE 3132.01 1 STAT_V5IF -1... 1
CANCEL V5 LINK 3533.00 1 CAN_V5LINK -1... 3
CONFIGURE V5 LINK 3131.03 1 CONF_V5LINK -1... 9
CREATE V5 LINK 3526.00 1 CR_V5LINK -1... 3
DISPLAY V5 LINK 3511.02 1 DISP_V5LINK -1... 2
MODIFY V5 LINK 3531.00 1 MOD_V5LINK -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 LINK 3133.02 1 STAT_V5LINK -1... 4
TEST V5LINK IDENTIFICATION 3680.00 1 TEST_V5LINK -1... 3
CONFIGURE V5 PORTS 3152.03 1 CONF_V5PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY V5 PORT 3100.03 1 DISP_V5PORT -1... 2
SELECT V5 PORT 3102.03 1 SEL_V5PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 PORTS 3153.02 1 STAT_V5PORT -1... 1
ACTIVATE V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2173.00 1 ACT_V5PROV -1... 2
DEACTIVATE V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2175.00 1 DACT_V5PROV -1... 1
DISPLAY V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2174.00 1 DISP_V5PROV -1... 1
CANCEL NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2172.00 1 CAN_V5PROVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2171.00 1 DISP_V5PROVAR -1... 1
ENTER NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2170.00 1 ENTR_V5PROVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY V5 TIME SLOT 3512.02 1 DISP_V5TS -1... 4
MODIFY V5 TIME SLOT 3532.00 1 MOD_V5TS -1... 10
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 TIME SLOT 2163.01 1 STAT_V5TS -1... 4
DISPLAY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 685.70 1 DISP_WDCAT -1... 1
MODIFY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 725.03 1 MOD_WDCAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE WORK STATION 1286.05 1 ACT_WST -1... 2
CANCEL WORKSTATION 1222.00 1 CAN_WST -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION 1219.34 1 CR_WST -1... 7
DEACTIVATE WORK STATION 1287.01 1 DACT_WST -1... 1
DISPLAY WORKSTATION 1223.00 1 DISP_WST -1... 1
MODIFY WORKSTATION 1425.10 1 MOD_WST -1... 2
STATUS OF WORK STATION 1788.01 1 STAT_WST -1... 1
CANCEL WORKSTATION GROUP 1227.00 1 CAN_WSTGRP -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION GROUP 1220.28 1 CR_WSTGRP -1... 4
DISPLAY WORKSTATION GROUP 1221.00 1 DISP_WSTGRP -1... 1
MODIFY WORKSTATION GROUP 1453.28 1 MOD_WSTGRP -1... 2
ALLOW INCOMING CALL TO WORK STATION 1285.01 1 ALLOW_WSTIC -1... 1
INHIBIT INCOMING CALL TO WORK STATION 1284.01 1 INHIB_WSTIC -1... 1
CANCEL WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1225.00 1 CAN_WSTPRT -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1224.28 1 CR_WSTPRT -1... 2
DISPLAY WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1226.00 1 DISP_WSTPRT -1... 1
STATUS X25 DATA 3037.01 1 STAT_X25DAT -1... 2
CANCEL X25DTE 2685.00 1 CAN_X25DTE -1... 1
CREATE X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2689.02 1 CR_X25DTE -1... 12
DISPLAY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2695.02 1 DISP_X25DTE -1... 3
MODIFY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2701.02 1 MOD_X25DTE -1... 3
CANCEL X25 LINK 2512.02 1 CAN_X25LINK -1... 1
CONFIGURE X25 LINK 2513.02 1 CONF_X25LINK -1... 1
CREATE X25 LINK 2509.04 1 CR_X25LINK -1... 9
DISPLAY X25 LINK 2511.02 1 DISP_X25LINK -1... 1
MODIFY X25 LINK 2510.04 1 MOD_X25LINK -1... 9
CANCEL X25PVC 2520.02 1 CAN_X25PVC -1... 1
CREATE X25PVC 2519.01 1 CR_X25PVC -1... 2
DISPLAY X25PVC 2521.03 1 DISP_X25PVC -1... 1
CANCEL X25ROUTE 2686.00 1 CAN_X25ROUTE -1... 1
CREATE X25ROUTE 2690.03 1 CR_X25ROUTE -1... 3
DISPLAY X25ROUTE 2696.01 1 DISP_X25ROUTE -1... 1
ACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2754.00 1 ACT_X25STC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2755.00 1 DACT_X25STC -1... 1
DISPLAY X25 STATISTICS INFORMATION 2756.00 1 DISP_X25STC -1... 1
DUMP X25 STATISTICS 2581.01 1 DMP_X25STC -1... 2
ACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2501.02 1 ACT_X25TRAC -1... 9
DEACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2502.01 1 DACT_X25TRAC -1... 2
DISPLAY X25 TRACER INFORMATION 2504.00 1 DISP_X25TRAC -1... 1
DUMP X25 TRACE DATA 2503.01 1 DMP_X25TRAC -1... 3
DISPLAY ZONING INFORMATION 2869.04 1 DISP_ZOINF -1... 1
MODIFY ZONING INFORMATION 2868.04 1 MOD_ZOINF -1... 1
CANCEL ZONE POINT 29.68 1 CAN_ZOPT -1... 3
CREATE ZONE POINT 26.69 1 CR_ZOPT -1... 7
CONT-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISPLAY ZONE POINT 190.68 1 DISP_ZOPT -1... 4
MERGE ZONE POINT 388.69 1 MERGE_ZOPT -1... 6
MODIFY ZONE POINT 37.69 1 MOD_ZOPT -1... 6
SPLIT ZONE POINT 386.69 1 SPLIT_ZOPT -1... 6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT-21 -
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTRODUCTION TO CML/OML
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 IN-1
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN-2 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Introduction
The command manual (CML) and the output manual (OML) are reference documents
that contain all man-machine language (MML) commands and masks needed to
operate the system.
The CML also contains commands intended only for system specialists with special
authorization.
The MML in the CML and in the cross-reference lists of the OML, with which the
coordination processor checks the syntax, is automatically generated. Also,
the commands, parameters, and parameter values are specifically selected for
each project. When general parameters require project-specific values, these
are displayed with the parameter so that the CML user interface corresponds
to the operation and maintenance terminal (OMT) user interface.
Structure of the CML
The CML has the following registers:
IN - Introduction
TAB - Cross-reference lists
CMD - Command descriptions
More information on these registers is provided below. All examples given are
fictitious; they may not be part of the actual software.
IN
The introduction contains specific instructions on using the CML and the OML.
The "Operator Guidelines" (OGL) contain additional information on MML as well
as a general outline of the operation and maintenance concept.
TAB
The TAB register contains a cross-reference list that allows you to look up
the commands that belong to a given mask. Masks that are called by a number
of commands, such as the system response mask 007 EXECD, do not appear in
this cross-reference list.
CMD
The CMD register is the main part of the command manual; it contains
descriptions of the commands and is generated for a specific APS.
A description of a command includes its syntax, its input formats
and an explanation of the command and its parameters and parameter
values. Command objects are listed in alphabetical order so that
commands that belong to specific tasks are grouped together. The
create commands usually include a detailed description of command
objects.
Permissible entries are explicitly stated. For example, appending
parameter values with & is only permissible if this option is
indicated.
Command descriptions are structured as follows:
- Command help text
- Command syntax
- Parameter description structured according to:
- general information on the parameter
- information on subparameters
- information on parameter values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 IN-3
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Command help texts
Command help texts explain the meaning of the command, its prerequisites, and
its effect.
Command help texts may be supplemented by standard texts, depending on which
attributes the software has.
Software attributes can be grouped in the following categories:
- General attributes
- Attributes restricted to specific exchange types
- Attributes for special applications
- Attributes for the use of default values
The following standard texts are used in command help:
1. Standard texts for general software attributes
- Caution: Execution of this command may compromise the regular
operation of the exchange!
This standard text appears whenever a command is used that can
have a negative effect by:
- modifying or deleting files or catalog entries,
- taking an exchange out of service by removing redundant,
central hardware,
- terminating connection to the O&M Center,
- disconnecting a great number of subscribers from the exchange
- diminishing the performance and/or resources of the system
to an extraordinary extent, for example by entering ranges
in the command parameter that are too great.
The command is not executed without user confirmation.
- This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with
STOP JOB: JN=<job number>.
One example of a job that takes a long time to execute is displaying
all subscribers in a fully expanded exchange. This job can be stopped
by using the command STOP JOB. (Note: Usually display commands must
be stopped with the STOP DISP command.)
- This command starts a semi-permanent job. It can be stopped with CAN JOB.
Semi-permanent jobs are jobs that are saved to hard disk. They
remain in effect even after a recovery. A typical example of a
semi-permanent job is periodic traffic measurement.
- This command allows multiple starts
Usually, the CP cannot execute the same command before a previous
execution of that command has been completed. If the above standard
text appears, the CP can execute the command concurrently.
- This command can be logged.
Successful execution of commands with this attribute is recorded in
the log file if this function has been activated with the command
SET LOG. When the APS is changed, changes to the call processing data-
base since the last REGEN are recorded in the log file. This allows
you to restore the database to the state it had before the APS was
changed.
- This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the
the job can be continued with CONT JOB.
A test process stops the job when certain values are reached and
then continues the job when CONT JOB is entered. Commands with this
attribute can be interrupted with STOP JOB.
IN-4 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Standard texts for restrictions that apply to certain exchange types.
Here is an example of such a text:
- This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel
signaling according to signaling system No. 7 (CCS 7).
3. Standard texts for special applications
- This command is only permitted in a command file.
- This command is provided for use only by
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) personnel.
- This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into
service.
Input formats
This section provides an overview of the input formats for commands.
Backus-Naur notation is used to represent commands and parameters.
+-
] Graphic display of ] Comment ]
] parameters ] ]
+++
] DEMO= ] Entering the parameters is ]
] ] mandatory. ]
+++
] [,DEMO ] ] Entering the parameters is ]
] ] optional. ]
+++
] ,DEMO1=- ] Entering exactly one parameter ]
] -,DEMO2= ] is mandatory. ]
] ' ] ]
+++
] ,DEMO1=- - ] Entering exactly one parameter ]
] ] -,DEMO2= ] ] is optional. ]
] ~ ' - ] ]
+++
] [ ,DEMO1=,DEMO2= ] ] Entering all parameter or none ]
] ] entered. ]
+++
] [ ,DEMO1= [ ,DEMO2= ] ] ] Possible combinations: ]
] ] - Enter all parameters ]
] ] - Enter only parameter DEMO1 ]
] ] - Enter both parameters ]
] ] (Parameter DEMO2 alone may ]
] ] not be entered.) ]
+++
] <,DEMO1=,DEMO2=,DEMO3= > ] At least one parameter must ]
] ] be entered. ]
~+-
If a command can be entered in direct or continue mode, then the command
is concluded with:
-
] ; ]
-
] ! ]
'
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 IN-5
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Commands which can be used for different tasks are split into different
input formats (paths). This applies particularly in cases in which the syntax
is not able to represent all the dependencies among parameters and parameter
values. An overview of the input formats is given at the beginning of each
command description.
Example:
The CR TEQ command has the following input formats:
1. CR TEQ - ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT SUB LINE
2. CR TEQ - ATE AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
3. CR TEQ - ATEMAN ATE FOR TESTING AND MEASURING
4. CR TEQ - ATESELF ATE FOR SELFTEST
5. CR TEQ - TEMLE TEST MODULE LEVEL
6. CR TEQ - TESTSET TEST SET
7. CR TEQ - RBSI RING BACK SERVICE INTEGRATED
8. CR TEQ - TLFI TRANSLATION FUNCTION INTEGRAT.
9. CR TEQ - ADDATE ADDITIONAL ATE PORT
Input format 1 follows the overview. Subsequent input formats always begin
on a new page.
The page header indicates which command and which path is described on the
page.
Example:
CR TEQ
CML:CMD ATCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When working in prompt mode, you must respond to each parameter. Prompt mode
does not allow you to select only one parameter. Parameters that are not
allowed in an input format must be skipped with the ETX key. As a general
rule, only the parameters and parameter combinations listed in the CML and in
the EMML are valid.
Input parameters
The description of the input parameters explains the syntax of individual
parameters.
In the simplest cases, parameters are described by the parameter short and long
name and the parameter value range. The parameter value range may be numeric
or alphanumeric as shown below:
Alphanumeric symbolic names: A...Z 0...9 . + * % #
Alphanumeric text strings: A...Z 0...9 . + * % # < ( & ! $ ) ; - / ,
_ > ? : @ = " < blank >
<carriage return> <line feed>
Text strings must always be enclosed in quotation marks. If a quotation
mark must be included in a text string, it must be doubled (""). The
maximum length of a text string including the quotation marks is 72
characters.
IN-6 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example:
PARDM1 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 1 =
5...8 characters from the character set for symbolic names
However, in certain cases, mnemonic abbreviations can be entered
for a parameter. These abbreviations are also called identifiers.
Identifiers have short and long names and may be supplemented by a
help text.
Example:
PARDM2 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 2=
IDF1 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.1
IDF2 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.2
Under certain circumstances a parameter may have up to 4 subparameters.
Subparameters are also called information units; they must be separated
by a hyphen. In the command manual, information units are symbolized by
the lowercase letters a, b, c, and d.
Example:
PARDM3 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 3 =
a-b-c-d
a: FIRST INFORMATION UNIT =
0...7, range of decimal integers
b: SECOND INFORMATION UNIT =
:
:
:
etc.
The so-called new and old parameters are also represented by lowercase
letters.
Example:
DIGIT DIGITS =
1...8-character hexadecimal number.
B = *, C = #
The parameter specifies the prefix digits for test multiple.
n/a
n/
/a
* n, a: new, old parameter value =
In this case, new and old have a very general meaning.
EXAMPLE:
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/oldvalue Changes the prefix-digit
new value/old value
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/ Enters new prefix digit
MOD TEQ: DIGITS= /oldvalue Deletes old prefix digit
* Note: The text that represents the input format for the
old/new parameter appears at the very end of the
parameter description.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 IN-7
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If the syntax allows omitting a parameter or subparameter, the key word
"Default" in the parameter help text describes how the system responds.
The following cases are possible:
- Default value: <value>
<value> is a parameter value within the permissible range that is
automatically used if the parameter is omitted.
- Default behavior: <value>
Values given are added to the default value.
This combination indicates that you can add other values to the
default values.
- Default behavior: <text>
<text> describes the behavior of the system if the parameter is
omitted. This option is selected if it is not possible to specify
a default value.
Examples:
- Optional parameter DATE
Default behavior: current date.
The current date is used.
- Option selection parameter for DISP and STAT commands
Default behavior: no restriction of output
Output is not restricted by omission of parameter.
- Optional control parameter for CR, ENTR, CAN and MOD commands
Default behavior: no effect on the database
The database is not changed.
- Optional control parameter for ACT, DACT, DIAG and TEST commands
Default behavior: no effect on the process
The process is not affected by omission of the parameter.
IN-8 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OML structure
The OML contains the following registers:
TAB - Cross-reference lists
MASK - Status reports
More information on these registers is provided below. All examples given are
fictitious; they may not be part of the actual software.
The OML contains the status reports and the cross-reference lists that
allow you to assign output mask numbers to report groups.
The cross-reference list is subdivided into two tables that are sorted
as follows:
- Report group, report group number, mask number, mask variant,
and, if necessary, the command
- Mask number, mask variant, report group, report group number,
and, if necessary, the command
MASK
Masks that occur in various situations are described only once.
For this reason, parameters may be listed for a mask that do not
apply in a specific case.
The explanation includes
- the reason for the report,
- remedies, and
- the meaning of the output parameters.
The output parameters are displayed in a grid.
Example:
]
]
1 2 3 V 4 5 6 7
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
-
] ]
0 ] ]
1 ] TEXTTEXT TEXT TEXT TEXTTEXTTEXT TEXT ]
2 ] ]
3 ] PARAM2 ]
4 ] ]
5 ] XXXXXX ]
] ]
~-
Output parameters
Position of the Meaning of the output
output in the
mask
(row, column)
5,32 PARAMETER 2 =
:
:
:
etc.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 IN-9
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For a detailed explanation of the output parameters, please refer to the parameters
on the command level. These parameters can be found in the OML cross-reference
lists and in the associated basic commands in the CMD part; these are usually
setup commands.
Example:
You need a detailed explanation of the output parameter value of a report.
This information can be found by referring to the five-digit mask number that
appears in the mask header. The mask number is the number following the
forward slash, for example, 3077/00045. The first digit indicates from which
processor the mask is output. 0 or 1 would be the CP, 2 would be the DCP.
By looking up the mask number in the OML cross-reference list, you can find
the command that initiated this report. For example, this could be the display
command of the object. Detailed information can then be found in the create
command for the object.
IN-10 P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command cancels an automatic congestion control element.
This command is normally logged.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ACC : NAME= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ACC-1 -
DISP ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for this trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]NAME=] ]
] DISP ACC : -TGNO= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
element to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter NAME.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
of parameter TGNO.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ACC-1 -
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control element.
If an overload occurs in a succeeding exchange the responding congestion level
is sent to the preceding exchange. In the preceding exchange the reaction of
the overload has to be administrated if it is needed by the commands for
automatic congestion control traffic and automatic congestion control.
The overload is sent via a trunk of a trunk group. Therefore the indicator can
be administrated by the command CR TGRP with GCOS = SENDACCL.
The automatic congestion control element connects the relevant trunk group with
one automatic congestion control traffic element per type of CNTRL.
This means a maximum of two automatic congestion control traffic elements can be
assigned per trunk group. The assigned values for CNTRL = CANCEL
are preferred to the assigned values for CNTRL = SKIP.
The parameter INCEPT depends on parameter CNTRL:
In the case of CNTRL = CANCEL the parameter INCEPT is mandatory.
In the case of CNTRL = SKIP the parameter INCEPT is optional, i.e. only
relevant if there is an overflow in the last trunk group to a destination.
If CNTRL (i.e. = SKIP) is entered without a value for parameter INCEPT an
already existing value of parameter INCEPT is canceled.
Prerequisites: - the automatic congestion control traffic element must already
exist
- the trunk group must already exist
- only allowed for trunk groups with GCOS = CCS7IUP and
OPMODE = BW.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ACC : NAME= <,TGNO= ,ACCTRAF= ,BLK= ,CNTRL= ,INCEPT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
element. The name must be unique.
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created and may not
be entered if additional data of the element are modified.
The trunk group number must already exist.
The parameter value cannot be changed.
ACCTRAF ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the automatic congestion control traffic
element for the relevant type of CNTRL.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created.
The automatic congestion control traffic element must already exist.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACC-1 +
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking entered for the automatic
congestion control element.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value NONE is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
NONE NO BLOCK
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This blocking prevents activation of the
administrated control, even when an overload
occurs.
CNTRL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the type of control.
the value SKIP is set at creation of
SKIP SKIP TO THE NEXT TGRP
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group and flow over
to the next trunk group of the routing list.
In the case of modification, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
CANCEL CANCEL THE CALL
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group. Overflow to
the next trunk group is prevented.
Prerequisites: INCEPT is mandatory.
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept, which defines the system
reaction for rejected calls.
The parameter is mandatory in the case of CNTRL = CANCEL
and optional in the case of CNTRL = SKIP.
If parameter CNTRL is changed to value SKIP, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 0
E N D
ENTR ACC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL
This command displays the status for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for one trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
Only elements which received a congestion level are considered.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]NAME=] ]
] STAT ACC : -TGNO= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
element to be displayed.
of parameter NAME.
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
of parameter TGNO.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT ACC-1 -
CAN ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command cancels an automatic congestion control traffic element.
It may not be connected to an automatic congestion control element.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ACCTRAF : NAME= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
traffic element.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ACCTRAF-1 -
DISP ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control traffic element, or
- all automatic congestion control traffic elements (in alphabetical order).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ACCTRAF : NAME= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
traffic element.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ACCTRAF-1 -
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control traffic
element. With such an element different traffic reduction percentages for the
following congestion level - route type combinations can be administrated:
----------------------------------------------------------
Route type Command parameter
----------------------------------------------------------
Congestion level 1 direct route CL1DRT
Congestion level 1 alternate route CL1ART
Congestion level 2 direct route CL2DRT
Congestion level 2 alternate route CL2ART
----------------------------------------------------------
Additionally it is possible to administrate per congestion level whether
priority traffic is also affected by the traffic reduction or not.
An automatic congestion control traffic element can be connected to several
automatic congestion control elements (see command ENTR ACC).
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ACCTRAF : NAME= <,CL1DRT= ,CL1ART= ,CL2DRT= ,CL2ART= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CL1PRIOT= ,CL2PRIOT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
traffic element. The name must be unique.
CL1DRT CL1 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
traffic and a received congestion level 1.
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL1ART CL1 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF-1 +
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL2DRT CL2 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL2ART CL2 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL1PRIOT CL1 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 1 or not.
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
ENTR ACCTRAF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CL2PRIOT CL2 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 2 or not.
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF-3 -
DISP ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA
This command displays the general alarm call data :
- indication whether the alarm call execution is active
- maximum number of alarm call orders in the database
- maximum number of alarm call orders per interval
- maximum number of tries per alarm call order
- number of alarm call orders present in the database
- directory number of the announcement that will be used
to execute the alarm call orders
- directory number of the alarm call trunk group
- index of the alarm call trunk group
- category of the alarm call trunk group
- maximum number of previous intervals where to an alarm
call can be advanced
- indication if an alarm call order should be searched in
the previous intervals when not found in the entered
interval.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ACDATA ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ACDATA-1 -
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA
This command enters the general alarm call data.
Prerequisites:
- The necessary ports must be available in the LTGs were the alarm
call program is running.
- At least one announcement trunk group and announcement line must be
available.
- The number of trunk ports and announcement lines must be in proportion
to the maximum number of alarm call executions within one 5 minute interval.
Formula :
2 x D x M x (W + 1) N
N = A =
5 2
N = number of alarm call ports to be created
A = number of announcement lines to be created
D = average time of an alarm call connection in minutes
(ringing time + listening time)
M = number of maximum permitted alarm call orders per 5
minute interval (<= 200)
W = percentage of the alarm call orders that must be repeated
- The timers which determine ringing and listening time should have the
required values, the default values are :
ringing timer : T25 = 30 s.
listening timer : T33 = 30 s.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ACDATA : <MAX= ,RETRY= ,ANNDN= ,TGRPDN= ,CAT= ,BLOCK= ]
] ]
] ,ASHIFT= ,ASRCHE= ,OPRRETRY=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MAX MAX NO OF ORDERS PER INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alarm call orders per
5 minute interval.
If there are intervals that contain more alarm call orders than
permitted in the new maximum, the alarm call orders are nevertheless
executed.
0...200, range of decimal numbers
RETRY NUMBER OF RETRIES
This parameter specifies how often an unsuccessful
executed alarm call order can be re-executed.
ANNDN ANNOUNCEMENT DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
announcement that will be used to execute the alarm call
orders.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACDATA-1 +
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TGRPDN TRUNK GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the alarm
call trunk group of which the ports will be used to set up
the alarm call.
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the alarm call trunk group.
The category must be the same as the category entered when creating
the trunk group.
BLOCK BLOCK ALARM CALL EXECUTION
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call execution is active
or not.
NO ALARM CALL EXEC. NOT BLOCKED
YES ALARM CALL EXECUTION BLOCKED
ASHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFT
This parameter specifies the maximum permitted number of previous
intervals where to an alarm call can be advanced when the interval,
corresponding the booking time, is full.
The shift function is only valid for orders entered by subscriber
controlled input.
ASRCHE ALARM CALL ORDER SEARCH METHOD
This parameter indicates whether the ASHIFT-intervals must be
searched for an alarm call order that is not found in the
entered interval. This extended search has only effect for actions
by subscriber controlled input.
SINGLE SEARCH ONLY ENTERED INTERVAL
SHIFTED SEARCH ALSO SHIFT INTERVALS
OPRRETRY ADMOSS OPERATOR RETRY
This parameter indication whether there should be an extra
execution for the automatic and semi-automatic alarm calls
by means of the ADMOSS operator.
Notes:
- when this parameter is omitted there will be no
reexecution. Default value = NO.
NO NO OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be no extra execution by means of the
ADMOSS operator.
YES OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be attempt to have an execution by
ENTR ACDATA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
means of the ADMOSS operator.
This parameter specifies whether a reexecution should be
done by means of the ADMOSS operator for automatic and
semi-automatic alarm calls.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACDATA-3 -
CAN ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command cancels a comfort alarm call limit for a specified
time period for a specified OSS common service group.
This command is only permitted for an operator service system (OSS).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,TIME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time period for which the comfort
alarm call limit will be canceled.
Notes:
- The time can be omitted, if all comfort alarm call limits
of the specified common service group are to be cancelled.
a-b
a: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the begin hour.
b: MINUTE=
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ACOLIM-1 -
DISP ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command displays the comfort alarm call limits for a
specified OSS common service group.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ACOLIM-1 -
ENTR ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command enters a comfort alarm call limit for a specified
time period for a specified OSS common service group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TIME= ,MAX= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into
group.
TIME STARTTIME OF BOOKING INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the comfort
alarm call limit will become active.
Notes:
- Up to 24 time periods are allowed.
a-b
a: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the begin hour.
b: MINUTE=
This parameter specifies the begin minute.
MAX MAX NO OF ORDERS PER INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alarm calls
allowed per 5 minute interval for the specified time period.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACOLIM-1 +
ENTR ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ENTR ACOLIM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER
This command cancels casual or/and daily alarm call orders.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= [,FIRST=] [,LAC=] [,CHRGINF=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,KIND= [,DAYWK=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber line.
TIME TIME OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the time of the alarm call.
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
The entered time will be rounded to a
previous 5 minute interval.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution on the specified time.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days on the
specified time.
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on specified days on the
specified time.
X ALL TYPES OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
Casual, daily and specific alarm calls
FIRST SKIP FIRST EXECUTION
This parameter determines whether only the first execution
of a daily alarm call order must be disabled or whether the
complete order must be removed.
NO REMOVE ALARM CALL ORDER
YES DISABLE FIRST EXECUTION
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ACORD-1 +
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required, if there
is more than one local network in the exchange.
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter indicates whether the order is
canceled by an automatic operator.
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is canceled by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specified the kind of alarm call order.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the semi-automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the comfort alarm call orders will be
canceled.
X ALL KINDS OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
All automatic, semi-automatic and comfort alarm
call orders will be canceled.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm you want
to cancel.
DAYWK DAYS OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week that should be
deleted for the alarm call.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
E N D
CAN ACORD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER
This command books a casual, daily or specific alarm call.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],DAYNO= ]] ]
] ENTR ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= ]-,WEEKNO=] [,LAC=] ]
] ]],DATE= ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,SHIFT=] [,CHRGINF=] [,KIND=] [,NAMESUB=] ]
] ]
] [,NOTE=] [,CSGID=] [,LANGID=] [,OPERATOR=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,DAYWK=] [,EXECHOL=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
a-b
a: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the hour of the alarm call time.
b: MINUTE=
This parameter specifies the minute of the alarm call time.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution on the specified time.
Notes:
- if DATE is entered the execution will be
performed on that particular day otherwise the
execution will be within the next 24 hours.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days on the
specified time.
Prerequisites:
- DAYNO
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on specified days on the
specified time.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACORD-1 +
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- WEEKNO
- DAYWK
This parameter specifies the type of alarm call.
DAYNO NUMBER OF DAYS
This parameter specifies the number of consecutive days during
which a daily alarm call order is to be executed.
When DAYNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of days.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =SPECIFIC
WEEKNO NUMBER OF WEEKS
This parameter specifies the number of weeks during
which a specific alarm call order is to be executed.
When WEEKNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of weeks.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =DAILY
DATE DATE OF LAST EXECUTION
This parameter specifies the date on which the alarm call order
must be executed for the last time.
If it is entered, the following applies:
- for TYPE=CASUAL, date must be within one month
- for TYPE=DAILY, date must be within 99 days.
- for TYPE=SPECIFIC, date must be within one year.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
SHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFTED
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call order should be
marked as shifted. Shifting is normally only valid for an alarm
call order entered by subscriber controlled input, but must be
available for regeneration of such orders.
ENTR ACORD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO ALARM CALL NOT SHIFTED
YES ALARM CALL SHIFTED
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is booked by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by the system and
will be executed by the system.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by the system. This
value is only relevant in case of regeneration of
a semi-automatic alarm call.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by means of the
ADMOSS operator. This value is only relevant in
case of regeneration of a comfort alarm call.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call order
you want to book.
Default: AUTO
NAMESUB NAME OF THE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the naem of the subscriber
that booked an alarm call.
text string character set, enclosed in "
It is only relevant for regeneration of comfort alarm calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
NOTE NOTE FROM THE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the note the subscriber
wants to hear when executing the alarm call.
It is only relevant for regeneration
of comfort alarm calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
CSGID COMMON SERVICE GROUP ID
This parameter specifies the common service group ID
of the OSS operator that was responsible for the booking
of the alarm call order. This information is only relevant
for the regeneration of semi-automatic and comfort calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ACORD-3 +
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- =SEMIAUTO
LANGID LANGUAGE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the language identification of
the subscriber.
OPERATOR NAT/INAT OPERATOR INDICATION
This parameter indicates whether a national or international
operator should be addressed. It is only relevant for the
regeneration of comfort calls.
NAT NATIONAL OPERATOR
INAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATOR
DAYWK DAY OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week on which the
alarm call should be executed.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
EXECHOL EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
This parameter indicates whether the alarm calls must be
executed on holidays or not.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=DAILY
- =SPECIFIC
YES EXECUTIONS ON HOLIDAYS
NO NO EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
E N D
ENTR ACORD-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER
This command displays all casual and daily alarm call orders
for one or all subscribers for the specified time.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SEL ACORD : DN= ,TIME= [,LAC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
The entered time will be rounded
to a previous 5 minute interval.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL ACORD-1 -
DISP ACSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS
This command displays the alarm call statistics.
Following data are displayed :
- number of refused orders; the number of input attempts, entered
between the last but one and the last activation of the interval,
which were refused
- number of accepted orders; the number of alarm call orders in the
interval at the moment of the last activation of the interval.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ACSTAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ACSTAT-1 -
ACT ADPHMEAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command activates the average of daily peak full hour measurement
or reactivates a stopped measurement or changes the measurement periods
of an active measurement.
Prerequisites:
- Before this command is executed,measurement objects must be entered in
the measurement by means of the command ENTR ADPHMEAS.
- Disc space of 640 PAM pages for 14 result files is necessary.
Possible effects:
If the execution of the job is interrupted by recovery ,
the job will be restarted automatically with the same job number.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT ADPHMEAS : [PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PER PERIOD OF ADPH MEASUREMENT
This parameter delimits the recurrent days of the week on which
recording is to take place. The measurement periods can be delimited
to working days only (WO) .
Default: daily measurement
NO DEFAULT
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ADPHMEAS-1 -
CAN ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command specifies measurement objects to be cancelled from the
measurement.
Possible effects:
If all measurement objects are cancelled from an active measurement, the
measurement job will be cancelled.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN ADPHMEAS - OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. CAN ADPHMEAS - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
1. Input format
OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be cancelled
from the measurement.
A maximum of 32 trunk groups can be linked with &.
Cancellation of all trunk groups is possible.
GRP OBJECT GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a group whose elements are to be
cancelled from the measurement .
A maximum of 4 groups can be linked with &.
Cancellation of all groups is possible.
DN PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the private branch exchange
directory number to be cancelled. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Cancellation of all directory numbers is possible.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code for the private
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ADPHMEAS-1 +
CAN ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
branch exchange directory numbers.
Default: in exchanges with only one local network, this
parameter may be omitted.
CAN ADPHMEAS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
directory number to be cancelled. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Cancellation of all directory numbers is possible.
cancelled from the measurement .
Cancellation of all groups is possible.
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be cancelled
from the measurement.
Cancellation of all trunk groups is possible.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ADPHMEAS-3 -
DISP ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command displays the job data and the state of the job and of the
measurement objects which selected.
<job number>.
1. DISP ADPHMEAS- OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. DISP ADPHMEAS- PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
3. DISP ADPHMEAS- STATUS STATUS
1. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be displayed.
Display of all trunk groups is possible.
In combination with STATUS only all trunk groups may be selected.
displayed.
Display of all groups is possible.
directory number to be displayed. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Display of all directory numbers is possible.
In combination with STATUS only all directory numbers may be selected.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ADPHMEAS-1 +
DISP ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP ADPHMEAS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
displayed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ADPHMEAS-3 +
DISP ADPHMEAS
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
STATUS
-
] ]
] DISP ADPHMEAS : STATUS= [,DN= [,LAC=]] [,TGNO=] [,GRP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STATUS STATUS OF MEASUREMENT OBJECT
This parameter specifies the state of the measurement objects to be
displayed. Any combination of states can be linked with &.
Display of all states is also possible.
Combination with the other parameters is possible.
ACTIVE OBJECT IS ACTIVE
CANCELED OBJECT IS CANCELED
NOTEXIST OBJECT IS NOT EXISTING
WAITING OBJECT IS WAITING
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
displayed.
DISP ADPHMEAS-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ADPHMEAS
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ADPHMEAS-5 -
ENTR ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command specifies the measurement objects to be entered in the
measurement. This command can also be executed during an active
measurement.
If a measurement object is entered in an active measurement, the
measurement for this object will begin at the next measurement day.
The maximum number of measurement objects is 200 for trunk groups and
600 for private branch exchanges.
1. ENTR ADPHMEAS- OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. ENTR ADPHMEAS- PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
1. Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group for which
traffic data are to be recorded.
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter specifies the name of a group for whose elements
measurements are to be obtained. Only groups of GRPTYP = TGRP or
PBX are possible.
A maximum of 10 faulty elements of a group will be accepted.
You can cancel faulty elements from the measurement with the command
CAN ADPHMEAS .
directory number. Up to 32 parameter values can be linked
with &.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ADPHMEAS-1 +
ENTR ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR ADPHMEAS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
directory number. Up to 32 parameter values can be linked
with &.
This parameter specifies the name of a group for whose elements
measurements are to be obtained. Only groups of GRPTYP = TGRP or
PBX are possible.
A maximum of 10 faulty elements of a group will be accepted.
You can cancel faulty elements from the measurement with the command
CAN ADPHMEAS .
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group for which
traffic data are to be recorded.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ADPHMEAS-3 -
DISP AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays the contents of archive files.
The messages can be specified either in their entirety or as
a list containing general information (table of contents) for the
selected message entries. The amount of messages can be restricted by
specifying the entry numbers.
Prerequisite:
- The file must exist and have the attributes of an archive file.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP AENTRY : AFILE= [,AENTRY=] [,TOC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Notes:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the filename.
AENTRY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This parameter specifies the entry number assigned by the FCP to
incoming messages for an archive file. When displaying archive files, a
list of ranges (intervals) of these numbers can be specified as limits.
Notes:
- A maximum of two intervals can be linked with &.
- If 99999 is entered, the most recently entered message is displayed.
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS
This parameter specifies whether only message headers or whole messages
are displayed.
NO NO TABLE OF CONTENTS
YES TABLE OF CONTENTS
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AENTRY-1 -
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays data from an archive file. These data are
restricted via parameter entry.
of records from an archive file to the output device. The search
direction can be set either to ascending or descending. As long as the
individual conditions from the combination of named possibilities do not
contradict themselves, they are linked to form an overall condition.
The following can be selected:
- messages with a certain job number
- messages which are determined by context and
format number or only by context
- alarm messages, limited to alarms with a certain priority
- messages which have been entered within a specified period of time
- If neither DATE nor TIME are specified, the search covers
the entire file.
- If only DATE is specified, the search covers all entries within
the specified DATE interval.
- If only TIME is specified, the current date is implied for DATE.
- If DATE and TIME are specified, the search covers all entries in
each of the specified TIME intervals on every day included in the
specified DATE intervals.
Prerequisite:
- The specified file must exist and must be created with the attributes
of an archive file.
Input format
-
] ]
] SEL AENTRY : AFILE= [,TIME=] [,DATE=] [,JN=] [,MSG=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ALPRIO=] [,DIR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time as one of the search
criteria for selecting records from an archive file.
Note:
- Seconds are ignored during conversion to an internal format.
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL AENTRY-1 +
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES=
unit values.
c: SECONDS=
unit values.
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date as one of the search criteria.
Note:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies job number as one of the search criteria.
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter specifies a message.
Note:
- There are two kinds of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following
possible values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
SYPUPD SYSTEM PANEL UPDATE
SYPCHNG SYSTEM PANEL CHANGE
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
SEL AENTRY-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.
unit values.
b: FORMAT=
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm output message
as a search criteria.
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the read direction when archive file records
are searched.
FORW FORWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
BACKW BACKWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
Default: FORW
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL AENTRY-3 -
CAN AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE
This command cancels an archive file.
Prerequisite:
- the archive file must exist
- the archive file may not be assigned to any device group
- If output suppression is deactivated, the AFILE may not
be the output device.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN AFILE : AFILE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies an archive file.
Note:
not appear consecutively in the file name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN AFILE-1 -
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE
This command creates an archive file to act as a functional device,
its static attributes (size and type) and the variable attributes
(threshold limits and alarm) which can be set by administration .
Notes:
A threshold triple consists of THRU, THRD and THRF.
If the occupancy level of the archive file exceeds the threshold value
set in THRU,
- a system panel alarm is output if the corresponding THRF value
is set to ALARM
- an INFO system message is sent if the corresponding THRF value
is set to NOALARM.
These alarm indications are not canceled until the occupancy level of the
archive file is less than the value set in THRD.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR AFILE : AFILE= ,SIZE= ,TYPE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
SIZE SIZE OF AN ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of an archive file in 2 KB blocks.
Notes:
- The theoretical upper limit is dependent on the hardware.
- The command is rejected if the specified memory requirement is
too big or too small.
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies whether an archive file is to be created
as a single file or a double file.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level of an archive file
at which the alarm condition should commence.
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR AFILE-1 +
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
lower threshold value, i.e. THRU=0, THRD>0 is not allowed.
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
condition (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level of
an archive file), is to be reset.
Note:
- An upper threshold value must not be less than the associated
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRF THRESHOLD FEATURES
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGES
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
CR AFILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR AFILE-3 -
DISP AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command displays a table of archive files and their respective
attributes. The information can be displayed for individual archive
files or for all archive files.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP AFILE : AFILE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies an archive file. It can be input
in partially qualified form. Up to five parameter values can
be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AFILE-1 -
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command modifies the threshold values and threshold value
characteristics of an archive file.
Threshold values THRU and THRD, together with the threshold value
characteristic THRF, make up a threshold value triple
(THRU,THRD,THRF).
A maximum of three threshold value triples can be assigned to an archive
file. However, they must have different THRU components.
While THRU, THRD and THRF must be entered in the input form of
a-b-c, the user can use dummy value 0 for THRU, THRD and dummy value
NOALARM for THRF, if necessary.
The following operations are possible:
- Adding up to three threshold value triples:
The components THRU,THRD and THRF must be entered like a-b-c/
- Switching between up to three threshold value triples:
Independent of modification the old THRU parameter a-b-c must be
specified for identification.
The components THRU THRD and THRF will be changed by entering
d-e-f/a-b-c with d-e-f as new and a-b-c as old input parameters.
- Canceling up to three threshold value triples:
The threshold value triple (THRU,THRD,THRF), that will be
canceled, must be changed to the triple (0,0,NOALARM).
Prerequisite:
- The available threshold value triples are known and can be displayed
using command DISP AFILE.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD AFILE : AFILE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
not appear consecutively in the file name.
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which an alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be initiated.
Notes:
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD AFILE-1 +
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be reset.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if an upper threshold value is below the
associated lower threshold value THRU=0, THRD>0.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
Default: NOALARM
MOD AFILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD AFILE-3 -
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS
This command displays the current alarm status of objects.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALARM : [OBJECT=] [,ALSTAT=] [,ALPRIO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
SAL SERVICE ALARM
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
This parameter describes the fault clearance status of an
alarm condition. The processing code is a part of the alarm
file entry.
Note:
into consideration.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
This parameter specifies the alarm priority.
Note:
into consideration.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALARM-1 +
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
E N D
DISP ALARM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE
This command displays the alarm message. The information output is
organized according to the time at which the alarm occurred. Current
messages are displayed first.
Input format
-
] ]
] SRCH ALARM : <OBJECT= ,ALSTAT= ,ALPRIO= ,MSGNO=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
into consideration.
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
SAL SERVICE ALARM
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
file entry.
Note:
into consideration.
NC NOT CLEARED
All alarms with NP, D, IP and UR
are displayed.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SRCH ALARM-1 +
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
E N D
SRCH ALARM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command cancels the present entries of the alarm display suppression
and sets the default values.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT ALDISP : WDCAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
The following values are possible:
- WO for workday.
- EH for half weekend day.
This means a portion of a day with the half weekend
day category ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- EF for full weekend day.
This means the full day with 24 hours and with the full
weekend day category.
- HH for half holiday international. It means a day
with the half holiday category, which contains only a
portion of a day ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- HO for full holiday international. It means a day
with the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
- HN for full holiday national. It means a day with
the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
International holidays are applicable for all countries.
National holidays are applicable only for one country.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HN > HO > HH > EF > EH > WO
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ALDISP-1 -
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command sets the parameters for the alarm display suppression.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified weekday category.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT ALDISP : ALPRIO= ,WDCAT= ,BEGTIM= ,ENDTIM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the priorities for the alarm display
suppression.
MINOR MINOR ALARM
display of minor alarms are suppressed
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
display of minor and major alarms are suppressed
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT ALDISP-1 +
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the alarm display
suppression.
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the alarm display
suppression.
E N D
DACT ALDISP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY
This command lists the parameters of alarm display suppression.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALDISP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALDISP-1 -
CAN ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALIAS NAME
This command has two functions:
- Cancel an alias name from the alias name table.
- Start the garbage treatment.
Which function has to be performed is indicated by the parameter given.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ALIAS= ] ]
] CAN ALIAS : -GARBAGE= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALIAS ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter indicates that an alias name of a file shall be
cancelled.
The value of the parameter specifies the alias name to be cancelled.
After the execution of this command this file can just be accessed with
the file name.
Prerequisites:
- The alias name must exist.
- The file must not be in use by using the alias name.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
GARBAGE GARBAGE TREATMENT
This parameter indicates that the user wants to start the garbage
treatment.
This command starts the garbage treatment to check the shadow catalog
whether there are existing alias names to files, that are not existing
anymore.
As long as the garbage treatment is running no other command to modify
the alias name table will be accepted.
Y START GARBAGE TREATMENT
YES START GARBAGE TREATMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ALIAS-1 -
DISP ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES
This command displays a list of all existing alias names or a specified
subset of them.
The list contains the alias names and the file names which they are
related to.
Notes:
- If no parameter is given all alias names are displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]]ALIAS=]] ]
] DISP ALIAS : ]-FILE= ] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the alias name(s) that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the alias names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not given or supplied with X, all existing alias
names with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified alias name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching alias names
with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified alias name then
the relation of this name to the original file name will be
displayed.
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name(s) with related alias names,
that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the file names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is supplied with X, all file names with their
related alias names are displayed (so far there are related alias
names).
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified file name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching file names
with their related alias names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified file name then
the related alias name to the original file name will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALIAS-1 -
ENTR ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME
This command creates an alias name to an existing disk file.
Afterwards this file can be accessed either with the original file name or the
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist.
- The file must not be a generation file.
- The alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias name).
- The file must not yet have an alias name.
- The alias name must not be file name protected.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALIAS : FILE= ,ALIAS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an existing file.
Notes:
- The file name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter specifies the alias name for the file.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALIAS-1 -
MOD ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ALIAS NAME
This command renames the alias name of disk files.
After the execution of this command the old alias name is no longer valid.
The file can only be accessed by using the original file name or the new
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The old alias name must exist.
- The new alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias
name).
- The new alias name must not be file name protected.
- The file must not be in use by using the old alias name.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD ALIAS : ALIAS= ,NEWALIAS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALIAS OLD ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the old alias name that shall be renamed.
Notes:
- The old alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
NEWALIAS NEW ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the new alias name.
Notes:
- The new alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ALIAS-1 -
DISP ALMODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM MODE
This command displays the current system panel alarm mode.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALMODE ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALMODE-1 -
ENTR ALMODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM MODE
This command enters an alarm signaling mode on the system panel.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALMODE : <STATUS= ,HLIM=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies the status for the output and
forwarding of alarms on the system panel display. The
characteristics assigned to a status are defined in the
system panel firmware.
ALSTAT0 ALARM FORWARDING BLOCKED
ALSTAT1 ALARM STATUS 1
ALSTAT2 ALARM STATUS 2
HLIM LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
This parameter specifies whether the horn time limit for the
system panel display is switched on.
NO NO LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
YES LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALMODE-1 -
CAN ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM PERIOD
This command cancels the present entries of the periodic alarm status
report and sets the default values.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN ALPER : WDCAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the periodic alarm
status report.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ALPER-1 -
DISP ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP ALARM PERIOD
This command displays all parameters of the periodic alarm status report.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALPER ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALPER-1 -
ENTR ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM PERIOD
This command sets the parameters for the periodic alarm status report.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for the
specified weekday category.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALPER : WDCAT= ,BEGTIM= ,ENDTIM= ,PERIOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the periodic alarm
status report.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the periodic alarm
status report.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALPER-1 +
ENTR ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the periodic alarm
status report.
PERIOD PERIOD
This parameter specifies the period of the periodic alarm
status report, which can be only printed on the hour.
The value entered for the parameter PERIOD is the multiple of
an hour. Therefore, within the possible range, the shortest
period is an hour, the longest a day.
E N D
ENTR ALPER-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY
This command cancels the individual priorities of a specified alarm unit.
1. CAN ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. CAN ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
-
] ]
] CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU with individual alarm priorities
is specified in the three high-order positions (value range 1 to 255 ).
The lowest-order position must always be 0.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ALPRIO-1 +
CAN ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
-
] ]
] CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
CCSLS COMMON CHANNEL SIGN. LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the affected linkset name with individual
alarm priority.
E N D
CAN ALPRIO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY
This command displays the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system. All alarm priorities can be displayed.
1. DISP ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. DISP ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. DISP ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALPRIO-1 +
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES
-
] ]
] DISP ALPRIO : [ALUNIT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ADMFIL1 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 1
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CALLID1 CALL IDENTIFICATION 1
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CDBUS CD-BUS FAILURE
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
CSC CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
CYCFIL1 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 1
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPAUC IOP AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter is only valid for DE3.
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
DISP ALPRIO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALPRIO-3 +
DISP ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
alarm priority.
E N D
DISP ALPRIO-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY
This command modifies the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system.
- Units which are in MBL or CBL are displayed on the system panel
by a HARDWARE UNITS lamp.
This display cannot be changed with this command.
Nor can the displays for the advisory messages CAT1, CAT2, TGBL,
SIGLBL and ALDSUP be changed with this command.
- Procedures to determine an operational restriction are implemented
for some alarm units. If one of these procedures finds an operational
restriction for the unit with alarm condition, the alarm priority is
raised to CRITICAL. This alarm priority cannot be changed with this
command.
- DLU failures are displayed on the system panel with the double LED
for the line/trunk group. The lamp for remote equipment (under the
the line/trunk group lamp) also lights up. The lamp display for
remote equipment cannot be changed with this command.
- System panel failures trigger an alarm on the double LED. The alarm
priority for this lamp (at present CRITICAL) is determined in the
system panel firmware. However, the priority for this alarm can be
changed for other alarm units (system status displays, output messages,
critical indicator channel to SCC) with this command.
Prerequisite:
- The priorities for external exchange alarms are part of the SYPC firm-
ware.
- If the system panel has only one LED for a particular alarm, ALPRIO
cannot be set to CRITICAL because this requires 2 LEDs.
- The use of the command only makes sense, if there is no active alarm
of the specified ALUNIT, because different priorities of active alarm
and new alarm with modified alarm priority lead to different alarm
signaling.
1. ENTR ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. ENTR ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. ENTR ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALPRIO-1 +
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
ENTR ALPRIO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES
Prerequisite:
The command is rejected if no service degradation condition is defined
for the specified ALUNIT.
-
] ]
] ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPAUC IOP AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED O&M DEVICES
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALPRIO-3 +
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
ENTR ALPRIO-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ,ALPRIO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
alarm priority.
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALPRIO-5 -
DISP ALPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE
This command displays
- all alarm profiles for alarm signaling which are currently set in the
system;
- the assignment of alarm priorities ( non-degrading and degrading ) to
the existing probable causes for a specified alarm profile identifica-
tion.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALPROF : ALPROF= [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the alarm profile identification for
alarm signaling.
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the output format.
CONTENTS CONTENTS OF ALARM PROFILE
SUMMARY SUMMARY OF EXISTING PROFILES
Default: SUMMARY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALPROF-1 -
SET ALSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET ALARM STATUS
This command sets the processing code which describes the current status
of fault clearance in the alarm file stored for each alarm.
Input format
-
] ]
] SET ALSTAT : MSGNO= ,ALSTAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
file entry.
D DEFERRED
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
IP IN PROCESS
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
C CLEARED
This value applies for
- System operator alarms (SYOP)
- Administration alarms (ADMINAL)
Exception: Alarms with alarm class THRES
- Recovery alarms (RECOV )
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET ALSTAT-1 -
CAN ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM TEXT
This command cancels an existing alarm text.
Prerequisite:
- The cancellation job is only executed if the alarm text in
question is not assigned to an external alarm circuit.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ALTEXT-1 -
DISP ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT
This command displays the alarm texts assigned to a number.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ALTEXT-1 -
ENTR ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM TEXT
This command enters an alarm text and assigns a text number to it.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if a text already exists under
this number.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ,TEXT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
TEXT TEXT
This parameter consists of a text (freely definable).
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ALTEXT-1 -
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AMA DATA
This command displays AMA records of a subscriber which are stored in
an AMA file on disk or on magnetic tape/optical disk (created with
TRANS FILE).Only the AMA records with a fixed format length of
32 or 64 byte can be displayed with this command.
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP AMA : DN= [,VSN=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber for
which the AMA record was made (inclusive areacode but without
discrimination digits).
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered,the file is assumed to be on disk.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME.
Default value of parameters BEGDATE,BEGTIME:
BEGDATE BEGTIME LOWER LIMIT OF DISPLAY INTERVAL
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
x x (BEGDATE,BEGTIME).
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AMA-1 +
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE.
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with ENDTIME.
Default value of parameters ENDDATE,ENDTIME:
ENDDATE ENDTIME UPPER LIMIT OF DISPLAY INTERVAL
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
x x (ENDDATE,ENDTIME).
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with ENDDATE.
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
DISP AMA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape/optical
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICAMA
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AMA-3 -
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command activates the announcement elements
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, or INDAS pause.
The versions of the announcement elements which are to be
activated will change.
FUTURE or PAST version changes to CURRENT.
A previously activated definition of these announcement elements
will be saved by changing its version from CURRENT to PAST.
Prerequisites:
- The project-specific INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant
must be available.
- The requested version of the announcement element definition
must be available.
FUTURE version of an announcement element exists if the command
EDIT ANELEM
was processed to the requested elements beforehand.
PAST version of an announcement element exists if the commands
EDIT ANELEM,
ACT ANELEM,
DACT ANELEM
were processed to the requested elements beforehand.
- Announcement elements INDAS phrase are allowed to be activated
only if all needed INDAS words are activated beforehand.
Notes:
- Each defined announcement element is either activated for call
processing or not.
Depending on this state, different versions may exist.
CURRENT for activated elements, and
PAST or
FUTURE for non-activated elements.
At the same time an announcement element cannot exist
for PAST and FUTURE version.
- The version of defined announcement elements may be changed
in consequence of the following administration commands:
EDIT ANELEM
CAN ANELEM
ACT ANELEM
DACT ANELEM
- Announcement elements may be displayed by DISP ANELEM.
1. ACT ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. ACT ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. ACT ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. ACT ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format activates the INDAS pauses.
Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,ELEMVERS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in the OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ANELEM-1 +
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
4 characters from the
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PAUSEALL ANELEM ALL INDAS PAUSE
All INDAS pauses.
This value is not allowed to be linked
with other values.
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
Pause after the end of each announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
Pause between two different languages of
an announcement.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
Pause between two phrases of an announcement.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
Pause before the start of each announcement
cycle.
ELEMVERS VERSION OF ANN. ELEM.
This parameter specifies the version for the announcement elements
to be activated.
FUTURE FUTURE VERSION
PAST PAST VERSION
Default: FUTURE
ACT ANELEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format activates INDAS phrases.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,ELEMVERS=] ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
256-1023, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be activated.
The useful number range follows from
the project-specific INDAS document
related to the OCANEQ variant.
to be activated.
PAST PAST VERSION
Default: FUTURE
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ANELEM-3 +
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
This input format activates INDAS standard announcements.
Up to 5 INDAS standard announcement numbers may be entered.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
to be activated.
PAST PAST VERSION
Default: FUTURE
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
ACT ANELEM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ANELEM-5 +
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format activates INDAS words.
Up to 32 INDAS word numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
to be activated.
PAST PAST VERSION
Default: FUTURE
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
ACT ANELEM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ANELEM-7 -
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command cancels the announcement elements
The previously edited or the currently deactivated definition of
the announcement elements is lost.
FUTURE or PAST version of canceled elements will be deleted.
Prerequisites:
must be available.
- Only those announcement elements are allowed to be canceled
which are not currently activated for call processing.
must be available.
FUTURE version of an announcement element exists if the command
EDIT ANELEM
was processed to the requested elements beforehand.
PAST version of an announcement element exists if the commands
EDIT ANELEM,
ACT ANELEM,
DACT ANELEM
Notes:
processing or not.
PAST or
EDIT ANELEM
CAN ANELEM
ACT ANELEM
DACT ANELEM
1. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format cancels the relation between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,ELEMVERS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANELEM-1 +
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
All INDAS pauses.
with other values.
an announcement.
cycle.
to be canceled.
PAST PAST VERSION
CAN ANELEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
INDAS phrases and INDAS phrase definitions.
Up to 10 INDAS phrase numbers may be entered.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,ELEMVERS= ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
the announcement elements to be canceled.
to be canceled.
PAST PAST VERSION
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANELEM-3 +
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN ANELEM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
INDAS standard announcements and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
to be canceled.
PAST PAST VERSION
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANELEM-5 +
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN ANELEM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
can be linked.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
to be canceled.
PAST PAST VERSION
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANELEM-7 +
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CAN ANELEM-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command deactivates the announcement elements
The version of the announcement elements which are to be
deactivated will change.
CURRENT version changes to PAST.
A previous definition of these announcement elements
existing in a FUTURE or PAST version will be lost.
Prerequisites:
must be available.
must be available.
CURRENT version of an announcement element exists if the
commands
EDIT ANELEM
ACT ANELEM,
- Announcement elements INDAS word are not allowed to be deactivated
if they are used by any active INDAS phrase.
Notes:
- The deactivation of announcement elements is considered
dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel determine by
entering + or - whether the command is to be executed.
processing or not.
PAST or
EDIT ANELEM
CAN ANELEM
ACT ANELEM
DACT ANELEM
1. DACT ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. DACT ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. DACT ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. DACT ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format deactivates INDAS pauses.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT ANELEM-1 +
DACT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
All INDAS pauses.
with other values.
an announcement.
cycle.
DACT ANELEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format deactivates INDAS phrases.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
the announcement elements to be deactivated.
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT ANELEM-3 +
DACT ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format deactivates INDAS standard announcements.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
DACT ANELEM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format deactivates INDAS words.
can be linked.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT ANELEM-5 -
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command displays the announcement elements
Prerequisites:
must be available.
- Only those announcement elements will be displayed, which are
previously defined.
Definition will be done by EDIT ANELEM.
- Only pauses are defined previously by initialisation.
Notes:
processing or not.
PAST or
- The version of defined announcement elements may be change
EDIT ANELEM
CAN ANELEM
ACT ANELEM
DACT ANELEM
<job number>.
1. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format displays the links between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
-
] ]
] DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,ELEMVERS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANELEM-1 +
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
All INDAS pauses.
with other values.
an announcement.
cycle.
This parameter specifies one of up to three versions
If X is specified, the announcement elements are
displayed for all the versions for which they are defined.
CURRENT CURRENT VERSION
PAST PAST VERSION
X ALL VERSIONS
Default: CURRENT
DISP ANELEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format displays the components of the
INDAS phrase definition.
Each component may consist of up to 4 units:
ACTION CODE
FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM-NO
MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
OFFSET
The phrase definition controls the composition of
text fragments to an announcement.
Up to 32 INDAS phrase numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
-
] ]
] DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,ELEMVERS=] [,LANGUAGE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
the announcement elements to be displayed.
PAST PAST VERSION
X ALL VERSIONS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANELEM-3 +
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: CURRENT
displayed for all the languages for which they are defined.
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
X ALL OFFICIAL LANGUAGES
Default: X
DISP ANELEM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format displays the arrangement of
INDAS standard announcements out of OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 32 INDAS standard announcement numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
-
] ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
PAST PAST VERSION
X ALL VERSIONS
Default: CURRENT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANELEM-5 +
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
Default: X
DISP ANELEM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format displays the links between
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
can be linked.
-
] ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
PAST PAST VERSION
X ALL VERSIONS
Default: CURRENT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANELEM-7 +
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes :
OCANEQ variant.
Default: X
E N D
DISP ANELEM-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDIT ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command allows to compose announcements played by INDAS with OCANEQ
using a set of text fragments stored in the OCANEQ.
A text fragment is the smallest physical speech unit and can be addressed
by its text fragment number.
A text fragment consists of one or more spoken words or is a pause or
a tone burst.
Any sequence of text fragments can be composed.
Two types of announcements are differentiated:
- Individual announcement
logical addressed by one or more announcement elements INDAS PHRASE.
Each INDAS phrase consists of some fixed text parts and some variable
parts (e.g. directory number, hour, minute, week-day) determined by
INDAS parameter using groups of logical announcement elements
INDAS WORD that can be addressed.
- Standard announcement
logical addressed by the announcement element INDAS STD. ANN.
It consists of only fixed text parts. No variable parts are included.
In system each announcement element defined by INDAS may be present
in two versions:
- the CURRENT version equivalent to the version activated for
call processing
- the PAST or FUTURE version which can be used only by
INDAS audible checking.
Announcement elements processed with EDIT ANELEM are stored as
element version FUTURE.
Any element version already existing in this FUTURE version will be
overwritten, and similarly a PAST version will be overwritten by a
FUTURE version.
Prerequisites:
must be available.
- Memory space for the OCANEQ variant must be provided in the database
(see MOD DBSIZE).
Notes:
- If the OCANEQ variant is not yet registered by ENTR OCAVAR or
EDIT ANELEM or User Interaction database administration beforehand,
a new element will be used in the data table.
- The command is rejected if 10 OCANEQ variants are already registered
in system (see also ENTR OCAVAR).
- The available text fragments and the text fragment numbers that belong
to are to be taken from the project-specific INDAS document related to
the OCANEQ variant.
- The command makes sense only for LANGUAGE values identified by the
project-specific INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
MOD CALLPOPT adapts how an announcement is played in these identified
languages or in a language sequence dependent upon the exchange
location.
EDIT ANELEM
CAN ANELEM
ACT ANELEM
DACT ANELEM
1. EDIT ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. EDIT ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. EDIT ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. EDIT ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT ANELEM-1 +
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format is used to edit the allocation of one text fragment
to each type of the announcement element INDAS PAUSE.
INDAS pause specifies all pauses defined by INDAS which are inserted
according to its attribute if an announcment is to be played. They are
used separately from an INDAS phrase or INDAS standard announcement
definition.
An INDAS pause consists of just one text fragment.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EDIT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PAUSE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
Notes:
- Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANN. ELEM. INDAS PAUSE
A pause is inserted at the end of each
announcement cycle.
A pause is inserted between two different
languages if the announcement is to be
played in more than one language.
A pause is inserted between two phrases
if the individual announcement consists
of more than one INDAS phrase.
A pause is inserted at the start of each
announcement cycle.
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
EDIT ANELEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to edit an announcement element INDAS PHRASE
by entering its phrase definition.
An INDAS phrase consists of some fixed text parts defined by one or more
text fragments and some variable parts defined by text fragments which
are determined by INDAS parameter using groups of INDAS words.
Notes:
- INDAS functions are used to identify individual announcements
in the system.
Only INDAS phrases selected by INDAS functions are allowed.
The allowed number range is to be taken from the project-specific
INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
The numbers of parameters and specific meaning assigned to an
INDAS phrase are also described.
INDAS phrases applied by User Interaction must have phrase
numbers between 801 and 900.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EDIT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PHDEFIN= ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
PHDEFIN INDAS PHRASE DEF. COMPONENTS
This parameter specifies the INDAS phrase definition.
The phrase definition belonging to an INDAS phrase describes the
various modifications of the announcement text for an individual
announcement as a function of the actual INDAS parameter values
and considers the foreign-language requirements.
It states how to arrange the sequence of fixed text fragments and
locates the positions where the text fragments determined by the
INDAS parameter values must be inserted. An INDAS parameter is
represented by a fixed assigned parameter number. In this way
the phrase definition controls the composition of text fragments
to an announcement.
For each allowed INDAS phrase and valid language the phrase
definition in its application form is part of the project-specific
INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a phrase definition a formal definition language
similar to a programming language is used.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT ANELEM-3 +
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Syntax of the INDAS phrase definition components:
The following INDAS phrase definition components are specified
completed by the permissible combination of the units belonging
to:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment.
e.g.: compose the fixed text part of an announcement.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
with input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 16383, range of decimal numbers
- "Insert parameter definition":
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter as follows:
fit in the text fragment which is determined by the parameter value
using the corresponding INDAS word.
INPAR-<parameter no>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODNONE
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVNONE
(MLVNONE only for an INDAS parameter
with possibly more than one value)
with input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
using the corresponding INDAS word modified to lower voice.
e.g.: the INDAS parameter is the final part of an announcement.
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODLOWER
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVLOWER
(MLVLOWER only for an INDAS parameter
with input values:
Notes:
- This modification is not allowed for INDAS phrases
applied by User Interaction.
Use the following statement as compensation.
using the corresponding INDAS word modified plus or minus by a
specified INDAS word offset. This corresponds with a change to
an alternative group of text fragments. The alternative INDAS
word range, pointed by offset, must have at least the size of
the original INDAS word range. Both INDAS word ranges must have
a compatible group meaning for each INDAS word.
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "month" by its name
("january") or alternatively by its ordinal number ("first").
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODPLUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODMINUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVPLUS-<word offset>
(MLVPLUS only for an INDAS parameter
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVMINUS-<word offset>
(MLVMINUS only for an INDAS parameter
with input values:
<word offset> = 1 .. 1023, range of decimal numbers
- "Parameter block definition":
Statement to process an INDAS parameter with possibly more than
EDIT ANELEM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
one value.
e.g.: the INDAS parameter "directory number".
PARDO-<parameter no>
with input values:
- "IF condition block definition":
An "Insert fragment definition" or "Insert parameter definition"
is intended to become dependent on the value(s) of one
INDAS parameter or some INDAS parameters correlated to each other.
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "minute" unless full hour.
A single condition will be initiated by IFPAR. The parameter
value must be specified by its INDAS word.
Conditions more than one can be combined by ANDIFPAR ("and"
relation i.e. all conditions must be true) or ORIFPAR ("or"
relation i.e. one of the conditions must be true).
ELSIFPAR corresponds to a nested "IF condition definition" in
the form of ELSE IFPAR.
If the condition(s) stated by IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ANDIFPAR /
ORIFPAR is(are) true the definition statement(s) following will
be executed. If the condition(s) is(are) false, the definition
statement(s) following ELSE (if existent) respectively ENDIF
will be executed.
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
with input values:
<word no> = 1 .. 1023, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = EQUAL
NOTEQUAL
LESS
GREATER
or
(only for an INDAS parameter with possibly more than one value)
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
with input values:
<condition> = LASTWORD
NOTLASTW
SELECTED
The condition is true if the INDAS parameter has
at least one value.
or
ELSE
- "End definition" :
Statement to terminate a block definition or phrase definition.
ENDDO
ENDIF
END
The following requirements on the INDAS phrase definition must be
observed:
- A "definition block" must consist of one
"Insert fragment definition" or
"Insert parameter definition" or
"Parameter block definition" or
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT ANELEM-5 +
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"IF condition block definition".
- A "Parameter block definition" is mandatory if an INDAS
parameter with possibly more than one value shall be processed.
For all that an exception is to consider:
The obligatory input of a "Parameter block definition" is
ruled out
only if the last value of the INDAS parameter has to be
modified exclusively and the "Insert parameter
definition" corresponding is formed with
MLVLOWER, MLVPLUS, MLVMINUS
or if none of the INDAS parameter values has to be modified
and the "Insert parameter definition" corresponding
is formed with MLVNONE
or if the condition(s) of an "IF condition block definition"
is(are) formed with SELECTED.
- The body of a "Parameter block definition" must contain at least
one "definition block" and must be terminated with ENDDO.
- The "IF condition block definition" must contain at least one
statement initiated by IFPAR and must be terminated with ENDIF.
- For each case of an "IF condition block definition" initiated by
IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ELSE the body must contain at least one
"definition block".
- Nested "IF condition block definitions" and/or "Parameter block
definitions" may be used up to the maximum nested level = 10.
- Nested "Parameter block definitions" for the same parameter
number are not allowed.
- The body of an INDAS phrase definition must contain at least one
"definition block" and must be terminated with END.
For an INDAS phrase without any INDAS parameter the body of the
INDAS phrase definition is allowed to be empty.
Notes:
- Within an INDAS phrase, INDAS parameters may be rearranged from
the original order indicated by the parameter numbers.
The parameter number retains the meaning of the INDAS parameter.
- Up to 72 INDAS phrase definition components can be linked with &.
The INDAS phrase definition is rejected if either too many
components are entered or the number of entered components
plus the number of entered components with more than two
units exceeds 96.
- The order of the INDAS phrase definition components must be
considered.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ACTION CODE
ANDIFPAR AND IF PARAMETER CONDITION
ELSE ELSE CONDITION
ELSIFPAR ELSE IF PARAMETER CONDITION
END END OF PHRASE DEFINITION
ENDDO END OF PARAMETER DO LOOP
ENDIF END OF IF CONDITION
IFPAR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
INPAR INSERT PARAMETER
ORIFPAR OR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
PARDO FOR ALL PARAMETER VALUES DO
b: FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM-NO=
c: MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
EQUAL - EQUAL
]GREATER ] GREATER
]LASTWORD] LAST WORD
]LESS ] LESS
]MLVLOWER] MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: LOWER
]MLVMINUS] MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: DECRE.
]MLVNONE ] MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: NOT
]MLVPLUS ] MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: INCRE.
]MODLOWER] MOD. PARAM VALUE: LOWER VOICE
]MODMINUS] MOD. PARAM VALUE: DECREMENT
EDIT ANELEM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]MODNONE ] MOD. PARAM VALUE: NOT
]MODPLUS ] MOD. PARAM VALUE: INCREMENT
]NOTEQUAL] NOT EQUAL
]NOTLASTW] NOT LAST WORD
~SELECTED- SELECTED
d: OFFSET=
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in exchange.
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT ANELEM-7 +
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format is used to edit the allocation of one or more
text fragments to an announcement element INDAS STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT.
Notes:
- The standard announcement number specified in this must be used as
STANNO for CR ANGRP if the announcement is assigned fixed to an
announcement group leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EDIT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,FRAGM= ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
FRAGM OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER
Notes:
- Up to 15 text fragments can be linked with &.
- If two or more text fragments are linked with &,
the fragments must be in the correct order.
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
EDIT ANELEM-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format is used to edit the allocation of text fragments
to each announcement element INDAS WORD.
An INDAS word is the smallest logical speech unit and addressable by its
INDAS word number. A group of INDAS words represents an INDAS parameter
with its definite meaning. An INDAS parameter is a variable part of an
INDAS phrase. Each INDAS word consists of just one text fragment.
Notes:
- The meaning of the defined INDAS words and the INDAS word numbers
that belong to are to be taken from the project-specific INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EDIT ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,WORD= ,LANGUAGE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Up to 32 INDAS words and/or ranges can be linked with &.
- The input of an INDAS word range is only allowed if the
resulting number of INDAS words equals those of text fragments
(implicit increment one by one for both), or exactly one and
the same text fragment is assigned to all INDAS words of the
given range.
- An INDAS word number may not be entered twice with different
text fragment numbers.
a-b
a: INDAS WORD NUMBER=
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT ANELEM-9 +
EDIT ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OCANEQ variant.
E N D
EDIT ANELEM-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANGCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command cancels the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must already exist.
- The given announcement group data to be canceled must already exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be canceled in the
announcement group table.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
DATEANN DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
It is only allowed for time announcement groups
(GCOS=OCANEQ&TIMEANN).
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANGCOS-1 -
ENTR ANGCOS
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command enters the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The given announcement group data (parameters GCOS and BLK) to be entered
must not already exist.
1. ENTR ANGCOS - OCINDANN OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
2. ENTR ANGCOS - OCSTDANN OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
3. ENTR ANGCOS - OCTIMANN OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
4. ENTR ANGCOS - STANDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
individual or user interactive (UI) announcement group leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ANGCOS-1 +
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
standard announcement group leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC= ,SIT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,OCALSEQ=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
N - NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
-NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
ENTR ANGCOS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]Y ] SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES ' SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
L1 -
]L1L2 ]
]L1L2L3 ]
]L1L2L3L4]
]L1L2L4 ]
]L1L2L4L3]
]L1L3 ]
]L1L3L2 ]
]L1L3L2L4]
]L1L3L4 ]
]L1L3L4L2]
]L1L4 ]
]L1L4L2 ]
]L1L4L2L3]
]L1L4L3 ]
]L1L4L3L2]
]L2 ]
]L2L1 ]
]L2L1L3 ]
]L2L1L3L4]
]L2L1L4 ]
]L2L1L4L3]
]L2L3 ]
]L2L3L1 ]
]L2L3L1L4]
]L2L3L4 ]
]L2L3L4L1]
]L2L4 ]
]L2L4L1 ]
]L2L4L1L3]
]L2L4L3 ]
-L2L4L3L1
]L3 ]
]L3L1 ]
]L3L1L2 ]
]L3L1L2L4]
]L3L1L4 ]
]L3L1L4L2]
]L3L2 ]
]L3L2L1 ]
]L3L2L1L4]
]L3L2L4 ]
]L3L2L4L1]
]L3L4 ]
]L3L4L1 ]
]L3L4L1L2]
]L3L4L2 ]
]L3L4L2L1]
]L4 ]
]L4L1 ]
]L4L1L2 ]
]L4L1L2L3]
]L4L1L3 ]
]L4L1L3L2]
]L4L2 ]
]L4L2L1 ]
]L4L2L1L3]
]L4L2L3 ]
]L4L2L3L1]
]L4L3 ]
]L4L3L1 ]
]L4L3L1L2]
]L4L3L2 ]
]L4L3L2L1]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ANGCOS-3 +
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NONE '
ENTR ANGCOS-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
time announcement group leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,TIMINT= ,OCALSEQ=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
< > Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
<DATEANN > DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
TIMINT PERIODIC TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
L1 -
]L1L2 ]
]L1L2L3 ]
]L1L2L3L4]
]L1L2L4 ]
]L1L2L4L3]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ANGCOS-5 +
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]L1L3 ]
]L1L3L2 ]
]L1L3L2L4]
]L1L3L4 ]
]L1L3L4L2]
]L1L4 ]
]L1L4L2 ]
]L1L4L2L3]
]L1L4L3 ]
]L1L4L3L2]
]L2 ]
]L2L1 ]
]L2L1L3 ]
]L2L1L3L4]
]L2L1L4 ]
]L2L1L4L3]
]L2L3 ]
]L2L3L1 ]
]L2L3L1L4]
]L2L3L4 ]
]L2L3L4L1]
]L2L4 ]
]L2L4L1 ]
]L2L4L1L3]
]L2L4L3 ]
-L2L4L3L1
]L3 ]
]L3L1 ]
]L3L1L2 ]
]L3L1L2L4]
]L3L1L4 ]
]L3L1L4L2]
]L3L2 ]
]L3L2L1 ]
]L3L2L1L4]
]L3L2L4 ]
]L3L2L4L1]
]L3L4 ]
]L3L4L1 ]
]L3L4L1L2]
]L3L4L2 ]
]L3L4L2L1]
]L4 ]
]L4L1 ]
]L4L1L2 ]
]L4L1L2L3]
]L4L1L3 ]
]L4L1L3L2]
]L4L2 ]
]L4L2L1 ]
]L4L2L1L3]
]L4L2L3 ]
]L4L2L3L1]
]L4L3 ]
]L4L3L1 ]
]L4L3L1L2]
]L4L3L2 ]
]L4L3L2L1]
NONE '
ENTR ANGCOS-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR ANGCOS
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
standard announcement group that is not applied via OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
announcement group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ANGCOS-7 -
CAN ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command cancels an existing announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement group must not contain any announcement lines.
- No route may exist to this announcement group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANGRP : TGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANGRP-1 -
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command creates an announcement group with the specified trunk group
number. All specified data will be entered in the announcement group table.
Prerequisite:
- The specified trunk group number must not exist within the exchange.
1. CR ANGRP - OCINDANN OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
2. CR ANGRP - OCSTDANN OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
3. CR ANGRP - OCTIMANN OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
4. CR ANGRP - STANDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
This input format creates an announcement group for individual or user
interactive (UI) announcements leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= [,BLK=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
OCANEQ OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This announcement group leads to OCANEQ.
[CHARGABL] CHARGEABLE
BLK BLOCKING
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANGRP-1 +
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
CR ANGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,STANNO= [,BLK=] [,NUMCYC=] [,SIT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,OCALSEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
It is used for:
CHARGABL- CHARGEABLE
] ] Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
]NONBARGE] NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
] ] This value indicates an announcement group for
] ] non barge-in announcement.
~STAGGER - TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
Compatibilities: Only allowed for GCOS=NONBARGE.
announcement group.
BLK BLOCKING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANGRP-3 +
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
< > blocked.
purposes.
Default: 2
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered and GCOS=NONBARGE, then SIT
will be set to NO, otherwise it will be set to YES.
N - NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
-NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
]Y ] SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES ' SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
L1 -
]L1L2 ]
]L1L2L3 ]
]L1L2L3L4]
]L1L2L4 ]
]L1L2L4L3]
]L1L3 ]
]L1L3L2 ]
]L1L3L2L4]
]L1L3L4 ]
]L1L3L4L2]
]L1L4 ]
]L1L4L2 ]
]L1L4L2L3]
]L1L4L3 ]
]L1L4L3L2]
]L2 ]
]L2L1 ]
]L2L1L3 ]
]L2L1L3L4]
]L2L1L4 ]
]L2L1L4L3]
]L2L3 ]
]L2L3L1 ]
]L2L3L1L4]
]L2L3L4 ]
]L2L3L4L1]
]L2L4 ]
]L2L4L1 ]
]L2L4L1L3]
]L2L4L3 ]
-L2L4L3L1
]L3 ]
]L3L1 ]
]L3L1L2 ]
]L3L1L2L4]
]L3L1L4 ]
CR ANGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]L3L1L4L2]
]L3L2 ]
]L3L2L1 ]
]L3L2L1L4]
]L3L2L4 ]
]L3L2L4L1]
]L3L4 ]
]L3L4L1 ]
]L3L4L1L2]
]L3L4L2 ]
]L3L4L2L1]
]L4 ]
]L4L1 ]
]L4L1L2 ]
]L4L1L2L3]
]L4L1L3 ]
]L4L1L3L2]
]L4L2 ]
]L4L2L1 ]
]L4L2L1L3]
]L4L2L3 ]
]L4L2L3L1]
]L4L3 ]
]L4L3L1 ]
]L4L3L1L2]
]L4L3L2 ]
]L4L3L2L1]
NONE '
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANGRP-5 +
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for time announcements
leading to OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,TIMINT= [,BLK=] [,OCALSEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
It is used for:
TIMEANN TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates an announcement group for
time announcements.
CHARGABL- CHARGEABLE
] ] Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
~DATEANN - DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
< > blocked.
purposes.
CR ANGRP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L1 -
]L1L2 ]
]L1L2L3 ]
]L1L2L3L4]
]L1L2L4 ]
]L1L2L4L3]
]L1L3 ]
]L1L3L2 ]
]L1L3L2L4]
]L1L3L4 ]
]L1L3L4L2]
]L1L4 ]
]L1L4L2 ]
]L1L4L2L3]
]L1L4L3 ]
]L1L4L3L2]
]L2 ]
]L2L1 ]
]L2L1L3 ]
]L2L1L3L4]
]L2L1L4 ]
]L2L1L4L3]
]L2L3 ]
]L2L3L1 ]
]L2L3L1L4]
]L2L3L4 ]
]L2L3L4L1]
]L2L4 ]
]L2L4L1 ]
]L2L4L1L3]
]L2L4L3 ]
-L2L4L3L1
]L3 ]
]L3L1 ]
]L3L1L2 ]
]L3L1L2L4]
]L3L1L4 ]
]L3L1L4L2]
]L3L2 ]
]L3L2L1 ]
]L3L2L1L4]
]L3L2L4 ]
]L3L2L4L1]
]L3L4 ]
]L3L4L1 ]
]L3L4L1L2]
]L3L4L2 ]
]L3L4L2L1]
]L4 ]
]L4L1 ]
]L4L1L2 ]
]L4L1L2L3]
]L4L1L3 ]
]L4L1L3L2]
]L4L2 ]
]L4L2L1 ]
]L4L2L1L3]
]L4L2L3 ]
]L4L2L3L1]
]L4L3 ]
]L4L3L1 ]
]L4L3L1L2]
]L4L3L2 ]
]L4L3L2L1]
NONE '
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANGRP-7 +
CR ANGRP
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
that are not applied via OCANEQ.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ANGRP : TGNO= [,GCOS=] [,BLK=] [,STANNO=] [,NUMCYC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
It is used for:
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
< > Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
<NONBARGE> NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
< > This value indicates an announcement group for
< > non barge-in announcement.
<STAGGER > TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
Compatibilities: Only allowed for GCOS=NONBARGE.
BLK BLOCKING
< > blocked.
purposes.
announcement group.
CR ANGRP-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ANGRP
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
Default: 2
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANGRP-9 -
DISP ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command displays the announcement group specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ANGRP : TGNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANGRP-1 -
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA
This command enables announcement trunk group data
to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is accepted.
Notes:
- 8 measurement jobs can be started.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more than one job at
any one time.
- Traffic data are output to OMT or MDD file every 15 minutes.
- The measurement job can be stopped by STOP JOB if it is not a
daily measurement job and if the time parameter values allow a
continuation of the job.
- A STOP JOB command during the last or the only measurement interval
results automatically in job termination.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC ANGRP : TGNO= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the announcement trunk groups
for which traffic data are to be recorded.
Allowed parameter values are:
- X, means: measurement of all created announcement
trunk groups,
or
- up to 16 specified announcement group numbers
(separated by &).
Prerequisites:
- The measurement of all announcement trunk groups (TGNO=X)
is only allowed if the data output will be to the magnetic
disk device (single or daily measurement file).
Notes:
- Only the names of existing announcement trunk groups may be
specified.
Up to 16 trunk groups may be linked with &.
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data will be output to
OMT every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
If this option is selected, a measurement file
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC ANGRP-1 +
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is created and the received traffic data are
output every 15 minutes to this file.
After the parameter has been accepted and at
the end of the last recording, an acknowledgement
is output to the OMT. It includes the name of the
file in which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to single measurement files.
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, a
message appears at OMT.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to daily files.
Additional time parameters are not allowed.
This type of measurement is appropriate to
continuous measurements which start immediately
and have no defined end.
They can only be cancelled by the command
CAN JOB.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7 daily
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created during
command acceptance.
The first data output after command acceptance
will be at the second 15-minute stroke.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day and th
new file for the next day is automatically opened
or created.
Existing files are replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file for
the same day of the week before will be
overwritten.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates may be linked with &. In case of
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
Default: current date
a-b-c
REC ANGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after command
entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
specified.
in daily files.
Default: If no termination date is entered, single day measurement
takes place.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter reduces the daily data delivery by defining
measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
(BEG).
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
are to be recorded.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which are not
linkable with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC ANGRP-3 +
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
REC ANGRP-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command cancels the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be canceled must already exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= ,BLK= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement line.
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANLCOS-1 -
ENTR ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command enters the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be entered must not already exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= <,BLK= ,SEIZMX=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time announcements or when GCOS=NONBARGE is entered for the
announcement group, value 1 is not allowed.
- When GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered for the announcement group and
when value greater than 1 is entered (broadcast), the entered value
of parameter NUMCYC is not relevant.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR ANLCOS-1 -
CAN ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command cancels an existing announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement line must be administrativly blocked.
- The announcement line is no longer seized for call processing.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line to be
canceled.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line with the highest
existing number available in the announcement group
will be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANLN-1 -
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command creates an announcement line with the specified data.
Prerequisites:
- The specified equipment number must exist and has to be free.
Announcement lines may be created on the following port construction types:
DIUPORT
DIURAPRT
INDASPRT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
INDAS0PT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ANLN : TGNO= ,EQN= [,LNO=] [,LCOS=] [,BLK=] [,SEIZMX=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
In the case of a time announcement the following conditions apply:
- It is necessary to combine two adjacent ports to get one "logical"
port. The ports of a coupled pair must belong to the same
announcement group.
- The ports of a coupled pair must have successive port numbers in
which the lower number always has to be odd and the higher even.
- The total number of created announcement lines for a time
announcement belonging to the same LTU:OCANEQ must not exceed 6
lines (3 pairs).
a-b-c-d
a: TIME SWITCH GROUP=
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
d: CHANNEL=
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line to be
created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANLN-1 +
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line will be given
the highest existing number available in the
announcement group plus 1. When the first line
is created, the value is set to 1.
LCOS LINE CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the signaling type when creating an
announcement line, or changes the port construction type.
UIPRT USER INTERACTION PORT
This value indicates a port for user interaction.
It is only possible on port construction type
INDASPRT (ports 1..31 of LTU:OCANEQ). The
announcement group must have been created with
input format OCINDANN. The port construction type
will be changed to UIPRT.
DIGSIG22 DIGITAL SIGNALING 22
LT = 13, DIR = BW/OG/IC,
Sig.= CONTR. F. INTERN. AUTOM. CALL BACK
LT = 12, DIR = OG/IC,
Sig.= E&M SIG. EWSD TO EWSD SC ANI/R1
Sig.= MULDEX SUBSCRIBER
LT = 12 & 13, DIR = BW/OG/IC,
Sig.= CONNEC. PABX DIGITAL WITH DID
Sig.= SIGN.FOR TRUNK-LOOP
LT = 12 & 13, DIR = BW,
Sig.= WAKE UP SERVICE
LT = 12, DIR = BW,
Sig.= CCS7-SPEECH PATCH (TUP)
Sig.= POOL-ECHO SUPPRESSING
Sig.= NUC FOR TRUNKS/SIGN. LINKS
Sig.= F-SIG. EWSD TO EWSD SC + ANI/R1
LT = 13, DIR = BW/IC,
Sig.= LINE TRUNK FOR MONITORING
Sig.= N1-RING DOWN (BASIS-LIP:EI)
Sig.= LOOP/R2D-SIGN. (BASIS-LIP:LW)
Sig.= F-SIG. EWSD TO CIT ALCAT. ANI/R1
Sig.= OPERATOR ASSISTANCE FOR UI
LT = 12 & 13, DIR = BW/IC,
Sig.= ISDN-UP (MOU)
Sig.= F-SIG. EWSD (TX) TO LME (LX) A/R1
LT = 13, DIR = BW/IC,
Sig.= LEG CONTROLLER
Sig.= F-SIG. EWSD (LX) TO LME (LX)
LT = 12, DIR = BW,
Sig.= TESTPHONE CONTROL TPC (BER)
CR ANLN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sig.= SERVICE PORT WITHOUT HW
LT = 12 & 13, DIR = BW/OG/IC,
Sig.= LOADPROGRAM
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
MAINT MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement line is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time announcements or when GCOS=NONBARGE is entered for the
announcement group, value 1 is not allowed.
- When GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered for the announcement group and
when value greater than 1 is entered (broadcast), the entered value
of parameter NUMCYC is not relevant.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, in the case of individual
announcements the default value will be set to 1,
otherwise the default value will be set to 16.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANLN-3 -
DISP ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the announcement line specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
All combinations of linked trunk group numbers and linked line numbers or a
range of line numbers are possible.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number(s) of the announcement line(s)
to be displayed.
Up to 34 line numbers or ranges of line numbers may be linked.
Standard Behavior: If this parameter is not entered, all announcement
lines within the specified announcement group(s)
will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANLN-1 -
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the transient states and the seizure counters for one
or more or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] [,STATUS= [,MODE=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- The administration assigns trunk group numbers for recorded
announcement groups, trunk groups and test equipment groups.
- The trunk group number is used in the sequence as a search criterion
for a specific group in the system.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
- All trunk group numbers can be assigned with X.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the recorded announcement
group.
Notes:
- Up to 32 LNO parameter values can be chained as input.
STATUS TRANSIENT RCA TRUNK STATE
This parameter specifies the status of a recorded announcement group.
The default value of this parameter is X.
OUT BUSY OUTGOING
INT BUSY INTERNAL
PBMS PORT BLOCKED BY MANUAL SWITCH
BBAC BLOCK BACKWARD
BPRM BLOCK PERMANENT
BMNT BLOCK MAINTENANCE
BADM BLOCK ADMINISTRATIVE
CADM CAMPED ON ADMINISTRATION
NLTG NOT ACCESSIBLE LTG
NDIU NOT ACCESSIBLE DIU
NPRT NOT ACCESSIBLE PORT
NCAR NOT ACCESSIBLE CARRIER
NMNT NOT ACCESSIBLE MAINTENANCE
NMNI NAC MAINTENANCE INDICATION
AUD AUDIT
MLTG MAINTENANCE BLOCKED LTG
MDIU MAINTENANCE BLOCKED DIU
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT ANLN-1 +
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MPRT MAINTENANCE BLOCKED PORT
CLTG CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED LTG
CDIU CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED DIU
CPRT CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED PORT
IDLE IDLE STATUS
GBAD GROUP BLOCKED ADMIN
GBMT GROUP BLOCKED MAINT
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
MODE SEARCH MODE
This parameter specifies the search mode.
This parameter can be set up only together with the STATUS parameter.
With this parameter announcement lines with special status values can
be restricted.
The default value is ANY.
ANY ANY MATCH
ALL ALL MATCHES
ONLY EXACT STATUS MATCH
SUBSET SUBSET OF RESPECTIVE STATE SET
E N D
STAT ANLN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET-VALUE
This command displays the preset values
- number of announcement cycles NUMCYC
- flag for special information tone SIT
which are only used by individual announcements.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ANPREV : IFU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the INDAS function used to select
individual announcements.
Up to 8 values and/or ranges can be linked.
X ALL INDAS FUNCTIONS
CHGDNIND IFU ANN CHANGED DN
Individual announcement for the service
CHANGED B-side DIRECTORY NUMBER.
WUPCAS IFU WAKEUP CASUAL
WAKE-UP CASUAL :
used as positive acknowledgement
booking an order by subscriber controlled input.
WUPDAY IFU WAKEUP DAILY
WAKE-UP DAILY :
WUPWEEK IFU WAKEUP WEEKLY
WAKE-UP WEEKLY:
ANNCDVDN IFU ANN CALL DIVERSION DN
CALL FORWARDING :
used as call diversion acknowledgement
in case of activating successfully or querying
SWUPCAS IFU SHIFT WAKEUP CASUAL
SHIFT WAKE-UP CASUAL :
The order is shifted automatically caused by
lack of resources in timer interval.
SWUPDAY IFU SHIFT WAKEUP DAILY
SHIFT WAKE-UP DAILY :
CHCPTIND IFU ANN CHANGED CPT
CHANGED CODE POINT:
used as information if a destination code number
has been changed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANPREV-1 +
DISP ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANNCHARG IFU ANN OF CHARGE
CHARGE FOR AN OUTGOING CALL:
used as an automatic verbal information of the
charge for an outgoing call after it has been
completed and the subscriber has released.
ANNDINUM IFU ANN RETRIEVED DN
ENQUIRY OF DIRECTORY NUMBERS:
used as an automatic information of the
directory number retrieved by operator for
national or international enquiry.
ANNSCLDN IFU ANN SCREENING DN
Individual announcement for the feature
INDIVIDUAL SCREENING LIST OF DIRECTORY NUMBERS:
in case of interrogating data by
subscriber controlled input.
ANNAUTGR IFU ANN AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOMATIC GREETING:
played to a subscriber after the call has
been distributed to an operator and before
the subscriber is connected to the operators
headset.
ANNARDN IFU ANN AUTOMATIC RECALL
AUTOMATIC RECALL
fed in as information of the stored
A party number in case of request by
SWUPWEEK IFU SHIFT WAKEUP WEEKLY
SHIFT WAKE-UP WEEKLY:
E N D
DISP ANPREV-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET-VALUE
This command modifies the preset values
- number of announcement cycles NUMCYC
- flag for special information tone SIT
which are only used by individual announcements.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD ANPREV : IFU= <,NUMCYC= ,SIT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the INDAS function used to select
individual announcements.
CHGDNIND IFU ANN CHANGED DN
CHANGED B-side DIRECTORY NUMBER.
WUPCAS IFU WAKEUP CASUAL
WAKE-UP CASUAL:
WUPDAY IFU WAKEUP DAILY
WAKE-UP DAILY:
WUPWEEK IFU WAKEUP WEEKLY
WAKE-UP WEEKLY:
ANNCDVDN IFU ANN CALL DIVERSION DN
CALL FORWARDING:
used as call diversion acknowledgement
in case of activating successfully or querying
SWUPCAS IFU SHIFT WAKEUP CASUAL
SHIFT WAKE-UP CASUAL:
SWUPDAY IFU SHIFT WAKEUP DAILY
SHIFT WAKE-UP DAILY:
CHCPTIND IFU ANN CHANGED CPT
CHANGED CODE POINT:
used as information if a destination code number
has been changed.
ANNCHARG IFU ANN OF CHARGE
CHARGE FOR AN OUTGOING CALL:
used as an automatic verbal information of the
charge for an outgoing call after it has been
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ANPREV-1 +
MOD ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
completed and the subscriber has released.
ANNDINUM IFU ANN RETRIEVED DN
ENQUIRY OF DIRECTORY NUMBERS:
used as an automatic information of the
directory number retrieved by operator for
national or international enquiry.
ANNSCLDN IFU ANN SCREENING DN
INDIVIDUAL SCREENING LIST OF DIRECTORY NUMBERS:
in case of interrogating data by
ANNAUTGR IFU ANN AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOMATIC GREETING:
played to a subscriber after the call has
been distributed to an operator and before
the subscriber is connected to the operators
headset.
ANNARDN IFU ANN AUTOMATIC RECALL
AUTOMATIC RECALL
fed in as information of the stored
A party number in case of request by
SWUPWEEK IFU SHIFT WAKEUP WEEKLY
SHIFT WAKE-UP WEEKLY:
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles
for an individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until
the listener hangs up.
This parameter determines whether each language of any announcement
cycle has to start with the special information tone or not.
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
Y YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
E N D
MOD ANPREV-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command cancels a definition of an announcement text of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment for Announcement).
When the definitions of all official languages are canceled, the
textnumber and its data (use if the special information tone,
number of announcement cycles) is canceled too.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ANTXT : TXTNO= [,LANGUAGE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the selected announcement
text.
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
for the announcement text.
Default: Announcement text is canceled for all official
languages.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ANTXT-1 -
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command creates definitions of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
Input format
-
] ]
] CR ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4=> ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SIT=] [,NUMCYC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
text.
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the first official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
announcement text for the second official language:
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
announcement text for the third official language:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ANTXT-1 +
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
announcement text for the fourth official language:
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
Default: 0
E N D
CR ANTXT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command displays the definitions of announcement texts of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment of Announcement).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ANTXT : [TXTNO=] [,LANGUAGE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies those numbers of the announcement texts
that shall be displayed.
Up to 10 parameter values can be linked by &.
Default: All announcement texts
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
for the annoucement texts.
Default: The announcement texts are displayed for all the
languages for which they are defined.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ANTXT-1 -
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command modifies a definition of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
Modifications of the number of announcement cycles and the use of
the special information tone are valid for all languages.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,SIT= ,NUMCYC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
text.
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
announcement text for the first official language:
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
announcement text for the second official language:
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
announcement text for the third official language:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ANTXT-1 +
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
announcement text for the fourth official language:
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
E N D
MOD ANTXT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL APPLICATION
This command cancels all information concerning the specified application.
Notes:
- NEATT data network:
When this command is entered, the server concerned is sent a message
informing it of the modification to the database (providing that it is
registered). If the server acknowledges this modification negatively,
the command will not be executed.
- OSI data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, the local application
concerned (providing it is registered) is sent a message informing
it of the modification to the database. If the local application
acknowledges this modification negatively, the command will not be
executed.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in
an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN APPL-1 -
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE APPLICATION
This command is used to create applications in processors.
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
- OSI data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
executed.
The servers are the local partners from remote applications in the NEATT
data network. They only report in a special table of the databases.The
difference between servers and local applications is that local applications
must be additionally created via command CR APPL. Local applications
are only used in data networks with OSI addressing.
1. CR APPL - CRNEAAPL CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
2. CR APPL - CROSIAPL CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
-
] ]
] CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,SSID=] [,PSID=] ]
] ]
] [,SERVID=] [,AUT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the application
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name for an address which
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR APPL-1 +
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
has been defined by CR NEATSADR or CR OSIADR.
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI;
any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- In the OSI data network a maximum of two addresses can be
specified.
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 5 in the ISO reference model).
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
Notes:
- Default: "NDMS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
SERVID SERVER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the server responsible for
the applications which have been entered.
Notes:
- Only those servers already registered in the CLS database can
be assigned to the applications ( not to be used with
OSI-addresses).
- The parameter SERVID specifies the service identification
associated with the application. The local application is to
be taken from the software module specific documentation.
CR APPL-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR APPL-3 +
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
executed.
-
] ]
] CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,SPROCESS=] [,AUT=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],AET=]] ]
] [,TSEL=] [,SSEL=] [,PSEL=] [,MUX=] ]-,APQ=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,AEQ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- In the OSI data network a maximum of two addresses can be
specified.
SPROCESS SERVER PROCESS
This parameter specifies the name of the server process
which supports the entered application.
CR APPL-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
Default: 0
TSEL TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Transport Layer Entity.
In case of OSI applications that do not allow the use of selectors
this parameter can not be entered.
Notes:
-Only hexadecimal values (numbers from 0 to 9 and characters
from A to F) are allowed.
SSEL SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Session Layer Entity.
Notes:
PSEL PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Presentation Layer Entity.
Notes:
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR APPL-5 +
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
AET APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
This parameter is an additional identification of the
application.
A maximum of 10 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
APQ APPLICATION PROCESS QUALIFIER
The application process qualifier is a part of the
application entity title and specifies the application
on a specific processor.
Notes:
-The parameter APQ can only be entered for applications
with a server process on a processor with system title.
-The maximum length of APQ is 8 components.
AEQ APPLICATION ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter is a part of the application entity title.
Notes:
-This parameter can only be entered if the parameter
APQ has been entered, too.
E N D
CR APPL-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY APPLICATION
This command displays information about:
- one application in a processor, or
- all applications in a processor, or
- all known applications.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP APPL : APPLID= [,PRONAM=] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in all
processors.
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies if only short information (NO)
or all information (YES) about the application will be
displayed.
If the parameter is not entered, the short information
will be displayed.
YES can only be entered for a specified application.
Y DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
YES DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
N DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
NO DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP APPL-1 -
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY APPLICATION
This command modifies information concerning applications which have
been entered.
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.
- OSI data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message
is sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the local application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.
- The authorization (parameter AUT) can also be modified in the
case of default applications.
- The names of the message and data description levels (parameters
SSID and PSID) can also be modified in the case of default
applications.
- In case of default applications, the address name cannot be
modified by the MOD APPL command. The MOD PRO command has to be
used.
the exchange!
1. MOD APPL - MDNEAAPL MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
2. MOD APPL - MDOSIAPL MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.
-
] ]
] MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,SSID=] ]
] ]
] [,PSID=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD APPL-1 +
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of two addresses be
specified.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must be created previously.
Notes:
n/o
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
n/o
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
Notes:
MOD APPL-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Default: "NMDS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
n/o
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD APPL-3 +
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is
sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.
-
] ]
] MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,OTSEL=] ]
] ]
] [,OSSEL=] [,OPSEL=] [,NTSEL=] [,NSSEL=] [,NPSEL=] ]
] ]
] [,MUX=] [,OAET=] [,NAET=] [,OAPQ=] [,NAPQ=] ]
] ]
] [,OAEQ=] [,NAEQ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of two addresses be
specified.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must be created previously.
MOD APPL-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
n/o
OTSEL OLD TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Transport
Layer Entity.
OSSEL OLD SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Session Layer
Entity.
OPSEL OLD PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Presentation
Layer Entity.
NTSEL NEW TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This value specifies the new value of the Transport Layer Entity.
If Transport Layer Entity already has an old value the user must
enter the OTSEL parameter.
NSSEL NEW SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Session Layer Entity.
If Session Layer Entity already has an old value, the user must
enter the OSSEL parameter.
NPSEL NEW PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Presentation Layer
Entity.
If the Presentation Layer Entity already has an old value the user
must enter the OPSEL parameter.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD APPL-5 +
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
OAET OLD APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
application. It specifies the old value of the identification.
Notes:
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
NAET NEW APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
application. It specifies the new value of the application
entity title.
Notes:
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
OAPQ OLD APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value of the application
process qualifier.
NAPQ NEW APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application process qualifier.
OAEQ OLD APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value for the
application entity qualifier.
MOD APPL-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAEQ NEW APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application entity qualifier.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD APPL-7 -
ENTR APSNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER APS NAME
This command enters the name and version number of an APS.
The name and version number of an APS appear in the 1st header line
of every output.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR APSNAME : NAME= [,VN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name segment in the APS version.
VN VERSION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the version number of an APS.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR APSNAME-1 -
INCR APSVN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER
This command increments the APS version number by 1.
The version number appears in the 1st header line of every output.
Input format
-
] ]
] INCR APSVN ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 INCR APSVN-1 -
CAN AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This command cancels the local area code (as well as existing
blocks in the digit destination translator)
or the local area code originating from the local area code table.
Prerequisites:
- No linkages from the entered local area code to directory numbers,
code points, bothway trunk groups or test equipments exist.
- No linkages from the entered local area code originating to digit zone
translators, bothway trunk groups or iarstat data exist.
Attention:
- Before canceling the local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old local area code is
running since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging
to this local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
- If a DLU is entered, only the linkage between the local area code and
the DLU will be canceled, not the local area code itself.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LAC= ] ;- ]
] CAN AREACODE : -LACOR= [,DLU=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN AREACODE-1 -
DISP AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA
Furthermore it displays the local area codes originating.
It is possible to define one, several or all local area codes for display.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP AREACODE : <LAC= ,LACOR=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
local area code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AREACODE-1 -
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE
This command creates a local area code or a local area code originating,
i.e. an entry in the table of local area codes.
(Depending on the number of digits entered and EVLAC was preset
or the DNVOL is multiple (see MML command ENTR DNATT),
the blocks are seized in the digit-destination translator and
linked together.)
The entire digit combination of the local area code (i.e. with national
prefix code) and the area code table are transmitted to the
GP (group processor).
The entire digit combination of the local area code originating are
transmitted to the GP (group processor), too.
Prerequisites:
- Before a local area code will be created, the directory number attribute
must be entered (see MML command ENTR DNATT).
- The local area code to be created may be a part of another shorter local
area code.
- The local area code to be created may not be part of another digit chain.
- The number of digits in the local area code must be greater or equal as
the national prefix code length.
- The specified DLU must have been created before.
It isnt possible to assign a DLU to a local area code if this DLU
was assigned to another local area code before.
- The local area code originating to be created may not be part of another
local area code or local area code originating.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LAC= ] ;- ]
] ENTR AREACODE : -LACOR= [,DLU=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
local area code.
Notes:
- Up to 50 local area codes can be set up in an exchange.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR AREACODE-1 +
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
E N D
ENTR AREACODE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE
This command modifies the local area code whereby the DLU allocation
remains unchanged.
Alternatively it is possible to modify the local area code originating.
Before command execution, a check is made to see whether the old local
area code (originating also) exists and whether the new one is available.
Prerequisites:
- The number of digits of the local area code has to be greater or equal
than that of the national prefix code.
Attention:
- Before modifying the local area code to a new local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old area code is running,
since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging to the
old local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LAC= ] ;- ]
] MOD AREACODE : -LACOR= [,NEWLAC=] [,NLACOR=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
It usually consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
NEWLAC NEW LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the new local area code. It has the same
attributes as the old local area code.
NLACOR NEW LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATG.
This parameter specifies the new local area code originating.
It has the same attributes as the old local area code originating.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD AREACODE-1 -
CONN ATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONNECT ATE
This command connects an ATE to an established test connection.
For the actual test, the ATE is controlled by the following commands:
SEND TRKSIG
SEND MFC
SEND LOOPBACK
MEAS TRKSIG
MEAS MFC
MEAS THVIOL
Prerequisites:
- A trunk workstation (TWS) must be available.
- A test connection must have been set up via a trunk or a connection must have
been made to an outgoing connection.
In order to perform tests, the station at the far end must also be operated
manually. This station could be, for example, an ATE operated in manual mode
by agreement with the communicating station.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] CONN ATE : -TPDN= [,ATE=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TPNO TPC TEST PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port number
where the test call to be connected to the ATE is currently
connected. It may not be used for remote operation.
TPDN TPC TEST PORT DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port directory number of
the test port to which the ATE should be connected. It must be used for
remote operation.
ATE AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the
automatic test equipment. If the parameter is omitted,
any ATE is connected.
a-b
a: AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT=
Corresponds to <TSGno>
b: AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT=
Corresponds to <LTGno>
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONN ATE-1 -
DISCONN ATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISCONNECT ATE
This command disconnects an ATE that was connected using command CONN ATE.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] DISCONN ATE : -TPDN= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the workstation test port number of the test
port, to which the ATE is connected. It must be used for local
operation.
the test port to which the ATE is connected. It must be used for remote
operation.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISCONN ATE-1 -
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLOW AUDIT
This command allows an audit to be started that was previously inhibited by
the command INHIB AUDIT.
Input format
-
] ]
] ALLOW AUDIT : NAME= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the audit. The names of all audits known to
the system can be called up with the command DISP AUDIT.
The names of the common audits are:
ABILREG Billing Register Audit
The idle band linkage of all free billing
registers or the billing register to
channel register linkage of all active
billing registers is tested.
CHANREG Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers are checked for each LTG:
- call status
. highest value
. validity
- call status in the channel register as compared
with associated channel register data
with the status of the port involved in this
connection (channel).
Exception: DSB ports (OSS).
- Busy status of the relevant channel in the
GS table in the CP (module PASDA)
- Specific channel register contents (CTE_ACTIVE,
PATH_DATA)
- Announcement table contents for a busy
announcement line and speech channel as compared
with the channel register contents on the A-side.
- specific channel register contents (OCCUPIED_BY
ISDN, CALL_DIVERSION_FOR_ISDN_PBX, OCCUPIED_BY
B_SIDE, IARSTAT_ACTIVE)
To clear a channel register inconsistency, the
interprocessor message MSG_ABORT_CHANNEL is sent to
the Call Processing Process.
CHKSUMVA Interprocessor checksums audit.
The CALL PROCESSING checksum and the LTG checksum
are compared. Errors are corrected.
CPBUFFER Call Processing Buffer Audit
The idle band linkage of all free call processing
buffers is checked, or the call processing buffer
to channel register linkage of all active call
processing buffers.
EQSTA Equipment Status Audit
A check is made to determine whether the
transient operating states of the peripheral
units are valid and whether the transient
and semipermanent operating states are identical.
In the case of DE5 the SW operating states
are compared with the HW operating states.
IPCHASTA Interprocessor Channel Register Audit
The speech channel states in the GP and CP
are checked for consistency, i.e. the channel
states in the GP should be identical with
those in the CP.
IPTRUSTA Interprocessor Trunk Status Audit
The transient states of ports in the CP
are checked for consistency:
- port states are compared
- port states in the GP are compared with port
states in the CP.
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ALLOW AUDIT-1 +
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the IPTRUSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency the interprocessor
message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to the call processing
process.
IDLLSTAU Idle List Audit
The idle band linkage of trunk groups,
announcement groups and PBX groups is checked.
NWCONF Switching network configuration audit.
The TSG and SSG data are checked for consistency
with the relevant administration and safeguarding
data. Errors are corrected.
NWMAP Switching Network Map Audit.
The consistency between path data and switching
network busy states is checked. Errors are
corrected.
IPPRTSTA Interprocessor Port Status Audit
The transient port states of DLU-Ports and
V5IF-Ports are checked:
- CP port states are compared
- GP port states are compared with CP port states
to the IPPRTSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to
the call processing process.
CCS7AU Common Channel Signaling No.7 Audit
The port states of TUP and ISUP trunks lines
are checked:
Blocks which have been set or cancelled
(NAC_SYNCHRO and NUC_SEIZED), are compared
with DPC blocking.
processor message MSG_ABORT_CCS7_PORT
is sent to the call processing process.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
COPRTSTA Conference Port Audit
The conference port data within the CP are checked.
NUCAUDIT Nailed Up Connection Audit
The active nailed-up connections (NUC) are checked for
their connection status during operation. In the event
of an error, the faulty NUC is through-connected
again. The NUC database data serve as a reference
for this purpose.
MMBUAUD MSB/MAC output buffer audit:
The buffers used to store the systems responses to
administration requests originated via MSB/MAC are
tested, if the linkage to the job registers is valid.
Buffers with invalid linkage are initialized and
inserted in the list of free buffers.
E N D
ALLOW AUDIT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUDIT
This command displays the state of currently running audits and the names
of inhibited audits. All audits known to the system are displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP AUDIT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AUDIT-1 -
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INHIBIT AUDIT
This command inhibits audits thereby preventing their execution.
Prerequisites:
- The audit name must be known to the system.
- The audit must not already be inhibited.
Input format
-
] ]
] INHIB AUDIT : NAME= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
- call status
. highest value
. validity
PATH_DATA)
processing buffers.
those in the CP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 INHIB AUDIT-1 +
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
states in the CP.
process.
corrected.
are checked:
with DPC blocking.
for this purpose.
E N D
INHIB AUDIT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START AUDIT
This command starts an audit. Audits are programs with a low priority which
run periodically to check whether the code and data areas are correct.
Detected errors are corrected automatically. The audits IPTRUSTA and
IPPRTSTA stop correcting if they detect that previous corrections have
been unsuccessful.
Prerequisites:
- The name of the audit must be known to the system.
- The audit must not be inhibited.
- The audit must have a demand attribute.
- The audit state table must not be dynamically expanded during
execution of the command.
- The audit must not already be running.
- The requested processor must not be seized by an audit or a
fault detection.
- Only one project-specific audit may run at one time.
- Only five demand audits (audits that can be demanded via MML command
or via a user process) may run at one time.
- Sufficient resources must be available to allow the audit to be
started dynamically.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] START AUDIT : NAME= [,UNIT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
- call status
. highest value
. validity
PATH_DATA)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START AUDIT-1 +
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
processing buffers.
those in the CP.
states in the CP.
process.
corrected.
are checked:
with DPC blocking.
for this purpose.
START AUDIT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the equipment unit where the audit is to
be performed.
Compatibilities:
- If NAME=CHANREG, then entry of the parameter UNIT is mandatory.
- If NAME=ABILREG, CPBUFFER, EQUSTA, NWCONF, NWMAP, or TRUSTA, parameter
UNIT is illegal.
- If NAME=CHKSUMVA, IPCHASTA, or IPTRUSTA, then LTG must be entered
for parameter value a in parameter UNIT.
- If a= LTG, then units b and c refer to:
b: TSG number =
0 for DE3 and DE4
0, 1 for DE5/1
0...3 for DE5/2
0...7 for DE5/4
c: LTG number =
1...15 for DE3
1...63 for DE4,DE5/1,DE5/2,DE5/4
- If a= MBUL, then units b and c refer to:
b: System side =
0,1
c: MBUL number =
0 for DE3 and DE4
0, 1 for DE5/1
0...3 for DE5/2
0...7 for DE5/4
a-b-c
a: EQUIPMENT UNIT
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT : LTG
b: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER / SYSTEM SIDE=
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER / MBUL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START AUDIT-3 -
CAN AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION
This command cancels authorization classes from an authorization and
cancels entire authorizations from the authorization table.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN AUT : AUT= [,AUTCL=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
AUT CP AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies an authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN AUT-1 -
DISP AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION
This command displays the authorization classes associated with
the authorizations on the terminal.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP AUT : AUT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AUT-1 -
ENTR AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION
This command enters new authorizations with their associated
authorization classes and allows authorization classes to be
entered in an existing authorization.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR AUT : AUT= ,AUTCL= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR AUT-1 -
CAN AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command cancels command authorizations for MML commands from a
particular authorization class.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN AUTCL-1 -
DISP AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command displays the command authorizations defined
in single or in all authorization classes.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP AUTCL : AUTCL= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP AUTCL-1 -
ENTR AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command enters a desired authorization class for the MML command
authorizations.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR AUTCL-1 -
STAT BA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS
This command displays all current call-related data for the specified
basic access.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing ISDN.
1. STAT BA - DN DN ORIENTED
2. STAT BA - EQN EQN ORIENTED
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED
Input format for directory-number-oriented output.
-
] ]
] STAT BA : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more
than one local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber.
Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT BA-1 +
STAT BA
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
Input format for equipment-number-oriented output.
-
] ]
] STAT BA : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the port connected to
the subscriber or PBX line to be displayed.
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT / V5INTERFACE=
- DLU number (10,20,30...2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000,6001,..8999 for a V5 port)
b: SHELF=
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU port, 0 for a V5 port)
c: MODULE=
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port, 0..20 for a V5 port)
d: CIRCUIT / V5PORT=
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port,
0..99 for a V5 port)
E N D
STAT BA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BAFAULT
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT
This command displays the last occured ISDN basic access faults.
<job number>.
1. DISP BAFAULT - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP BAFAULT - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, directory number oriented.
-
] ]
] DISP BAFAULT : DN= ,TYPE= [,LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber or PBX line.
Maximum 12 digits in the range 1...9,A...F hexadecimal
value is specified.
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
Maximum 6 digits in the range 1...9 value is specified.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BAFAULT-1 +
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, digital line unit
number oriented.
-
] ]
] DISP BAFAULT : EQN= ,TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR DLU/V5=
For DLU port: a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V51IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
b: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR SHELF=
For DLU port: a shelf in the range 0...7
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: 0
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR MODULE/TH V52 PORT=
For DLU port: a module number in the range 0...15
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: THv5port number in the range 00...20
unit values.
d: EQUIP. NUMBER FOR CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
For V51IF port: a v5port number in the range 0...31
For V52IF port: TUv5port number in the range 00...99
Note: v52port is limited to the number 2047.
unit values.
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
DISP BAFAULT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BAFAULT-3 -
COM BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS
This command initiates a master-spare commutation. Prior to command
execution, the base processor spare (which will be the future base
processor master) is tested.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] COM BAP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 COM BAP-1 -
CONF BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR
This command configures the BAP spare.
A configuration attempt of the BAP master to MBL is rejected.
Notes:
- The configuration from SPR to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to SPR is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF BAP : [BAP=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
ACT ACTIVE
SPR ACTIVE SPARE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows the base processor to be diagnosed before
configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
Notes:
- Interim diagnostic messages are displayed if SUP=NO and
DIAG=YES is entered.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF BAP-1 -
DIAG BAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a base processor.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG BAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG BAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a base processor.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.
-
] ]
] DIAG BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG BAP-1 +
DIAG BAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a base
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.
-
] ]
] DIAG BAP : [BAP=] ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behaviour: no statistic output
E N D
DIAG BAP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BASE PROCESSOR
This command tests the BAP spare.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be SPR.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST BAP-1 -
ACT BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE MEAS.
This command activates a performance measurement for a
basic access.
1. ACT BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. ACT BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
Directory-number-oriented input format.
-
] ]
] ACT BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,SCHED=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number.
Notes:
- For PBX lines the line service number must be
specified.
- Not allowed for V5 ports.
Processing will be rejected with "DLU NOT EXISTING".
SCHED TIME SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the time schedule that determines
when the performance measurement will be activated
(and deactivated).
A time schedule can be entered by the mml command ENTR TSTSCHED.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT BAPERF-1 +
ACT BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Equipment-number-oriented input format.
-
] ]
] ACT BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= [,SCHED=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital line unit.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
SCHED TIME SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the time schedule that determines
when the performance measurement will be activated
(and deactivated).
A time schedule can be entered by the mml command ENTR TSTSCHED.
E N D
ACT BAPERF-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE BA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
This command deactivates a performance measurement for a
basic access.
1. DACT BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DACT BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
-
] ]
] DACT BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT BAPERF-1 +
DACT BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] DACT BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
E N D
DACT BAPERF-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE DATA
This command displays performance measurement data for a basic access:
- EFS = error free seconds:
Seconds without frame errors
- ES = errored seconds:
Seconds with at least one frame error
- SES = severely errored seconds:
Seconds with at least 32 frame errors. This
corresponds to a bit error rate (BER) > 10exp-3
- DM = degraded minutes:
60 consecutive seconds (without SES and UAS) with
at least 2 frame errors. This corresponds to
a bit error rate (BER) > 10exp-6
- UAS = unavailable seconds:
Timespan, beginning with the first of at least 10
consecutive seconds with a bit error rate (BER) >
10exp-3, and ending with the last second with a
BER > 10exp-3, which is followed by at least 10
consecutive seconds with BER < 10exp-3
- FRAME ERRORS = frame errors:
Number of frame errors that occurred within the
measuring interval
1. DISP BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM= [,ENDDAT= ]
] ]
] ,ENDTIM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display starts.
Format: <YY>-<MM>-<DD>
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BAPERF-1 +
DISP BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display starts.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display ends.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display ends.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
DISP BAPERF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= ,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM= [,ENDDAT= ]
] ]
] ,ENDTIM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital line unit number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Format: <SHELF>-<MODULE>-<CIRCUIT>
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display starts.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display starts.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BAPERF-3 +
DISP BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display ends.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display ends.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
DISP BAPERF-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a bus to common memory.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF BCMY : [BCMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BCMY BUS FOR COMMON MEMORY
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF BCMY-1 -
DIAG BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a bus to common memory.
The diagnosis includes interface tests of the active processors and the
common memory. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The bus to common memory must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG BCMY-1 -
TEST BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a bus to common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both B:CMYs must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both B:CMYs are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST BCMY-1 -
ACT BERM
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT BIT ERROR MEASUREMENT
This command starts a Bit Error Rate Measurement, the purpose of BERM
is to provide limits for bringing into service, and limits for
maintenance of digital paths, sections, and line sections in order
to achieve the performance objective given for series G recommendations.
This measurement is performed on national and international trunks,
using Test Equipment ATE:TM (application ACT BERM as Directory and
ACT BERM as Responder).
<job number>.
1. ACT BERM - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTATED
2. ACT BERM - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER ORIENTATED
3. ACT BERM - TGNOCIC TRUNK GROUP AND CIC ORIENTED
1. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTATED
-
] ]
] ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,EQN= [,MEASTIM=] [,BERPATT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
RSPDN RESPONDER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the Responder directory number.
MEASTYP MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Measurement.
M1 MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
Type of measurement:
End to End unidirectional.
End to End bidirectional.
Digital Loopback.
This parameter specifies the Equipment Number.
Equipment Number For EQN type = LTG:
<TSG NO>-<LTG NO>-<LTU NO>-<Channel NO>
a-b-c-d
a: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER=
This unit specifies a TSG number in the range 0...7.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT BERM-1 +
ACT BERM
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
This unit specifies a LTG number in the range 0...63.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies a LTU number in the range 0...15.
d: PORT NUMBER=
This unit specifies a Channel Number in the range 0...7.
MEASTIM MEASUREMENT TIME
This parameter specifies the Bit Error Ratio Measurement time.
If this parameter is not given, the measurement is assumed to be
continuous.
Corresponds to the duration of Bit Error Ratio Measurements, in
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for Bit Error Rate
Measurement.
If this parameter is not given, the measurement is executed using a
pseudo-random bit pattern.
0...11111111, range of binary numbers
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for the Bit Error Rate
Measurement.
If this parameter are no entry, the measurement is executed with
ACT BERM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT BERM
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER ORIENTATED
-
] ]
] ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,TGNO= [,MEASTIM=] [,BERPATT=] ]
] ]
] [,LNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Digital Loopback.
continuous.
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
Measurement.
Measurement.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT BERM-3 +
ACT BERM
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number.
ACT BERM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP AND CIC ORIENTED
-
] ]
] ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,TGNO= [,MEASTIM=] [,BERPATT=] ]
] ]
] [,CIC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Digital Loopback.
continuous.
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
Measurement.
Measurement.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT BERM-5 +
ACT BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies to the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks. Must be specified together with CIC.
a-b
a: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
Corresponds to <PCM system>
b: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
Corresponds to <channel>
E N D
ACT BERM-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BERM
ACTMEAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT
This command displays bit error rate data for 64kb/s paths.
Specifying the incoming trunk under measurement and date limits the
operator get the following counters:
SES, ES, MT, EFS, BS, LS, BLER, BER, AS and UAS.
A list of the active BER measurements in the exchange can be obtained
using parameter ACTMEAS.
<job number>.
1. DISP BERM - ACTMEAS LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
2. DISP BERM - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
3. DISP BERM - TGNOCIC TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND CIC ORI
4. DISP BERM - TGNOLNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND LNO ORI
1. Input format
LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
Input format: parameter for display of the currently active
measurements in the exchange ACTMEAS.
-
] ]
] DISP BERM : ACTMEAS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ACTMEAS LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
This parameter displays the currently active measurements
in the exchange.
Y YES
YES YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BERM-1 +
DISP BERM
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
Input format: parameter for identifying the trunk under measurement
EQN, a start date/time: BEGDAT, BEGTIM and optionally an
end date/time.
-
] ]
] DISP BERM : EQN= [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] [,ENDTIM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the incoming trunk
under measurement.
a-b-c-d
Corresponds to <TSG no>
unit values.
Corresponds to <LTG no>
unit values.
Corresponds to <LTU no>
unit values.
d: PORT NUMBER=
Corresponds to <PORT no>
unit values.
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the beginning date of the time interval for
which the operator wants the results to be displayed.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
DISP BERM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BERM
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the beginning time of the time interval
for which the operator wants the results to be displayed.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the time interval for which
the operator wants the results to be displayed.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the time interval for which
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BERM-3 +
DISP BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND CIC ORI
Input format: parameters TGNO and CIC to identify the trunk under
measurement; BEGDAT and BEGTIM to specify the date from which the
operator wants the results to be displayed, and optionally an end
time/date.
-
] ]
] DISP BERM : TGNO= [,CIC=] [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDTIM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk under
measurement. It is entered with LNO to completely specify the trunk.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks. Must be specified together with TGNO.
a-b
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
DISP BERM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BERM-5 +
DISP BERM
TGNOLNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND LNO ORI
Input format: parameters TGNO and LNO to identify the trunk under
measurement; BEGDAT and BEGTIM to specify the date from which the
operator wants the results to be displayed, and optionally an end
time/date.
-
] ]
] DISP BERM : TGNO= [,LNO=] [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDTIM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk under
measurement. It is entered with LNO to completely specify the trunk.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the trunk under
measurement.
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
DISP BERM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP BERM
TGNOLNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDDAT END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP BERM-7 -
TRANS BUFFER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK
This command initiates the immediate transfer of the contents of the
(not necessarily full) data buffer for the specified data type from
the CP memory to the corresponding disk file.
Prerequisites :
- The specified data type must be active (advisory and command
rejection).
- The disk file of the specified data type is not full (advisory and
command rejection).
- The CP memory data buffer is not in overflow (advisory and command
rejection).
Input format
-
] ]
] TRANS BUFFER : TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of individual call data
recording buffer.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. BUFFER
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING BUFFER
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. BUFFER
MOB METER OBSERVATION BUFFER
PMOB PREVENT. METER OBSERV. BUFFER
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION BUFFER
TST TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUR. BUFFER
ERS ERROR STATISTICS BUFFER
DNOB DIRECT. NUMBER OBSERV. BUFFER
IARA INTERADM. REVENUE ACCT. BUFFER
FIR FACILITY INPUT REC. BUFFER
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA BUFFER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS BUFFER-1 -
CAN CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command cancels one carrier access code from the
carrier access code data table.
Prerequisites:
-Canceling of carrier access code is only allowed if all references
in the Subscriber-, PBX-line-, PBX-group-, Incoming/Bothway Trunk-
and CTX-group-data are deleted.
Attention:
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CAC : CAC= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter determines the carrier access code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CAC-1 -
CR CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command creates the carrier access code data
- the carrier access code,
- the carrier name,
- whether this carrier access code is the carrier access code
belonging to this exchange,
- whether this carrier access code is the default exchange
carrier access code,
- whether this carrier access code is allowed to be entered by
Subscriber Controled Input,
- the default nature of address indicator.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CAC : CAC= ,CARRIER= [,OWNCAC=] [,EXCCAC=] [,SCIALLOW=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,DEFNA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Up to 100 carrier access codes can be set up in the exchange.
CARRIER CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier name.
OWNCAC OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies whether the entered CAC
belongs to the own network of carrier, because
the own CAC-digits must be deleted from the incoming
dialed-digits into the gateway-exchange.
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
N CAC IS NOT OWN CAC
(initial value)
EXCCAC EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE
is the default exchange carrier access code.
The default exchange carrier access code is used,
if a subscriber dials a B-number without CAC-digits
and no prefered CAC-digits exist.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
(initial value)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CAC-1 +
CR CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCIALLOW SCI HANDLING IS ALLOWED
This parameter specifies whether this carrier access code
is allowed to be entered by Subscriber Controled Input.
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
(initial value)
DEFNA DEFAULT NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the default nature of address
indicator (NADI) in case of the CAC and not PFXNAT
or PFXINAT determines the NADI.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NONADI NO NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICAT.
(initial value)
NAT NATIONAL
INTNAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
CR CAC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
- the carrier name,
- whether this carrier access code is allowed to be entered by
Subscriber Controled Input,
- whether the carrier is prepared for cancel,
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CAC : <CAC= ,PREPCAN= ,OWNCAC= ,EXCCAC= ,SCIALLOW= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,DEFNA= ,CARRIER=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the code for which the carrier
access data are to be displayed.
PREPCAN PREPARED TO CANCEL
This parameter specifies whether the carrier access
code is prepared for canceling.
Y PREPARED TO CANCEL
N NOT PREPARED TO CANCEL
This parameter specifies whether the entered carrier access code
is the carrier access code belonging to the own network of carrier.
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
This parameter specifies whether the entered carrier access
code is the default exchange carrier access code .
This parameter specifies whether the carrier is
allowed for Subscriber Controled Input.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CAC-1 +
DISP CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
This parameter specifies the default nature of address.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NAT NATIONAL
CARRIER CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier name.
E N D
DISP CAC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command modifies the carrier access code data
- the carrier name,
- whether the carrier is prepared for cancel,
- whether the carrier is allowed for Subscriber Controled Input,
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CAC : CAC= <,NEWCAC= ,NCARRIER= ,PREPCAN= ,OWNCAC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,EXCCAC= ,SCIALLOW= ,DEFNA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NEWCAC NEW CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter determines the new carrier access code.
NCARRIER NEW CARRIER
This parameter specifies the new carrier name.
PREPCAN PREPARED TO CANCEL
prepared for canceling.
Y PREPARED TO CANCEL
N NOT PREPARED TO CANCEL
belongs to the own network of carrier, because
the own CAC-digits must be deleted from the incoming
dialed-digits into the gateway-exchange.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CAC-1 +
MOD CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
is the default exchange carrier access code.
This CAC is used, if a subscriber dials a B-number
without CAC-digits and no prefered CAC-digits existing.
allowed for Subscriber Controled Input.
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
This parameter specifies the default nature of address
indicator (NADI) in case of the CAC and not PFXNAT
or PFXINAT determines the NADI.
Default is NONADI.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NAT NATIONAL
E N D
MOD CAC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACCEP CALL
LOCAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCEPT CALL
This command accepts an incoming ( group, personal, position ) call which was
offered at the workstation and connects it to the headset.
1. ACCEP CALL - LOCAL LOCAL OPERATION
2. ACCEP CALL - REMOTE REMOTE OPERATION
1. Input format
LOCAL OPERATION
Input format for local operation.
-
] ]
] ACCEP CALL : [TPNO=] [,CALLTP=] [,JN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TPNO TEST PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the test port to which the incoming call is
to be connected. It may not be used for remote operation.
CALLTP TYPE OF TERMINATING TEST CALL
This parameter can be used to accept the oldest waiting call of the
specified call type.
GROUP TEST CALL TO GROUP
PERS PERSONAL CALL
PERSONAL PERSONAL CALL
POS TEST CALL TO POSITION
POSITION TEST CALL TO POSITION
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number of the job offering an
incoming group call in remote operation. It must be used for remote
operation ( see command ACT WST ).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACCEP CALL-1 +
ACCEP CALL
REMOTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REMOTE OPERATION
Input format for remote operation.
-
] ]
] ACCEP CALL : [TPDN=] ,JN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TPDN TEST PORT DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the test port directory number of the test
port the incoming call is to be connected to. It must be used for
remote operation ( see command ACT WST ).
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number of the job offering an
incoming group call in remote operation. It must be used for remote
operation ( see command ACT WST ).
E N D
ACCEP CALL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REL CALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CALL
This command releases a personal call which was set up with the command
SETUP CALL or accepted with the command ACCEP CALL.
Input format
-
] ]
] REL CALL : TPNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port seized for the personal call.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REL CALL-1 -
SETUP CALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET UP CALL
This command sets up a personal call to another workstation or subscriber.
The call can be released with the command REL CALL.
Prerequisites:
- The workstation must have been activated with the command ACT WST.
Input format
-
] ]
] SETUP CALL : [TPNO=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port to be seized for the
outgoing personal call.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of another workstation
or subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SETUP CALL-1 -
DISP CALLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA
This command displays a snapshot of the contents of the transient CP and GP
resources for one or more ports. The resources must have a state which is
not idle.
The command displays the CP resources CHR, CPB, BOR, BKR, CQI,
and TCB, as well as the GP resources CALLREG, LST, and DPS.
One or more ports can be specified by the equipment number.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CALLDAT : EQN= [,FORMAT=] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter defines the equipment number.
Notes:
- The following qualifications of the port are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific port
EQN = a-b-X all ports of an LTG
EQN = a-b-c all ports of an LTU
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific port in each LTU
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG / DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
For LTG port: a TSG number in the range 0...7
(in steps of 10)
b: LTG / SHELF=
For LTG port: an LTG number in the range 1...63
For V5IF port: 0
c: LTU / MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For LTG port: an LTU number in the range 0...7
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...20
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CALLDAT-1 +
DISP CALLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For LTG port: a channel number in the range 0...31
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range
0...7 for SLM with 8 ports
0...15 for SLM with 16 ports
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the display format.
Notes:
- The format parameter values DATA and BOTH are allowed only if
the parameter TYPE is unsupplied or if it is supplied with CHR.
BYTE DISPLAY IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
This is the standard output format for all types
of resources.
Tailing zeros are suppressed in the output of
each resource. As a result, the displays may show
the resource with different lengths.
DATA DISPLAY IN STRUCTURED FORMAT
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed
in structured format.
BOTH DISPLAY IN HEX AND STRUCTURED
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed first
in structured format, followed by
an output of the channel registers in
hexadecimal format.
To identify a channel register in the structured
list and in the hexadecimal list,
the processor number and the speech channel number
are also displayed in both output formats.
Since the tailing zeros are suppressed in the
hexadecimal output, the channel register may
be displayed with different length.
Default: BYTE
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the resource to be displayed.
Note:
- If the TYPE and FORMAT parameters are omitted, the
searching for data of the equipment number includes all supported
CP and GP resources. This has as condition that there is a channel
register not idle linked to this equipment number.
- If a GP resource is specifically requested, a display is attempted
regardless of the state of the channel register in CP.
Output formats dependent on input
+-------------------------------+--------------------------------+
! Input: ! Output format: !
! ! !
! TYPE= !FORMAT= ! hexadecimal structured !
! ! +-------------------+------------+
! a b c d e f g h i ! ! a b c d e f g h i !Channel reg.!
+-------------------+-----------+-------------------+------------+
! - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - ! x !
! x - - - - - - - - ! - ! x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - ! - ! - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - ! - ! - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - ! - ! - - - x - - - - - ! - !
DISP CALLDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CALLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! - - - - x - - - - ! - ! - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - ! - ! - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - ! - ! - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - ! - ! - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x ! - ! - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - ! Y ! - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - ! Y ! - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - ! Y ! - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - ! Y ! - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - ! Y ! - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - ! Y ! - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - ! Y ! - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x ! Y ! - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - ! D ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - ! D ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - ! D ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x ! D ! ) !
! x - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - ! B ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - ! B ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - ! B ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x ! B ! ) !
+-------------------+-----------+--------------------------------+
TYPE=TYPE, FORMAT=FORMAT,
Y=BYTE,
D=DATA,
B=BOTH
CHR CHANNEL REGISTER
Resource in CP
Table number: a = channel register
CPB CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
Resource in CP
Table number: b = call processing buffer
BOR OPERATOR BILLING REGISTER
Resource in CP
Table number: c = operator billing register
BKR BOOKING REGISTER
Resource in CP
Table number: d = booking register
CQI COMMON QUEUEING INDEX TABLE
Resource in CP
Table number: e = common queueing index table
TCB TRANSACTION CONTROL BLOCK
Resource in CP
Table number: f = transaction control block
CALLREG CALL REGISTER
Resource in GP
Table number: g = call register
LST LINE STATUS TABLE
Resource in GP
Table number: h = line status table
DPS DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
Resource in GP
Table number: i = DLU port status table
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CALLDAT-3 -
ACCEP CALLID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCEPT CALL IDENTIFICATION
This command cancels the call identification display on the system panel.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACCEP CALLID ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACCEP CALLID-1 -
MOD CALLMON
MODSIDE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL MONITORING
This command is used to switch over between listening and listening/speaking to
a specified trunk side of an existing trunk call.
Prerequisites:
- A call monitoring connection must exist ( command: START CALLMON ).
1. MOD CALLMON - MODSIDE MODIFY SIDE
2. MOD CALLMON - MODSPEAK MODIFY SPEAKING
1. Input format
MODIFY SIDE
This input format is used to change the trunk side to be listened or
spoken to.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] MOD CALLMON : -TPDN= ,SIDE= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port seized for the call monitoring
connection. It may not be used for remote operation.
port seized for the call monitoring connection. It must be used for
SIDE NUC CONNECTION SIDE
This parameter specifies the side of the trunk connection to be
listened to or listened and spoken to.
A A SUBSCRIBER
ALL ALL
B B SUBSCRIBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLMON-1 +
MOD CALLMON
MODSPEAK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY SPEAKING
This input format is used to switch over between listening and listening/
speaking.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] MOD CALLMON : -TPDN= ,SP= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SP CALL MONITORING / SPEAKING
This parameter specifies whether the indicated trunk side is to be
listened to or listened and spoken to.
N NO SPEAKING
NO NO SPEAKING
Y SPEAKING
YES SPEAKING
E N D
MOD CALLMON-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START CALLMON
CIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALL MONITORING
This command starts monitoring of an existing trunk call. Call monitoring can
be modified with the command MOD CALLMON and stopped with the command
STOP CALLMON.
1. START CALLMON- CIC CIC ORIENTED INPUT
2. START CALLMON- EQN EQN ORIENTED INPUT
3. START CALLMON- LNO LNO ORIENTATED INPUT
1. Input format
CIC ORIENTED INPUT
The input format sets up a call monitoring connection to a CCS7 speech circuit.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],TPNO=]] ]
] START CALLMON : TGNO= ,CIC= ]-,TPDN=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk port to
be listened to.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of the trunk
port to be listened to.
a-b
This parameter specifies the test port to be seized for the call
monitoring connection. It may not be used for remote operation.
port to be seized for the call monitoring connection. It must be used
for remote operation ( see command ACT WST ).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START CALLMON-1 +
START CALLMON
CIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START CALLMON-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START CALLMON
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQN ORIENTED INPUT
The input format sets up an equipment oriented call monitoring connection.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],TPNO=]] ]
] START CALLMON : EQN= ]-,TPDN=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the trunk port to be
listened to.
a-b-c-d
b: LINE/TRUNK GROUP=
c: LINE/TRUNK UNIT=
d: CHANNEL=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START CALLMON-3 +
START CALLMON
LNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LNO ORIENTATED INPUT
This input format sets up an line oriented call monitoring connection.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],TPNO=]] ]
] START CALLMON : TGNO= ,LNO= ]-,TPDN=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk port to
be listened to.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the trunk port to be
listened to.
E N D
START CALLMON-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STOP CALLMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP CALL MONITORING
This command stops monitoring of an existing trunk call.
Prerequisites:
- A call monitoring connection must exist ( command: START CALLMON ).
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] STOP CALLMON : -TPDN= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP CALLMON-1 -
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command displays exchange parameters related to call processing.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CALLPOPT : <FORMAT= ,SERV= ,ADMSERV=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter is for displaying a table with the values of exchange
parameters.
OPTIONS CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more internal services.
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
ADMSERV ADMIN. SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more administrative services.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CALLPOPT-1 +
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CMSPEECH CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CM UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL INFO.
CMAUDIO CIRCUIT MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRCUIT MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 07
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
E N D
DISP CALLPOPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command modifies the exchange parameters and the services related to
Call Processing.
In the following a description is given for
- modification of administrative services
- input of exchange parameters
- modification of internal services for one service
- modification of internal services for several services.
Note: The input of exchange parameters is always possible with the
input for modification of internal and administrative services.
the exchange!
1. MOD CALLPOPT - ADMSERV MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
2. MOD CALLPOPT - OPTIONS OPTIONS
3. MOD CALLPOPT - SERV MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
4. MOD CALLPOPT - SERVTYPE MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
1. Input format
MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services (exept the powerset o
internal services) for one or more administrative services.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLPOPT : ADMSERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADMSERV ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
This parameter specifies the administrative service that has values to
be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one
of the parameters TYPE, CTYPE.
- The values of parameter ADMSERV are verified against the
powersets of administrative services.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
CMAUDIO CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
CMSPEECH CIRC.MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.DIGITAL INFO
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-1 +
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services where the entered
service shall be added.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC and VOICE services can only be modified using
parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- All VOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
TRAFFIC services.
- All standard services must also be contained in the powerset of
the corresponding administrative service.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH. (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG. (only for adminstrative services)
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSB SERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
CTYPE CANCEL SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services from which the entered
service shall be deleted.
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
parameter SERV.
- In the case of CTYPE = TRAFFIC the complete sequence of
administrative services for the addressed TRAFFIC service in
the compatibility tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = ADMIN it is verified that the addressed
service is not used in the compatibility tables.
MOD CALLPOPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSBSERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-3 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPTIONS
This input format modifies the exchange parameters.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLPOPT : <OCALSEQ= ,OOSOPT= ,COOSOPT= ,CCQUEL= ,ANITX= ]
] ]
] ,CFWMAX= ,FACFRM= ,VOIREC= ,NUISWRH= ]
] ]
] ,TELCOCNT= ,MSNMAX= ,ABB= ,MLDIVNO= ,RELFEA= ]
] ]
] ,RBSIN= ,CRBSIN= ,PHDN= ,CPHDN= ,GENPROT= ]
] ]
] ,MDMSN= ,DESTMAXL= ,DLUEM= ,SLANAPRT= ,SYSREA= ]
] ]
] ,CFWNOT= ,ANNFCFW= ,SATMAX= ,ISDNPROT= ]
] ]
] ,COURTESY= ,PROPDELY= ,TMSLRES= ,SPCHRES= ]
] ]
] ,SWAPORIG= ,SCLSTNAE= ,ISSCODEP= ,KEY= ]
] ]
] ,DNMAXL= ,TRCLMAX= ,CONFLMAX= ,KEYMAX= ]
] ]
] ,ANNARDN= ,KEYWREQ= ,REDUDACT= ,IMPLDACT= ]
] ]
] ,ANSCIPBX= ,TMFEAT= ,CTMFEAT= ,ERN= ,CERN= ]
] ]
] ,NRN= ,CNRN=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the languages and the sequences of these
languages for the OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled ANnouncement
Equipment) within the exchange.
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
MOD CALLPOPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
OOSOPT OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter specifies the reason for automatic remove of
trunks from service.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter COOSOPT.
HOLD OOS WITH SINGLE HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNK
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
COOSOPT CANCEL OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter cancels reason for automatic trunk removal from
service.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter OOSOPT.
HOLD OOS WITH CONNECTION HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNKS
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
CCQUEL CCBS QUEUE LENGTH
This parameter specifies the default length for the CCBS
(Call Completion to Busy Subscribers) queue.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only during Installation Recovery.
ANITX A-NUMB.IDENT. IN TRANSIT EXCH.
This parameter specifies whether A-number identification in
international and transit exchanges is active (YES)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-5 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or inactive (NO).
N ANITX NOT ACTIVE
NO ANITX NOT ACTIVE
Y ANITX ACTIVE
YES ANITX ACTIVE
CFWMAX CALL FORWARD (MAXIMUM)
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call forwards allowed
in the exchange.
FACFRM FACILITY FORMAT
This parameter specifies the type of procedure for subscriber dialed
inputs of the exchange.
CEPT CEPT FORMAT
VOIREC VOICE RECOGNITION
This parameter specifies whether voice recognition is disabled
or enabled in the exchange.
DISABLE VOICEREC.DISABLED
ENABLE VOICEREC.ENABLED
NUISWRH PROMPT F. FEATURE
enabling resp. disabling the possibility to prompt for a new
feature input without replacing the handset.
DISABLE PROMPT DISABLED
ENABLE PROMPT ENABLED
TELCOCNT TELECOMMUNICATION CENTER NO.
This parameter specifies the telecommunication centre number.
It is used in traffic measurement.
MSNMAX MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO. MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the maximum number of multiple subscriber
numbers allowed in the exchange during one access.
ABB ABBREVIATED DIALING DATA
This parameter specifies the short number lower limits for abbreviated
dialing.
a-b
a: SHORT NUMBER TYPE
SNOLIM1 SHORT NUM. LIMIT ONE DIGIT
MOD CALLPOPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SNOLIM2 SHORT NUM. LIMIT TWO DIGITS
This parameter unit specifies whether the short number list of
one digit and/or the short number list of two digits is valid.
b: SHORT NUMBER LIMIT VALUE=
In case of SNOLIM1 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 .
In case of SNOLIM2 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 10, 20 . . . 90 .
MLDIVNO MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NO.
This parameter specifies the maximum length of diversion numbers
allowed in the exchange.
a-b
a: DIVERSION
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY
DIVDA DIVERSION NOT ANSWERED
DIVI DIVERSION IMMEDIATELY
This parameter specifies whether call forwarding
immediately, call forwarding no reply or call forwarding busy
is valid.
b: MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NUMBER=
RELFEA RELEASED FEATURES
This parameter specifies the released features for the exchange.
This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
CENTREX CENTREX ALLOWED
OSS OSS ALLOWED
PRIOQUE PRIORITY QUEUING ALLOWED
RBSIN RING BACK SERVICE ID. NO.
This parameter specifies the ring back service identification number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CRBSIN.
CRBSIN CANCEL RING BACK SERV. ID. NO.
This parameter cancels the ring back service identification number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter RBSIN.
PHDN PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter specifies the packet handler directory number.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-7 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CPHDN.
CPHDN CANCEL PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter cancels the packet handler directory number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter PHDN.
GENPROT GENERIC PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies which protocol, functional and/or stimulus,
is applied.
A value for GENPROT always has to be entered.
If GENPROT-GLOBAL or GENPROT-GLOBAL is entered no other value
is allowed.
In case of GENPROT-BOTH both of the other parameters have
to be entered.
Notes:
a-b
a: GENERIC PROTOCOL
GLOBAL ALLOWED PROTOCOL
OUTPUT DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR OUTPUT
REQUEST DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR REQUEST
This parameter unit specifies whether the global parameter or
the subscription option ( request or output ) is valid.
b: PROTOCOL TYPE
BOTH BOTH PROTOCOLS
FCTPROT FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
STIPROT STIMULUS PROTOCOL
MDMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
This parameter specifies whether the marking of a multiple subscriber
number as default multiple subscriber number is mandatory or optional.
Notes:
MANDAT MANDATORY
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
DESTMAXL MAX. LENGTH OF DEST. NAME
This parameter specifies the maximum length allowed for the destination
name in the exchange.
LONG LONG NAME: 12 CHARACTERS
SHORT SHORT NAME: 6 CHARACTERS
DLUEM DLU EMERGENCY ALLOWED
This parameter specifies whether the complete DLU emergency operation
MOD CALLPOPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
can be activated in this exchange or only a reduced mode.
PARTLY PARTLY ALLOWED
SLANAPRT SUB LINE ANALOG PORT FAILURE
This parameter specifies whether a subscriber line
port failure is printed out or not.
This parameter can only be used during Installation
Recovery.
PRTNO SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT NO
PRTYES SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT YES
SYSREA SYSTEM REACTION
This parameter specifies whether or not a specific
system reaction is required in call processing.
SPECIAL SPECIAL REACTION
STANDARD STANDARD REACTION
CFWNOT CFW NOTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the kind of call forwarding notification
at the calling users side.
NO NO NOTIFICATION
WITH NOTIFICATION WITH NUMBER
WITHOUT NOTIFICATION WITHOUT NUMBER
ANNFCFW ANNOUNCEMENT FOR CALL FORWARD
This parameter specifies whether an announcement must be
applied to a calling subscriber, when his call was
forwarded.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
N DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
NO DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
Y DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
YES DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
SATMAX MAX NUMBER OF SATELLITE LINKS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of satellite links
within one connection.
ISDNPROT ISDN PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies the type of ISDN D1 - PROTOCOL, that is
used in the exchange.
BOTH BOTH 1TR6 AND EDSS1 PROTOCOL
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-9 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COURTESY COURTESY CALL
This parameter specifies whether a courtesy call attempt
to the forward-to party must be performed after subscriber
controlled input of call forwarding.
N DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
NO DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
Y DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
YES DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
PROPDELY PROPAGATION DELAY COUNTER
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the propagation
delay counter.
TMSLRES MAX. RESERVED TIMESLOTS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved timeslots
for the BEV-condition in GP.
SPCHRES MAX. RESERVED SPEECHCHANNELS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved speech-
channels for the BEV-condition in GP.
SWAPORIG SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
N DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
NO DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
Y DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
YES DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
SCLSTNAE SCREENLIST NOT ACT WHEN EMPTY
This parameter specifies whether the WOM handling or the
projectspecific handling is applicable for screening lists.
N PROJECT SPEC. HANDLING
NO PROJECT SPEC. HANDLING
Y WOM HANDLING
YES WOM HANDLING
ISSCODEP ISDN SUPLEM. SERV. CODE PROC.
This parameter specifies whether the called party number
should be used from the global title header or from
the Call Completion Busy Subscriber component to
determine the B-side user.
N DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
MOD CALLPOPT-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
Y DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
YES DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
KEY KEYWORD
This parameter specifies the default keyword for subscriber
controlled inputs.
4 digit decimal number
DNMAXL MAX. DIRECTORY NUMBER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum length of directory numbers
that are allowed in an exchange.
TRCLMAX MAX. TRAFFIC CLASSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of traffic classes
that are allowed in an exchange.
CONFLMAX MAX. CONFERENCE PARTICIPANTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of participants in
a large conference.
KEYMAX MAX. KEYWORD MISUSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of keyword misuses.
ANNARDN AUTOM. REC. (1 NUMB. STORED)
This Parameter specifies, whether an announcement with the
calling party number currently stored is fed in (YES) or
not (NO), if the subscriber put in the appropriate access
code for AR with announcement.
N ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
NO ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
Y ANNARDN ACTIVATED
YES ANNARDN ACTIVATED
KEYWREQ KEYWORD REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the necessity of a keyword is
defined on feature-office-base or on subscribed base
FEATURE FEATURE BASE
SUBSCR SUBSCR. BASE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-11 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUDACT REDUNTANT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a redundant
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
N REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
IMPLDACT IMPLICIT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a implicit
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
N IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
ANSCIPBX ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
This Parameter specifies, whether an analog
SCI on PBX-Level can be done (YES) or
not (NO).
N NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
NO NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
Y ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
YES ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
TMFEAT TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NUMBER
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
MOD CALLPOPT-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
CW CALL WAITING
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
DIVA FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
DIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVCD CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDA DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
DIVOP OPERATOR DIVERSION
DIVOPD DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
FSK FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
allowed for Analog
HOTLDEL HOTLINE DELAYED
HOTLIMM HOTLINE IMMEDIATE
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
RSCI REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
SCLST SCREENING LIST
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
allowed for 1TR6
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS CALL RESTRICTION SERVICE
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
User interactive subscriber controlled input.
allowed for Analog and ISDN
UUS1 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 1
allowed for EDSS1
allowed for EDSS1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-13 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
CTMFEAT CANCEL TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter is used to cancel features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
CW CALL WAITING
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
MOD CALLPOPT-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for Analog
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
allowed for 1TR6
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS CALL RESTRICTION SERVICE
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
allowed for Analog
allowed for EDSS1
allowed for EDSS1
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
ERN EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the exchange routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CERN.
CERN CANCEL EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the exchange routing number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter ERN.
NRN NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the network routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CNRN.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-15 +
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNRN CANCEL NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the network routing number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter NRN.
MOD CALLPOPT-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
This input format modifies the powersets of services and the service
compatibility tables for one service.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE= ,COMPORIG= ,COMPTERM= ]
] ]
] ,BSIGN=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SPEECH
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
parameter SERV.
TRAFFIC services.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-17 +
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
parameter SERV.
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
COMPORIG COMPAT. SERVICE (ORIG.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for originating traffic.
This internal service is specified by the parameter SERV.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 8 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
MOD CALLPOPT-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
COMPTERM COMPAT. SERVICE (TERM.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for terminating traffic.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 16 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
BSIGN B-SIDE SIGNALLING COMPAT.
This parameter specifies the basic signalling services
associated with one internal service.
Notes:
- A basic signalling service parameter should not be entered twice.
SERV.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-19 +
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: KIND OF PROTOCOL
ANALOG ANALOG SERVICES
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
This unit specifies the type of signalling protocol of the
terminating side of the call.
b: INTERNAL SERVICE OF B-SIDE
TNOSERV TRAFFIC NO SERVICE
This unit specifies the internal service, that is associated
to the type of signalling protocol of the terminating
side of the call.
MOD CALLPOPT-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services for one or more services.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
parameter SERV.
TRAFFIC services.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLPOPT-21 +
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
parameter SERV.
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
E N D
MOD CALLPOPT-22 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CALLTYPE
CAACCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA
This command cancels an OSS and administrable CENTREX call type
for common CDS.
Compatibilities:
- If the OSS call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, or in the common service
group specific intercept datebase or in the route database, it can
not be canceled.
- If the CENTREX call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, it can not be canceled.
1. CAN CALLTYPE - CAACCTYP CANCEL ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. CAN CALLTYPE - CAOCTYP CANCEL OSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
CANCEL ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to cancel administrable
CENTREX call type data.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,ACXCTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
ACXCTYP ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the administrable CENTREX call
type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CALLTYPE-1 +
CAN CALLTYPE
CAOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCEL OSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to cancel an OSS call type.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the OSS call type name.
Prerequisites:
E N D
CAN CALLTYPE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CALLTYPE
CRACCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA
This command creates an OSS or administrable CENTREX
call type for common CDS.
Prerequisites:
- A call type can only be entered if the common service group is already
existing.
- The call type name must be unique in a common service group.
1. CR CALLTYPE - CRACCTYP CREATE ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. CR CALLTYPE - CROCTYP CREATE OSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
CREATE ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an administrable
CENTREX call type.
-
] ]
] CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,ACXCTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,INCEPT=] [,APPLID=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CALLTYPE-1 +
CR CALLTYPE
CRACCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a calltype.
a-b
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
CR CALLTYPE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE OSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an OSS call type.
-
] ]
] CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ]
] ]
] [,CTYPFEA=] [,CTYPR=] [,DICON=] [,INCEPT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,APPLID=] [,VOPSERV=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CALLTYPE-3 +
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
SCREENLT & AUTOGR
NATDNA & AUTOGR
INATDNA & AUTOGR
NATDNAR & AUTOGR
INATDNAR & AUTOGR
RNATDNA & AUTOGR
RINATDNA & AUTOGR
VOPRSVP & AUTOGR
FEA1 & AUTOGR
FEA2 & AUTOGR
FEA3 & AUTOGR
AUTOGR & RCSROPR
SCREENLT & RCSROPR
NATDNA & RCSROPR
INATDNA & RCSROPR
NATDNAR & RCSROPR
INATDNAR & RCSROPR
RNATDNA & RCSROPR
RINATDNA & RCSROPR
VOPRSVP & RCSROPR
FEA1 & RCSROPR
FEA2 & RCSROPR
FEA3 & RCSROPR
AUTOGR & RCSRANN
SCREENLT & RCSRANN
NATDNA & RCSRANN
INATDNA & RCSRANN
NATDNAR & RCSRANN
INATDNAR & RCSRANN
RNATDNA & RCSRANN
RINATDNA & RCSRANN
VOPRSVP & RCSRANN
FEA1 & RCSRANN
FEA2 & RCSRANN
FEA3 & RCSRANN
AUTOGR & RCSRLS
SCREENLT & RCSRLS
NATDNA & RCSRLS
INATDNA & RCSRLS
NATDNAR & RCSRLS
INATDNAR & RCSRLS
RNATDNA & RCSRLS
RINATDNA & RCSRLS
VOPRSVP & RCSRLS
FEA1 & RCSRLS
FEA2 & RCSRLS
FEA3 & RCSRLS
CR CALLTYPE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTOCB AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
AUTOGR AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOTC AUTOMATIC TIME & CHARGE
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
INATDNA INAT.DN ASSISTANCE
INATDNAR INAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POS.
NATDNA NAT.DN ASSISTANCE
NATDNAR NAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POSS.
RCSRANN RCS RECONNECT TO ANNOUNCEMENT
RCSRLS RCS RELEASE CALL
RCSROPR RCS RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
RINATDNA RECONNECT FROM INAT.DN ASSIST.
RNATDNA RECONNECT FROM NAT.DN ASSIST.
SCREENLT SCREENING LIST
SPECOP SPECIFIC OPERATOR
VOPRSVP VIRT.OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
CTYPR CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter specifies the reconnected call type for OSS.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist in the common service group.
DICON DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the digit converting code.
It is only entered, if the call type should be created for
quasiautomatic calls, to modify the existing dial information.
The following modifications can be made:
- removal of digits
- insertion of digits
- replacement of digits
Valid input characters:
0-9, A-F, #, +, ., X
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The character of the old code remains as it is.
. : The character of the old code is deleted.
+ : The character following this character, up to the
next control character, are inserted or added at the
appropriate place.
Example:
a = 123XX. specifies that the first 3 digits of the existing
dial information are replaced by 123, the next 2 digits remain
and the 6th digits is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
a-b
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CALLTYPE-5 +
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: NAME=
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
OSS call type.
ACC AUTOMATIC CALL COMPLETION
NOSERV NO SERVICE
SEMADA SEMI AUTOMATIC DIR.ASSISTANCE
VOPS01 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 1
E N D
CR CALLTYPE-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTCCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA
This command displays OSS or CENTREX call type data for common CDS.
<job number>.
1. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTCCSG DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CENTREX CSG
2. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTCSG DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
3. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTDN DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
4. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTOCSG DISP.CALL TYPE FOR OSS CSG
5. DISP CALLTYPE- DIFCTXCT DISP.FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
1. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CENTREX CSG
This input format is used to display call type
data of a CENTREX specific common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,ACXCTYP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
This parameter specifies the administrable CENTREX call type name.
Notes:
- If X is entered for CSGLAC and/or CSGDN this
parameter is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CALLTYPE-1 +
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
data of a specific common service group or
to get an overview of several common service
groups.
-
] ]
] DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
DISP CALLTYPE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
This input format is used to display call types
that are connected with a directory number.
-
] ]
] DISP CALLTYPE : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the OSS or
administrable CENTREX call type.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the OSS or
administrable CENTREX call type.
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR OSS CSG
data of a OSS specific common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,CTYP=] [,CTYPFEA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Notes:
Notes:
DISP CALLTYPE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOPRSVP VIRTUAL OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
DISP CALLTYPE
DIFCTXCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISP.FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to display a fixed CENTREX
call type.
-
] ]
] DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CXCTYP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CXCTYP FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the fixed CENTREX call type name.
Notes:
ATATGR ATTN. TO ATTN. GROUP CALL
ATNCO ATTN. RECALL FROM CAMP-ON
ATNGR DIAL ATTENDANT GROUP CALL
ATNIC ATTENDANT INTERCEPT INCOMING
ATNOG ATTENDANT INTERCEPT OUTGOING
CRLFCD CALL REDIRECTED TO LFCD NUMBER
CRNS CALL REDIRECTED TO NS NUMBER
CSHRATN CALL TO SHARED ATTENDANT
DIVDA DO NOT ANSWER DIVERSION
DTAC DIAL THROUGH ATTN. CALL
HOTATN HOTLINE CALL TO ATTN.
ILPDNAG INAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NLPDNAG NAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NOWORK CALL TO NON-WORKING NUMBER
OAWIID OPR.ASSIST.WITH IDENTIFICATION
OAWOID OPR.ASSIST.WITHOUT IDENT.
REST RESTRICTED CALL TO ATTENDANT
SPECL SPECIAL (E.G. NIGHT SERVICE)
TOLDIV TOLL DIVERSION TO ATTENDANT
TRANS TRANSFERRED CALL
E N D
DISP CALLTYPE-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLTYPE
MOACCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA
1. MOD CALLTYPE - MOACCTYP MODIFY ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. MOD CALLTYPE - MOFCCTYP MODIFY FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
3. MOD CALLTYPE - MOOCTYP MODIFY OSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
MODIFY ADMIN.CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an administrable
CENTREX call type.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,ACXCTYP= <,LAC= ,DN= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CLAC= ,CDN= ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= ,APPLID=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
type name.
Prerequisites:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLTYPE-1 +
MOD CALLTYPE
MOACCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
a-b
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
CINCEPT CANCEL INTERCEPT
This parameter cancel the intercept for a calltype.
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
APPLID APPLICATION
MOD CALLTYPE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLTYPE
MOFCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify a fixed CENTREX call type.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CXCTYP= <,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,APPLID=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CXCTYP FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the fixed CENTREX call type.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLTYPE-3 +
MOD CALLTYPE
MOFCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
APPLID APPLICATION
MOD CALLTYPE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY OSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an OSS call type.
-
] ]
] MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= <,NCTYP= ,LAC= ,DN= ]
] ]
] ,CLAC= ,CDN= ,CTYPFEA= ,CCTYPFEA= ,CTYPR= ]
] ]
] ,CCTYPR= ,DICON= ,CDICON= ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,APPLID= ,VOPSERV=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
NCTYP NEW CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the new name of the OSS call type.
Prerequisites:
- The new name must not exist in the common service group.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLTYPE-5 +
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
SCREENLT & AUTOGR
NATDNA & AUTOGR
INATDNA & AUTOGR
NATDNAR & AUTOGR
INATDNAR & AUTOGR
RNATDNA & AUTOGR
RINATDNA & AUTOGR
VOPRSVP & AUTOGR
FEA1 & AUTOGR
FEA2 & AUTOGR
FEA3 & AUTOGR
AUTOGR & RCSROPR
SCREENLT & RCSROPR
NATDNA & RCSROPR
INATDNA & RCSROPR
NATDNAR & RCSROPR
MOD CALLTYPE-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INATDNAR & RCSROPR
RNATDNA & RCSROPR
RINATDNA & RCSROPR
VOPRSVP & RCSROPR
FEA1 & RCSROPR
FEA2 & RCSROPR
FEA3 & RCSROPR
AUTOGR & RCSRANN
SCREENLT & RCSRANN
NATDNA & RCSRANN
INATDNA & RCSRANN
NATDNAR & RCSRANN
INATDNAR & RCSRANN
RNATDNA & RCSRANN
RINATDNA & RCSRANN
VOPRSVP & RCSRANN
FEA1 & RCSRANN
FEA2 & RCSRANN
FEA3 & RCSRANN
AUTOGR & RCSRLS
SCREENLT & RCSRLS
NATDNA & RCSRLS
INATDNA & RCSRLS
NATDNAR & RCSRLS
INATDNAR & RCSRLS
RNATDNA & RCSRLS
RINATDNA & RCSRLS
VOPRSVP & RCSRLS
FEA1 & RCSRLS
FEA2 & RCSRLS
FEA3 & RCSRLS
CCTYPFEA CANCEL CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the cancel call type features.
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLTYPE-7 +
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCREENLT & AUTOGR
NATDNA & AUTOGR
INATDNA & AUTOGR
NATDNAR & AUTOGR
INATDNAR & AUTOGR
RNATDNA & AUTOGR
RINATDNA & AUTOGR
VOPRSVP & AUTOGR
FEA1 & AUTOGR
FEA2 & AUTOGR
FEA3 & AUTOGR
AUTOGR & RCSROPR
SCREENLT & RCSROPR
NATDNA & RCSROPR
INATDNA & RCSROPR
NATDNAR & RCSROPR
INATDNAR & RCSROPR
RNATDNA & RCSROPR
RINATDNA & RCSROPR
VOPRSVP & RCSROPR
FEA1 & RCSROPR
FEA2 & RCSROPR
FEA3 & RCSROPR
AUTOGR & RCSRANN
SCREENLT & RCSRANN
NATDNA & RCSRANN
INATDNA & RCSRANN
NATDNAR & RCSRANN
INATDNAR & RCSRANN
RNATDNA & RCSRANN
RINATDNA & RCSRANN
VOPRSVP & RCSRANN
FEA1 & RCSRANN
FEA2 & RCSRANN
FEA3 & RCSRANN
AUTOGR & RCSRLS
SCREENLT & RCSRLS
NATDNA & RCSRLS
INATDNA & RCSRLS
NATDNAR & RCSRLS
INATDNAR & RCSRLS
RNATDNA & RCSRLS
RINATDNA & RCSRLS
VOPRSVP & RCSRLS
FEA1 & RCSRLS
FEA2 & RCSRLS
FEA3 & RCSRLS
CTYPR CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter specifies the OSS reconnected call type.
Prerequisites:
MOD CALLTYPE-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCTYPR CANCEL CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter cancel the OSS reconnected call type.
Prerequisites:
DICON DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the digit converting code.
It is entered to modify the existing dial information.
The following modifications can be made:
- removal of digits
Valid input characters:
0-9, A-F, #, +, ., X
X : The character of the old code remains as it is.
. : The character of the old code is deleted.
+ : The character following this character, up to the
next control character, are inserted or added at the
appropriate place.
Example:
a = 123XX. specifies that the first 3 digits of the existing
dial information are replaced by 123, the next 2 digits remain
and the 6th digits is omitted.
CDICON CANCEL DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel digit converting code.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
a-b
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CALLTYPE-9 +
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
APPLID APPLICATION
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
OSS call type.
ACC AUTOMATIC CALL COMPLETION
NOSERV NO SERVICE
SEMADA SEMI AUTOMATIC DIR.ASSISTANCE
VOPS01 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 1
E N D
MOD CALLTYPE-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR
This command cancels a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CAP : CAP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CAP-1 -
CONF CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR
This command configures a call processor.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF CAP : CAP= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CAP-1 -
CR CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR
This command creates a call processor.
The created call processor is in the operating state PLA after the
command has been executed.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CAP : CAP= ,PBI= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be created.
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the call processor.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CAP-1 -
DIAG CAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR
for a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG CAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG CAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a call processor.
-
] ]
] DIAG CAP : CAP= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG CAP-1 +
DIAG CAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a call
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.
-
] ]
] DIAG CAP : CAP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
DIAG CAP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR
This command displays all call processors with their physical bus
interface numbers.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CAP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CAP-1 -
TEST CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CALL PROCESSOR
This command tests a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST CAP : [CAP=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active call processors
are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST CAP-1 -
CAN CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command cancels the catastrophe condition for a LAC.
All subscribers are allowed to originate calls independently from catastrophe
immunities after execution of this command.
The display of CAT1 or CAT2 on the system panel is canceled if the
command has been successfully executed and no other LAC remains in this
status.
The command is acknowledged with PART. EXECD if the data cannot be transmitted
to all operational LTGs (i.e. those with OST = ACT or CBL). The
data are transferred in this case to the LTG when the LTG is reloaded the next
time from the CP memory.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CATAST : [LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local network for which the catastrophe
condition is being canceled.
The parameter is mandatory if more than one LAC is defined for
the exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CATAST-1 -
DISP CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command displays the currently valid catastrophe condition(s) of one or all
LACs.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CATAST : [LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code which is selected for the
display of the catastrophe condition.
If the parameter is omitted or an X is entered, then the catastrophe
conditions of all local area codes in the exchange are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CATAST-1 -
ENTR CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command enters a catastrophe condition for a LAC.
Attention:
Subscribers without an catastrophe immunity cannot originate any call after the
execution of this command. Terminating calls are not affected from the execution
of this command.
Subscribers need one of the catastrophe immunity values CATIM1 or CATIM2
for the origination of calls if CATCON = 1 has been activated for the LAC
where they belong to.
Subscribers need the catastrophe immunity value CATIM2 for the origination of
calls if CATCON = 2 has been activated.
Depending on the CATCON value one of the lamps CAT1 or CAT2 is
activated at the system panel if the command has been successfully executed.
No status change occurs at the system panel if that lamp was already active
before the execution of this command.
The current system status concerning the catastrophe conditions may be checked
using either DISP CATAST or DISP INDIC.
The command is acknowledged with PART. EXECD if the data cant be transmitted
to all operational LTGs (i.e. those with OST = ACT or CBL). The
data are transferred in this case to the LTG when the LTG is reloaded the next
time from the CP memory.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CATAST : CATCON= [,LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CATCON CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This parameter specifies the catastrophe condition of a local network
of the exchange.
CATCON = 2 is more restrictive than CATCON = 1.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local network for which the catastrophe
condition is being assigned.
The parameter is mandatory if more than one LAC is defined for
the exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CATAST-1 -
DISP CBDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL BOOKING DATA
This command displays call booking data as a priority percentage.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CBDATA ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBDATA-1 -
ENTR CBDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL BOOKING DATA
This command enters the call booking data.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CBDATA : PRIPCT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PRIPCT PRIORITY PERCENTAGE
This parameter specifies the priority percentage of call bookings.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CBDATA-1 -
CAN CBLIMIT
CANCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA
This command cancels a call booking limit for a specified time period
- for a specified OSS common service group,
- for a specified destination, or
- for the conventional OSS.
1. CAN CBLIMIT - CANCSGRL CANCEL CSGROUP CBLIMIT
2. CAN CBLIMIT - CANDESTL CANCEL DESTINATION CBLIMIT
3. CAN CBLIMIT - CANSYSL CANCEL SYSTEM CBLIMIT
1. Input format
CANCEL CSGROUP CBLIMIT
This input format is used to cancel a call booking
limit of an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CBLIMIT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,TIME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- This parameter has to be entered, if call booking limit for a
common service group is to be canceled.
- The parameter is not required, if system call booking limit or
destination limit is to be canceled.
group.
Notes:
common service group is to be canceled.
destination limit is to be canceled.
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time period for which the call booking
limit will be canceled.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CBLIMIT-1 +
CAN CBLIMIT
CANCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter can be omitted, if all call booking limits of
a destination are to be canceled.
a-b
a: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the begin hour of time period.
b: MINUTE=
This parameter specifies the begin minute of time period.
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
CAN CBLIMIT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CBLIMIT
CANDESTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCEL DESTINATION CBLIMIT
This input format is used to cancel a call booking
limit of a destination.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CBLIMIT : DEST= [,TIME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area name. This parameter
allows only alphanumeric characters.
Notes:
- The parameter is required if call booking limit for a destination
is to be canceled.
- The parameter has to be omitted, if system call booking limit or
common service group booking limit is to be canceled.
.
TIME TIME
Notes:
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CBLIMIT-3 +
CAN CBLIMIT
CANSYSL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL SYSTEM CBLIMIT
This input format is used to cancel a system call booking
limit for conventional OSS.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CBLIMIT : TIME= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
Notes:
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
E N D
CAN CBLIMIT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CBLIMIT
CRCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA
This command creates a call booking limit for a specified time period
1. CR CBLIMIT - CRCSGRL CREATE CSGROUP CBLIMIT
2. CR CBLIMIT - CRDESTL CREATE DESTINATION CBLIMIT
3. CR CBLIMIT - CRSYSL CREATE SYSTEM CBLIMIT
1. Input format
CREATE CSGROUP CBLIMIT
This input format is used to create a call booking
limit for an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CBLIMIT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TIME= ,CALLS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
common service group is to be created.
destination limit is to be created.
group.
Notes:
common service group is to be created.
destination limit is to be created.
TIME TIME
limit will be created.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CBLIMIT-1 +
CR CBLIMIT
CRCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Up to 8 time periods allowed.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
CALLS NUMBER OF BOOKINGS
This parameter specifies the number of call bookings allowed
for the time period.
CR CBLIMIT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CBLIMIT
CRDESTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE DESTINATION CBLIMIT
This input format is used to create a call booking
limit for a destination.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CBLIMIT : DEST= ,TIME= ,CALLS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
Notes:
is to be created.
common service group booking limit is to be created.
.
TIME TIME
Notes:
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CBLIMIT-3 +
CR CBLIMIT
CRSYSL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE SYSTEM CBLIMIT
This input format is used to create a system call booking
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CBLIMIT : TIME= ,CALLS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
Notes:
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
E N D
CR CBLIMIT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CBLIMIT
DICSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL BOOKING LIMIT
This command displays call booking limits
<job number>.
1. DISP CBLIMIT - DICSGRL DISPLAY CSGROUP CBLIMIT
2. DISP CBLIMIT - DIDESTL DISPLAY DESTINATION CBLIMIT
3. DISP CBLIMIT - DISYSL DISPLAY SYSTEM CBLIMIT
1. Input format
DISPLAY CSGROUP CBLIMIT
This input format is used to display call booking
limits for an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CBLIMIT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- This parameter has to be entered, if call booking limits for a
common service group are to be displayed.
- The parameter is not required, if system call booking limits or
destination limits are to be displayed.
group.
Notes:
- This parameter has to be entered, if call booking limits for a
common service group are to be displayed.
- The parameter is not required, if system call booking limits or
destination limits are to be displayed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBLIMIT-1 +
DISP CBLIMIT
DIDESTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY DESTINATION CBLIMIT
This input format is used to display call booking
limits for one or more destinations.
-
] ]
] DISP CBLIMIT : DEST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
Notes:
- The parameter is required if call booking limits for a destination
are to be displayed.
- The parameter has to be omitted, if system call booking limits or
common service group booking limits are to be displayed.
.
DISP CBLIMIT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CBLIMIT
DISYSL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY SYSTEM CBLIMIT
This input format is used to display system call booking
limits for conventional OSS.
-
] ]
] DISP CBLIMIT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBLIMIT-3 -
MOD CBLIMIT
MODCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL BOOKING LIMIT DATA
This command modifies a call booking limit for a specified time period
1. MOD CBLIMIT - MODCSGRL MODIFY CSGROUP CBLIMIT
2. MOD CBLIMIT - MODDESTL MODIFY DESTINATION CBLIMIT
3. MOD CBLIMIT - MODSYSL MODIFY SYSTEM CBLIMIT
1. Input format
MODIFY CSGROUP CBLIMIT
This input format is used to modify a call booking
limit for an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CBLIMIT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TIME= [,NTIME=] [,CALLS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
common service group is to be modified.
destination limit is to be modified.
group.
Notes:
common service group is to be modified.
destination limit is to be modified.
TIME TIME
limit will be applied.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBLIMIT-1 +
MOD CBLIMIT
MODCSGRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
NTIME NEW TIME
This parameter specifies the new value for the begin of time period for
which the call booking limit will be applied.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
MOD CBLIMIT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CBLIMIT
MODDESTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION CBLIMIT
This input format is used to modify a call booking
limit for a destination.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CBLIMIT : DEST= ,TIME= [,NTIME=] [,CALLS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
Notes:
is to be modified.
common service group booking limit is to be modified.
.
TIME TIME
n
n/o
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
NTIME NEW TIME
This parameter specifies the new value for the begin of time period for
which the call booking limit will be applied.
a-b
a: HOUR=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBLIMIT-3 +
MOD CBLIMIT
MODDESTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
MOD CBLIMIT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CBLIMIT
MODSYSL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY SYSTEM CBLIMIT
This input format is used to modify a system call booking
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CBLIMIT : TIME= [,CALLS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
n
n/o
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
- Allowed values: 00, 15, 30, 45.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBLIMIT-5 -
ACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command activates either a single or all code block point groups.
It is not possible to activate the code block point group named
"MABEZ",because this group is internally used for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Activation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block point
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CBPGRP-1 -
CAN CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command cancels a code block point group.
It is not possible to cancel the code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is used for traffic monitoring of
mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations) and is therefore
internally created and cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- No code block point is assigned to this group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CBPGRP : CBPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the existing code block
point group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CBPGRP-1 -
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command creates a code block point group for the control
function Leaky Bucket. A number of code points may be assigned to
a code block point group with the MML command CR CBPT.
The Leaky Bucket control function limits the number of call attempts
to the code block points of the group to a predefined call attempt
rate.
This results in the rejection of all call attempts to this group
which exceed the predefined limit (parameter LBUCLCR).
Notes:
- It is not possible to create a code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is internally used for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
- The number of code block point groups within an exchange is
limited to 500.
- The maximum number of code block points assigned to one CBPGRP
is 16.
- The CBPGRP should be activated by the command ACT CBPGRP,
in order to start network traffic control.
- The network management function Leaky Bucket may be activated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=CNTRL, standard value) or deactivated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=NOCNTRL) for a privileged subscriber
(i.e. BEV subscriber).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CBPGRP : CBPGRP= ,LBUCLCR= [,PRIVTRAF=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group.
LBUCLCR LEAKY BUCKET LIMIT CALL RATE
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts for the Leaky
Bucket function.
LCPS0P1 LIMIT 0.1 CALLS PER SECOND
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CBPGRP-1 +
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
CR CBPGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command deactivates either a single or all code block point groups.
Code block points connected to this code block point group will thus
no longer be blocked via the code block point translator.
It is not possible to deactivate the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Deactivation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
The deactivation of a code block point group has no effect on the
related code block points. Call Processing always has to process all
digits of the code block points before the activity status of the
code block point group can be evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CBPGRP-1 -
DISP CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command displays a single, all or a list of code block point
groups with their specified limit call rate and the indicator for
privileged traffic.
The data of the code block point group "MABEZ" will be displayed,
although this code block point group is not created by the command
CR CBPGRP.
This code block point group is created internally after activation
of mass call event recognition, detection of a mass call event and
start of rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CBPGRP : CBPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBPGRP-1 -
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command changes the limit call rate and the indicator for
privileged traffic for the specified CBPGRP.
Notes:
- The limit call rate can be changed at any time, i.e. even when
the controlling network function is in use.
- It is not possible to modify the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CBPGRP : CBPGRP= <,LBUCLCR= ,PRIVTRAF=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block
point group.
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts
for the Leaky Bucket function.
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBPGRP-1 +
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
MOD CBPGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT
This command cancels a code block point, i.e. traffic to this
digit combination is no longer blocked.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the
combination of CODE, ORIG1, CAT or ZDIG.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Notes:
- It is not possible to cancel code block points belonging to
the code block point group "MABEZ", because they are used
internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]CODE=] ;- ]
] CAN CBPT : -NAME= [,ORIG1=] [,CAT=] [,ZDIG=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (i.e. the destination)
where traffic is blocked.
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the code block point object.
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating mark of the code block point.
ORIG1 serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered digit combination.
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the code block point.
CAT serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic
to the entered digit combination.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CBPT-1 +
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
Multy party line (No.7 category = 225)
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
Ani equipment trouble (No.7 category = 229)
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
Very important person (No.7 category = 226)
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
Charge information required (No.7 category = 227)
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
ISD bared subscriber (No.7 category = 228)
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language discrimination digit of the
code block point. ZDIG serves as a criterion for selective blocking
of traffic to the entered digit combination.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
E N D
CAN CBPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT
This command creates a code block point, i.e. a network traffic
management control is defined for the specified digit combination.
The parameter NAME specifies the code block point object.
The type of network traffic management control is defined by the
parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The destination code to be controlled by code blocking may be national
or international telephone numbers, service codes, local area codes,
carrier codes, country codes, etc. or suitable concatenations of these.
All code block points have to be preceded by the international or, if
applicable, the national prefix.
Example: Within the local area 089 of an exchange a subscriber number
4711 exists.
- The code block point 0894711 blocks traffic to the given subscriber.
- The code block point 089 blocks traffic to the local area 089.
- If there is another local area 088 within the exchange, the code block
point 08 blocks the traffic to 088 and 089.
Code block points consist of digit combinations together with parameters
ORIG1, CAT and ZDIG. Because the digit translator is not checked
to ensure that a code point exists for this digit combination, only code
block points should be created which refer to existing code points in
the digit translator.
This command facilitates
- the blocking of a certain percentage of traffic (see parameter PERC).
Thus it is possible to block a certain percentage of call attempts
for a given code block point.
- the blocking of call attempts for a certain time interval
(see parameter CGAP).
After each successful call attempt to a given code block point, it is
possible to block further call attempts for a certain time interval.
- the assignment of code block points to a code block point group for
the Leaky Bucket control function (see parameter CBPGRP).
A total of 16 code block points may be assigned to a code block point
group.
Notes:
- The number of code block points within an exchange is limited to 10000.
- Each code block point can be marked with parameter TRAMEA=YES to be
controlled by traffic measurement (TRAMEA=NO, standard value).
- It is not possible to create a code block point for the code block point
group "MABEZ", because this group contains only code block points which
are used internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CBPT : CODE= [,NAME=] [,ORIG1=] [,CAT=] [,ZDIG=] ]
] ]
] - ]
] ],PERC= ] ;- ]
] -,CGAP= ,INCEPT= [,TRAMEA=] - ]
] ],CBPGRP=] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CBPT-1 +
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies a unique name for a code block point object.
It may not be entered in case of call gapping.
This name is the key that identifies the code block point and must not
be changed.
Four control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
Automatic instance naming is performed if this parameter is not
entered, i.e. the system itself assigns a name to the code block
point object.
ORIG1 serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to the
entered digit combination.
CAT CATEGORY
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
code block point. ZDIG serves as a criterion for selective
CR CBPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
blocking of traffic to the entered digit combination.
PERC PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12.5 % BLOCKING
CGAP CALL GAPPING TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
SEC0 0 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P1 0.1 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC1 1 SECOND CALL GAP
INF INFINITE CALL GAP
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter specifies the intercept code (e.g. an announcement)
where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is valid.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 0
TRAMEA TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CBPT-3 +
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
CR CBPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command displays the code block points and their blocking
functions. One or more of the parameters CODE, NAME, PERC,
CGAP, CBPGRP, TRAMEA or INCEPT may be entered.
The code block point belonging to the code block point group "MABEZ"
will also be displayed although it is not created by the command
CR CBPT.
This code block point group is created internally after activation of
mass call recognition, detection of a mass call event and start of
rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format
-
] ]
] - -- ]
] ]CODE=] ]],PERC= ]] ]
] DISP CBPT : -NAME= ]-,CGAP= ] [,TRAMEA=] [,INCEPT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]],CBPGRP=]] ]
] ' ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code
block point(s) to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the code
block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
X ALL PERC VALUES
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBPT-1 +
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL GAP VALUES
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement is
activated or deactivated for the code block point.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
INDEP INDEPENDENT
This parameter specifies the intercept for the code block point(s)
to be displayed.
E N D
DISP CBPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command modifies the percentage, time interval or code block
point group of a particular code block point according to the values
entered for the parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The blocking function may not be changed (e.g. from code blocking
to call gapping).
The modification of INCEPT and the activation or deactivation
of traffic measurement for the code block point by parameter
TRAMEA are also possible.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the combination
of CODE, ORIG1, CAT or ZDIG.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Note:
- It is not possible to modify a code block point belonging to, or so
that it subsequently belongs to, the code block point group "MABEZ".
The code block points belonging to this group are used internally
to reduce traffic to mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Input format
-
] ]
] - -- ]
] ]CODE=] ]],PERC= ]] ]
] MOD CBPT : -NAME= [,ORIG1=] [,CAT=] [,ZDIG=] ]-,CGAP= ] ]
] ] ] ]],CBPGRP=]] ]
] ' ~ '- ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,INCEPT=] [,TRAMEA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ORIG1 serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered digit combination.
CAT CATEGORY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBPT-1 +
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
code block point. ZDIG serves as a criterion for selective
blocking of traffic to the entered digit combination.
This parameter specifies the (new) percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the (new) time interval when the
traffic to the code block point is blocked.
MOD CBPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the (new) name of a code block point
group for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter specifies the (new) intercept code (e.g. an announce-
ment) where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is
valid.
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CBPT-3 -
DISP CBPULS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COIN BOX PULSE
This command displays the currently valid coinbox pulse factors.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CBPULS ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CBPULS-1 -
ENTR CBPULS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COIN BOX PULSE
This command enters coinbox pulse factors.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CBPULS : CBPULS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CBPULS COINBOX PULSE
This parameter specifies the coinbox pulse factors.
a-b
a: NUMBER OF THE COINBOX PULSES=
Specifies the number of the coinbox
pulse which is to be repeated
(i.e. the nth).
b: MULTIPLICATION FACTOR=
Specifies the multiplication factor
for coinbox pulses.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CBPULS-1 -
CAN CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL CATEGORY
This command cancels a call category.
Prerequisites:
- No operator locations (booth or attendant operators) may be
assigned to this call category.
- No operators may be allocated to this call category.
- No call types may be allocated to this call category.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CCAT : CCAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the call category.
Notes:
- The input of X is not allowed.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CCAT-1 -
CR CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL CATEGORY
This command creates a call category.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CCAT : CCAT= [,QSIZE=] ,THR= ,FORCE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the name of the call category.
Notes:
- As long as a category exists, the system will not
allow the creation of additional call categories of the same
category name.
.,+,*,%,#
QSIZE QUEUE SIZE
This parameter specifies the queue size threshold.
Notes:
- The QSIZE defines the number of calls that can be
queued in one queue.
- If calls arrive while the queue is full (i.e when the
number of waiting calls is the same as or higher than
the queue size threshold), the incoming calls are not
accepted.
Default: 20
THR THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold value for delayed
queue alarm.
Notes:
- This threshold value, specified in seconds, is the average
time that calls can wait in a queue to be operated
before the chief operator is informed.
- If this time threshold is exceeded, the chief operator is
informed that the calls in the queue of this specific call
category are being operated too slowly by the operator
assigned to this call category.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CCAT-1 +
CR CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the operator group.
Notes:
- This number designates the operator group to which the
call cateogry is assigned.
E N D
CR CCAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL CATEGORY
This command displays call category data. The following data are
displayed:
- Force (FORCE)
- Queue size (QSIZE)
- Queue delay alarm threshold (THR)
- Configuration (CONF)
- Associated call type (CTYP)
These data can be displayed for
- one specific call category,
- several call categories,
- all call categories
either in
- one configuration,
- several configurations,
- all configurations.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CCAT : CCAT= [,CONF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the call category name.
.,+,*,%,#
CONF CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies a CDS configuration. This is a
fixed assignment of call types to call categories, which
determines the distribution of calls among operators.
Up to 8 parameter values may be linked with &.
Default: All configurations
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCAT-1 -
MOD CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL CATEGORY
This command modifies the following call category data:
- Name of the call category
- Queue size
- Queue delay alarm treshold
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CCAT : CCAT= [,QSIZE=] [,THR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the call category name. As long as
this call category exists, the system will not allow the
creation of additional call categories of the same call category
name.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
QSIZE QUEUE SIZE
This parameter specifies the queue size threshold. The queue size
threshold is a threshold at which certain types of calls, such
as new arrivals and recalls, are not queued. (Not all types of
calls are restricted by this threshold.) If calls arrive when the
the queue of waiting calls is full (when the number of calls
waiting equals or exceeds the queue size threshold), then the
incoming calls will be rejected at that time.
n/o
THR THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the queue delay alarm threshold. The
queue delay alarm threshold, entered in seconds, is the average
length of time that calls may wait for service in a call waiting
queue before the chief operator is notified. If this time limit is
exceeded, the chief operator is informed that the calls in the
particular call category queue are being serviced too slowly by the
operators assigned to service that call category.
n/o
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CCAT-1 -
CONF CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command configures a central clock generator side to the requested
operating state.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF CCG : CCG= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the side of CCG.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operational states.
The following table shows which operational state transitions
are permitted.
Compatibilities:
+------------+---------------------+
! from / to ! ACT STB MBL !
+------------+---------------------+
! ACT ! - 1 !! !
! STB ! - - + !
! MBL ! - + - !
! NAC ! - - + !
! UNA ! - + + !
+------------+---------------------+
+ : legal state transition
- : illegal state transition
1 : legal state transition, if the redundant CCG
is in the operational state STB.
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or loss of
calls. This operational state transition is permitted, if the
redundant CCG is in the operational state STB.
STB STANDBY
If parameter SUP=Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
suppressed during command execution.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCG-1 -
DISP CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command displays the state and error registers for the central
clock generator CCG.
Notes:
- Reference frequencies which are not set are evaluated as GOOD in the
associated output mask.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CCG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCG-1 -
STAT CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG
This command displays the CCG operating state.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT CCG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT CCG-1 -
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER
This command displays the internal CCG(A) parameters.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
DATA0 SPECIFIC CCG DATA0
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
CCG(A).
CCG(A).
CCG(A).
The following combinations of DATA0 .. DATA3 are possible:
----------------------------------------------------------
a) REQMOD: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the modifications made by
PRIOFR, DISFS and DISCONF.
Expected acknowledgement: REQMODACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 01 xx yy zz
with: xx see xx for PRIOACK - MOD CCGPAR b)
= 00 = Reference frequencies have HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 has priority
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCGPAR-1 +
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
yy see xx for DISFSACK - MOD CCGPAR c)
= 00 = Reference frequencies are supervised
= 01 = Reference frequency supervision disabled
zz see xx for DISCOACK - MOD CCGPAR d)
= 00 = All reference frequencies are enabled
01 = Reference 0 disabled
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
05 = Partner reference and reference 0 disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
b) PDACT: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02
This byte combination interrogates the current PD value. An
evaluation is only useful in conjunction with the current phase
offset (Acknowledgement to the command OFFSET).
Expected acknowledgement: PDACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in PD contents
yy = 1st byte before point in PD contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in PD contents (MSB)
c) OFFSET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
This byte combination interrogates the present phase offset, which
is a result of the previous phase corrections.
Expected acknowledgement: OFFACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in offset contents
yy = 1st byte before point in offset contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in offset contents (MSB)
d) SIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
This byte combination interrogates the original contents of the
integration register stored in the ANMOD.
Expected acknowledgement: SIACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in safeguarding IR
yy = 1st byte before point in safeguarding IR
zz = 2nd byte before point in safeguarding IR (MSB)
e) IREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 05
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
integration register.
Expected acknowledgement: IACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in integration register
DISP CCGPAR-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
yy = 1st byte before point in integration register
zz = 2nd byte before point in integration register (MSB)
f) DAC: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 06
This byte combination interrogates the current DAC value.
Expected acknowledgement: DACACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in DAC value
yy = 1st byte before point in DAC value
zz = 2nd byte before point in DAC value (MSB)
g) PREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 07
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
proportional register.
Expected acknowledgement: PACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in the proportional register
yy = 1st byte before point in proportional register
zz = 2nd byte before point in proportional register (MSB)
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCGPAR-3 -
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER
This command modifies the CCG(A) control parameters. The command is
only valid for the digital CCG(A) or CCGR. The analog CCG does not
execute the command.
This command is a dangerous command because it may destroy the
network synchronism.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
CCG(A).
CCG(A).
CCG(A).
CCG(A).
The following modifications of DATA0 .. DATA3 are possible :
------------------------------------------------------------
a) RESET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
With this byte combination the CCG(A)/CCGR is reset, i.e. start in
mode A, if a reference frequency is available (without heating
the VCO).
Expected acknowledgement: MSTSY
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 01 00 00 00
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CCGPAR-1 +
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b) PRIOFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02,
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Restoration of HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 now has priority
= 02 = Reference frequency 2 now has priority
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination changes the hardware priority of the
reference frequencies. If the frequency given in the command is
available, a switchover is made correspondingly.
Expected acknowledgement: PRIOACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 02 xx 00 00
with: xx = 00 = HW priority restored
c) DISFS: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Switch on disable
This byte combination disables or reactivates the supervision of
the reference frequency (frequencies) being applied.
Expected acknowledgement: DISFSACK
and output of
with: xx = 00 = Disable switched off (supervision)
= 01 = Disable switched on (no supervision)
d) DISCONF: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Disable reference 0
= 02 = Disable reference 1
= 03 = Disable reference 0 and reference 1
= 04 = Disable partner reference
= 05 = Disable partner reference and reference 0
= 06 = Disable partner reference and reference 1
= 07 = Disable partner reference and
references 0 and 1
This byte combination disables or reactivates the reference
frequencies being applied at the CCG(A)/CCGR. Any combination of
the two external reference frequencies (reference 0 and
reference 1) and of the reference frequency of the partner
CCG(A)/CCGR (partner reference) can be disabled.
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 07 puts the CCG(A)/CCGR in HOLDOVER mode.
Expected acknowledgement: DISCOACK
and output of
with: xx = 00 = All disables switched off
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
e) UIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 15
This byte combination saves the contents of the integration
register on disk.
Expected acknowledgement: SADIR
and output of
MOD CCGPAR-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCG-PARAMETER: H 15 00 00 00
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CCGPAR-3 -
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCNC
This command configures the CCNP and all other CCNC processors to
a new operating state.
If active units SIPA, SILTC or SILT are to be configured to target
state MBL, messages may get lost in the rerouting of traffic to
alternative signal channels. This loss of messages can be avoided
if the signal channels concerned are configured to state BL1 or BL2
beforehand (see command CONF C7LINK).
If CCS7 rejection of change to MBL via MMI for the last active unit
(LM15903) has been implemented it is not allowed to switch off
the last active unit of a MUXM or CCNP pair or the last active
SILTC or SILT as this may cause total breakdown of CCS7 signaling.
The configuration command can be logged because there is no
create command for processors CCNP, SIPA, SILTC and SILT.
If execution of the configuration command is not successful
the following error messages are output,
displaying the reason for the failure.
Possible errors are :
Module 1:
Error| Fault text | Cause/measure
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA NOT EXEC- | Try again later.
| UTED, NO SUPERVISION TIMER AVAILABLE | If several attempts are
| LACK OF RESOURCES OR SW ERROR | unsuccessful use NSTART 0.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT NETWORK DATA | Run diagnosis for CCNP in
| STOPPED, SECOND NEGATIVE OR MISSING | state STB
| RESPONSE, SW OR HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA STOPPED, | Configure redundant CCNP
| STB-CCNP NOT LOADED | to STB
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA STOPPED, | Configure redundant CCNP
| NO END FROM TRT SIMP, | to STB
| SW OR HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | SECOND MISSING RESPONSE TO | Configure redundant CCNP
| START_TRANS, HW OR SW FAULT | to STB
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | EVENT IS INVALID IN THE CURRENT | NSTART 0 necessary
| PROCESS, STATE OF MSSMD, SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | PROCESS FOR CCNP LOADING COULD NOT | Try again later.
| BE STARTED, LACK OF RESOURCES | If several attempts are
| OR SW ERROR | unsuccessful use NSTART 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Module 3 :
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | TASK NOT EXECUTED BECAUSE OF ERRORS | Dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | WRONG PID IN MESSAGE, SOFTWARE ERROR | Write SW error report,
| | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED -- | Repeat command using
| WRONG DEVICE NUMBER | correct device number
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED -- | Repeat command using
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES | correct values
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | TIMER ORDER FAILED: LACK OF RESOUR- | Try again later if no SWSG
| CES OR SOFTWARE ERROR IF SWSG OCCURS | occurs
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
6 | CURRENT STATUS OF CCNP DOES NOT | Try again after CCNP has
| ALLOW TASK EXECUTION, | been configured to ACT
| NO CCNP IS ACTIVE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | UPDATE ON DISK NOT POSSIBLE | Try again later
| BECAUSE NO NOTEBOOK AVAILABLE |
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-1 +
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | UPDATE ON DISK NOT POSSIBLE; | Try to repeat command
| NEW STATES ARE NOT ON DISK |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
9 | NO PARALLEL TASK FOR CONFIGURATION | Try again later
| ALLOWED |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
10 | STATE TRANSITION OR RESULTING | Check operating states.
| COMBINATION OF OPERATING STATES | No other operator measures
| ILLEGAL AFTER OPERATOR REQUEST | necessary
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
11 | REQUESTED STATE ALREADY ENTERED | Dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
12 | REQUEST NOT ALLOWED BECAUSE STOP | Dont retry
| LOADING IS ACTIVE FOR A CCNP |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
13 | TASK TERMINATION BECAUSE OF HARD | Try again later
| SWITCHOVER |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
14 | INTERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS, SWSG | Write SW error report,
| OCCURS | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
15 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUBSYSTEM C7 | Write SW error report,
| EXTERNAL PROCEDURE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
16 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUBSYSTEM C7 | Write SW error report,
| INTERNAL PROCEDURE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
17 | ERROR WHEN READING A TRANSIENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
18 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A TRANSIENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE. ONLY SEMIPERMANENT | check states
| STATES MAY HAVE CHANGED |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
19 | ERROR WHEN READING A SEMIPERMANENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
20 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A SEMIPERMANENT | Write SW error report if
| DEVICE STATE | an SWSG occurs; otherwise
| | lack of resources,
| | dont retry if SWSG occurs
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
21 | UNDEFINED MESSAGE FROM CCNC | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN, run
| | diagnosis for processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
22 | UNDEFINED RESPONSE VALUE FROM IOCP | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN,
| | check IOCP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
23 | UNDEFINED VALUES IN RECEIVED MESSAGE | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN,
| | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
24 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF | Corrective maintenance
| ANSWER FROM CCNP | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
25 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF | Corrective maintenance
| ANSWER FROM IOCP, SW ERROR | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+-------------------------
26 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF ANSWER | Corrective maintenance
| FROM CCNP DURING SOFTSWITCHOVER | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
27 | DEPAS DENIES ACCESS TO CCNC SEMILIB | Try later
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
28 | CCNP NOT IN STATE SEZ_R AFTER POSI- | Write SW error report
| TIVE LOAD ACKNOWLEDGE FROM FA:CCNC, |
| OR SIMP NOT SEZ_R DURING INI2 CON- |
| TROLLED BY FA:CCNC |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
29 | INVALID IOGPGCH COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
30 | INVALID IORSOUT COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
31 | INVALID IOKONF COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
CONF CCNC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
32 | "NO IOP AVAILABLE FOR CCNC ACCESS" | Corrective maintenance
| IS RESPONSE FROM IOCP | according to MMN,
| | check IOCP, no CCNC error
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
33 | COMMAND ACK BETWEEN IOP AND CCNP NOT | Corrective maintenance
| SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNP RESET, | according to MMN
| CCNP ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
34 | COMMAND RDY BETWEEN IOP AND CCNP NOT | Corrective maintenance
| SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNP RESET, | according to MMN
| CCNP ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
35 | SIMP STATUS NOT THE SAME AS THE ONE | Reload CCNP
| STORED IN CP DATABASE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
36 | SIMP DEVICE NUMBER NOT THE SAME AS | Corrective maintenance
| THE ONE STORED IN CP DATABASE | according to MMN,
| | reload CCNP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
37 | CONFIGURATION IN SIMP IS NOT IN | Corrective maintenance
| STATE IDLE | according to MMN,
| | reload CCNP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
38 | SIPA CONFIGURATION FAILED IN PARTNER | Run diagnosis for affected
| CCNP, HARDWARE FAILURE OR NO TIMER | CCNP, repeat command,
| FOR CONFIGURATION COMMAND TO CCNP IN | display states.
| STATE STB; FOR DETAILS SEE INI2 | Corrective maintenance
| MEASURE FOR CCNP IN STATE STB | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
39 | START OF REQUESTED CCNP HARD SWITCH- | Check CCNP states
| OVER |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
40 | PROCESS OF ADMINISTRATION: | Try again later
| CCS7 RUNNING, |
| SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
41 | CHANGING OF SEMIPERMANENT CCS7 DATA | Try again later
| ACTIVE, SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
---+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
42 | AFTER LOADING STB CCNP, ONE OR | Corrective maintenance
| MORE PARTIAL FAILURES IN STB CCNP | according to MMN,
| | check state of all SILTC
| | in STB CCNP. SILTCs in
| | state NAC are the ones
| | affected.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
43 | SIPA STATES IN THE SIMP ARE NOT THE | Corrective maintenance
| SAME AS THE STATES STORED IN | according to MMN
| CP DATABASE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
44 | ERROR AT INTERFACE TO SUBSYSTEM P7; | Write SW error report
| CORRECT ALARMING NOT POSSIBLE, |
| SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
45 | DURING INCLUSION OF CCNP INTO | Corrective maintenance
| CP SCAN CYCLE THE TIMER FOR | according to MMN
| CCNP STATUS CHECK EXPIRES |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
46 | DANGEROUS STATUS REQUEST: | Decide what to do
| TAKING THE LAST CCNP OUT OF SERVICE | ( enter + or - )
| WILL LEAD TO CCS7 FAILURE. |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
47 | NEW SIPA STATUS ONLY TRANSFERRED TO | Write SW error report,
| ACT CCNP; CHANGE OF CP DATABASE | repeat the command
| (AND STB CCNP) NOT POSSIBLE, |
| UPDATE ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
48 | STOP OF CCNC COMMUNICATION TEST WAS | Write SW error report
| NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNC SOFT |
| SWITCHOVER,SW ERROR IN PROCESS MSTCT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
49 | SETTING OF TIMER NOT POSSIBLE DURING | Try again later
| REPETITION OF A CONFIGURATION |
| COMMAND TO SIMP AFTER SIMP-RESPONSE |
| NOT IDLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
50 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RECEIPT, | Corrective maintenance
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-3 +
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| NO ANSWER FROM CCNP AFTER | according to MMN
| CONF_MUXS_CCNC COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
51 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF ANSWER | Check alarming for
| FROM CCNP AFTER STATUS SILTC REQUEST | SILT/SILTC
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
52 | SIMP RESPONDS WITH "CONF-SIMP- | Configure SILT/SILTC in
| NOT-IDLE MONITORING" AFTER COMMAND | state UNA to state MBL
| REPETITIONS. SIMP ERROR IN |
| SILT/SILTC STATE MONITORING FOR UNA |
| SILT/SILTC |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
53 | CONFIGURATION OF THE LAST ACTIVE | Dont retry! If you want
| UNIT TO STATE MBL NOT ALLOWED ! | to take this unit out of
| | service, switch off its
| | power !
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
54 | REQUESTED UNIT NOT IN STATE MBL | If you want to repeat the
| | command change state of
| | unit to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
55 | DEFAULT ERROR MESSAGE: DURING | Check states of SILT and
| CP-ISTART OR CCNP HARD SWITCHOVER OR | SILTC with MML command
| ACT CCNP LOADING OR INTERRUPTION OF | STAT CCNC
| MML SILT/SILTC CONFIGURATION, A SILT |
| OR SILTC FAILED;CONFIGURATION TO UNA.|
| THE ORIGINAL ERROR MESSAGE IS LOST. |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
56 | WRONG SEQUENCE OF JOBS FROM PROCESS | Dont retry,
| MSFCT | write SW error report
| | for MSFCT
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
57 | DURING CCNP HARD SWITCHOVER THE NEW | Corrective maintenance
| ACT CCNP SENDS NO RESPONSE TO THE | according to MMN
| SWITCHOVER COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
70 | ACKNOWLEDEMENT NOT USED BY | Write SW error report
| MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
71 | STATE TRANSITION ILLEGAL | Check processor state
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
72 | PROCESSOR NOT LOADABLE; | Write SW error report
| NOT USED FOR MMI-OUTPUT |
| (FOR DETAILED INFO, SEE CFIDEN, |
| FNR_C_100) |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
73 | PROCESSOR CANNOT BE CONFIGURED, | Run diagnosis for
| PROCESSOR DOES NOT RESPOND TO | affected processor
| CONFIGURATION COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
74 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED, | Try again later
| BECAUSE TRAFFIC LOAD TOO HIGH |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
75 | SIMP CONFTIMER RUN DOWN, PROCESSOR | Run diagnosis for
| DOES NOT RESPOND TO | affected processor
| CONFIGURATION COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
76 | UPDATE OF SEMIPERMANENT DATA NOT | Try again later
| POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
77 | SIMP UPDATE SEMAPHORE SET, | Try again later
| ANOTHER TASK IS RUNNING |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
78 | PROCESSOR STATE ALREADY ENTERED, | Write SW error report
| ERROR NUMBER NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
79 | PROCESSOR NOT ACCESSIBLE, | Check operating states of
| CONFIGURATION NOT POSSIBLE | preceding processors
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
80 | DANGEROUS STATE TRANSITION, |
| NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
81 | CCNC NOT COMPLETELY LOADED/CONFIGURED| Check operating states of
| | SILTCs and SILTs;
| | corrective maintenance for
| | processors in state UNA
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
CONF CCNC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
82 | PROCESSOR TO BE CONFIGURED IS | Check operating states of
| CONNECTED WITH OTHER ACTIVE | succeeding processors
| PROCESSOR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
83 | CONFIGURATION IN SIMP NOT IN STATE | Try again later
| IDLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
84 | CCNP OR LINK(S) CONGESTED; | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
85 | LEVEL 3 IN SIMP NOT IN STATE IDLE, | Try again later
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
86 | AT LEAST ONE SILTC NOT ACCESSIBLE BY | Corrective maintenance
| STB CCNP, SOFT SWITCHOVER | according to MMN; then
| NOT ALLOWED | try again
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
87 | MORE THAN 5 MSUS IN QUEUE SQPSIMP, | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
88 | CENTRAL SPOOL PROCESS DOES NOT ALLOW | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
89 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED AS TOO | Try again later or request
| MANY OUT OF SERVICE MESSAGES | hard switchover (uncond)
| RECEIVED FOR LINKS |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
90 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED BECAUSE | Corrective maintenance
| AT LEAST ONE SILTC WITH PARTIAL | according to MMN. Then try
| FAILURE IN STB CCNP | again or request hard
| | switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
91 | STATUS MONITORING FOR UNA SILT OR | Try later; check status
| SILTC IS ACTIVE IN PU:SIMP; SIMP | of SILT and SILTC;
| ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH NOT-IN-IDLE, | configure UNA devices to
| SIMP ERROR | MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
92 | CONFIGURATION OF LAST ACTIVE SILT TO | Dont retry; if you want
| MBL NOT ALLOWED | to take this unit out of
| | service switch off its
| | power and configure it
| | from UNA to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
93 | CONFIGURATION OF LAST ACTIVE SILTC | Dont retry; if you want
| TO MBL NOT ALLOWED | to take this unit out of
| | service switch off its
| | power and configure it
| | from UNA to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
94 | SOFTWARE ERROR, IMPLAUSIBLE DATA IN | Dont retry; if SWSG
| COMMAND TO CCNP | occurs, write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
100 | INITIAL VALUE AFTER POWER UP NOT |
| USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
101 | TEST PATTERN CORRUPTED DURING | Run diagnosis for affected
| PROCESSOR LOADING, HARDWARE FAULT | processor. Corrective
| | maintenance according to
| | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
102 | CHECKSUM FAILURE, DATA CORRUPTED | Check load file on disk,
| DURING PROCESSOR LOADING, | write SW error report
| HARDWARE FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
103 | SUMMARY ALARM (HARDWARE) IN FIRM- | Corrective maintenance
| WARE-APS. AN ALARM OCCURS WHEN | according to MMN
| LOADING A PROCESSOR, HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
104 | WATCHDOG-ALARM 1 IN FIRMWARE-APS, | Corrective maintenance
| HW OR SW FAULT | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
105 | WRONG SEQUENCE OF LOAD SOFTWARE WHEN | Write SW error report
| LOADING THE SIMP, SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
106 | RESET BY RESET-COMMAND IN | Write SW error report
| SOFTWARE-APS NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-5 +
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
107 | TIMER FAILURE WHILE LOADING A | Repeat command after
| PROCESSOR, SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | present: write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
108 | RESET BY RESET-COMMAND IN FIRMWARE- |
| APS NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
109 | WATCHDOG ALARM 2 BY COMMUNICATION- | Run diagnosis for affected
| TEST, RESET OF A PROCESSOR BECAUSE A | processor. Corrective
| COMMUNICATION COMMAND DOES NOT REACH | maintenance according to
| THE PROCESSOR, HW OR SW FAULT | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
110 | HALT IN PROCEDURE INDIC, WORK QUEUE | Run diagnosis for affected
| IS FULL | processor. Corrective
| | maintenance according to
| | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
111 | TIMER FOR CYCLIC LOAD_REQUEST CANNOT | Repeat command after
| BE SET, SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
112 | TIMER FOR LOAD_DATA CANNOT BE SET, | Repeat command after
| SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
113 | SUMMARY ALARM (HARDWARE) IN SOFT- | Run diagnosis for affected
| WARE APS, HW OR SW FAULT | processor, repeat command
| | after delay; if error
| | remains present: write
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
114 | WATCHDOG ALARM 1 IN SOFTWARE-APS, | Run diagnosis for affected
| HW OR SW FAULT | processor, repeat command
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
115 | WRONG STATE EVENT IN PK:RECOVERY, | Run diagnosis for affected
| SW ERROR | processor, repeat command
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
116 | FAILURE WHEN TESTING A DUALPORT | Corrective maintenance
| HW FAULT | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
117 | HALT IN FA, WORK QUEUE IS FILLED, | Run diagnosis for affected
| HW OR SW FAULT | CCNP; write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
118 | TIMER IN FA COULD NOT BE SET, | Run diagnosis for affected
| SW ERROR | SIMP. If error occurs
| | again: write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
119 | NO LOAD_REQUEST OF A PROCESSOR, | Repeat command after
| HW FAULT | delay; if error remains
| | present: replace
| | affected processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
120 | LOAD FILE FOR THE PROCESSORS SIPA, | Reset the processor
| SILTC, SILTD TOO LONG | manually, if error remains
| | present: change CCNC load-
| | lib (change of APS-genera-
| | tion); load data for this
| | processor are destroyed
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
121 | SUPERVISION TIMER FOR INTERFACE TEST | Reset the processor
| CANNOT BE SET | manually; if error remains
| | present: replace affected
| | processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
122 | INTERFACE TEST TIMER RUN OUT | Reset the processor
CONF CCNC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| | manually; if error remains
| | present: replace affected
| | processor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Module 21 :
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | WRONG UNIT IN CONFIGURATION REQUEST | Use right unit
| FOR MSCCM | (only MUXM)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | WRONG UNIT NUMBER IN CONFIGURATION | Use only valid unit number
| REQUEST FOR MSCCM | for MUXM
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | ERROR IN MSCCM, SWSG | Write SW error report and
| | initiate recovery 1_1
| | (if possible)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | REQUESTED MUXM STATUS TRANSITION NOT | Use only valid status
| ALLOWED FOR THIS ORIGINATOR, OR MUXM | requests, check MUXM
| STATUS NOT YET ADAPTED TO CHANGED | states
| TSG STATUS |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | REQUESTED MUXM NOT CREATED | First use command CR MUX,
| | then CONF CCNC for MUXM
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
6 | MESSAGE CHANNEL SYNCHRONIZATION NOT | MUXM not usable; check if
| POSSIBLE | TSG and MB and SSG are
| | ACT. If so, check power
| | supply and cable
| | connecting MUXM and SN.
| | If o.k., configure the MB:
| | ACT-MBL-ACT, repeat
| | CONF MUX command. If not
| | successful, MUXM is
| | defective.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | PROCESS MSCCM NOT IN IDLE STATE. | Try again later
| AT LEAST ONE JOB STORED FOR |
| ORIGINATOR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | JOB NOT ALLOWED DURING INSTALLATION | Try again later
| RECOVERY |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
9 | DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL: | MUXM not usable as ACT or
| NO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED FROM UNIT | STB MUXM
| MUXMA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
10 | TSG CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE. | Try again later
| TSG STATES COULD NOT BE READ |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
11 | NO VALID STATUS COMBINATION FOUND | Write SW error report
| FOR THIS REQUEST. INTERNAL ERROR IN |
| PROCESS MSCCM |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
12 | INTERNAL ERROR HANDLING FOR ALL | Write SW error report and
| MUXM: NEW DEFINITION OF ALL MUXM | check MUXM states
| STATES |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
13 | NO CONFIGURATION TASK NECESSARY FOR |
| THIS REQUEST |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
14 | MUXM NOT IN ACT/STB STATE | Configure MUXM to ACT/STB
| | before repeating this
| | command
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
15 | STATUS REQUEST NOT POSSIBLE AT THIS | Try again later, check
| TIME BECAUSE OF CURRENT MUXM/TSG | MUXM/TSG state first
| STATE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
17 | ERROR DURING TSG ACTION: A TSG | Check TSG state,
| DOES NOT CHANGE TO STATE ACT OR STB | try again later
| (SWITCHOVER FROM STB TO ACT NOT |
| POSSIBLE) |
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-7 +
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
18 | NO TIMER AVAILABLE FOR CHON COMMAND | Try again later
| OR FOR THE ACTION CHANGE_SEMI_DATA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
19 | NO NOTEBOOK AVAILABLE FOR WRITING | Try again later, check
| SEMIPERMANENT DATA | MUX state
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
20 | MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RECOVERY ACTIONS | Check MUX state, write
| REACHED; INTERNAL ERROR | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| RECEIVED MESSAGE FOR MUXMA FAULTY | STB MUXM
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
22 | DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL: | Write SW error report
| INVALID DEMAND TEST REQUEST MESSAGE |
| FROM PROCESS MSCCM |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| SOFTWARE ERROR IN ROUT:MUX |
| (PROCESS MSTRT) |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| INVALID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR DEMAND |
| TEST REQUEST MUXMA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| NO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED FROM UNIT | STB MUXM
| MUXMB |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGE FROM MUXMB IS | STB MUXM
| FAULTY |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| INVALID ACKNOWLEDGE FOR DEMAND TEST |
| REQUEST MUXMB |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
28 | MESSAGE CHON OR DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM | Check new MUXM states
| NOT SUCCESSFUL BECAUSE TSG HAS |
| CHANGED ITS STATE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
29 | OLD MUXM STATE (ACT OR EAC) NOT | Try to change SN or TSG
| POSSIBLE ANY MORE BECAUSE OF SN OR | state
| TSG STATE CHANGE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
30 | IT WAS NOT POSSIBLE TO WRITE NEW | Release update function or
| SEMIPERMANENT MUXM STATES TO DISK | make disks available.
| BECAUSE UPDATE FUNCTION IS NOT | Then configure one MUXM
| USABLE (BLOCKED BY MML COMMAND), | to save all new MUXM
| OR NO DISK IS AVAILABLE. STATES ARE | states on disk. Otherwise,
| ONLY STORED IN CP | the old MUXM states may be
| | used after the next
| | CP recovery
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
31 | JOB NOT ALLOWED ON THE NONSWITCHING | Dont retry
| CP SIDE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
32 | CONFIGURATION REQUEST NOT ALLOWED | Configure second MUX to
| BECAUSE MUXM IS THE LAST OF A PAIR | ACT, then try again. It is
| | possible that the SN SWOV
| | is not possible (if the
| | second MUXM is already in
| | state ACT)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF CCNC : UNIT= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
CONF CCNC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
UNIT CCNC PROCESSOR UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit.
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+-------+----------------+
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! SIPA ! 0...7, 10...17 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! MUXM ! 0, 1, 10, 11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: TYPE
CCNP COMM.CHANN.NETWORK PROCESSOR
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERAL ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING TERMINAL CONTROL
SILT SIGNALING LINK TERMINAL
MUXM MASTER MULTIPLEXER
b: NUMBER=
OST OPERATING STATE
Compatibilities:
- State transitions for the CCNC
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! Unit Current !Target state: !
! state ! !
! !ACT !STB !MBL !PLA !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! CCNP: ACT !- !-,1 !xx,9,2 !- !
! STB !x,3,8 !- !x !- !
! MBL !x,4 !x,5 !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! SIPA: ACT !- !-,1 !xx,9,11!- !
! STB !-,3 !- !- !- !
! MBL !x !- !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !- !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! SILTC/SILT: ACT !- !- !xx,9,12!- !
! STB !- !- !- !- !
! MBL !x !- !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! MUXM: ACT !- !xx,6 !xx,9 !- !
! STB !xx,7 !- !10 !- !
! MBL !x !10 !- !x !
! EAC !- !- !xx,9 !- !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
- illegal combination
x This state transition does not lead to system failure
and is always executed.
xx This is a dangerous state transition which may lead to system
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-9 +
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
failure.
1 This state transition occurs implicitly during soft
switchover (it is not initiated by command input).
SIPA is also configured.
2 This state transition is only executed if there is no
standby CCNP.
3 This state transition occurs implicitly during soft and
hard switchover. SIPA is also configured.
4 This state transition is only executed if there is no
active CCNP.
5 This state transition is only executed if a redundant CCNP is
active.
6 If link distribution on both SNs (LM12948) has been implemented,
this state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is only possible after command
CONF SN has been given and if redundant MUXM is in state STB.
The Operator must confirm the command with +.
this state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is only possible after command
CONF SN has been given and if redundant MUXM is in state ACT.
The Operator must confirm the command with +.
8 In case soft switchover turns out to be dangerous the operator
has the choice to allow a hard switchover by entering + or to
cancel the command by entering -.
9 If CCS7 rejection of change to MBL via MMI for the last active
unit (LM15903) has been implemented state, transition is not
allowed if the redundant unit is not available. If rejection of
change has not been implemented, state transition is executed after
confirmation by the operator.
state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is executed.
11 Transition is rejected if an active SILTC is connected to
the SIPA.
12 Configuration of SILTC is dangerous if an active SILT is
connected to the SILTC. Configuration of SILT is dangerous
if it carries an active link.
- The following state combinations are possible for the two CCNP:
+----------+---------------------------------------------------------+
! For ! For !
! CCNP 0 ! CCNP 1 !
! ! ACT STB CBL_A CBL_S MBL SEZ_R SEZ_D NAC UNA PLA !
+----------+-----+----+------+------+---+------+------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! - ! + ! - ! T ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! STB ! + ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - !
! CBL_A ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - !
! CBL_S ! T ! T ! T ! - ! - ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - !
! MBL ! + ! - ! - ! - ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! PLA ! + ! - ! - ! - ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! SEZ_R/D ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! T !
! NAC ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! T ! T ! T !
! UNA ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
+----------+-----+----+------+------+---+------+------+----+----+----+
+: Legal state combination
-: Illegal state combination
T: This state combination may exist temporarily. It includes at
least one transitional state which the system automatically
converts to a stable state. This state combination is not
necessarily apparent to the operating personnel, i.e. it only
occurs in exceptional cases during state interrogation.
CONF CCNC-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
States CBL_A and CBL_S are both shown simply as CBL
in a state interrogation (transitional states during soft
switchover). The difference is of internal significance only.
Notes:
- Configuration commands for SIPA must always contain a processor
number in the active CCNP, if there is an active CCNP.
If the partner CCNP is in state STB, the redundant SIPA will
also be configured automatically when the command is executed.
It is also possible to configure a SIPA without an active CCNP.
- If active SIPAs, SILTCs or SILTs are configured to target
state MBL, messages may be lost when the signaling
traffic is diverted onto alternative signaling links. Message loss
can, however, be avoided by configuring the signaling links in
question to state BL1 or BL2 beforehand.
- A soft switchover (configuration of the standby CCNP to
active) may escalate to hard switchover (e.g. under heavy load
conditions), if the operator requests an unconditional
switchover (+).
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CCNC-11 -
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CCNC
This command is used to start the diagnosis of the CCNC. Depending on the
message routing, diagnostic results may be output on the OMT. Diagnosis is
based on processor self tests, interface tests and loading of the
processors. These sequences are run:
- once for the unit CCNP,
- once for unit MUXM with only MUXMA,
- twice for unit MUXM with MUXMA and MUXMB,
- twice for unit SILTC,
- twice or three times for unit SILT.
The aim of the diagnosis is to confirm that a processor is capable of
functioning correctly or, if an error has occurred, to reproduce that
the error is located in the specified unit. In case of CCNP or MUXM
the faulty module may be identified.
Diagnosis is started
- before a processor is started for the first time
- after a CCS7 error message
- after module replacement.
Prerequisites:
- Before entering of the diagnosis command the unit to be diagnosed
has to be configured into state MBL using the command CONF CCNC.
After unsuccessful execution of the diagnosis the following mask is output
displaying the reason for the failure.
Possible errors are:
Module 2:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
1 | NO ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATIVE | DISPLAY THE MUX DATA
| MUX DATA, DATA FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
2 | NO ACCESS TO NUC DATA | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| DATA FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
3 | DEVICE AT OUTGOING SIDE OF | PROOF THE CONFIGURATION OF NUC
| NUC CONNECTION IS NOT MUX |
| NUC CONFIGURATION FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | DEVICE AT INCOMING SIDE OF | PROOF THE CONFIGURATION OF NUC
| NUC CONNECTION IS NOT LTG |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | NUC IS NOT ACTIVATED | ACTIVATE NUC
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
17 | MSTRT SENDS INVALID_DETEST_ | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| REQ SOFTWARE-FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | INTERN FAULT IN PROCESS MSTRT| WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| SOFTWARE-FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | SOFTWARE FAULT IN MSFAM OR | LOOK AT SWSG OF MSDCT
| MSTRT, SOFTWARE-FAULT | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
24 | INCONSISTENCY IN MSFAM AND | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| MSTRT MESSAGES | (SAVE CIRCUMSTANCES)
| SOFTWARE-FAULT |
Module 3
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED - | REPEAT COMMAND USING CORRECT
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES | VALUES
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | TIMER ORDER FAILED: LACK OF | TRY AGAIN LATER IF NO SWSG
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG CCNC-1 +
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| RESOURCES OR SOFTWARE ERROR | OCCURS
| IF SWSG OCCURS |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
6 | ACTUAL STATUS OF CCNPS | TRY AGAIN AFTER CCNP WASCON-
| FORBIDS TASK EXECUTION, NO | FIGURATED TO ACT
| CCNP IS ACTIVE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
9 | NO PARALLEL TASK FOR CONFI- | TRY AGAIN LATER
| GURATION ALLOWED |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
14 | INTERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS, | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SWSG OCCURS | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
16 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUB- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SYSTEM C7 INTERNAL PROCEDURE,| DO NOT RETRY
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
17 | ERROR WHEN READING A TRAN- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SIENT DEVICE STATE | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A TRAN- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT,
| SIENT DEVICE STATE PERHAPS | CHECK STATES, TRY TO REPEAT,
| ONLY SEMIPERMANENT STATES | BE CAREFUL !!
| CHANGED |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
19 | ERROR WHEN READING A SEMIPER-| WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| MANENT DEVICE STATE | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
22 | UNDEFINED RESPONSE VALUE FROM| CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| EAVT | DING TO MMN, CHECK EAVT/IOCP
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | UNDEFINED VALUES IN RECEIVED | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| MESSAGE | DING TO MMN, DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
24 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RE- | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CEIPT NO ANSWER FROM CCNP | DING TO MMN
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
25 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RE- | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CEIPT NO ANSWER FROM EAVT/ | DING TO MMN
| IOCP, SOFTWARE ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
28 | CCNP NOT IN STATE SEZ_R AFTER| WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| POSITIVE LOAD ACKNOWLEDGE |
| FROM FA:CCNC OR SIMP NO SEZ_R|
| DURING INI2 CONTROLLED BY |
| FA:CCNC, SOFTWARE FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
29 | INVALID IOGPGCH COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
30 | INVALID IORSOUT COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
31 | INVALID IOKONF COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
32 | NO IOP AVAILABLE FOR CCNC | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| ACCESS TOLD US IN RESPONSE | DING TO MMN, CHECK IOP, NO CCNC
| FROM EAVT/IOCP | ERROR
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
33 | COMMAND ACK BETWEEN IOP AND | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CCNP NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING | DING TO MMN
| CCNP RESET, CCNP ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
34 | COMMAND RDY BETWEEN IOP AND | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CCNP NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING | DING TO MMN
| CCNP RESET, CCNP ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
52 | SIMP ALWAYS ANSWERS WITH | CONFIGURE UNA SILT/SILTC TO MBL
| CONF-SIMP-NO-IDLE MONITORING |
| AFTER COMMAND-REPETITIONS. |
| THIS MEANS SIMP-ERROR IN FEA-|
| TURE SILT/SILTC STATUSMONITO-|
| RING FOR UNA SILT/SILTCS. |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
DIAG CCNC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
54 | REQUESTED UNIT NOT IN MBL. | CONFIGURE UNIT TO MBL
Module 4 (MSFCTA5S):
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
20 | LOAD REQUEST NOT SUPERVISED | TRY AGAIN LATER
| BY TIMER, LACK OF RESOURCES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | SIPA DEFECT OR NOT EXISTING | CONF. AFFECTED SIPA TO MBL OR
| HARDWARE-FAULT | CHANGE IT, MAINTENANCE ACCORDING
| | TO MMN
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
30 | MESSAGE IOPOFF (TOTAL LOSS OF| TRY AGAIN LATER
| IOP:MB PAIR) FROM IOCP RECEI-|
| VED |
Module 5:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
63 | UNEXPECTED RERTEST RESPONSE | HAS NO EFFECT ON SYSTEM OPERATION
| FROM CCNP RECEIVED (E.G. WITH| BUT SHOULD NOT OCCUR
| AN OLD MESSAGE NUMBER) | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
64 | ROUTINE SWITCH OVER REJECTED | TRY AGAIN LATER
| LOAD TOO HIGH IN CCNC OR AD- |
| MINISTRATION TASK RUNNING OR |
| CONF:SIMP NOT IN STATE IDLE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
65 | ROUTINE SWITCH OVER NOT POS- | CONFIGURE CCNP TO STB,
| SIBLE, NO CCNP IN STATE STB | ACTIVATE ALL SILTC
| OR AT LEAST ONE SILTC NOT |
| ACCESSIBLE BY STB CCNP |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
68 | RTEST RECEIPT ARRIVES IN | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| WRONG STATE | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
69 | INCORRECT RTEST RESPONSE, | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| SPORADIC ERROR | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
70 | NO RTEST RESPONSE, SPORADIC | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| ERROR | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
Module 21:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
1 | WRONG DEVICE IN CONFIGURATION| USE RIGHT DEVICE (ONLY MUXM)
| REQUEST FOR MSCCM |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
2 | WRONG DEVICE NUMBER IN CON- | USE ONLY VALID DEVICE NUMBER
| FIGURATION REQUEST FOR MSCCM | FOR MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
3 | ERROR IN MSCCM | LOOK AT SWSG
| | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | REQUESTED MUXM STATUS TRANSI-| USE ONLY VALID STATUS REQUESTS
| TION NOT ALLOWED FOR THIS |
| ORIGINATOR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | REQUESTED MUXM NOT CREATED | FIRST USE COMMAND CR MUX, THEN
| | CONF CCNC FOR MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG CCNC-3 +
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6 | MESSAGE CHANNEL SYNCHRONI- | MUXM NOT USABLE AS ACT OR STB
| SATION NOT POSSIBLE | MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
7 | MSCCM PROCESS NOT IN IDLE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| STATE AND AT LEAST ONE JOB |
| STORED FOR ORIGINATOR IF POS-|
| SIBLE FOR HIM |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
8 | JOB NOT ALLOWED DURING | TRY AGAIN LATER
| INSTALLATION |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
10 | TSG CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| IT WAS NOT POSSIBLE TO READ |
| THE TSG STATES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
11 | NO VALID STATUS COMBINATION | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| FOUND FOR THIS REQUEST. IN- |
| TERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS MSCCM|
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
15 | STATUS REQUEST NOT POSSIBLE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| AT THIS TIME BECAUSE OF ACTU-| CHECK MUX/TSG STATUS BEFORE
| AL MUXM/TSG STATUS SITUATION |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | NO TIMER FOR CHON COMMAND | TRY AGAIN LATER
| AVAILABLE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
28 | MESSAGE CHANNEL ON OR DEMAND-| CHECK NEW MUXM STATES
| TEST OF MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL |
| BECAUSE TSG CHANGES ITS |
| STATES |
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG CCNC : UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! unit !
! type ! number !
+-------+----------------+
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! MUXM ! 0,1,10,11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: UNIT TYPE
CCNP COMM. CHANN. NETWORK PROCESSOR
SILTC SIGNALING TERMINAL CONTROLLER
MUXM MASTER MULTIPLEXER
b: UNIT NUMBER=
E N D
DIAG CCNC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF CCNC
This command is used to interrogate the operating states of the
CCNP and all other CCNC processors.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT CCNC : UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+-------+----------------+
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! SIPA ! 0...7, 10...17 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! MUXM ! 0, 1, 10, 11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: PROCESSOR TYPE
CCNP COM.CHANNEL NETWORK PROCESSOR
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERY ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING LINK TERM. CONTROL
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT CCNC-1 -
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC TRACER
This command activates the CCNC tracer in the CCNC units CPI,
SIMP or SILT.
Trace selection is made by specifying the process, the message field
and its contents, and a mask with which these contents can be traced
bit-perfect. The trigger types correspond to those of the LTG tracer.
Up to 8 CCNC processes can be traced in one CCNC processor.
Example:
- ACT CCNCTRAC:
UNIT = SIMP-1,
MODE = COM-CIFEV-"H00"-"H00"&
FAN-CIFEV-"H00"-"H00",
TRITYP = AFTER,
TRIEV = PCH-EVENT-"H06"-"HFF";
Compatibilities:
- The CCNC, LTG, DLU and ISDN trace functions may not be activated at the
same time.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CCNCTRAC : UNIT= ,MODE= [,TRITYP=] [,TRIEV=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
UNIT CCNC UNIT
This parameter specifies the CCNC processor.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+------------+----------------+
!CPI,SIMP ! 0...1 !
!SILT ! 0...255 !
+------------+----------------+
a-b
a: PROCESSOR TYPE
CPI COORDINATION PROC. INTERFACE
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
MODE TRACE MODE
This parameter defines the object to be traced in a hierarchical
structure.
Note:
- A trace selection is made by specifying the units
CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT and CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK.
To select the trace events, the unit CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT
defines the location for a mask on message content.
Unit CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK defines a mask with which these
contents can be traced bit-perfect.
It is therefore possible to mask a message content in order to
trace specified messages only.
Not all combinations of input are possible and useful.
CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT and CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK are
connected and may have the same length.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC-1 +
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: CCNC PROCESS=
This unit specifies a process, in which tracing is made.
The input can be done in the following two ways:
1. By entering a symbolic name of the table below.
Table: Possible trace processes in the processor type
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
!a= ! INPUT FOR CPI !
! ! !
+---+------------------------------+
!ANA! Fault analysis !
!BRC! Broadcasting !
!CNF! Configuration !
!COM! Communication test !
!CON! Administration configuration !
!FLM! Flow measurement !
!HIN! Incoming handling !
!HOU! Outgoing handling !
!HTR! Transfer handling !
!LOA! Loading of data !
!MDU! Memory Dump utility !
!OCO! Overload control !
!PAR! Parameter administration !
!PCH! Patch utility !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!RTF! Routine test !
!TMM! Traffic measurement !
!TRC! Trace utility !
.
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
!a= ! INPUT FOR SILT !
! ! !
+---+------------------------------+
!ANA! Fault analysis !
!FAD! Administration !
!FCO! Congestion part !
!FLP! Link state part !
!FOC! Overload control !
!FRP! Reception part !
!FRT! Retrieval Part !
!FTP! Transmission part !
!IFT! Interface test !
!MDU! Memory dump utility !
!MEB! Message buffer control !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!ROU! Routine test !
.
The trace process FRP only collects MSU data.
Following MODE combinations are allowed:
FRP-CIFEV-"H05"-"HFF"
FRP-SIO-"Hxx"-"Hxx"
FRP-SIF-"Hxx"-"Hxx"
.
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
!a= ! INPUT FOR SIMP !
! ! !
ACT CCNCTRAC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+---+------------------------------+
!AUC! Automatic uninhibiting contr.!
!CBA! Change back for adjacent !
! ! routes !
!CBH! Change back high priority !
! ! processes !
!CBT! Change back low priority and !
! ! time controlled diversion !
! ! processes !
!CCL! Configuration of !
! ! administration !
!CGC! Congestion control !
!COB! Changeover/changeback !
!CON! Configuration !
!CSP! Central spooler !
!FAN! Fault analysis !
!LCC! Local congestion control !
!LIT! Local inhibiting test !
!LSR! Link state retrieval !
!MDU! Memory dump utility !
!MIU! Management inhibiting/ !
! ! uninhibiting !
!OCT! Overload control !
!PCH! Patch utility !
!RCT! Route set congestion test !
!RDI! Route direction !
! ! initialization !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!RIT! Remote inhibiting test !
!ROT! Routine test !
!ROU! Routing !
!RRC! Rerouting control !
!RSP! Reporting of CCS7 parameters !
!RST! Route set test !
!SLA! SLIC restart control !
!SLI! Signalling link control !
!SRC! Start/restart control !
!TAP! Transfer allowed/ !
! ! prohibited !
!TCC! Threshold control !
!TCR! Transfer message after change!
! ! current routes !
!TFC! Traffic flow control !
!TMQ! Testing and maintenance ack !
!TRT! Transfer of transient data !
!UPD! Updating !
.
Data will be received only if the selected trace
process is available in the specified processor type.
2. By entering a hexadecimal value in the range of
00H - 0FFH. Hexadecimal inputs are marked with
a beginning numerical character (0-9).
b: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD=
This unit specifies the message field to be traced. This
can be done in the following two ways:
1. By entering a symbolic name. The symbolic names
depend on the processor type and the message type.
For the processors CPI, SIMP and SILT the
input for the CCNC INTERNAL MESSAGE FORMAT is
as follows:
1 MESSAGE HEADER
Unit b = DC Destination complex
LI Length indicator
SC Source complex
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC-3 +
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2 CCS7 MESSAGE
Unit b = SIF Service information field
SIO Service information octet
3 INTERNAL MESSAGES
Unit b = DASA Destination address/
source address
EVENT Event
JC1 Process number (CP)
PROCNR Process number (CCNC)
TASK Program complex (CCNC)
input for the CENTRAL INPUT INTERFACE is
as follows:
Unit b = CIFBUF Buffer address
CIFDAT Data
CIFEV Event
CIFPCB PCB address
CIFPRC Program complex
input for the PROCESS CONTROL BLOCK is
as follows:
Unit b = PCBSTA State
PCBUSE User Data
For the processor CPI the input for the
EWSD MESSAGE FORMAT is as follows:
1 MESSAGE HEADER
Unit b = CEVENT Event
CDASA Destination address/
source address
CJC1 Job code 1 (process number)
CJC2 Job code 2 (job number)
DMCHO Destination message channel
number
LENGTH Length
OJC1 Outgoing job code 1
OJC2 Outgoing job code 2
ODASA Destination address/
source address
OEVENT Event
SMBUO Source message buffer number
SMCHO Source message channel number
2. By entering a hexadecimal value in the range of
00H - 0FFH. Hexadecimal inputs are marked with
a beginning numerical character (0-9). This is
only possible for messages.
c: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT=
This information unit is to be entered in hexadecimal notation.
- "Hhex. figures 1...16" or
- "Xhex. figures 1...16".
Each byte has to be represented by two hexadecimal characters.
In use of H: Least significant byte standing on the left.
In use of X: Least significant byte standing on the right.
Example for CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT input:
- "H0001020304050607" or
- "X0A090807".
The bytes, the user did not entered, will be filled with 0.
ACT CCNCTRAC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK=
This information unit is to be entered in hexadecimal notation.
see CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT.
TRITYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger possibilities.
AFTER AFTER TRIGGER EVENT
The first appearance of a user-selectable trigger
event initiates the data collection which ends as
soon as the cyclic memory space for the trace file
is full.
MIDDLE MIDDLE TRIGGER EVENT
Reception of activation commands in the periphery
starts data collection which ends after the first
appearance of a user-selectable trigger event when
the half of the cyclic memory space for the trace
file is full.
UNTIL UNTIL TRIGGER EVENT
Reception of activation commands in the periphery
starts data collection. It ends after the first
appearance of a user-selectable trigger event.
Trace data can be overwritten.
USER USER CONTROLLED
Reception of the activation command in the
periphery starts data collection. It ends after
arrival of the deactivation command. With longer
trace jobs, trace data are overwritten.
Default: AFTER
TRIEV TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the trigger event and defines the end or
start of data collection.
The input options are identical with those of the parameter MODE.
a-b-c-d
a: CCNC PROCESS=
b: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD=
c: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT=
d: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC-5 -
CAN CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC TRACER
This command cancels an active CCNC trace job. The data of the CCNC tracer
are retained until the next start.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CCNCTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CCNCTRAC-1 -
DISP CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC TRACER
This command displays the state and, if activated, the job data of the CCNC
tracer.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CCNCTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCNCTRAC-1 -
DMP CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CCNC TRACER
This command dumps the data of the CCNC tracer from the backup file
( P2.CCNCTRAC ) to the O&M terminal.
Prerequisites:
- This command is only executed if the tracer is inactive.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP CCNCTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CCNCTRAC-1 -
DISP CCSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL CATEGORY STATUS
This command displays the current status of the call category.
The following data are displayed:
- Name of the call category
- Number of calls queued
- Current queue delay
- Queue delay alarm threshold
- one specific call category
- several call categories (up to 10)
- all call categories.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CCSTAT : CCAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the call category. Up to 10
call categories may be linked with &.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CCSTAT-1 -
ACT CDS
CENTREX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command activates a call distribution system configuration in a common
service group.
Prerequisites:
- The common service group must exist and must have a call distribution
system.
1. ACT CDS - CENTREX ACT CDS FOR A CENTREX CDS
2. ACT CDS - OSS ACT CDS FOR AN OSS CDS
1. Input format
ACT CDS FOR A CENTREX CDS
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CONF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
local area codes this parameter can be omitted.
group.
CONF CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the call distribution system configuration.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CDS-1 +
ACT CDS
OSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ACT CDS FOR AN OSS CDS
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CONF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
local area codes this parameter can be omitted.
group.
CONF CONFIGURATION
E N D
ACT CDS-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command cancels a task group for common call distribution system.
Notes:
- If the task group is assigned to an operator location, the location
is canceled too.
- If a queue is assigned to the task group, the queue is canceled too.
Prerequisites:
- A task group can only be canceled, if it is not assigned in common
service subscriber database.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CDS-1 -
CR CDS
CRATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command creates a task group for a common call distribution system.
If necessary, the task group can be connected either with an attendant
operator location or a booth operator location.
Notes:
- Only the task groups in an OSS common service group can be connected
with an operator location.
Prerequisites:
- A task group can only be created if the common service group is already
existing.
- The task group name must be unique within a common service group.
- To create a task group for OSS, the OSS call type must already exist.
1. CR CDS - CRATLOC CREATE ATTN OPRLOC
2. CR CDS - CRBOLOC CREATE BOOTH OPRLOC
3. CR CDS - CRCXCDS CREATE CENTREX CDS DATA
4. CR CDS - CROSCDS CREATE OSS CDS DATA
1. Input format
CREATE ATTN OPRLOC
This input format is used to create a new
attendant operator location for an OSS
common service group.
-
] ]
] CR CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,CONF=] [,CTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,FORCE=] ,LOCAT= ,TREAT= ,LOCCTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDS-1 +
CR CDS
CRATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The task group must not exist in the common service group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE OSS
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must already exist.
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
FORCE FORCE NUMBER OSS
This parameter specifies the OSS force, which the task group
should belong to.
LOCAT LOCATION
This parameter specifies the operator location name.
TREAT TREATMENT
This parameter specifies which call treatment types are processed
by the operator location. Up to 4 parameter values may
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
TICHAR TIME AND CHARGE
VERBNF VERBAL NOTIFICATION
X ALL TREATMENTS
LOCCTYP LOCATION CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call type of the location.
If this parameter is entered, an attendant operator location
is created.
Prerequisites:
- The call type must exist.
CR CDS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CDS
CRATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDS-3 +
CR CDS
CRBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE BOOTH OPRLOC
booth operator location for an OSS common
service group.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,FORCE=] ,LOCAT= ,TREAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE OSS
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CR CDS-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CDS
CRBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
should belong to.
LOCAT LOCATION
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
X ALL TREATMENTS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDS-5 +
CR CDS
CRCXCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE CENTREX CDS DATA
This input format is used to create a task group
for a CENTREX common service group.
-
] ]
] CR CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ,CONF= [,CXCTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ACXCTYP=] [,FRWDINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CXCTYP CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX call type.
CR CDS-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CDS
CRCXCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL CENTREX CALL TYPES
ACXCTYP ADMIN CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX administrable call type.
FRWDINC FORWARD INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the FORWARD INTERCEPT.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDS-7 +
CR CDS
CROSCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CREATE OSS CDS DATA
task group for an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,FORCE= [,FRWDINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE OSS
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CR CDS-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CDS
CROSCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
should belong to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDS-9 -
DISP CDS
DISCDSCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command displays call distribution system data for MSB.
Prerequisites:
- The common service group must exist and must have a call
distribution system.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDS - DISCDSCO DISP CDS CONF OF A CSG
2. DISP CDS - DISLOCOS DISP LOCATION DATA OF OSS CSG
3. DISP CDS - DISTGRCX DISP TASKGRP DATA OF CTX CSG
4. DISP CDS - DISTGROS DISP TASKGRP DATA OF OSS CSG
1. Input format
DISP CDS CONF OF A CSG
This input format is used to display the current call
distribution system configuration of a specific common
service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDS-1 +
DISP CDS
DISLOCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISP LOCATION DATA OF OSS CSG
This input format is used to display the location data
of an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORMAT= [,LOCAT=] [,TREAT=] ]
] ]
] [,LOCCTYP=] [,TASKGRP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies, whether task group data or operator
location data should be displayed.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not entered, the actual CDS
configuration of the common service group is displayed.
parameter is obligatory.
LOCAT LOCATION
LOCAT LOCATION
Notes:
TREAT TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the treatment.
DISP CDS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDS
DISLOCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
X ALL TREATMENTS
Notes:
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDS-3 +
DISP CDS
DISTGRCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISP TASKGRP DATA OF CTX CSG
This input format is used to display the task group data
of a CENTREX common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORMAT= [,TASKGRP=] [,CONF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
FORMAT FORMAT
Notes:
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Notes:
CONF CONFIGURATION
DISP CDS-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDS
DISTGRCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDS-5 +
DISP CDS
DISTGROS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISP TASKGRP DATA OF OSS CSG
This input format is used to display the task group data
of an OSS common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORMAT= [,TASKGRP=] [,CONF=] ]
] ]
] [,FORCE=] [,LOCAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
FORMAT FORMAT
Notes:
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Notes:
DISP CDS-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDS
DISTGROS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF CONFIGURATION
Notes:
This parameter specifies the OSS force.
Notes:
LOCAT LOCATION
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDS-7 -
MOD CDS
CAOPRLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command modifies a task group for a common call distribution system.
If necessary, an existing task group can be connected either with an
attendant operator location or a booth operator location.
Notes:
- Only the task groups in an OSS common service group can be connected
with an operator location.
1. MOD CDS - CAOPRLOC CANCEL OPERATOR LOCATION
2. MOD CDS - CRATLOC CREATE ATTN OPRLOC
3. MOD CDS - CRBOLOC CREATE BOOTH OPRLOC
4. MOD CDS - MCTGRDA MODIFY CTX TASK GROUP DATA
5. MOD CDS - MOATLOC MODIFY ATTN OPRLOC
6. MOD CDS - MOBOLOC MODIFY BOOTH OPRLOC
7. MOD CDS - MOTGRDA MODIFY OSS TASK GROUP DATA
1. Input format
CANCEL OPERATOR LOCATION
This input format is to cancel an
operator location.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CLOCAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CLOCAT CANCEL LOCATION
This parameter specifies the name of the location,
that should be canceled.
Prerqeuisites:
- The location must exist in the common service group.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-1 +
MOD CDS
CAOPRLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD CDS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
CRATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE ATTN OPRLOC
attendant operator location with an existing
-
] ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ,LOCAT= ,TREAT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,LOCCTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
- The task group must exist in the common service group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
LOCAT LOCATION
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-3 +
MOD CDS
CRATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECALL RECALL
X ALL TREATMENTS
is created.
Prerequisites:
MOD CDS-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
CRBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE BOOTH OPRLOC
booth operator location with an existing
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ,LOCAT= ,TREAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
LOCAT LOCATION
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-5 +
MOD CDS
CRBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL TREATMENTS
MOD CDS-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MODIFY CTX TASK GROUP DATA
This input format is used to modify the data
of an existing task group in a CENTREX common
service group.
-
] ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,NTASKGRP=] [,CONF=] ]
] ]
] [,CXCTYP=] [,ACXCTYP=] [,FRWDINC=] [,CCONF=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CCXCTYP=] [,CACXCTYP=] [,CFRWDINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
NTASKGRP NEW TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the new name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-7 +
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF CONFIGURATION
CXCTYP CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX call type.
ACXCTYP ADMIN CENTREX CALL TYPE
CCONF CANCEL CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the cancel call distribution
system configuration.
CCXCTYP CANCEL CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the cancel CENTREX call type.
MOD CDS-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACXCTYP CANCEL ADMIN CENTREX CALL TYPE
CFRWDINC CANCEL FORWARD INTERCEPT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-9 +
MOD CDS
MOATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
MODIFY ATTN OPRLOC
This input format is used to modify an
existing attendant operator location.
-
] ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,LOCAT= [,NLOCAT=] [,TREAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CTREAT=] [,LOCCTYP= [,NLOCCTYP=]] [,NTASKGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
LOCAT LOCATION
NLOCAT NEW LOCATION
This parameter specifies the new operator location name.
Prerequisites:
- The new operator location must not exist in the common
service group.
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
MOD CDS-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
MOATLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL TREATMENTS
CTREAT CANCEL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies which call treatment types should be
canceled from the operator location.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
is created.
Prerequisites:
NLOCCTYP NEW LOCATION CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the new call type of the location.
Prerequisites:
- The new call type must exist, and must not be connected
to a location yet.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-11 +
MOD CDS
MOBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
MODIFY BOOTH OPRLOC
This input format is used to modifiy an
existing booth operator location.
-
] ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,LOCAT= [,NLOCAT=] [,TREAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CTREAT=] [,NTASKGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
LOCAT LOCATION
NLOCAT NEW LOCATION
This parameter specifies the new operator location name.
Prerequisites:
- The new operator location must not exist in the common
service group.
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
MOD CDS-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
MOBOLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL TREATMENTS
CTREAT CANCEL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies which call treatment types should be
canceled from the operator location.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-13 +
MOD CDS
MOTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
MODIFY OSS TASK GROUP DATA
of an existing task group in an OSS common
service group.
-
] ]
] MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,NTASKGRP=] [,CONF=] ]
] ]
] [,CTYP=] [,CCONF=] [,CCTYP=] [,FRWDINC=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CFRWDINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
MOD CDS-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDS
MOTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE OSS
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CCONF CANCEL CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the cancel call distribution
system configuration.
CCTYP CANCEL CALL TYPE OSS
This parameter specifies the cancel OSS call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist if it is used within the command.
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CFRWDINC CANCEL FORWARD INTERCEPT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDS-15 -
DISP CDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CURRENT CDS CONFIGURATION
This command displays the current CDS configuration.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CDSCONF ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSCONF-1 -
ENTR CDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CURRENT CDS CONFIGURATION
This command enters a current CDS configuration.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CDSCONF : CONF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CONF CONFIGURATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDSCONF-1 -
DISP CDSFILE
DISPVOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS STATISTICS FILE
This command displays the Calltype Summary report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified Taskgroups or for all Taskgroups within
a Force.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSFILE - DISPVOP VOP SPECIFIC DISPLAY
2. DISP CDSFILE - FORCE SPECIFIC FORCE
3. DISP CDSFILE - TASKGRP SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
1. Input format
VOP SPECIFIC DISPLAY
-
] ]
] DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,FORCE=] [,TASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] ,DISPFUNC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of the Common Service
Group. This parameter allows only low keyed numbers.
This parameter specifies the directory number of the Common Service
Group. This parameter allows only high keyed numbers.
This parameter specifies the OSS force, which the entered task group
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
- If FORCE is entered, it is not allowed to enter TASKGRP.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name(s) of the task group(s).
Incompatibilities:
- If TASKGRP is entered, it is not allowed to enter FORCE.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSFILE-1 +
DISP CDSFILE
DISPVOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPFUNC DISPFUNC
This parameter specifies the type of output mask.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
VOP OUTPUT FOR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
Default: STD
DISP CDSFILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDSFILE
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIC FORCE
-
] ]
] DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORCE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSFILE-3 +
DISP CDSFILE
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
-
] ]
] DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,FORCE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Incompatibilities:
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
E N D
DISP CDSFILE-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command activates a certain CDS time program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
group.
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CDSPROG-1 -
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command cancels one or several common service subscribers from a
certain program time for the program TGASSIGN.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CSSUBID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
This parameter specifies the time program TGASSIGN.
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CDSPROG-1 +
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
CSSUBID COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the number of the common service
subscriber.
E N D
CAN CDSPROG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command deactivates a certain CDS time program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CDSPROG-1 -
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command displays a CDS time program data for a specified time program.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSPROG - DCDSCONF DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
2. DISP CDSPROG - DSUBTOTG DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
3. DISP CDSPROG - DTGTOSUB DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
1. Input format
DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to display a CDS-Configuration
for a certain or all created program times for the program
CDSCONF.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSPROG-1 +
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
DISP CDSPROG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
This input format is used to display the CSSUBs for a certain
or all task groups for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] [,TASKGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSPROG-3 +
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
DISP CDSPROG-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
This input format is used to display all task groups for a
certain CSSUB for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] ,CSSUBID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSPROG-5 +
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
subscriber.
E N D
DISP CDSPROG-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command enters a new CDS time program for a specified program time.
1. ENTR CDSPROG - ECDSCONF ENTER CDSCONF DATA
2. ENTR CDSPROG - ETGASSGN ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
1. Input format
ENTER CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to enter a CDS-Configuration
for a certain program time for the program CDSCONF.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,CONF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDSPROG-1 +
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
CONF CONFIGURATION
ENTR CDSPROG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
This input format is used to enter one or several CSSUBs to a
certain task group for a certain program time for the program
TGASSIGN.
-
] ]
] ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CSSUBID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDSPROG-3 +
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
subscriber.
E N D
ENTR CDSPROG-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command cancels a CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CDSPRTIM-1 +
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
CAN CDSPRTIM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command creates a new CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= [,INIT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CDSPRTIM-1 +
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
INIT INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Initial value of the assignments at the time of
creating a program time.
DEFAULT DEFAULT
SET SET
RESET RESET
E N D
CR CDSPRTIM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command displays a CDS program time for a specified time program.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSPRTIM-1 +
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
DISP CDSPRTIM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command modifies a CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,NTIME= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CDSPRTIM-1 +
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
NTIME NEW CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the new program time, that shall be
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
MOD CDSPRTIM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CDSSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CDS STATUS REPORT
This command displays the Taskgroup Status report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified Taskgroups.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ,FORCE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
should belong to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CDSSTAT-1 -
DISP CDSSTAT
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS STATUS REPORT
This command displays the Taskgroup Status report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified Taskgroups or for all Taskgroups within
a Force.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSSTAT - FORCE SPECIFIC FORCE
2. DISP CDSSTAT - TASKGRP SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
1. Input format
SPECIFIC FORCE
-
] ]
] DISP CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORCE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDSSTAT-1 +
DISP CDSSTAT
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
-
] ]
] DISP CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,FORCE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group(s).
Incompatibilities:
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
E N D
DISP CDSSTAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command cancels:
- control flags for call data treatment
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types
- activation of preventive meter observation
- preventive meter observation threshold, category and traffic type
dependent.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,PMOBS=> ]
] ]
] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data no longer has to be recorded for a call by the
EWSD-switching system.
METSTAT METERS F.STATISTIC MEASUREMENT
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
MOBORIG METER OBSERVATION ORIGINATING
MOBTERM METER OBSERVATION TERMINATING
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
IARAMA INTER ADMINISTR. REVENUE AMA
IARSTAT INTER ADMINISTR. REVENUE STAT.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
INAMA INTELIGENT NETWORK AMA
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data no longer has
to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
RECIRDAT RECORD IARA OPTIONAL DATA
CALLDUR CALL DURATION
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
CLGDN CALLING PARTY DIRECTORY NUMBER
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
DIALDIG DIALLED DIGITS
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
BGID BUSSINES GROUP IDENTIFICATION
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CDTDAT-1 +
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data no longer
has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
DURATCUM CALL DURATION CUMULATED
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
TGN2 TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENTIFICATION
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies which specific control data are disabled.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
UCALLAMA UNANSWERED CALLS WITH AMA
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
UCALLIAC UNSUCCESS. CALLS WITH IACHASTA
AMAFAIID AMA F.SUB.FAC.INP.IMPL. DEACT.
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
PMOBS CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
This parameter specifies that the activation of the PMOBS feature is
canceled (with reset of the threshold value).
ACT CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold is no longer valid.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
CAN CDTDAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
- the extra and/or alternative data items.
- the activated call data treatment control flags
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types
- the status and the threshold value for preventive meter observation.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CDTDAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CDTDAT-1 -
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command enters:
- control flags for call data treatment
- non standard (extra and alternative) data items for several recording types
- charging counter for facility input and facility usage
- activation and threshold value (charge limit) for preventive meter
observation (can be entered per category and traffic type).
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,FAICNTR= ]
] ]
] ,FAUCNTR= ,PMOBS=> [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching
system.
METSTAT METERS F.STATISTIC MEASUREMENT
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be recorded
with statistic metering (METSTAT)
for the old IARA registration.
with AMA registration.
with meter observation at the
originating side.
with meter observation at the
terminating side.
non standard data items to be
recorded for an active PMOB
registration.
IARAMA INTER ADMINISTR. REVENUE AMA
with AMA for the old IARA
registration.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
for CENTREX subscriber charging with
MDR registration.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
non standard data items to be
recorded for an active IN AMA
registration.
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
non standard data items to record with
AMA at active IACHASTA registration.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDTDAT-1 +
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
non standard data items to
record for an active
IACHASTA metering registration.
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data items must be
recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
For a specific recording type, the amount of data to be
collected per recording type consists of:
- basic data items, which are always collected (i.e. fixed)
- extra data items, which are collected if entered via this
parameter (i.e. administrable).
Following overview shows for which recording types, which
extra data items can be administered by entering the
respective parameter value:
AMA,
DEB
CHARGES : Charge units for connection, charge units for
facility usage, zone and charge band.
RECTRID : Trunk Identification incoming/outgoing.
CLGDN : Calling party directory number.
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
DIALDIG : Dialled Digits.
NEWDEST : New destination.
BGID : Business group identification.
CTXNO : CENTREX numbers.
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
GCR : Global Charge reference.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
MOBORIG
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
DIALDIG : Dialled Digits.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
MOBTERM:
IACHASTA: IACAMA
CHARGES : Charge units for connection.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
ENTR CDTDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IACHASTA: IACMET
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
IARA: IARAMA
RECIRDAT: Recording of IARAMA optional data.
MDR:
METSTAT
CALLDUR : Call duration.
INAMA
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
PMOB
Note:
The Extra Non Standard Data Items CONNID, FAUPRTNR,
TRAFQUAL and CAC are default set. They can be removed with
the CAN CDTDAT command.
If IACHASTA is used (this is the standard case), the recording
types IARAMA and METSTAT are not relevant.
If IARAMA is used (via patch), the recording types IACAMA and
IACMET are not relevant.
For the recording type OSS-AMA, only the data item RECIRDAT
is relevant (only if IARA is used).
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
This identifier allows to record charge units,
zone and charge band.
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows the recording of the trunk
identification.
The trunk identification can be recorded in the
following form:
- trunk group number + line number
or
- trunk group number + CIC identification
(see parameter ALTNSD).
RECIRDAT RECORD IARA OPTIONAL DATA
This identifier allows to record
special IARA data.
CALLDUR CALL DURATION
This identifier allows to record the call duration
for METSTAT.
The call duration is accumulated in the third
counter of the statistic meter set.
The account file format must be set to
FORMAT=2 or 3, see command ENTR METADM.
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
This identifier allows to collect the B side
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDTDAT-3 +
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
meter pulses for an IACHASTA registration.
CLGDN CALLING PARTY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This identifier allows to record the calling
party number within several recording type
records.
In case of PBX with DDI, this is the signalled
and screened directory number.
In case of CAMA and IACAMA this is the
inter-office signalled directory number.
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
This identifier allows to record the
call duration before answer.
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows to provide the
third party number of a call transfer or
call forwarding within the tickets.
E.g. in case of serial call forwarding
the AMA records of all the call legs
contain the original calling party.
DIALDIG DIALLED DIGITS
dialled digits within the tickets.
new destination number within the
tickets.
BGID BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
CENTREX business group identifier within
the tickets.
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
CENTREX numbers within the tickets.
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
sequence number within the tickets.
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
checksum within the tickets.
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
additional call indicators within the tickets.
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
call tariff within the tickets.
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
global charge reference .
Because this is an extension of the local
charge reference (controlable with the
identifier CONNID) the connection
identification will no longer be available
in the charging ticket when the global
charge reference is requested.
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
connection identification.
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
facility usage by the partner.
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
traffic quality data.
carrier access code.
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
advised cumulated charges.
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data items must be
recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
The possibility exists to collect alternative data items instead of
the standard data items for some recording types.
ENTR CDTDAT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Following overview shows for which recording types, which
alternative data items can be administered by entering
the respective parameter values:
AMA
DEB
IARAMA:
RANSWTIM: Recording of begintime instead of endtime.
EXTBDIG: More than 18 B-digits can be registered (only
relevant for old ticket layout of V4.X).
DURATCUM: Cumulated call duration.
RECTRCIC: Trunk identification with CIC instead of
the linenumber.
TGN2: Special representation of the trunk group number.
IACHASTA: IACAMA
DURATCUM: Cumulated call duration.
the linenumber.
MOBORIG:
the linenumber.
MOBTERM
MDR
TST
ENTR DNOBS
INAMA:
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
begin date/time of the call instead
of the end date/time.
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
This identifier allows to collect more than
18 B-digits in the old ticket layout of V4.X
(AMA, DEB).
DURATCUM CALL DURATION CUMULATED
This identifier allows to record the cumulated
duration of a call.
In this case the call duration is not reset when
intermediate tickets are generated.
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
This identifier allows to record a trunk in form
of circuit identification code instead of line
number for Signaling System No. 7 trunk groups.
This alternative data item only becomes active
if the extra data item RECTRID is set.
TGN2 SECOND TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENT.
This identifier allows to record a trunk group in
form of the second trunk group number instead of
the standard trunk group number (parameter TGN2
in command CR TGRP).
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the control flags that can be used
to control specific functions of call data treatment.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
If this flag is set, the AMAIO-feature (immediate
output of the AMA record) also applies to AMA
records generated for subscriber controled inputs.
UCALLAMA AMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
If this flag is set, AMA-tickets are generated
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDTDAT-5 +
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for unsuccessful calls, i.e. calls that have not
been answered, if AMA must be performed for that
call, e.g. due to zoning result or 1st dialed
digit (project specific GP implementation).
This flag is not valid for DEB.
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
If this flag is set, DEB records are also
generated for facility input/usage by the
subscriber if the DEB feature is activated
for this subscriber.
UCALLIAC IACHASTA FOR UNSUCCESS. CALLS
If this flag is set, IACHASTA registration is
performed for unsuccessful calls, i.e. calls
that have not been answered and for which
IACHASTA registration with METERING or with
AMA must be performed (cfr. UCALLAMA).
AMAFAIID AMA FOR IMPLICIT DEACTIVATION
If this flag is set, AMA tickets are generated
for facilities that are implicitly deactivated
by activating another facility via SCI.
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
If this flag is set, AMA tickets are also
generated for subscriber controled inputs from
CENTREX subscribers.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
If this flag is set, AMA, DEB and MDR
tickets are also generated for charge free
call attempts.
The new mark that controls the generation
of charge records for charge free call attempts
will only be applicable for valid call attempts
with no call attempt units engineered.
For chargeable call attempts that are made
charge free by a no charge indication, the new
mark will not be applicable (a record will be
generated).
FAICNTR FACILITY INPUT CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility input have to be accumulated.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
FAUCNTR FACILITY USAGE CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility usage have to be accumulated.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
PMOBS PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
This parameter allows the PMOB feature to be activated together with
entering the PMOB threshold value.
PMOB tickets are generated for calls whose charges have reached
or exceeded the threshold specified in the command.
The generated PMOB tickets can be displayed with DISP CHAREC.
The PMOB threshold can be displayed with DISP CDTDAT.
ENTR CDTDAT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
ACT ACTIVATE PMOBS
b: PMOBS THRESHOLD VALUE=
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold becomes valid.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CDTDAT-7 -
RESET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command resets the command file options to their defaults in the
session level. If it forms part of a command file, this command sets the
command file options to the values of the next higher level.
Input format
-
] ]
] RESET CFOPT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RESET CFOPT-1 -
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command sets the command file options. In dialog, the parameters
defined with this command remain in effect until the command is entered
again or until the command is input from a command file with parameter
SCOPE=GLOBAL or until the defaults are set with the appropriate
command.
If the command SET CFOPT is entered from a command file, the
following is valid:
- It remains in effect until the command is entered again or until
RESET CFOPT is entered from the command file.
- In a command file addressed from this command file (lower level)
it remains in effect until the command SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT is
entered from the lower level command file.
When the higher level command file is re-entered, the last
SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT entered there is valid.
- Otherwise the command is valid up to the end of the command file.
Input format
-
] ]
] SET CFOPT : <ACKCFS= ,ON= ,OFF= ,DANCMD= ,ACKREQ=> ]
] ]
] [,SCOPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ACKCFS EXTEND OF CMD ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This parameter defines to what extent commands from command files
ALL ALL
CMDERR COMMAND ACKNOWLEDGE + ERROR
ERROR ERROR ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: ERROR
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to ON.
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to OFF.
Default value: X
DANCMD EXECUTION OF DANGEROUS COMMAND
This parameter specifies whether commands in the command file
with the attribute Dangerous command are to be executed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET CFOPT-1 +
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXEC EXECUTION
NOEXEC NO EXECUTION
Default: NOEXEC
ACKREQ ACKNOWLEDGE OF READ REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether acknowledgement requests
arising due to command input are to be answered positively
or negatively.
POS POSITIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
NEG NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: NEG
SCOPE RANGE OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the range of validity of the other
parameters.
LOCAL ONLY FOR ACTUAL NESTING LEVEL
GLOBAL GLOBAL VALIDITY FOR ALL LEVELS
Default: LOCAL
E N D
SET CFOPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command prints out the entire RCF table (call failure treatment table).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CFT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CFT-1 -
ENTR CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command can allocate or remove a table for a certain type of program.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CFT : PRTYPE= ,CFTTAB= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PRTYPE PROGRAM TYPE
This parameter specifies the user program.
CFTTAB CALL FAILURE TREATMENT TABLE
This parameter specifies the call failure handling table that
defines the response to specific call failures. Its values are:
0 Initial value
1...15 Table number
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CFT-1 -
DISP CFTJOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB
This command displays the significant data for timed command file-jobs.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CFTJOB : [JN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number. If this parameter
is omitted, all existing scheduled command file-jobs are
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CFTJOB-1 -
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS
This command displays EWSD charging data records, i.e. call detailed
records and administrative records that are used for charging purposes
(AMA, INAMA,IACAMA) or charging observation purposes (MOB,PMOB).
These charging data records may be stored in a file on the EWSD disk or on
a magnetic tape/optical disk.
Following types of charging data records exist and can be displayed:
AMA records: To charge a PSTN subscriber or a TFS subscriber.
These records are stored on the EWSD disk in the
default file : IA.ICAMA.
INAMA records: To charge an IN service subscriber.
These records are stored on the EWSD disk in the default
file : IA.ICINA.
IACAMA records: To perform inter-operator charging.
file : IA.ICIAR or the 2 files IA.ICIAR1 and IA.ICIAR2.
MOB records: To observe charges of a PSTN/TFS subscriber.
file : IA.ICMOB
PMOB records: To observe expensive calls (charges exceed a certain
limit) for PSTN subscribers.
file : IA.ICPMB.
<job number>.
1. DISP CHAREC - AMA DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
2. DISP CHAREC - IACAMA DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
3. DISP CHAREC - INAMA DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
4. DISP CHAREC - MOB DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
5. DISP CHAREC - PMOB DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
1. Input format
DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
This input format displays the AMA records stored in a
disk/tape/optical disk file.
-
] ]
] DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,ICTGNO=] ]
] ]
] [,OGTGNO=] [,CLGDN=] [,NEWDEST=] [,BEGDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] ]
] ]
] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number (DN) as stored in
the field "Record Owner" of the relevant charging records :AMA,
IACAMA, MOB and PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The field "Record-Owner" contains either the local administered
DN of the A-/B-subscriber (i.e. the DN stored in the EWSD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-1 +
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
database) or the inter-office signalled calling party number.
The "Record-Owner" contains:
- the database DN of the A-subscriber, in case an AMA,
MOB or PMOB record is generated for this subscriber in
the originating exchange.
- the database DN of the B-subscriber, in case an AMA,
or MOB record is generated for this subscriber in the
terminating exchange.
- the database DN of the A-subscriber, in case an IACAMA
interoperator charging record is generated in the originating
exchange.
- the inter-office signalled calling party number (if present),
in case an AMA record is generated on an incoming trunk
in a transit/terminating-exchange.
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number
of the call for which the charging record was generated.
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
the data package "Calling Party Number" (including Nature of Address
Identifier = NADI and Numbering Plan Id = NPI) of the relevant
charging records :AMA, IACAMA, and MOB.
The parameter must be entered with just the directory number part,
i.e. without NADI and without NPI.
The "Calling Party Number" data package contains the from a DDI-PBX
subscriber signalled or the inter-office signalled calling party
number, including the NADI and NPI (as defined in DSS1/ISUP).
The "Calling Party Number" contains:
- the calling party number signalled (DSS1) and screened
from a DDI-PBX, in case an AMA or MOB record is
generated for this subscriber in the originating exchange.
from a DDI-PBX, in case an IACAMA interoperator charging
record is generated in the originating exchange.
- the inter-office signalled calling party number, in case a
MOB-terminating record is generated for a B-subscriber in
the terminating exchange.
In this case the package "Called Party DN" is not present
(also selectable via a seperate MML parameter CLDDN).
- the inter-office signalled calling party number, in case
an AMA or IACAMA record is generated on an incoming
trunk in a transit-exchange.
DISP CHAREC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new destination of the call
for which the charging record was generated.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-3 +
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICAMA
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
DISP CHAREC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-5 +
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
This input format displays the IACAMA records stored in a
-
] ]
] DISP CHAREC : TYPE= ,FILE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,ICTGNO=] ]
] ]
] [,OGTGNO=] [,CLGDN=] [,NEWDEST=] [,BEGDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,VSN=] ]
] ]
] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
data record.
IACAMA INTERADMIN. CHARGING VIA AMA
FILE FILE NAME
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICIAR
exchange.
DISP CHAREC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-7 +
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
DISP CHAREC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-9 +
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
This input format displays the INA records stored in a
-
] ]
] DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,CLDDN=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [,CLI=] ]
] ]
] [,NEWDEST=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
data record.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
CLI CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the directory number as stored in the
data package "Calling Line Id" for the relevant charging record
INAMA.
The parameter must be entered with local area code, and, depending
on the project, with or without discrimination digit.
The "Calling Line Id" data package contains the signalled calling
party number.
DISP CHAREC-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-11 +
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICINA
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
or not.
DISP CHAREC-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: N
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-13 +
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
This input format displays the MOB records stored in a
-
] ]
] DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,OGTGNO=] ]
] ]
] [,CLGDN=] [,NEWDEST=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] ]
] ]
] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
data record.
MOB METER OBSERVATION
exchange.
DISP CHAREC-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-15 +
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
DISP CHAREC-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICMOB
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-17 +
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
This input format displays the PMOB records stored in a
-
] ]
] DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,BEGDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] ]
] ]
] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
data record.
exchange.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
DISP CHAREC-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHAREC-19 +
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICPMB
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
or not.
Default: N
E N D
DISP CHAREC-20 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT RECORD
This command displays the disk based charging fault records for the
specified fault cases. To narrow down the selection, a date/time interval
can be entered. Omitting this interval indicates that there are no
constraints.
Notes :
- Only when the AREA and CLASS parameters are missing and all values
is specified for CASE are the internal fault cases included in the
selection. For all other combinations only the user fault cases are
considered.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CHF : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] [,DATE= [,TIME=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CASE CHARGING FAULT CASE(S)
This parameter specifies the fault case. This constitutes the
lowest level of the fault classification system adopted by
Charging Fault Treatment. It corresponds to a complete error
as detectable in the generated accounting data.
MISMETER MISSING METERING DATA
INVMETCK INVALID METER CHECKSUM
INVMETDN INVALID METERING DN
INVRCDNG INVALID RECORDING TYPE
MISDIGIT MISSING DIGITS
ILLCHUNI ILLEGAL CHARGE UNITS
INVDURAT INVALID DURATION
TARAUDIT TARIFF AUDIT
NORESPTA NO RESPONSE FROM TARIFF AUDIT
INVCDMSG INVALID CALL DATA MESSAGE
ILLSUMF2 ILL. SUB METERING FOR FORMAT 2
INVCNTR INVALID COUNTERS
INVCNTF1 INVALID COUNTERS FOR FORMAT 1
INVICAMA INVALID IAC AMA
INVICMET INVALID IAC METERING
ICDBINC IAC DATABASE INCONSISTENCY
CASE17 FAULT CASE 17
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHF-1 +
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all defined user fault case values.
AREA CHARGING FAULT AREA(S)
This parameter specifies the fault area. This is the highest
level of the fault classification system adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It reflects a partitioning of the available
charging recordings according to the way in which the accounting
information is gathered.
METERING FAULT AREA METERING
Fault area for charging recordings relying on
memory based counters.
TICKET FAULT AREA TICKETING
disk based records.
Represents all defined fault area values.
CLASS CHARGING FAULT CLASS(ES)
This parameter specifies the fault class. This represents the
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by
Charging Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based
partitioning of the individual fault cases.
DETERMIN FAULT CLASS DETERMINATION
Fault class which groups all cases related to the
determination of the requested charging recordings
and -for every concurrent recording- of the
required charging information.
INFORM FAULT CLASS INFORMATION
Fault class which groups all the cases which are
(in)directly caused by incorrect or inconsistent
(within or between recordings) charging
information.
SECURITY FAULT CLASS SECURITY
related to the safeguarding of the generated
charging data. This includes checksum monitoring
and handling of system recovery.
Represents all defined fault class values.
DATE RECORD DATE INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the date that can be
entered to narrow down the selection of displayed
charging fault records.
The date can be entered on its own or in
combination with a time.
A single value for this parameter is taken as the
start date of an open ended interval.
DISP CHF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME RECORD TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time that can be
entered to narrow down the selection of displayed
charging fault records.
The time can only be entered if the date is
also specified.
A single value for this parameter is taken as the
starting time of an open ended interval.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHF-3 -
ACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command allows the activation of the specified fault case(s) and,
therefore, of the corresponding code-based plausibility checkpoints. Once
activated, the latter can monitor various system functions and gather
information. The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been
created by operator command.
Notes :
- Cases can be entered individually or globally for selected AREA/CLASS
combinations.
- The status of the user fault cases can be verified by means of the
DISP CHFCASE command.
- The eventual status of a fault case is determined by the overall Charging
Fault Treatment settings as controlled by the MOD CHFSTAT command.
- Individual plausibility checkpoints can pertain to multiple fault cases
and their status is, therefore, dependent on all of these cases.
- The local fault case status table in the active LTGs is automatically
updated by this command.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CHFCASE-1 +
ACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
disk based records.
information.
E N D
ACT CHFCASE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command creates a new user fault case for Charging Fault Treatment
for the specified AREA/CLASS combination.
As such, it allows the definition of additional cases in an existing APS
which can be used in plausibility checkpoints implemented via code patches.
The symbolic identifier, which will represent the new user case in
subsequent ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands or in the output of
the DISP CHFCASE command, is determined by the system and reported
in the result message.
This new case is indistinguishable, both to administration and software
users from the hard-coded fault cases. In particular, this means that it
can not be destroyed or reassigned to another AREA/CLASS
classification.
Notes :
- the created case is initially inactive and must be explicitly activated
with the ACT CHFCASE command.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CHFCASE : AREA= ,CLASS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
AREA CHARGING FAULT AREA
disk based records.
CLASS CHARGING FAULT CLASS
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based partitioning of
the individual fault cases.
information.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CHFCASE-1 -
DACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command allows the deactivation of the specified fault case(s) and,
therefore, of the corresponding code-based plausibility checkpoints. Once
deactivated, the latter stop monitoring system functions and gathering
information. The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been
created by operator command.
Notes :
combinations.
- The status of the user fault cases can be verified by means of the
DISP CHFCASE command.
- Individual plausibility checkpoints can pertain to multiple fault cases
and their status is, therefore, dependent on all of these cases.
updated by this command.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CHFCASE-1 +
DACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all the defined user fault case values.
charging recordings according to the way in which accounting
disk based records.
Represents all the defined fault area values.
Fault class which groups all the cases related to
the determination of the requested charging
recordings and -for every concurrent recording-
of the required charging information.
information.
Represents all the defined fault class values.
E N D
DACT CHFCASE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command displays information about all the user fault cases and, therefore,
of the corresponding plausibility checkpoints belonging to the specified
AREA/CLASS combination.
Both the hard-coded user fault cases and the ones created with the
CR CHFCASE command are reported.
The information to display is specified with the FUNC parameter and includes :
- the status of the user fault cases
- statistical data about the user fault cases : daily occurrence thresholds
and daily and total occurrence counters
Notes :
- This command only lists the relevant fault cases for every specified
combination. It is possible that particular combinations contain no fault
cases and return an empty list.
- The status reported by this command corresponds to the one controlled by the
ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands.
The eventual status as determined by the overall Charging Fault Treatment
settings, as controlled by the MOD CHFSTAT, command is not taken into
account.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CHFCASE : AREA= ,CLASS= [,FUNC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
charging recordings according to the way in which the
accounting information is gathered.
disk based records.
Represents all the defined fault area values.
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based partitioning of
the individual fault cases.
information.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHFCASE-1 +
DISP CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all the defined fault class values.
FUNC DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies which information must be displayed for
the selected fault cases. Not entering the parameter displays
the status.
STATUS FAULT CASE STATUS
This function displays the status of the selected
user fault cases.
CNTR FAULT CASE COUNTERS
This function displays the statistical information
of the selected user fault cases : the daily
occurrence thresholds and the daily and total
occurrence counters.
E N D
DISP CHFCASE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command has a dual purpose : it can be used to change the daily
occurrence thresholds or to reset (i.e. return to 0) the daily and total
occurrence counters for the specified user fault cases. The threshold
values are used by the system to suppress operator alarming and disk storage
for the case once the daily occurrence falls outside the selected interval.
The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been created by
operator command.
Notes :
combinations.
- The threshold and counter values of the user fault cases can be verified
by means of the DISP CHFCASE command.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] <,DCNTRTHR= ,RCNTR=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CHFCASE-1 +
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
disk based records.
information.
DCNTRTHR DAILY OCCURRENCE COUNTER THR.
This parameter specifies the lower and upper threshold
values for the daily occurrence of a user fault case.
This provides a suppression of output when the daily
occurrence falls outside the selected boundaries.
MOD CHFCASE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LOWER THRESHOLD VALUE=
b: UPPER THRESHOLD VALUE=
RCNTR RESET OCCURRENCE COUNTERS
This parameter allows a reset (i.e. return to 0) of
the daily and total occurrence counters of a user
fault case.
NO NO COUNTER RESET
Indicates that the daily and total occurrence
counters must not be reset.
YES COUNTER RESET
Indicates that the daily and total occurrence
counters must be reset.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CHFCASE-3 -
DISP CHFSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS
This command displays global status information about the Charging
Fault Treatment System consisting of :
- the current global plausibility checkpoint and immediate
output settings as determined by the MOD CHFSTAT command.
- statistical information about all the internal fault cases :
daily occurrence thresholds and daily and total occurrence
counters.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CHFSTAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHFSTAT-1 -
MOD CHFSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS
This command modifies the global plausibility checkpoint and immediate
output settings (status) of the Charging Fault Treatment system.
Notes :
- The overall plausibility checkpoint status controlled with this command
overrules the status of the individual fault case(s) as determined by
ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands.
This means that, regardless of any other settings, all fault cases and
checkpoints, including those used by the system itself, are deactivated
if the global status is set to OFF.
Changing the status to ON restores the individual states of the
fault cases.
updated by this command if the checkpoint status was changed.
- Immediate output of detected charging errors is also dependent on
the fault case specific filtering thresholds and on the overall
plausibility checkpoint status.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CHFSTAT : <CHECK= ,ALARM=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CHECK FAULT TREAMENT CHECK STATUS
This parameter determines the overall status of the Charging Fault
Treatment plausibility checkpoints and of their controlling fault
cases.
OFF CHECK STATUS INACTIVE
Status is OFF (i.e. inactive)
ON CHECK STATUS ACTIVE
Status is ON (i.e. active)
ALARM FAULT TREATMENT ALARM STATUS
This parameter determines the overall operator alarming (i.e.
immediate output) status for Charging Fault Treatment.
OFF ALARM STATUS INACTIVE
Status is OFF (i.e. inactive)
ON ALARM STATUS ACTIVE
Status is ON (i.e. active)
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CHFSTAT-1 -
DISP CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FEATURES
This command displays charging features of a subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- DISP CHRGFEA is only accepted for a main station (analog) or
an ISDN basic access.
Notes:
- With this release DISP CHRGFEA only displays the feature
Subscriber Credit Limit Supervision.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CHRGFEA : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter specifies the local area code of the
subscriber.
Notes:
- LAC is mandatory if in the subscriber is connected to an
exchange with multiple diretory volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CHRGFEA-1 -
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FEATURES
This command modifies charging features of a subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- MOD CHRGFEA is only accepted for a main station (analog) or
an ISDN basic access.
Notes:
- With this release MOD CHRGFEA is only used to start (stop)
credit limit supervision for a subscriber or to modify the
credit limit of a subscriber under supervision.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],COSDAT= ] ]
] MOD CHRGFEA : [LAC=] ,DN= -,CCOSDAT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter specifies the local area code of the subscriber.
Notes:
- LAC is mandatory if the subscriber is connected to an
exchange with multiple directory number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
COSDAT CLASS OF SERVICE WITH DATA
a[-b]
a: CHARGING CLASS OF SERVICE
SCLS SUB. CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
This parameter specifies the charging feature
that is to be entered or modified.
Notes :
- Subscriber Credit Limit Supervision (SCLS)
is inhibited if a credit limit equal to zero
is entered.
However, charge pulses continue to be added
to the supervision counter of the subscriber
until the feature is canceled with a.
b: NUMBER=
Credit limit for the feature SCLS.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CHRGFEA-1 +
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCOSDAT CANCEL CLASS OF SERVICE
SCLS SUB. CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
This parameter specifies the charging feature
that is to be canceled.
E N D
MOD CHRGFEA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command activates a connection list trace task.
The task records connections, if one port as A-sided or B-sided part
of a connection is a member of the trace object data set.
- The record includes all relevant object data necessary to describe
the A-sided or B-sided port.
- The record of connections is connected to the occurence of the call
processing report SET_UP_COMPLETE.
Prerequisites:
- The trace object data must be entered by ENTR CLSTTRAC, otherwise
the command is rejected.
- Not more than one trace task may run at any one time.
Notes:
- The connection trace task stores the traced data to a magnetic disk
file which must have 402 PAM.
- Data from former call, signaling or connection list trace tasks are
overwritten.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CLSTTRAC : [STORE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STORE STORAGE TYPE
Notes:
- Cyclic storing means that old data are overwritten, if the disk file
TC.CALL is full.
- Sequential storing means that the tracer is cancelled, if the disk
file TC.CALL is full.
SEQU STORE TRACE DATA SEQUENTIAL
CYCLIC STORE TRACE DATA CYCLIC
Default: CYCLIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CLSTTRAC-1 -
CAN CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command cancels the connection list tracer.
All data entered with ENTR CLSTTRAC or/and ACT CLSTTRAC are
deleted.
Prerequisites:
- The object data must be entered by the command ENTR CLSTTRAC.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CLSTTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CLSTTRAC-1 -
DACT CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command deactivates the trace task of the connection list tracer.
All data entered with ACT CLSTTRAC are deleted.
Prerequisites:
- A trace job by the connection list tracer must be activated by the
command ACT CLSTTRAC.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CLSTTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CLSTTRAC-1 -
DISP CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command displays the connection list tracer state and informs about
existing trace data. If the connection list tracer is entered, the command
DISP CLSTTRAC displays data about the currently traced objects, and if
it is active the tracer activation data will be displayed.
If either the call tracer or the connection list tracer is active object
and activation data associated with the currently running tracer will be
displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CLSTTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CLSTTRAC-1 -
DMP CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command dumps data collected by the connection list tracer.
The data can be dumped either with the tracer still active or
with a deactivated or cancelled tracer.
Prerequisites:
- The tracer must have been activated previously.
Trace activation is accomplished with ENTR CLSTTRAC and
ACT CLSTTRAC.
- The connection list tracer stores the collected data to the
magnetic disk file TC.CALL which has 402 PAM. For a dump, an additional
402 PAM pages of disk space are needed to create a temporary copy
TC.CALLTEMP of the trace data file.
Notes:
- The collected data can be dumped repeatedly if the tracer was
deactivated by DACT CLSTTRAC or cancelled by CAN CLSTTRAC.
In this case the user can vary the data displayed with each dump
with parameters.
- The collected data are dumped only once if the tracer is still
active. In this case, the data displayed are those which have been
collected since the last DMP CLSTTRAC. If no such command has been
entered previously, the dumped data go back to the activation
command ACT CLSTTRAC.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP CLSTTRAC : [DN= [,LAC=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter restricts the dump of data collected
by the connection list tracer.
After entering the parameter, only connections
which have the entered directory number as B-side / termi-
nation are displayed.
Other connections are suppressed in the trace protocol.
LAC LOCAL AREA NUMBER
This parameter restricts the dump of data collected
by the connection list tracer.
After entering the parameter, only connections
which have the entered directory number and the entered
local area code as B-side / termination are displayed.
Other conections are suppressed in the trace protocol.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CLSTTRAC-1 -
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CONNECTION LIST TRACER OBJECT DATA
This command enters the object data to be traced by the connection list tracer.
Prerequisites:
- Other trace tasks must not be running.
1. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DN PBX SELECTION
2. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DNEQN PBX SUBSET SPECIFIED BY EQN
3. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DNRESTR PBX SELECTION WITH RESTRICTION
4. ENTR CLSTTRAC- EQN EQUIPMENT SELECTION
5. ENTR CLSTTRAC- TGNO TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
1. Input format
PBX SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object set by a PBX: a selection
of a subset by the parameter OPMODE and additionally by the parameter
LNO is possible.
-
] ]
] ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= [,LNO=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the
operating mode of these lines.
ABW PBX GROUPS: ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
AOG PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
IOG PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
MBW PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CLSTTRAC-1 +
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNEQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PBX SUBSET SPECIFIED BY EQN
Input format for a subset of PBX lines connected either to
selected DLU or selected LTG or LTU.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],OPMODE= ]] ]
] ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= ,EQN= ]-,PBXRESTR=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the set of objects to
be traced.
Notes:
- Only the following partial qualifications of ports to be traced are
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
LTG: EQN = a-b
EQN = a-b-c
V5IF: EQN = a
- Up to six parameter values, fully qualified or partly qualified, can
be linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: EQUIPM.NO.FOR TSG/DLU/V5IF=
- TSG number : 0..7 for LTG port
- DLU number : 10,20,30,..,2550 for DLU port
- V5IF number: 6000..8999 for V5IF port
b: EQUIPM.NO.FOR LTG/SHELF=
- LTG : 1..63 for LTG port
- Shelf : 0..7 for DLU port
- 0 for V5IF port
c: EQUIPM.NO.FOR LTU/MODULE=
- LTU : 0..7 for LTG port
- Module : 0..15 for DLU port
- 0 for V51-IF port
- 0..20 for V52-IF port
ENTR CLSTTRAC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNEQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the
ABW PBX GROUPS: ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
AOG PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
IOG PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
MBW PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
PBXRESTR PBX RESTRICTED BY LINE TYPES
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the type
of these lines.
AN ANALOG OBJECTS
BA BASIC ACCESS OBJECTS
BW BOTHWAY PBX GROUPS
IC INCOMING PBX GROUPS
N NO RESTRICTION
NO NO RESTRICTION
OG OUTGOING PBX GROUPS
PA PRIMARY ACCESS OBJECTS
Default: N
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNRESTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PBX SELECTION WITH RESTRICTION
Input format for specifying a set of trace objects by defining a subset
of PBX lines with the parameter PBXRESTR.
-
] ]
] ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= ,PBXRESTR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
PBXRESTR PBX RESTRICTED BY LINE TYPES
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the type
of these lines.
AN ANALOG OBJECTS
BA BASIC ACCESS OBJECTS
BW BOTHWAY PBX GROUPS
IC INCOMING PBX GROUPS
N NO RESTRICTION
NO NO RESTRICTION
OG OUTGOING PBX GROUPS
PA PRIMARY ACCESS OBJECTS
Default: N
ENTR CLSTTRAC
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
EQUIPMENT SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object data set by the
parameter EQN.
-
] ]
] ENTR CLSTTRAC : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be traced.
Notes:
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
LTG: EQN = a-b
EQN = a-b-c
V5IF: EQN = a
be linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
- 0 for V5IF port
- 0 for V51-IF port
d: EQUIPM.NO.FOR CHANNEL/CIRCUIT=
- Channel : 0..31 for LTG port
- Circuit : 0..7 for DLU port (DLU8)
- Channel : 0..31 for V51-IF port
- Channel : 0..99 for V52-IF port
ENTR CLSTTRAC
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object data set by a trunk group:
a selection of a subset specified either by the parameter EQN or the
parameter LNO or the parameter CIC is possible.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],EQN=]] ]
] ENTR CLSTTRAC : TGNO= ]-,LNO=] ; ]
] ]],CIC=]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be traced.
Notes:
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
LTG: EQN = a-b
EQN = a-b-c
V5IF: EQN = a
be linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
- 0 for V5IF port
- 0 for V51-IF port
LNO LINE NUMBER
ENTR CLSTTRAC
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7
lines.
Prerequisites:
- Input of a trunk group specified by the parameter TGNO
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...681
PCM 30 = 0...511
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...23
PCM 30 = 0...31
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CLSTTRAC-7 -
SKIP CMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKIP COMMAND
This command skips a command sequence which is dependent on the
control switches. They are set with ON or OFF .
The command labeled with LABEL = <NAME> is processed next.
This command is only legal in a command file, and cannot be entered
from the terminal.
Input format
-
] ]
] SKIP CMD : LABEL= [,ON=] [,OFF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LABEL LABEL OF TARGET COMMAND
This parameter identifies the label of the target command.
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
ON for the command to be executed.
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
OFF for the command to be executed.
Notes:
- OFF overrides ON.
- 32 is the error switch.
- Command SET CFOPT sets the switches (1...16) for use in the
command file.
- Only forward skips are legal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SKIP CMD-1 -
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE
This command starts the execution of a command file. The file can
execute on a specified date and/or time, but will execute immediately
if no future time or date is specified. Command files can also be
scheduled to execute periodically.
Timer jobs with an insecure start time are accepted, but not started,
either at the specified start time or retrospectively.
At 23.50 the time administration sets the weekday and the weekday
category.
Timer jobs which are started at 23.50 and 23.55 are only executed at
the desired time if the operator takes the characteristics of the time
administration into consideration when he enters a timer job (e.g.
non-recurring timer jobs must be predated).
Commands may also exist in the command file through which a nested call
of command files is possible. The nesting depth for command files is
three. After the internal command file finishes processing, the
processing of the external file is continued.
Notes:
- In the case of tape / optical disk files, only one file can be open
at a time, i.e., tape / optical disk files may not be nested in one
another, and during a COFIP run, one tape / optical disk file can be
accessed from a disk file and must be processed and closed before a
second tape / optical disk file may be opened. Tape / optical disk
files must have ASCII text format with variable record size.
- It is possible to read MML commands from the O&M terminal. The input
of an asterisk (*) for the file name causes the display of a
number sign (#) on the O&M terminal, which marks the input
request of an MML command. This feature allows the execution of a
command file which is situated on a PC if the PC is capable of
reading MML commands from a PC file. Nested files are not allowed in
this case.
It is possible to store 120 timer jobs but only 10 timer jobs can be
started at the same time. Timer jobs are illegal in command files.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] EXEC CMDFILE : FILE= [,STEP=] [,VSN=] [,CHOL=] [,TIME= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PER= [,WDCAT=]]] [,DATE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the command file name.
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies that, after errors have occurred in the
execution of a command, a branch is made to the next STEP command
or if this next STEP command does not exist, a branch is made to
the end of the file.
If the parameter is omitted, the STEP command will be ignored.
N NO
NO NO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXEC CMDFILE-1 +
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y YES
YES YES
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of a
tape / optical disk or disk. It is mandatory for tape /
optical disk files.
CHOL CHECK ONLY
This parameter checks MML commands for syntax errors.
The only command which is executed is EXEC CMDFILE.
It is rejected if the commands are located in nested command
files. For nested command files only the parameter value of the
outermost file is valid.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies when the command file is to be executed.
Immediate start is the default. This parameter is illegal in
nested command files.
a-b
a: HOUR=
Corresponds to <Hour>
b: MINUTE=
Corresponds to <Minutes>
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter indicates a periodic timer job. Workdays, international
half holidays, international full holidays, national holidays, half
weekend, full weekend, all the days of the week, or a non-periodic
job can be identified. This parameter is illegal in nested command
files.
Notes:
- Weekdays MO, TU, ... SU: execution on the respective
weekday (irrespective of the entered category, i.e. SU
means: execution on every Sunday)
- The combination of several weekdays with & corresponds to a
logical OR, i.e. execution on all the days entered
- Categories WO, EH, EF, HO, HH, HN: execution
in the respective category
- The combination of several categories with & corresponds to
a logical OR, i.e. execution in all categories specified
- The combination of category and weekday, in PER is not
possible. However it is possible to enter a weekday in
PER and a category in WDCAT. This corresponds to a
logical AND, i.e. both parameters must be entered
EXEC CMDFILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NOT A PERIODIC JOB
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAYS
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
YES EVERY DAY OF THE WEEK
This parameter specifies the weekday category, which must be
valid at job execution time. This parameter is illegal in nested
command files.
Compatibilities:
- WDCAT is only allowed if parameter PER is not NO.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when command processing is to
start. The current date is the default. This parameter is illegal
in nested command files.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
Corresponds to <Year>
b: MONTH=
Corresponds to <Month>
c: DAY=
Corresponds to <Day>
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXEC CMDFILE-3 -
CONF CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a common memory.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF CMY : [CMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CMY-1 -
DIAG CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a common memory. The diagnosis
includes a BCMY interface test. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The common memory must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] [,ONEBIT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
Default: YES
ONEBIT ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
N NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
NO NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Y ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
YES ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG CMY-1 -
TEST CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both CMYs must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both CMYs are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST CMY-1 -
DISP CNMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC MEMORY
This command displays CCNC memory contents.
Only 5 addresses or address ranges can be linked with this command.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],BYTE= ]] ]
] ]],WORD= ]] ;- ]
] DISP CNMEM : ADDR= ]-,LWORD=] ,UNIT= - ]
] ]],ASCII=]] !' ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADDR ADDRESS OF PATCH
This function can dump the memory content from the CCNC-processors:
CPI, SIMP, SIPA, SILTC or SILT.
The CPU of SIMP and CPI is an Intel 80386 processor running in
protected mode. Therefore, all segments are addressed via
selectors. In the following context the logical address is
always described as selector offset. But if an address for
SILT, SIPA or SILTC is used, the selector signifies the segment value.
FORMAT of ADDR
ADDR ::= "begin address" && "end address"
or ADDR ::= "begin address" && "+length"
Syntax of <address>:
The following input alternatives are possible:
Alternative 1 : logical address as hexadecimal string
selector offset
Input options:
<selector><offset>
<selector><offset>+<distance>
Alternative 2 : symbolic address as module address
Input options:
<module name>
<module name>+<distance>
<module name>:<addr-object>
<module name>:<addr-object>+<distance>
<module name>:<addr-object>+:<const-object>
Note: A different combination of the above mentioned
alternatives with "&" is also possible.
Input values:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CNMEM-1 +
DISP CNMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<selector> : 1-5 characters
1st character (0..9)
2nd to 5th characters (A..F,0..9)
Note:
Prefix selector with 0 if it begins
with a character (A..F)
<offset> : Exactly 4 characters (A..F,0..9)
<module name> : Exactly 8 characters
1st character (A..Z)
2nd to 8th characters (A..Z,0..9,...)
<object> : A symbolic entry or constant
1-8 characters
The memory location to be addressed may be specified in one of the
following ways:
- Logical address as a hexadecimal string, selector offset
e.g.:
ADDR="013845BF" means selector 138H
and offset 45BFH
The last four digits of a logical address always
represent the offset.
If selector and offset amount to eight digits,
the hexadecimal string must begin with a numeral
to enable a distinction between hexadecimal addresses
and symbolic addresses.
e.g.:
selector A2C0H
offset 18BCH
as ADDR ="0A2C018BC"
ADDR ="A2C018BC" is wrong.
- Sum of a logical address with a distance, selector offset +
distance
e.g.:
ADDR="013845BF+8C" means selector 138H
and offset 464BH
- Symbolic address as module name (8 characters) or
module name + distance
e.g.:
ADDR="MRTPRA4C" or ADDR="MRTPRA4C+23F"
- Symbolic address as module name (8 characters):symbol name or
module name:symbol name + distance
e.g.:
ADDR="OTBDMA4T:OT_LST" or ADDR="OTBDMA4T:OT_LST+5"
It is not possible to use a symbolic address for the units
SILT, SIPA and SILTC.
- Additional distances as symbols (module name:symbol name or
module name:symbol name + distance)
e.g.:
ADDR="OTBDMA4T:MJQ+OTBDMA4T:MJB_EV" or
ADDR="OTBDMA4T:MJQ+OTBDMA4T:MJB_EV+5"
The second module name may be omitted if the equate is
defined in the same module as the symbolic address. The
patch tool needs the colon to scan the string.
e.g.:
ADDR="OTBDMA4T:MJQ+:MJB_EV"
- Address intervals may be specified by entering the lower and
upper limit, separated by &&.
DISP CNMEM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CNMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.:
ADDR="0038F600"&&"0038F7B0" or
ADDR="MRTPRA4C+7C"&&"MRTPRA4C+1AF"
The address intervals have to be placed inside the
respective module limitation.
Only selectors announced by the linker LINK can be used.
- The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.:
ADDR="MRTPRA4T+AF"&&"+20"
short for
ADDR="MRTPRA4T+AF"&&"MRTPRA4T+CF"
The second address is interpreted as interval length if it
starts with a plus sign (+).
BYTE OUTPUT IN BYTE
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in bytes. If none
of the parameters BYTE, WORD, LWORD or ASCII is specified,
BYTE is assumed as default value.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
WORD OUTPUT IN WORD
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in words.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
LWORD OUTPUT IN LONGWORD
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in bytes.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
ASCII OUTPUT IN ASCII
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in
ASCII code.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CNMEM-3 +
DISP CNMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT PATCH UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit type.
The memory of the specified unit-number is displayed.
Otherwise the memory content of the lowest applicable unit of the
selected unit type is displayed. The unit type is mandatory.
If no CCNC is active, the memory content of CPI or SIMP is read
from disk ( i.e. the memory content is displayed as loaded from
disk when a CCNC is configured to active ). It is not possible to
read transient CCNC data from disk because these data are not
loaded from the PSWLIB.
If no CCNC is active, the memory content of SIPA, SILT or SILTC
cannot be read from disk because no disk image exists for these
units. In this case the command is rejected.
The following units can be displayed:
UNIT I RANGE
-------I--------------
CPI I 0-1
SIMP I 0-1
SIPA I 0-7, 10-17
SILTC I 0-31
SILT I 0-255
a[-b]
a: UNIT TYPE
CPI COORDINATION PROC.INTERFACE
SILTC SIGNAL.DATALINK TERMINAL PROC.
SILT SIGNAL.DATALINK TERMINAL CONT.
b: UNIT NUMBER=
E N D
DISP CNMEM-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNCPATCH
This command activates all CCNC patches specified by the
ID in the given CCNCs.
These patches are displayed.
This command incorporates patches that were entered with
ENTR CNPATCH into the CCNC memory.
All patches entered under the same ID are activated
consecutively in the CCNC memory (i.e. in a code sequence that can
only be interrupted by high-priority interrupts).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CNPATCH : ID= ,UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the patch identifier. The
ID was assigned with ENTR CNPATCH.
Note:
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
UNIT PATCH UNIT
It is possible to specify a defined unit number of CPI or SIMP in
order to restrict patch activation to one of them.
The patch is only activated in this unit. If no defined unit
is given the patch is activated in all applicable units of
the given unit type.
Normally the unit number is used only if a developer testing a
patch wants to compare the reactions of CCNCs with and without
patch simultaneously.
a[-b]
a: UNIT TYPE
b: UNIT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CNPATCH-1 -
CAN CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNCPATCH
This command cancels the CCNC patch specified by ID or NO.
This command cancels patches. Patches to be cancelled may be
specified with their ID or their internal NO.
The latter case is only possible for patches in state
"entered" and if no CCNC unit of the specified unit type is active
or standby.
An updated patch may only be cancelled if the content on the disk
at the location of the patch is identical with the content created
by the patch.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ID=] ]
] CAN CNPATCH : -NO= ,UNIT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
NO PATCH NUMBER
This parameter addresses subpatches incorporated under the
parameter ID.
UNIT PATCH UNIT TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CNPATCH-1 -
DACT CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CCNCPATCH
This command deactivates all CCNC patches specified by the ID.
These patches are displayed.
This command removes patches from the CCNC memory. The patch table
entries are not cleared. The command may not be used for patches
which have already been updated on disk. After successful
execution of this command the patch is in state "entered".
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CNPATCH : ID= ,UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CNPATCH-1 -
DISP CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNCPATCH
This command displays CCNC patches of a specified load type.
This command displays patch table entries. Patch table entries
may be specified with their ID, their internal identification
number or an address.
A module address displays all patches referring to the given
module. If an address range is entered, all entries in this range
are displayed. If X is specified, a short list of all patches is
displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] - ]],BYTE= ]] ]
] ]ID= ] ]],WORD= ]] ;- ]
] DISP CNPATCH : -NO= ]-,LWORD=] ,UNIT= - ]
] ]ADDR=] ]],ASCII=]] !' ]
] ' ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID was assigned with DISP CNPATCH.
Note:
- This parameter only allows alphanumeric characters.
If X is used to select all patch identifiers, a concise list of
patches is displayed with patch names, the time of last change and
the patch status information of the given unit. In all the other
cases, patch data are displayed in the same format as with
DISP CNPATCH.
NO PATCH NUMBER
This parameter addresses individual parts of a patch which were
incorporated under the ID parameter.
A detailed output of all patches affecting the specified address
is issued if parameter ADDR is used.
following ways:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CNPATCH-1 +
DISP CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.:
and offset 45BFH
e.g.:
selector A2C0H
offset 18BCH
as ADDR="0A2C018BC"
distance
e.g.:
and offset 464BH
e.g.:
e.g.:
e.g.:
e.g.:
e.g.:
ADDR="0038F600"&&"0038F7B0" or
e.g.:
short for
DISP CNPATCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BYTE OUTPUT IN BYTE
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in bytes.If none
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
WORD OUTPUT IN WORD
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in
ASCII code.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
UNIT PATCH UNIT
This parameter specifies a defined unit. It also allows selection
of a defined unit number of this unit type. If no unit number is
specified the patch data are displayed for all applicable units of
the given unit type.
a[-b]
a: UNIT TYPE
CPI COORDINATION PROC.INTERFACE
b: UNIT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CNPATCH-3 -
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCNCPATCH
This command enters CCNC patches in the patch tables and displays
the new patch.
This command enters patches for the CCNC software. Only the CCNC
units CPI and SIMP can be patched. Semipermanent SIMP data can
also be patched. The patches are entered into the patch tables;
activation in memory and update of the disks is performed by
different commands.
The patch state may be changed with the commands:
ENTERED ACTIVATED UPDATED
PART. ACT
------------------------------------------------------
+ - - ENTR CNPATCH
+ + - ACT CNPATCH
+ + - UPD CNPATCH
+ + - DACT CNPATCH
+ + + CAN CNPATCH
# # # DISP CNPATCH
+ : allowed
- : not allowed
# : not relevant
Each patch may be present in the system in one out of three states:
Entered: Patch data have been stored. The patch is not
yet effective in memory or on disk.
Activated: The patch is effective in memory but not on disk,
i.e. after CCNC reloading, the patch is no
longer effective.
Updated: The patch has been stored on disk, i.e. after CCNC
reloading, the patch is still effective.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CNPATCH : ID= ,ADDR= ,CNT= ,UNIT= [,INSERT=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],BYTE= ]] ]
] ]],WORD= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,LWORD=] - ]
] ]],ASCII=]] !' ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
A patch must be assigned a ID (up to 17 characters)
which is used to identify the patch in the following commands:
ACT CNPATCH,
DACT CNPATCH,
UPD CNPATCH,
CAN CNPATCH or
DISP CNPATCH
Several subpatches may be entered under a single identification.
The maximum number of possible parts under one ID is
dependent on the number of bytes patched. Up to 25 different
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CNPATCH-1 +
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
subpatches each having up to 16 bytes for replace patch or 506 bytes
for insert patch can be entered under one
ID. The addresses of the subpatches may refer to
different modules but not to different libraries.
A patch must be homogeneous. The addresses of all subpatches belonging
to a patch (ID) must refer to only one library. This means that
subpatches affecting SIMP code and subpatches affecting SIMP
semipermanent data may not be entered under one ID.
They are rejected to avoid library inconsistencies after a generation
change.
Nevertheless it is possible for a SIMP code patch to use symbolic
address references to SIMP semipermanent data in its new or old
content. Each subpatch entered separately is also assigned an
unique internal identification number (patch number) which is used
to identify this particular part of the patch. Patching is only
allowed for the CCNC units equipped with RAM (SIMP and CPI). The
CCNC units SIPA, SILTC and SILT are equipped with ROM and cannot
be patched.
Patches belonging to the same UNIT may be entered in continuation
mode or with separate ENTR CNPATCH commands. The patch tool
issues a message if an ID already exists.
If so, processing may be continued by entering a plus sign or
aborted by entering a minus sign.
The entire number of symbolic addresses or constants per (sub)patch
is checked against an upper limit. This upper limit is equal to 5.
The patch table allows the administration of 780 entries, i.e. up to
780 patches can be entered.
FORMAT of ADDR
ADDR ::= "begin address" && "end address"
or ADDR ::= "begin address" && "+length"
Syntax of <address>:
The following three input alternatives are possible:
Alternative 1 : logical address as hexadecimal string
selector offset
Input options:
<selector><offset>
<selector><offset>+<distance>
Alternative 2 : symbolic address as module address
input options:
<module name>
<module name>_<module version>
<module name>+<distance>
<module name>_<module version>+<distance>
Alternative 3 : symbolic address as an object address
Examples of input options:
<module name>:<object>
<module name>_<module version>:<object>
<module name>:<object>+<distance>
<module name>_<module version>:<object>+<distance>
ENTR CNPATCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<module name>:<object>+<module name>:<object>
<module name>:<object>+:<object>
Input values:
<selector> : 1-5 characters
1st character (0..9)
2nd to 5th characters (A..F,0..9)
Note:
Prefix selector with 0 if it begins
with a character (A..F)
<offset> : Exactly 4 characters (A..F,0..9)
<module name> : Exactly 8 characters
2nd to 8th characters (A..Z,0..9,...)
<module version>: 4 digits (0..9)
<object> : A symbolic entry or constant
1-8 characters
This parameter specifies the absolute or symbolic address where
the patch is to be entered.
following ways:
e.g.:
and offset 45BFH
e.g.:
selector A2C0H
offset 18BCH
as ADDR ="0A2C018BC"
distance
e.g.:
and offset 464BH
e.g.:
e.g.:
e.g.:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CNPATCH-3 +
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.:
e.g.:
ADDR="0038F600"&&"0038F7B0" or
e.g.:
short for
CNT CONTENT
FORMAT of CONTENT:
"new content"/"old content"
Up to 16 bytes of old content may be specified for both insert and
replace patches. If old content is specified, it is compared with
the actual memory content. The patch is rejected if the old
content does not match the content in a given memory location.
There is no minimum length of old content, but all old contents
entered are compared with the actual content. The actual content
is read from disk if no CCNC is active. As a result, patching
during installation recovery is possible before loading CCNCs. If
a CCNC is active the content is read from the CCNC with the
lowest number. The old content is stored in the patch table to
allow for automatic backout.
New and old content may be specified in hexadecimal form (format
BYTE, WORD, LWORD) or as a string of USASCII characters (ASCII
format).
If the content is entered in hexadecimal form, blanks
may be inserted between the bytes to improve readability.
Symbols may also be used in the content to specify logical
addresses or constants replaced with the real value by the patch
tool using the correct intel format. It is also possible for a
SIMP code patch to use in its new or old content symbolic address
references to the SIMP semipermanent data. Symbols may be used
only with hexadecimal format, since otherwise no distinction from
ASCII strings is possible.
* The following syntax may be used for symbolic addresses:
- Logical Address with selector and offset as
A(address)
- Only the offset as
O(address)
- Only the selector as
S(address)
In all cases "address" may be specified in the same form as
ENTR CNPATCH-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
described with the command DISP CNMEM.
e.g.:
CNT="A(MRTPRA4C)"
CNT="9A A(MRTPRA4C+23F) 12 34"
CNT="89 D4 O(OTBDMA4T:OT_LST)"
CNT="17 S(OTBDMA4T) 4567AF"
CNT="A(OTBDMA4T:MJQ+OTBDMA4T:MJB_EV)"
CNT="O(OTBDMA4T:MJQ+:MJB_EV+5)"
* Symbolic constants may be entered as follows:
- One byte values as
B(constant)
- Two byte values as
W(constant)
- Four byte values as
L(constant)
("D" is already used for a distance in other patch tools)
In all cases "constant" may be specified as module name:constant or
module name:constant+module name:constant.
e.g.:
CNT="B(OTBDMA4T:SG_UNA)" replaces one byte
CNT="W(OTBDMA4T:?DTSUNA)" replaces two bytes
CNT="L(OTBDMA4T:TM_STAT)" replaces four bytes
The version number may be specified with each module name.
If the version number is not identical with the version of
the module in the CCNC, the patch is rejected.
The patch tool cannot check the new content, since the tool does
not have a disassembler. The user is responsible for the
correctness of the entered code.
n
n/o
INSERT PATCH INSERTS RUCKSACK
If the patch content is to be "inserted" before the old content
(i.e. a patch rucksack is generated), the INSERT
parameter must be specified.
If parameter INSERT is not specified, the old memory
content is replaced with the new content in the
CNT parameter up to a length of 16 bytes.
If INSERT is specified, a rucksack is inserted at the
given location. This is achieved by writing the new content into a
special rucksack and then overwriting the code at the specified
address with a jump to the rucksack. The overwritten code is
appended to the rucksack, and at the end of the rucksack a return
jump to the given 2nd-address is performed. (The user need not care
about the location of the rucksack, the jump instructions and the
overwritten code.) However, the user must make sure that the
return jump is located at an instruction boundary. This is
achieved by specifying an address interval in the address
parameter. The complete code of this interval is copied after the
new code into the rucksack, and the return jump is located at the
first byte after the copied interval. The interval for the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CNPATCH-5 +
ENTR CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
jump instruction must have at least 5 bytes and may have a maximum
of 40 bytes.
It is possible to enter rucksacks which are longer than one MMI
input line, by using the continuation mode. If continuation mode is
used the second (and third, fourth...) input line must use
the same ID and interval as the first one, and must
also be an insert patch. The rucksack specified in the second (and
third, fourth...) input line appended to the rucksack in the first
line, and the old contents and the return jump is automatically
appended after the last new content. The length of one rucksack is
restricted to 506 bytes.
The entered rucksack is secured immediately in the CCNC load
library on disk.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
BYTE OUTPUT IN BYTE
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in bytes. If none
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
WORD OUTPUT IN WORD
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
This parameter specifies whether the output should be in ASCII
code.
This parameter also affects the interpretation of parameter CNT.
If ASCII is specified, the content is interpreted as ASCII,
otherwise the content has the meanings described in the CNT
parameter.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
ENTR CNPATCH-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
UPD CNPATCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CCNCPATCH
This command updates all CCNC patches specified by the ID.
These patches will be displayed.
This command updates patches on disk. To ensure that the library
on disk and the CCNC memories have consistent contents, the new
content is incorporated into the CCNC memories before the update
on disk is started, i.e. updating a patch on disk always implies
patch activation (see command ACT CNPATCH).
Before a patch is updated, it should have been tested thoroughly
because an updated patch can only be removed with CAN CNPATCH.
Caution:
Do not update transient data because they are not stored on disk.
Patch transient data in the CCNCs with ACT CNPATCH.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] UPD CNPATCH : ID= ,UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 UPD CNPATCH-1 -
CAN CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE
This command cancels one country code from country code table.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CNTRYCOD : CC= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CNTRYCOD-1 -
DISP CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE
This command displays:
- the country code,
- the country name,
- whether or not the country code is belonging
to this exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CNTRYCOD ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CNTRYCOD-1 -
ENTR CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COUNTRY CODE
This command enters the country code data.
It determines:
- the country code,
- the name of the dependend country,
- whether the entered country code is the country code
belonging to this exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CNTRYCOD : CC= ,CNTRY= [,OWNCC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code.
Notes:
- Up to 1000 country codes can be set up in an exchange.
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the country name.
OWNCC OWN COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies whether or not the entered country code
is the country code belonging to this exchange.
YES OWN COUNTRY CODE
NO NOT OWN COUNTRY CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CNTRYCOD-1 -
DISP CONFL
CONFDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command displays the conference data for
large conferences.
<job number>.
1. DISP CONFL - CONFDATA CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
2. DISP CONFL - MAXDATA MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
1. Input format
CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
This input format displays the conference IDs,
and the port specific data for large conferences.
-
] ]
] DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ,LTG= [,COU=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
CONFLST CONFERENCE ID LIST
LTG LINE TRUNC GROUP
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CONFL-1 +
DISP CONFL
MAXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
This input format is used to display all existing values
of the max. no. of conferees for a large conference,
originated by an analog/ISDN-subscriber or by an
OSS-operator.
-
] ]
] DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
MAXNUM MAXIMAL NUMBERS
E N D
DISP CONFL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CONFL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command modifies the max. no.
of conferees in a large conference.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CONFL : <MAXSUB= ,MAXOSS= ,DEFSUB=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MAXSUB MAX. NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the max. no. of conference
subscribers for a large conference originated by an
analog or ISDN-subscriber.
MAXOSS MAX. NO. OF OSS CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the max. no. of conference
subscribers for a large conference originated by an
OSS-operator.
DEFSUB DEFAULT NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the default value of the max.
no. of conferees for a large conference originated by
an ISDN-subscriber, in case of no value is given for
this no. by the subscriber.
Notes :
- The value of this parameter should not exceed
the value of MAXSUB-parameter.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CONFL-1 -
CAN CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONFERENCE
This command cancels the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference
unit (CONFERENCE UNIT).
Prerequisites :
- The conference unit must be in safeguarding status planned.
- None of the CONFERENCE UNIT conference circuits
is allocated to a telephone meeting group.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CONFRNC-1 -
CR CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CONFERENCE
This command creates the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference unit
(CONFERENCE UNIT) for a specified service feature application.
Prerequisites :
- The LTU must have previously been created with the appropriate type for
conference units.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ,COUTYP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature large conference.
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature telephone meeting.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CONFRNC-1 -
DISP CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONFERENCE
This command displays the application of one or all CONFERENCE UNITs
within a specified range (interval) of LTGs.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CONFRNC : LTG= [,COU=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CONFRNC-1 -
DISP CONN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS
This command displays the port address, processor number, speech
channel, and, if possible, the directory number or the trunk group
number and line number of ports seized by a call in progress.
The display is a snapshot of the situation at the time of the command.
The scope of data displayed can be specified by equipment number,
directory number or trunk group.
If there are several local networks a subscriber in a specific
local network can be specified.
Notes:
- The command only displays complete data for connections which are
occupying two channel registers.
Therefore, the output mask displays either NO MORE DATA or a
series of stars (*) in the SIDE column for connections to recorded
announcements, for incomplete connections or for SULIM connections.
Recorded announcements can be displayed by the command
DISP LISTTOAN.
<job number>.
1. DISP CONN - DN DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER
2. DISP CONN - DNPBX DN FOR ANY PBX LINE
3. DISP CONN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. DISP CONN - TGNO TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK
1. Input format
DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER
-
] ]
] DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CONN-1 +
DISP CONN
DNPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN FOR ANY PBX LINE
-
] ]
] DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines, referring to the
operation mode of these lines.
ABW - HUNT GROUP: ANALOG BOTHWAY
]AIC ] HUNT GROUP: ANALOG INCOMING
]AOG ] HUNT GROUP: ANALOG OUTGOING
]IBW ] HUNT GROUP: ISDN BOTHWAY
]IIC ] HUNT GROUP: ISDN INCOMING
]IOG ] HUNT GROUP: ISDN OUTGOING
~MBW - HUNT GROUP: MIXED BOTHWAY
DISP CONN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CONN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
-
] ]
] DISP CONN : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- The following port qualifications are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific port
EQN = a-b-X all ports of an LTG
EQN = a-b-c all ports of an LTU
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific port in each LTU
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
a-b-c[-d]
For LTG port: a TSG number in the range 0...7
(in steps of 10)
b: LTG / SHELF=
For LTG port: an LTG number in the range 1...63
For V5IF port: 0
c: LTU / MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For LTG port: an LTU number in the range 0...7
For V51IF port: 0
unit values.
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For LTG port: a channel number in the range 0...31
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CONN-3 +
DISP CONN
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],LNO=]] ]
] DISP CONN : TGNO= ]-,CIC=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7 lines.
Prerequisites:
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
For DIU 30 the input 0...511 is possible.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
DISP CONN-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REL CONN
DNPATH1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CONNECTION
This command sends an appropriate message to the CP call
processing programs for connections to ordinary subscribers and
to the relevant LTGs for connections to ISDN PA.
the exchange!
1. REL CONN - DNPATH1 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. REL CONN - DNPATH2 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
3. REL CONN - EQNPATH RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. REL CONN - LTGPATH RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP
5. REL CONN - TGNOPA RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if there is only
one OPMODE for each LNO.
-
] ]
] REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a trunk in a trunk group
or a line of an analog or ISDN PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REL CONN-1 +
REL CONN
DNPATH2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if there are
several OPMODE for each LNO.
-
] ]
] REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
LNO LINE NUMBER
The operating mode must be specified if the PBX is created with two or
more operating modes.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
DEF DEFAULT VALUE (NOT INPUT)
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
REL CONN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REL CONN
EQNPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
-
] ]
] REL CONN : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
a: TIME STAGE GROUP / DIGITAL LINE UNIT/V5 INTERFACE=
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP / SHELF NUMBER=
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT / MODULE NUMBE=
d: CHANNEL NUMBER / CIRCUIT NUMBER/V5IF PORT NUMBER=
Corresponds to <PORT no>
Inputting X releases a DIU primary rate access.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REL CONN-3 +
REL CONN
LTGPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP
-
] ]
] REL CONN : LTG= ,LCPOS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
When LTG and LCPOS are entered, a check is made as
to whether the corresponding connection has been set up
and the specified connection group is type A. Tasks
executed by the call processing programs cannot be
monitored.
a-b
a: TIME STAGE GROUP=
LCPOS LINE CIRCUIT POSITION
The line circuit position number must be entered in connection with the
LTG number.
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
Inputting X releases all circuits on a module.
REL CONN-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REL CONN
TGNOPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],CIC=] ]
] REL CONN : TGNO= -,LNO= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of a trunk group or a
recorded announcement group. It must be input in connection with LNO
or CIC.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks.
CIC can only be input in conjunction with TGNO.
a-b
LNO LINE NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REL CONN-5 -
CONF COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command configures a conference unit to one of the states
PLA, MBL, ACT or CBL.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF COU : LTG= ,COU= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
The following state transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL --> ACT
MBL <-- ACT (when the LTG is not active)
ACT <-> CBL
UNA --> ACT, MBL, CBL
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF COU-1 -
DIAG COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command starts diagnosis of a conference unit in an LTG.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated COU must be in the
operating status MBL.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG COU : LTG= ,COU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG COU-1 -
STAT COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT
This command displays the operating status of
- one COU in a certain LTG
- one COU in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular LTG
- all COUs in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular operating status in a particular
LTG
- all COUs in a particular operating status in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT COU : LTG= [,COU=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT COU-1 -
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR
This command initiates recording of CP traffic data (total load and
callprocessing load).
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- Only one measurement job can be started.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC CP : [INTTIM=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
INTTIM INTEGRATION TIME
This parameter specifies the time over which the load values are
to be averaged (integrated).
If output is to the OMT, it is not permissible to enter SEC4.
Default: MIN3
SEC4 4 SECONDS
SEC36 36 SECONDS
MIN1 1 MINUTE
MIN3 3 MINUTES
MIN5 5 MINUTES
MIN15 15 MINUTES
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CP-1 +
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
REC CP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CP-3 +
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC CP-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS
This command activates a dump condition with specification of CP core storage
address range. The CP dump conditions are activated upon command entry.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]RADDR=] ]
] ACT CPDMPC : -AADDR= [,SWSG=] [,UNIT=] [,MODULE=] [,COUNT=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,LEVEL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
RADDR RELATIVE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
a-b
a: MODULE NAME=
This information unit allows only alphanumeric characters.
b: OFFSET=
0...7FFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
AADDR ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
SWSG SWSG IDENTIFICATION
For a SWSG number less than 128
a module name must be specified.
UNIT CP PROCESSOR UNIT
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAPM MASTER BASE PROCESSOR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CPDMPC-1 +
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPS SPARE BASE PROCESSOR
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
MODULE MODULE NAME
COUNT TERMINATION COUNT
Default: 1
LEVEL RECOVERY LEVEL
NSTART3 NEWSTART WITH CODE LOAD
NSTART2 NEWSTART WITH SEMIDATA LOAD
NSTART1 NEWSTART OF ALL PROCESSES
SASDATS SAVING SW DATA WITH STATISTICS
SASDAT SAVING SW DATA W/O STATISTICS
NSTART0 NEWSTART NON CALLPROS. GROUP
The only non-call-processing processes
are restarted.
E N D
ACT CPDMPC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command deactivates conditions set in the dump condition list.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CPDMPC : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the deactivation conditions.
Note:
- Up to 10 information units can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CPDMPC-1 -
DISP CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command displays the conditional CP dump addresses and conditions
as well as their present state.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CPDMPC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CPDMPC-1 -
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of CP
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped,
or, in case of a dump of memory, chained lists of data.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]PLF= ] ]
] DMP CPIMDMP : -UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,CHOFFS=] [,CHNO=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform.
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the CP loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CPIMDMP-1 +
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
In case of dumping chained elements (a linked list), only
a start address has to be specified, the length of each
chained element has to be entered via parameter LENGTH.
Following inputs are possible:
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
- Indirect dump can be specified by a begin address: It contains
a pointer which indicates the real start address preceded by
the letters "IN" and a single quote:
DMP CPIMDMP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.: ADDR="INCAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C+H8"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
LENGTH LENGTH OF CHAINED ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
address is entered.
CHOFFS OFFSET OF POINTER TO NEXT ELE.
This parameter specifies the offset of the link pointer
to the next element within the chained (linked) list to
be dumped.
The memory location of this pointer is the begin address
of the current chained element plus the offset defined by
CHOFFS.
Notes:
- a dump of a linked list is specified by the corresponding
parameters LENGTH, CHOFFS, and CHNO.
- chained elements can only be dumped from CP memory and not
from system disk.
- all pointers of the chained list must have the same
offset within their corresponding chained elements.
CHNO NUMBER OF CHAINED ELEMENTS
This parameter specifies the number of chained elements to be
dumped. If the current linked list contains less elements than
the value specified, only the current number of chained elements
will be dumped.
Default: 50
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
SYMBOL SYMBOLIC OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CPIMDMP-3 -
DMP CPMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CP MEMORY
This command safeguards CP memory areas, specified as address ranges, to the
SESYMP file.
The command executes internally the following actions:
- Entry of a dump condition for a special software error.
- Creation of a software error.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]RADDR=] ]
] DMP CPMEM : -AADDR= [,UNIT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
RADDR RELATIVE ADDRESS
This parameter indicates the selected address areas relative
to the link module name.
Note:
- Up to 5 address areas can be linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NAME=
This information unit allows only alphanumeric characters.
.
b: OFFSET=
0...7FFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
AADDR ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
This parameter indicates the selected address areas absolutely.
Note:
- Up to 5 address areas can be linked with &.
UNIT CP PROCESSOR UNIT
BAPM MASTER BASE PROCESSOR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CPMEM-1 +
DMP CPMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPS SPARE BASE PROCESSOR
E N D
DMP CPMEM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in
parallel on all respective platforms in operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted the library specified via
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CPPRPCH-1 +
ACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter ID, is taken.
E N D
ACT CPPRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CPPRPCH-1 -
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CPPRPCH-1 +
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
DACT CPPRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ID= ] ]
] DISP CPPRPCH : -ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CPPRPCH-1 +
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP CPPRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR CPPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using paramter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches be-
longing to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR CPPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR CPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],INSRADDR=] ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR CPPRPCH : ID= -,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= ]
] ],INSVREF= ] ]
] ],SUBPCHNO=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,OLDCNT=]] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH-1 +
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The old instruction (6 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
ENTR CPPRPCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A sub-
patch of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more
than one part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent
Replace Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g. typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be re-
presented by parameter OLDCNT.
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH-3 +
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
ENTR CPPRPCH-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
UPD CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] UPD CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 UPD CPPRPCH-1 -
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE POINT
This command cancels the specified code point. Call attempts to the canceled
code point will be diverted to the specified intercept code.
Prerequisites :
- Any code blocking (CR CBPT), trunk reservation (ENTR TRSVCRIT),
destination (REC DEST) or code measurement (ENTR NTMINFO) that is
existing for the code point, or part of the code point to be canceled,
should be canceled first, because no checks are done.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the
destination area of the canceled code point is output.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CPT : CODE= [,INCEPT=] [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],ANNDIG=]] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] ]-,TXTNO= ] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
canceled. If the code point was created with special codes then these
have to be entered to define the code point uniquely.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter determines the intercept code to which call attempts
will be diverted. If the intercept UNOBDE0 is entered, the code
point will be deleted completely. If no value is entered, the value
UNOBDE0 is used by default.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
UNOBDE0 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 00
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b must be specified.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CPT-1 +
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
This parameter determines the number of the reserve
user announcement intercept.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
EWSD-versions.
CAN CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
EWSD-versions.
ANNDIG INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CPT-3 -
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE POINT
This command creates a code point, i.e. a destination is defined for the
specified digit combination. All digit combinations that are not created
as code points, test points or as subscriber controlled input access codes
are diverted to the UNOBDE0 intercept code.
The type of destination and the destination itself are specified by the
the parameters DEST, INCEPT and TRATYP.
Using the special code ORIG1 the following must be considered:
- Creating a code point with ORIG1=DEF has the same effect for call
processing as entering up to 3840 code points with ORIG1=0 through to
ORIG1=3839. So a code point with ORIG1=DEF stands for all code points
(with the same CODE) which are not explicitly created with a specific
ORIG1-value.
Example: CODE=12345, split by origination as follows:
For the origination value 10 the digit translation shall lead to
destination A, for value 200 to destination B, for all other values
to destination C.
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=10, DEST=A;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=200, DEST=B;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=DEF, DEST=C;
These commands may be entered in any sequence. Instead of 3840
commands now only 3 commands are needed.
Using ORIG1=DEF, the position of this special code should be at the end of
the code. All exceptional code points must be entered, specially those,
which shall lead to an intercept.
Prerequisites :
- Only one of the parameters DEST, TRATYP and INCEPT may be entered,
except for following TRATYP values:
NBARCPT,
SELCWROU,
MOBHAND,
MOBINTER,
MOBTERM,
MOBBOTH,
MOBPHA,
MOBPHB.
For these values the additional parameter DEST must be entered.
- The parameter LAC is only allowed if the DN-attribute (see ENTR DNATT) is
multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number block
(i.e. TRATYP=CPTDN).
- Before entering code points beginning with a carrier access code,
the carrier access code must be defined first (see CR CAC).
These code points may only lead to a destination or an intercept.
1. CR CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
2. CR CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
3. CR CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
If the code point to the specified destination area should be non barrable
NBARCPT must be entered for the parameter TRATYP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CPT-1 +
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Additional prerequisites :
- The destination area must already exist in the destination area table
(see CR DEST).
-
] ]
] CR CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TRATYP=] [,SYMCON=] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
The parameter CODE determines the digits for which the code point
is created. In addition to the selected digits, special codes can also
be entered in order to determine the destination.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at least
one route or be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Input is only permitted if the directory number attribute of the
exchange is multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number
block. The use of this parameter may affect the value of the parameter
MINMAX (see CR DEST). The operator has to take care for a
correct value of the parameter MINMAX.
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
b: POSITION OF LOCAL AREA CODE=
This unit specifies the position of the local area code
in the digit combination.
entered.
a[-b]
CR CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the position of the origin code
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
] ] Multy party line (No.7 category = 225)
]CAT12 ] CATEGORY 12
] ] Ani equipment trouble (No.7 category = 229)
] ] Very important person (No.7 category = 226)
] ] Charge information required (No.7 category = 227)
- ISD bared subscriber (No.7 category = 228)
]COINB ] COIN BOX
]DATAINAT] DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
]DATRANS ] DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
]OPOS ] OPERATORS POSITION
]OPOSINAT] OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
]SUBINAT ] ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
]SUBORD ] ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
]SUBPINAT] PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
]SUBPRIOR] PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ ' TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
This unit specifies the position of the category in the digit
combination.
a[-b]
This unit specifies the position of the language digit
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
MOBBOTH - MOBILE BOTH
]MOBHAND ] MOBILE HANDOVER
]MOBINTER] MOBILE INTERROGATION
]MOBPHA ] MOBILE PACKET A
]MOBPHB ] MOBILE PACKET B
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CPT-3 +
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-MOBTERM MOBILE TERMINATING
]NBARCPT ] NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
] ] This parameter value indicates that the code
] ] point cannot be barred, i.e. call requests from
] ] blocked subscribers are allowed for this code
] ] point. It can only be entered in addition to the
] ] parameter DEST.
SELCWROU' SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
Code point for selective call with routing.
The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
determined by the digit combination selected.
SYMCON SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
This parameter indicates whether the connection is symmetric or
not.
N - NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
-NO NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
]Y ] YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
YES ' YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
EVALDCAR EVALUATE DEFAULT CARRIER
This parameter indicates that for this code point the default carrier
has to be evaluated, if no carrier access code was dialed.
It can only be entered in addition to the parameters DEST or
INCEPT OR TRATYP=CPTDN.
N - NO EVAL. OF DEFAULT CARRIER
-NO NO EVAL. OF DEFAULT CARRIER
]Y ] YES EVAL. OF DEFAULT CARRIER
YES ' YES EVAL. OF DEFAULT CARRIER
CR CPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The call requests for the specified code are diverted to the intercept code.
-
] ]
] CR CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],ANNDIG=]] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] ]-,TXTNO= ] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected by the code point.
a[-b]
CHCPTIND- CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
]ILLDEST ] ILLEGAL DESTINATION
]RESANN ] RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
] ] Unit b must be specified.
]UNALLROU] UNALLOCATED ROUTE
]UNOBDE1 ] UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
]UNOBDE10] UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
-UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE9 ' UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CPT-5 +
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
entered.
a[-b]
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
]COINB ] COIN BOX
addressed.
combination.
CR CPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CPT-7 +
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
These code points must be entered first.
- If the code point refers to a directory number block, this must exist.
(see CR DN).
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this
service trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).
-
] ]
] CR CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] [,PROVNAM=] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST- CLOCK TEST
]CPTDN ] CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
] ] Code point to a directory number.
]IACBPROC] INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
]IN ] INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
] ] Code point for intelligent network service.
] ] Units b and c must be specified.
-MOBPROV MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
] ] Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
]PHONMEET] PHONE MEETING
]RADIOSUB] RADIO SUBSCRIBER
]SELCWORO] SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
] ] Code point for selective call without routing.
] ] The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
] ] digit combination selected.
TOLLFRNO' TOLL FREE NUMBER
Code point for tollfree service. Unit b must be
specified.
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Possible input values:
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
Length of the IN subscriber number.
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
CR CPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Length of the call back service directory number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
entered.
a[-b]
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
]COINB ] COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CPT-9 +
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
addressed.
combination.
a[-b]
PROVNAM SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the service provider. It may
only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
E N D
CR CPT-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE POINT
This command displays the data related to the specified code point(s).
The displayed data may be restricted to certain code points by specifying
parameter CODE, but only if the destination is not restricted.
Examples: DISP CPT: DEST=X,CODE=X; (no restrictions)
DISP CPT: DEST=X,CODE=12; (code restricted)
DISP CPT: DEST=MUNICH; (destination restricted)
DISP CPT: PROVNAM=ABCDEF; (provider name restricted)
After successful execution of the command, the command text is repeated
and all data is output within a table.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]DEST= ] ]
] ]INCEPT= ] ]
] DISP CPT : -TRATYP= [,CODE=] ; ]
] ]PROVNAM=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area.
If the parameter CODE is entered then DEST=X must be entered.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code.
If the parameter CODE is entered then INCEPT=X must be entered.
If X is entered, all intercept codes will be displayed.
a[-b]
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
X ALL VALUES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CPT-1 +
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter determines the number of the reserve user
announcement intercept. If this parameter is not entered
all reserve user announcement intercepts are output.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the traffic type.
If the parameter CODE is entered then TRATYP=X must be entered.
If X is entered, all traffic types will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
X ALL VALUES
NBARCPT NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
TOLLFRNO TOLL FREE NUMBER
SELCWROU SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
SELCWORO SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
MOBBOTH MOBILE BOTH
RADIOSUB RADIO SUBSCRIBER
MOBPROV MOBILE PROVIDER
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
PHONMEET PHONE MEETING
CPTDN CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
MOBINTER MOBILE INTERROGATION
MOBTERM MOBILE TERMINATING
MOBHAND MOBILE HANDOVER
IN INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
MOBPHA MOBILE PACKET A
MOBPHB MOBILE PACKET B
IACBPROC INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Unit a = PHONMEET : 0-99
Phone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN : 0-15
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN : Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service as created with CR INTRIG.
PROVNAM PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the provider name.
This parameter restricts the code points to be displayed. Only code
points that begin with the entered digits will be displayed.
DISP CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CPT-3 -
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE CODE POINT
This command merges parallel code points. The existing code points and their
destinations are cancelled and a new code point is created with the specified
destination (destination area, intercept code).
Prerequisites:
- At least two code points to be merged must refer to a destination or
intercept code other than UNOBDE0.
- When merging by a digit, the entered code must be one digit shorter than
the code points to be merged.
- When merging by a special code, the entire code must be entered.
- Before using this command, the operator has to verify that no traffic
measurement job is running for the digit combination to be merged.
An indication of whether other code points or test points still use the
destination areas of the merged code points is output.
1. MERGE CPT - DEST MERGE CPT WITH DEST
2. MERGE CPT - INCEPT MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the merging of code points with DEST.
-
] ]
] MERGE CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
merged.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code of the code
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE CPT-1 +
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
points to be merged. only decimal numbers, range 0..3839,
and the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the code
points to be merged.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
This parameter specifies the language digit of the code
MERGE CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes merging of code points with INCEPT.
-
] ]
] MERGE CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
merged.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code of the code
points to be merged. only decimal numbers, range 0..3839,
and the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the code
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE CPT-3 +
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
This parameter specifies the language digit of the code
E N D
MERGE CPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE POINT
This command modifies the destination for the specified code point.
If the code point is created for a particular local network, the local area code
(LAC) must be specified.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the old
destination area of the modified code point is output.
1. MOD CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
2. MOD CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
3. MOD CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
The old destination area is modified to another destination area.
- The code point to the old destination area specified by the digit
combination must exist.
- The new destination area must already exist in the destination
area table (see CR DEST).
-
] ]
] MOD CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SYMCON=] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
modified. Special codes have to be entered to define the code point
uniquely.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination area selected by the
digit combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or must be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the destination
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CPT-1 +
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
]COINB ] COIN BOX
This unit specifies the category for which the destination
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIM. Z-DIGIT=
EWSD-versions.
MOD CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SYMCON SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
This parameter indicates whether the connection is symmetric or
not.
N - NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
-NO NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
]Y ] YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
YES ' YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
It can only be entered in addition to the parameter DEST or
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CPT-3 +
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The old intercept value is changed to another intercept value.
-
] ]
] MOD CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],ANNDIG=]] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] ]-,TXTNO= ] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
uniquely.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the new intercept code selected by the
code point.
a[-b]
CHCPTIND- CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
]ILLDEST ] ILLEGAL DESTINATION
]RESANN ] RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
]UNALLROU] UNALLOCATED ROUTE
-UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE9 ' UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
MOD CPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
]COINB ] COIN BOX
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CPT-5 +
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EWSD-versions.
This parameter may only be entered
if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter specifies the number of the text
to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT =
RESANN-X
MOD CPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
The old traffic type is modified to a new traffic type, or the data for
a specific traffic type is modified.
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this service
trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).
-
] ]
] MOD CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ZDIG=] [,PROVNAM=] [,NPROVNAM=] [,EVALDCAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
uniquely.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST- CLOCK TEST
]CPTDN ] CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
] ] Code point to a directory number.
]IACBPROC] INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
]IN ] INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
] ] Code point for intelligent network service.
] ] Units b and c must be specified.
]MOBBOTH ] MOBILE BOTH
]MOBHAND ] MOBILE HANDOVER
]MOBINTER] MOBILE INTERROGATION
]MOBPHA ] MOBILE PACKET A
]MOBPHB ] MOBILE PACKET B
]MOBPROV ] MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
- Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
]MOBTERM ] MOBILE TERMINATING
]NBARCPT ] NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
] ] This parameter value indicates that the code
] ] point cannot be barred, i.e. call requests from
] ] blocked subscribers are allowed for this code
] ] point. It can only be entered in addition to the
] ] parameter DEST.
]PHONMEET] PHONE MEETING
]RADIOSUB] RADIO SUBSCRIBER
]SELCWORO] SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
] ] Code point for selective call without routing.
] ] The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
] ] digit combination selected.
SELCWROU' SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
Code point for selective call with routing.
The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
determined by the digit combination selected.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CPT-7 +
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
Length of the call back service directory number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 - CATEGORY 11
]COINB ] COIN BOX
MOD CPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
PROVNAM OLD SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the old name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
NPROVNAM NEW SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the new name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CPT-9 -
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT CODE POINT
1. SPLIT CPT - DEST SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
2. SPLIT CPT - INCEPT SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the splitting of code points with DEST.
-
] ]
] SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,DEST= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
split.
DEST DESTINATION
SPLITBY DETERMINE KIND OF SPLIT
This parameter specifies the kind of special code for which the split
shall be done.
DIGIT SPLIT BY DIGIT
MFCAT SPLIT BY BRANCHING CATEGORY
ORIG1 SPLIT BY ORIG1
ROUTYP SPLIT BY ROUTE TYPE
ZDIG SPLIT BY LANGUAGE DIGIT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SPLIT CPT-1 +
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
This parameter specifies the language digit of the new code
intercept code.
SPLIT CPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes splitting of code points with INCEPT.
-
] ]
] SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
split.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
SPLITBY DETERMINE KIND OF SPLIT
This parameter specifies the kind of special code for which the split
shall be done.
DIGIT SPLIT BY DIGIT
MFCAT SPLIT BY BRANCHING CATEGORY
ORIG1 SPLIT BY ORIG1
ROUTYP SPLIT BY ROUTE TYPE
ZDIG SPLIT BY LANGUAGE DIGIT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SPLIT CPT-3 +
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the new code
intercept code.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
This parameter specifies the language digit of the new code
intercept code.
E N D
SPLIT CPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
LIB LIBRARY NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CPTRPCH-1 +
ACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ACT CPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
LIB LIBRARY NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CPTRPCH-1 +
CAN CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CAN CPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
LIB LIBRARY NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CPTRPCH-1 +
DACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
DACT CPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],ID= ] ]
] DISP CPTRPCH : PLF= -,ADDR= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CPTRPCH-1 +
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolically.
structures:
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP CPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR CPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR CPTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= -,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CPTRPCH-1 +
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
parameter ID.
ENTR CPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
ENTR CPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command assigns data to one carrier of a quota group. These data may
be either trunk group sizes or quotas and possibly a list of trunk groups
to be measured. The type of required data depends on the quota procedure,
which is valid for the specified carrier quota group.
The carrier quota group is activated as soon as correct quota data are
assigned to all carriers of that group. The craft will be notified of the
activation with the display of all quota data of that carrier quota group.
For this purpose the same output mask is used as for the command
DISP CQGRP, but no trunk groups to be measured will be displayed in this
case regardless of their existence.
The data which were entered with this command may be displayed with
DISP CQGRP. These data may be cancelled either completely with the
command CAN CQGRP or selectively with MOD CQDAT.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier quota group and the carrier are already created.
1. ENTR CQDAT - MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
2. ENTR CQDAT - STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
3. ENTR CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
This input format is entered for carrier data belonging to a quota group
with quota procedure MEASIC.
For the quota procedure MEASIC it is necessary to provide a quota to
start with as well as a list of trunk groups to be measured for each
carrier.
Notes:
- The quotas to start with are valid until the first actualization took
place, depending on the measured incoming call duration time. The
actually valid quotas may be displayed with the command DISP CQGRP.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100 %.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is already part of another list
of trunk groups to be measured, neither for the same quota group nor for
another.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,TGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
CARR CARRIER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CQDAT-1 +
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
This parameter specifies the quota of outgoing calls to
be assigned to the specified carrier after activation
of the carrier selection destination. If 0 is entered,
the carrier is deactivated until the operator enters a
different value.
This parameter specifies the names of the trunk groups for which
the times for incoming calls are to be summed up.
Up to 48 parameter values can be specified.
ENTR CQDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CQDAT
STAQUO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STATIC QUOTAS
with quota procedure STAQUO.
For the quota procedure STAQUO it is necessary to specify a percentage
quota for each carrier of that quota group.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100%.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
different value.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CQDAT-3 +
ENTR CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
with quota procedure TGSIZE.
The quota procedure TGSIZE requires the specification of trunk group
sizes.
Those sizes result in calculated percentages for each carrier of the quota
group. The result of this calculation may be displayed with the command
DISP CQGRP.
The trunk group sizes to be entered in this command refer to the sum of
numbers of trunks in all outgoing trunk groups in the own switch, which are
operated by that carrier. No internal check is executed if the crafts
input matches the trunk group data in the call processing data base.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
different value.
E N D
ENTR CQDAT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command modifies quota data for one or more carriers of a quota group.
Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
Depending on the actual status of the data the following actions are
possible:
- add trunk groups to an existing list,
- modify name of a carrier,
- cancel trunk groups from an existing list,
- modify the quota value of a single or all carriers,
- modify the trunk group size of a single or all carriers,
- modify the quota procedure.
Prerequisites:
- The value of at least one parameter is input to be changed.
- All entered objects exist already.
1. MOD CQDAT - ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
2. MOD CQDAT - CARR CARRIER
3. MOD CQDAT - CTGNO CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
4. MOD CQDAT - QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
5. MOD CQDAT - QUOTAIND QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
6. MOD CQDAT - QUOTALL QUOTA ALL CARR
7. MOD CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to add trunk groups to an already existing
list of incoming/bothway trunk groups to be measured. Each trunk group
specified in this input format occupies an element in a pool (group
index list). This pool is not expandable and comprises 1000 elements.
Additional prerequisites:
- A list of trunk groups to be measured already exists for the entered
carrier (refer to ENTR CQDAT for creation of such a list).
- The number of already entered trunk groups and of those being added does
not exceed 48.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is member of another list,
neither in the same nor in another quota group.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- There are enough free elements available in the group index list.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,ATGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQDAT-1 +
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
MOD CQDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CQDAT
CARR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CARRIER
This input format is entered to modify the name of a carrier.
- The new name has not been assigned to any carrier within the same carrier
quota group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,NCARR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
NCARR NEW CARRIER NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQDAT-3 +
MOD CQDAT
CTGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to remove trunk group numbers from the list of
trunk groups to be measured.
It is possible to remove trunk group numbers from a list of trunk groups to
be measured, and to cancel completely a list that was created provisio-
nally.
- At least one trunk group number is left in the list of trunk groups to be
measured if for the specified carrier quota group QUOPRO=MEASIC is
active .
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,CTGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
CTGNO CANCELLED TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
MOD CQDAT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
QUOTA PROCEDURE
This input is entered to modify the quota procedure for a carrier
quota group.
The existing lists of trunk groups to be measured are kept if the quota
procedure MEASIC was active before the execution of this command. A
similar status as for prepared lists is achieved. These lists may be
deleted if not needed any longer after the modification of the quota
procedure with this command using the parameter CTGNO (see above).
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier name of the group is entered, possibly with trunk group size
of 0 or a quota of 0 % . Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
- At least one trunk group to be measured is assigned to each carrier of
the group if MEASIC is entered as new quota procedure.
- The sum of quotas of all carriers equals exactly 100 %, if a new quota
procedure is entered which requires quota values (STAQUO or MEASIC).
If the execution of this command results in formerly deactivated carriers
being activated (i.e. instead of a quota of 0 % now a non-zero quota comes
into effect) then the following prerequisites need to be fulfilled for
successful command execution additionally to the prerequisites:
- All destinations for carrier selection which belong to this quota group
have a carrier destination assigned to the carrier being activated.
- Each of these carrier destinations has at least one route.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,QUOPRO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a[-b]
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the quota procedure used to distribute the
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQDAT-5 +
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
specified start quotas and later in the ratio
of the total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever
an incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds
is measured for all carriers of the carrier
quota group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
Arrangements with the corresponding exchanges must
be taken to ensure that this quota procedure is
only used at one end of the connection. Otherwise,
after a certain time, a stable quota distribution
would result whereby one carrier would be assigned
100% of the load and all other carriers would have
no load.
STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
The outgoing calls are distributed according to
the specified quotas.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed in the ratio of
the trunk group sizes entered.
MOD CQDAT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CQDAT
QUOTAIND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quota of a single carrier
belonging to one quota group.
- The carrier quota group is not active.
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers, including the value to be entered,
is not greater than 100%.
- Only one carrier is specified.
- Prior to command execution a value have been specified with
ENTR CQDAT.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQDAT-7 +
MOD CQDAT
QUOTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
QUOTA ALL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quotas of all carriers in a
group. Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier in the quota group is named, possibly with a new quota of 0%
(deactivation of the carrier).
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers is exactly 100% .
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
MOD CQDAT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
This input format is entered to modify trunk group sizes.
- It is only allowed to specify one carrier or all carriers of the carrier
quota group.
- The carrier quota group was created before with QUOPRO=TGSIZE.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQDAT-9 -
CAN CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command cancels the specified carrier quota group.
If lists of trunk groups to be measured exist for carriers of the quota
group to be cancelled, then those entries are deleted.
If all carriers of the group being deleted have more than 48 measured
trunk groups assigned in total, then either those lists have to be
cancelled first (MOD CQDAT, parameter CTGNO) or the carriers have to be
deleted individually (MOD CQGRP, parameter CCARR).
Prerequisites:
- No carrier selection destination refers to the quota group that is to be
cancelled.
- The trunk group lists of all carriers do not contain more than 48 trunk
groups.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CQGRP : CQGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CQGRP-1 -
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command creates a carrier quota group, which is a prerequisite for
routing with load sharing. The following data are assigned to the carrier
quota group.
- the name by which the carrier quota group is addressed
- the quota procedure used
- the names of the carriers belonging to the carrier quota group.
All destinations for carrier selection assigned to a quota group are
subject to joint quota assignment. Destinations for carrier selection must
be assigned to quota groups in such a way that each carrier involved can
serve all subscriber directory numbers or lines within the area represented
by the sum of all destination area groups.
Prerequisites:
- The quota group name does not yet exist.
- No carrier name occurs more than once in the quota group that is to be
created.
To enable a quota group to be activated, it is necessary to assign the
quota data for each carrier with the command ENTR CQDAT.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CQGRP : CQGRP= ,QUOPRO= ,CARR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group.
The name is user specifiable, it is not permissible to specify
a single X.
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed
in the ratio of the trunk group
sizes entered.
The outgoing calls are distributed
according to the specified quotas.
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
specified start quotas and later according to the
total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever an
incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds is
measured for all carriers of the carrier quota
group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
- Arrangements with the corresponding
exchanges must be taken to ensure that this
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CQGRP-1 +
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
quota procedure is only used at one end of the
connection. Otherwise, after a certain time, a
stable quota distribution would result whereby
one carrier would be assigned 100% of the load
and all other carriers would have no load.
CARR CARRIER NAME
E N D
CR CQGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command displays the data of all or selected carrier quota groups.
The display of all quota group data is achieved by input of CQGRP = X.
The amount of display may be reduced by entering additional parameters:
Only those quota groups out of all existing groups are displayed which have
the specified carrier name (CARR) or quota procedure (QUOPRO).
If several parameters are entered only those quota groups are displayed
which fulfill all conditions at the same time.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CQGRP : CQGRP= [,CARR=] [,QUOPRO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
call processing load to the carriers of the carrier group.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CQGRP-1 -
MOD CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command modifies data of a quota group. The name of the group may be
changed as well as the amount of assigned carriers.
It is required to modify each destination for carrier selection which is
assigned to the quota group in an identical manner, in order to maintain
consistent data (MOD DESTDAT).
Prerequisite:
- The value of at least one parameter is changed.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CQGRP : CQGRP= <,NCQGRP= ,CARR= ,CCARR=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group for which data
are to be modified.
NCQGRP NEW CARRIER QUOTA GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the new name for the
carrier quota group.
CARR ADDITIONAL CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be assigned
to the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
CCARR CANCELLED CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be deleted
from the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CQGRP-1 -
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER
With this command one or all codereceiver of a module can be
configured to one of the states MBL, ACT or PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LCPOS=] ]
] CONF CR : LTG= -,CRPOS= ,OST= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
the line trunk unit.
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are
affected.
CRPOS CODE RECEIVER POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
a signaling unit SU.
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-2 for LTGA and LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CR-1 +
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values
are affected.
This parameter specifies the destination operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
ACT <-> MBL
MBL <-> PLA
UNA --> ACT or MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
CONF CR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER
This command starts diagnosis for one or more code receivers on a
module.
Prerequisites:
- A diagnosis is only possible module by module.
- The code receiver to be diagnosed must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
- The LTG control unit must be ACTIVE or CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED.
- The code receiver must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],CRPOS=] ]
] DIAG CR : LTG= -,LCPOS= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
signaling unit.
This unit specifies the position of the CR module.
The following value ranges are permissible:
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
line trunk unit.
The mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange-
specific documentation.These documents must be kept current.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG CR-1 -
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER
This command displays the operating state(s) of
- a particular code receiver module in a particular LTG
- a particular code receiver module in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in all LTGs
1. STAT CR - CR CODE RECEIVER
2. STAT CR - OST OPERATIONAL STATUS
1. Input format
CODE RECEIVER
Input format for displaying the CR operating states.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],LCPOS=]] ]
] STAT CR : LTG= ]-,CRPOS=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT CR-1 +
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are affected.
STAT CR-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT CR
OST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPERATIONAL STATUS
Input format for determining code receivers in a particular operating
state.
Notes:
- If the parameter LINE TRUNK GROUP is omitted, all possible values are affected
-
] ]
] STAT CR : LTG= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
UNA UNAVAILABLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT CR-3 -
CAN CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command cancels a code receiver module in the signaling
unit of an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The code receiver module must be PLA.
- The ports of the code receiver must not be in service.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG.
a-b
This unit specifies the TSG number.
This unit specifies the LTG number.
CRMOD CODE RECEIVER MODULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module
to be cancelled.
For the signaling unit of LTG types LTGA and LTGB only the code
receiver modules 0, 1 or 2 may be specified. For the signaling unit
of LTG types and LTGD no code receiver modules may be specified.
Notes:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data cannot
be sent to the GP, it is possible to configure the associated
LTG to MBL. If it is configured from this state to
ACT, the LTG receives the data stored in the CP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CRMOD-1 -
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command creates a code receiver module in the signaling unit
of an LTG.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
The ports are assigned to the code receiver modules as follows:
LTG type LTGC:
CR module no.! 0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 !
-------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
Port no. ! 160 ! 161 ! 162 ! 163 ! 164 ! 165 ! 166 ! 167 !
! 168 ! 169 ! 170 ! 171 ! 172 ! 173 ! 174 ! 175 !
! 176 ! 177 ! 178 ! 179 ! 180 ! 181 ! 182 ! 183 !
! 184 ! 185 ! 186 ! 187 ! 188 ! 189 ! 190 ! 191 !
LTG type LTGD:
Port no.: ! CR module no.:
------------+----------------
256 - 259 ! 0
The configuration data for the four ports of a code receiver
module depend on the code receiver type.
Note:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data
cannot be sent to the GP, it is advisable to cancel the job
with the command CAN CRMOD and to recreate the code receiver
module. Alternatively, the associated LTG can be configured to
MBL. If the LTG is configured from this state to ACT, it
receives the data stored in the CP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CRMOD-1 +
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE CODE RECEIVER TYPE
This parameter specifies the code receiver module type.
CRPC CODE RECEIVER PUSHBUTTON CEPT
CRMR2 CODE RECEIVER MFC R2 SIGNALING
RMCTC CODE RECEIVER RMCTC
This module type may only be specified for
code receiver type 0.
CRMR1 CODE RECEIVER MFC R1 SIGNALING
CRMSC CODE RECEIVER MSC SIGNALING
E N D
CR CRMOD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command displays the code receiver module data for one, several or
all the LTGs in an exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CRMOD : LTG= [,CRMOD=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG. Depending on the value entered
the following options are possible:
1. <tsg> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified LTG are displayed.
Only in this case is it permissable to specify parameter
CRMOD.
2. <tsg> - <ltg> && <tsg> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified range of LTGs are displayed.
The first limit must be lower than the second limit.
3. <tsg> - X
The objects of all LTGs for the specified TSG are displayed.
4. X - X
The objects for all LTGs and TSGs are displayed.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
Default: All code receivers in the specified LTGs are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CRMOD-1 -
CAN CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command cancels a central service channel in the CP113.
Prerequisites:
- A connecting IOPSCDV or IOPSCDX must be PLA or MBL.
A connecting IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The operating channel itself must be PLA.
- The central service channel groups must be cancelled.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CSC : CSC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSC-1 -
CONF CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command configures a central service channel.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL is considered dangerous.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF CSC : CSC= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF CSC-1 -
CR CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command creates a central service channel.
The created central service channel is PLA after the command
is executed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified IOPSCDV or IOPSCDX must not be ACT.
- The specified IOPUNI may be ACT.
Notes:
- If the specified IOP is an IOPUNI the CSC parameters (baud rate,
address of channel, connection to IOP, interface) can be modified with
the MODIFY CSC command. The parameters have default values in
the IOPUNI.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CSC : IOP= ,CHAN= ,CSC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to
which the central service channel is to be connected.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
CHAN IOP CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the channel number at the input/output
processor. If the specified IOP is an IOPUNI the range of channel
numbers is restricted to 0..2.
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be
created.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSC-1 -
DISP CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command displays the environment of a central service channel as
there are the preceding IOP, channel number, baud rate, address of
channel, connection to IOP, interface and fault informations.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CSC : CSC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSC-1 -
MOD CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command modifies the device parameters of a central service
channel. The parameters have default values in the IOPUNI. The device
parameters can be displayed with the DISP CSC command.
Prerequisites:
- The specified central service channel must be MBL or PLA.
- The preceding IOP of the specified central service channel
must be an IOPUNI and it must be ACT.
If the central service channel to be modified is connected to
either IOPUNI-0 or IOPUNI-1, then both of those IOPs
must be ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CSC : CSC= <,BAUDRATE= ,ADDR= ,CONNECT= ,INTERF=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel.
BAUDRATE BAUDRATE
This parameter specifies the baud rate of the central service
channel.
B2400 2400 BAUD
B4800 4800 BAUD
B9600 9600 BAUD
B19200 19200 BAUD
B38400 38400 BAUD
B48000 48000 BAUD
B56000 56000 BAUD
B64000 64000 BAUD
ADDR ADDRESS OF CHANNEL
This parameter specifies the address of the central service
channel.
CONNECT CONNECTION TO IOP
This parameter specifies the kind of connection to the IOP.
DIRECT DIRECT CONNECTION
MODEM CONNECTION WITH MODEM
INTERF INTERFACE
This parameter specifies the interface.
V24 V24 INTERFACE
X21 X21 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSC-1 -
CAN CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command cancels a channel group. The relevant data are deleted from the
background memory. The channel group can only be cancelled if it is no
longer being used as a computer channel.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CSCGRP CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the channel group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSCGRP-1 -
CR CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command creates groups together two mutually redundant channels to a
partner DCP to form a channel group. The first channel entered is regarded
as the channel to be used. The relevant data are saved on a background
memory. No more than two channels may be assigned to a channel group; if
more are entered, an error message is issued. The links are entered must
already be created. In the case of CP103, the channels already exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ,CSC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the channel number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSCGRP-1 -
DISP CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command displays all information on all defined channel groups and
the associated channels.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSCGRP-1 -
MOD CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command modifies the assignment of channels to a channel group and the
group name. The first channel entered is regarded as the channel to be used.
The relevant data are saved on a background memory. The channels entered
must already be created. In the case of CP103, the channels already exist.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CSCGRP : CSCGRP= [,CSC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n/o
This parameter specifies the channel number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSCGRP-1 -
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CSC-TRACER
This command activates the trace function.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT CSCTRAC : TRACNO= ,CSC= [,MODE=] [,STPCRI=] [,BLKLEN=] ]
] ]
] [,BLKSUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TRACNO TRACER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the tracer number. The trace number
determines which trace memory is to be overwritten even if it
has not yet been read.
MODE MODE
This parameter specifies the recording mode.
ALL TRACING OF ALL DATA
The line traffic is to be logged.
TRANSPLV TRACING OF TRANSPORT LEVEL
Only blocks containing information are to be
logged (only applies to HDLC lines).
Default: ALL
STPCRI STOP CRITERIA
This parameter specifies a stop criterion which causes the trace
function to be switched off.
Note:
- Stop criteria 1-14 and 19-35 are detected by the IOP and
reported to the trace process.
0 stop criterion not switched on (prefilled)
1 SNRM command received
(Set Normal Response Mode)
2 UI command (message) received (sent)
(Unnumbered Information)
The UI command has not yet been implemented.
3 DISC command received
(DISConnect)
4 RR command with P=1 (message) received (sent)
(Receive Ready)
5 RNR command (message) received (sent)
(Receive Not Ready: e.g. no container available,
container too small).
6 REJ command (message) received (sent)
(REJect)
7 I frame received (sent)
(Information block)
8 UA message sent
(Unnumbered Acknowledge)
9 DM message sent
(Disconnected Mode)
10 FRMR message sent
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSCTRAC-1 +
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(FRaMe Rejected: non-implemented commands,
I-field too long, or wrong send/receive counter).
11 Line failure detected (spontaneously by IOP)
Line failure is detected in the IOP by timer expiry
or changeover to DM:
1) Timer expiry 1 : two successive RR (with P=1) not
detected in the NRM.
2) Frame end not detected.
12 Frame defect
(incorrect FCS (Frame Check Sequence))
13 Not expected frame
(incorrect counter status, non-implemented command)
14 Not equal to SNRM command in DM mode
-Stop criteria 15 - 18 are detected by the PIO:DEV and
reported to the trace process.
15 Line failure detected
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/01)
Parameter BLKSUP is ineffective here.
16 Line restoral
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/04)
17 Recovery has occurred
If the PIO:DEV reports RESET IOP or if a recovery
has occurred, an attempt is made to start the tracer again.
If the tracer cannot be started, (PIO-MSG1/2=H04/01,H04/02),
a trace end message is sent.
18 IOP was reset
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/0B)
parameter BLKSUP is ineffective here.
If the PIO:DEV reports RESET IOP or if a recovery
has occurred, an attempt is made to start the tracer again.
If the tracer cannot be started, (PIO-MSG1/2=H04/01,
H04/02) a trace end message is sent.
- Stop criteria 19-35 are detected by the IOP and reported to the
trace process.
19 RR command sent
20 RNR command sent
21 REJ command sent
22 REJ command received
23 I frame sent
24 I frame received
25 RR command or RNR command or I frame sent
26 RR command or RNR command or I frame received
27 RR command or RNR command or REJ command sent
28 RR command or RNR command or REJ command received
29 RNR command or REJ command or FRMR command sent
30 FCS faulty or SNRM or Line Fault received
(line mutilates frames)
31 NEF or not SNRM received in DM
(all non-permissible/non-implemented commands)
32 DM messge or UA message sent
33 SNRM command or Line Fault or DM command sent or
received
(CSC fails for unknown reasons
DCP, line, RESET IOP in disconnected mode)
34 Reserve (currently same as 33)
35 Reserve (currently same as 33)
Default: 0
BLKLEN BLOCK LENGTH
This parameter specifies how many bytes per block are to be
traced.
Default: 5200
ACT CSCTRAC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKSUP SUPPLEMENTARY BLOCKS
This parameter specifies how many entries are still to be made
to the trace memory after a stop criterion has arrived.
It is only advisable to specify this for a stop criterion
recognized by the IOP.
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSCTRAC-3 -
DACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CSC-TRACER
This command deactivates the trace function.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CSCTRAC : CSC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CSCTRAC-1 -
DISP CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CSC-TRACE COMMAND
This command displays the current trace states for all 4 tracers.
It checks whether or not the trace functions are set.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CSCTRAC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSCTRAC-1 -
DMP CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA
This command dumps data in the trace memory. The trace function is
stopped by this command. The last event stored is printed first.
If the command is entered several times, the trace memory can be
output to the end (oldest frame).
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP CSCTRAC : CSC= [,BLKCO=] [,BLKLEN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BLKCO BLOCK COUNT
This parameter specifies the number of data blocks
to be printed out.
Default: 9999
BLKLEN BLOCK LENGTH
This parameter specifies how many bytes per block are to be
printed out.
Default: 5200
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CSCTRAC-1 -
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command activates the CSF monitoring of the object given by
parameters. Status reports will be produced for the objects whenever
the triggering events, setup by parameters, occur.
Restrictions:
A maximum of 32 ports can be monitored simultaneously.
Prerequisites:
- There may be no other ACT CSF command running in the site and
- no other tracer may run in the same LTG.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with
DACT CSF.
1. ACT CSF - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. ACT CSF - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
3. ACT CSF - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],SELRCF= ]] ]
] ACT CSF : [LAC=] ,DN= ]-,DSELRCF=] [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] ]
] ]],SYMRCF= ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,TIME=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required if there
is more than one local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
SELRCF SELECT RCF
This parameter specifies a set of RCF (Reason for Call Failure)
values triggering CSF.
RCF 1-127 = CAUSE, according to ETSI Q.850.
Default 0&&255
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSF-1 +
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DSELRCF DESELECT RCF
values NOT triggering CSF.
All other values will trigger CSF.
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
This parameter specifies a symbolic name of a set of SELRCF or
DSELRCF values stored in a diskfile.
The SYMRCF name and SELRCF/DSELRCF values must be stored in the file
TC.CSF.SYMRCF by use of EDTS8 and have the following format:
Symbolic name:SELRCF/DSELRCF=rcf values;
Example:
MSGFAULT:SELRCF=95&&101&110&111;
NOT_MSGFAULT:DSELRCF=95&&101&110&111;
NOTE:
Before editing TC.CSF.SYMRCF use the MML command DACTFNS: FNS=TC;
After editing use MML command ACTFNS: FNS=TC;
SUCC SUCCESSFUL CALLS
This parameter specifies if status reports must be given when a
successful call is obtained.
N - NO TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
]NO ] NO TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
]Y ] TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
~YES - TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
Default: NO
COUNT MAX. NUMBER OF STATUS REPORTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of status reports
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
TIME MAX. ACTIVE TIME
This parameter specifies the maximum time for CSF to be active.
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
Default: 0
ACT CSF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or in
a trunk group.
- PBX group : 1..9999
- TGNO : 1..4095
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines refering to the
ABW - PBX GROUPS: ANALOG BOTHWAY
]AIC ] PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
]AOG ] PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
]IBW ] PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
]IIC ] PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
]IOG ] PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
~MBW - PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSF-3 +
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],SELRCF= ]] ]
] ACT CSF : EQN= ]-,DSELRCF=] [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] [,TIME=] ; ]
] ]],SYMRCF= ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number
a-b-c[-d]
a: NUMBER FOR TSG/DLU/V5IF=
- V5IF number : 6000..8999 for V5IF port
b: NUMBER FOR LTG/SHELF=
- V5IF : 0 for V5IF port
c: NUMBER FOR LTU/MODULE=
- 0 for V51-IF port
d: NUMBER FOR CHANNEL/CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT=
- Port : 0..31 for V51-IF port
- Port : 0..99 for V52-IF port
SELRCF SELECT RCF
Default 0&&255
ACT CSF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
Example:
NOTE:
Default: NO
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
Default: 0
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSF-5 +
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
ACT CSF-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
-
] ]
] - -- ]
] ],LNO=] ]],SELRCF= ]] ]
] ACT CSF : TGNO= -,CIC= ]-,DSELRCF=] [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] ]
] ] ] ]],SYMRCF= ]] ]
] ' ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,TIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or in
a trunk group.
- PBX group : 1..9999
- TGNO : 1..4095
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7 lines.
Prerequisites:
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...681
PCM 30 = 0...511
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...23 Channels
PCM 30 = 0...31 Channels
SELRCF SELECT RCF
Default 0&&255
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSF-7 +
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0, range of decimal numbers
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
Example:
NOTE:
Default: NO
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
ACT CSF-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT CSF-9 -
DACT CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command deactivates CSF (Call Status Facility) in the whole site.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT CSF ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT CSF-1 -
DISP CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command displays CSF activation information: the ACT CSF
input parameters, starting time and the number of status reports
given so far from the last ACT CSF command.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CSF ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSF-1 -
DMP CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command shows the status reports collected in a disk file
during execution of the last ACT CSF command.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP CSF : [FORM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORM OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the dump format. The dump can be given
in either a SMALL interpreted report or a LARGE including the small
one and a hex dump of registers. Default is SMALL.
SMALL SMALL STATUS REPORT
LARGE LARGE STATUS REPORT
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP CSF-1 -
CAN CSGINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT
This command cancels the data entered for the specified intercept
identification.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CAN CSGINC : -NAME= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the intercept identification for which the
data are to be cancelled.
DELOI INTERNATIONAL OUTGOING DELAY
DELII INTERNATIONAL INCOMING DELAY
DELTI INTERNATIONAL TRANSIT DELAY
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
IDELNS INTERNAT. DELAY NOT SERVICED
NDELNS NATIONAL DELAY NOT SERVICED
TCN TIME AND CHARGE NATIONAL
TCI TIME AND CHARGE INTERNATIONAL
TCA TIME AND CHARGE AUTOMATIC
TAGNA TASK GROUP NOT ASSISTED
TAGUNMAN TASK GROUP ACTUALLY UNMANNED
NRCAL NATIONAL RECALL
IRCAL INTERNATIONAL RECALL
LANGA LANGUAGE ASSISTANCE
VNOTF VERBAL NOTIFICATION
ONIREQ OPERATOR NUMBER IDENT. REQU.
BILRUNO BILLING REGISTER UNOBT. OSS
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUING
REPCS REPETITIVE CALL SETUP
BEFREOPR BEFORE RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
BEFANNDN BEFORE ANN DN
UNREPCS UNSUCC. REPETITIVE CALL SETUP
NACS NATIONAL ALARM CS
NACSNS NATIONAL ALARM CS NOT SERVICED
IACS INTERNAT. ALARM CS
IACSNS INTERNAT.ALARM CS NOT SERVICED
AUTOACS AUTO ALARM CS
VOPIVPS VIRTUAL OPERATOR TO IVPS
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which the data
are to be cancelled.
This parameter specifies the common service group local area code,
if the EWSD exchange serves for more than one local area (code).
Notes :
- For an exchange with multiple DN volume this parameter is mandatory.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSGINC-1 +
CAN CSGINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the common service group directory number.
E N D
CAN CSGINC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT
This command is used to define common service group specific intercept data.
1. CR CSGINC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR CSGINC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
3. CR CSGINC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
4. CR CSGINC - OPRCTYP OPERATOR VIA CALLTYPE
5. CR CSGINC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
Input format to create an intercept code which, when it is accessed, causes
the originally required connection to be set up after all.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CR CSGINC : -NAME= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,INRES= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
data are to be created.
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which the data are
to be created.
With this parameter new intercepts can be defined.
For more flexibility for user resources (e.g. announcements) a
variable number of these intercepts per group can be created.
A linkage between intercept and the object which will use the
resource can be done by other commands. For addressing the
intercept use its name.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-1 +
CR CSGINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies which response is to be triggered when the
intercept identification is accessed.
IGNORE IGNORE REASON FOR TERMINATION
CR CSGINC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
Input format to create an intercept code via which the digit translator is
re-accessed. An intercept code of this type serves to
- access an announcement or
- access an operator.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ]
] CR CSGINC : -NAME= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,INRES= ,CODE= ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
to be created.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-3 +
CR CSGINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWCB1 NEW CODE AND SEND B1 NUMBER
NEWCB1NL NEW CODE SEND B1 NUMBER NO LAC
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
a[-b]
a: DIGITS FOR NEW CODE=
This unit specifies the digit sequence to be used for
retranslation.
b: CATEGORY FOR NEW CODE
CATAC CATEGORY OF ACTUAL CONNECTION
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
This unit specifies the new class to be used for digit
translation. Translation with another class allows the
accessibility of a destination to be restricted (e.g. in order
to prevent the destination being dialed directly).
Default: CATAC
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence
is allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This parameter unit specifies which tone is to be applied if
the intercept identification is accessed. If the INRES
parameter is also specified for the intercept identification,
the tone is only applied if the response specified by INRES
(e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
CR CSGINC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
This parameter unit specifies (in seconds) how long the
tone is to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies in which position the response created by this
command is located if several responses are created for one intercept
identification. This value must start with 1 and be entered without
gaps.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-5 +
CR CSGINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
Input format to create an intercept code reached via a destination area to
incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo suppressors) into the connection.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ]
] CR CSGINC : -NAME= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,INRES= ,DEST= ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
to be created.
Notes:
CR CSGINC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEST DESTINATION AREA NAME
This parameter specifies the destination area to be
accessed by the intercept identification.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
gaps.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-7 +
CR CSGINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
CR CSGINC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
OPRCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
OPERATOR VIA CALLTYPE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an OSS operator is accessed.
-
] ]
] CR CSGINC : INCEPT= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,INRES= ,CTYP= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TONE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
Notes:
OPRCTYP OPERATOR WITH CALL TYPE
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This parameter specifies the call type of the operator being
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-9 +
CR CSGINC
OPRCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
accessed. The call type must already exist.
For special operator call types see command CR CALLTYPE.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
CR CSGINC-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an intercept tone is
accessed.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CR CSGINC : -NAME= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TONE= [,SEQ=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
to be created.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGINC-11 +
CR CSGINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
gaps.
Default: 1
E N D
CR CSGINC-12 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSGINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP INTERCEPT
This command displays the created data for the specified common service group
intercept identification.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CSGINC : <INCEPT= ,NAME=> [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the common service group intercept
identification for which the data are to be displayed.
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which the data are to
be displayed.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSGINC-1 +
DISP CSGINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
DISP CSGINC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command cancels a common service group for CENTREX or OSS.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
when the EWSD exchange serves for more than one local area (code).
Notes:
- Entering LAC the parameter DN is required.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSGRP-1 -
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command creates a common service group for CENTREX or OSS.
1. CR CSGRP - CRCSGCPX CREATE CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
2. CR CSGRP - CRCSGCTX CREATE CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
3. CR CSGRP - CRCSGOSS CREATE OSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
1. Input format
CREATE CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] CR CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,CXGRP= ,CXDN= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CHSITE=] ,DIV= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the common service group type.
CTXCPLX CENTREX COMPLEX CSGRP
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group.
CXDN CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the CENTREX intercom number.
The CXDN for intercom - calls is created and corresponded to a
directory number of the subscriber.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-1 +
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHSITE CHARGING SITE
This parameter specifies the charging zone
for the CENTREX Group Specific Charging Method.
Default: 1
DIV DIVERSION FEATURES
This parameter specifies the diversion features.
a-b
a: DIVERSION
LFCD LINK FAILURE CALL DIVERSION
USECSGRP USE OF SHARED CSGRP
USELFCD USE OF SHARED LFCD NUMBER
b: DIVERSION NUMBER=
CR CSGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] CR CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,CXGRP= ,CXDN= [,NAME=] ]
] ]
] ,LANG= ,PWBASIC= [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,HUNT=] [,CHSITE=] [,DIV=] [,TIMVAL=] [,LIMVAL=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
TYPE TYPE
CTX CENTREX
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX intercom number.
The CXDN for intercom - calls is created and corresponded to a
directory number of the subscriber.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the common service group.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-3 +
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the default language.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL LANGUAGE 1
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
PWBASIC PASSWORD BASIC
This parameter specifies the initial password for the
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
PWMINLN PASSWORD MINIMUM LENGTH
This parameter specifies the minimum length of the password.
Default: 4
PWEXP PASSWORD EXPIRATION DAY
This parameter specifies the expiration days of the password.
( the password will expire in xxx days )
Default: 30
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of the common service group.
ACTBDTA ACT B-PARTY DIAL THROUGH ATT.
ACTENABL ACT ENABLE BASIC ATTENDANT
ACTFDTA ACT FORCE ATT. ANSW. DTA CALL
ACTGMB ACTIVATE GROUP MAKE BUSY
ACTNS ACTIVATE NIGHT SERVICE
BARGE BARGE IN
CDSPROG CDS PROGRAMS ALLOWED
FLOGOFF FORCE LOGOFF
MANUACC MANUAL ACCEPTANCE MODE
PRVCSGRP PROVIDING COMMON SERVICE GROUP
Notes:
- The default features for an OSS-common service group are
SUPERAUT and MONSEP.
- The default features for a CENTREX-common service group are
ACTENABL and MANUACC.
HUNT HUNTING
This parameter specifies the hunting procedure.
CR CSGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CIR CIRCULAR HUNTING
SEQ SEQUENTIAL HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
Default: UNI
Default: 1
a-b
a: DIVERSION
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
This parameter specifies the timer and timer values.
Notes:
- In case of a CENTREX common service group only PCTIMER and
ACTIMER are valid inputs. For an OSS common service group all
TIMVAL parameters are valid.
a-b
a: TIME
ACTIMER ACCEPTANCE TIME INTERVAL
PCTIMER POST CALL TIME INTERVAL
b: TIME VALUE=
Notes:
valied Range Default
------------ -------
- range for PCTIMER : 0 - 255 0
- range for FCHATIM : 0 - 65535 20
- range for INTTOLE : 0 - 6140 2
- range for DISABLE : 1 - 240 30
- range for LOGOFF : 0 - 99 1
- range for PIPLEAD : 0 - 99 15
- range for PIPNATB : 15 - 999 180
- range for PIPNATO : 15 - 999 60
- range for PIPINTB : 15 - 999 180
- range for PIPINTO : 15 - 999 60
- range for ACTIMER : 1 - 255 20
LIMVAL LIMIT VALUE
This parameter specifies the limit and the limit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-5 +
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- In case of a CENTREX common service group only ACLIMIT is a valid
input. For an OSS common service group this time no valid LIMVAL
parameter exists.
a-b
a: LIMIT
ACLIMIT ACCEPTANCE LIMIT
b: LIMIT VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
- range for ACLIMIT : 1 - 255 3
CR CSGRP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGRP
CRCSGOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE OSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] CR CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= [,NAME=] ,LANG= ]
] ]
] ,PWBASIC= [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,HUNT=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TIMVAL=] [,RESLIM=] [,IVPS=] [,AUTPRI=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PRESTC=] [,PRINTC=] [,AUGRANEL=] ,ID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
TYPE TYPE
CTX CENTREX
OSS OPERATOR SERVICE SYSTEM
NAME NAME
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-7 +
CR CSGRP
CRCSGOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
Default: 4
Default: 30
HUNT HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
Default: UNI
FEA FEATURE
ADATZON A-PARTY DATA ZONING
AFIRCON A-PARTY FIRST IN CONFERENCE
AMACTYP CALL TYPE NAME IN AMA TICKET
AMASERVN SERVICE NUMBER IN AMA TICKET
AUTOACEX AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL EXECUTION
BLSREEN BLACKLIST SCREENING
CHBOEXT CHARGEABLE B-OPR. EXTENSION
CHINCRD CHARGEABLE INCOMING RINGDOWN
CHOUTRD CHARGEABLE OUTGOING RINGDOWN
COMOINT CONVERS. MONITOR INTRUSION TON
CONCAI5 CONVERT CHARACTER TO ITR5
DQTIME DISPLAY QUEUEING TIME
DSECDN DISPLAY SECRET DN
DSUPMON DISPLAY SUPERVISOR MONITORING
FCHAPH1 FORCED CHARGING PHASE 1
FORCANS FORCED ANSWER
FORCVER FORCED VERIFICATION
MONSEP MONETARY SEPARATOR
OPRVER OPERATOR VERIFICATION
PREVCAC PREVENT CALL COMPLETION
SHAREGRP SHARING GROUP
CR CSGRP-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGRP
CRCSGOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOREPCON SUPPRESS OP. REP. ON CONSOLE
SOREPOMT SUPRESS OP. REP. ON OMT
SUPALARM SUPERVISOR ALARMING
SUPERAUT SUPERVISOR AUTHORISATION
SUPSTAT SUPERVISOR STATISTICS
TIRACT TICKET RETRIVAL ACTIVATION
VERIFAT VERIFIED A-NUMBER TRANSMISSION
WLSREEN WHITELIST SCREENING
Notes:
- The default features for an OSS-common service group are
SUPERAUT and MONSEP.
- The default features for a CENTREX-common service group are
ACTENABL and MANUACC.
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
Notes:
a-b
a: TIME
DISABLE DISABLE ACT. INTERVAL
FCHATIM FORCED CHARGING TIMER
INTTOLE INTRUSION TONE LENGTH
LOGOFF LOGOFF ACT. INTERVAL
PIPINTB PIP TONE INS. INT. BASIC
PIPINTO PIP TONE INS. INT. OVERTIME
PIPLEAD PIP TONE LEAD TIME
PIPNATB PIP TONE INS. NAT. BASIC
PIPNATO PIP TONE INS. NAT. OVERTIME
b: TIME VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMIT
This parameter specifies the maximum number of resources which may used
in this common service group depending on the type of resource.
a-b
a: RESOURCE TYPE
CDS CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Maximum number of task groups for this common
service group.
Default: CDS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-9 +
CR CSGRP
CRCSGOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MAXIMUM VALUE=
Default: 10
IVPS IVPS
This parameter specifies the User Interface of the Integrated Voice
Processing System
a-b
a: IVPS DATA
CACCOPR CODE TO ACCESS AN OPERATOR
CANSNO CODE FOR ANSWER NO
CANSYES CODE FOR ANSWER YES
CSKIPDBL CODE TO SKIP A DIALOGBLOCK
DEFANSW DEFAULT ANSWER
REPEATDN REPETITION OF DN
b: IVPS DATA VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
- range for CACCOPR : 0 - F 0
- range for CSKIPDBL : 0 - F C
- range for CANSYES : 0 - F 1
- range for CANSNO : 0 - F 3
- range for DEFANSW : 0 - 1 0
- range for REPEATDN : 0 - 9 2
AUTPRI AUTOMATIC PRICE ADVICE
This parameter specifies the automatic charge notification which
specifies the charge data for the automatic charge message.
a-b-c
a: PRICE PER CHARGING UNIT=
This unit means the price per charging unit.
Default: 99999
b: BASIC RATE PERIOD=
This unit means the basic rate period.
Default: 3
c: CLASSIFIED RATE PERIOD=
This unit means the classified rate period.
Default: 1
PRESTC PRESENT T&C CALLS TO OPERATOR
This parameter specifies which kind of time and charges - Calls will
be presented to the operator.
CR CSGRP-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CSGRP
CRCSGOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL ALL T&C CALLS
CHARGE CHARGABLE T&C CALLS
SUCCESS SUCCESSFUL T&C CALLS
TIMED TIMED T&C CALLS
Default: ALL
PRINTC PRINT T&C CALLS
This parameter specifies which kind of time and charges - Calls will be
presented to the operator for printing.
ALL ALL T&C TICKETS
NO NO T&C TICKETS
UNSUCC UNSUCCESSFUL T&C TICKETS
Default: NO
AUGRANEL AUTO. GREET. ANN. ELEMENT NO.
This parameter specifies the announcement element number created
for the automatic greeting function.
ID IDENTIFICATION OF CSGRP
This parameter specifies the identification of an
OSS common service group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CSGRP-11 -
DISP CSGRP
CSGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command displays one or more common service groups for CENTREX or OSS.
<job number>.
1. DISP CSGRP - CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP CSGRP - CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
3. DISP CSGRP - TYPE TYPE
1. Input format
COMMON SERVICE GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
-
] ]
] DISP CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSGRP-1 +
DISP CSGRP
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CENTREX GROUP
-
] ]
] DISP CSGRP : CXGRP= [,DIV=] [,FEA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
a-b
a: DIVERSION
FEA FEATURE
DISP CSGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSGRP
TYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TYPE
-
] ]
] DISP CSGRP : TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
CTX CENTREX
OSS OPERATOR SERVICE SYSTEM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSGRP-3 -
MOD CSGRP
MOCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command modifies a common service group for CENTREX or OSS.
1. MOD CSGRP - MOCSGCPX MODIFY CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
2. MOD CSGRP - MODCSGCX MODIFY CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
3. MOD CSGRP - MODCSGOS MODIFY OSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
1. Input format
MODIFY CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= <,CHSITE=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSGRP-1 +
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,NAME=] [,LANG=] [,PWBASIC=] ]
] ]
] [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] [,HUNT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CHSITE=] [,DIV=] [,CDIV=] [,TIMVAL=] [,LIMVAL=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
NAME NAME
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
MOD CSGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
BARGE BARGE IN
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features for deactivation of the
BARGE BARGE IN
HUNT HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSGRP-3 +
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DIVERSION
CDIV CANCEL DIVERSION
This parameter specifies the diversion features to be canceled.
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
Notes:
a-b
a: TIME
b: TIME VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
LIMVAL LIMIT VALUE
This parameter specifies the limit and the limit values.
Notes:
- In case of a CENTREX common service group only ACLIMIT is a valid
input. For an OSS common service group this time no valid LIMVAL
parameter exists.
a-b
a: LIMIT
ACLIMIT ACCEPTANCE LIMIT
MOD CSGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LIMIT VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
- range for ACLIMIT : 1 - 255 3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSGRP-5 +
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY OSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
-
] ]
] MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,NAME=] [,LANG=] [,PWBASIC=] ]
] ]
] [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,HUNT=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TIMVAL=] [,RESLIM=] [,IVPS=] [,AUTPRI=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PRESTC=] [,PRINTC=] [,AUGRANEL=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
NAME NAME
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
MOD CSGRP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
HUNT HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
FEA FEATURE
SOREPCON SUPRESS OP. REP. ON CONSOLE
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features for deactivation of the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSGRP-7 +
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOREPCON SUPRESS OP. REP. ON CONSOLE
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
Notes:
a-b
a: TIME
DISABLE DISABLE ACT. INTERVAL
INTTOLE INTRUSION TONE LENGTH
LOGOFF LOGOFF ACT. INTERVAL
PIPINTB PIP TONE INS. INT. BASIC
PIPINTO PIP TONE INS. INT. OVERTIME
PIPLEAD PIP TONE LEAD TIME
PIPNATB PIP TONE INS. NAT. BASIC
PIPNATO PIP TONE INS. NAT. OVERTIME
b: TIME VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
MOD CSGRP-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMIT
This parameter specifies the maximum number of resources which may used
in this common service group depending on the type of resource.
a-b
a: RESOURCE TYPE
CDS CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Maximum number of task groups for this common
service group.
b: MAXIMUM VALUE=
IVPS IVPS
This parameter specifies the User Interface of the Integrated Voice
Processing System
a-b
a: IVPS DATA
CACCOPR CODE TO ACCESS AN OPERATOR
CANSNO CODE FOR ANSWER NO
CANSYES CODE FOR ANSWER YES
CSKIPDBL CODE TO SKIP A DIALOGBLOCK
DEFANSW DEFAULT ANSWER
REPEATDN REPETITION OF DN
b: IVPS DATA VALUE=
Notes:
------------ -------
- range for CACCOPR : 0 - F 0
- range for CSKIPDBL : 0 - F C
- range for CANSYES : 0 - F 1
- range for CANSNO : 0 - F 3
- range for DEFANSW : 0 - 1 0
- range for REPEATDN : 0 - 9 2
This parameter specifies the automatic charge notification which
specifies the charge data for the automatic charge message.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CSGRP-9 +
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRESTC PRESENT T&C CALLS TO OPERATOR
presented to the operator.
ALL ALL T&C CALLS
CHARGE CHARGABLE T&C CALLS
PRINTC PRINT T&C CALLS
presented to the operator for printing.
ALL ALL T&C TICKETS
NO NO T&C TICKETS
UNSUCC UNSUCCESSFUL T&C TICKETS
AUGRANEL AUTO. GREET. ANN. ELEMENT NO.
This parameter specifies the announcement element number created
for the automatic greeting function.
E N D
MOD CSGRP-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
CANCSSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command cancels an existing common service subscriber or
modifies the data of an existing common service subscriber.
Notes:
- The data of an existing common service subscriber can only
be deleted from common service subscriber of
TYPE=ATN, SUPER or CHIEF.
- If at least one value of traffic restriction classes for
a subscriber exist, the OSS common service subscriber
feature value restriction for outgoing calls must be not
canceled.
- At least one language for TYPE=OPR, SUPER and VOPR
must exist.
Prerequisites:
- All types of common service subscriber can be
canceled, while they are not logged-on.
The TYPE of common service subscriber ATN, BATN or
VOPR can also be canceled while they are logged on.
1. CAN CSSUB - CANCSSUB CANCEL CS-SUBSCRIBER
2. CAN CSSUB - MODCHIEF MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
3. CAN CSSUB - MODCXATN MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
4. CAN CSSUB - MODCXBAS MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
5. CAN CSSUB - MODMAINT MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
6. CAN CSSUB - MODOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
7. CAN CSSUB - MODSUPER MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
8. CAN CSSUB - MODVOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
1. Input format
CANCEL CS-SUBSCRIBER
This input format is used to cancel an existing
common service subscriber.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of an existing
common service subscriber. Input is mandatory for an exchange
with a multiple directory number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of an
existing common service subscriber.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-1 +
CAN CSSUB
MODCHIEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
This input format is used to modify the data of an
existing common service subscriber with TYPE=CHIEF.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= ,FEA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features.
ACAOACT ALARM CALL ORDER ACT. AUTH.
BOOKING BOOKING AUTHORIZATION
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE AUTHORIZATION
DSBADM1 DSB ADMINISTRATION 1
CAN CSSUB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODCHIEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESETPW RESET PASSWORD
RSTSUBC RESTR.SETTING UP BOOKING CALLS
SERVCALL SERVICE CALL AUTHORIZATION
TICKRETR TICKET RETRIEVAL AUTHORIZATION
TRUNKOFF TRUNK OFFERING AUTHORIZATION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-3 +
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
This input format is used to modify the data of an existing
common service subscriber with TYPE=ATN.
-
] ]
] CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCXCTYP=] [,RACXCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
AEAACT ACCESS TO EXT.APPLICATION ACT.
CHCXGRPD CHANGE CTX GROUP DATA AUTH.
CHCXSUBD CHANGE CTX SUBSCR. DATA AUTH.
CXMOD CTX MODIFICATION AUTHORIZATION
DICXGRPD DISPLAY CTX GROUP DATA AUTH.
DICXSUBD DISPLAY CTX SUBSCR. DATA AUTH.
DINUMCAL DISPLAY NUMBER OF CALLS AUTH.
CAN CSSUB-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMBACT GROUP MAKE BUSY ACT. AUTH.
MDRACT MSG DETAIL RECORDING ACT.AUTH.
MDRGACT MDR REPORT GENERATION ACT.
MDRMACT MDR MODIFICATION ACTIVATION
NSACT NIGHT SERVICE ACT. AUTH.
PDMACT PHONE DIRECTORY MAINT.ACT.
PFAACT PROTECT FILE ACCESS ACTIVATION
PRVCXMOD PROVIDE CTX GROUP MODIFICATION
SWPCXSUB SWAP TWO CTX SUBSCRIBER AUTH.
TRAFACT TRAFFIC ACTIVATION
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the existing task groups,
that the common service subscriber can handle.
Up to 16 task groups can be linked with &.
DACTTGRP DEACTIVATED TASK GROUP
that the common service subscriber can not handle.
PTASKGRP PRIORITY TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies in which sequence the common
service subscriber processes the assigned priority
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
a: FIRST PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-5 +
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: SECOND PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
c: THIRD PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
RCXCTYP RESTRICTED CALL TYPE CENTREX
This parameter specifies which CENTREX call types are
restricted processed.
RACXCTYP RESTR. ADM. CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies which administrative CENTREX
call types are restricted processed.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the common service
subscriber language.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
CAN CSSUB-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
common service subscriber with TYPE=BATN.
Incompatibilities:
- For a common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN
following restricted call type can not be deleted:
DTAC.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-7 +
CAN CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
CAN CSSUB-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-9 +
CAN CSSUB
MODMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
common service subscriber with TYPE=MAINT.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,FEA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
RSTOGCA RESTR. FOR OUTGOING CALLS
CAN CSSUB-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
common service subscriber with TYPE=OPR.
-
] ]
] CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,LOCAT=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LOCAT OPERATOR LOCATION
This parameter specifies the operator location.
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-11 +
CAN CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
RCTYP RESTRICTED CALL TYPE OSS
This parameter specifies which OSS call types are restricted.
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
CAN CSSUB-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
common service subscriber with TYPE=SUPER.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-13 +
CAN CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
CAN CSSUB-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-15 +
CAN CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
common service subscriber with TYPE=VOPR.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
CAN CSSUB-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CSSUB-17 -
DISP CSSUB
DCSCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command displays common service subscriber
data.
- A specified common service subscriber can be
displayed.
- All common service subscribers of a common service
group (OSS) can be displayed.
group (OSS), which have the input selection criteria.
group (CENTREX) can be displayed.
- All common service subscribers of a CENTREX group
can be displayed.
<job number>.
1. DISP CSSUB - DCSCSGRP DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CSGRP
2. DISP CSSUB - DCSCXGRP DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CXGRP
3. DISP CSSUB - DCSSUB DISPLAY SPECIFIED CSSUB
4. DISP CSSUB - DSCCSGRP DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CSGRP
5. DISP CSSUB - DSCCXGRP DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CXGRP
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CSGRP
This input format is used to display parts of common
service subscriber data for all common service subscriber
of a common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP CSSUB : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of
an existing common service group.
CSGDN COMMON SERVIVE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-1 +
DISP CSSUB
DCSCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CXGRP
of a CENTREX group.
-
] ]
] DISP CSSUB : CXGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP NUMBER
DISP CSSUB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSSUB
DCSSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY SPECIFIED CSSUB
This input format is used to display the common service
subscriber data for a common service subscriber.
-
] ]
] DISP CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of an
existing common service subscriber. Input is mandatory
for an exchange with a multiple directory number
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number
of an existing common service subscriber.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-3 +
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CSGRP
This input format is used to display parts of common service
subscriber data for all common service subscriber of a common
service group, which have the input selection parameter.
-
] ]
] DISP CSSUB : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,TYPE=] [,ID=] [,PCTFACT=] ]
] ]
] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] [,RCTYP=] [,RCXCTYP=] [,RACXCTYP=] [,LANG=] ]
] ]
] [,FORCE=] [,SUPGRP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CSGDN COMMON SERVIVE GROUP DN
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the TYPE of common service
subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
BATN BASIC ATTENDANT
CHIEF CHIEF
MAINT MAINTENANCE
OPR OPERATOR
RES RESERVE OPERATOR
SUPER SUPERVISOR
VOPR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies a common service subscriber
identification.
PCTFACT POST CALL TIME FACTOR
post call time factor.
DISP CSSUB-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
AEAACT ACCESS TO EXT.APPLICATION.ACT.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-5 +
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies, in which sequence the common
service subscriber processes the assigned priority task group.
a[-b[-c]]
This parameter specifies which OSS call types are
DISP CSSUB-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NLPDNAG NAT. CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the force number.
SUPGRP SUPERVISOR GROUP
This parameter specifies the supervisor group.
One supervisory group contains at most 256 common
service subscribers.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-7 +
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CXGRP
of a CENTREX group, which have the input selection parameter.
-
] ]
] DISP CSSUB : CXGRP= [,TYPE=] [,ID=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCXCTYP=] [,RACXCTYP=] ]
] ]
] [,LANG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
FEA FEATURE
DISP CSSUB-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-9 +
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
DISP CSSUB-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CSSUB-11 -
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command has to perform following functions:
- Create a new common service subscriber.
- Modification of the data of an existing
Notes:
- Following subscriber features are incompatible for an OSS
common service subscriber:
1) All charging values except value no charge for A -
subscriber.
2) All classes of service except the values call hold
for enquiry, three - way calling, call transfer,
call transfer A - side, call waiting activation,
call line identification presented, calling line
identification restriction, calling line identification
restriction ignored, large conference, connected line
identification restriction, catastrophe immunity 1,
and catastrophe immunity 2.
3) All traffic restrictions except the value subscriber
requested original call susp.
- If at least one value of traffic restriction classes for
a subscriber exist, the OSS common service subscriber
feature value restriction for outgoing calls must be
entered.
Prerequisites:
- A common service subscriber can only be entered,
if the common service group he shall be assigned
to already exists.
- A common service subscriber can only be entered if
a subscriber with the same directory number and, if
necessary, with the same local area code already
exists.
- An ISDN common service subscriber can only be entered
if at least one voice service is assigned to the designated
subscriber.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=OPR, SUPER,
MAINT, CHIEF, RES, ATN or VOPR can only be entered if
a subscriber with the category IDSB already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=VOPR can only
be entered if a OSS subscriber with an equipment number
already exist.
- Following classes of service of an subscriber must be
already exist, if an OSS common service subscriber will
be created:
1) directory number specific:
inhibit trunk offering,
functional protocol,
stimulus protocol
2) service specific:
call hold for enquiry,
three - way calling,
call transfer,
call transfer A - side,
call waiting activation,
call line identification presented,
calling line identification restriction,
calling line identification restriction ignored,
large conference
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=ATN, BATN can
only be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with the same
directory number and, if necessary, with the same
local area code already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN can only
be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with an equipment
number already exist.
be entered if layer 1 is active for this subscriber.
be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with the same
directory number and, if necessary, with the same
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-1 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
local area code already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN (digital)
can only be entered if a subscriber with the category
IBA already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN (analog)
can only be entered if a subscriber with the category
MS already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=ATN can only
log in at consoles of his own CENTREX group which are
assigned to a DLU serving the local area code of the
1. ENTR CSSUB - ENTCXATN ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
2. ENTR CSSUB - ENTCXBAS ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
3. ENTR CSSUB - ENTMAINT ENTER CSSUB TYPE MAINT
4. ENTR CSSUB - ENTOPR ENTER CSSUB TYPE OPR
5. ENTR CSSUB - ENTOSCHI ENTER CSSUB TYPE CHIEF
6. ENTR CSSUB - ENTRES ENTER CSSUB TYPE RES
7. ENTR CSSUB - ENTSUPER ENTER CSSUB TYPE SUPER
8. ENTR CSSUB - ENTVOPR ENTER CSSUB TYPE VOPR
9. ENTR CSSUB - MODCHIEF MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
10. ENTR CSSUB - MODCXATN MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
11. ENTR CSSUB - MODCXBAS MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
12. ENTR CSSUB - MODMAINT MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
13. ENTR CSSUB - MODOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
14. ENTR CSSUB - MODRES MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE RES
15. ENTR CSSUB - MODSUPER MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
16. ENTR CSSUB - MODVOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
1. Input format
ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
This input format is used to assign an ATN
of common service group, or create a common
service subscriber of TYPE=ATN.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,ID= ]
] ]
] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
subscriber. Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple
directory number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
existing subscriber.
ENTR CSSUB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
an existing common service group. This parameter is only
used to create a new common service subscriber.
TYPE TYPE
subscriber. This parameter is only used to create a
new common service subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
SEQNO SEQUENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the sequence number for
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-3 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
ENTR CSSUB-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A list of 1 to 3 task groups in the order they are
to be searched starting with the task group to be
searched first and seperated by "-".
a[-b[-c]]
ILPDNAG INT. CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
LANG LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-5 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
ENTR CSSUB-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
This input format is used to assign a BATN
service subscriber of TYPE=BATN.
Incompatibilities:
DTAC.
-
] ]
] ]
] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-7 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
ENTR CSSUB-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-9 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE MAINT
This input format is used to assign an MAINT
of common service group, or create a common service
subscriber of TYPE=MAINT.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
MAINT MAINTENANCE
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
ENTR CSSUB-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies an OSS common service subscriber
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
SERVCALL SERVICE CALLS AUTHORIZATION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-11 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE OPR
This input format is used to assign an OPR
service subscriber of TYPE=OPR.
-
] ]
] ]
] [,NAME=] [,LOCAT=] [,PCTFACT=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,LANG=] ,FORCE= ,SUPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
OPR OPERATOR
ENTR CSSUB-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-13 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
ENTR CSSUB-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE CHIEF
This input format is used to assign a CHIEF of
common service group, or create a common service
subscriber of TYPE=CHIEF.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] ,FORCE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
CHIEF CHIEF
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-15 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-17 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE RES
This input format is used to assign a RES of
common service group, or create a common service
subscriber of TYPE=RES.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,ID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
RES RESERVE OPERATOR
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
ENTR CSSUB-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE SUPER
This input format is used to assign an SUPER
service subscriber of TYPE=SUPER.
-
] ]
] ]
] [,NAME=] [,PCTFACT=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,FORCE= ,SUPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
SUPER SUPERVISOR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-19 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-21 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
ENTR CSSUB-22 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
ENTER CSSUB TYPE VOPR
This input format is used to assign an VOPR
service subscriber of TYPE=VOPR.
-
] ]
] ]
] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] ,FORCE= ,SUPGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
VOPR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-23 +
ENTR CSSUB
ENTVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
ENTR CSSUB-24 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
ENTVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-25 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODCHIEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
of an existing common service subscriber
with TYPE=CHIEF.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-26 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODCHIEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-27 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
with TYPE=ATN.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCXCTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RACXCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-28 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-29 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
ENTR CSSUB-30 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-31 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
with TYPE=BATN.
Incompatibilities:
DTAC.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCXCTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RACXCTYP=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-32 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-33 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
ENTR CSSUB-34 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
12. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
with TYPE=MAINT.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-35 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
13. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
with TYPE=OPR.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,LOCAT=] ]
] ]
] [,PCTFACT=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [,SUPGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ENTR CSSUB-36 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-37 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
ENTR CSSUB-38 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
14. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE RES
with TYPE=RES.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-39 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
15. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
with TYPE=SUPER.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,PCTFACT=] ]
] ]
] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [,SUPGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
ENTR CSSUB-40 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-41 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODSUPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
ENTR CSSUB-42 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
16. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
with TYPE=VOPR.
-
] ]
] ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] ]
] ]
] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,LANG=] [,SUPGRP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-43 +
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
ENTR CSSUB-44 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CSSUB-45 -
START CSWD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START CSWD PROCESSES
This command starts the control and switching device processes which handle the
configuration of peripheral units.
Start of functions for activating the call processing(classic) periphery (LTG,
MB, SN, DLU) and start of CALLP.
Notes:
This command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format
-
] ]
] START CSWD ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START CSWD-1 -
DISP CTRLTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL CONTROL TIME
This command displays the currently valid call control time.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CTRLTIME ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CTRLTIME-1 -
ENTR CTRLTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL CONTROL TIME
This command enters the duration of call control time.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CTRLTIME : TIME= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the control time.
a[-b]
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CTRLTIME-1 -
CAN CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL TYPE
This command cancels a call type.
Prerequisites:
- The call type may no longer be created as destination.
- For this destination, no routing data (routes and digit translation)
may exist.
- No intercept code may be assigned to the call type.
- No operator may be assigned to the call type (see
operator data, parameter CTREST).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CTYP : CTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This command specifies the call type.
Notes:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CTYP-1 -
CR CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL TYPE
This command creates a call type.
Prerequisites:
- The specified call category must be created.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CTYP : CTYP= ,CCAT= [,GOSTHR=] [,CONF=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This parameter specifies the call type name. As long as this call
type exists, the system will not allow the creation of additional
call types of the same call type name.
Notes:
- Call type SPECOP is reserved for routing a call to a specified
operator. Therefore this call type is not administrable.
.,+,*,%,#
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
Notes:
.,+,*,%,#
GOSTHR GRADE OF SERVICE THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the grade-of-service threshold. The
grade-of-service threshold (in seconds) is the threshold
against which the grade of service (percentage) is measured.
Default: 5
CONF CONFIGURATION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CTYP-1 +
CR CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CR CTYP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL TYPE
This command displays data of a call type. The following data are
displayed:
- Call type
- Associated call category
- Configuration
- Grade-of-service threshold
- one call type,
- several call types,
- all call types
in
- one configuration,
- several configurations,
- all configurations (default value).
Note:
The display of selected configurations is identical to the non-selective
display of configurations if no other configurations are associated with
the call type concerned other than that selected.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CTYP : CTYP= [,CONF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
call types of the same call type name. Up to 62 parameter values
can be linked with &.
x
Notes:
operator. Therefore this call type is not administrable and is
not displayed by the command.
.,+,*,%,#
CONF CONFIGURATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CTYP-1 -
MOD CTYP
CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL TYPE
This command modifies a call type. The following data can be
modified:
- Name of the call type
- Grade-of-service threshold
- Assignment of call type to call category:
- modify associated call category
- associate an additional call category
- cancel the assignment to a call category.
Prerequisites:
- The data to be modified must be created.
1. MOD CTYP - CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
2. MOD CTYP - CTYPCCAT CALL TYPE NAME AND CATEGORY
3. MOD CTYP - GOSTHR GRADE OF SERVICE THRESHOLD
1. Input format
CALL TYPE NAME
Input format for modifying a call type name
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CTYP : CTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
Notes:
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CTYP-1 +
MOD CTYP
CTYPCCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CALL TYPE NAME AND CATEGORY
Input format for modifying the association of call types and call categories.
The following options are available:
- Assignment of a different call category with CCAT=new/old
- Assignment of a different call category with CCAT=new/
- Cancellation of an associated call category with CCAT=/old
Prerequisites:
- The new call category must be created.
- Apart from the call category to be canceled, at least one other
call category must still be associated with the call type.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CTYP : CTYP= [,CCAT=] [,CONF=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
Notes:
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
n/o
n/
/o
.,+,*,%,#
CONF CONFIGURATION
This parameter is only specified together with CCAT.
MOD CTYP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CTYP
GOSTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
GRADE OF SERVICE THRESHOLD
Input format for modifying the grade-of-service threshold
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CTYP : CTYP= [,GOSTHR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
Notes:
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
GOSTHR GRADE OF SERVICE THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the grade of service threshold. The
grade of service threshold (in seconds) is the threshold
against which the grade of service (percentage) is measured.
n/o
Default: 5
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CTYP-3 -
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CIRCUIT TYPE
This command tests one type of circuit.
During test job execution if more than one test object was specified,
semipermanent test job, test results are periodically ( every 15 min )
stored on temporary disk files.
These files are identified by the current job number, two letters
(for the file type) and a sequence number of two digits (01 to 99)
for example : TE.ATE0018.TS01.
The following file types are used :
TS (Test sequence) : Last test object.
FA : Faulty/Ambiguous results.
NA : Not accessible test objects.
BS : Final busy results.
RD : Responder data ("Faulty Responders").
At the end of test job execution test results along with statistics
are outputed and existing temporary disk files deleted.
To look at test results kept in temporary disk files the operator must
issue the MML command DISP TSTRES with the job number of the test
job.
To look at test results kept in archive files the operator must issue
the MML command SEL AENTRY with the job number of the test job.
<job number>.
This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the job can be
continued with CONT JOB.
1. TEST CTYPE - EXCH
2. TEST CTYPE - LTG
1. Input format
This input format is valid for testing all circuits of a type in an exchange.
-
] ]
] TEST CTYPE : CTYPE= ,LTG= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYPE CIRCUIT TYPES
This parameter specifies the circuit types.
ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT F SUB LINE
ATE ATE
ATM ATE TEST MEASUREMENT
ETEAE END TO END ANSWER EQUIPMENT
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE
SLCABMO SLCA B WIRE MONITORING
SLCACBR SLCA COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCACWA SLCA: C WIRE
SLCACWM SLCA: C WIRE METER PULSE
SLCACWS C WIRE SUPERVISION
SLCAECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
SLCAMMO SLCA METERING MONITORING
SLCAM16 SLCA: MP16KHZ
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST CTYPE-1 +
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SLCAOS SLCA: ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCAR16 METER PULSE 16KHZ REVERS.
SLCASEC SLCA: SELECTIVE CONNECTION
TCB200F TC PULSE BOTHWAY F2
TCB200P TC PULSE BOTHWAY DIR INW DIAL
TCB601C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY 1
TCB601CB TC CARRIER BOTHWAY BSMT
TCB800C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY
TCB800CA TC RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
TCI601C TC CARRIER INCOMING 1
TCI702P TC PULSE INCOMING 4 WIRE
TCI800C TC INC CARRIER
TCO304P TCO304P
TCO601C TC CARRIER OUTGOING 1
TCO702P TC PULSE OUTGOING 4 WIRE
TCO800C TC OUTG-CARRIER
TEMLE ACCESS CIRCUIT TEMLE
TETRL TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL
TETRLN TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL NBL
TLFAOG TRANSLATION FUNCTION A OUTG.
TOG TONE GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the LTG number.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test variant of the circuit test for
short testing with the automatic test equipment.
The tests that are omitted for the corresponding type of short testing
are marked in the test table.
The test table of the object is country-specific and is contained in
the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
S1 SHORT TEST 1
Short test of the RAC TCB800C with
annoucement equipment switched off,
otherwise the normal circuit test is carried out.
S2 SHORT TEST 2
For a single test job a TCB601C, TCO702P or
TCB800C which is already connected to a
corresponding circuit and created can, by entering
S2, be tested in the same way as a circuit
without a line if the line is isolated from the
test object at the MDF with a break plug.
S9 SHORT TEST 9
Manual test of TCB601C, TCI702P, TCO702P and
TCB800C: the a-/b-wires and the signal wires of
analog trunk circuits are accessed for the manual
test function by the additional input of the
optional parameter TTYPE=S9 and
STEP=5 and, if required, PERM for the test
job.
TEST CTYPE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When step number 5 has been reached, the external
test equipment can be connected to the jacks on
the faceplate of the ATE module TEM:COP. By
pressing key STP an advance is made to step 8.
By pressing key MA the functions of the rotary
switches LT, FS and LR are taken over by the
ATE control.
SCHED SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the schedule number which
determines the sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated
to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST CTYPE-3 +
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is valid for testing all circuits of a type in an LTG.
-
] ]
] TEST CTYPE : CTYPE= ,LTG= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] ]
] ]
] [,STEP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CTYPE CIRCUIT TYPES
This parameter specifies the circuit types.
ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT F SUB LINE
ATE ATE
ATM ATE TEST MEASUREMENT
ETEAE END TO END ANSWER EQUIPMENT
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE
SLCABMO SLCA B WIRE MONITORING
SLCACBR SLCA COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCACWA SLCA: C WIRE
SLCACWM SLCA: C WIRE METER PULSE
SLCACWS C WIRE SUPERVISION
SLCAECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
SLCAMMO SLCA METERING MONITORING
SLCAM16 SLCA: MP16KHZ
SLCAOS SLCA: ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCAR16 METER PULSE 16KHZ REVERS.
SLCASEC SLCA: SELECTIVE CONNECTION
TCB200F TC PULSE BOTHWAY F2
TCB200P TC PULSE BOTHWAY DIR INW DIAL
TCB601C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY 1
TCB601CB TC CARRIER BOTHWAY BSMT
TCB800C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY
TCB800CA TC RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
TCI601C TC CARRIER INCOMING 1
TCI702P TC PULSE INCOMING 4 WIRE
TCI800C TC INC CARRIER
TCO304P TCO304P
TCO601C TC CARRIER OUTGOING 1
TCO702P TC PULSE OUTGOING 4 WIRE
TCO800C TC OUTG-CARRIER
TEMLE ACCESS CIRCUIT TEMLE
TETRL TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL
TETRLN TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL NBL
TLFAOG TRANSLATION FUNCTION A OUTG.
TOG TONE GENERATOR
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
TEST CTYPE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test variant of the circuit test for
short testing with the automatic test equipment.
The tests that are omitted for the corresponding type of short testing
are marked in the test table.
The test table of the object is country-specific and is contained in
the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
S1 SHORT TEST 1
Short test of the RAC TCB800C with
annoucement equipment switched off,
otherwise the normal circuit test is carried out.
S2 SHORT TEST 2
For a single test job a TCB601C, TCO702P or
TCB800C which is already connected to a
corresponding circuit and created can, by entering
S2, be tested in the same way as a circuit
without a line if the line is isolated from the
test object at the MDF with a break plug.
S9 SHORT TEST 9
Manual test of TCB601C, TCI702P, TCO702P and
TCB800C: the a-/b-wires and the signal wires of
analog trunk circuits are accessed for the manual
test function by the additional input of the
optional parameter TTYPE=S9 and
STEP=5 and, if required, PERM for the test
job.
When step number 5 has been reached, the external
test equipment can be connected to the jacks on
the faceplate of the ATE module TEM:COP. By
pressing key STP an advance is made to step 8.
By pressing key MA the functions of the rotary
switches LT, FS and LR are taken over by the
ATE control.
determines the sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated
to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test is to be done.
Circuit types that allow permanent test : ATE, MULTIPLE, ATM
and TOG.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies the breakpoint for single test jobs.
The test steps that represent breakpoints are marked in the test table
with two leading zeros before the test step number.
The test table of the test object is country-specific.
Circuit types that allow breakpoint testing : ATE, MULTIPLE, ATM
and TOG.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST CTYPE-5 +
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
TEST CTYPE-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP
This command cancels
- the existing membership of a subscriber/PBX in one closed user group,
- the membership of one or several services in a closed user group,
- the traffic restriction within the closed user group for the subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- If the last closed user group of a subscriber/PBX or of a service is canceled,
then also the network authorizations and the preferential closed group are
canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,SERV=] [,CUGBLK=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or
the PBX.
CUGID CUG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the closed user group identification, which
is specific per subscriber/PBX.
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be canceled.
ANALOG ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
CMSPEECH CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
CMUNRST CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
CMAUDIO CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMAUDI7K CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
TEL3K TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY 7KHZ
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CUG-1 +
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTX64K TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEO TELEPHONY
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICE GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICE GROUP
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
CAN CUG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA
This command displays closed user group data for
- a specified subscriber or PBX,
- all subscribers and PBX in a directory number interval,
- all subscribers and PBX of a specified local area code or
- all subscribers and PBX in the exchange.
A selection can be made on
- the closed user group identification or
- the interlock code or
- the interlock code and the data network identification code.
Notes:
- If desired, also the service dependant closed user group data of
ISDN-subscribers, ISDN- and mixed PBX can be displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CUGID=]] ;- ]
] DISP CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ]-,ILC= ] [,DNIC=] [,FORMAT=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number or directory number
interval. The directory number or, if an interval is entered, the
directory number boundaries, must be numbers of a created directory
number interval. Only one interval can be entered.
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CUG-1 +
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which
is the international identification of the closed user group.
This parameter specifies whether, for ISDN subscribers and ISDN or
mixed PBX, only the subscriber/PBX specific closed user group data are
displayed or additionally the service specific closed user group data.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, then only the subscriber/PBX specific
closed user group data are displayed.
CUG OUTPUT OF CUG DATA
Only subscriber/PBX specific closed user group
data are displayed.
ALL OUTPUT OF CUG AND SERVCUG DATA
Subscriber/PBX specific and service specific
closed group data are displayed.
E N D
DISP CUG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP
This command
- assigns a subscriber (analog mainstation or ISDN) or PBX (analog, mixed or
ISDN) to a closed user group,
- enters data for the closed user group of a subscriber/PBX.
With the first assignment of a subscriber/PBX to a closed user group, the closed
user group is implicitly created in the public network.
A closed user group is identified by the international identification data
network identification code DNIC and the national identification
interlock code ILC.
The different closed user groups of a subscriber/PBX are identified by the
closed user group identification CUGID.
A subscriber/PBX can be a member of 100 different closed user groups.
The services which a subscriber/PBX can use within the closed user group can be
entered. For a mixed PBX, the analog part must explicitly be administered with
the parameter SERV=ANALOG.
With the assignment of the first closed user group to a service, the protocol
types for the service are adopted from the office data. The office data can be
determined with the command DISP CALLPOPT.
For an ISDN-DSS1 or analog subscriber/PBX the traffic restrictions within the
closed user group can be entered. The traffic within a closed user group may be
restricted either to only receiving calls or to only originating calls within
the specified closed user group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,DNIC=] <,ILC= ,SERV= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CUGBLK=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
the PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CUG-1 +
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which is
the international identification of the closed user group.
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
Notes:
- When entering a new closed user group, this parameter is
obligatory.
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the existing services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be entered.
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
Notes:
- This parameter is only relevant for ISDN-DSS1 and analog
subscribers/PBX.
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
ENTR CUG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies closed user group data of a subscriber/PBX The closed user
group data that can be modified are
- the authorizations for the traffic to/from the public network,
- the preferential closed user group.
These closed user group data are valid if no service-specific data are assigned
with the command ENTR SERVCUG.
Notes:
- At least one of the parameters NETAUTH, CNETAUTH, PCUGID and CPCUGID
must be entered.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CUGAUTH : [LAC=] ,DN= [,NETAUTH=] [,CNETAUTH=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],PCUGID= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,CPCUGID=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
the PBX.
NETAUTH NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter enters authorizations for the traffic to/from the
public network.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
Notes:
- the incoming traffic is only relevant for
ISDN-DSS1 and analog subscribers/PBX.
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
CNETAUTH CANCEL NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter cancels existing authorizations for the traffic to/from
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CUGAUTH-1 +
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the public network.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
PCUGID PREFERENTIAL CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter enters the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
CPCUGID CANCEL PREF. CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter cancels the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
E N D
MOD CUGAUTH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command cancels CENTREX Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features of
particular CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), this cancelation is done
for the default definitions of CAT codes. The default definition of this CAT
code is valid for all CENTREX groups of the switch that have no individual
assignment.
If a CENTREX group is specified, the cancelation is done individually for CAT
codes of the CENTREX group. If all CAT features (parameter CATFEA) of a
CENTREX group specific CAT code are canceled, the default definition is valid
again.
The command removes the CAT features of
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT codes
- a range of CAT codes
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] ,CATCOD= ,CATFEA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Leading zeroes may not be entered.
CATCOD CUSTOMER ACCESS TREATMENT CODE
This parameter specifies a number which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features.
CATFEA CUSTOMER ACC. TREATM. FEATURES
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment features.
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPM. LINE
LOCDIAL LOCATION DIALING
DCW DIAL CALL WAITING
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICK UP
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICK UP
DTA DIAL THROUGH ATTENDANT
CACDIAL CARRIER ACCESS CODE DIALING
CPECPU CPELINE CALL PICKUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXCATFEA-1 -
DISP CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command displays the Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features of particular
or all CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), the display is done for
the default definitions of CAT codes.
If one, several or all CENTREX groups are specified, the display is done for the
CAT codes of the CENTREX groups. In the output mask, the CAT features assigned
by default and the ones assigned individually for a CENTREX group are listed
separately.
The CAT features assigned by default and the ones assigned individually for a
CENTREX group are listed separately.
For one or no CENTREX group specified, the CAT features of
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges
- all CAT codes
can be displayed.
For several or all CENTREX groups specified, only the features of all CAT codes
are displayed (no value entered for CATCOD).
CAT codes without features will not be displayed. CENTREX groups are not
displayed in sequential order. CAT codes are displayed in sequential order.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] [,CATCOD=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies one or several existing CENTREX groups.
Leading zeroes must not be entered.
This parameter specifies a number which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features.
Input is allowed only if just one or no CENTREX group is specified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXCATFEA-1 -
ENTR CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command assigns CENTREX Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features to
particular CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), the assignment is done for
the default definitions of CAT codes. The default definition of this CAT code is
valid for all CENTREX groups of the switch that have no individual assignment.
If a CENTREX group is specified, particular CAT codes of the CENTREX group may
be defined that overrule the default definitions.
The command assigns the CAT features to
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] ,CATCOD= ,CATFEA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a CAT code which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features. If this CAT code is assigned to a CENTREX
station (e.g. ENTR CXSUB, parameter CATCOD), it authorizes the
usage of the corresponding CAT features.
CATFEA CUSTOMER ACC. TREATM. FEATURES
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment features, i.e.
authorizations that are activated by dialing an access code (created
with CR CXCPT, parameter TRATYP).
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPM. LINE
Customer Premise Equipment, i.e. specific customer
owned terminals such as paging units, may be
accessed by dialing an access code.
A location, e.g. a PBX, CENTREX stations or
non-CENTREX subscribers, may be accessed by
dialing an access code, which may be followed by
further numbers. As an example, this allows access
to the internal dialing plan of a (remote) PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXCATFEA-1 +
ENTR CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Call waiting on a busy subscriber may be activated
for a single call by predialing an access code.
The busy subscriber has to reside within the same
business group or, if no BGID (parameter COSDAT)
is assigned, within the same CENTREX group.
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICK UP
In order to pick up a call to a ringing station
within the same CENTREX group an access code
followed by the intercom number of the ringing
station has to be dialed.
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICK UP
Calls to the night service number may be picked up
by the stations of the CENTREX group by dialing an
access code.
In order to reach a destination outside the
CENTREX group, an access code followed by the
public B-party number has to be dialed. The call
is first presented to the MAC attendant who has
to permit the call.
Notes:
- Stations with the restriction RSTORIGF assigned
(e.g. ENTR CXSUB, parameters COS or SUBBGCOS)
can not use this feature.
The carrier may be specified by predialing an
access code.
CPECPU CPELINE CALL PICK UP
Calls to customer premises equipment may be
picked up by dialing an access code.
E N D
ENTR CXCATFEA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX CODE POINT
This command cancels a CENTREX code point in the CENTREX digit translator for
non intercom dialing sequences for a specified CENTREX group.
Notes:
- When cancelling the very last public network access code (TRATYP = PNASDT
or PNANDT) of a CENTREX group, all access codes with TRATYP = DTA and
all access codes USE-AR must previously be cancelled.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number from 1 to 9999 which identifies the
corresponding CENTREX group.
CXCODE CENTREX FEATURE ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the previously assigned one to five digit
access code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXCPT-1 -
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX CODE POINT
This command creates a CENTREX code point in the CENTREX digit translator for
non intercom dialing sequences for a specified CENTREX group.
1. CR CXCPT - CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
2. CR CXCPT - NORMAL NORMAL FEATURE ACCESS CODES
1. Input format
CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
This input format is used to create a CENTREX access code for Custom Calling
Features.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,TRATYP= ,FEA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the corresponding CENTREX group.
Notes:
- No leading zeros are allowed for the value of this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must have been previously created with the
CR CXGRP command.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX feature access code for the
Notes:
- The first digit may be either a pound sign (#), an asterisk (*),
or in the range 0-9. The second digit may also be a pound sign,
an asterisk or in the range 0-9, whereby the following restrictions
must be considered: If the second digit is an asterisk, the first
one must be an asterisk too. If the second digit is a pound sign and
the first one is a pound sign too, no further digits may follow.
If the second digit is a pound sign and the first one is an asterisk,
at least one digit in the range 0-9 must follow.
The remaining digits must be in the range 0-9 or as the very last
digit a pound sign for solving an ambiguity in the length of an
access code:
When an ambiguity exists in the length of an access code, the
pound sign must be input as the last digit for all but the largest
access code in the sequence. If a sequence is to be built ambiguous,
the smallest sequence must be entered first and no smaller one can
be entered afterwards.
- For access codes to usage of Abbreviated Dialing of type AB1COL0,
AB1COL1, AB2COL0, AB2COL1 and AB2COL2 the following rule
exists:
For ABxCOLy and x>y, the last n=x-y digits of the
access code must be in the range of 0 to 9.
- For the access code ACT-CCBS the length of code must not be
greater than 3.
- For the access code USE-ARNO the first digit of parameter
CXCODE must always be an asterisk (*).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-1 +
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the code
point.
CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
Indicates access for custom calling features.
Notes:
- Parameter FEA is required with this value.
- Both info units of FEA must be entered.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX subscriber controled features.
Notes:
- This parameter will only be allowed if the TRATYP parameter has
been entered with value CCFEA, no other optional parameters will be
allowed.
- This parameter must be entered with both units.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
Activates the feature identified by the second
unit of the parameter
ACTDAT ACTIVATE WITH/WITHOUT DATA
unit of the parameter with or without data
DACT DEACTIVATE
Deactivates the feature identified by the second
info unit of the parameter
DEL DELETE
Deletes the feature identified by the second info
DELDACT DELETE WITH DEACTIVATION
Deletes with deactivation the feature identified
by the second info unit of the parameter
ENTR ENTER
Enters the feature identified by the second info
ENTRACT ENTER WITH ACTIVATION
Enter with activation of the feature identified
REQALL REQUEST STATUS WITH DATA
Requests the status and data of the feature
identified by the second info unit of the
parameter
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
Requests the data of the feature identified by
the second info unit of the parameter
REQSTAT REQUEST STATUS
Requests the status of the feature identified by
USE FEATURE USAGE
Allows the usage of the feature identified by the
second info unit of the parameter
Indicates the type of activity desired by the subscriber
concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
ABBD ABBR. DIAL USAGE
CR CXCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Allowed values of unit 1:
USE
ABMOD1 UPDATE 1-DIG. ABBR. DIAL LISTS
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
AB1COL0 ABBR. DIALING 1 DIG. COLLECT 0
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
Prerequisites:
- At least one public network access code
(TRATYP = PNASDT or PNANDT) must
be existing for the given CENTREX group.
This does not apply to CENTREX Minigroup-s.
Notes:
USE
ATNBI ATTENDANT BARGE IN
Notes:
USE
ATNCO ATTENDANT CAMP ON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNEO ATTENDANT EMERGENCY OVERRIDE
Notes:
USE
ATNGMB ATTENDANT GROUP MAKE BUSY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNLOGON BASIC ATTENDANTS LOGON
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-3 +
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNNS ATTENDANT NIGHT SERVICE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNPMB ATTENDANT POSITION MAKE BUSY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CACO CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CALR CALLED LINE PRESENTATION RSTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCBS CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCRIB.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCNR CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCW CANCEL CALL WAITING
Notes:
USE
CLIR CALLING LINE PRESENTATN. RSTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CLIRREQ CLIR REQUEST
Notes:
USE
CLIRSUSP CLIR SUSPENSION
Notes:
USE
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DACO DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
DEBCL DET.BILL. DEPEND. OF TRA.CLASS
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, DELDACT, ENTRACT,
CR CXCPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REQALL
DEBNC DETAILED BILLING NEXT CALL
Notes:
USE
DIVA CALL DIV. TO FIXED ANNOU.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVAI 1-15 ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT, REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
DIVBYQS BUSY LINE DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVBYVMS VMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
DIVDAQS DONT ANSWER DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVDAVMS VMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
DIVIA CALL DIV. TO INDIV.ANNOU.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVIP CALL DIV. PARALLEL RINGING
Notes:
ACTDAT, ENTRACT, DACT,
DELDACT, REQALL
DIVIQS IMMEDIATE DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVIS DIV. IMMEDIATE WITH SCREENING
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-5 +
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVIVMS VMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVND DO NOT DISTURB DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVSAE DIV. TO SHORT ANNOU. EQUIP.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVTA DIVERSION TO ANSWER SERVICE
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
GFRWIAC GENL. FACILITY RST. W ALARM
Notes:
DACT
GFRWOAC GENL. FACILITY RST. W/O ALARM
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
REQALL
INFEAT IN FEATURE ACCESS
Notes:
USE
KEYWORD KEYWORD MODIFICATION
Notes:
ENTR
MCIREQ REQUEST MALICIOUS CALL IDENT.
Notes:
USE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SUBSCR. CONTR. INPUT 1
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
RCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
RSTSCI SERVICE RESTRICTION
CR CXCPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
SACO SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
SCLST SCREENING LISTS
Notes:
DELDACT
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LST CALL DIV.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, DEL, DELDACT,
ENTR, REQALL, REQDAT, REQSTAT
SCLSTO SCREENING LST ORIG. CALLS
Notes:
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LST SEL.RINGING / CW
Notes:
SCLSTT SCREENING LST CALL TERMIN.
Notes:
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LST CALL TERMIN. 2
Notes:
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
TRARSTR TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
Notes:
REQALL
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTR. SUSPENSION
Notes:
USE
VDP VOICE DATA PROTECTION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
VMSRETR VMS RETRIEVE USAGE
Notes:
USE
Identifies the feature being requested by the subscriber.
The type of activity affecting the feature is identified
by the first info unit of this parameter.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-7 +
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NORMAL FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This input format is used to create CENTREX access codes for all but Custom
Calling Features kind of traffic type.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],DEST= ]] ]
] CR CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,TRATYP= ]-,NEWCODE=] [,LAC=] ]
] ]],DN= ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,CAC=] [,CHKRSTR=] [,PRIMCODE=] [,MDR=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,COLDIG=] [,CHSITE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Prerequisites:
CR CXGRP command.
Notes:
access code:
When an ambiguity exists in the length of an access code, the
pound sign must be input as the last digit for all but the largest
access code in the sequence. If a sequence is to be built ambiguous,
the smallest sequence must be entered first and no smaller one can
be entered afterwards.
exists:
greater than 3.
CR CXCPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the code
point.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Indicates access to a Virtual Private Network
service. For the creation of an access code for
AWC parameter DEST or NEWCODE must be entered,
as well as parameter COLDIG.
Compatibilities:
- DEST (first info unit)
- NEWCODE (first info unit)
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
Incompatibilities:
- CENTREX group (CR CXGRP) with COS=AWC or
COS=AWCRMT.
Indicates subsequent dialing of a carrier access
code. Explicite dialing of a carrier access code
overrides all default carrier access codes which
may have been created before on exchange, CENTREX
group, subscriber or on specific access code
level.
CCPU COMMON CALL PICKUP
Indicates access to the features
Group Call Pickup (GCPU) and
Directed Call Pickup (DCPU)
using the same CENTREX feature access code.
Depending on the dialed digits, the following
feature is invoked:
Access code for CCPU:
Group Call Pickup
Access code for CCPU + CENTREX intercom number
to be picked up:
Directed Call Pickup
Indicates access for pickup of calls to
CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE.
If the Customer Premises Equipment Line is
locally connected, the combination of LAC
and DN parameters must be given. If it is
remotely connected parameter DEST or NEWCODE
is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE
Indicates access for customer premises equipment
line. If this equipment is locally connected, the
combination of LAC and DN parameters must be
given. If it is remotely connected parameter
DEST or NEWCODE is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
- CHSITE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-9 +
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICKUP
Allows pickup of a call at a specific station in
the same CENTREX group and in the same exchange.
DNATN DN OF ATTENDANT
Indicates access to an attendant station or to an
attendant group.
For the creation of an access code to a locally
connected attendant, the directory number of the
attendant must be entered using the combination
of LAC and DN.
For the creation of an access code to a remotely
connected attendant, parameter DEST or NEWCODE
(first info unit) is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
Indicates access to the public network through
an attendant station.
If the attendant is locally connected, the
combination of the parameters LAC and DN must
be given. If the attendant is remotely connected,
parameter DEST or NEWCODE is required.
The attendant must be member of the same CENTREX
group or if a BGID is assigned to the CENTREX
group (CR CXGRP, parameter COSDAT), member of
the same business group.
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
GCPU GROUP CALL PICKUP
GRPDIAL CENTREX GROUP DIALING
Indicates (remote) access to stations of a CENTREX
group with an assigned public directory number
(CR CXGRP, parameter DNDAT).
Notes:
- Parameter NEWCODE must be input, as well as
parameter COLDIG.
Compatibilities:
- CAC
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
Indicates access to a PBX equipment via location
dialing or to a non CENTREX subscriber or to a
CENTREX station. The addressed PBX equipment, the
non CENTREX subscriber respectively the CENTREX
station may be locally or remotely connected.
Notes:
CR CXCPT-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Parameter DEST or NEWCODE (both info units)
must be entered for both the local and the
remote case, as well as the parameter COLDIG.
- In case of an access code to a non CENTREX
subscriber or to a CENTREX station parameter
COLDIG must always be entered with value 0.
Compatibilities:
- DEST
- NEWCODE
- CAC
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICKUP
Indicates access for pickup of night service calls
when a CENTREX group has the night service call
pickup feature and has been assigned a night
service directory number.
OVRIPNAC OVERRIDE IMPLICITE PUB.NET.AC
Indicates access to the CENTREX features when the
CENTREX group has been created with the Implicite
Public Network Access feature (Minigroup).
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PNABNDT PNANDT BUSINESS CALL
Indicates public network access for a business
call, with no second dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PNABSDT PNASDT BUSINESS CALL
Indicates public network access for a business
call, with second dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PNANDT PUBLIC NET. NO 2ND DIAL TONE
Indicates public network access, with no second
dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
PNASDT PUBLIC NETWORK 2ND DIAL TONE
Indicates public network access, with second dial
tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
DEST DESTINATION AREA
This parameter specifies the name of a destination area.
Notes:
- The entered value must correspond to an existing newcode
destination area.
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values AWC,
CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA and LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NAME=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-11 +
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Identifies the newcode destination area (CR DEST, parameters
DEST, NEWCODE).
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
Identifies whether the type of calls terminating on the
destination area identified by the first info unit of
DEST, are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
- The second info unit used together with the first is required
for TRATYP value LOCDIAL. It indicates whether the PBX
equipment belongs to the administered CENTREX group or not.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the selected
CXCODE will be replaced.
Notes:
- The entered value must correspond to an existing code point
(CR CPT).
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values AWC,
CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, GRPDIAL and LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NEW CODE DIGITS=
Identifies the new code digits.
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
new code identified by the first info unit of NEWCODE,
are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number used for locally
terminated attendant stations, CPE line equipment, for pickup of
calls to the locally terminated CPE line equipment and for the
locally terminated attendant station used for the Dial Through
Attendant feature.
Notes:
- If the EWSD exchange is split in Local Areas, the parameter LAC is
required together with the DN parameter.
- The PRIMCODE parameter can optionally be entered with DN if the
TRATYP value is DNATN.
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values CPELINE,
DNATN, CPECPU and DTA.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number must have been previously assigned with the
CR DN command.
CR CXCPT-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter designates the local area code.
Notes:
- The DN parameter is required when entering this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The Local Area Code must have been previously assigned with the
ENTR AREACODE command.
This parameter specifies the carrier access code.
Notes:
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for traffic types
LOCDIAL, CPELINE, CPECPU, DNATN and DTA but only
for the remote case, i.e. when parameter DEST or NEWCODE
is also input.
CHKRSTR CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
This parameter defines whether traffic restrictions administered
with command CR SUB (parameter TRARSTR) must be considered
during call setup or not.
Notes:
- Parameter value YES means traffic restrictions must be
considered during call setup.
- Parameter value NO means traffic restrictions must be not
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for the traffic types
AWC, LOCDIAL, GRPDIAL.
- If parameter is omitted, default value YES in case of LOCDIAL
resp. NO in case of AWC will be set automatically.
N NO CHECK OF TRAF.RESTRICTIONS
NO NO CHECK OF TRAF.RESTRICTIONS
Y CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
YES CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
PRIMCODE PRIMARY ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies that the access code is to be used in the
event that the remote control unit (RCU) is isolated from the host.
The code point produced will be entered into the CENTREX group data and
thereby will be downloaded into the LTG. This access code will be used
in the LTG in Stand Alone Service at the RCU, as well as for ISDN call
signaling in order to support the automatic callback feature for
incoming calls to an ISDN terminal within CENTREX.
Notes:
- A primary access code is only allowed once for each allowed TRATYP,
and only for one public network access code (either PNASDT or
PNANDT, but not both), and is only valid for the traffic types:
- DNATN one per CENTREX group,
- PNANDT only one per CENTREX group, no second dial tone returned,
- PNASDT only one per CENTREX group, second dial tone returned.
- This parameter has two possibilities:
- YES will create a primary access code
- NO will nevertheless create a code point but it wont be
a primary access code.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXCPT-13 +
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO PRIMARY CODE
NO NO PRIMARY CODE
Y PRIMARY CODE
YES PRIMARY CODE
MDR MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
This parameter specifies whether Message Detailed Recording data is
to be collected during the call.
Notes:
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values:
PNASDT, PNANDT, DTA, DNATN, LOCDIAL, AWC,
CPELINE (only for remote CPE line equipment)
and OVRIPNAC (in case of a Minigroup)
N NO MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
NO NO MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
Y MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
YES MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of additional digits that must
be collected by the LTG, but not translated, for the access to:
- PBX equipment via Location Dialing
- Virtual Private Network via Area Wide CENTREX
- stations of a CENTREX group via CENTREX Group Dialing
Notes:
- For an access code with TRATYP = LOCDIAL leading to
non CENTREX subscribers or to CENTREX stations, parameter
COLDIG must always be entered with value 0.
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX code
point administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
E N D
CR CXCPT-14 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX CODE POINT
This command displays data for a specific access code or for a group of access
codes within a CENTREX group, for a specific traffic type or for a group of
traffic types within a CENTREX group, or for an entire CENTREX group when only
parameter CXGRP is entered.
Notes:
- If several parameters are specified at the same time only the data which
meet all requirements is displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXCPT : CXGRP= [,CXCODE=] [,TRATYP=] [,FEA=] [,DEST=] ]
] ]
] [,NEWCODE=] [,DN=] [,LAC=] [,CAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
- All access codes for the specified CENTREX group are displayed if
only this parameter is entered.
- When parameter CXGRP is not input, at least one of the parameters
DEST, NEWCODE, DN must be input.
This parameter specifies the existing CENTREX feature access code.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the
code point.
DNATN DN OF ATTENDANT
PNASDT PUBLIC NETWORK 2ND DIAL TONE
PNANDT PUBLIC NET. NO 2ND DIAL TONE
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICKUP
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICKUP
GCPU GROUP CALL PICKUP
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE
CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
CACDIAL EXPLICITE DIALING OF CAC
OVRIPNAC OVERRIDE IMPLICITE PUB.NET.AC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXCPT-1 +
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCPU COMMON CALL PICKUP
GRPDIAL CENTREX GROUP DIALING
PNABSDT PNASDT BUSINESS CALL
PNABNDT PNANDT BUSINESS CALL
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the required CENTREX subscriber controled
feature.
Notes:
- Input of this parameter is only allowed, when parameter TRATYP
is entered with value CCFEA. No other optional parameters
are allowed.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
Indicates the type of activity concerning the feature
entered with the second info unit.
b: FEATURE
DISP CXCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CW CALL WAITING
SCLSTO SCREENING LST ORIG. CALLS
STH STOP HUNT
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Identifies the feature that can be requested by the
CENTREX station.
This parameter specifies the name of the destination area.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the CXCODE
will be replaced.
DN PUBLIC DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXCPT-3 +
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
E N D
DISP CXCPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX CODE POINT
This command modifies the attributes of an existing CENTREX code point.
Parameter values may be modified if the new values are compatible with the
stored traffic type. This command does not modify the CENTREX group for which
the code point was created, neither the access code nor the TRATYP value.
Notes:
- This command allows the modification of several parameters at the same time.
- If the DN (Directory Number) of the attendant is modified using the command
MOD DN the old CXCODE of the attendant must be cancelled using the
command CAN CXCPT and created again for the new DN of the attendant using
the command CR CXCPT.
1. MOD CXCPT - CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
2. MOD CXCPT - NORMAL NORMAL FEATURES ACCESS CODE
1. Input format
CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
This input format is used to modify an existing CENTREX access code for Custom
Calling Features.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,FEA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Notes:
access code.
exists:
greater than 3.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-1 +
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The entered value must correspond to an already existing access code.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX subscriber controled features.
Notes:
- This parameter will only be allowed if the access code being
modified has been created with TRATYP value CCFEA. No other
optional parameters will be allowed.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
unit of the parameter with or without data
DACT DEACTIVATE
Deactivates the feature identified by the second
info unit of the parameter
DEL DELETE
Deletes the feature identified by the second info
Deletes with deactivation the feature identified
ENTR ENTER
Enters the feature identified by the second info
Enters and activates the feature identified by
Requests the status and data of the feature
identified by the second info unit of the
parameter
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
Requests the data of the feature identified by
Requests the status of the feature identified
USE FEATURE USAGE
Allows the usage of the feature identified by the
second info unit of the parameter
Indicates the type of activity desired by the subscriber
concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
MOD CXCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
Prerequisites:
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-3 +
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
MOD CXCPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-5 +
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DELDACT
MOD CXCPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
SCLSTO SCREENING OF ORIGINATING CALLS
Notes:
ACT, DACT, DEL, ENTR,
REQDAT, REQSTAT
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Identifies the feature being requested by the subscriber.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-7 +
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NORMAL FEATURES ACCESS CODE
This input format is used to modify CENTREX access codes for all but Custom
Calling Features kind of traffic types.
-
] ]
] MOD CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= <,DEST= ,NEWCODE= ,DN= ,LAC= ]
] ]
] ,CAC= ,CHKRSTR= ,PRIMCODE= ,MDR= ,COLDIG= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CHSITE=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Notes:
access code.
exists:
greater than 3.
- The entered value must correspond to an already existing access code.
Notes:
destination area.
- This parameter can be entered at code points created with TRATYP
value AWC, CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA or LOCDIAL.
MOD CXCPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: NAME=
Identifies the newcode destination area (CR DEST, parameters
DEST, NEWCODE).
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
destination area identified by the first info unit of
DEST, are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXCODE will be replaced.
Notes:
(CR CPT).
- This parameter can be entered at code points created with TRATYP
value AWC, CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, GRPDIAL or
LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NEW CODE DIGITS=
Identifies the new code digits.
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
new code identified by the first info unit of NEWCODE,
are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number used for locally
terminated attendant stations, CPE line equipment, pickup of calls
to the locally terminated CPE line equipment and for the locally
terminated attendant station used for the Dial Through Attendant
feature.
Notes:
- If the EWSD exchange serves different local area codes, the LAC
parameter is required together with the DN parameter.
- The PRIMCODE parameter can optionally be entered with DN if the
TRATYP value is DNATN. This parameter is compatible with the
TRATYP values CPELINE, DNATN, CPECPU and DTA.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number must have been previously assigned with the
CR DN command.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-9 +
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter designates the local area code.
Notes:
- The DN parameter is required when entering this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code must have been previously assigned with the
Notes:
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for traffic types
LOCDIAL, CPELINE, CPECPU, DNATN and DTA but only
for the remote case, i.e. when at creation of the access code
parameter DEST or NEWCODE was input.
Notes:
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for the traffic types
AWC, LOCDIAL, GRPDIAL.
PRIMCODE PRIMARY ACCESS CODE
Indicates that the access code is to be used in the event that the
remote control unit (RCU) is isolated from the host.
The code point produced will be entered into the CENTREX group data and
thereby will be downloaded into the LTG. This access code will be used
in the LTG in Stand Alone Service at the RCU, as well as for ISDN call
signaling in order to support the automatic callback feature for
incoming calls to an ISDN terminal within CENTREX.
Notes:
- A primary access code is only allowed once for each allowed TRATYP,
and only for one public network access code (either PNASDT or
PNANDT, but not both), and is only valid for the traffic types:
- DNATN one per CENTREX group,
- PNANDT only one per CENTREX group, no second dial tone returned,
- PNASDT only one per CENTREX group, second dial tone returned.
- This parameter has two possibilities:
- YES will modify a non primary access code into a primary
access code
MOD CXCPT-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- NO will modify a primary access code into a non primary
access code.
N NO PRIMARY CODE
NO NO PRIMARY CODE
Y PRIMARY CODE
YES PRIMARY CODE
This parameter specifies whether Message Detailed Recording data is
to be collected or not during the call.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered if the code point being modified was
created (see command CR CXCPT) for one of the TRATYP values:
PNASDT, PNANDT, DTA, DNATN, LOCDIAL, AWC, CPELINE
(only for remote CPE line equipment) and OVRIPNAC
(in case of a Minigroup)
This parameter specifies the number of additional digits that must
be collected by the LTG, but not translated, for the access to:
- PBX equipment via Location Dialing
- Virtual Private Network via Area Wide CENTREX
- stations of a CENTREX group via CENTREX Group Dialing
Notes:
- For an access code created with TRATYP value LOCDIAL and
leading to non CENTREX subscribers or to CENTREX stations,
parameter COLDIG should not be modified to any other value
than 0.
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX code
point administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXCPT-11 -
CAN CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command cancels a range of CENTREX directory numbers or a single CENTREX
directory number, that have been previously created.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which CENTREX directory
numbers are to be cancelled.
Notes:
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a logical range
of CENTREX directory numbers.
Notes:
- Intervals are to be entered in steps of 10, 100 or 1000.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXDN-1 -
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command creates a CENTREX directory number or range of CENTREX directory
numbers that are either locally or remotely connected. Each one will be assigned
to one CENTREX station within the CENTREX group. When the CENTREX directory
number (or range) is handled locally, the relationship between the CENTREX
directory number (or range) and the local public directory number (or range) is
defined. When the CENTREX directory number (or range) is handled as a remote
destination, the relationship between the CENTREX directory number (or range)
and a destination respectively a new code is defined.
Notes:
- This command must be entered prior to assigning a CENTREX subscriber with
the ENTR CXSUB command.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DN= ] ]
] CR CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= [,LAC=] -,DEST= [,CAC=] ]
] ],NEWCODE=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CHKRSTR=] [,MDR=] [,CHSITE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which CENTREX directory
numbers are to be created.
Notes:
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must have been assigned with the CR CXGRP
command.
This parameter specifies a CENTREX directory number or a range of
CENTREX directory numbers, used for intercom calls within a CENTREX
group.
It is only allowed to construct CENTREX directory number ranges
with the sizes 10, 100 or 1000. CENTREX directory numbers may be built
with the same sequence of another CENTREX feature access code or
CENTREX directory number already existing, if the last digit is not
equal. All digits but the last one of the code may be any digit ranging
from 0 to 9, but can not be of type character.
If an ambiguity exists in the length of a CENTREX directory number
sequence, the character # or C must be input as the last CENTREX
directory digit for all but the longest CENTREX directory number in the
sequence. If a sequence is to be built ambiguous, the smallest sequence
must be entered first and no smaller one can be entered afterwards.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXDN-1 +
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code, when the EWSD exchange
serves for more than one local area (code).
Notes:
- For an exchange with multiple DN volume this parameter is
mandatory.
Prerequisites:
- It must have been previously assigned with the
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a local public directory number (or a range of
local public directory numbers) which is to be assigned to a (range of)
CENTREX directory number(s).
Notes:
- To create a CENTREX directory number range the first part of the
corresponding local public directory number range must be entered,
the second part of this number being optional.
- To create a single CENTREX directory number a specific DN must be
entered corresponding to an existing directory number.
- When creating a range of CENTREX directory numbers the corresponding
local public directory numbers must have been created with at least
the same range size.
Prerequisites:
- The local public directory number must have been previously created
with the CR DN command.
Notes:
destination area.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXDN will be replaced.
Notes:
- The enterd value must correspond to an existing code point
(CR CPT).
Notes:
- This parameter is only possible for remote intercom dialing.
CR CXDN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- If parameter is omitted for remote intercom dialing, default
value NO will be set automatically.
This parameter defines whether Message Detailed Recording is to be
performed during the call.
Notes:
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX intercom
number administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXDN-3 -
DISP CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command displays the data of a specific CENTREX directory number or a
range of CENTREX directory numbers, or an entire CENTREX group.
Notes:
- The display of all existing CENTREX directory numbers will be performed
if parameter CXGRP only is input.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXDN : CXGRP= [,CXDN=] [,DN=] [,DEST=] [,NEWCODE=] ]
] ]
] [,LAC=] [,CAC=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
- All CENTREX directory numbers for the specified CENTREX group are
displayed if only this parameter is entered.
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a logical range
of CENTREX directory numbers.
Notes:
- Input of this parameter reduces the data being displayed to the
corresponding CENTREX directory number(s).
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the public directory number or a range of
public directory numbers.
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXDN-1 +
DISP CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the CXDN
will be replaced.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the kind of representation of the existing
CENTREX intercom numbers data.
STD output format results in display of all data administered by
commands CR CXDN, MOD CXDN.
DNTYPE output format results in display of CXDN, LAC and DN
together with the type of DN (SUB, PBX, PBXLN, CSGRP,
CALLTYPE) the CXDN has been created with.
STD STANDARD FORMAT
DNTYPE DNTYPE FORMAT
Default: STD
E N D
DISP CXDN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command modifies the attributes of an existing CENTREX intercom number
respectively of a range of CENTREX intercom numbers.
Parameter values may be modified if the new values are compatible with the
type of the existing intercom number (local or remote).
Notes:
- Local intercom number means, CXDN has been created with LAC, DN,
remote intercom number means, CXDN has been created with DEST or
NEWCODE.
- It is not possible to change the type of the existing intercom number
from local to remote or vice versa.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= <,DN= ,DEST= ,NEWCODE= ,LAC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CAC= ,CHKRSTR= ,MDR= ,CHSITE=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter identifies the corresponding CENTREX group.
Notes:
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a range of
CENTREX directory numbers of which the attributes are to be modified.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a public directory number (or a range of
public directory numbers) which is to be assigned to a (range of)
CENTREX intercom number(s).
Prerequisites:
- The public directory number must have been previously created
(CR DN).
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXDN-1 +
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
destination area.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXDN will be replaced.
Notes:
(CR CPT).
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- This parameter is only possible for remote intercom numbers.
Notes:
This parameter specifies how MDR is to be changed.
Notes:
MOD CXDN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX intercom number
administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXDN-3 -
CAN CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP
This command cancels an existing CENTREX group.
Notes:
The following data is automatically canceled together with the CENTREX group
data:
- CENTREX access codes created by the command CR CXCPT,
- CENTREX directory numbers created by the command CR CXDN,
- CENTREX subscriber controlled features modified by the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Prerequisites:
- All members of the CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All MAC of the CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All CENTREX code points assigned with NEWCODE existing for the
CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All CENTREX directory numbers assigned with NEWCODE existing for the
CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All zone points for the CENTREX group have been canceled.
(DISP CXZOPT).
- All resource data (directory number reservations and resource limits)
for the CENTREX group have been canceled.
(DISP CXGRPRES).
- All Common Service groups for the CENTREX group have been canceled.
(DISP CSGRP).
- CENTREX intercepts must not exist for the CENTREX group
(DISP CXINC).
- Trigger detection point data must not exist for the CENTREX group
(DISP INTRIG).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXGRP : CXGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXGRP-1 -
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX GROUP
This command defines a new CENTREX group and determines data that is valid for
all members of the group.
The number of CENTREX groups is restricted to 3000 within a switch.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR CXGRP : CXGRP= [,DNDAT=] [,COS=] [,COSDAT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
Each CENTREX group number occurs only once in a switch. Leading
zeroes must not be entered.
DNDAT DN DATA OF CTX GROUP
Assigns public directory number(s) to the CENTREX group. The number(s)
followed by the intercom number may be used to call a station of the
CENTREX group.
Notes:
- A CENTREX group may have up to 10 directory number(s) assigned.
- The directory number(s) may only be used by an public calling
party, if the CENTREX group additionally has the class of service
PUBDIAL assigned.
- Only one directory number per local area (ENTR AREACODE) is
allowed.
- The provider has to guarantee that the length of the directory
number(s) followed by the intercom number does not exceed the
network transport capabilities.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number(s) have to be created before (CR DN), and
must not be connected.
- The directory number(s) must not be within an account number
interval (ACCNO) or be part of a PBX volume (PBXVOL).
- The directory number(s) must not be reserved for another CENTREX
group (DISP CXGRPRES).
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE OF CTX GROUP=
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER OF CTX GROUP=
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXGRP-1 +
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter is at least specified either by DIGCTRL or HOOKCTRL.
If neither of the two values is entered, DIGCTRL is taken as the
default.
HOOKCTRL HOOKFLASH FOR FEAT.CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by hookflash.
DIGCTRL and HOOKCTRL are mutually exclusive.
DIGCTRL is taken as the default, if neither of the
two values is entered.
DIGCTRL DIGITS FOR FEATURE CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by control
digits.
DIGCTRL is taken as the default, if neither of the
two values is entered.
DISTRING DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Provides distinctive ringing sequences for calls
from business group internal and business group
external stations, or, if no BGID (parameter
COSDAT) is assigned, for calls from CENTREX
group internal and external stations.
SUBBGRNG and DISTRING are mutually exclusive.
IPNAC IMPLICIT PUBLIC NETWORK ACCESS
Assigns implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup). This public network access is not
used, when the access code OVRIPNAC (CR CXCPT)
is dialed.
SUPCHINF SUPPRESS CHARGE INFORMATION
Charge information for non-public calls
is suppressed.
DLVCXDN DELIV.OF CXDN IN BUSINESS GRP.
Within a business group the CENTREX directory
number is displayed to a subscriber who has
following COS values assigned:
COLP, if he is the A-subscriber,
CLIP, if he is the B-subscriber.
DIVANN DIVERSION IS ANNOUNCED
Within the CENTREX group call diversion
is announced to the calling subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding office data has to be set
(see MOD CALLPOPT, parameter CFWNOT).
PUBDIAL PUBLIC DIALING OF CTX GROUP DN
Allows public subscribers to dial the CENTREX
group directory number(s) (DNDAT) followed by the
intercom number in order to call a CENTREX
station.
Prerequisites:
- At least one directory number (DNDAT) must
exist for the CENTREX group.
SUBBGRNG SUBBUSINESS GROUP DIST. RING.
from subbusiness group internal and subbusiness
group external stations.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=SUBBGID
Local intercom numbers as well as remote intercom
numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive.
CR CXGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- CENTREX code points (CR CXCPT) with traffic
type (parameter TRATYP):
AWC
AWCRMT AREA WIDE CENTREX REMOTE ONLY
Remote intercom numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
COSDAT CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service
with data.
Each class of service with data (except CUSTROUT) has to
be specified by a second unit (b).
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
DIVBY DIVERSION ON BUSY
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that lead to
a busy station are diverted to the directory
number (CENTREX group internal or external)
specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
- In order to specify destinations outside a
CENTREX group or within a CENTREX minigroup
(COS=IPNAC), respectively, the public
network access code or the OVRIPNAC have
to be entered at the beginning of the digits.
DIVDA DIVERSION DONT ANSWER
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that are not
answered within a fix time period are diverted to
the directory number (CENTREX group internal or
external) specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC
have to be entered at the beginning of the
digits.
Calls of an A-side CENTREX station are routed via
the specified carrier (second unit b),
unless another carrier access code is specified
for a subscriber, PBX, PBX line, or for the code
point (CR CXCPT), or dialed.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier access code has to be created
(command CR CAC)
CUSTID CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
Assigns a customer identification to the CENTREX
group by the second unit (b).
CUSTROUT CUSTOMER ROUTING ACTIVATION
Customer routing is activated only by
the first unit. A second unit must not
be entered.
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXGRP-3 +
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- COSDAT=CUSTID
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
to a business group specified by the second
unit (b).
CPLX CENTREX COMPLEX IDENTIFICATION
to a complex specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
- The number of CENTREX complexes is restricted to
255 within a switch.
- To change the assigned CENTREX complex
identification, it has to be canceled first
(MOD CXGRP, parameter CCOSDAT) and
then redefined.
USENS USE NIGHT SERVICE
If an attendant group of the own CENTREX
group (parameter CXGRP) activates night
service (ACTNS), attendant group calls are
diverted to an attendant group of a foreign
CENTREX group. This foreign CENTREX group is
If the foreign attendant group has
also activated night service (ACTNS),
calls are further diverted to their
night service station.
Notes:
- To change the assigned foreign CENTREX
group, this feature has to be canceled first
(MOD CXGRP) and then redefined.
Prerequisites:
- The own and the foreign CENTREX group
are members of the same CENTREX complex.
- An attendant group within the
foreign CENTREX group provides
the feature PRVCSGRP.
USECXMOD USE MAC FOR CENTREX DATA MOD.
CENTREX database administration (CXMOD)
of the own CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
is done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group.
This foreign CENTREX group is specified by
the second unit (b).
Notes:
Prerequisites:
- A MAC of the foreign CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVCXMOD.
USETRAF USE MAC FOR TRAFFIC RECORDING
Traffic recording (TRAF) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is
done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX
group. This foreign CENTREX group is
Notes:
Prerequisites:
CR CXGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
provides the feature PRVTRAF.
CXORIG CENTREX ORIGINATION MARK
An origination mark used for zoning (CR ZOPT),
is specified by the second unit (b).
SUBBGID SUBBUSINESS GROUP IDENT.
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) to a
subbusiness group.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=BGID
KEYA KEY A OF TELEPHONE
The sequence of digits specified by the second
unit (b) is sent, when the key A of the
telephone is pushed.
KEYB KEY B OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key B of the
KEYC KEY C OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key C of the
KEYD KEY D OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key D of the
b: DIGITS=
The following values are allowed:
- DIVBY : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- DIVDA : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- CAC : 2..6 hexadecimal digits
- CUSTID : Up to 3 decimal digits
(without leading zeroes)
- CUSTROUT : (No second unit)
- BGID : Up to 8 decimal digits
Value: 2..16,777,215
- CPLX : Up to 3 decimal digits
- USENS : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USECXMOD : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USETRAF : Up to 4 decimal digits
- CXORIG : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 0..15
Default: 0
- SUBBGID : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 2..65,535
- KEYA : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
Further digits: B, C, 0-9
- KEYB : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYC : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYD : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXGRP-5 -
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP DATA
- data of a particular CENTREX group,
- data of up to 10 CENTREX groups,
- data of all CENTREX groups,
- data of the CENTREX group with specified directory number(s),
- data of all CENTREX groups with a specified local area code,
- data of all CENTREX groups with directory number(s) assigned,
- data of all CENTREX groups of a particular complex/(sub-)business group/
customer identification/carrier access code,
- data of all CENTREX groups of all complexes/(sub-)business groups/
customer identifications/carrier access codes,
- all CENTREX group numbers of a particular CENTREX complex,
- all CENTREX group numbers of all CENTREX complexes,
- owned/provided and used features of a particular CENTREX complex.
Notes:
- CENTREX groups, directory number(s), CENTREX complexes, (sub-)business
groups, customer identifications and carrier access codes are not displayed
in sequential order.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],DNDAT= ]] ;- ]
] DISP CXGRP : CXGRP= ]-,COSDAT=] [,FORMAT=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- Up to 10 parameter values may be linked with &.
- Input X is required, if the parameter COSDAT or DNDAT are
entered.
This parameter specifies the directory number(s) of the CENTREX group
as a selection criterion.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X is required.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT:CPLXOVW
CPLXFEA
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXGRP-1 +
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Specifies the local area code of the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If X is entered, the input X for the second unit
is required.
unit values.
Specifies the directory number of the CENTREX group.
unit values.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service with
data as a selection criterion. All CENTREX groups for a selected
COSDAT-value that may be specified by a second unit (b)
are displayed.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X is required.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Prerequisites:
- BGID, specified by the second unit (b).
b: DIGITS=
Optionally, following values may be entered:
Value: 2..16,777,215
Value: 2..65,535
This parameter specifies the output format of the display.
STD CENTREX GROUP DATA STANDARD
Displays all data valid for the CENTREX group.
CPLXOVW CENTREX COMPLEX OVERVIEW
Lists all CENTREX group numbers of complex
DISP CXGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
members.
Notes:
- If the CENTREX group numbers of a particular
complex are to be displayed, then the identifier
CPLX and identifying second unit (b)
must be entered for the parameter COSDAT.
- If the CENTREX group numbers of all complexes
are to be displayed, then no input is necessary
for parameter COSDAT.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X
is required.
CPLXFEA CENTREX COMPLEX FEATURES
For a specific CENTREX complex all CENTREX groups
together with their owned/provided and used
features are output.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X
is required.
- For parameter COSDAT the identifier
CPLX and identifying second unit (b)
must be entered.
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXGRP-3 -
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX GROUP
This command modifies the data of an existing CENTREX group.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CXGRP : CXGRP= <,DNDAT= ,CDNDAT= ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CCOSDAT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Assigns public directory number(s) to the CENTREX group. The number(s)
followed by the intercom number may be used to call a station of the
CENTREX group.
Notes:
- A CENTREX group may have up to 10 directory number(s) assigned.
- The directory number(s) may only be used by an public calling
party, if the CENTREX group additionally has the class of service
PUBDIAL assigned.
- Only one directory number per local area (ENTR AREACODE) is
allowed.
- The provider has to guarantee that the length of the directory
number(s) followed by the intercom number does not exceed the
network transport capabilities.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number(s) have to be created before (CR DN), and
must not be connected.
- The directory number(s) must not be within an account number interval
(ACCNO) or be part of a PBX volume (PBXVOL).
- The directory number(s) must not be reserved for another CENTREX
group (DISP CXGRPRES).
a-b
CDNDAT CANCEL DN DATA OF CTX GROUP
Cancels the directory number(s) of the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If the last directory number of the CENTREX group is canceled,
COS=PUBDIAL is canceled implicitly
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXGRP-1 +
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service.
HOOKCTRL HOOKFLASH FOR FEAT.CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by hookflash.
Thus, input of HOOKCTRL deletes DIGCTRL.
DIGCTRL DIGITS FOR FEATURE CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by control
digits.
Thus, input of DIGCTRL deletes HOOKCTRL.
from business group internal and business group
external stations, or, if no BGID (parameter
COSDAT) is assigned, for calls from CENTREX
group internal and external stations.
Thus, input of DISTRING deletes SUBBGRNG.
Assigns implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup). This public network access is not
used, when the access code OVRIPNAC (CR CXCPT)
is dialed.
Incompatibilities:
- For ENTR CXMDR the CTYP=STST must
not be assigned.
- The CENTREX code points must not have the
following parameter values assigned:
PNASDT
PNANDT
PNABSDT
PNABNDT
Charge information for non-public calls
is suppressed.
Within a business group the CENTREX directory
number is displayed to a subscriber who has
following COS values assigned:
COLP, if he is the A-subscriber,
CLIP, if he is the B-subscriber.
Within the CENTREX group
call diversion is announced to the
calling subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding office data has to be set
(see MOD CALLPOPT, parameter CFWNOT).
MOD CXGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Allows public subscribers to dial the CENTREX
group directory number(s) (DNDAT) followed by the
intercom number in order to call a CENTREX
station.
Prerequisites:
- At least one directory number (DNDAT)
must exist for the CENTREX group.
from subbusiness group internal and subbusiness
group external stations.
Thus, input of SUBBGRNG deletes DISTRING.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=SUBBGID
Local intercom numbers as well as remote intercom
numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive. Thus,
input of AWC deletes AWCRMT.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
Remote intercom numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive. Thus,
input of AWCRMT deletes AWC.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
CCOS CANCEL CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service to
be canceled.
Removes implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup).
Prerequisites:
- For ENTR CXMDR the CTYP=IPNAC must not be
assigned.
- The CENTREX code points existing for the
CENTREX group must not have the following
parameter values assigned:
OVRIPNAC
DTA
USE-AR
Removes translation of local intercom numbers
as well as remote intercom numbers via IN.
Prerequisites:
- Trigger detection point data must not exist
for the CENTREX group
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXGRP-3 +
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(DISP INTRIG).
Removes translation of remote intercom
numbers via IN.
Prerequisites:
- Trigger detection point data must not exist
for the CENTREX group
(DISP INTRIG).
with data.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that lead to
a busy station are diverted to the directory
number (CENTREX group internal or external)
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC have
to be entered at the beginning of the digits.
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that are not
answered within a fix time period are diverted to
the directory number (CENTREX group internal or
external) specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC
have to be entered at the beginning of the
digits.
NSN NIGHT SERVICE NUMBER
Calls to an attendant group that has
activated night service (ACTNS) are
diverted to a CENTREX directory number
(night service station) specified by
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=USENS
Calls of an A-side CENTREX station are routed via
the specified carrier (second unit b),
unless another carrier access code is specified
for a subscriber, PBX, PBX line, or for the code
point (CR CXCPT), or dialed.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier access code has to be created
(command CR CAC)
Assigns a customer identification to the CENTREX
group by the second unit (b).
Customer routing is activated only by
the first unit. A second unit must not
be entered.
MOD CXGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
to a business group specified by the second
unit (b).
to a complex specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
- The number of CENTREX complexes is restricted to
255 within a switch.
- To change the assigned CENTREX complex
identification, it has to be canceled first
(parameter CCOSDAT) and then redefined.
If an attendant group of the own CENTREX
group (parameter CXGRP) activates night
service (ACTNS), attendant group calls are
diverted to an attendant group of a foreign
CENTREX group. This foreign CENTREX group is
If the foreign attendant group has
also activated night service (ACTNS),
calls are further diverted to their
night service station.
Notes:
group,this feature has to be canceled first
(parameter CCOSDAT) and then redefined.
Prerequisites:
- An attendant group within the foreign
CENTREX group provides the feature
PRVCSGRP.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=NSN
CENTREX database administration (CXMOD)
of the own CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
is done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group.
This foreign CENTREX group is specified by
Notes:
group, this feature has to be canceled
first (parameter CCOSDAT) and then
redefined.
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVCXMOD.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group
must not provide one of the following features:
CXMOD
PRVCXMOD
USEMDR USE MAC FOR MDR
Message detail recording (MDR) for the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is done by
a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group. This foreign
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXGRP-5 +
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CENTREX group is specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
redefined.
Prerequisites:
- Message detail recording data is
already specified for the own CENTREX
group (ENTR CXMDR).
- a MAC of the foreign CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVMDR.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group must not
provide one of the following features:
MDR
PRVMDR
Traffic recording (TRAF) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is
done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX
group. This foreign CENTREX group is
Notes:
redefined.
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVTRAF.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group
must not provide one of the following features:
TRAF
PRVTRAF
CXORIG CENTREX ORIGINATION MARK
An origination mark used for zoning (CR ZOPT),
is specified by the second unit (b).
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) to a
subbusiness group.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=BGID
unit (b) is sent, when the key A of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key B of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key C of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key D of the
MOD CXGRP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: DIGITS=
- DIVBY : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- DIVDA : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- NSN : Up to 7 decimal digits
- CUSTROUT : (No second unit)
Value: 2..16,777,215
- USENS : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USECXMOD : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USEMDR : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USETRAF : Up to 4 decimal digits
- CXORIG : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 0..15
Default: 0
Value: 2..65,535
- KEYA : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYB : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYC : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYD : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
CCOSDAT CANCEL CL. OF SERV. WITH DATA
with data to be canceled. The corresponding second unit (b)
is also canceled.
NSN NIGHT SERVICE NUMBER
Notes:
- When the customer identification is canceled,
the class of service CUSTROUT is also
canceled implicitly.
Notes:
- When the business group identification is
canceled, COSDAT=SUBBGID and
COS=SUBBGRNG are also canceled
implicitly.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXGRP-7 +
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The CENTREX complex membership must not be
canceled, if
- one of the following classes of service with
data is assigned for the CENTREX group:
USECXMOD
USEMDR
USETRAF
USENS
- an attendant group within this CENTREX group
has one of the following diversions assigned:
USECSGRP
USELFCD
- an attendant group within this CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVCSGRP
- a MAC of this CENTREX group provides one of
the following features:
PRVCXMOD
PRVMDR
PRVTRAF
USEMDR USE MAC FOR MDR
Notes:
- When the subbusiness group identification
is canceled, COS=SUBBGRNG is also
canceled implicitly.
E N D
MOD CXGRP-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CENTREX GROUP
This command calls down the CENTREX traffic data every 15 minutes within the
specified recording period and outputs them to the specified output device.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT.
1. REC CXGRP - NOSEL NO SELECTION OF OUTPUT FORMAT
2. REC CXGRP - SELCTX CENTREX GROUP OUTPUT FORMAT
3. REC CXGRP - SUMMARY SUMMARY OUTPUT FORMAT
1. Input format
NO SELECTION OF OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format is for output of all data, without using any selection.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]GRP= ] ]
] REC CXGRP : -CXGRP= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a traffic object group for
whose elements (a maximum of 512 CENTREX groups) measurements
are to be obtained.
Notes:
- Only valid group names may be entered.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group number. A
maximum of 16 CENTREX group numbers can be linked with &.
Measurement of all CENTREX groups is possible.
output.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-1 +
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
REC CXGRP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-3 +
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
REC CXGRP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CENTREX GROUP OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format selects the CENTREX group basic data
and optionally further data for output.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]GRP= ] ]
] REC CXGRP : -CXGRP= ,FORMAT= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a traffic object group for
whose elements (a maximum of 512 CENTREX groups) measurements
are to be obtained.
Notes:
- Only valid group names may be entered.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the data to be output.
CTX CENTREX GROUP BASIC DATA
ATN - ATTENDANT / CONSOLE DATA
]FEA ] FEATURE DATA
~SUM - SUMMARY DATA
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-5 +
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
REC CXGRP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-7 +
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
REC CXGRP-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SUMMARY OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format selects only the summary data for output.
The parameter CXGRP accepts only the value X.
-
] ]
] REC CXGRP : CXGRP= ,FORMAT= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] ]
] ]
] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the data to be output.
SUM SUMMARY DATA
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-9 +
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
REC CXGRP-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC CXGRP-11 +
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
REC CXGRP-12 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXGRPLTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP LTG RELATIONSHIP
This command displays the association of CENTREX groups and LTGs.
This association is a result of the creation of CENTREX stations. A station of
a CENTREX group is connected via a DLU to one or two LTGs. Thus, the command
displays the representation of CENTREX groups at the LTGs.
If the parameter CXGRP is entered, all LTGs where the CENTREX group is
represented are displayed.
If the parameter LTG is entered, all CENTREX groups that are represented on
that LTG are displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]CXGRP=] ;- ]
] DISP CXGRPLTG : -LTG= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a Line Trunk Group in the switch.
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXGRPLTG-1 -
CAN CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
- CENTREX group resource limits and / or
- directory number reservations.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] <,DN= ,RESLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory, when a directory number will be entered and the
exchange has a multiple directory number volume.
- The parameter DN is required when a LAC is entered.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or a range of
directory numbers. The number(s) reserved for the given CENTREX group
will be released.
Prerequisites:
- All directory numbers within the given range have to reside in the
same directory number interval.
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMITS
This parameter specifies the resource limits to be canceled.
NUMCPUGR NO. OF CALL PICK UP GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of call pick up
groups created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter COSDAT.
NUMTDU NO. OF TRANSLATION DATA UNITS
Cancel restriction on the number of translation
data units created with CR CXDN or CR CXCPT.
NUMCSGRP NO. OF COMMON SERVICE GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of common service
groups created with CR CSGRP.
NUMCSSUB NO. OF COMMON SERV. SUBSCRIBER
Cancel restriction on the number of common service
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXGRPRES-1 +
CAN CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
subscribers created with ENTR CSSUB.
NUMTGRP NO. OF TASK GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of task groups
created with CR CDS.
NUMCTYPE NO. OF CALL TYPES
Cancel restriction on the number of call types
created with CR CALLTYPE.
NUMQUE NO. OF QUEUES
Cancel restriction on the number of queues
created with ENTR QUE.
SIZEQUE SIZE OF ALL QUEUES IN THE GRP.
Cancel restriction on the combined size of all
queues in the CENTREX group. The size of a queue
is administered with ENTR QUE, parameter SIZE.
E N D
CAN CXGRPRES-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXGRPRES
DNTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
This command displays the resource data of the specified CENTREX group(s).
The output depends on the input format.
The standard format (DISP CXGRPRES) displays for the given CENTREX group(s):
- the CENTREX group number(s);
- all directory number ranges reserved;
- a list of resources with their limit value and with their currently
used amount.
Only those resources are listed, which are actually used for the CENTREX
group or have a limit specified.
The detailed list with dntype format (DISP CXGRPRES) displays for the given
CENTREX group(s):
- the CENTREX group number(s);
- all individual directory numbers reserved for the given CENTREX groups
and within the given directory number interval;
- for each directory number, its type.
As a default the standard format (DISP CXGRPRES) is applied.
<job number>.
1. DISP CXGRPRES- DNTYPE DETAILED LIST WITH DNTYPE
2. DISP CXGRPRES- STD STANDARD FORMAT
1. Input format
DETAILED LIST WITH DNTYPE
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ,FORMAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group or a list of CENTREX
groups. This parameter restricts the display to the data of the given
CENTREX group(s).
Notes:
- Leading zeroes may not be entered.
- Up to 10 parameter values can be linked with &.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXGRPRES-1 +
DISP CXGRPRES
DNTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or directory
number range. It restricts the display to directory numbers
within the range.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number or, if a range is entered, the directory
number boundaries, have to be existing directory numbers.
- For a directory number range, the lower boundary may not exceed
the upper range boundary.
DNTYPE DETAILED LIST WITH DN TYPE
DISP CXGRPRES-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXGRPRES
STD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD FORMAT
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,FORMAT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group or a list of CENTREX
groups. This parameter restricts the display to the data of the given
CENTREX group(s).
Notes:
- Leading zeroes may not be entered.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT FORMAT
This is the default output format
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXGRPRES-3 -
ENTR CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
This command
- enters and modifies the CENTREX group resource limitations
and / or
- enters directory number reservations.
An attendant with permission to administer data of his own
CENTREX group or complex (created with ENTR CSSUB,
parameter FEA), may allocate EWSD database resources, which
need to be limited per CENTREX group.
The resources will be restricted to the specified resource
limits for the given CENTREX group. If no limit is
specified for a given resource, the attendant may not
allocate this resource.
If resource limits are specified, they are also valid for
command input by the EWSD operator. If no limit is
specified for a given resource, the use of this resource is
not restricted for the EWSD operator.
A specified directory number (range) will be reserved for the
given CENTREX group, i.e. for assignment of a CENTREX group
membership or creation of an attendant group an attendant may
only access those directory numbers, which are reserved for
the corresponding CENTREX group.
An EWSD operator needs no directory number reservation in
order to assign a CENTREX group membership. But a directory
number which is already reserved for a given CENTREX group,
may not be assigned to a different CENTREX group.
If a directory number is reserved for a CENTREX group, a
CENTREX specific intercept may be applied (created
with CR CXINC), if this number is called.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] <,DN= ,RESLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or a range of
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXGRPRES-1 +
ENTR CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
directory numbers. The specified number(s) will be reserved for the
given CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- All directory numbers within the given range have to reside in
the same directory number interval.
- No directory number within the given range may be connected to or
reserved for an other than the specified CENTREX group.
- If one of the input directory numbers resides within a
directory number extension (created with EXT DN),
then the whole input directory number range must be included
in the same extension.
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMITS
This parameter specifies the resource limits. The values specify the
maximum number of resources allowed to be allocated by the attendant.
Prerequisites:
- The specified limit for a resource may not be lower than the current
amount of resources in use.
a-b
a: RESOURCE LIMIT
NUMCPUGR NO. OF CALL PICK UP GROUPS
Restricts the number of call pick up groups
created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter COSDAT.
NUMTDU NO. OF TRANSLATION DATA UNITS
Restricts the number of translation data units
created with CR CXDN or CR CXCPT.
NUMCSGRP NO. OF COMMON SERVICE GROUPS
Restricts the number of common service groups
created with CR CSGRP.
NUMCSSUB NO. OF COMMON SERV. SUBSCRIBER
Restricts the number of common service
subscribers created with ENTR CSSUB.
NUMTGRP NO. OF TASK GROUPS
Restricts the number of task groups
created with CR CDS.
NUMCTYPE NO. OF CALL TYPES
Restricts the number of call types
created with CR CALLTYPE.
NUMQUE NO. OF QUEUES
Restricts the number of queues
created with ENTR QUE.
SIZEQUE SIZE OF ALL QUEUES IN THE GRP.
Restricts the combined size of all queues in the
CENTREX group. The size of a queue is administered
with ENTR QUE, parameter SIZE.
b: VALUE=
For each resource, following value ranges are allowed:
0... 4095 (for NUMCPUGR)
0...65535 (for NUMTDU)
0... 4095 (for NUMCSGRP)
0... 9999 (for NUMCSSUB)
0... 4095 (for NUMTGRP)
0... 4095 (for NUMCTYPE)
0... 4095 (for NUMQUE)
0...65535 (for SIZEQUE)
E N D
ENTR CXGRPRES-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CXINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command cancels an intercept code destination for a CENTREX group.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CAN CXINC : -NAME= [,CXGRP=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
INCEPT CENTREX INTERCEPT ID
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are to
be cancelled.
INREST INCOMING RESTRICTION
OUTREST OUTGOING RESTRICTION
NONWORK NON-WORKING CENTREX STATION
UNDEFCOD UNDEFINED ACCESS CODE DIALED
TOLLREST TOLL RESTRICTION
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which
the data are to be cancelled.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which intercepts
can be administrated.
This parameter has to be ignored, if a default intercept should
be administrated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXINC-1 -
CR CXINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command is used to define CENTREX group specific intercept handling,
as well as the default intercept handling used when CENTREX specific
handling is not needed.
1. CR CXINC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR CXINC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
3. CR CXINC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
4. CR CXINC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
Input format for creating an intercept code which, when it is accessed,
causes the originally required connection to be set up after all.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CR CXINC : -NAME= ,INRES= [,CXGRP=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
intercept code is accessed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXINC-1 +
CR CXINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be administrated.
CR CXINC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format to create an intercept code via which the digit translator
is re-accessed. An intercept code of this type serves to
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ]
] CR CXINC : -NAME= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,CXGRP=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXINC-3 +
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the digit sequence
to be used for retranslation.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
This unit specifies the new class to be used
for digit translation. Translation with another class
allows the accessibility of a destination to be restricted
(e.g. in order to prevent the destination being dialed
directly).
Default: CATAC
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
This unit specifies which tone is to be applied if
the intercept code is accessed. If the INRES parameter is
also specified for the intercept code, the tone is only applied
if the response specified by INRES (e.g. access an
announcement) is not possible.
This parameter unit specifies (in seconds) how long the tone
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
be administrated.
CR CXINC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies in which position the response created
by this command is located if several responses are created for
one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXINC-5 +
CR CXINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Input format for creating an intercept code reached via a destination
area to incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo suppressors) into the
connection.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ]
] CR CXINC : -NAME= ,INRES= ,DEST= [,CXGRP=] [,TONE=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
This parameter specifies the destination area to be accessed by the
intercept code.
CR CXINC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be administrated.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
without gaps.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXINC-7 +
CR CXINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an intercept tone
is accessed.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]INCEPT=] ;- ]
] CR CXINC : -NAME= ,TONE= [,CXGRP=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
CR CXINC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
be administrated.
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
without gaps.
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXINC-9 -
DISP CXINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command displays the intercept identification, intercept result, answer
supervision return, steering digits identification, destination area name, and
the sequence number for a CENTREX group.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXINC : <INCEPT= ,NAME= ,CXGRP=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
be displayed.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
X ALL VALUES
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which
the data are to be displayed.
be administrated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXINC-1 -
CAN CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX MDR DATA
This command determines
- single call types (CTYP) for which CENTREX Message Detail Recording
for a CENTREX group is not generated any more or
- that the entire CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a CENTREX group is not
generated any more.
Prerequisites:
- Canceling of all MDR data is not allowed, if
an MDR MAC still exists within the own CENTREX group (DISP DSB) or
an MDR MAC of another CENTREX group is used (DISP CXGRP).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXMDR : CXGRP= [,CTYP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an existing CENTREX group.
CTYP MDR CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call types for which MDR records are
not generated any more.
ATTEMPT CALL ATTEMPTS
STST STATION TO STATION CALLS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXMDR-1 -
DISP CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX MDR DATA
This command displays data for CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a
CENTREX group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CXMDR : CXGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies one or more existing CENTREX group(s).
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXMDR-1 -
ENTR CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX MDR DATA
This command is a precondition for CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a
CENTREX group.
If this command is executed for the specified CENTREX group for the
first time, the parameter MDR must be entered
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR CXMDR : CXGRP= <,MDR= ,CTYP= ,FRAUD=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
MDR MDR OUTPUT MODE
This parameter specifies the output mode for MDR data sent
to the MDR MAC (CR DSB, parameter FEA).
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT TO MDR MAC
BULK MDR BULK OUTPUT
MDR records are sent to the MDR MAC when
either the MDR buffer is filled or the MDR
time threshold is reached, whichever occurs
first.
The MDR time threshold has to be specified
by the second unit (b).
DEMAND MDR OUTPUT ON DEMAND
MDR records are sent to the MDR MAC when
a transfer request is initiated from the MDR
MAC. If there is no request, MDR records are
sent, when either the MDR buffer is filled or
the MDR time threshold is reached, whichever
occurs first. The MDR time threshold has to be
IMMED MDR IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
An MDR record is sent to the MDR MAC
immediately after its generation.
b: TIME THRESHOLD=
10,20,30,40,50,60, range of decimal numbers
The unit of the time threshold is minutes.
For the identifiers BULK and DEMAND a time
threshold must be specified. For IMMED a time
threshold must not be specified.
CTYP MDR CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call types for which MDR records are
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXMDR-1 +
ENTR CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
generated.
ATTEMPT CALL ATTEMPTS
MDR data are generated for attempted calls.
STST STATION TO STATION CALLS
MDR data is collected for CENTREX station
to station calls (both for intercom calls and
remote intercom calls).
Incompatibilities:
- The CENTREX group must not have the following
class of service assigned:
IPNAC
MDR data is generated for implicit public network
calls of stations of the CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must be a CENTREX minigroup,
i.e. the following class of service (CR CXGRP)
must be assigned:
IPNAC
FRAUD FRAUD PROTECTION
This parameter specifies the reaction, if a fraud is
detected.
CONTINUE CONTINUE MDR SERVICE
After detection of a fraud the transfer of
MDR data to the MDR MAC is continued.
STOP STOP MDR SERVICE
After detection of a fraud the transfer of
MDR data to the MDR MAC is stopped.
Default: CONTINUE
E N D
ENTR CXMDR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
- CENTREX station data of a CENTREX Private Branch Exchange (PBX) or
- the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX.
In order to cancel specific CENTREX data, the corresponding parameters
must be entered. In order to cancel the CENTREX group membership, only the
parameters LAC and DN must be specified.
It is not permissible to cancel the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX
if CENTREX PBX lines still exist for this PBX with individual station data.
If the PBX already has existing lines and the CENTREX membership is removed,
it is checked if the conversion is possible in one step. In this case a
dangerous command message is output. If the PBX lines are spread over too
many peripheral units (V5IF, DLU, LTG), then the request is rejected.
In this case the command can be repeated after manual cancellation of one
ore more PBX lines.
The request can start a long running job. In general the execution time
depends on the number of PBX lines connected to the PBX.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,NAME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the PBX directory number.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service within a
CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned
to a BGID.
DIVICO DIV. IMMEDIATE INCOMING ONLY
DIVBYICO DIV. BUSY LINE INCOMING ONLY
DIVDAICO DIV. DONT ANSWER INC. ONLY
DIVGRPO DIV. WITHIN CENTREX GROUP ONLY
AOCHICO ADD ON CONSULT. HOLD INC. ONLY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXPBX-1 +
CAN CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSTTERMF RESTRICT TERM. CALLS (FULLY)
RSTTERMS RESTRICT TERM. CALLS (SEMI)
CNIP CALLING NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CONP CONNECTED NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CNIR NAME ID.RESTRICTION
CNIRIGN IGNORE NAME ID.RESTRICTION
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI.
SUBBGCOS SUBBUSINESS GROUP COS
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service
within a subbusiness group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to a
BGID and a SUBBGID).
This parameter specifies the classes of service
with data to be canceled. The corresponding second
unit (b) is canceled implicitly.
CPUGRP CALL PICK UP GROUP
When cancelling the CHSITE, then the default
CHSITE is assigned.
NAME NAME OF PBX
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX PBX used for
identification purposes.
E N D
CAN CXPBX-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This command displays CENTREX station data of
- a specified CENTREX PBX,
- all CENTREX PBXs in a directory number interval,
- all CENTREX PBXs of a specified local area code or
- all CENTREX PBXs in the exchange.
CENTREX PBX data is displayed in the following order:
- for a multiple directory number volume, they are displayed per local
area code, for each local area they are sorted by directory numbers
in ascending order,
- for a unique directory number volume, they are sorted by directory
numbers in ascending order without regard to of the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CXGRP=] [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] ]
] ]
] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
interval.
Notes:
- For a directory number interval, the lower boundary must not exceed
the upper interval boundary.
Prerequisites:
- The entered directory number or directory number interval must exist.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXPBX-1 +
DISP CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
with data as a selection criteria.
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX PBX are
displayed, who have the entered subscriber class of service with
data assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX PBX
are displayed, who have the entered subscriber class of service with
data together with the input digits assigned.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP a specific value must be entered.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Since each subscriber is assigned a charging site
as default, for a selection also the second
unit (b) must be specified.
b: DIGITS=
- ARNO : 1..8 hexadecimal digits
- CPUGRP : 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
- CHSITE : 0..255, range of decimal numbers
Prerequisites:
This parameter defines the data which is printed.
If the parameter is not defined then the output format is determined
the following way:
- If only one CENTREX station is to be displayed then FORMAT=ALL
is applied.
- If parameter COSDAT is entered then FORMAT=DATA
is applied.
- In all other cases FORMAT=STD is used.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
The standard output contains the following
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN and NAME.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
The data output contain following information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS, SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
The all output, contains all data assigned to the
CENTREX subscriber:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, CATCOD, NAME, COS,
SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
E N D
DISP CXPBX-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This command
- assigns an existing Private Branch Exchange created by CR PBX
as a Multiline Hunt Group (parameter TYPE=MLHG) or
as a conventional Private Branch Exchange (parameter TYPE=PBX)
with or without direct inward dialing or
as a Remote Service Number (parameter TYPE=RSN) for Remote
Subscriber Controlled Input (parameter COS=RSNSCI)
with Q-signaling possibility (parameter TYPE=QSIG)
to an existing CENTREX group or
- enters CENTREX station data for an existing CENTREX Private Branch Exchange
(this CENTREX station data is valid for all lines of the PBX).
When a PBX is assigned to a CENTREX group:
- the input of parameters CXGRP is mandatory,
- the PBX can only be assigned to one CENTREX group,
- if the PBX already has existing lines, it is checked if the conversion is
possible in one step.
If the PBX lines are spread over too many peripheral units (V5IF, DLU,
LTG), then the request is rejected.
In this case the command can be repeated after manual cancellation of one ore
more PBXLN.
When PBX lines are connected to the CENTREX PBX then a dangerous command
message is ouput.
The request can start a long running job. In general the execution time
depends on the number of PBXLN connected to the PBX.
The following data can be assigned to a Multiline Hunt Group (TYPE=MLHG):
- a CENTREX directory number,
- a customer access treatment code,
- station classes of service,
- station classes of service with data,
- a call pick-up group,
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX (TYPE=PBX)
with direct inward dialing:
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX (TYPE=PBX)
without direct inward dialing:
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX of type Remote Service Number
(TYPE=RSN):
- station classes of service (only identifier RSCINOKW),
- station classes of service with data.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX with Q-signaling (TYPE=QSIG)
without direct inward dialing:
- a customer access treatment code.
Notes:
- Only PBX, which have a CENTREX directory number assigned, can be administered
from a MAC (created by CR DSB).
- When for the CENTREX PBX specific charging site information is
set up, then this information will be ignored by Call processing
in case of local and remote calls via IN-AWC. Both type of calls will then
be charged by means of the public zoning (SCP returns only public numbers).
Incompatibilities:
- The following PBX operation modes are incompatible with CENTREX:
- The following PBX classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CONFL
- For an analog PBX (OPMODE=AOG, AIC, ABW), the following PBX classes
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBX-1 +
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CLIRSUSP
CLIRREQ
- The following PBX classes of service with data are incompatible with CENTREX:
SERCOMP
OVRFIN1
OVRFIN2
OVRFIN3
OVRFEX
- The following PBX diversion types are incompatible with CENTREX:
ACTDIVCD
DIVCD
DIVCDMOD
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,CXGRP= ,CXDN= ,CATCOD= ,COS= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Input is mandatory if a PBX is to be assigned to a CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX directory number for intercom calls is created and
corresponds to the directory number of the PBX and does not have
to be modified.
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment (CAT) code.
ENTR CXPBX-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with command
ENTR CXCATFEA may be used.
Default: 0
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service within a
CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned
to a business group).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter COS.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVI.
Call diversion is only allowed for calls from
outside the CENTREX group/Business group.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX group/
Business group are diverted if the called
station is busy. Calls from within the
group receive busy treatment.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVDA.
station does not answer within a specified
time period. Calls from within the group
are not diverted.
Restricts all variants of call diversion.
Call diversion is only allowed to a destination
which can be reached by a CENTREX internal call.
Restricts the PBX class of service CT.
Only incoming calls (from outside the CENTREX
group/Business group) are allowed to be held.
Restricts the reception of calls to CENTREX group/
Business group internal calls only.
The restrictions RSTTERMF and RSTTERMS are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTTERMF
deletes RSTTERMS.
Business group internal calls only. Calls from
outside can be directed to the station concerned
only via stations with a call transfer or call
diversion feature.
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTTERMS
deletes RSTTERMF.
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX PBX
(parameter NAME) is presented to the called
CENTREX station.
The assigned name of the called CENTREX
station is presented to the calling CENTREX
PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBX-3 +
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The presentation of the name of the CENTREX
PBX (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
The restriction is ignored if the called/
connected station has the feature CNIRIGN
assigned.
Ignores the restriction CNIR of the
presentation of the assigned name of the
calling/connected station.
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI.
For Remote Subscriber Controlled Input
no keyword is necessary.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for PBX of TYPE=RSN
which has class of service RSNSCI assigned.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service
within a subbusiness group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to
a business & subbusiness group).
The classes of service within a subbusiness group (SUBBGCOS values)
are mutually exclusive with the classes of service within the
business group (COS values).
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same values
are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVI.
Call diversion is only allowed for calls from
outside the CENTREX Subbusiness group.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group are diverted if the
called station is busy. Calls from within
the group receive busy treatment.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVDA.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the
called station does not answer within a
specified time period. Calls from within
the group are not diverted.
Restricts the PBX class of service CT.
Only incoming calls (from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group) are allowed to be held.
Restricts the reception of calls to CENTREX
Subbusiness group internal calls only.
deletes RSTTERMS.
Subbusiness group internal calls only. Calls
from outside can be directed to the station
concerned only via stations with a call
transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
ENTR CXPBX-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes
of service with data.
The classes of service with data has to be specified
by a second unit (b).
a-b
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
The specified account is used for charging, unless
another account is dialed.
The specified account record number is added to
each AMA record as additional billing information.
This parameter value specifies the call pick-up
group.
If the PBX is the first member for the specified
call pick-up
group, the call pick-up group is implicitly
created. In a switch up to 65,535 call pick-up
groups can be created.
All members of one call pick-up group reside in
the same CENTREX group. Within the CENTREX group
the call pick-up group number isunique.
The number of call pick-up groups per CENTREX
group must not exceed the value of NUMCPUGR for
parameter RESLIM (see DISP CXGRPRES).
A CENTREX PBX cannot be assigned to more than one
call pick-up group. If the PBX is a member in call
pick-up group A and call pick-up group number B is
specified, the membership is changed from group A
to B.
The assignment of a call pick-up group is rejected
for a CENTREX PBX with terminating line trigger.
This parameter value specifies the charging site
to which the CENTREX PBX belongs in the CXGRP.
If during the creation of the CENTREX Private
branch exchange no CHSITE is given, then the
CENTREX private branch exchange is assigned the
default CHSITE.
Default: 1
b: DIGITS=
NAME NAME OF PBX
This parameter specifies the name which can be assigned to the
CENTREX PBX for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBX-5 -
CAN CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX PBX LINE
This command cancels the specified CENTREX data related to a CENTREX line.
If no CENTREX data is specified (i.e. only the parameters LAC, DN, OPMODE
and LNO are input), all individual CENTREX data of the line is canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,CATCOD=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] [,NAME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Input is mandatory if the PBX comprises more than one
operating mode.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
Notes:
- If the CAT code is canceled, the CAT code of the PBX is valid
for this PBX line.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXPBXLN-1 +
CAN CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes of service
within a CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX
group is assigned to a BGID.
CWORIG CALL WAITING ORIGINATING
CTATNO CALL TRANS. TO ATTENDANT ONLY
CTGRPO CALL TRANS. WITHIN GROUP ONLY
CTICO CALL TRANS. INCOMING ONLY
CTOGO CALL TRANS. OUTGOING ONLY
RSTORIGF RESTRICT ORIG. CALLS (FULLY)
RSTORIGS RESTRICT ORIG. CALLS (SEMI)
CNIP CALL. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CONP CONN. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
BGID and a SUBBGID.
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NO.
NAME NAME OF PBXLN
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX PBX line used
for identification purposes.
E N D
CAN CXPBXLN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX PBX LINE
This command displays CENTREX station data of
- a specified line of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of an operating mode of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs in a directory number interval,
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs of a specified local area code or
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs in the exchange.
CENTREX lines are displayed per operating mode per CENTREX PBX. The CENTREX
PBXs are listed as follows:
- for a multiple directory number volume they are grouped per local area code,
for each local area they are listed by directory numbers in ascending order,
- for unique directory number volume they are listed by directory numbers in
ascending order without regard to of the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] [,CXGRP=] ]
] ]
] [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
interval.
Notes:
the upper interval boundary.
Prerequisites:
This parameter specifies an operating mode of the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXPBXLN-1 +
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a line number of an operating mode of the PBX.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX PBX lines are
data assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX PBX lines
Prerequisites:
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
b: DIGITS=
Prerequisites:
the following way:
is applied.
is applied.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, NAME, OPMODE and LNO.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
The data output contain following
information:
LAC, DN, OPMODE, LNO, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS, SUBBGCOS
and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
The all output contains all data assigned to the
DISP CXPBXLN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CENTREX PBX line.
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, CATCOD, NAME,
COS, SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXPBXLN-3 -
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX PBX LINE
This command assigns individual CENTREX station data to a line of a CENTREX PBX
created as a Multiline Hunt Group. (Note, that if no individual CENTREX station
data is assigned to the line, the station data defined at the PBX level is
relevant.)
If classes of service are assigned to the line, this data is valid in addition
to the classes of service defined at the PBX level.
If subbusiness group classes of service are assigned to the line, this data is
valid in addition to the subbusiness group classes of service defined at the
PBX level.
Notes:
- Only lines, which have been assigned a CENTREX directory number, can be
administered from a MAC (created by CR DSB).
Incompatibilities:
- The following PBX line classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CONFL
- For an analog PBX line (CAT=MS, CAT=CTM), the following PBX line
classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CLIRSUSP
CLIRREQ
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= <,CXDN= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CATCOD= ,COS= ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Input is mandatory if the PBX comprises more than one
operating mode.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN-1 +
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
Prerequisites:
corresponds to the line service number of the PBX line and thus
does not have to be modified.
- One of the following PBX line classes of service must be assigned:
DCANORM
DCAHUNT
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with
Notes:
- If no customer access treatment (CAT) code is assigned to the
line, the CAT code of the PBX is valid.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes of service within
a CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX group is
assigned to a business group).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter COS.
Allows an originating CENTREX to wait for a
busy subscriber in the same CENTREX group/
Business group, even if the terminating
subscriber does not have a call waiting
feature.
Restricts the line diversion types DIVI.
Call diversion is allowed only for calls from
outside the CENTREX group/Business group.
Prerequisites:
- The following PBX line class of service is
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVBY.
station is busy. Calls from within the group
receive busy treatment.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
ENTR CXPBXLN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restricts the line diversion type DIVDA.
are not diverted.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Call diversion is allowed only to a destination
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the PBX line classes of service
CALLHOLD
CONF3
and the PBX class of service CT.
Only incoming calls (from outside the
CENTREX group/Business group) are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX group/
Business group are allowed to be
transferred only to an attendant.
This restriction is not valid for A-side call
transfer (CTAS).
The call transfer restrictions CTATNO,
CTGRPO, CTICO and CTOGO are mutually
exclusive. Thus, input of CTATNO deletes
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only if controller
and add-on subscriber are members of the same
CENTREX group/Business group.
exclusive. Thus, input of CTGRPO deletes
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX group/
Business group are allowed to be
transferred to an add-on subscriber within
the same CENTREX group.
The restriction is not valid for A-side call
transfer (CTAS).
exclusive. Thus, input of CTICO deletes
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only if the original
subscriber is a member of the same CENTREX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN-3 +
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
group/Business group and the add-on subscriber
is not a member.
exclusive. Thus, input of CTOGO deletes
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Restricts the origination of calls to CENTREX
group/Business group internal calls only.
The restrictions RSTORIGF and RSTORIGS are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTORIGF
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The station may also call a station
with call transfer or call diversion authorization
in order to get a connection outside the CENTREX
group.
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTORIGS
deletes RSTORIGF.
Calls from outside can be directed to the
station concerned only via stations with a call
deletes RSTTERMF.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX PBX
line (parameter NAME) is presented to the
called station.
station is presented to the calling
CENTREX PBX line.
PBX line (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
assigned.
ENTR CXPBXLN-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same values
are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts the line diversion types DIVI.
outside the CENTREX Subbusiness group.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVBY.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the called
station is busy. Calls from within the group
receive busy treatment.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVDA.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the called
are not diverted.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the PBX line classes of service
CALLHOLD
CONF3
and the PBX class of service CT.
CENTREX Subbusiness group) are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group are allowed to be
transferred only to an attendant.
transfer (CTAS).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN-5 +
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only if controller
CENTREX Subbusiness group.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group are allowed to be
transferred to an add-on subscriber within
the same CENTREX group.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
Subbusiness group and the add-on subscriber
is not a member.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The station may also call a station
with call transfer or call diversion authorization
in order to get a connection outside the CENTREX
group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
ENTR CXPBXLN-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
station concerned only via stations with a call
deletes RSTTERMF.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes
a-b
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NO.
Notes:
- If no account record number is assigned, the
account record number specified on PBX level is
valid for the line.
b: DIGITS=
- ARNO : 1..8 decimal digits
NAME NAME OF PBXLN
CENTREX PBX line for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN-7 -
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE
This command displays CENTREX subscriber controled operation
and feature data.
Notes:
- If several parameters are specified at the same time,
only the data which meet all requirements are displayed.
- Initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input data
will be displayed when no CENTREX group number is specified.
These initial values are valid for all CENTREX groups
of those SCI data never before modified by entering the
specific CENTREX group number within the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP CXSCFEA : <CXGRP= ,FEA= ,MARKS= ,RSTSCI=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number which identifies the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- Data of all features for the specified CENTREX group will be
displayed if only this parameter is entered.
- For display of initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input
data this parameter must be omitted.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX features.
Notes:
- For display of initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled
input data FEA=X-X must be input and parameter CXGRP
must be omitted.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
REQALL REQUEST STATUS AND DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
X ALL VALUES
Indicates the type of activity desired by the CENTREX
station concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXSCFEA-1 +
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVI DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY LINE
DIVND DIVERSION DO NOT DISTURB
DIVAI DIVERSION TO ANNOU 1 OF 15
DIVIVMS DIVI TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
DIVBYVMS DIVBY TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
DIVDAVMS DIVDA TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
VMSRETR VOICE MAIL SYSTEM RETRIEVAL
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALING
CLIR CALLING LINE PRESENTATION RSTR
HOTLDEL HOT LINE DELAYED
TRARSTR OUTGOING TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
GFRWIAC GEN.FAC.RESET WITH ALARM CALLS
GFRWOAC GEN.FAC.RESET W/O ALARM CALLS
RSTSCI RESTRICTION FOR SCI
RCS REVERSE CHARGE SECURITY
CACO CASUAL APPOINTMENT CALL ORDER
DACO DAILY APPOINTMENT CALL ORDER
CCBS CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB
CW CALL WAITING
DIVIA DIVERSION INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT
DIVA DIV. TO FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT
SCLSTO SCREENING LIST ORIGINATING
STH STOP HUNT
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSIONS
SCLSTT SCREENING LIST TERMINATING
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LIST RINGING/CW
DIVIP DIV IMMEDIATE PARALLEL RINGING
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LIST TERMINATING 2
MCIREQ MCI ON REQUEST
CCNR CALL COMPLETION NO REPLY
DIVBYQS DIVERSION BUSY QSIG
DIVDAQS DIVERSION DO NOT ANSWER QSIG
DIVIQS DIVERSION IMMEDIATE QSIG
X ALL VALUES
CENTREX station.
DISP CXSCFEA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the marks for a CENTREX subscriber
controled feature.
BLKD SERVICE TYPE BLOCKED
UNBLKD SERVICE TYPE UNBLOCKED
AUTH AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
NOAUTH NO AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
KEYWD KEYWORD REQUIRED
NOKEYWD NO KEYWORD REQUIRED
RSCI REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
NORSCI NO REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
GFR GENERAL FACILITY RESET ALLOWED
NOGFR NO GENERAL FAC. RESET ALLOWED
UI USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
NOUI NO USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
RSTSCI RESTRICTION CLASS FOR SCI
This parameter specifies the restriction class for CENTREX
subscriber controled operation and feature data.
RSTSCI0 NO SCI RESTRICTION
RSTSCI1 SCI RESTRICTION CLASS 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXSCFEA-3 -
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE
This command modifies CENTREX subscriber controled operation and
feature data.
Notes:
- Initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input data
will be modified when no CENTREX group number is specified.
These initial values are valid for all CENTREX groups
of those SCI data never before modified by entering the
specific CENTREX group number within the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD CXSCFEA : [CXGRP=] ,FEA= <,MARKS= ,RSTSCI= ,INCSUC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,INCERR=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number which identifies the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted the initial values of CENTREX
subscriber controled input data will be modified.
Prerequisites:
CR CXGRP command.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX features.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
REQALL REQUEST STATUS AND DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
X ALL ACTIVITIES
Indicates the type of activity desired by the CENTREX
station concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-1 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REQALL
- Allowed values of parameter MARKS:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
KEYWD, NOKEYWD, RSCI, NORSCI,
GFR, NOGFR, UI, NOUI
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY LINE
Notes:
REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH, NOAUTH,
DIVAI DIVERSION 1-15 ANNOUNCEMENT
Notes:
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
MOD CXSCFEA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOKEYWD, NORSCI, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH, KEYWD,
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-3 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
KEYWD, NOKEYWD, NORSCI,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DACT
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DACT
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
MOD CXSCFEA-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, NOAUTH,
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
When unit 1 is ACT or DACT:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Else:
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
When unit 1 is ACT or DACT:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Else:
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-5 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
DIVIA DIV. INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
MOD CXSCFEA-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
ENTR
NORSCI, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-7 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
GFR, NOGFR, NOUI
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSIONS
Notes:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LIST RINGING/CW
Notes:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
DELDACT
NOGFR, UI, NOUI
DIVIP DIV IMMEDIATE PARALLEL RINGING
Notes:
MOD CXSCFEA-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTDAT, DACT, DELDACT,
ENTRACT, REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, NOAUTH, KEYWD,
NOKEYWD,NORSCI, NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, DELDACT,
ENTRACT, REQALL
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LIST TERMINATING 2
Notes:
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
MCIREQ MCI ON REQUEST
Notes:
USE
BLKD, UNBLKD, AUTH,
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
NOGFR, NOUI
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-9 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVBYQS DIVERSION BUSY QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT
DIVDAQS DIVERSION DO NOT ANSWER QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT
DIVIQS DIVERSION IMMEDIATE QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT
CENTREX station.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the marks for a CENTREX subscriber
controled feature.
BLKD SERVICE TYPE BLOCKED
UNBLKD SERVICE TYPE UNBLOCKED
AUTH AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
NOAUTH NO AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
KEYWD KEYWORD REQUIRED
NOKEYWD NO KEYWORD REQUIRED
RSCI REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
NORSCI NO REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
GFR GENERAL FACILITY RESET ALLOWED
NOGFR NO GENERAL FAC. RESET ALLOWED
UI USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
NOUI NO USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
Allowed values of parameter MARKS are depending
on entered values at parameter FEA. For detailed
information see Notes to the parameter values
(unit 2) of parameter FEA.
Prerequisites : GFR, NOGFR, UI, NOUI
are only allowed for ACTIVITY (unit 1) of parameter
FEA = X
Default: BLKD
RSTSCI RESTRICTION CLASS FOR SCI
This parameter specifies a restriction class to which CENTREX
subscriber controled features (entered with parameter FEA)
will be assigned.
Restriction classes may be activated by the operator using the
command CR SUB or by the CENTREX station using the previously
created access code for ENTR-RSTSCI.
RSTSCI0 NO SCI RESTRICTION
MOD CXSCFEA-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: RSTSCI0
INCSUC INTERCEPT BY SUCCESS
This parameter specifies an intercept identifier
for successful input.
With FEA=USE-nnnnnn parameter INCSUC is not permitted.
SCISUC SCI SUCCESSFUL
SCIUNSUC SCI UNSUCCESSFUL
FEAYACT FEATURE YET ACTIVE
FEAYDACT FEATURE YET DEACTIVE
FEANSUB FEATURE NOT SUBSCRIBED
FEAUNSUC FEATURE UNSUCCESSFUL
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INPACC INPUT ACCEPTED
FEAACT FEATURE ACTIVE
DACHKSUC DATA CHECK SUCCESSFUL
INPTREJ INPUT TEMPORARILY REJECTED
INPREJ INPUT REJECTED
FEAINACT FEATURE INACTIVE
NODATA NO DATA AVAILABLE
DACHKERR DATA CHECK ERROR
REPALC REPEAT ALARM CLOCK
CFWNOREJ CFW NUMBER REJECTED
SCIREP2 SCI RESPONSE 02
Default: SCISUC
INCERR INTERCEPT BY ERROR
This parameter specifies an intercept identifier
for unsuccessful input.
With FEA=USE-nnnnnn parameter INCERR is not permitted.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXSCFEA-11 +
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: SCIUNSUC
E N D
MOD CXSCFEA-12 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
- selected CENTREX station data of a CENTREX subscriber or
- the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX subscriber.
If specific CENTREX data is to be canceled, the corresponding parameters
must be entered. In order to cancel the CENTREX group membership, only the
parameters LAC and DN have to be specified.
It is not permissible to cancel the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX
subscriber
- if this subscriber still belongs to a common service group (created
with CR CSGRP),
- if the CENTREX directory number of the subscriber is specified as the
link failure call diversion number of a common service group,
- if the CENTREX directory number of the subscriber is specified as the
night service number of the CENTREX group.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,NAME=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes of service,
within a CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX group
is assigned to a BGID.
CWICO CALL WAITING INCOMING ONLY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXSUB-1 +
CAN CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNIP CALL. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CONP CONN. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI
NOATNBI NO ATTENDANT BARGE IN
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes of service
BGID and a SUBBGID.
When cancelling the CHSITE, then the default
CHSITE is assigned.
NAME NAME OF SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX subscriber used for
identification purposes.
E N D
CAN CXSUB-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
This command displays the CENTREX station data of
- a specified CENTREX subscriber,
- all CENTREX subscribers in a directory number interval,
- all CENTREX subscribers of a specified local area code,
- all CENTREX subscribers in the exchange.
CENTREX subscriber data is displayed in the following order:
- for multiple directory number volume, they are displayed per local area code,
for each local area they are listed by directory numbers in ascending order,
- for unique directory number volume, they are listed by directory numbers in
ascending order without regard to the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CXGRP=] [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] ]
] ]
] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number or the directory
number interval.
Notes:
the upper boundary.
Prerequisites:
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXSUB-1 +
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX subscribers are
data assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX subscribers
Prerequisites:
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Since each subscriber is assigned a charging site
as default, for a selection also the second
unit (b) must be specified.
b: DIGITS=
Prerequisites:
For parameter CXGRP a specific value must be entered.
the following way:
is applied.
is applied.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN and NAME.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
The data output contain following information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS, SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
The all output, contains all data assigned to
the CENTREX subscriber:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, CATCOD, NAME,
COS, SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
E N D
DISP CXSUB-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
This command
- assigns an existing subscriber
created as an analog main station (CR SUB, parameter CAT=MS) or
created as an analog mobile station (parameter CAT=CTM) or
created as ISDN EDSS1 subscriber (parameter CAT=IBA) or
created as a virtual subscriber (parameter CAT=VIRTSUB) with
class of service RSNSCI, SNLUISCI or SNRUISCI assigned to or
prepared to become a CENTREX attendant on a MAC (parameter CAT=IDSB)
to an existing CENTREX group or
- enters CENTREX station data for an existing CENTREX subscriber.
When a subscriber is assigned to a CENTREX group:
- the parameters CXGRP and CXDN must be entered,
- the subscriber can only be assigned to one CENTREX group,
- the subscriber must be connected to a Digital Line Unit (DLU) or a V5
interface (V5IF) via Line Trunk Group B (LTGB).
- the CENTREX directory number for intercom calls is created with the command
CR CXDN and corresponds to the directory number of the subscriber,
- the subscriber must not yet belong to a common service group for OSS.
- the maximum number of 90 CENTREX groups per LTG must not be exceeded.
Notes:
- If a directory number of a Multiple Subscriber Number port is assigned to a
CENTREX group, all other directory numbers of the port should also be made
CENTREX. They can be assigned to different CENTREX groups, but the CENTREX
directory numbers must be unique for the port to identify the origination of
a call.
Incompatibilities:
- For subscribers with CAT=IDSB, the following CENTREX subscriber classes
of service are incompatible:
DIVICO
DIVBYICO
DIVDAICO
DIVGRPO
- The following subscriber line attributes are incompatible with CENTREX:
DIFFRING
- The following subscriber classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CONFL
ECLN
PRIMDN
SECDN
- For an analog subscriber (CAT=MS, CAT=CTM), the following subscriber
classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
CLIRSUSP
CLIRREQ
- The following subscriber classes of service with data are incompatible with
CENTREX:
SERCOMP
- The following subscriber diversion types are incompatible with CENTREX:
ACTDIVCD
DIVCD
DIVCDMOD
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CXGRP=] <,CXDN= ,CATCOD= ,COS= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXSUB-1 +
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Input is mandatory if a subscriber is to be assigned to a CENTREX
group.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if a subscriber is to be assigned to a
CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
corresponds to the directory number of the subscriber.
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with command
Default: 0
within a CENTREX group or a business group (when the CENTREX group
is assigned to a business group).
The classes of service within a business group (COS values)
subbusiness group (SUBBGCOS values).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if
the same values are entered for parameter COS.
Restricts call waiting to calls from outside the
Allows an originating CENTREX subscriber to
ENTR CXSUB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
wait for a busy subscriber in the CENTREX group/
Business group, even if the terminating subscriber
does not have a call waiting feature.
Restricts the subscriber diversion types DIVI.
outside the subscribers CENTREX group/Business
group.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX group/Business
group are diverted if the called station is busy.
Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVDA.
All calls from outside the CENTREX group/Business
group are diverted if the called station does not
answer within a specified time period. Calls from
within the group are not diverted.
Call diversion is allowed only to a destination
Restricts the subscriber classes of service
CALLHOLD
CONF3
and CT.
CENTREX group/Business group) are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX group/Business
group are allowed to be transferred only to an
attendant.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only, if controller
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX group/Business
group are allowed to be transferred to an add-on
subscriber within the same CENTREX group/Business
group.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
subscriber is a member of the same CENTREX group/
Business group and the add-on subscriber is
not a member.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXSUB-3 +
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
The station may also call a station with call
transfer or call diversion authorization in order
to get a connection outside the CENTREX group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
station concerned only via stations with a
call transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX
subscriber (parameter NAME) is presented
to the called CENTREX station.
station is presented to the calling
CENTREX subscriber.
subscriber (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
assigned.
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI
For Remote Subscriber Controlled Input no keyword
is necessary.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for virtual subscribers which have
class of service RSNSCI or SNRUISCI assigned.
ENTR CXSUB-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOATNBI NO ATTENDANT BARGE IN
Assigns a privacy profile to the CENTREX
subscriber which inhibits the CENTREX attendant
from barging in on an active call.
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts call waiting to calls from outside the
Subbusiness group.
Restricts the subscriber diversion types DIVI.
outside the subscribers CENTREX Subbusiness
group.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are diverted if the called station is busy.
Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVDA.
All calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are diverted if the called station does not
answer within a specified time period. Calls from
within the group are not diverted.
Restricts the subscriber classes of service
CALLHOLD
CONF3
and CT.
CENTREX Subbusiness group) are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are allowed to be transferred only to an
attendant.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only, if controller
CENTREX Subbusiness group.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are allowed to be transferred to an add-on
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXSUB-5 +
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
subscriber within the same CENTREX Subbusiness
group.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
Subbusiness group and the add-on subscriber is
not a member.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
The station may also call a station with call
transfer or call diversion authorization in order
to get a connection outside the CENTREX group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
station concerned only via stations with a
call transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes
a-b
ENTR CXSUB-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
This parameter value specifies the call
pick-up group.
If the subscriber is the first member
for the specified call pick-up group,
the call pick-up group is implicitly
created. In a switch up to 65,535 call
pick-up groups can be created.
All members of one call pick-up group
reside in the same CENTREX group.
Within the CENTREX group the call pick-up
group number is unique.
The number of call pick-up groups per
CENTREX group must not exceed the value
of NUMCPUGR for parameter RESLIM
(see DISP CXGRPRES).
A CENTREX subscriber cannot be assigned
to more than one call pick-up group.
If the subscriber is a member in call
pick-up group A and call pick-up group
number B is specified, the membership
is changed from group A to B.
The assignment of a call pick-up group is
rejected for a CENTREX subscriber with
terminating line trigger.
This parameter value specifies the charging site
to which the CENTREX subscriber belongs in the
CXGRP.
If during the creation of the CENTREX subscriber
no CHSITE is given, then the CENTREX subscriber
is assigned the default CHSITE.
Default: 1
b: DIGITS=
NAME NAME OF SUBSCRIBER
CENTREX subscriber for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR CXSUB-7 -
CAN CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command cancels a CENTREX zone point for a CENTREX group.
In order to cancel a CENTREX zone point, the complete path
(TSITE, OSITE, TMQ) must be entered.
Notes:
- For intercom calls to sites that have no CENTREX zone point created
the default zoning result is enabled. The same tariff rates as for
public calls are applied. The billing method can be modified with
the command MOD CXZOPT.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TSITE TERMINATING SITE
This parameter specifies the charging site of the
called party.
OSITE ORIGINATING SITE
calling party.
TMQ TRANSMISSION MEDIUM QUALITY
This parameter specifies the Transmission Medium
Quality the CENTREX zone point is depending on.
Notes:
- TMQ3 to TMQ15 are not used.
The values in this range are reserved for
future applications.
VOICE VOICE
HSDATA HIGH SPEED DATA
TMQ3 TRANSMISSION QUALITY 3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN CXZOPT-1 +
CAN CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CAN CXZOPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command creates an entry in the CENTREX zone translator.
The CENTREX zone translator offers the possibility to a CENTREX
group to apply a specific charging for intercom calls, e.g.
apply reduced tariffs, apply charge free, generate AMA-records.
The destination of an intercom call is specified by the charging
site of the called party. Optional parameters are the charging
site of the calling party for origin dependency and the
Transmission Medium Quality of the call.
The charging site of the called party is retrieved from the
subscriber database in case of CENTREX group internal traffic and
from the CENTREX digit translator in case of CENTREX group
external traffic.
Notes:
- For intercom calls to sites that have no CENTREX zone point created,
the default zoning result is enabled. The same tariff rates as for public
calls are applied. The billing method can be modified with the
command MOD CXZOPT.
- If the command CR CXGRP: COS=AWC or COS=AWCRMT
was entered, it is not effective to create CENTREX zone
points for local & remote or remote respectively, because
charging sites are not considered for Area Wide CENTREX
calls that are processed with trigger detection point 2.
Prerequisites:
- Entering a zone number (CHRGIND = ZONE - <no>) is only
accepted, if this zone has at least one tariff assigned. Refer to
ENTR TAR.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] ,CHRGIND= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,BILLING= [,CXCHCNTR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
called party.
calling party.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXZOPT-1 +
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Quality values the CENTREX zone point is depending on.
Notes:
VOICE VOICE
CHRGIND CHARGING INDICATOR
This parameter specifies what tariff rate will be charged
for the call.
a[-b]
a: CHARGING INDICATOR
NOPULSE NO CHARGE PULSE GENERATION
No tariff rate will be charged for the call.
ZONE ZONE
The tariff rate the call is charged for is
determined by the zone number that is
entered in unit b.
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Zone number is mandatory if unit a = ZONE,
otherwise it is not allowed.
The zone numbers 0, 127 and 255 are reserved by
the system.
Entering a zone number is only accepted, if it has at
least one tariff assigned. Refer to ENTR TAR.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the registration method that will
be used to bill the call.
Notes:
- The parameter BILLING is designed to enter multiple values
linked with &. However, this possibility is blocked because
no customer requirements exist.
METERING SUBSCRIBER PULSE METERING
METERING is only accepted, if a charge counter
CXCHCNTR is also assigned to this CENTREX zone
point.
NOREG NO REGISTRATION
NOREG offers the possibility e.g. to disable the
CR CXZOPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
generation of AMA-records for intercom calls that
are charge free (CHRGIND = NOPULSE).
CXCHCNTR CENTREX CHARGE COUNTERS
This parameter specifies the charge counters.
Notes:
- All five counters (CNTR1 to CNTR5) can be used as CENTREX
charge counter.
- The same counter must not be used for charging and call counting
purposes within the same switch.
Prerequisites:
- Assigning one or more charge counters with the parameter CXCHCNTR
is only allowed, when BILLING = METERING is entered as well.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR CXZOPT-3 -
DISP CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command displays the CENTREX zone points according
to the entered parameters.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP CXZOPT : <CXGRP= ,CHRGIND=> [,BILLING=] [,TSITE=] ]
] ]
] [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- This parameter is mandatory, except if a search for a specific
zone number is performed with CHRGIND = ZONE.
If no CENTREX group number is entered, only the data that is needed
to cancel the CENTREX zone point are displayed.
for the call.
a[-b]
ZONE ZONE
b: ZONE NUMBER=
the system.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the registration method that will
be used to bill the call.
called party.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP CXZOPT-1 +
DISP CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
calling party.
VOICE VOICE
E N D
DISP CXZOPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command is used to modify the zoning result of a CENTREX
zone point or to modify the billing method of the default zoning
result. The default zoning result applies the same tariff rates
as for public calls and is enabled for intercom calls to sites
that have no CENTREX zone point administered.
Notes:
- If intercom calls to a specific site should no longer be charged
in an own way, cancel the CENTREX zone point of this site to enable
the default zoning result. Refer to CAN CXZOPT for details.
1. MOD CXZOPT - CXZOPT MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
2. MOD CXZOPT - DEFZORES MODIFY DEFAULT ZONING RESULT
1. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This path is used to modify the zoning result of an existing
CENTREX zone point.
-
] ]
] MOD CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] <,CHRGIND= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,BILLING= ,CBILLING= ,CXCHCNTR=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
called party.
calling party.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXZOPT-1 +
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE VOICE
for the call.
a[-b]
No tariff rate will be charged for the call.
ZONE ZONE
The tariff rate the call is charged for is
determined by the zone number that is
entered in unit b.
b: ZONE NUMBER=
the system.
Entering a zone number is only accepted, if it has at
least one tariff assigned. Refer to ENTR TAR.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter enters a registration method.
Notes:
METERING is only accepted, if a charge counter
CXCHCNTR is or has been assigned to this CENTREX
zone point.
NOREG offers the possibility e.g. to disable the
generation of AMA-records for intercom calls that
are charge free (CHRGIND = NOPULSE).
CBILLING CANCEL BILLING
This parameter deletes a registration method.
Notes:
- The parameter CBILLING is designed to enter multiple values
MOD CXZOPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When METERING is cancelled, the charge counters
CXCHCNTR are cancelled too.
If NOREG is cancelled, then the registration of
the charges must be defined in this exchange
by assigning one of the values AMA or METERING
with the BILLING parameter.
CXCHCNTR CENTREX CHARGE COUNTERS
This parameter specifies the charge counters.
The previous counter assignment is overwritten with the new one.
Notes:
- All five counters (CNTR1 to CNTR5) can be used as CENTREX
charge counter.
- The same counter must not be used for charging and call counting
purposes within the same switch.
Prerequisites:
- Assigning one or more charge counters with the parameter CXCHCNTR
is only allowed, when BILLING = METERING is or has been assigned
to this CENTREX zone point.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD CXZOPT-3 +
MOD CXZOPT
DEFZORES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DEFAULT ZONING RESULT
This path is used to modify the billing method of the default
zoning result. The default zoning result applies the same tariff
rates as for public calls and is enabled for intercom calls to
sites that have no CENTREX zone point administered.
The command offers the possibility to activate AMA.
In case AMA is activated, the billing method from the public
zone point is disabled.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD CXZOPT : CXGRP= <,BILLING= ,CBILLING=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BILLING BILLING
This parameter enters a registration method.
Notes:
PUBREG PUBLIC REGISTRATION
The registration of the charges is done
according to the registration in the public zone
translator. The public number of the call is used
to access the public zone translator.
This parameter deletes a registration method.
Notes:
- The parameter CBILLING is designed to enter multiple values
PUBREG PUBLIC REGISTRATION
If PUBREG is cancelled, then the registration
of the charges must be assigned with
BILLING = AMA.
E N D
MOD CXZOPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REL CYCFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE
This command releases the last saved data in the specified cyclic file
for overwriting. In addition, an entry is made in the administrative
part of the file stating that the next save is to be started from the
oldest record that has not yet been saved.
Prerequisite:
- The file must not be in the process of being saved.
- The file must be a cyclic file.
- The file must have been saved at least once before.
Notes:
- If no data to be released exist (file was not copied at least once),
or if the copied part of the file was already overwritten, it is
possible that command execution is reported (EXECUTED) but that the
occupancy level of the file does not change.
Input format
-
] ]
] REL CYCFILE : FILE= [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk file.
The following characters must not be used:
- A succession of periods (...)
- A single period, or a combination ending in a period.
- A single asterisk, or a combination ending in an asterisk.
- A single X.
+,%,#
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
N CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
YES CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REL CYCFILE-1 -
DISP C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DISCARDED MSUS
This command displays the last 20 MSUs which were discarded due to
routing data error.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel
signaling according to signaling system no.7 (CCS7).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7DCDMSU : UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
UNIT PROCESSOR UNIT
This parameter specifies the processor(s) for which the discarded MSUs
will be displayed.
PUSIMP PU:SIMP
MHSIMP MH:SIMP
CPI CPI
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7DCDMSU-1 -
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC CCS7 DISCARDED MESSAGE SIGNAL UNITS
This command starts the recording of the number of MSUs discarded
due to routing errors and outputs the data to the OMT
or MDD.
The name of the measurement file is output to the OMT
if the traffic data are output to disk.
Notes:
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output with
immediate start.
- Data can be lost in case of reloading of CCNP.
- If a counter cannot be activated, no data from this counter can be received.
The user will be informed. After successful repetition of counter
activation, the first data will be marked as insecure.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format
-
] ]
] REC C7DCDMSU : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
The start and the finish message include the
name of the file in which the traffic data are
available for postprocessing.
b: OUTPUT MODE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to a single measurement file.
The output mode SINGLE is only permitted in
connection with output unit = MDD.
output to daily files. The measurement starts
files are prepared and created at the begin of
measurement. Daily files will be overwritten in
the following week on the same weekday.
The output mode DAILY is only permitted in
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7DCDMSU-1 +
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may be
linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not
permitted.
command input.
- The first BEG date must be at the latest one month after
the actual date.
- The last BEG date must be at the latest one year after
the actual date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped with
STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the last BEG day,
it will be finished.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one begin date
REC C7DCDMSU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological order
may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be at least
30 minutes apart except for measurements over midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV = 23-00-01-00
is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two interval
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval times
only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval IV
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped during the last
interval IV, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN DATE=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN DATE=
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION DATE=
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION DATE=
are to be recorded.
Notes:
Default: Measurement every day during the measurement
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7DCDMSU-3 -
DISP C7DMDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DISC. MSU
This command is used to display the entered
threshold and the number of discarded MSUs
which shall be reported.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7DMDAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7DMDAT-1 -
MOD C7DMDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 DISCARDED MSU DATA
This command is used to modify the threshold and
the number of discarded MSUs to be displayed
due to routing data errors.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD C7DMDAT : <THR= ,NUMBMSU=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
THR THRESHOLD CCS7 DISC. MSU DATA
This parameter is used to specify the threshold
for discarded MSUs to be displayed.
Initial value : 20 MSUS
NUMBMSU NUMBER OF DISC. MSU DATA
This parameter is used to specify the number of
discarded MSUs to be displayed.
Initial value : 8 MSUS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7DMDAT-1 -
CAN C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command cancels a destination point within the CCS7 network either in
the own area or in the foreign area.
Input format for cancelling a destination point in the own area.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network indicator = NAT0 Units=4-4-7h
Network indicator = INAT0 Units=3-8-3h
Network indicator = INAT1 Units=
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7DP-1 -
CONF C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command configures a destination point in the own area to one
of the operating states: active (ACT) or administrative blocked
(ABL). When a destination point is created, it is automatically
configured to the operating state administrative blocked (ABL).
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be reentered to prevent data inconsistency.
Notes:
- The configuring of a destination point to operating state ABL
prevents message signal units (MSUs) being transmitted to the
destination point by the users. It does not automatically prevent
MSUs being transmitted from the destination point. Bidirectional
message flow can only be terminated when both signaling points at
the end of the route set (destination point and own signaling point)
are mutually configured to ABL.
- If a non-adjacent signaling point within the own area is configured
to ABL: The own signaling point must not be used as a signaling
transfer point to the blocked signaling point (from the view of a
third signaling point).
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,OST= [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
OST OPERATING STATE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF C7DP-1 +
CONF C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
ABL ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
N DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
NO DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
Y CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
YES CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
Default: N
E N D
CONF C7DP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command creates a destination point within the CCS7 network either in
the own area or in the foreign area. A destination point can either be
in the own area or in the foreign area.
Own area:
The route set describes all defined possibilities for reaching the
destination point. This can be via one or several routes. A route is a
link set leading either directly to the destination point or to an
adjacent signaling point via which the destination point can be reached.
The route set is created with one to eight possible route directions
(link sets). The first route direction in this set will be assigned the
highest routing priority.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format for creating a destination point in the own area.
Prerequisites:
The link set of the route set must be created.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,PRD= ,LSK= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7DP-1 +
CR C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRD POSSIBLE ROUTE DIRECTION
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
This parameter specifies the loadsharing key of the route set.
It indicates a method used to determine whether the load is
distributed to one (LSK = 0) or two (LSK > 0) signaling
link sets.
If distributed to two signaling link sets the LSK = 1,2,3 or 4
additionally defines which load portions are distributed to which one
of the two signaling link sets.
E N D
CR C7DP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command displays the following data of created destination
to route set associations of the home area:
- the destination point code
- the network indicator of this destination point
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the destination point
- the effective state (transient) of the destination point
Possible effects:
- If all destination points are requested, the display may be
terminated by the STOP DISP command.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= [,OST=] [,EST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
ABL ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
EST EFFECTIVE STATE OF THE DPC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7DP-1 +
DISP C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT DPC IS AVAILABLE
UNA DPC IS UNAVAILABLE
E N D
DISP C7DP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD C7DP
LSK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command either interchanges the priority orders of the two link
sets LSNAM1 and LSNAM2 in the route set of the specified
destination point or modifies the loadsharing key of the route set.
Possible effects:
must be reentered to prevent data base inconsistency.
1. MOD C7DP - LSK CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
2. MOD C7DP - PRIORITY CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
1. Input format
CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
Change of the loadsharing key:
The loadsharing key is used to define the traffic distribution
between the current routes.
The loadsharing key must have a value between zero and four.
If the loadsharing key has the value zero, no loadsharing will
be carried out between the routes and the possible route direction
with highest priority will be used.
If the loadsharing key has a value between one and four, loadsharing
will be carried out between the two available possible route
directions with highest priority. The different values effect the
distribution of the traffic within the route directions.
-
] ]
] MOD C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSK= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7DP-1 +
MOD C7DP
LSK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
MOD C7DP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD C7DP
PRIORITY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
Interchange of the priorities:
The new priority of LSNAM1 must be defined explicitely
by LSPRI1.
The highest priority is one, the lowest is eight.
-
] ]
] MOD C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM1= ,LSNAM2= ,LSPRI1= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM1 FIRST LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
LSNAM2 SECOND LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
LSPRI1 PRIO.OF 1ST ENTERED LINK SET
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7DP-3 -
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 GRADE OF SERVICE
This command starts the recording of a grade-of-service
measurement for CCS7 links and outputs the following data
to the OMT or MDD:
- Duration of link in service
- Number of signaling units in error
- Duration of link unavailability
(any reason)
(link failure)
(local blocking)
(remote blocking)
(local and remote blocking)
A maximum of 8 commands can be entered at any one time.
Notes:
immediate start.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more than one
measurement at any one time.
- If the last measured object is canceled, the job will terminate itself.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNAM= ] ]
] REC C7GOS : -LINKNO= [,LCOD=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the link set name.
One single link set name may be selected.
Alternatively, up to 16 link set names may be linked
with & or X may be input if output unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LINKNO = X.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7GOS-1 +
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link number associated with the link.
Up to 16 link numbers may be linked with &.
Alternatively, it is possible to select one interval of
link numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
If an interval is entered, at least one link has to exist
within the interval.
LCOD LINK CODE
This parameter specifies the link within the link set.
It is only permitted in combination with a single
link set name.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
REC C7GOS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7GOS-3 +
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC C7GOS-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LINK
This command cancels a link which is a communication path between two
adjacent signaling points.
Prerequisites:
- The link must be configured to the operating state BL1.
Possible effects:
- If the command is aborted by recovery, it must be reentered
to prevent data base inconsistancy.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7LINK-1 -
CONF C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCS7 LINK
This command configures a signaling link to one of the three operating
states active (ACT), inactive (BL1) or blocked (BL2).
Prerequisites:
- If OST=BL2 or OST=ACT the adjacent destination point must be created
for the associated link set.
Possible effects:
- The signaling link becomes active only after activation
has been initiated at both signaling points concerned, and if
the initialization tests and the link test have been
successfully completed.
must be reentered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Notes:
- The last signaling link of a link set should only be configured to BL1, if
the link set is not used as a route for any destination point.
- A link manually inactivated or blocked can only be activated by the operator.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,OST= [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
activated
BL1 BLOCKED 1
deactivated:
in this state the signaling link is an inactive
member of the link set, and no messages are
transmitted
BL2 BLOCKED 2
blocked:
in this state the link will still carry
LSSU-messages (link status signal unit) to
indicate processor outage to the adjacent
destination point, but no MSU (message signal
unit) will be carried
N DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
NO DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF C7LINK-1 +
CONF C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
YES CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
Default: N
E N D
CONF C7LINK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 LINK
This command creates a signaling link, which is a communication path between
two adjacent signaling points, and assigns it to a specific link set.
Prerequisites:
- The associated link set must be created.
- The associated multiplexer must be created.
- For links connected to the switching network by the SILTs with SILT
numbers from 56 to 127 or 184 to 255 the according multiplexer
master B (MUXMB) must be created with the command CR MUXMB.
- The SILT associated with the link must not be assigned to another link.
Possible effects:
Notes:
- Up to 16 links may be assigned to one link set.
- For the SILTs with SILT numbers 0 and 128 the link type must be
an analog one.
- After creation the link set is inactive.
- The link still will not carry traffic until it has been activated using
the command CONF C7LINK.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,SILTNO= ,LTYPE= [,LINKNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
LTYPE LINK TYPE
D64BWM DIGIT/64 K/BASIC/TAB:WM
D64PWM DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM
D64PWMA DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM ALTER.
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7LINK-1 -
DISP C7LINK
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK
This command displays the created signaling links, which are used
as communication paths between adjacent signaling points.
The following data is displayed:
- the name of the link set to which the link belongs
- the link code, the link number, the SILT number and the link type
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the link
- the inhibiting state of the link
- the effective (transient) state of the link
- the reason for the effective (transient) state of the link
The display can be selective by use of optional input parameters.
1. DISP C7LINK - ALL ALL LINKS
2. DISP C7LINK - LCOD LINK CODE
3. DISP C7LINK - LINKNO LINK NUMBER
4. DISP C7LINK - SILTNO SILT NUMBER
5. DISP C7LINK - STATUS LINK STATUS
1. Input format
ALL LINKS
This input format permits the display of all created signaling links
which have to be selected by
-LSNO = X or
-LSNAM = X or
-LINKNO = X or
-SILTNO = X.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],EST=]] ]
] DISP C7LINK : [IST=] [,NETIND=] [,LTYPE=] ]-,OST=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] - ]
] ],SILTNO=] ]
] ],LINKNO=] ]
] -,LSNAM= ; ]
] ],LSNO= ] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IST INHIBITING STATE
BTH BOTH INHIBITED
LOC LOCAL INHIBITED
NOT NOT INHIBITED
REM REMOTE INHIBITED
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LTYPE LINK TYPE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LINK-1 +
DISP C7LINK
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
D64BWM DIGIT/64 K/BASIC/TAB:WM
D64PWM DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM
D64PWMA DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM ALTER.
EST EFFECTIVE STATE
ACT ACTIVE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
ACT ACTIVE
BL1 BLOCKED 1
BL2 BLOCKED 2
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LSNO LINK SET NUMBER
DISP C7LINK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7LINK
LCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINK CODE
which are selected either by a specific link set name or a specific
link set number and optional by link code.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LSNAM=] ]
] DISP C7LINK : [LCOD=] -,LSNO= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LCOD LINK CODE
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LINK-3 +
DISP C7LINK
LINKNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LINK NUMBER
This input format permits the display of a specific signaling link which
is selected by link number.
-
] ]
] DISP C7LINK : LINKNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
DISP C7LINK-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7LINK
SILTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SILT NUMBER
This input format permits the display of a specific signaling link which
is selected by silt number.
-
] ]
] DISP C7LINK : SILTNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LINK-5 +
DISP C7LINK
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
LINK STATUS
which are selected either by a specific link set name or specific link
set number and optional by inhibiting state or either by the effective
state or operating status.
-
] ]
] -- - ]
] ]],EST=]] ],LSNAM=] ]
] DISP C7LINK : [IST=] ]-,OST=] -,LSNO= ; ]
] ]] ]] ] ] ]
] ~ '- ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IST INHIBITING STATE
BTH BOTH INHIBITED
LOC LOCAL INHIBITED
NOT NOT INHIBITED
REM REMOTE INHIBITED
EST EFFECTIVE STATE
ACT ACTIVE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
ACT ACTIVE
BL1 BLOCKED 1
BL2 BLOCKED 2
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
DISP C7LINK-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK
This command modifies the inhibiting state of a signaling link. The
inhibiting state of a signaling link is a transient state which exists in
parallel to the (transient) effective state and the (semipermanent)
operating state of a link. An inhibited link is blocked for user generated
traffic.
Prerequisites:
- The link must be created.
Notes:
- Inhibiting/uninhibiting can be denied by the remote signaling point.
Possible effect:
- After recovery, inhibited links are automatically uninhibited.
- In emergency cases, e.g. if a destination would become unavailable,
an inhibited link will be automatically uninhibited.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,INH= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
INH INHIBITING INDICATOR
N DO NOT INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
NO DO NOT INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
Y INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
YES INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7LINK-1 -
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 LINK LOAD
This command starts the recording of the signaling link load
measurement and outputs the following data to the OMT
or MDD:
- Number of SIF/SIO octets transmitted
- Number of SIF/SIO octets received
- Number of MSUs transmitted
- Number of MSUs received
- Number of retransmitted octets
- Number of discarded MSUs due to link congestion
- Number of cases of link congestion
- Duration of link congestion
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNAM= ] ]
] REC C7LLOAD : -LINKNO= [,LCOD=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
One single link set name may be selected.
Alternatively, up to 16 link set names may be linked
with & or X may be input if output unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LINKNO = X.
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link number associated with the link.
Up to 16 link numbers may be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7LLOAD-1 +
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
link numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
LCOD LINK CODE
This parameter specifies the link within the link set.
It is only permitted in combination with a single
link set name.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
REC C7LLOAD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7LLOAD-3 +
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC C7LLOAD-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LINK SET
This command cancels a link set, which is a set of up to 16 links used
for signaling traffic between adjacent signaling points.
Prerequisites :
- The destination point of this link set must be canceled.
- This link set may not be in use as a possible route direction.
- All links belonging to this signaling link set must be canceled.
Possible effects:
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7LSET : LSNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7LSET-1 -
CR C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 LINK SET
This command creates a link set, which is a set of up to 16 links used for
signaling traffic between adjacent signaling points. Only one link set may be
created to an adjacent signaling point. It also defines whether the complete
alarming of the CCS7 link set shall be suppressed or not.
The alarm units in the state UNA are administered with the command
ENTR ALPRIO.
The alarm type, the loadsharing key and the switch for the periodic link
test can be modified if necessary with the command MOD C7LSET.
Prerequisites :
- The own signaling point must be created.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must be
re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR C7LSET : LSNAM= ,SPC= ,NETIND= ,LSK= [,LSNO=] [,ALTYPE=] ]
] ]
] [,PERLTEST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
SPC SIGNALING POINT CODE
a[-b[-c]]
a: SPC-UNIT1=
b: SPC-UNIT2=
c: SPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7LSET-1 +
CR C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR LINK SET
This parameter specifies the load sharing key of the link set. The
load sharing key indicates a method used to determine the maximum
number of active links in the link set over which the load is
distributed.
The load is distributed to one (LSK = 0), to two (LSK = 1, 2, 4, 8),
to four (LSK = 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12), to eight (LSK = 7, 11, 13, 14)
or sixteen (LSK = 15) signaling links.
If distributed to two, four or eight signaling links, the LSK
additionally defines which load portions are distributed to which
of the signaling links.
This parameter specifies the location of the link set in the database.
If the parameter is not specified, the next free location will be
assigned to the link set.
ALTYPE ALARM TYPE
This parameter specifies the alarm type which is used to alarm the
state NAC of the link set.
It indicates whether the link set will be alarmed with the
standard critical alarm or the exeption major alarm or if all alarms
(NAC and UNA) will be suppressed.
CCSLSNAC CCS7 LINK SET NAC (STANDARD)
CCSLSNEX CCS7 LINK SET NAC (EXCEPTION)
CCSLSNAL CCS7 LINK SET NOT ALARMED
Default: CCSLSNAC
PERLTEST PERIODIC LINK TEST
This parameter specifies periodic link test functionality.
In case PERLTEST is switched on, a periodic link test will
be done for all links in the specified link set.
OFF PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH OFF
ON PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH ON
Default: OFF
E N D
CR C7LSET-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7LSET
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 LINK SET
This command displays the following data for the created link sets,
which are sets of up to 16 links used for CCS7 signaling between
signaling points:
- the link set name
- the signaling point code to which this link set leads
- the network indicator belonging to this signaling point code
- the link set number
- the load sharing key of the link set
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the link set
- the inhibiting indicator (transient) of the link set
- the effective state (transient) of the link set
- the alarm adjustment of the link set
- the periodic signaling link test state
If a certain link set is specified, the following additional data for
the links in the link set are displayed:
- the name of the link set to which the link belongs
- the link code, link number, SILT number and link type
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the link
- the inhibiting state (transient) of the links
- the effective state (transient) of the link
- the reason for the effective state (transient) of the link.
If one or more links in the link set are active the following additional
data is displayed:
- the load allocation of the links within the link set.
1. DISP C7LSET - ALL ALL LINK SETS
2. DISP C7LSET - NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
3. DISP C7LSET - ONE ONE SPECIFIC LINK SET
1. Input format
ALL LINK SETS
This input format permits the display of all created signaling link sets
which are selected by
-LSNO = X or
-LSNAM = X.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNO= ] ]
] DISP C7LSET : -LSNAM= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
The input value from the help text should be taken
into consideration.
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
into consideration.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LSET-1 +
DISP C7LSET
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP C7LSET-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7LSET
NETIND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NETWORK INDICATOR
This input format permits the display of all created signaling link sets
in a network specified by network indicator.
-
] ]
] DISP C7LSET : NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LSET-3 +
DISP C7LSET
ONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ONE SPECIFIC LINK SET
This input format permits the display of one specific signaling link set
which is selected by link set name or link set number.
If FORMAT = STD is entered the display of the load allocation
of the links within the link set will be suppressed.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNAM=] ]
] DISP C7LSET : -LSNO= [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
into consideration.
into consideration.
FORMAT CONTROL PARAM. FOR OUTPUT
Default value: LONG
LONG LONG FORMAT OF OUTPUT
STD STANDARD (SHORT OUTPUT)
E N D
DISP C7LSET-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 LINK SET
This command modifies either the alarm type or the loadsharing key
or the periodic link test functionality of a CCS7 link set.
1. Modification of the alarm type
the alarm type is used to alarm the state NAC of the link set.
It also modifies the adjustment whether the complete alarming of
the CCS7 link set shall be suppressed or not. The alarm units in
the state UNA are administered with the command ENTR ALPRIO.
Note: the command will only be accepted if the entered CCS7 link
set is currently not alarmed.
2. Modification of the loadsharing key
The loadsharing key is used to distribute the traffic between
the links of the link set. The possible values are between
zero (only one link is used) and 15 (all links will be used).
Note: if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery,
the command must be reentered to prevent data base
inconsistency.
3. Modification of the periodic link test parameter
The periodic link test functionality can be modified with help
of his parameter.
Note: if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery,
the command must be reentered to prevent data base
inconsistency.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],ALTYPE= ] ]
] MOD C7LSET : LSNAM= -,LSK= ; ]
] ],PERLTEST=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
ALTYPE ALARM TYPE
This parameter specifies the alarm type which is used to alarm the
state NAC of the link set. It indicates whether the link set will
be alarmed with the standard critical alarm or the exeption major
alarm or if all alarms (NAC and UNA) will be suppressed.
CCSLSNAC CCS7 LINK SET NAC (STANDARD)
CCSLSNEX CCS7 LINK SET NAC (EXCEPTION)
CCSLSNAL CCS7 LINK SET NOT ALARMED
Default: CCSLSNAC
LSK LOADSHARING KEY
This parameter specifies the loadsharing key of the CCS7 link set.
It is used to distribute the traffic among the links of the link set.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7LSET-1 +
MOD C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PERLTEST PERIODIC LINK TEST
This parameter specifies periodic link test functionality.
OFF PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH OFF
ON PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH ON
Default: OFF
E N D
MOD C7LSET-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 LINK SET
This command starts the recording of the signaling link set
unavailability and outputs the following data to the OMT
or MDD:
- Number of cases of link set unavailability
- Duration of link set unavailability
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNAM= ] ]
] REC C7LSET : -LSETNO= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
Up to 16 link set names may be linked with &.
Alternatively, it is possible to input X if output
unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LSETNO = X.
LSETNO LSET NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link set number associated with
the link.
Up to 16 link set numbers may be linked with &.
link set numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7LSET-1 +
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
REC C7LSET-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7LSET-3 +
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC C7LSET-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR.OF DPC
This command cancels a signaling link set from the signaling route
set for a specified signaling destination point. If the signaling
link set to be canceled is the last in the route set, the command is
rejected.
Possible effects:
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7LSETDP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7LSETDP-1 -
DISP C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LINK SET ALL DPCS
This command displays the following data:
- the name of the link set
- the network indicator to which the link set belongs
- the destination point code of the signaling point at the far
end of the link set (adjacent destination point)
In addition, the display shows the following data for destination
points which have the specified link set as a possible route
direction:
- the destination point code itself
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the destination point
- the effective (transient) state of the destination point
- an indication whether this link set is the current route to the
destination point
- an indication whether this destination point is reachable
exclusively (ONLY AVAILABLE) via the specified link set or not.
Notes:
- If the parameter value YES is input for the (optional) parameter
ONLYAV, only these destination points are displayed which are
exclusively reachable via the specified link set. If the parameter
value NO is input or if the parameter is omitted, all destination
points are displayed which have the specified link set as possible
route direction.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LSNAM=] ]
] DISP C7LSETDP : -LSNO= [,ONLYAV=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the table location in level 3 for the
link set.
ONLYAV ONLY AVAIL.LINK SET TO DESTINA
NO DEST.NOT ONLY AVAIL. BY LSET
All the destination points are to be displayed
that can be reached by this link set.
YES DEST.ONLY AVAIL.BY LSET
Only those destination points are to be displayed
that can exclusively be reached by this link set.
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7LSETDP-1 -
ENTR C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR. OF DPC
This command inserts one new route direction (link set) at a specific
priority order in the route set for the destination point.
A route set may contain one to eight link sets. If there is already a link
set with the same priority as entered, this command will decrement the
priority of this and the following route directions (link sets) (lower
priority means higher number).
Possible effects:
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR C7LSETDP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM= ,LSPRIO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LSPRIO PRIORITY OF ENTERED LINK SET
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR C7LSETDP-1 -
STAT C7L1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCS7 LEVEL1 COMPONENTS
This command displays the status of the components building the
CCS7 level 1.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]UNIT=] ]
] STAT C7L1 : -PORT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
UNIT TYPE AND NUMBER OF UNIT
a-b
a: TYPE OF UNIT
SILT SILT - NAME OF DEVICE
b: NUMBER OF UNIT=
unit values.
PORT NUMBER OF PORT
a-b-c[-d]
a: NUMBER OF TSG=
unit values.
b: NUMBER OF LTG=
unit values.
c: NUMBER OF LTU=
unit values.
d: NUMBER OF CHANNEL=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT C7L1-1 -
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC CCS7 MESSAGE SIGNAL UNIT
This command starts the recording of the number of incoming,
outgoing and transit MSUs (including discarded MSUs) and outputs the
data to the OMT or MDD.
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC C7MSU : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7MSU-1 +
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
REC C7MSU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7MSU-3 -
DISP C7NOTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 NOTIFICATION
This command displays the CCS7 network elements, for which summarized
alarms (elements transient in NAC) or summarized indications (elements
transient in MBL) had occurred at the SYP.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7NOTI ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7NOTI-1 -
CAN C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command cancels the CCS7 own signaling point.
Prerequisites:
- Before the own signaling point is cancelled, all associated signaling
elements must be deactivated and cancelled.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: SPC-UNIT1=
b: SPC-UNIT2=
c: SPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7OP-1 -
CR C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command creates the own CCS7 signaling point, which provides the EWSD with
the means to identify itself within the signaling network.
Prerequisites: The project specific SPC structure of the own signaling point
must be defined.
Note: The STPI, SDL and SENDTFP of the own signaling point may be
modified during active operation.
Possible effect: If communication with the LTG fails the command execution is
indicated as only partially executed.
If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be intered again to prevent data inconsistancy.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ,STPI= [,SDL=] [,SPCSIZE=] ]
] ]
] [,SENDTFP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
This parameter specifies the network of the own signaling point.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
STPI SIGN. TRANSFER POINT INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the function of the own signaling point
within the CCS7 network.
SP SIGNALING POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions of
a signaling end point.
STP SIGNALING TRANSFER POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions of
a signaling transfer point and a signaling end
point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7OP-1 +
CR C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SDL SUPPORTED DATA LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum length (in bytes) of a message
signaling unit that is supported by the message transfer part.
62,272, range of decimal numbers
Default: 272
SPCSIZE SIGNALING POINT CODE SIZE
This parameter specifies the network protocol version, the size of
the signaling point code and the information about a mapping mechanism
for the given network.
The values NORMAL and EXTENDED indicate that for ITU standard
14- or 24-Bit format is used. The difference between NORMAL and
EXTENDED is the number of possibilities in the numbering plan.
NORMAL NORMAL SPC SIZE
EXTENDED EXTENDED SPC SIZE
Default: NORMAL
SENDTFP SEND TRANSFER PROHIBITED
This parameter specifies the send transfer prohibited (TFP)
functionality.
If it is not possible to route a message and the SENDTFP is switched
off, the message will be discarded and the counter for routing data
error will be increased.
In case SENDTFP is switched on, a TFP message will be sent
additionally to the adjacent siganling point, by which the discarded
message was sent.
OFF DO NOT SEND TFP MESSAGE
ON SEND TFP MESSAGE
Default: ON
E N D
CR C7OP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command displays the following data of all created own signaling
points:
- the own signaling point code
- the network indicator belonging to this signaling point code
- an indicator showing whether this signaling point is a signaling end
point or a signaling transfer point
- the supported data length
- the SPC size
- transfer prohibited message sending status.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7OP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7OP-1 -
MOD C7OP
NETWORK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command modifies the following data of the own CCS7 signaling point, which
provides the EWSD with the means to identify within the signaling network:
- signaling transfer point indicator STPI
- supported data length SDL
- send transfer prohibited switch SENDTFP
Prerequisites: The project specific SPC structure of the own signaling point
must be defined.
Possible effect: If communication with the LTG fails the command execution is
indicated as only partially executed.
If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
1. MOD C7OP - NETWORK NETWORK ATTRIBUTE
2. MOD C7OP - OP OWN SIGNALING POINT ATTRIBUTE
1. Input format
NETWORK ATTRIBUTE
Input format for modify the send transfer prohibited switch SENDTFP.
-
] ]
] MOD C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ,SENDTFP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
SENDTFP SEND TRANSFER PROHIBITED
This parameter specifies the new send transfer prohibited (TFP)
functionality.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7OP-1 +
MOD C7OP
NETWORK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If it is not possible to route a message and the SENDTFP is switched
off, the message will be discarded and the counter for routing data
error will be increased.
In case SENDTFP is switched on, a TFP message will be sent
additionally to the adjacent siganling point, by which the discarded
message was sent.
OFF DO NOT SEND TFP MESSAGE
ON SEND TFP MESSAGE
MOD C7OP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD C7OP
OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OWN SIGNALING POINT ATTRIBUTE
Input format for modify the signaling transfer point indicator STPI
and the supported data length SDL.
-
] ]
] MOD C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= <,STPI= ,SDL=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
STPI SIGN. TRANSFER POINT INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new signaling transfer point indicator.
SP SIGNALING POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions
of a signaling end point.
STP SIGNALING TRANSFER POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions
of a signaling transfer point and a signaling
end point.
SDL SUPPORTED DATA LENGTH
This parameter specifies the new maximum length (in bytes) of a
message signaling unit that is supported by the message transfer part.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7OP-3 -
DISP C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTE SET
This command displays the provisioned route specific data of a destination
to route set association. The following data is displayed:
- the destination point code to which the route set leads
- the network indicator of this destination point code
- the load sharing key of the route set
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the destination point
- effective (transient) state of the destination point
- the name of the link sets which form this route set
- the current priority of the link set
- an indication if the link set is the current route
- the inhibiting (transient) indicator of the link set
- the effective (transient) state of the link set
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7RSET : DPC= ,NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7RSET-1 -
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 ROUTE SET TRAFFIC DATA
This command starts the recording of following availability data
for signaling routes/destination points and outputs them to
the OMT or MDD:
- Number of cases of route set unavailability
- Duration of route set unavailability
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]DPC= ] ]
] REC C7RSET : -RANAM= [,NETIND=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC UNIT 1=
b: DPC UNIT 2=
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of unit
values.
If X is entered, the maximum number of measured objects
must not be exceeded and the following unit must be
provided with X.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7RSET-1 +
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DPC UNIT 3=
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of unit
values.
The number of objects specified in this way must not exceed
the maximum number of measured objects and X must also be
entered for the following unit.
unit values.
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This parameter specifies the name of the foreign routing area.
Up to 16 routing area names may be linked with &.
This parameter indicates the relevant network type.
It is only permitted in connection with a DPC.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
REC C7RSET-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC C7RSET-3 +
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC C7RSET-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7SMTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME
This command is used to display the entered smoothing time in seconds
for alarming and reporting of CCS7 network elements, alarming of
processor congestion and reporting of route set (routing area or
destination in own area) unavalibility.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7SMTIME ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7SMTIME-1 -
MOD C7SMTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME
This command is used to modify the smoothing time in seconds for alarming
and reporting of CCS7 network elements, alarming of processor congestion
and reporting of route set (routing area or destination in own area)
unavalibility.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD C7SMTIME : <LINKSMT= ,RSETSMT= ,OVLSMT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LINKSMT LINK SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for alarming and
reporting of signaling links, link sets and local node.
Initial value: 60 seconds.
RSETSMT ROUTE SET SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for reporting of
unavalibilities of route sets for destinations or set of
destinations (routing area).
OVLSMT OVERLOAD SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for alarming of processor
congestion (overload). When the smoothing time is set to 600 seconds
the probability is high that the alarming of processor congestion is
due to circular routing. In this case a corresponding report for MSUs
discarded due to routing data error occured every 5 minutes with the
reason circular routing.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7SMTIME-1 -
CAN C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command cancels the relation between a destination point (including
the associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
Prerequisites:
- All trunks belonging to the specified trunk group must be cancelled.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7TGREL : TGNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7TGREL-1 -
DISP C7TGREL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command displays the relation between destination point (including
the associated user part) and trunk groups with common channel signaling.
The display can also be made selectively.
1. DISP C7TGREL - DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
2. DISP C7TGREL - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
DESTINATION POINT CODE
Input format for the destination point code identifier
option
-
] ]
] DISP C7TGREL : DPC= ,NETIND= [,USNAME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7TGREL-1 +
DISP C7TGREL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
Input format for the trunk group number option
-
] ]
] DISP C7TGREL : TGNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
DISP C7TGREL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command enters a relation between a destination point ( including the
associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
A maximum of 64 trunk groups with common channel signaling may lead to a
a destination point and each of its associated user parts.
Prerequisites:
- The destination point must be created.
- The trunk group with common channel signaling must be created.
- The dialing procedure of the trunk group with common channel signaling must
correspond to one of the created user parts for the destination point.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR C7TGREL : TGNO= ,DPC= ,NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR C7TGREL-1 -
CAN C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREM.
This command cancels the CCS7 traffic structure measurement.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7TRST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7TRST-1 -
DISP C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
This command displays an existing CCS7 traffic structure measurement
request.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7TRST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7TRST-1 -
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
This command activates the recording of CCS7 traffic structure data for
one or several networks.
Prerequisites:
No other CCS7 traffic structure measurement is activated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR C7TRST : NETIND= [,TRACFACT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] ]
] ]
] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the network type concerned.
Notes:
- Only 14-Bit networks are allowed.
X ALL NETWORK VALUES
TRACFACT TRACE FACTOR
This parameter specifies the trace factor, which determines that after
(f minus 1) message signaling units of the traffic the next one
has to be measured.
Notes:
- tracefactor for CCNC : 100 .... 10000 ( = default value )
- tracefactor for CCS7E : 100 .... 100000 ( = default value )
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter defines either
- the time at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should begin or
- one of the dates on which this should occur.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must
be specified.
linked BEG dates, termination date TER is not possible.
a-b-c
This information unit specifies the year in which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should begin.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR C7TRST-1 +
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the month in which the CCS7
This information unit specifies the day on which the CCS7
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies when the CCS7 traffic structure
measurement job should terminate.
Notes:
- The CCS7 traffic structure measurement duration may not
exceed one year.
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date
TER must be specified.
a-b-c
This information unit specifies the year in which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should terminate.
This information unit specifies the month in which the CCS7
This information unit specifies the day on which the CCS7
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the interval during which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should run.
Notes:
- A maximum of four intervals can be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with
a begin date BEG.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the CCS7
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
This information unit specifies the minutes after the
hour at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should begin.
Notes:
- Possible values are: 0, 15, 30 or 45.
ENTR C7TRST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: END HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the CCS7
d: END MINUTE=
hour at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should terminate.
Notes:
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should run.
Notes:
- A maximum of eight weekdays/categories can be linked with &,
except the values WO and HO which are not linkable with
other values.
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date TER.
NO DEFAULT
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR C7TRST-3 -
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS (ISUP)
This command starts the circuit group query test for ISUP-trunks.
This test examines, if the ISUP-trunk states at the own exchange and
at the partner exchange do match. If any discrepancies are detected,
the trunkstates are automatically corrected.
If the parameter SCHED is omitted, the test is started immediately,
otherwise it is started at the scheduled time.
<job number>.
1. TEST C7TRSTAT- ONDEMAND ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
2. TEST C7TRSTAT- SCHED SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
1. Input format
ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test on demand
(immediately).
-
] ]
] TEST C7TRSTAT : NETIND= ,DPC= ,CIC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT-1 +
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
TEST C7TRSTAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test by scheduler
(routine test).
-
] ]
] TEST C7TRSTAT : NETIND= ,DPC= ,CIC= ,SCHED= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
a-b
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT-3 +
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the scheduler by which the circuit
group query test ist started.
The schedule number must have been set up with the
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE command.
E N D
TEST C7TRSTAT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK
This command tests the specified circuit to see if the circuit
identification code in the home exchange matches the circuit
identification in the partner exchange. The test is performed for up
to 31 circuits specified by the optional parameter TRRANGE. The
test result is displayed on the OMT.
Prerequisites:
- The specified circuit must be blocked for maintenance.
Attention:
- The test result not ok indicates normally a circuit identification
code allocation mismatch between two exchanges. As an exception,
the result not ok is caused by a mismatch between the trunk
parameter LCOS and the created user. The trunk parameter LCOS
can be checked by the command DISP TRUNK.
- In case of cancelation of the test caused by time control
one should wait for 30 seconds before repeating the test.
1. TEST C7TRUNK - DPC
2. TEST C7TRUNK - TGNAM
1. Input format
This input format starts a CIC-allocation-test. The circuit is
defined by the signaling point to which the associated trunk group
leads, the network indicator, the user part and the circuit identification
code (CIC). The parameter trunk range (TRRANGE) is optional and defines
the number of circuits to be tested by one command. The CIC defines the
first circuit of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
-
] ]
] TEST C7TRUNK : DPC= ,CIC= ,NETIND= ,USNAME= [,TRRANGE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRUNK-1 +
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the concerned network type.
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter specifies the user part.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered only the
specified trunk is tested.
TEST C7TRUNK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST C7TRUNK
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format starts a CIC-allocation-test. The circuit is
specified by the parameters trunk group number (TGNO) and the circuit
identification code (CIC) or the line number (LNO). The parameter trunk
range (TRRANGE) is optional and specifies the number of circuits to be
tested by one command. The parameter CIC or LNO specifies the first circuit
of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],CIC=] ]
] TEST C7TRUNK : TGNO= -,LNO= [,TRRANGE=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LNO LINE NUMBER
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRUNK-3 -
TEST C7TRVAL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK VALIDATION
1. TEST C7TRVAL - DPC
2. TEST C7TRVAL - TGNAM
1. Input format
This input format starts a CIRCUIT VALIDATION TEST.The circuit is
defined by the signaling point to which the associated trunk group
leads, the network indicator, the user part and the circuit identification
code (CIC). The parameter trunk range (TRRANGE) is optional and defines
the number of circuits to be tested by one command. The CIC defines the
first circuit of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
-
] ]
] TEST C7TRVAL : DPC= ,CIC= ,NETIND= ,USNAME= [,TRRANGE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
The allowable entries are defined by individual PTTs
on a project-specific basis.
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the concerned network type.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRVAL-1 +
TEST C7TRVAL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter specifies the user part.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
Default: 1
TEST C7TRVAL-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST C7TRVAL
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format starts a CIRCUIT VALIDATION TEST. The circuit is
specified by the parameters trunk group number (TGNO) and the circuit
identification code (CIC) or the line number (LNO). The parameter trunk
range (TRRANGE) is optional and specifies the number of circuits to be
tested by one command. The parameter CIC or LNO specifies the first circuit
of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],CIC=] ]
] TEST C7TRVAL : TGNO= -,LNO= [,TRRANGE=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LNO LINE NUMBER
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST C7TRVAL-3 -
CAN C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command cancels an association between an user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- all trunk group relations must have been cancelled if the user part is
circuit related
- all SCCP relations must have been cancelled if the user part SCCP is
to be cancelled. Possible SCCP relations are: global title translation
destinations, SCCP subsystems or translator service groups.
Possible effects:
- if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= ,NETIND= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN C7USER-1 -
CR C7USER
SCCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command creates an association between an user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- the destination point must have been created
Possible effects:
- if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
1. CR C7USER - SCCP USER PART SCCP
2. CR C7USER - SCRU SPEECH CIRCUIT RELATED USER
1. Input format
USER PART SCCP
This command path has to be used to create the MTP user part
SCCP
-
] ]
] CR C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= ,NETIND= [,ACS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7USER-1 +
CR C7USER
SCCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
ACS ACS REQUIRED
This parameter specifies whether the association of connection sections
are required or not.
The parameter is only legal with USNAME=SCCP.
N ACS NOT REQUIRED
NO ACS NOT REQUIRED
Y ACS REQUIRED
YES ACS REQUIRED
Default: N
CR C7USER-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR C7USER
SCRU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPEECH CIRCUIT RELATED USER
This command path has to be used to create the MTP user part
ISUP or TUP
-
] ]
] CR C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= ,NETIND= [,PCMTYP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
PCMTYP PCM TYPE
This parameter specifies the used PCM type.
Incompatibilities:
- USNAME=SCCP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR C7USER-3 +
CR C7USER
SCRU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIU30 DIU 30
Default: DIU30
E N D
CR C7USER-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command displays user-related data.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP C7USER : DPC= ,NETIND= [,USNAME=] [,CIC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP C7USER-1 -
MOD C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command modifies the ACS data of the SCCP user for the specified
destination point code.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= ,NETIND= ,ACS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
ACS ACS REQUIRED
This parameter specifies whether the association of connection sections
are required or not.
The parameter is only legal with USNAME=SCCP.
N ACS NOT REQUIRED
NO ACS NOT REQUIRED
Y ACS REQUIRED
YES ACS REQUIRED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD C7USER-1 -
START DB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START DATA BASE
This command starts processes necessary to create and populate the Data Base.
Notes:
recovery).
Input format
-
] ]
] START DB ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START DB-1 -
DISP DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION
This command enables the display of information about the expandable
part of database. Parameters can be input in continuation mode.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP DBSIZE : [DPUSED=] [,GROUP=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DPUSED DISPLAY PERCENT USED
This parameter specifies the displayed information. No input has the
same result as input of NO or N.
YES PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of YES or Y includes the display of
filling levels of the expandable data arrays
specified by the group parameter.
Y PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See Y.
NO NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of NO or N OR no input excludes the
display of filling levels of the expandable data
arrays specified by group parameter.
N NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See NO.
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
Input of group names (three to five characters) in continuation mode
restricts the display of information to those groups. If the
parameter is omitted, all group information is displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DBSIZE-1 -
MOD DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DB-SIZE
This command expands the areas of database. This command is part of
the file generation concept of CP113. The command always creates a new
file generation with modified SY.TASKLIB and SY.SEMILIB by expanding
the database. The files SY.SIMP and SY.LOADLIB.LA will be copied
from the current generation. All other files will be connected from
the current generation without any change.
Depending on the system state the new generation will be
- set valid and introduced into the system immediately by
Recovery .
- set blocked.
It is possible to repeat the parameters of this command up to
100 times.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DBSIZE : GROUP= ,SIZE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
This parameter specifies a group of modules with expandable
structures of data to be expanded together.
.,+,*,%,#,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
SIZE WANTED SIZE OF EXP. GROUP
This parameter specifies the desired number of elements of an
expandable structure of data. The given value has to be greater than
the actual number of elements and less then or equal to the maximum of
numbers of elements.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DBSIZE-1 -
DISP DCHBOOK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DCH BOOKING
This command displays the DCH call booking report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified destinations.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DCHBOOK : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,DEST= [,BEGDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the destination name. This parameter
.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the time period from which
the DCH call booking report will be displayed.
Notes:
- Default value is today
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DCHBOOK-1 +
DISP DCHBOOK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the time period from which
Notes:
- Default value is the actual time or 0:00 if date given
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the time period to which
Notes:
- Default value is today
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the time period to which
Notes:
- Default value is midnight
a-b
a: HOUR=
Default: 23
b: MINUTE=
Default: 45
E N D
DISP DCHBOOK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DCHDELAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DCH DELAY REPORT
This command displays the DCH delay report in a specified Common Service
Group for some specified destinations.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DCHDELAY : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,DEST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the destination name. This parameter
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DCHDELAY-1 -
DIAG DCR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This command initiates LTG digital code receiver diagnosis.
ACT or CBL and the associated DIU must be in the
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG DCR : LTG= ,DCR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
DCR DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the position of the DCR within
the LTG. A DCR is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DCR-1 -
DIAG DES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This command is necessary to diagnose a digital echo
suppressor in an LTG.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG DES : LTG= ,DES= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
DES DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This parameter specifies the position of the DES within
the LTG. A DES is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DES-1 -
ACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command activates the specified destination for carrier selection.
This destination may be either a newly created destination for carrier
selection (ENTR DESTDAT) or an already used destination for carrier
selection, which was expanded beforehand (MOD DESTDAT).
The necessity for another activation of an already earlier activated
destination for carrier selection may result from the change of quotas or
trunk group sizes within an active carrier quota group (MOD CQDAT).
Prerequisites:
- The destination is created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- Each assigned carrier specific destination has at least one route, except
for the case, that the specified carrier is deactivated within the quota
group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT DEST : DEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT DEST-1 -
CAN DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION
This command cancels a standard destination or a destination with new code.
Carrier destinations may be cancelled automatically, if the assignment to
the superior destination of carrier selection was removed with the help of
a MOD DESTDAT or CAN DESTDAT command. If they have been transformed
into standard destinations, they may be cancelled with CAN DEST.
Destinations for carrier selection may only be cancelled, if they were
deactivated first with the help of the command DACT DEST and afterwards
transformed into standard destinations with the help of the command
CAN DESTDAT.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point in existence (created) that refers
to this destination.
- There must be no code point group in existence referring to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex code point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no directory number destination in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data in existence referring to
this destination.
- There must be no route in existence to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data referring to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data referring to this destination.
- There must be no call booking limit referring to this destination.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DEST : DEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DEST-1 -
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DESTINATION
This command creates a destination. A destination is normally accessed via
code points. A distinction is made between different types of
destinations, depending on the further treatment of call requests:
- Standard Destinations
These access routes are for trunk group clusters, trunk groups, trunk work
station groups, test equipment, announcement trunk groups and call types.
- Destinations with new code translation
These are used to access another destination with aid of repeated digit
translation (Call Processing).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
- Destinations for carrier selection and carrier destinations
These are required for conditional alternative routing. Destinations for
carrier selection are initially created as standard destinations
(ENTR DESTDAT).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
Prerequisites:
- The destination does not yet exist.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must have to be extended with
the command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. CR DEST - RETRANS DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
2. CR DEST - STANDARD STANDARD DESTINATION
1. Input format
DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is entered for destinations with retranslation.
Destinations with new code replace the originally dialed digit combination
with a new digit combination specified in the parameter NEWCODE. This
happens independently of the digit combination which led to the destination
with new code, i.e. many code points may refer the same destination.
Immediately after the code replacement a new digit translation process
is started in the own switch.
A destination that has a digit conversion assigned allows to access to
another destination thanks to the new digit translation.
The CONVCODE and the NEWCODE parameter perform a similar function
(i.e. starting a new digit translation).
CONVCODE refers to the dialed digits, i.e. it permits modification of
digits that have not yet been translated (B - DN), but leaves any dialed
area code unchanged that is administered as a LAC in the own switch.
NEWCODE performs a complete replacement of the codepoint, i.e. it allows
the LAC to be replaced, but leaves the B - DN unchanged.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],NEWCODE= ] ;- ]
] CR DEST : DEST= -,CONVCODE= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DEST-1 +
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code with which the selected
code is replaced.
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is done.
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- Per modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be affected
but the total of both modifications is restricted to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6. digit is omitted.
CR DEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD DESTINATION
This input format is entered for standard destinations.
Standard destinations refer to up to 16 routes, which are used for the
selection of a trunk group in order to route a call to the outside of the
switch.
Trunk group is selected with a fixed alternative or an optimized
routing scheme, i.e. the routes are checked in ascending hunting sequence
if the addressed trunk group has at least one idle trunk.
If the ODR algorithm is used the routes of the ODR-list are checked
cyclically after the fixed alternate route at the position LINK has failed.
If the route is not allowed to seize the last idle trunk, then it must be
checked whether the addressed trunk group has at least two idle trunks. The
first route in the hunting sequence which fulfills this condition is seized
for the call being set up.
The rerouting feature deviates from the fixed alternative routing scheme.
Rerouting means that in case of an unsuccessful attempt to get through
(i.e. successful seizure of a trunk in the own switch but congestion in a
transit switch), an attempt is made to establish the connection using a route
belonging to another rerouting group, i.e. the congested transit switches
are not addressed again.
-
] ]
] CR DEST : DEST= [,FOVCODE=] [,MINMAX=] [,TLIM=] [,DEFEAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ODR= ,LINK=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final alternate
route. This code is used for retranslation after all routes
of the overflow sequence have been checked without success.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
MINMAX MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined
by an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Note:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the own exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination, must not
be considered.
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DEST-3 +
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
Default: 1
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
Default: 24
TLIM TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. The project-specific time values
of the specified timers can be output using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, dialing is considered
to be ended when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
DIALTM1 -- DIAL TIME 1
]] ]] Corresponds to timer 07 for trunks.
]-DIALTM2 ] DIAL TIME 2
]]DIALTM3 ]] DIAL TIME 3
~OFFDIA '- SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 -- RING TIME LIMIT 0
]] ]] Switches off the ring time limit. This is a
]] ]] mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG is to be
]] ]] specified for one of the routes.
]]RINGTM1 ]] RING TIME LIMIT 1
]] ]] Corresponds to timer 19.
]- ] Corresponds to timer 20.
~RINGTM7 '- RING TIME LIMIT 7
Corresponds to timer 25.
CLEATM1 -- CLEAR BACK TIME 1
]]CLEATM2 ]] CLEAR BACK TIME 2
CR DEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]- ] Corresponds to timer 37.
]]OFFEND ]] SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
]] ]] Supervision of the called party clearback signal
]] ]] is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
~RELCLEA '- RELEASE CLEAR BACK
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received from the called end.
CONVTM1 -- CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
]]CONVTM2 ]] CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 2
]-CONVTM4 ] CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
~OFFCALL '- NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the conversation time limit.
RELTM0 -- RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
]] ]] Specifies that the connection is held until
]] ]] released by an operator.
]-RELTM1 ] RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 1
]] ]] Specifies that the connection is released as soon
]] ]] as the dialing party has replaced the receiver.
]]RELTM2 ]] RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 2
~RELTM3 '- RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
This parameter value corresponds to timer 43.
Default: DIALTM1, RINGTM1, CLEATM1, OFFCALL, RELTM3
DEFEAT DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter value specifies particular call processing
destination characteristics.
AUTOINFO AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
speech path after the connection has been
established.
FIRSTACT FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
This value assigns the network traffic status
primary traffic to the first active route,
i.e. to the lowest route number in the
overflow sequence to the destination that is
not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
network traffic status primary traffic to
route number 1 to the destination even if
that route is deactive.
INDIDEN INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
This value marks a destination as one
requiring individual identification of an
originating CR PBX.
RCALLBAC RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
The calling party can recall the operator who
set up the connection.
ODR OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
ODR algorithm.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DEST-5 +
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This is only allowed for standard destinations.
LINK LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate route where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR list
are checked.
E N D
CR DEST-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command deactivates a destination for carrier selection. A standby
carrier destination is specified for the entire traffic volume assigned to
the destination for carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- A destination is a destination for carrier selection.
- The specified standby carrier destination belongs to the
destination for carrier selection that is to be deactivated.
- The specified standby carrier destination has at least one route.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT DEST : DEST= ,SCDEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT DEST-1 -
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION
This command displays the data of all or some specified destinations.
To display all parameters the different types of destinations require
three different output masks, which will be displayed successively.
The amount of display may be reduced by specifying the parameter FORMAT .
The amount of display may be reduced further by specifying additional
parameters.
When specifying several parameters at the same time, only those
destinations will be displayed that fulfill all requirements at the same
time.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DEST : DEST= [,FORMAT=] [,CQGRP=] [,CARR=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination.
The display of all existing destinations will be performed if
parameter DEST= X is specified.
ALL DISPLAY ALL DESTINATIONS
All data for all specified
destinations are output.
NEWCODE SELECT NEW CODE DESTINATIONS
Only the data of destinations with
digit retranslation are output.
STD SELECT STANDARD DESTINATIONS
Only the data of standard destinations,
carrier destinations and destinations
for carrier selection are output.
CARRSEL SELECT CARRIER SELECTION DESTS
Only the data of carrier destinations
and destinations for carrier selection
are output.
SORT SORTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
All destinations will be displayed in
alphabetical order ifparameter
FORMAT=SORT is specified.
The carrier destinations belonging to one
destination for carrier selection will not be
displayed in an alphabetical order, because
they are related to the corresponding
carriers of the quota group.
NOSORT NOT SORTED IN ALPHA. ORDER
The linkage between the destinations and
the ODR lists are displayed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DEST-1 +
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: ALL, SORT
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that belong to the specified carrier quota group.
CARR CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that contain the specified carrier.
E N D
DISP DEST-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION
This command modifies one of the following destination data:
- the name of any destination,
- the data of a standard destination,
- the data of a destination for carrier selection and automatically all the
assigned carrier destinations,
- the destination link to an optimized dynamic routing (ODR) list,
- it creates or cancels the link from a destination to an ODR-list.
Notes:
- This command is not intended for changing a standard destination into
a destination with new code by entering the parameter NEWCODE or CONVCODE
additionally. Nor is it intended for changing a destination in the
reverse direction. Such a modification has to be performed using the
commands CAN DEST and CR DEST.
- It is possible to modify a destination with NEWCODE into a
destination with CONVCODE and vice versa.
Prerequisites:
- The destination exists already.
- The specified ODR-list exists.
- The specified new value does not yet exist.
- The specified old value is equal to the existing data.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must have been extended with
the command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
Compatibilities:
- The parameters FOVCODE and CFOVCODE are only allowed in case of
standard or carrier-selection destinations.
1. MOD DEST - DESTDATA MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
2. MOD DEST - DESTNAME MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
3. MOD DEST - RETRANS MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
1. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This input format is entered in order to modify:
- data of standard destinations,
- data of destinations for carrier selection or
- linkage of a standard destination to an ODR-list.
The change of a parameter for a destination for carrier selection results
in an identical change of that value within all assigned carrier specific
destinations.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for successful command
execution in addition to the standard prerequisites, if one ofthe parameters
DEFEAT, MINMAX or TLIM is changed:
- The name of a standard or carrier specific destination (DEST) is
specified.
- New and old value of the parameter TLIM refers to the same time limit.
Note if changing the parameter DEFEAT:
- Each command input permits the addition of new values (using parameter
DEFEAT) and/or cancellation of existing values (using parameter CDEFEAT);
unspecified values remain unchanged in the database.
Note if changing the parameter TLIM:
- Each command input allows the value of a single time limit to be changed;
the unspecified values of other time limits remain unchanged in the
database.
-
] ]
] MOD DEST : DEST= <,FOVCODE= ,CFOVCODE= ,MINMAX= ,TLIM= ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DEST-1 +
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,DEFEAT= ,CDEFEAT=> [,ODR=] [,LINK=] [,CODR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternate route. This code is used for retranslation
after all routes of the overflow sequence have been
checked without success.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
CFOVCODE CANCELLED FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternate route that has to be cancelled.
MINMAX NEW MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined by
an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Notes:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination,
must not be considered.
a-b
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
TLIM NEW TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. An entry can only be made to change
the existing values; if no value was entered for the parameter TLIM
the values created with the command CR DEST remain in the database.
The project-specific time values of the specified timers can
be displayed using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS
supervision for the destination. If this is activated,
dialing is considered to be complete when the relevant timer
has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
MOD DEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 -- RING TIME LIMIT 0
]] ]] Switches off the ring time limit.
]] ]] This is a mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG
]] ]] is to be specified for one of the routes.
]]RINGTM1 ]] RING TIME 1
]- ] Default for ring time supervision.
~RINGTM7 '- RING TIME 7
]] ]] Default for supervision of the clearback
]] ]] signal.
]-CLEATM4 ] CLEAR BACK TIME 4
]] ]] Supervision of the called party clearback signal
]] ]] is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received.
CONVTM1 -- CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
]-CONVTM4 ] CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
~OFFCALL '- NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the call time limit.
RELTM0 -- RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
]] ]] Specifies that the connection is held until it
]] ]] is released by an operator.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DEST-3 +
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]- ] Specifies that the connection is released as
]] ]] soon as the called party has replaced the
]] ]] receiver.
~RELTM3 '- RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
Corresponds to timer 43.
DEFEAT NEW DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics.
Default: No value
AUTOINFO- AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
] ] Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
] ] speech path after the connection has been
] ] established.
]FIRSTACT] FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
] ] This value assigns the network traffic status
] ] primary traffic to the first active route,
] ] i.e. to the lowest route number in the
] ] overflow sequence to the destination that is
] ] not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
] ] network traffic status primary traffic to
] ] route number 1 to the destination even if
] ] that route is deactive.
]INDIDEN ] INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
] ] This value marks a destination as one
] ] requiring individual identification of an
] ] originating CR PBX.
~RCALLBAC- RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
CDEFEAT CANCELED DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics to be canceled.
Default: No value
AUTOINFO- AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
] ] Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
] ] speech path after the connection has been
] ] established.
]FIRSTACT] FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE FLAG
] ] The first active route to the destination has
] ] the network traffic status primary traffic.
]INDIDEN ] INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
] ] This value marks a destination as one
] ] requiring individual identification of an
] ] originating CR PBX.
~RCALLBAC- RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
ODR algorithm.
This is only allowed for standard destinations, which are
not already linked to an ODR-list.
MOD DEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate routes where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR-list
are scanned.
Note:
This parameter must be entered in combination with ODR or
can be entered when ODR is already existing.
CODR CANCEL LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which should no longer
be linked from the destination.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DEST-5 +
MOD DEST
DESTNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
This input format is to modify a destination name.
The name of a destination can be modified independently of the type, i.e:
- the names of standard and carrier specific destinations can be changed
as well as the names of destinations for carrier selection and
destinations with new code.
Prerequisite:
- The new name is not yet used for another destination.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DEST : DEST= ,NDEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NDEST NEW DESTINATION NAME
MOD DEST-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is to modify destination data for destinations with
retranslation.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],NEWCODE= ]] ;- ]
] MOD DEST : DEST= ]-,CONVCODE=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NEWCODE NEW NEWCODE
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is made.
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- For each modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be
affected but the total of both modifications is limited
to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6. digit is omitted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DEST-7 -
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DESTINATION
This command initiates recording of destination load data.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type with a sum of 512 destinations
(specified via group or destination origin code) may be entered
at the same time.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more
than one job.
- In case of high system load it is possible that not all
measurement data can be displayed on OMT or written into
the file within a 15 minute interval.
The data record remains incomplete.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],GRP= ] ]
] REC DEST : UNIT= -,DOCODE= [,FORMAT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DEST-1 +
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a group (containing a
maximum of 512 destinations). One of the two measurement parameters
(group or destination origin code) must be specified; a combination
is not permitted. If a group is specified, output is only possible
to disk. Only valid group names may be entered.
DOCODE DESTINATION ORIGIN CODE
This parameter specifies the destination origin code.
Up to 16 destination origin codes may be linked with &.
One of the two measurement parameters (destination origin code or
group) must be specified; a combination is not permitted.
The destinations for which measurement is to be carried out may
lie inside or outside the home exchange.
The destination codes have to be specified including the
traffic discrimination digit(s) and the local area code.
In the destination code part it is possible to specify any digit
combination (up to 18 digits per code). No checks are performed
during command acceptance whether the digit combinations lead
to an existing destination.
The operator must be careful not to put invalid codes under
measurement.
If a code to be measured is too long and not valid (e.g. 089 722 05),
the calls to the smaller and valid digit combination (e.g. 089 722 0)
cannot be performed.
Measurement of subdestinations is possible (e.g. 09 & 098 & 0987 &...),
but not in combination with different origin or language code values.
A maximum of 18 subdestinations can be measured at the same time.
Multiple measurement of identical measurement objects (same digit
combination) is not permitted.
However, identical destinations can be distinguished by providing
different carrier access codes at part of the destination codes.
a[-b[-c]]
a: DESTINATION CODE=
REC DEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the destination.
b: ORIGIN CODE=
This information unit specifies the origin.
The origin code corresponds to the originating mark 1
used for routing purposes.
c: LANGUAGE CODE=
0...F, range of hexadecimal numbers
This information unit specifies the language digit.
This parameter determines the output format to the output medium.
The identifiers ALL (output of all traffic data counters) or
VOL (output of the following traffic data counters: calls carried,
calls carried with answer, traffic volume and traffic volume
with answer) are permitted.
Default: ALL
ALL ALL DATA
VOL VOLUME DATA
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DEST-3 +
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
REC DEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
NO DEFAULT
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DEST-5 -
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command cancels from the existing TMRIPI combination the specified call
history data or the relation of all TIRDESTs to their DEST (and in addition
this destination itself).
To re-assign an intercept to a pure TMRIPI combination, the operator has to
enter the parameter TMRIPI with only two info units. After entering this
command the actual assignment to this TMRIPI combination will be cancelled,
modifying it into an assignment of an intercept.
To cancel the call history data, the operator has to enter the parameter
TMRIPI with all three info units. After entering this command, the call
history data of this specific TMRIPI combination will not be evaluated for an
incoming call anymore. If call processing comes with all three values
(transmission requirement, ISUP preference indicator, call history data), the
call can be routed over a TIRDEST to be specified belonging to the specific
TMRIPI combination, ignoring the given call history data.
In case that the operator only entered the parameter DEST, it will be
assumed, that he wants to cancel the whole TMRIPI constellation. Therefore
after entering this command, the destination for TMRIPI selection will be
deleted. The corresponding TIRDEST elements will always be kept.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point (created) that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no code point group that refers to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex code point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number that refers to this destination.
- There must be no directory number destination that refers to this destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no route to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data that refers to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data that refers to this destination.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DESTCNTL : DEST= [,TMRIPI=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for
TMRIPI selection.
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists
of three information units, one for the transmission
requirement, a second for the ISUP preference indicator and
the third info unit for special call history data.
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DESTCNTL-1 +
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNRES. FALLBACK CAP.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
E N D
CAN DESTCNTL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command creates a new type of destination, called destination for TMRIPI
selection (DEST).
This destination is used to route a call depending on its incoming
characteristics.
These characteristics are defined with the parameter TMRIPI.
Depending on the valid TMRIPI combinations, a certain destination (TIRDEST)
will be choosen to route the traffic.
This means, that the code point points to the destination for TMRIPI
selection, and depending on the TMRIPI value (coming from the LTG incoming
side) the call will be routed over a certain TMRIPI routing destination
(TIRDEST).
If the specified destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST) does not yet
exist, a new element will be occupied in the datatable, having the new
destination type (destination for TMRIPI selection). In case that the
destination exists already, and it is of the correct type, it is assumed
that the operator wants to:
- enter additional data
- change data
If the parameter TIRDEST is entered:
- an additional TMRIPI combination may be entered for an already
existing destination, as well as for a new destination;
- a change may be made from intercept or destination (TIRDEST) to
a new destination.
If the parameter TIRDEST is not entered:
- a call history value may be brought into the administered state
(i.e. the call history value will be evaluated by Call Processing)
and be assigned to intercept handling;
- a call history value already administered may be reassigned from a
TIRDEST to intercept handling.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area name, the
range of values must have been extended with the command MOD CALLPOPT :
DESTMAXL = LONG.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR DESTCNTL : DEST= ,TMRIPI= [,TIRDEST=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for TMRIPI
selection.
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists of three
information units, one for the transmission requirement, a second for
the ISUP preference indicator and the third info unit for special call
history data.
Valid input combinations for this parameter:
KBIT64FB-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DESTCNTL-1 +
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KBIT64-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
SPEECH-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
A3KHZ1-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
KBIT64-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
SPEECH-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
A3KHZ1-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
KBIT64-REQ-NOGTUPP
-PREF-NOGTUPP
-NOTREQ-NOGTUPP
SPEECH-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
A3KHZ1-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNR. FALLBACK CAPAB.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
TIRDEST TMR/IPI ROUTING DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of a destination, which will be
referable via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
The destination may be reached with a code combination directly, or
indirectly via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The destination specified for parameter TIRDEST has to be
created as standard or newcode destination, or as a destination
for carrier selection, with help of the command CR DEST or
ENTR DESTDAT.
E N D
ENTR DESTCNTL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN DESTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA
This command converts a destination for carrier selection into a standard
destination. The assignment to a carrier quota group is cancelled. With
the command CAN DESTDAT all routes created for the standby destination
are transferred to the former destination for carrier selection. As a
result, this destination becomes a standard destination again. The former
standby carrier destination is then cancelled.
The other carrier destinations are converted into standard destinations
if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- a test point exists for the carrier destination
- a route exists for the carrier destination.
Carrier destinations for which neither of these conditions is fulfilled
are cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- The destination for carrier selection has already been deactivated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DESTDAT : DEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DESTDAT-1 -
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies a standard destination to form a destination for
carrier selection. This applies even if calls are already processed via
the standard destination.
Note:
The modification is not allowed for destinations with optimized
dynamic routing (CR ODR) reference.
Prerequisites:
- The standard destination to be modified to form a destination
for carrier selection is created.
- If one of the carrier destinations has already been created
as standard destination, no code points refer to this destination.
- The carrier quota group has been created and is active.
- A carrier destination is specified for each active carrier of the
carrier quota group.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. ENTR DESTDAT - NOROUTE
2. ENTR DESTDAT - ROUTE
1. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has no routes
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DESTDAT-1 +
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: CARRIER DESTINATION NAME=
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier to
which the carrier destination will be assigned.
ENTR DESTDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR DESTDAT
ROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has routes.
The routes of the standard destination are transferred to the specified
standby carrier destination.
- The standby carrier destination must be specified in the list of
carrier destinations.
- No routes may have been created for the standby carrier destination.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= ,SCDEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
a-b
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies to which carrier destination the routes
which are assigned to the standard destination, being converted
into carrier selection destination, are to be transferred.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DESTDAT-3 -
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies the assignment of carrier destination to a carrier
selection area.
It is possible to
- assign further carrier destinations to a destination for carrier
selection or
- cancel the assignment of carrier destinations to a destination for
carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. MOD DESTDAT - ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
2. MOD DESTDAT - CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is used to modify the extension for a destination for
carrier selection (add carrier destinations).
All destinations for carrier selection need to be expanded after the
addition of one or more carriers to a quota group (MOD CQGRP) in order to
bring the additional carriers into effect for the load sharing scheme.
The expansion of destinations for carrier selection is also necessary, if
no carrier destinations were assigned during the initial ENTR DESTDAT to
carriers with a quota of zero, and if the carriers shall be activated now.
All added carrier destinations with already assigned routes are activated
automatically, if the destination for carrier selection is already active
(ACT DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The name of the additional carrier destination is not yet used.
- The additional carrier destination already exists as a standard
destination without any code points using this destination.
- The carrier name already exists in that quota group used by the specified
destination for carrier selection.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DESTDAT : ACDEST= ,DEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 19 parameter values can be entered.
a-b
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier
destination which can be assigned to the carrier selection
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DESTDAT-1 +
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
MOD DESTDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DESTDAT
CCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is entered to modify the extension of destination for
carrier selection (cancel carrier destination).
All carrier destinations assigned to a deactivated carrier (MOD CQDAT)
need to be deleted from the destination for carrier selection before the
carrier can be removed from the quota group (MOD CQGRP).
Additionally, a table is displayed which shows if the cancelled carrier
destinations have been deleted or if they were kept as standard
destinations.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier, which the carrier destination being cancelled is assigned
to, is deactive within the quota group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DESTDAT : CCDEST= ,DEST= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the carrier destination for which the
assignment to the carrier selection area should be cancelled.
Up to 19 parameter values can be cancelled.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DESTDAT-3 -
DISP DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command displays authorizations assigned to devices.
A table is displayed showing the authorizations of individual
or all devices.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP DEVAUT : [DEV=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the basic or maximum
authorization is to be modified, or which devices authorizations are
to be displayed.
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
This information unit specifies the device type.
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
This information unit specifies the device number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DEVAUT-1 -
MOD DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the input device authorization.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DEVAUT : DEV= ,AUT= ,OAUT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the authorization must
be modified.
a-b
a: DEVICE IDENTIFIER
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE IDENTIFIER=
AUT NEW AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the new device authorization.
OAUT OLD AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the old device authorization.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DEVAUT-1 -
DISP DIAGSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS
This command displays interim results of the active permanent
diagnosis. The number of cyclic runs, the number of faults found,
information on different faults, and the basic information on
the last fault are displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DIAGSTAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DIAGSTAT-1 -
DISP DIGITCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS CP
This command displays the digit translator data related to the
specified digit combination.
The displayed data may be restricted to certain digit combinations
specifying parameters CODE and ORIG1.
Examples: DISP DIGITCP; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=X; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=12; (code restricted)
DISP DIGITCP: ORIG1=DEF; (origination mark 1 restricted).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DIGITCP : [CODE=] [,ORIG1=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that begin with the entered digits will
be displayed.
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that contain the entered originating
mark will be displayed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and
the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DIGITCP-1 -
CAN DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITS GP
This command cancels the control record for the GP according to the digit
combination entered in the command CR DIGITGP.
The appropriate digit combinations will then be pretranslated according to
the standard values.
Prerequisites :
- The appropriate digit combinations in the digit translator must first be
cancelled if the number of digits for pretranslation is to be changed.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DIGITGP : CODE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DIGITGP-1 -
CR DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITS GP
This command creates the control record for the GP. Based on this record, the
number of digits to be pretranslated in the GP is determined.
The record consists of two units. The first unit specifies the code for pre-
translation. The second unit determines the number of digits to be evaluated
by the GP. Codes that dont appear in the control record are handled by using
default values.
(These default values are:
Subscriber Controlled Input - 6 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=TOLLFRNO - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=CLOCKTST - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=NBARCPT - 24 digits,
Local areacodes - 6 digits.)
Since the pretranslator receives its data from the commands that create the
digit translator, the described command must be entered first.
Prerequisites :
- The entered control record must not already exist.
- The command must be entered before the digit translator is created.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DIGITGP : CODE= ,DIGITS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
DIGITS DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits to be evaluated
in the GP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DIGITGP-1 -
DISP DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS GP
This command displays the digit control data for the GP and also the digit
pretranslation table.
If the parameters are omitted or standard list format is selected, all digit
sequences for which the digit pretranslation differs from the standard setup
(evaluation of a maximum of 4 digits in the GP), are displayed.
If extended list format is selected, the complete digit pretranslation data is
displayed for all digit sequences specified by the parameter CODE.
If all data of digit preanalysis table is selected, the data of the not used
elements (i.e. elements of the digit preanalysis table with initial values)
will be displayed too.
If utilization list format is selected, the rate of capacity utilization of the
digit pretranslation table is displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DIGITGP : [CODE=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit sequence for which data is to be
displayed.
The parameter is mandatory if FORMAT = EXT or
FORMAT = ALL.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = STD
- FORMAT = USE
STD STANDARD LIST FORMAT
EXT EXTENDED LIST FORMAT
ALL ALL DATA OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
USE USE OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DIGITGP-1 -
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITS GP
This command modifies the number of digits which are to be collected after the
digit pretranslation in the GP. (Prerequisite for this command is a good working
knowledge of the system.) The call is not passed on to the CP until the GP has
received the required number of digits.
The number of GP-CP messages (M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C - C:COME_AGAIN_C cycles) is
reduced if more digits are collected in the GP. This affects the time for
setting up a call as well as the used processor time, but only if the called
party digits are received with an "overlap" protocol. Otherwise a single
GP-CP message M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C is used to send all digits at once to the CP.
The GP uses a subtree of the CP digit translation tree to perform the digit
pretranslation. This subtree, in the standard configuration, comprises four
digits, i.e. the root of the digit tree plus three additional nodes of the digit
tree.
This global standard length can be modified with the DIGITS parameter.
A changed value of this parameter affects only entries created in the
digit tree after the execution of MOD DIGITGP. Existing entries remain
unchanged.
Note:
Besides this global setting of the subtree size it is also possible to optimise
specific codes using CR DIGITGP.
Using a higher DIGITS value improves the system performance, but more memory
is required to store the digit combinations. This limits the possible number of
digit combinations in the CP digit tree, which are entered with these commands:
- CR CPT
- SPLIT CPT
- CR TEPT
- ENTR AREACODE, if parameter LAC is entered
- MOD AREACODE, if parameter LAC is entered
- ENTR SCFEA, if parameter CODE is entered
All these commands are rejected if the GP digit tree does not have sufficient
space, and additional nodes have to be allocated.
It is also possible to increase the number of digits that are collected in the
GP for specific digit combinations.
The parameters CODE and possibly LAC define the digit combination.
Parameter COLDIG defines how many digits still have to be collected after
the digit pretranslation is finished.
This optimisation does not affect the number of allocated nodes in the GP digit
tree. It is additional data for a pretranslation result.
Note:
This number of additionally collected digits is reset whenever one of the above
listed commands is entered for a digit combination that completely includes
LAC (if present) and CODE. The COLDIG value has to be
re-entered if it still applies.
Caution:
The length of LAC (if present) and CODE plus the value of
COLDIG may not exceed the total length of the shortest called party number
starting with LAC (if present) and CODE.
Entering a COLDIG value that does not comply with this rule REMOVES short
called party numbers beginning with LAC (if present) and CODE the
service!
The called party numbers concerned are not recognized as completely dialed.
The calls are released after a time-out.
1. MOD DIGITGP - COLDIG INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
2. MOD DIGITGP - DIGITS DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
1. Input format
INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
This path is used to modify the code individual amount of additionally collected
digits.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DIGITGP-1 +
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DIGITGP : CODE= [,LAC=] ,COLDIG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the control record digit combination for
the GP.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in the exchange.
This parameter specifies the number of digits which are to be collected
in the GP after the digit pretranslation.
MOD DIGITGP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DIGITGP
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
This path is used to modify the global standard length of the digit combinations
that are stored in the GP pretranslator.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DIGITGP : DIGITS= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DIGITS PRETRANSLATED DIGITS (DEFAULT)
This parameter specifies the default value for the number of digits
which are stored in the GP digit pretranslator und used for the digit
pretranslation.
Digit combinations with a length lower or equal to the value of this
parameter may be stored completely in the GP. Longer digit combinations
are cut off at the specified length and partially stored in the GP.
The GP handles a subset of the CP functions for digit translation.
Fewer digits than the specified length are stored in GP if a digit
combination uses a CP-only function.
An example for these is a CR CPT using the evalution of
ORIG1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DIGITGP-3 -
STOP DISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP DISPLAY
This command stops the display being output on the O&M terminal.
The command is only effective if the display was started with a command
that performs a display function (e.g. DISP, SEL, STAT commands).
Notes:
- The command must be entered on the same terminal as the command which
causes the output that should be stopped.
Input format
-
] ]
] STOP DISP : JN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a display job.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP DISP-1 -
CONF DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
With this command a digital interface unit can be configured
to one of the states MBL, ACT, CBL or PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER
PLA <-> MBL
MBL --> ACT
ACT --> MBL (when the LTG is not active)
MBL <-> CBL
UNA --> MBL or CBL or ACT
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DIU-1 -
DIAG DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
This command diagnoses a DIU of the type DIU24 or DIU30 in
an LTG.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DIU-1 -
STAT DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
- one DIU in a particular LTG
- one DIU in all LTGs
- all DIUs in a particular LTG
- all DIUs in all LTGs
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in a
particular LTG
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in all LTGs
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT DIU : LTG= [,DIU=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DIU-1 -
DISP DLCI
DLCI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DATA LINK CONNECTION IDENTIFIER
- data link connection identifiers on the BD-channel
- frame handler reference numbers
- terminal end point identifiers
- local area codes
- directory numbers
- line numbers of PBX lines and
- the equipment numbers of DLU- or V5IF ports
depending on the given input parameters.
1. DISP DLCI - DLCI INPUT OF DLCI AND FRAMEHD
2. DISP DLCI - DN INPUT OF LAC AND DN
3. DISP DLCI - EQN INPUT OF EQN
1. Input format
INPUT OF DLCI AND FRAMEHD
In this path the input of DLCI and FRAMEHD is considered.
The DLCI value has to specify a DLCI on the Bd-channel.
-
] ]
] DISP DLCI : DLCI= ,FRAMEHD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DLCI DATA LINK CONNECTION ID
This parameter specifies the data link connection identifier on
a BD-channel. The input of the DLCI on a BDDLUCH or BDSILCCH
is not valid.
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the frame handler reference number.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLCI-1 +
DISP DLCI
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INPUT OF LAC AND DN
In this path the input of LAC and DN of a subscriber or PBX line
is considered.
For PBX lines the input of LNO has to be done.
The parameter TEI is optional and only valid for subscribers or
PBX lines on DLU modules with at most 8 ports. It is invalid for
subscribers or PBX lines on DLU modules with 16 ports or V5
interfaces.
If the parameter TEI is entered, the DLCI value is calculated
and displayed according to the entered value.
If the parameter TEI is not entered, all DLCIs are calculated
and displayed according to the stored TEIs of this port.
-
] ]
] DISP DLCI : LAC= ,DN= [,LNO=] [,TEI=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a PBX line.
TEI TERMINAL END POINT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the value of the terminal end point
identifier.
DISP DLCI-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DLCI
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
INPUT OF EQN
In this path the input of EQN is considered.
The EQN has to specify a subscriber or PBX line on a DLU
or V5IF. If an access with multiple DN is specified, the
first object on this access will be evaluated.
The parameter TEI is optional and only valid for subscribers or
PBX lines on DLU modules with at most 8 ports. It is invalid for
subscribers or PBX lines on DLU modules with 16 ports or V5
interfaces.
If the parameter TEI is entered, the DLCI value is calculated
and displayed according to the entered value.
If the parameter TEI is not entered, all DLCIs are calculated
and displayed according to the stored TEIs of this port.
-
] ]
] DISP DLCI : EQN= [,TEI=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of a DLU port
or V5IF port.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
This unit specifies a DLU- or V5IF number.
10, 20, 30 ... 2550 specifies a DLU number
6000, 6001 ... 8999 specifies a V5IF number
b: SHELF NUMBER OR EXTENSION UNIT=
This unit specifies the shelf number of a DLU or the
extension unit of a V5IF. The extension unit of a V5IF
is always 0.
c: MODULE NO OR UPPER V5IF PORTNO=
This unit specifies the module number of a DLU or the
upper two digits of a V5IF port number.
e.g. V5IF port 1739 -> 17
253 -> 2
27 -> 0
d: CIRCUIT NO OR LOWER V5IF PORTNO=
This unit specifies the circuit number of a DLU port or
the lower 2 digits of a V5IF port.
e.g. V5IF port 1739 -> 39
253 -> 53
27 -> 27
TEI TERMINAL END POINT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the value of the terminal end point
identifier.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLCI-3 +
DISP DLCI
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
DISP DLCI-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU to be canceled must exist.
- The existing DLU systems must be PLA.
- No nailed up connection must exist for this DLU.
- All DLU modules except those which cannot be administrated must
have been canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DLU : DLU= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DLU-1 -
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command initiates the operating state transition of a DLU
processor.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU to be configured must be created.
Notes:
- The CONF DLU command starts configuration of only one processor.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DLUC0=] ]
] CONF DLU : DLU= -,DLUC1= ,OST= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 0
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
This parameter specifies the operating states.
Compatibilities:
+-------------------+-------------------+
! ! ! New state !
! Old ! Access- +----+----+----+----+
! state ! Degrading ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===================+====+====+====+====+
! UNA ! * ! + ! + ! ! + !
+-------------------+----+----+----+----+
! MBL ! * ! + ! + ! + ! !
+-------------------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! * ! ! ! ! + !
+-------------------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! * ! ! + ! ! + !
+-------------------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! NONE ! + ! ! ! !
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DLU-1 +
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! ACT ! DST ! + ! ! ! + !
! ACT ! SEZ ! + ! ! ! + !
! ACT ! NAC ! + ! ! ! + !
+----------------------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
*: not relevant
Notes:
- During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
transitions and the compatibility table is not relevant.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
CONF DLU-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command creates a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The required LTGs and LTUs must exist.
Please note that it is not permissable to combine
LTGB and or D30 and D24.
- The D30 or D24 provided for connecting the DLU
must not be connected yet.
- The DLU must not be created yet.
- If the DLU is connected to two LTGs, the load types of both
LTGs have to be identical.
- Memory space must be provided in the CP database.
(see MODIFY DB-SIZE)
When a DLU is created, the DLU modules required for
operation are created automatically. No ports are
assigned to these modules. They cannot be administrated
by MML commands.
In a DLU with the shelf type A the mounting locations
0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9 and 1-10 are used by these
modules.
In a DLU with the shelf type B the mounting locations
modules.
In a DLU with the shelf type D the mounting locations
0-7 and 0-8 are used by these modules.
In a DLU with the shelf type O the mounting locations
modules.
In a DLU with the shelf type V the mounting locations
modules.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DLU : DLU= ,SHELF= [,DLUC0=] [,DLUC1=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SHELF SHELF TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU shelf type.
A SHELF TYPE A
B SHELF TYPE B
O SHELF TYPE O
D SHELF TYPE D
V SHELF TYPE V
This parameter specifies the connection of DLU system 0 with D24 or
D30 in an LTGB.
Depending on which options are chosen, different inputs are possible:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DLU-1 +
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Create a connection between LTG and DLU:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu>
This LTU must be a DIU with CCS (common channel signaling).
2. Create two connections between LTG and DLU:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
One of these LTUs must be a DIU with CCS.
Incompatibilities:
If the CCS link of a DLU with the shelf type V is
connected to a DIU with the application CCSDLU, no
extension link may be created.
a-b-c[-d]
This unit specifies the DIU to which the DLU is connected
via a PDC (this is the PCM connection from DLU to LTG).
Compatibilities:
0...3 for connection to D30
unit values.
d: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
D30 in an LTGB.
1. Create a connection between LTG and DLU:
This LTU must be a DIU with CCS.
2. Create two connections between LTG and DLU:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
Incompatibilities:
a-b-c[-d]
CR DLU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the DIU with which the DLU is connected
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
This unit specifies the DIU with which the DLU is connected
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DLU-3 -
DIAG DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit or a specific
line unit control.
Prerequisites:
- The unit to be diagnosed must have been created.
- Parallel diagnosis runs for DLU system halfs, DLU equipment and DLU modules
are only possible in different DLUs.
- The unit to be diagnosed must be in the operating state MBL.
- No further diagnosis may be started for a unit with a running diagnosis.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],DLUC0=]] ]
] DIAG DLU : DLU= ]-,DLUC1=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies whether DLUC0 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC0=Y nor DLUC1=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC1=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
This parameter specifies whether DLUC1 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC1=Y nor DLUC0=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC0=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DLU-1 -
DISP DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command displays data of one DLU, a range of DLUs or
all DLUs.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DLU : DLU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLU-1 -
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command sets up a new connection to another LTGB or extends
an existing connection to an LTGB via PDC (PCM connection from
DLU to LTG).
Prerequisites:
- The DLU to be extended must exist.
- The D30 or D24 to which the additional PDCs are to be connected
must not be connected to another DLU.
- The specified LTG must be MBL or PLA if no connection to this
LTG had existed and DLU modules exist in the DLU.
- If the DLU is going to be connected to two LTGs, the load types of
both have to be identical.
- The specified DLU system must be PLA.
- The maximum number of allowed DLU ports (ISDN and analog) in the
affected LTG must not be exceeded.
Limits:
+----------+------------+-------------------+
! LTG type ! ISDN ports ! Total No. of !
! ! ! analog/ISDN ports !
+----------+------------+-------------------+
! LTGB ! 2048 ! 2048 !
+----------+------------+-------------------+
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DLUC0=] ;- ]
] EXT DLU : DLU= -,DLUC1= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
D30 in an LTGB.
1. Create a connection between LTG and DLU if none already exists:
This LTU must be a DIU with CCS (common channel signaling).
2. Create two connections between LTG and DLU if none already exists:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
3. Create an additional connection between LTG and DLU if a connection
already exists:
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXT DLU-1 +
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c[-d]
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
D30 in an LTGB.
1. Create a connection between LTG and DLU if none already exists:
This LTU must be a DIU with CCS.
2. Create two connections between LTG and DLU if none already exists:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
3. Create an additional connection between LTG and DLU if a connection
already exists:
Incompatibilities:
a-b-c[-d]
EXT DLU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXT DLU-3 -
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command outputs DLU traffic measurement data for specified DLUs to an
operator terminal or to disk every 15 minutes within a given time interval.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type may be entered at the
same time.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more
than one job.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC DLU : DLU= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the numbers of the DLUs for which data
has to be recorded.
It is possible to choose a single DLU, single DLUs linked with &,
a range of DLUs, ranges of DLUs linked with & or a combination
of these possibilities linked with & .
A maximum of 5 links is permitted.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all DLUs (DLU=X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD is specified.
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DLU-1 +
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
REC DLU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DLU-3 +
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC DLU-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels one or two existing connections of a DLU
system to an LTGB.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU must exist.
- The DLU system to be reduced must be connected to the specified LTG.
- The specified DLU system must be PLA.
- The second DLU system must be connected if the specified DLU system is
to be canceled.
- No nailed up connection must exist for a DLU system to be canceled.
- The PDCs to be canceled must be connected to the specified DIUs.
- When one of two PDCs is canceled, the PDC which is not canceled must
be connected to a DIU with CCS (common channel signaling).
- The specified LTG must be MBL or PLA if the connection to this
LTG is reduced but DLU modules exist in the DLU.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DLUC0=] ;- ]
] RED DLU : DLU= -,DLUC1= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
D30 in an LTGB.
Depending on the option chosen, different inputs are possible:
1. Cancel a connection between LTG and DLU if only one connection
exists:
2. Cancel two connections between LTG and DLU:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
3. Cancel a connection between LTG and DLU if two connections exist:
This LTU must not be the DIU with CCS.
a-b-c[-d]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RED DLU-1 +
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
D30 in an LTGB.
Depending on the option chosen, different inputs are possible:
1. Cancel a connection between LTG and DLU if only one connection
exists:
2. Cancel two connections between LTG and DLU:
<tsg> - <ltg> - <ltu1> - <ltu2>
3. Cancel a connection between LTG and DLU if two connections exist:
This LTU must not be the DIU with CCS.
a-b-c[-d]
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
via a PDC.
Compatibilities:
E N D
RED DLU-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS
This command displays the state of the DLU system.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT DLU : DLU= [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OST OPERATING STATUS IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the selection criteria for selective display.
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DLU-1 -
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT
This command is used to configure DLU equipments.
DLUV equipment cannot be configured by MML command.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DCC= ] ]
] CONF DLUEQ : DLU= -,RGMG= ,OST= ; ]
] ],RGB= ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the direct current
converter.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
This information unit specifies the left (=0) or right (=1)
DCC. In case of DLUB the left DCC are (0 and 1) and the
right are (2 and 3).
unit values.
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing current generator and metering
voltage generator.
RGB RING GENERATOR SHELF B
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DLUEQ-1 +
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the operating state.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- DCC status transition ACT -> MBL is only allowed if
depending switching modules and system are in status PLA.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
CONF DLUEQ-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENTS
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit equipment.
Prerequisites:
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],RGMG=] ]
] DIAG DLUEQ : DLU= -,RGB= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing and metering voltage
generators for the digital line unit.
RGB RING GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing voltage
generators for the digital line unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DLUEQ-1 -
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT
This command displays the state of DLU equipments.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DCC= ] ]
] STAT DLUEQ : DLU= -,RGMG= [,OST=] ; ]
] ],RGB= ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONV. LOCATION
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the
direct current converter.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
unit values.
RGMG RINGING/METERING GENER. NUMBER
This parameter specifies the ringing generator and metering
voltage generator.
RGB RINGING GENERATOR SHELF B
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
This parameter specifies the selection criteria for selective display.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DLUEQ-1 +
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
STAT DLUEQ-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT
This command only tests analog subscriber line circuits
in the DLU.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] ]
] ]
] [,STEP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODUL NUMBER=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the program variant of testing analog
circuits in a DLU.
In the case of S1 the RINGING TEST for only the first port per
module is carried out.
In the case of S2 only the RINGING TEST is carried out.
In the case of S3 only if TU position 0-11-0 is specified,
TU Calibration will be executed.
In all other cases the COMPLETE CIRCUIT TEST is carried out
(as if optional parameter TTYPE had not been entered).
S1 RINGING TST.FOR 1.CIRC.OF MOD.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST DLULC-1 +
TEST DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
S2 RINGING TST.FOR EACH SEL.CIRC.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
S4 TEST FUNCTION 4 (NORMAL TEST)
determines the tasks.
If this parameter is entered, this number must first have
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTER TEST SCHEDULE.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test job is to be
performed.
A permanent test is only allowed for a single line circuit.
The job runs permanent and can be stopped by the STOP JOB
command.
N DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
NO DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
Y SET PERMANENT TEST
YES SET PERMANENT TEST
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a breakpoint during a step test.
The test table of the test object indicates which
test steps represent a breakpoint (country-specific).
A step test is only allowed for a single test of one line circuit.
The test programm runs until the defined test step and must
be continued with the command CONT JOB.
E N D
TEST DLULC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DMP DLUMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP DLU MEMORY
This command dumps consistent DLUC, DLU:SASC, DLU:SLCI or DLU:SLMX
processor main memory contents. The dump is started from a
specified address with a maximum length of 1 Kbyte.
Prerequisites:
- All corresponding units must be in status ACT or CBL.
- The dump of DLU:SLMX is only possible in status ACT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],MOD= ] ]
] DMP DLUMEM : DLU= -,DLUC= ,ADDR= ,LENGTH= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the DLU:SASC, DLU:SLCI or DLU:SLMX.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
DLUC DLU CONTROLLER
ADDR ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the memory address from which the dump
starts.
In the SLCI main processor (SLCCP) there is a specific area
(68000H - 6FFFFH), the Boot Loader Bank Switch Area, which is only
used by the boot program and is not used for the SLCCP memory dump.
The segment address range 6800H - 6FFFH of the DUMP command is
"invalid" for the main processor (SLCCP). Thus, five fixed
segment addresses from this area indicate the LPP DUMP
requests as follows:
6801H LPP A (bit 0 set),
6802H LPP B (bit 1 set),
6804H LPP C (bit 2 set),
6808H LPP D (bit 3 set),
6810H LPP P (bit 4 set).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP DLUMEM-1 +
DMP DLUMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If one of these five segment addresses is used, the offset part
of the dump address gives the exact dump address (0 - FFFFH) of
the LPP.
a-b
a: SEGMENT=
0...FFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
b: OFFSET=
0...FFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
LENGTH LENGTH
Notes:
- The value 0 is only allowed for DLU:SLMX and in connection with
a symbolical address input.
E N D
DMP DLUMEM-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DLU MODULE
This command cancels a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The module to be canceled must exist and must be PLA.
- The ports of the module must be PLA.
This prerequisite does not apply to modules of the
following types:
- The module type must be administrable.
- The associated DLU ports must not be connected.
- The last DLU module COTU may only be canceled if no
remote DLU module exists in the DLU.
- The DLU module MGB may only be canceled if no depending
DLU module exists in the DLU.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE NAME
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU with shelf type A values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU with shelf type B values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU with shelf type D values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU with shelf type O values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU with shelf type V values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DLUMOD-1 -
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE
This command is used to configure DLU modules.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE NAME
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+-------------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+----+
! state ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! + ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- For modules other than SLM, (e.g. TU modules, BDCG, ALEX, EMSP)
and for module SLMX transitions to CBL are not allowed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DLUMOD-1 +
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
CONF DLUMOD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command creates a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The specified mounting location must be free and administrable.
- DLU type, module type and mounting location must be compatible.
- The module type and the LTG load type must be compatible.
- Memory space must be provided in the CP database.
(see MOD DBSIZE)
Input format
-
] ]
] CR DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,TYPE= [,MEAS=] [,PACC=] [,SLMXID=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,REMOTE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of
the DLU module.
Compatibilities:
The exact compatibilities of module type, mounting
location and shelf type are described in the
projecting handbook. The CP only checks the
compatibilities listed below.
DLU modules for a DLU with shelf type A:
module type ! valid mounting locations
--------------------------------------------------
ALEX ! 0-15
COTU ! 0-4, 1-4
EMSP ! 0-14, 0-15, 1-11, 1-12
FMTU ! 0-11
FTEM ! 0-11
LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13
LMEM ! 0-12, 0-13
LVMM ! 0-12, 0-13
SASC ! 0-2
SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DLUMOD-1 +
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DLU modules for a DLU with shelf type B:
--------------------------------------------------
ALEX ! 0-11
COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15
FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4
LCMM ! 0-3
MGB ! 1-7
NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SASC ! 0-1
SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15
Further compatibilities for a DLU with shelf type B:
DLU modules for a DLU with shelf type D:
--------------------------------------------------
ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15
COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15
FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4
LCMM ! 0-3
MGB ! 1-7
NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SASC ! 0-1
SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15
Further compatibilities for a DLU with shelf type D:
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
DLU modules for a DLU with shelf type O:
--------------------------------------------------
FMTU ! 0-11
LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13
SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
CR DLUMOD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 ..1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15
DLU modules for a DLU with shelf type V:
--------------------------------------------------
ALEX ! 0-11
SLMX ! 1-0 .. 1-15
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
TYPE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU module type.
SLMACOS SLMA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLMACM16 SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLMACCBR SLMA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLMACRMP SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLMD SLM DIGITAL (4 CIRCUITS)
LMEM LINE MEASURING MODULE
LVMM LEVEL MEASURING MODULE
FTEM FUNCTION TEST MODULE
ALEX ALARM EXTERN
EMSP EMERGENCY SERVICE PUSHBUTTON
SLMACMRL SLMA DLU 16 KHZ REVERSAL
SLMAFPB SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLMDB SLM DIGITAL B (8 CIRCUITS)
FMTU FUNCTION TEST MODULE FOR TU
LCMM LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING MOD
SASC STAND ALONE SERVICE CONTROLLER
SLMAFPS SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
SLMAMC SLMA METER PULSE C-WIRE
SLMX SUBSCRIBER LINE MULTIPLEXER
SLMAFPE SLMA DLU FEATURE PROG. E
MGB METERING GENERATOR DLUB
COTU CENTRAL OFFICE TERMINAL UNIT
SLMDVO8 SLMD FOR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
SLMDQFB SLM DIGITAL QFB (16 CIRCUITS)
SLMDTFB SLM DIGITAL TFB (16 CIRCUITS)
NODLUMOD NON DLU MODULE
SLMDVO16 SLMD FOR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record index for a DLU
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DLUMOD-3 +
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
module.
PACC ACCESS TO PACKET SWITCHING MOD
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
- Either a nailed up connection of the type IPCH to
the packet handler, or a nailed up connection of the
type BDDLUCH to a frame handler must exist for the
DLU. This frame handler must either be in mode NUC
and be connected to the packet handler via a nailed up
connection of the type BDCH, or it must be in the
mode SWITCHED.
Compatibilities:
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDB
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDTFB
SLMDVO16
SLMDVO8
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU modules of the type
SLMX. Its value has to be unique within the DLU.
REMOTE REMOTE INFORMATION
This parameter specifies a DLU module as remote.
Compatibilities:
A remote DLU module can only be created if the DLU module
COTU has been created before.
NO LOCAL DLU MODULE
YES REMOTE DLU MODULE
N LOCAL DLU MODULE
Y REMOTE DLU MODULE
E N D
CR DLUMOD-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES
This command starts the diagnostics of DLU modules.
Prerequisites:
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE NAME
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG DLUMOD-1 -
DISP DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DLU MODULE
This command displays DLU modules according to the parameters
specified.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],MOD= ]] ]
] DISP DLUMOD : DLU= ]-,SLMXID=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
Prerequisites:
It may only be specified if no parameter interval is entered for DLU.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLUMOD-1 -
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command modifies the test data record index or the
packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU module to be modified must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],MEAS=] ]
] MOD DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= -,PACC= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record index for a DLU
module.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for DLU modules in a DLU
with the shelf type V.
n/o
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DLUMOD-1 +
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PACC ACCESS TO PACKET SWITCHING MOD
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
- Either a nailed up connection of the type IPCH to
the packet handler, or a nailed up connection of the
type BDDLUCH to a frame handler must exist for the
DLU. This frame handler must either be in mode NUC
and be connected to the packet handler via a nailed up
connection of the type BDCH, or it must be in the
mode SWITCHED.
Compatibilities:
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDB
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDTFB
SLMDVO16
SLMDVO8
n/o
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
Default: NO
E N D
MOD DLUMOD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES
This command displays the operating and packet data access states
of DLU modules according to the location and selection parameters
entered.
The actual types of DLU modules are also displayed by the
command DISP DLUMOD.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= [,OST=] [,PACC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE LOCATION
This parameter specifies the module location.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
This optional parameter specifies one operating state for the
selective display.
Default: no affect on display
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
PLA PLANNED
PACC PACKET DATA ACCESS STATE
This optional parameter specifies one packet access state for the
selective display.
Default: no affect on display
NO NO P-DATA ACC. AUTHORISATION
YES P-DATA ACCESS AUTHORISATION
AVAIL PACKET DATA ACCESS AVAILABLE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DLUMOD-1 +
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAC PACKET DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE
PCHAN P-CHANNEL FAILURE
E N D
STAT DLUMOD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DLUPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA
This command displays transient DLU path data.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DLUPD : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Only the following port qualifications are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b
DLU: EQN = a
The input of an V5IF number will be rejected with an operator hint.
- If EQN is given for an LTG path data will be dispayed of this LTGB
which can be connected to 1, 2 or 4 DLUs.
- If EQN is given for a DLU path data will be dispayed of this DLU
which can be connected to 1 or 2 LTGBs.
a[-b]
For LTG : a TSG number in the range 0...7
For DLU : a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V5IF : a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
Input of V5 interface will be rejected with an operator hint.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP / SHELF NUMBER=
For LTG : an LTG number in the range 1...63
For DLU : not allowed
For V5IF : not allowed
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLUPD-1 -
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS
This command initiates the operating status transition of one or more
DLU ports.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be displayed by the
MML command STAT DLUPORT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) only the input of SHELF
values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DLUPORT-1 +
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new operating state.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! PLA! MBL! ACT!
+===========+====+====+====+
! PLA ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! MBL ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
CONF DLUPORT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT
This command displays the port data for a specified range.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DLUPORT : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of a port on the
DLU. Depending on the parameter entered, the following ranges are
displayed:
1. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> - <circno>
- precisely the DLU port specified
2. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> [ - X ]
- all DLU ports of the specified module
3. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules of the specified shelf
4. for <dluno> - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules in all shelves of the
specified DLU
5. for X - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all created DLUs
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU number.
unit values.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
unit values.
c: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DLUPORT-1 +
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the circuit number.
to 7 are valid.
unit values.
E N D
DISP DLUPORT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT
This command displays the port data of one, several or all DLUs.
Input format
-
] ]
] SEL DLUPORT : DLU= ,LCTYPE= [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LCTYPE LINE CIRCUIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the line circuit type of a DLU port.
SLCACOS SLCA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCACM16 SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLCACRMP SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLCACCBR SLCA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCD SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT DIGITA
FTEC DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT
LMEC DLU LINE MEASURING CIRCUIT
LVMC DLU LEVEL MEASURING CIRUIT
EMSP DLU EMERGENCY SERVICE EQUIPMEN
UNUSEPRT UNUSED PORT
SLCAFPB SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLCAFPC SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. C
SASCL STAND ALONE SERV CONTR LINK
SLCAFPS SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
FCTU DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT TU
LCMC DLU LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING
SLCAFPE SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. E
SLCX SLCX V51IF PORT
COTPRT CENTRAL OFFICE TERMINAL PORT
LTCDPRT LINE TERMINATION COPPER PORT
LTODPRT LINE TERMINATION OPTIC PORT
OMXPRT OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER PORT
SLCDVO SLCD VIRTUAL OPERATOR
TYPE TABLE TYPE
This parameter specifies the table type for a port.
Default value:
If no entry is made for this parameter, no table type is selected.
FREE NOT CONNECTED
SUB SUBSCRIBER
ISUB ISDN SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
IPBXBA ISDN PBX BASIC ACCESS
TEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRUNK TRUNK
CONSOLE CONSOLE
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL DLUPORT-1 -
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS
This command is used to display the operating status of DLU ports.
A specific operating status can be entered to search for DLU ports
with given status.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be modified using
the MML command CONF DLUPORT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) only the input of SHELF
values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DLUPORT-1 +
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This optional parameter specifies the operating state of the DLU
ports to be displayed.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DST DISTURBED
E N D
STAT DLUPORT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command activates the dump of safeguarding messages.
Prerequisites:
- The dump may not previously be active.
- Activation of the dump causes following dump initiations to be processed
but not at the same time as the activation.
- External activations must be specified with the command DMP SGMSG.
This cancels the suppression of internal initiations (internal = from the
distribution process to the dump process, as soon as 200 messages have been
collected since the initiation last processed).
- If no external initiation is specified, there is automatically an internal
initiation after 200 messages have been collected by the distribution
process. This internal initiation initiates the dump of all previously
stored messages.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT DMPSGMSG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT DMPSGMSG-1 -
DACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command deactivates the dump of stored safeguarding messages.
Notes:
- Internal initiations from the distribution process to the dump process
are suppressed.
- External initiations to dump by the command DMP SGMSG are rejected
with the appropriate output.
- One reason for the deactivation can be that SG.OPER is full. In this
case, this cyclic file would be (partially) overwritten by further dumping.
The dump can be reactivated if dumping is at first suppressed and
SG.OPER is then dumped.
- Deactivation can also be initiated before the SG.OPER is created with
more than 90 PAM pages.
Prerequisites:
- If the dump is deactivated no further messages are written to SG.OPER,
but messages to be displayed continue to be collected by the distribution
process in its memory area.
- If the memory area is full, the oldest stored messages are compulsorily
overwritten.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT DMPSGMSG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT DMPSGMSG-1 -
DISP DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command displays the activation state for the dump of safeguarding
messages.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DMPSGMSG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DMPSGMSG-1 -
CAN DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command cancels a directory number interval or a single directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number interval must not be activated for IACHASTA
registration (command DISP IACOBJ).
- There must not be any individual announcements (command DISP DN,
INCEPT=CHGDNIND) for directory numbers in the interval.
- There must not be any extended directory number (command DISP DN,
EXTDN=YES) in the interval.
- There must not be any directory numbers reserved for CENTREX
(command DISP CXGRPRES) in the interval.
- There must not be any references from the CENTREX translator to
directory numbers in the interval (commands DISP CXCPT,
DISP CXDN).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DN : [LAC=] ,DN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number interval or the single
directory number to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DN-1 -
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command creates a directory number interval or a single directory number
with or without economy.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code must be defined.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DN : LAC= ,DN= [,PBXVOL=] [,DNGRP=] [,STMGRP=] [,ACCNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
- Intervals that are used for subscribers should be decimal.
These intervals can be connected with a code point.
- Non-dialable intervals (e.g. for accounting purposes) might
be hexadecimal.
- Intervals of 1, 10, 100, 1000 directory numbers can be entered.
- Length of DN is not allowed to be longer then specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
- For a single directory number used for a PBX, the PBX volume
indicates which directory number digits of a decade belong
to the PBX. The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the
given directory number.
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter specifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric digits are possible for input.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DN-1 +
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STMGRP STATISTIC METER GROUP
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies whether the directory number interval is only
used for accounting purposes. In this case the directory number
interval cannot be connected with a code point.
N DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Y DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: N
E N D
CR DN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA
This command displays data for either all directory numbers, the
directory numbers within an interval or a single directory number.
It displays directory numbers within a certain interval with the
specified information.
A search can be made for one of the following selection criteria:
- Accounting numbers or non-accounting numbers ACCNO
- Directory number group DNGRP
- Access from digit translator ACT
- Statistics meter group STMGRP
- Directory number type TYPE
- Intercept identifier INCEPT
- Extended directory numbers EXTDN.
If TYPE, INCEPT or EXTDN are specified each directory number with
the selected criteria will be displayed besides the data that are valid
for the whole interval.
If ACCNO, DNGRP, ACT or STMGRP are specified the directory
number interval data is displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],DNGRP= ]] ]
] ]],INCEPT=]] ]
] ]],ACT= ]] ]
] DISP DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ]-,STMGRP=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]],TYPE= ]] ]
] ]],ACCNO= ]] ]
] ]],EXTDN= ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number range or the single
directory number to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the subgroup of the directory number interval
or single directory number.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DN-1 +
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = INTERVAL
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER IND.
ACT ACTIVATED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval or the single directory number is accessible
by the digit translator.
N DISPLAY NOT ACTIVATED DN ONLY
Y DISPLAY ACTIVATED DN ONLY
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
TYPE SUBSCRIBER TYPE FOR DN
This parameter specifies the directory number type of the directory
number.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = INTERVAL
FREE FREE LINE
Specifies that only directory numbers
with no further connections are selected.
Also directory numbers with an intercept
identification will be selected.
PBX PBX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
WST WORK STATION
MEETME MEET ME
CSGRP COMMON SERVICE GROUP
RESCSGRP RESERVED FOR COM. SERV. GROUP
CALLTYPE COMMON CDS CALLTYPE
PBXADDNO PBX ADDITIONAL NUMBER
Additional number of PBX.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
CONNECT CONNECTED DIRECTORY NUMBER
Specifies that directory numbers with
further connections are selected.
A connection can be:
-SUB
-PBX
-PBXADDNO
-PBXLN
-WST
-MEETME
-CSGRP
-RESCSGRP
-CALLTYPE
-CXGRP
DISP DN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval is used for accounting purposes only.
NO DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
YES DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: NO
EXTDN MARK FOR EXTENDED DN
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether
extended directory numbers are to be displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = INTERVAL
Y DN IS EXTENDED
YES DN IS EXTENDED
This parameter specifies the output format of the display.
INTERVAL DIRECTORY NO. INTERVALS ONLY
specifies that only the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, kind of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group,
PBX volume, extended directory number in interval
existing) will be displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- EXTDN
- TYPE
- INCEPT
ALL ALL DIRECTORY NUMBERS
specifies the display of the individual data
of each directory number within the specified
directory number interval (including directory
number type, intercept identification and extended
directory number).
Furthermore the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, type of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group
and PBX directory number volume) will be
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DN-3 -
EXT DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command extends an existing directory number to a directory
number interval of 10 numbers. The existing directory number
must be within an interval of 10, 100 or 1000 numbers.
The new directory number interval consists of the existing
directory number followed by one digit where the lower interval
boundary must be 0 and the upper interval boundary must be 9.
Prerequisites:
- The country code is set to BRD.
(Command DISP EXDDAT).
- No extension of ported directory numbers.
- The directory number must be not connected.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EXT DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,NEWDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
to be extended. No more than DNMAXL-1 digits
are allowed. Length DNMAXL can to be displayed
with DISP CALLPOPT.
NEWDN NEW DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number interval of
10 numbers.
Notes:
-Length of NEWDN is not allowed to be longer then specified
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXT DN-1 -
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command modifies a directory number interval or the data of a
directory number interval.
The following data can be changed:
- PBX directory number volume (PBXVOL) (for a single
directory number only)
- directory number group (DNGRP)
- statistic meter group (STMGRP)
It is also used to enter, modify and cancel the intercept identification
(INCEPT) or the intercept digits (b) of a single directory
number.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],NEWDN= ] ]
] ],PBXVOL=] ;- ]
] MOD DN : [LAC=] ,DN= -,DNGRP= - ]
] ],STMGRP=] !' ]
] ],INCEPT=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the existing directory number interval or an
existing single directory number.
This parameter specifies the new directory number interval or a new
single directory number.
Notes:
- For the new directory number (interval) a zone poin should exist.
- The size of the directory number interval cannot be changed.
- Intervals that are used for subscribers should be decimal.
- Intervals that are only used for accounting purposes might be
hexadecimal.
- The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the new directory
number.
- The new directory number with PBX volume must have at least two
digits.
- If a directory number in the interval is part of an operator
number of a PBX (OPN) and the length of the directory numbers
of the interval is changed, the lenght of the operator number
must not exceed the maximum length of a directory number
(12 digits).
- The Start Position Digits to Send (SSDI) for direct inward
dialing PBXs in the interval has to be adapted after the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DN-1 +
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
modification, if the length of the interval has changed.
- Length of NEWDN is not allowed to be longer then specified
- If extended directory numbers (EXTDN) are existing within the
interval, the new directory number cannot be longer than
DNMAXL-1 digits.
- If in the interval a PBX pilot directory number exists and the PBX
has additional numbers (ADDNO) in other directory number
intervals, the modification is not possible.
The additional numbers in the other intervals have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
- If there are additional numbers (ADDNO) of a PBX in the interval
and the pilot directory number or further additional number of the
PBX are in another intervals, then the modification is not
possible.
The additional numbers in the interval to be changed have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
Notes:
- Only an already existing PBX volume can be changed.
- A new PBX volume indicating which directory number digits of a decade
belong to a PBX can be entered for single directory numbers. The PBX
volume must contain the last digit of the given directory number.
- The new PBX volume must be compatible with the operator number of
the PBX if there is one existing.
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number interval
or the single directory number to counter groups.
This parameter specifies
- the intercept identification and individual announcement number or
- the porting information
for the desired directory number.
a[-b]
MOD DN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NO INDIV.
b: INCEPT DIGITS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DN-3 -
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS
This command records directory numbers to detect high load
connections. Up to 1000 subscribers can be measured by one
measurement. Only subscribers are measured, all other types
(e.g. PBX) are ignored.
The command will be rejected if there is no created subscriber in
the selected intervals. The measurement can only be run once at
any one time. The data of the measured records are output
exclusively to MDD.
The period of every single data collection and data output can be
varied by the command parameter SCANTIME.
If more than 1000 subscribers exist in the selected directory
number intervals, an indication follows in the "started mask".
The "started mask" contains a command repetition which confirms
the selected directory number intervals. In addition, the lowest
and highest directory numbers measured and the total number of
measured subscribers are output.
The three information units (lowest and highest measured
directory number, number of measured subscribers) appear in the
"started mask" and in the "finished mask".
Due to the information about the highest measured subscriber, the
directory number intervals in a subsequent measurement can be
selected optionally.
Which directory numbers from the selected directory number
interval are created subscribers is checked at the moment of
command receipt. The establishment of the directory numbers to be
measured is therefore a snapshot recording. This means that
subscribers created subsequently within the directory number
intervals selected in the command will be disregarded.
Selected subscribers who are deleted or modified after command
receipt will not be measured any more but they remain in the
output data.
Directory numbers can be specified by a digital line unit (DLU)
as an alternative to using intervals. The establishment of the
directory numbers is also a snapshot recording, which means that
the created subscribers at the DLU (including subscribers
connected via a V5 interface) to be measured will be
established at the moment of command receipt. If the number of
created subscribers of a selected DLU exceeds 1000, only
the first 1000 created subscribers will be measured.
With the "started mask" and the "finished mask" the user receives
information about the number of measured subscribers analogous
to the specification of directory number intervals. Information
is also output about the lowest and highest port where
subscribers are measured.
Subscribers to be measured are always selected from the port
with the lowest port number to the port with the highest port
number. A subsequent measurement can be started at the port where
the last measurement has ended by selecting command parameters
DLU and EQN. All or none of the created directory numbers
at an MSN port or connected via a V5 interface are measured.
Directory numbers in the output are not sorted in ascending
order but in the order in which they are found by searching
at the DLU.
If the number of directory numbers to be measured exceeds the
limit of 1000 and the last DLU port is an MSN port or a V5
interface is connected to this DLU port, this DLU port
cannot be measured within the running measurement job.
There could thus be a measurement whose directory number total is
less than 1000 even though the number of created subscribers at
the DLU exceeds 1000.
It is only advisable to measure REC DN for MSN ports if all
the directory numbers at an MSN port are measured in the same
measurement job.
For each subscriber to be measured the following counters are
provided:
- TC:I traffic carried (incoming)
- TC:O traffic carried (outgoing)
- CC:I number of calls carried (incoming)
- CC:O number of calls carried (outgoing)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DN-1 +
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Disk Size:
If 1000 directory numbers are measured, 87 kbytes are required
(89 bytes per directory number) on hard disk for every output.
1. REC DN - DLU DLU SPECIFICATION
2. REC DN - DN DN SPECIFICATION
1. Input format
DLU SPECIFICATION
This input format records directory numbers of subscribers
connected to the specified digital line unit.
-
] ]
] REC DN : UNIT= ,DLU= [,EQN=] [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
Notes :
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
b: OUTPUT MODE
DAILY - DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
] ] If this option is selected, the data are
] ] output to daily files. The measurement starts
] ] immediately and has no defined end. Time
] ] parameters are not permitted.
] ] To secure the required space on disk, all 7
] ] daily files are prepared and created at the
] ] start of measurement.
] ] A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
] ] new file for the next day is automatically
] ] created, or the existing file is replaced.
] ] Daily files will be overwritten in the
] ] following week on the same day.
~SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
REC DN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
This parameter specifies the start port of the DLU.
Notes:
- The chosen DLU value in the parameter EQN must be equal to
the parameter DLU.
Default: EQN = DLU-0-0-0
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
b: SHELF NUMBER=
c: MODULE NUMBER=
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DN-3 +
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameter cannot be specified for the
data output in daily files.
be linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
command input.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date
a-b-c
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
- The earliest possible termination date is the day after the
command input.
- If no BEG parameter is enterred, recording starts
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
REC DN-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
begin date (BEG)is selected.
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e. g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted..
interval times, e. g. 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
times only.
a-b-c-d
Notes:
period
FR - FRIDAY
]HO ] HOLIDAY
] ] Full national and international holidays are
] ] included.
] ] The full weekend day (the day marked EF
] ] in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
] ] Half holidays are not included.
]MO ] MONDAY
]NO ] NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
] ] Measurement every day
]SA ] SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DN-5 +
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]SU ] SUNDAY
]TH ] THURSDAY
]TU ] TUESDAY
]WE ] WEDNESDAY
~WO - WORKDAY
REC DN-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN SPECIFICATION
This input format records subscriber directory numbers
specified as directory number intervals.
-
] ]
] REC DN : UNIT= [,LAC=] ,DN= [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] ]
] ]
] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
postprocessing.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
DAILY - DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
] ] If this option is selected, the data are
] ] output to daily files. The measurement starts
] ] immediately and has no defined end. Time
] ] parameters are not permitted.
] ] To secure the required space on disk, all 7
] ] daily files are prepared and created at the
] ] start of measurement.
] ] A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
] ] new file for the next day is automatically
] ] created, or the existing file is replaced.
] ] Daily files will be overwritten in the
] ] following week on the same day.
~SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DN-7 +
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number intervals. A
maximum of 5 intervals can be linked with &.
The upper interval limit must be higher than the lower interval
limit and the directory number intervals must be disjunct.
By selecting the command parameter DN=X a maximum of 1000
created subscribers will be measured. The selection starts with
the lowest directory number in the exchange or with the
lowest directory number belonging to the selected LAC.
Restrictions:
Additional directory numbers of PBXs are rejected.
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
REC DN-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
a-b-c
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC DN-9 +
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
times only.
a-b-c-d
Notes:
period
FR - FRIDAY
]HO ] HOLIDAY
] ] Full national and international holidays are
] ] included.
] ] The full weekend day (the day marked EF
] ] in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
] ] Half holidays are not included.
]MO ] MONDAY
]NO ] NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
] ] Measurement every day
]SA ] SATURDAY
]SU ] SUNDAY
]TH ] THURSDAY
]TU ] TUESDAY
]WE ] WEDNESDAY
~WO - WORKDAY
E N D
REC DN-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
RED DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command reduces an extended directory number interval of
10 numbers to a single directory number.
The single directory number is equal to the directory number
of the lower interval boundary reduced by the last digit.
Prerequisites:
- The extended directory number interval must not be connected
(command DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT).
- There must not be any individual announcements (command
DISP DN, INCEPT=CHGDNIND) for directory numbers in the
extension interval.
- There must not be any directory numbers reserved for CENTREX
(command DISP CXGRPRES)in the extension interval.
- There must not be any references from the CENTREX translator to
directory numbers in the extension interval
(commands DISP CXCPT, DISP CXDN).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] RED DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,NEWDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number interval of
10 numbers.
This parameter specifies the single directory number to which the
interval will be reduced.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RED DN-1 -
DISP DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command displays :
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange
is multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits for carrier access code,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DNATT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DNATT-1 -
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command enters the directory number attributes.
It determines:
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange is
multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits from carrier access code,
- whether national prefix digits or international prefix digits
or the prefix digits for carrier access code are used,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR DNATT : <DNVOL= ,EVLAC= ,PFXNAT= ,PFXINAT= ,PFXCAC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,NOPFX= ,LACPNO=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DNVOL DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
This parameter specifies whether the directory number volume
in the exchange is multiple or unique.
Notes:
- Two subscribers of the exchange may have the same directory number
but a different local area code only if directory number volume
is assigned MULTIPLE.
UNIQUE UNIQUE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
EVLAC EVALUATION OF LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies whether the local area codes are to be
evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- An evaluation of the local area codes can only be prevented within an
exchange with a unique directory number volume.
YES EVALUATE LAC
NO DO NOT EVALUATE LAC
PFXNAT PREFIX NATIONAL
This parameter specifies the national prefix digits.
Attention:
- A changed national prefix could be incompatible
to existing local area codes or codepoints.
PFXINAT PREFIX INTERNATIONAL
This parameter specifies the international prefix digits.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DNATT-1 +
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PFXCAC PREFIX CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the prefix digits for carrier access code.
NOPFX NO PREFIX
This parameter specifies that existing national or
international prefix digits or the prefix digits
for carrier access code are canceled.
NAT NATIONAL PREFIX
INAT INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE PREFIX
LACPNO LOCAL AREA CODE IS PART OF NO
This parameter specifies if the local area code is part of
of a national significant number.
Y LOCAL AREACODE IS PART OF NO
(initial value)
N LOC. AREACODE ISNT PART OF NO
E N D
ENTR DNATT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command either cancels or limits an existing directory number
observation job by cancelling certain object groups (consisting of
subscribers or private branch exchanges) or removes digit
combinations for special encoding.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN DNOBS : [GRP=] [,ENCODE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges.
Up to 10 object groups may be linked with &.
Default: all objects are cancelled
ENCODE DIGIT STRING FOR ENCODING
This parameter specifies the digit string for special
encoding.
Up to eight digit strings may be entered linked with &.
The command with this parameter may not be entered if
a Directory Number Observation job is already started.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DNOBS-1 -
DISP DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command displays the directory number observation
data. If parameter is not entered the assumed default
for FORMAT is STATUS
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DNOBS : [FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the FORMAT for the output.
If STATUS is entered the directory number observation
job data is output.
If ENCODE is entered the list of digits strings
entered for special encoding is output.
STATUS STATUS OF DN OBSERVATION
ENCODE LIST OF CODES FOR ENCODING
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DNOBS-1 -
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command may be used to enter a new/expand an existing
directory number observation job by specifying which object
groups (consisting of subscribers or private branch exchanges)
should be measured at a determined time or for input digit
strings for special encoding.
1. ENTR DNOBS - DNOBS PATH FOR DNOBS START
2. ENTR DNOBS - ENCODE PATH FOR ENCODE
1. Input format
PATH FOR DNOBS START
-
] ]
] ENTR DNOBS : GRP= [,RREC=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,PER=] [,IV=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges.
Up to 10 object groups may be linked with &.
Default: no effect on process
RREC NUMBER OF REQUESTED RECORDS
This parameter specifies the number of requested observation
records.
The value can be changed during observation.
Default: no restriction
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date, which may (as a single date)
describe the beginning of an interval of days or (as up to 4 linked
dates) up to 4 single days.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DNOBS-1 +
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the end of an interval of days.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter specifies the periodic weekdays or the weekday category.
Up to 8 weekdays/categories may be linked with &, the maximum number of
weekdays being limited to 6.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only permissible in connection with
a terminating date (TER).
- Weekdays MO, TU, ... SU: execution on the respective
weekday
- Categories WO, HO:
WO = execution on all full working days
HO = execution on all full national and international holidays
Default: observation every day during the observation period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
MO MONDAY
NO DEFAULT VALUE
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the time intervals during which the
directory number observation job is active each day.
Up to 4 intervals may be linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
directory number observation job should begin.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
hour at which the directory number observation job should
begin.
Notes:
ENTR DNOBS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: END HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
directory number observation job should terminate.
d: END MINUTE=
hour at which the directory number observation job should
terminate.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR DNOBS-3 +
ENTR DNOBS
ENCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PATH FOR ENCODE
-
] ]
] ENTR DNOBS : ENCODE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ENCODE DIGIT STRING FOR ENCODE
This parameter specifies the digit string for encoding.
Up to eight digit strings may be entered linked with &.
This parameter may not be entered with any other of the
command parameters.
The command entered with this parameter does not start
a Directory Number Observation job.
The command with this parameter may not be entered if
a Directory Number Obseravtion job is already started.
Indication on parameter usage:
- If operator tries to input the digit string: 1234
and digit string 123 was entered before, the command
will be rejected ( new digit string already with
special encode).
- If operator tries to input the digit string: 1234
and digit string 12345 was entered before, the
command is rejected. Hint: Cancel the 12345 digit
string and repeat command with 1234 digit
combination.
E N D
ENTR DNOBS-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS
This command displays destination number points which are entered in the
special digit translator for traffic measurements (with REC DEST). The
destination number points are output with their digit combination,
destination number and origin language digit.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DNP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DNP-1 -
CAN DSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command cancels a Digital Switchboard for an
OSS-Group or a CENTREX-Group.
Prerequisites:
- The Digital Switchboard can be canceled, while
a common service subscriber is not logged-on.
the FEA = MDR and TRAF are not activated.
the FEA = MDR, TRAF and CXMOD are not
provided.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DSB : EQN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT=
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DSB-1 -
CR DSB
CRDSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command creates a Digital Switchboard for
an OSS-Common Service Group or a CENTREX Group.
1. CR DSB - CRDSBCX CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
2. CR DSB - CRDSBOSS CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR OSS
1. Input format
CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
This input format is used to create a Digital Switchboard
for CENTREX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DSB : EQN= ,CXGRP= [,FEA=] [,OCT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
This parameter specifies the number of an existing
CENTREX group.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of a Digital Switchboard
for OSS or CENTREX.
CXMOD CENTREX MODIFICATION AUTH.
MDR MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING AUTH.
PRVCXMOD CENTREX MOD. AUTH. PROV
PRVMDR MESSAGE DETAIL REC. AUTH. PROV
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DSB-1 +
CR DSB
CRDSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRVTRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH. PROV
TRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH.
OCT OBJECT CONTROL TABLE
This parameter specifies the identification of a
CARS APS file name for ADMOSS or CENTREX.
CR DSB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DSB
CRDSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR OSS
This input format is used to create a Digital Switchboard
for OSS.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DSB : EQN= ,ID= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,FEA=] [,OCT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
ID IDENTIFICATION
Digital Switchboard for OSS.
This parameter specifies the local area code
of an existing common service group for OSS.
of an existing common service group for OSS.
FEA FEATURE
for OSS or CENTREX.
PRINTER PRINTER ASSIGNED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DSB-3 +
CR DSB
CRDSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CR DSB-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DSB
DICSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command displays digital switchboard specific data for
- one specific DSB
- several individual DSBs
- all DSBs in an equipment number interval
- all DSBs in the exchange
Notes:
- Data output is sorted according to the specified selection
parameter(s).
<job number>.
1. DISP DSB - DICSGRP DISPLAY DSB FOR CSGRP
2. DISP DSB - DICXGRP DISPLAY DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
1. Input format
DISPLAY DSB FOR CSGRP
-
] ]
] DISP DSB : [CSGLAC=] <,CSGDN= ,EQN= ,ID= ,OST= ,FEA= ]
] ]
] ,OCT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided
into several local area codes, this parameter can be
omitted.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DSB-1 +
DISP DSB
DICSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
ID IDENTIFICATION OF CONSOLE
This parameter specifies the identification
of the DSB.
This parameter specifies the operating status.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of a digital
switchboard.
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by an element list for
the FEA parameter results in display of
all DSBs with at least one of the selected
features. Omitting this parameter displays
DSBs with or without any feature.
ACTMDR ACT. MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
ACTTRAF ACTIVATE TRAFFIC RECORDING
PRVCXMOD CENTREX MODIFICATION AUTH. PRV
PRVMDR MESSAGE DETAIL REC. AUTH. PRV
PRVTRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH. PRV.
DISP DSB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DSB
DICSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the CARS APS file name
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DSB-3 +
DISP DSB
DICXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
-
] ]
] DISP DSB : <EQN= ,CXGRP= ,FEA= ,OST= ,OCT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an
existing CENTREX group.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of a digital
switchboard.
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by an element list for
the FEA parameter results in display of
all DSBs with at least one of the selected
features. Omitting this parameter displays
DSBs with or without any feature.
DISP DSB-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP DSB
DICXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTMDR ACT. MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
PRVCXMOD CENTREX MODIFICATION AUTH. PRV
PRVMDR MESSAGE DETAIL REC. AUTH. PRV
PRVTRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH. PRV.
This parameter specifies the operating status.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
This parameter specifies the CARS APS file name
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DSB-5 -
MOD DSB
MODSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command modifies the data of a Digital Switchboard.
1. MOD DSB - MODSBCX MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
2. MOD DSB - MODSBOSS MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR OSS
1. Input format
MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
This input format is used to modify a Digital Switchboard
for CENTREX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DSB : EQN= [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] <,OCT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
FEA FEATURE
for OSS or CENTREX.
ACTMDR ACTIVATE MSG DETAIL RECORDING
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter cancels the feature of a Digital Switchboard
for OSS or CENTREX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DSB-1 +
MOD DSB
MODSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTMDR ACTIVATE MSG DETAIL RECORDING
MOD DSB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD DSB
MODSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR OSS
This input format is used to modify a Digital Switchboard
for OSS.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DSB : EQN= [,ID=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] <,OCT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
ID IDENTIFICATION
Digital Switchboard for OSS.
FEA FEATURE
for OSS or CENTREX.
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter cancels the feature of a Digital Switchboard
for OSS or CENTREX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DSB-3 +
MOD DSB
MODSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
MOD DSB-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT DSB
STACSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command displays digital switchboard status of
- one specific DSB
- several individual DSBs
- all DSBs in an equipment number interval
- all DSBs in the exchange
Notes:
- Data output is sorted according to the
specified selection parameter.
<job number>.
1. STAT DSB - STACSGRP STAT DSB FOR CSGRP
2. STAT DSB - STACXGRP STAT DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
1. Input format
STAT DSB FOR CSGRP
-
] ]
] STAT DSB : [CSGLAC=] <,CSGDN= ,EQN= ,ID= ,ACCDEG=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common
service group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided
into several local area codes, this parameter can be
omitted.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DSB-1 +
STAT DSB
STACSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
ID IDENTIFICATION OF CONSOLE
This parameter specifies the identification
of the DSB.
ACCDEG ACCESS DEGRADING ON DLU PORT
This parameter specifies the access degrading.
DST DISTURBED
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
NON NONE
STAT DSB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT DSB
STACXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STAT DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
-
] ]
] STAT DSB : <EQN= ,CXGRP= ,ACCDEG=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an
existing CENTREX group.
ACCDEG ACCESS DEGRADING ON DLU PORT
This parameter specifies the access degrading.
DST DISTURBED
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
NON NONE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DSB-3 -
CAN DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE
This command cancels the data terminal interface.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DTI : DSB= [,DTI=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DSB DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This parameter defines the digital switchboard number.
DTI DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE
This parameter identifies the primary or secondary data
terminal interface unit.
PRI PRIMARY DTI
SEC SECONDARY DTI
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DTI-1 -
CONF DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE
This command configures one or both DTIs of a digital switchboard (DSB)
into service or out of service.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF DTI : [DSB= [,DTI=]] [,EQN=] ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital switchboard number.
This parameter specifies the data terminal interface.
PRI PRIMARY DTI
SEC SECONDARY DTI
a-b-c[-d]
unit values.
unit values.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
Valid Operating State Transitions
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF DTI-1 +
CONF DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
---------------------------------
ACT --> STB or CBL or MBL
STB --> ACT or CBL or MBL
CBL --> ACT or STB or MBL
MBL --> ACT or STB or CBL or PLA
PLA --> MBL
UNA --> MBL or CBL or STB or ACT
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
RES RESTORABLE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
E N D
CONF DTI-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE
This command creates the data terminal interface.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DTI : DSB= ,DTI= ,EQN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital switchboard
number.
This parameter identifies the primary or secondary data
terminal interface unit.
The primary DTI must be specified first, then the
secondary DTI. If a DTI is connected to only one
LTGB, DTI=PRI must be specified.
PRI PRIMARY DTI
SEC SECONDARY DTI
a-b-c-d
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DTI-1 -
DISP DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DTI
This command displays the data terminal interface.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DTI : [EQN=] [,DSB=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
unit values.
unit values.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
This parameter specifies the number of the digital
switchboard.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DTI-1 -
STAT DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF DTI
This command queries the transient status of DTIs.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT DTI : [EQN=] [,DSB= [,DTI=]] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
unit values.
unit values.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
This parameter specifies the digital switchboard number.
This parameter specifies the data terminal interface.
PRI PRIMARY DTI
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT DTI-1 +
STAT DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEC SECONDARY DTI
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
RES RESTORABLE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
E N D
STAT DTI-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST DTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST DATA TERMINAL INTERFACE
This command tests the condition of one specified Data Terminal Interface
(DTI) of a Digital Switchboard. The test is used to determine whether or not
there are communication problems between the specified LTGB : OSS and the
working DTI. If the test is successful, the result "NO FAILURES DETECTED" is
printed. If the test is not successful, "FAILURES DETECTED" is printed.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST DTI : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
unit values.
unit values.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST DTI-1 -
CAN DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP
This command cancels a device group.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must exist
- the device group must not be assigned to a message group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN DVGRP : DVGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN DVGRP-1 -
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DEVICEGROUP
This command creates a device group from different types of output device.
A distinction is made between local devices (archive and
functional O&M terminals), remote devices (processors with their
respective applications) and the source terminal.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must not already exist,
- the pair of processor-name applications specified in parameter REMDEV
must not be assigned to a server which cannot process print or dialog
tasks,
- the output devices must exist,
- no more than 5 output devices may be specified,
- if parameter SRC=NO is entered, either parameter
LOCDEV or parameter REMDEV must be specified.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR DVGRP : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group to the message
control.
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
a-b
a: LOCAL DEVICE NAME=
b: LOCAL DEVICE TYPE
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M-TERMINAL
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
b: APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR DVGRP-1 +
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SRC SOURCE O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies whether the input terminal is to serve
as output device for a device group.
NO OUTPUT NOT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
YES OUTPUT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
Default: YES
E N D
CR DVGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT DEVICE GROUP
This command selects those device groups to which
at least one of the specified output devices is assigned.
This data is then output as a table.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SEL DVGRP : <LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
a-b
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL DVGRP-1 -
DISP DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command displays the output devices to which the device groups
specified in parameter DVGRP are assigned. The display is table.
In this way, a distinction is made between local output devices,
remote output devices and the source terminal as output device.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP DVGRPLNK-1 -
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command modifies the assignment of a device group to the respective
output devices. With parameter SRC, it is possible to indicate whether
the source terminal is to be used as output device.
Prerequisites:
- When adding and replacing an output device, those output devices
specified in parameters LOCDEV or REMDEV must have been previously
created using command CR AFILE or CR FUOMT, if LOCDEV was entered
and CR PRO and possibly CR APPL, if REMDEV was entered.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a customer device group of the message
control.
Incompatibilities:
- If the DVGRP is linked to the MSGRP MSYP.ALARM or
MSYP.REPORT it must consist only of output devices of
DCP type or applications which can handle binary structured
outputs.
These applications must have been created with the command
CR APPL with APPLID = SMMLB.
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies a local output device.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter specifies an output device in the O&M network.
n/o
n/
/o
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD DVGRPLNK-1 +
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
E N D
MOD DVGRPLNK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command cancels the assignment of an alarm text for an external alarm
line or for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also cancels the
assignment of the alarm priority and set it to the default value "critical".
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SITE HARDWARE INSTALLATION SITE
This parameter specifies whether an exchange or a digital
line unit is involved.
EXCH EXCHANGE
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN EAL-1 -
CR EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command assigns an alarm text to a specified external alarm line or
for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also assigns a priority
to an external alarm line.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified external alarm line.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ,TEXTNO= [,ALPRIO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
EXCH EXCHANGE
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm.
Prerequisites:
SITE = DLU
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR EAL-1 -
DISP EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command displays the assignment of a single external alarm line
or of all external alarm lines of the exchange or of the DLU.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
EXCH EXCHANGE
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP EAL-1 -
CR EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EAL LEVEL
This command creates the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
of a specified DLU.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ,LVL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
LVL ELECTRICAL NON-ALARM LEVEL
This parameter specifies whether a high or a low signal is
to be transmitted when there is no alarm.
Default: HIGH
HIGH HIGH LINE LEVEL
LOW LOW LINE LEVEL
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR EALLVL-1 -
DISP EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL
This command displays the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
or for all external alarm lines of the specified DLU.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Here the number of the affected DLU is specified in the
three high-order positions. ( Value range 1 to 255 ). The
lowest-order position must always be 0.
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP EALLVL-1 -
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8
This command calls the EDTS8 file editing subroutine to process SAM files.
EDTS8 processes control inputs in interactive mode from a data terminal or
in batch mode from a SAM file on disk. These control inputs are subdivided
into:
- Commands in command mode
Command mode is activated after EDTS8 has started or after data mode has
terminated.
- Data lines in data mode
Data mode is activated when a data line is input. EDTS8 interprets
all subsequent inputs as data lines. The changeover from data mode to
command mode is initiated by
pressing the input key
entering a period
end of a SAM file (with data lines)
- Dialog responses on the data terminal (in interactive mode)
All EDTS8 outputs appear on the data terminal. Optional outputs to a
printer are:
- An EDTS8 command log
- Contents of the EDTS8 line memory (file window)
When data are written to a SAM file, the specified lines of the EDTS8
line memory are written to disk. When data are read from a SAM file, the
specified records are entered as data lines in the EDTS8 line memory.
The records of this SAM file can be up to 252 bytes long.
EDTS8 commands
AGAIN Repetition of no more than the last 5 commands except
AGAIN and HELP
A P Output (print) of the last 5 commands
n Repetition of n commands
Repetition of the last command
CHANGE Changes in text lines or columns in specific lines
CH range domain search := new text
ALL search := new text
.. search := new text
search..:= new text
domain1 := new text
domain1 op search := new text
COPY Copy whole lines or columns to a required position
C range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
DELETE Delete specific lines
D range
domain search
domain op search
END End EDTS8
FILE Define file and type of access (Write or read)
F file INPUT OUTPUT
I O
HELP Summary of the operating instructions in English
H Command
Command OPD
OPD
OPD operand
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXEC EDTS8-1 +
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INSERT Insert text or data sections in specific lines
in the required position
I range domain := new text
domain op search := new text
domain1 .. search := new text
search .. := new text
ALL search := new text
ALL search .. := new text
LIST List specific lines on the printer
L range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
LOG Log the next commands on the printer
Activate the logging function
OFF Deactivate the logging function
MOVE Move lines or columns to the required position
The source data are deleted
M range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
NUMBER Renumber all lines
N Standard numbering 1,2,3...
ln STEP m
ST m
PRINT Print lines and columns on the data terminal
P range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
READ Read in SAM files in the required position
R # file
recrange FROM file
recrange domain FR file
SELECT Select particular lines by deleting lines which are not
selected
S range
range domain search
range domain op search
SPACE Delete spaces to the left up to beginning of text or to
the right after end of text up to end of line
SP range R
L
TAB Tabulator declaration for data input in tabular form and
definition of a tab mark
T t CLn1 n2 n3 ....n32
OFF
TRANSLATE Translate data to EBCDIC or ASCII code
TR range domain TO EBCDIC
EXEC EDTS8-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E
ASCII
A
VERIFY If the text is modified using the commands CHANGE, INSERT,
MOVE, COPY and SELECT, all the lines concerned are output
as a verification
V Activate verification function
OFF Deactivate verification function
WRITE Write all or part of the line memory as a SAM file to
disk
W # file
EXTEND
range TO file EXT
range domain TO file EXT
ln Line input to the line memory, line number
STEP m domain :=data <<
ST m
range Line area
ln1 :ln2
domain Column area, column number
recchange Records (lines) in a SAM file
<< Command linkage with the command character
EDTS8 word symbols
A SCII USASCII code
A GAIN Command abbreviation
CH ANGE Command abbreviation
CL Column data
C OPY Command abbreviation
D ELETE Command abbreviation
E BCDIC EBCDIC code
END End of EDTS8
EXT ENT Extend file
F ILE Command abbreviation
FR OM Direction specification "from"
H ELP Command abbreviation
H EX Hexadecimal specification
I NPUT Read file
I NSERT Command abbreviation
L Left
L IST Command abbreviation
LOG IN log
M OVE Command abbreviation
N ON Output without line number
O UTPUT Write file
OFF Switch off
OPD Operand
P RINT Command abbreviation
R Right
R EAD Command abbreviation
REC Record of a SAM file
S ELECT Command abbreviation
SP ACE Command abbreviation
ST EP Command abbreviation
T AB Command abbreviation
TO Direction specification "to"
TR ANSLATE Command abbreviation
V ERIFY Command abbreviation
W RITE Command abbreviation
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXEC EDTS8-3 +
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDTS8 character symbols
+ Page forward
- Page backward
<< Command link, command character
% First line in line memory
* Current line in line memory
$ Last line in line memory
? Free space after last line in line memory
& Whole line memory
: Start:End
:= Is replaced by
.. Area before or after
= Equal to
/= Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
Limit
" Text separator
. Period, end of data
Input format
-
] ]
] EXEC EDTS8 ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
EXEC EDTS8-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command cancels an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ELMSG-1 -
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command creates an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant and
assigns it to an elementary message identification, known by the SCP
(Service Control Point).
1. CR ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. CR ELMSG - OPRASS ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. CR ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to assign elementary messages of message type
"INDAS phrase" to an elementary message identification.
An INDAS phrase is composed of fixed text parts and up to five different
variable parts.
The variable part is represented by parameter ELMPAR.
The indas phrases can be used for user confirmation of input information or to
announce frequently changing parts, such as directory number, date/time,...
-
] ]
] CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,ELMPAR=] ,LANELMSG= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SUBVOC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(only for INDPHR and STAN) its announcement number.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ELMSG-1 +
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
This parameter unit is used to define announcement number.
ELMPAR ELMSG PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 5 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given, determine
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
CR ELMSG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"operator assistance" to an elementary message identification.
The different kind of operator assistances are defined by parameter OPRMODE.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,OPRMODE=] ,LANELMSG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OPRASS OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
elementary message.
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
Operator assistance after the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
Operator assistance before the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
Operator assistance has to be finished.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ELMSG-3 +
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
CR ELMSG-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"fixed text announcement" to an elementary message identification.
A fixed text announcement is completely represented by its announcement number.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= [,SUBVOC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
STAN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
elementary message.
This parameter unit is used to define announcement number.
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ELMSG-5 +
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
E N D
CR ELMSG-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command displays one or more elementary messages for a certain
OCANEQ variant.
A selective display can be achieved by specifying the message type of the
elementary message and (or) the language.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= [,ELMSG=] [,LANELMSG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
For display purposes, only the message function can be specified.
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
elementary message.
This parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ELMSG-1 +
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
E N D
DISP ELMSG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the contents of the
elementary message assigned to an elementary message identification.
It is also possible to change the message type (parameter ELMSG).
If the message type is changed, all parameters necessary for the new
message type must be entered in the command. No data from the old
message type is kept in this case.
1. MOD ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. MOD ELMSG - OPRASS ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. MOD ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to change the linking of an elementary message
identification assigned to a standard announcement or an operator assistance
into an elementary message identification, assigned to an INDAS phrase.
It can also be used to modify the announcement number of the INDAS phrase, the
variable part of the INDAS phrase and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification. The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
-
] ]
] MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,ELMPAR= ,LANELMSG= ]
] ]
] ,SUBVOC=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ELMSG-1 +
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ELMPAR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 5 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given, determine
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
Note that when the announcement number the old parameters in the
are cleared. If the new INDAS phrase requires parameters, these
must be entered.
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
MOD ELMSG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or a standard announcement into an
elementary message identification, assigned to an operator assistance. It can
also be used to modify the operator mode and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
-
] ]
] MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,OPRMODE= ,LANELMSG=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ELMSG-3 +
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
MOD ELMSG-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or an operator assistance into an
elementary message identification, assigned to a standard announcement.
It can also be used to modify the standard announcement number and (or) the
language, assigned to the elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
-
] ]
] MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= ,SUBVOC=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ELMSG-5 +
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
E N D
MOD ELMSG-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command cancels for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a given combination of an error code and error treatment.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ERRTR ERROR TREATMENT
This parameter defines how the detected input error of the user
interaction should be treated.
SEI STANDARD ERROR AND INFORMATION
This kind of error treatment results in an
immediate release of a pending announcement or
tone, stops the digit collection and starts a
standard announcement.
HLP HELP
This kind of error treatment is used to assist the
end-user with a standard announcement.
The UI(User Interaction)-LTG waits for a corrected
input from the end-user.
UIERRCOD USER INTERACTION ERROR CODE
This parameter defines the possible
user interaction error codes.
FDT FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the first digit timer.
IDT INTER DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the inter digit timer and minimum
number of digits not yet reached.
EOR END OF REPLY
End Of Reply digit received and minimum number of
digits not yet reached.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ELMSGERR-1 -
CR ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command assigns, for a given OCANEQ variant, a fixed text announcement
to a combination of an error treatment and an error code.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
HLP HELP
user interaction error codes.
EOR END OF REPLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ELMSGERR-1 -
DISP ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command displays, for a given OCANEQ variant, the fixed text announcements
assigned to the different combinations of error codes and error treatments.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ELMSGERR-1 -
MOD ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a combination of error code and error treatment.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
HLP HELP
user interaction errors.
EOR END OF REPLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ELMSGERR-1 -
RESET EMERGOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION
This command resets the emergency operation flag.
Emergency operation is caused by a hardware recovery.
Notes:
- Configuration, diagnosis and test commands for central units, IOPs and
devices cant be executed while the CP is in emergency operation.
Input format
-
] ]
] RESET EMERGOP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RESET EMERGOP-1 -
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This command changes the equipment number of a subscriber or a
PBX Line without changing any of the subscriber or PBX Line related
data under consideration of the following points:
- A modification is possible from DLU to DLU port and from LTG to DLU
port.
- The old equipment number is assigned to a subscriber/PBX Line.
- ISDN-subscriber and all analog subscriber categories besides
mobile stations can be handled.
- The category of the PBX Line can either be mainstation (for analog
lines) or Basic Access (for ISDN lines).
- A move for an analog direct inward dialing PBX Line is only possible,
if the circuit types of the old and new equipment are the same.
- The subscriber/PBX Line can be assigned to a CENTREX Group (Commands
ENTR CXSUB, ENTR CXPBX), but must not be a CENTREX Attendant.
- If more than one directory number at the old equipment number is
assigned, modification via directory number is only allowed for
the default/primary directory number.
- No nailed up connection must exist for the old equipment number.
Notes:
- The changing of the ORIG1 value is controlled by the office.
Whether the ORIG1 value is changed or not by this command can
be determined with DISP CALLPOPT.
Prerequisites:
- The new equipment number must previously be a free DLU port.
- The new equipment must be able to support all the subscriber/PBX Line
features that exist for the subscriber/PBX Line to be moved.
- If the subscriber/PBX Line has bearer service for transmission of
packet data on the D-channel (PMDCHANN), the DLU module of the new
equipment must also provide the packet access. In case of packet access
(PLL-Service), the data link connection identifier changes
(Command DISP DLCI).
- The limitations concerning LTG resources must be fulfilled
(Command DISP LTGRES).
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
the category of the subscriber/PBX Line:
Allowed circuit types for line category ECS,ECSP:
SLCAFPS
the operation mode of the PBX Line:
line attributes of the subscriber/PBX Line:
1. MOD EQN - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. MOD EQN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD EQN-1 +
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via DN.
-
] ]
] MOD EQN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] ,NEWEQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number or the pilot
directory number of a PBX, to which the PBX Line is assigned.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX Line.
NEWEQN NEW EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
MOD EQN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD EQN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via EQN.
-
] ]
] MOD EQN : EQN= ,NEWEQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number to which the subscriber/
PBX Line is connected.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG/DLU=
- TSG number (0..7 for a LTG port).
- DLU number (10,20,30...2550 for a DLU port).
b: LTG/SHELF=
- LTG number (1..63 for a LTG port).
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU port).
c: LTU/MODULE=
- LTU number (0..7 for a LTG port).
- DLU module number (0..15 for a DLU port).
d: CIRCUIT=
- Circuit number (0..31 for a LTG port)
- Circuit number (0..15 for a DLU port)
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD EQN-3 -
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command activates an instant printout for each occurrence of the specified
error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
Incompatibilities:
- The functionality which is activated by the MML commands
ACT TRTRAP and ACT EQTRAP is not supported by the BSSAP LTG.
If either of these MML commands is entered, the correct handling
of the BSSAP protocol at the GSM A-interface cannot be guaranteed.
1. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHALL PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
2. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHNON PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
3. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHSPE PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
4. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHUSP PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
5. ACT EQTRAP - PSPEHSPE PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
6. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHNON PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
7. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHUSP PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
1. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
Input format for activating a printout and the attempt to hold the
connection for the occurrence of any MDII (machine detected interoffice
irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= ,HOLD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
d: CHANNEL - NUMBER=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-1 +
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a connection is to be held for
a port when an error code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Holds a connection for a port when any MDII
occurs.
ACT EQTRAP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of any MDII
(machine detected interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-3 +
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of specified
MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= ,ERCO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
a-b
a: ERROR CODE
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
ACT EQTRAP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-5 +
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Holds a connection of a port when any other
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
ACT EQTRAP-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-7 +
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
connection for the occurrence of specified MDIIs (machine detected
interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,ERCO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
ACT EQTRAP-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E68 PREMATURE MCI
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-9 +
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= ,ERCO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
code occurs.
Activates a printout of a port when any other
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
ACT EQTRAP-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-11 +
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
connection for the occurrence of all except the specified MDIIs (machine
detected interoffice irregularity).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT EQTRAP : EQN= ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
b: LTG - NUMBER=
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
code occurs.
Activates a printout of a port when any other
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
Holds a connection of a port when any other
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
ACT EQTRAP-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT EQTRAP-13 -
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command deactivates the instant printout for the occurrence of the
specified or any error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
- in a line/trunk group area of a particular time switch group
- in a time switch group
- in the complete exchange.
<job number>.
1. CAN EQTRAP - ALLEQ ALL EQUIPMENTS
2. CAN EQTRAP - SPECEQ SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS
1. Input format
ALL EQUIPMENTS
-
] ]
] CAN EQTRAP : [PRINT=] [,HOLD=] [,ERCO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
on that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII (machine detected interoffice
irregularity) and defines together with the parameters PRINT and
HOLD a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN EQTRAP-1 +
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
CAN EQTRAP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS
-
] ]
] CAN EQTRAP : EQN= [,PRINT=] [,HOLD=] [,ERCO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: TSG - NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG - NUMBER=
unit values.
c: LTU - NUMBER=
unit values.
unit values.
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII (machine detected interoffice
irregularity) and defines together with the parameters PRINT and
HOLD a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN EQTRAP-3 +
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
E N D
CAN EQTRAP-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA
This command is used to record exchange load and traffic data
of calls carried and rejected due to network management and
internal protection mechanisms.
This measurement includes the following values:
- Processor load (mErl)
- Call processing load (mErl)
- Number of offered seizures
- Number of carried calls
- Number of calls rejected due to Leaky Bucket
- Number of calls rejected due to Trunk Reservation
- Number of calls rejected due to CancelTo
- Number of calls rejected due to All Trunks Busy
- Number of calls rejected due to internal protection mechanisms
- Number of calls with answer
- Congestion level indicator
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 1 job of this type may be entered at the
same time.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC EXCH : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN. TERMINAL
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC EXCH-1 +
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
REC EXCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &,
except the values NO, WO and HO which
cannot be linked with other values.
period
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC EXCH-3 +
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC EXCH-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP
THIS COMMAND IS USED FOR STATUS DATA REQUEST FROM DCP.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT EXCH ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT EXCH-1 -
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION
This command enters the exchange identification and the
system title of the local processor.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],IDNO= ]] ]
] ENTR EXCHID : NAME= ]-,IDNOWB=] [,OSYT=] [,NSYT=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the exchange name. The
exchange name is the name of the local processor.
IDNO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
IDNOWB IDENTIFICATION NO WITH BLANKS
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
In opposition to the parameter IDNO you can enter also
blanks with this parameter (IDNO allowes only symbolic
names).
Notes:
- Only symbolic names and blanks are allowed.
OSYT OLD SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the old value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of ten components.
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR EXCHID-1 +
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NSYT NEW SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the new value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of ten components.
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
E N D
ENTR EXCHID-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command displays exchange description data such as:
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP EXDDAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP EXDDAT-1 -
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command enters exchange description data, such as
Notes:
Following parameters may only be specified during installation
recovery:
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR EXDDAT : <CNTRY= ,GNTYPE= ,DETYPE= ,MET= ,Q3ACTIVE= ]
] ]
] ,CMYSIZE=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the code for country-specific
features.
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
BRD GERMANY
FIN FINLAND
RSA REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA
LBY LIBYA
GRI GREECE
SWZ SWITZERLAND
OES AUSTRIA
PHI PHILIPPINES
EGY EGYPT
KOL COLUMBIA
OMA OMAN
IDS INDONESIA
ARG ARGENTINA
USA UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
IRN IRAN
BRA BRAZIL
DAN DENMARK
LUX LUXEMBOURG
PAR PARAGUAY
TAI TAIWAN
BGD BANGLADESH
BEL BELGIUM
POR PORTUGAL
SWD SWEDEN
NOR NORWAY
FRR FRANCE
KAM CAMEROON
GBR GREAT BRITAIN
ITL ITALY
SAR SAUDI ARABIA
GNTYPE GENERIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the generic type of exchange.
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
LOCAL LOCAL EXCHANGE
TRANSIT TRANSIT EXCHANGE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR EXDDAT-1 +
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ITRANSIT INTERNATIONAL TRANSIT EXCHANGE
DETYPE DIGITAL EXCHANGE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of digital exchange (i.e.
its capacity).
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
DE4 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 4
DE51 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 5/1
MET METERING FOR CHARGING
This parameter specifies the type of traffic metering.
Notes:
- Only the charge meter types for which the associated process
functions are linked in the APS may be entered.
METSUB SUBSCRIBER METERING
METSTAT STATISTIC METERING
METTR TRUNK METERING
METTFS TOLL FREE SERVICE METERING
Q3ACTIVE Q3 ACTIVE
This parameter specifies if Q3 - Logging File(s) should
be created automatically (Q3ACTIVE
is YES)
or not (Q3ACTIVE
is
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
YES Q3 IS ACTIVE
CMYSIZE COMMON MEMORY SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the common memory
(CMY) in megabyte.
Corresponds to <CMYSize>
E N D
ENTR EXDDAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command cancels the charging instructions for Facility Input by
Subscriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be can-
celed based on a FAC-ACTION combination.
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole facility, no changes per
ACTION are possible any more.
e.g. CR FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, BILLING=METERING, METPULS=1;
-> CAN FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible any more
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FAICHA : FAC= [,ACTION=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that no longer has to be
charged or recorded.
For detailed information see CR SUB,
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
The value ACCSUSP is only used as a global entry for ACCSPORI and
ACCSPTER, i.e. when ACCSUSP is given in as FAC in command
CAN FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are cancelled.
ACCSUSP ACCOUNT SUSPENSION
ACCSPORI ACCOUNT SUSPENSION ORIGINATING
ACCSPTER ACCOUNT SUSPENSION TERMINATING
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
ADMIN1 ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED 1
CCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER
PR PARTIAL REROUTING
DIVCDE DIVERSION BY CALL DEFLECTION
VACNC VERBAL ANN. CHARGES NEXT CALL
DNREG DIRECTORY NUMBER REGISTRATION
AMAIO AMA IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ALLNO SCI FOR ALL ISDN NUMBERS
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
NOCDIV NO CALL DIVERSION
TRACL BLOCKING FOR TRAFFIC CLASS
DIFFRING DIFFERENT RINGING
SADTRANS SUBADDRESS TRANSMISSION
CW CALL WAITING
GFRESET GENERAL FACILITY RESET
CATIM1 CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY 1
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FAICHA-1 +
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B-SIDE
NOCHARG CHARGE FREE B SUBSCRIBER
CLIPCW CLIP FOR CALL WAITING
CLIP CALL. LINE ID. PRESENTATION
CLIR CALL. LINE ID. RESTRICTION
CLIRIGN CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. IGNORE
CLIRREQ CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. ON REQ.
CLIRSUSP CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. SUSPENS.
NOCOLC COLLECT INCOMING CALLS INHIBIT
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
CUGIC CUG INCOMING TRAFFIC
CUGORIB CUG ORIGINATING CALLS BLOCKED
CUGOGREQ CUG OUTG. TRAFFIC ON REQUEST
CUGTERB CUG TERMINATING CALLS BLOCKED
SDATRANS DATA TRANSMISSION
DEB DETAILED BILLING
DEBCL DETAILED BILLING CLASS
CALR CALLED LINE ID RESTRICTION
CALP CALLED LINE ID PRESENTATION
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
VMSREC VOICE MAIL SERVICE RECORDING
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSION
SCLSTRCW SCLST RINGING AND CALL WAITING
DIVIS DIVI WITH SCREENING
ALLNOCL CLASSES FOR ALL NUMBERS
CTAS CALL TRANSFER A-SIDE
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUSPENSION
DIVCD DIVERSION CONDITIONAL
DIVSAE DIV.TO SHORT ANNOUN.EQUIPMENT
DIVA DIVERSION TO ANNOUNCEMENT
DIVOPD DIV. TO OPERATOR ON NO ANSWER
DIVOP DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
VMSQUERY VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY
DIVIP DIVI WITH PARALLEL RINGING
DIVGEN DIVERSION GENERAL
DPNUC D CHANNEL PACKET NAIL.UP CONN.
INHTROFF INHIBIT TRUNK OFFERING
KEYWORD KEYWORD SECURE NUMBER
LAY1HOLD LAYER 1 MUST BE HELD
MCIREQ MALICIOUS CALL ID. ON REQUEST
MCIIMM MALICIOUS CALL ID. IMMEDIATE
MOBIO MET. OBSERVATION IMMED. OUTPUT
PMB POSITION MAKE BUSY
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
ACO ATTENDANT CAMP ON
ATNLOGON ATTENDANT LOGON
SUBPRIO PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
SMET SUBSCRIBER METER
REQSPORI REQUESTED SUSPENS. ORIGINATING
CAN FAICHA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REQSPTER REQUESTED SUSPENS. TERMINATING
CLIPNOSC SCREENING OF CALL.LINE INHIBIT
UNLISTDN SECRET DIRECTORY NUMBER
SERVINC SERVICE INTERCEPT
STH STOP HUNT
NOTSTSUL SULIM TEST NOT ALLOWED
TERMPORT TERMINAL PORTABILITY
TESTCAOR TEST CALL ORIGINATING ALLOWED
CONF3 THREE WAY CALLING
TOLLCAT TOLL CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY
CHATIMM CHARGE TRANSFER IMMEDIATELY
CHATREQ CHARGE TRANSFER REQUEST
UTUSIG USER TO USER SIGNALLING 1
UTUSIG3 USER TO USER SIGNALLING 3
ERING ENHANCED RINGING CODE
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
PROP0 FOR ORIGINAL DEPENDENT RINGING PERMISSION
LRF LOW RESISTANCE FEEDING
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
DIVIA DIV. TO INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT
RSTSCI SCI RESTRICTION
DDIVSTAT DISP.CALL DIV.B1 CALL FORW.ST.
DDIVCF DISP. CALL DIV. B1 CALL FORW.
DDIVBFN DISP. CALL DIV. B2 FORW. NO S.
DDIVACF DISP. CALL DIV. A CALL FORW.
DDIVAFN DISP. CALL DIV. A FORW. NO.
SERCOMP SERVICE COMPLETION
MCIHOLD1 MAL. CALL ID. WITH HOLDING 1
PRTSF PRINT RECORD FOR SUB. FAC.ACT.
AOC1P AOC AT BEGINNING PERMANENT
AOC2P AOC DURING CALL PERMANENT
AOC3P AOC AT END PERMANENT
AOC1C AOC AT BEGINNING PER CALL
AOC2C AOC DURING CALL PER CALL
AOC3C AOC AT END PER CALL
COLP CONN. LINE ID. PRESENTATION
COLPNOSC CONN.LINE ID.PRES.NO SCREENING
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID. RESTRICTION
COLRREQ COLR ON REQUEST
COLRSUSP COLR SUSPEND
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
CWNOTIFY CALL WAITING NOTIFICATION
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
ACTION FACILITY INPUT ACTION
This parameter specifies the action of the given facility that no
longer has to be charged or recorded.
ACT ACTIVATE FACILITY INPUT
DACT DEACTIVATE FACILITY INPUT
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
ASGNMOD ASSIGN MODIF. AUTHORIZATION
RMVMOD REMOVE MODIF. AUTHORIZATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FAICHA-3 -
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command creates charging instructions for Facility Input by Sub-
scriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be entered
based on a FAC-ACTION combination. Charging instructions are the
billing method (metering, automatic message accounting) and - in case
of metering - the number of meter pulses.
In case of Operator Input Recording it can be specified to make AMA
or FIR records.
For one facility, each ACTION must have the same billing method or
the ACTION must be chargefree.
No mixing within a facility is allowed.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING METPULS
DIVBY ENTRDAT METERING 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN
REMOVE
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole
facility, no changes per ACTION are possible any more, and
vice versa.
-> MOD FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible
any more.
The parameter FAIOPER is meant for operator inputs
only and is independent of the BILLING for subscriber input.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING FAIOPER METPULS
TRACL ENTRDAT METERING AMA 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN FIR
REMOVE AMA & FIR
Input format
-
] ]
] CR FAICHA : FAC= <,BILLING= ,FAIOPER=> [,METPULS=] [,ACTION=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that has to be charged or
recorded.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
CR FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FAICHA-1 +
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
CR FAICHA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
STH STOP HUNT
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FAICHA-3 +
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BILLING BILLING INPUT BY SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input.
Only facilities that can be controled via subscriber input can
be assigned a billing method. For not subscriber controlable
facilities, the input of BILLING is blocked.
METERING METERING
FAIOPER FACILITY INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies that an operator input for the given facility
has to be recorded for charging (AMA) or other purposes (FIR).
The recording with FIR, is only possible for certain facilities,
nl. ACCSUSP, ACCSPORI, ACCSPTER, REQSPORI, REQSPTER and
TRACL.
For all other facilities, FAIOPER=FIR is rejected.
FIR FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
METPULS METER PULSES
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses to be applied for
a facility input by subscriber.
The meter pulses can also be used for charge display at station
station terminal (Advice Of Charge (ISDN) or
with Subscriber Privat Meter (analog)).
This parameter specifies for which action of the given facility the
instructions are created.
For all facilities, a check is made on whether the FAC-ACTION
combination is plausible. Implausible combinations are rejected.
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
CR FAICHA-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command displays the charging instructions for Facility Input
by Subscriber and the recording instructions for Facility Input
by Operator.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FAICHA : FAC= [,ACTION=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility for which the chargings
and the recordings have to be displayed.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
DISP FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are created.
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B SIDE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FAICHA-1 +
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
STH STOP HUNT
DISP FAICHA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
This parameter specifies the action for which the instructions have
to be displayed.
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FAICHA-3 -
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command modifies charging instructions for Facility Input by Sub-
scriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be entered
based on a FAC-ACTION combination. Charging instructions are the
billing method (metering, automatic message accounting) and - in case
of metering - the number of meter pulses.
In case of Operator Input Recording it can be specified to make AMA
or FIR records.
For one facility, each ACTION must have the same billing method or
the ACTION must be chargefree.
No mixing within a facility is allowed.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING METPULS
DIVBY ENTRDAT METERING 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN
REMOVE
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole
facility, no changes per action are possible any more, and
vice versa.
-> MOD FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible
any more.
The parameter FAIOPER is meant for operator inputs
only and is independent of the BILLING for subscriber input.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING FAIOPER METPULS
TRACL ENTRDAT METERING AMA 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN FIR
REMOVE AMA & FIR
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD FAICHA : FAC= <,BILLING= ,CBILLING= ,METPULS= ,FAIOPER= ]
] ]
] ,CFAIOPER=> [,ACTION=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that has to be charged or
recorded.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
MOD FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FAICHA-1 +
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B SIDE
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
MOD FAICHA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
STH STOP HUNT
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FAICHA-3 +
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
BILLING BILLING INPUT BY SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input
that has to be entered.
Only facilities that can be controled via subscriber input can
be assigned a billing method. For not subscriber controlable
facilities, the input of BILLING is blocked.
METERING METERING
CBILLING CANCEL BILLING INPUT BY SUB.
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input that
has to be canceled.
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses to be applied for
a facility input by subscriber.
The existing value is overwritten by the new one.
The meter pulses can also be used for charge display at station
FAIOPER FACILITY INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies the recording method for operator input that
has to be entered.
The recording with FIR, is only possible for certain facilities,
nl. ACCSUSP, ACCSPORI, ACCSPTER, REQSPORI, REQSPTER and
TRACL.
For all other facilities, FAIOPER=FIR is rejected.
CFAIOPER CANCEL FAC. INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies the recording method for operator input that
has to be canceled.
This parameter specifies for which action of the given facility the
instructions are modified.
MOD FAICHA-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FAICHA-5 -
CAN FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command cancels charging instructions for facility usage.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FAUCHA : FAC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY USAGE
This parameter specifies the facility for which the usage no longer
has to be charged.
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATLY
DIVCD CALL DIVERSION CONDITIONALLY
DIVDA CALL DIVERSION ON NO REPLY
DIVBY CALL DIVERSION ON BUSY
HOTLIMM HOT LINE IMMEDIATE
DIVIA DIV.TO INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
CLIRREQ CLIR ON REQUEST PER CALL
CLIRSUSP CLIR SUPPRESSION PER CALL
COLRREQ COLR ON REQUEST PER CALL
COLRSUSP COLR SUPPRESSION PER CALL
MCIREQ MAL.CALL IDENTIFIC. ON REQUEST
MCI3 MAL.CALL ID.ON REQ. W. HOLDING
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
CCBSREQ CCBS REQUEST
CCBSINT CCBS INTERROGATION
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
DIVSAE DIV.TO SHORT ANN.EQUIPMENT
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
PBXOVFLW OVERFLOW DDI PBX
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
ARANN AUTOMATIC RECALL ANNOUNCEMENT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FAUCHA-1 +
CAN FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCNRREQ CCNR REQUEST
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
CCNRINT CCNR INTERROGATION
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
DIVIS DIVERSION WITH SCREENING
E N D
CAN FAUCHA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command creates charging instructions for facility usage,
i.e. billing method (metering, automatic message accounting), number
of meter pulses in case of metering and control parameter for special
purposes.
Note:
- For all facilities that are charged for usage, the
billing method must be the same.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR FAUCHA : FAC= <,MARKS= ,BILLING= ,METPULS=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY USAGE
This parameter specifies the facility for which the usage
charging will be entered.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FAUCHA-1 +
CR FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
MARKS REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies marks used to control the charging of facility
usage in special cases.
NOANSW NO ANSWER FOR ALARM CALL
This mark specifies that usage of the facility
will be charged even though the B-party does not
answer.
Note:
The mark can be set for facilities CACO and DACO.
BUSY BUSY FOR ALARM CALL
This mark specifies that facility usage for this
facility will be charged also in case of B-party
busy.
Notes:
The mark can be set for facilities CACO and DACO.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the billing method for the usage of the given
facility.
For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method must
be the same. E.g. if at first input CONF3 has BILLING=AMA, all
following facilities must have BILLING=AMA or must be chargefree.
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses which have to be
applied in the case of billing by metering.
The meter pulses can also be used for charge display at
E N D
CR FAUCHA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command displays the charging instructions in case of facility
usage.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FAUCHA ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FAUCHA-1 -
MOD FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command modifies charging instructions for facility usage.
Note:
- For all facilities that are charged for usage, the
billing method must be the same.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD FAUCHA : FAC= <,MARKS= ,CMARKS= ,BILLING= ,CBILLING= ]
] ]
] ,METPULS=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY USAGE
This parameter specifies the facility for which the usage charging
has to be modified.
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FAUCHA-1 +
MOD FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
MARKS REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies (for the given facility usage) which
charging control parameters have to be modified.
CMARKS CANCEL REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies the charging control parameters that have to
be modified for the given facility usage.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the billing method that has to be
modified for a given facility usage.
For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method must
be the same. E.g. if at first input CONF3 has BILLING=AMA, all
following facilities must have BILLING=AMA or must be chargefree.
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the billing method that has to be
canceled for the given facility usage.
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the new number of meter pulses to be
applied for a facility usage.
The meter pulses can also be used for charge display at
E N D
MOD FAUCHA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START FCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING
This command starts the file control processes function so that disk and tape
files can be used.
Notes:
recovery).
Input format
-
] ]
] START FCP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START FCP-1 -
DISP FCS
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS
This command displays the counters for the specified lines.
This command is only legal for basic access.
1. DISP FCS - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. DISP FCS - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
-
] ]
] DISP FCS : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber
line. Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FCS-1 +
DISP FCS
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FCS : DLU= ,LC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
E N D
DISP FCS-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP
This command deletes file groups from the file group table. Only file
groups created by the user can be deleted.
Prerequisites:
For attribute file groups:
- All attributes must be reset with RSET FGRPATT.
For password file groups:
- All files must be detached from the file group with the
command MOD FGRP.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
TYPE TYPE OF FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the type of the file group
which has to be canceled.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group for file
attributes is cancelled.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group for file
passwords is cancelled.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group
for file attributes is cancelled.
FILEATTR FILE ATTRIBUTE TYPE
FILEPW FILE PASSWORD TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FGRP-1 -
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE GROUP
This command creates an element in the file group table.
It is possible to create an attribute- or a password file group.
It is possible to create an cyclic or a normal file group.
Notes:
- If the parameter TYPE is not entered, an attribute file group
is created.
- If the parameter CYCLIC is not entered, a non cyclic file
group is created. Only attribute file groups can be created
cyclic.
- The file group features for attribute file groups:
threshold upgrades,
threshold downgrades,
threshold features and
maximum copy length
can only be set for cyclic file groups (via SET FGRPATT).
Input format
-
] ]
] CR FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] [,CYCLIC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which is to be
created.
Notes:
- Each file group name can exist not more than twice:
As the name of an attribute file group and as the name
of a password file group.
- Password file group names can be fully or partly
qualified because the name has only symbolic meaning.
- For password file group names there is no hierarchy in
opposition to attribute file group names.
- Attribute file group names can be a subset or a superset
of the already existing file group names.
which has to be created.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group is created
for file attributes.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group is created
for file passwords.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group is
created for file attributes.
CYCLIC CYCLIC SELECTION
This parameter specifies if a cyclic or a non cyclic file group is
to be created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FGRP-1 +
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Only attribute file groups can be created cyclic.
NO CREATE NON CYCLIC FILE GROUP
YES CREATE CYCLIC FILE GROUP
E N D
CR FGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS
This command displays the file groups. The file groups were
generated automatically or were created by the user with the
command CR FGRP.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FGRP : [FGRP=] [,TYPE=] [,FILELIST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which
has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If X is entered or the parameter is not entered,
all filegroups of the specified type are displayed.
- A file group name can be entered only for password file
group types in combination with FILELIST = YES.
which has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file groups for file
attributes are displayed.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file groups for file
passwords are displayed.
- If ALL is entered, all types of file groups are
displayed.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file groups
for file attributes are displayed.
ALL ALL FILE GROUP TYPES
FILELIST FILELIST
This parameter specifies if a list of the files of
the filegroup has to be displayed.
Notes:
- The filelist can be displayed only for password file
group types.
Y DISPLAY FILELIST
YES DISPLAY FILELIST
N DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
NO DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FGRP-1 -
MOD FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE GROUP
With this command files can be attached and detached to/from
password file groups.
Prerequisites:
- The filegroup has to exist.
Notes:
- This command can be entered only by the system
administrator.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],FILE= ] ]
] MOD FGRP : FGRP= -,CFILE= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be attached to the password file
group.
Notes:
- The file may not yet exist.
CFILE CANCEL FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be detached from the password file
group.
Notes:
- To detach the last file of the file group no
password may exist for this file group.
- If "X" is entered, all files are detached
from the file group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FGRP-1 -
DISP FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command displays all file group features of one file group.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FGRPATT : FGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the group features
Default: BLANK
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FGRPATT-1 -
RSET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command resets the file group features (set to default
value) of one file group.
Prerequisite:
- The file group must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] RSET FGRPATT : FGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
are to be reset.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RSET FGRPATT-1 -
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command sets file group features for one attribute
file group.
If there are files belonging to this file group, the
specified features will be changed in the file catalogs, too.
Prerequisites:
- The copy attributes must be compatible with the already
existing attributes.
- A specified copy service process must exist.
- The cyclic attributes THRD, THRU, THRF and MAXCOPLE
cannot be changed in the file catalogs of the files
belonging to this file group if these files are empty and
opened for writing.
Input format
-
] ]
] SET FGRPATT : FGRP= <,RETPER= ,SAFCOP= ,COPATT= ,PRNAME= ]
] ]
] ,THRU= ,THRD= ,THRF= ,MAXCOPLE=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
are to be set.
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD
This parameter specifies the number of days the file is retained
(protected against deleting and overwriting).
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of the required
safecopies.
COPATT COPY ATTRIBUTES
This parameter specifies the following features for copies of files
belonging to this file group: - block size
- retention period
a[-b]
a: BLOCK SIZE=
b: RETENTION PERIOD=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET FGRPATT-1 +
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRNAME PROCESS NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a copy service process.
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric characters are allowed.
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
increasing filling capacity.
If a threshold is reached and the threshold feature was set to ALARM,
an alarm will be triggered on the System Panel.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRD.
- The second threshold upgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold upgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold upgrades can be equal if all threshold upgrades
and all threshold downgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold upgrades must be greater than or equal to the
threshold downgrades.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UP 1=
b: THRESHOLD UP 2=
c: THRESHOLD UP 3=
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
decreasing filling capacity.
the alarm on the System Panel will be reset.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRU.
- The second threshold downgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold downgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold downgrades can be equal if all threshold downgrades
and all threshold upgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold downgrades must be lower than or equal to the
threshold upgrades.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWN 1=
b: THRESHOLD DOWN 2=
SET FGRPATT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: THRESHOLD DOWN 3=
This parameter specifies the threshold features for increasing and
decreasing filling capacities.
an alarm will be triggered or reset on the System Panel.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE 1
ALARM DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
NOALARM DONT DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE 2
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE 3
MAXCOPLE MAXIMUM COPY LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum copy length
(in PAM-pages) for the cyclic files of the file
group.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for cyclic
file groups.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET FGRPATT-3 -
CAN FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command cancels all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
The password may have a length from one up to 40 characters.
All characters are allowed.
Upper case and lower case letters count as distinct.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The specified file group password must exist.
- All specified file accesses must be protected by the same password.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- Update must be activated.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CRYPTPW=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the relevant
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed.
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
ACCESS FILE ACCESSES
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be cancelled.
DEL DELETE PROTECTED
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CN CHANGE FILE NAME PROTECTED
CR CHANGE RETENTION PERIOD PROT.
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that shall be
cancelled.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FGRPPW-1 -
RSET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command resets all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group. The file group password will
be reset to a defined value that must be entered with the command.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- All specified accesses must be protected by the same password.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] RSET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,NCRYPTPW=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
function has to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be reset.
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password that shall replace
the unknown password.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RSET FGRPPW-1 -
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command protects file accesses by a file group password.
It can also be used to rename the file group password and/or to
change the accesses, protected by a file group password.
For changing an existing password the parameter CHANGEPW =
YES has to be entered.
The password(s) will be requested by the system and will not be
displayed.
Prerequisites:
- In the case of renaming the file group password or changing
the protected accesses, the old password must be correct.
- The file group name must be entered fully qualified
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] SET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CHANGEPW=] [,NCRYPTPW= ]
] ]
] [,CRYPTPW=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter specifies the access(es) which are to be protected
by a file group password.
Note:
- This parameter is always mandatory, even when renaming a file
group password .
This guarantees that no file group passwords of other users are
renamed.
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CHANGEPW CHANGE PASSWORD
This parameter specifies whether the operator wants to enter a new
password or to change an existing password.
Note:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET FGRPPW-1 +
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- If a new password is to be entered, the parameter has to be entered
with the value NO.
- If an existing password is to be changed, the parameter has to be
entered with the value YES.
- If the parameter is not given, CHANGEPW=NO is assumed.
N ENTER NEW PASSWORD
NO ENTER NEW PASSWORD
Y CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
YES CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
Default: NO
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password when the password
is to be changed.
Note:
- The parameter CHANGEPW has to be entered with the value YES.
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that is to be entered
or changed.
Note:
E N D
SET FGRPPW-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE FRAME HANDLER MODULE
This command configures a frame handler module to one of the states
PLA, MBL or ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF FHM : LTG= ,FHM= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TIME SWITCH GROUP NUMBER=
FHM FRAME HANDLER MODULE
The following state transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF FHM-1 -
DIAG FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE FRAME HANDLER MODULE
This command starts diagnosis of a frame handler module in
an LTG.
ACT or CBL and the associated FHM must be in the
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG FHM : LTG= ,FHM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG FHM-1 -
STAT FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF FRAME HANDLER MODULE
- one Frame Handler Module in a particular LTG
- one Frame Handler Module in all LTGs
- all Frame Handler Modules in one LTG
- all Frame Handler Modules in all LTGs
- all Frame Handler Modules in a particular operating status
in a particular LTG
- all Frame Handler Modules in a particular operating status
in all LTGs
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT FHM : LTG= [,FHM=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
unit values.
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT FHM-1 -
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATALOG FILE
This command modifies the catalog entry of a disk file. The file
can be renamed and the retention period can be changed.
Prerequisites for renaming of files:
- The new filename must not already exist.
- The new filename must conform with system conventions.
- The new filename must not contain a protected name segment.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The file must not be protected by a retention period, or the
correct expiration date must be entered via parameter EXPDAT.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Prerequisites for changing the retention period:
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The retention period can not be changed if this was already
administered via the command SET FGRPATT.
Nevertheless the execution of the command will be acknowledged
with EXECD.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],RETPER=]] ]
] CAT FILE : FILE= ]-,EXPDAT=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
The following characters may not be used:
- A single X.
n
n/o
This parameter specifies the number of days the file
is retained (protected against overwriting).
Notes:
- If a value is entered for this parameter, a new retention
period becomes valid (and the old one becomes invalid).
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the file.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAT FILE-1 +
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter FILE for renaming the file.
- The file may not be deleted before this date.
- The file can be renamed if the correct expiration date is entered.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
E N D
CAT FILE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE
This command creates a file on magnetic disk.
The created file has no protection.
Prerequisites:
- The file name must conform to system conventions.
- The file name must not contain a protected stem.
- The file must not already exist.
- There must be free storage space on the magnetic disk.
- The specified disk must be available.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR FILE : FILE= ,TYPE= ,SIZE= [,VSN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
The following characters must not be used:
- A single X.
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies single or double file type.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the amount of space to be reserved
on the data carrier.
Notes:
- The maximum amount of space must be specified, because
dynamic file expansion is not possible.
- The size is specified as a number of blocks (PAM pages of
2048 bytes each).
- The maximum value depends on the disk capacity.
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the disk.
Note:
- If TYPE = DOUBLE is entered, the parameter VSN will be
ignored and the file will be created as a double file.
VSN000 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 000
VSN001 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 001
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FILE-1 -
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DELETE FILE
This command deletes disk files, tape / magneto optical disk
files or all files on tape / magneto optical disk.
Prerequisites:
- The file must be closed.
- The file and the data carrier must exist.
- The expiration date must be passed or entered.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Notes:
- The command can be used also for tape / magneto optical disk files.
The specified tape / magneto optical disk file and the following
files cannot be accessed any more. (The FCP will set a section mark
before the specified file, this means that the end of the tape /
magneto optical disk is reached.)
Input format
-
] ]
] DEL FILE : FILE= [,VSN=] [,EXPDAT=] [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
In the case of disks, this parameter specifies the name of
the file.
Note:
- Full or partial qualification of the filename is mandatory.
- If a tape / magneto optical disk file is to be deleted, not
only the specified file but also all subsequent files are
deleted.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, they
are deleted logically but not physically.
disk, tape or magneto optical disk on which the file is to
be deleted.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, the file will be
deleted on both disk drives.
-The parameter VSN will be ignored for disk files.
Only if parameter FILE is entered with X (erase all files)
the command will be rejected if parameter VSN wasnt
entered or was set to VSN000 or VSN001.
.
This parameter allows files to be deleted before their
retention period has expired. This can be done on condition
that the access restrictions permit changes to the retention
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DEL FILE-1 +
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period.
Note:
- Deletion of the file is enabled by entering the correct
expiration date, to prove that it is known.
- In the case of tape / magneto optical disk files, an entire
tape / magneto optical disk can only be deleted once the
retention period for the first section of the file expired.
- The retention period can be overwritten in this case by
entering the correct expiration date.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, links
to continuation tapes / magneto optical disks are ignored.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
N CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
YES CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
DEL FILE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE
This command displays disk, tape and magneto optical disk files
attributes and comprises the functions:
- List of files on the medium (table of contents) giving the main file
attributes.
- List of all attributes of a file that can be determined from the
disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk labels.
- List of mutilated and invalid disk files and disk files in the
process of being copied, with brief information from the catalog.
The execution of the command (output of table of contents) can be
stopped with the STOP DISP command.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist
- The specified volume must be accessible
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FILE : [FILE= [,ALL=]] [,GEN=] [,VSN=] [,DAM=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which the
attributes are to be output.
Notes:
- If X is entered here, a table of contents of the relevant
volume containing the main information on the specified
file(s) and the medium is displayed.
- X is illegal in conjunction with the parameter ALL=
YES.
- If an alias file name is entered, only a fully qualified
name is allowed (last character must not be .).
Default: X
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies that all attributes of a file that can
be determined from the disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk
labels are output.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction
with a fully qualified filename.
N DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
NO DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Y LIST ALL PARAMETERS
YES LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Default: N
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation name. It must be
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FILE-1 +
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
represented by four pairs of characters which correspond
to:
- Function version
- Correction version
- ODAGEN run number
- Checkpoint serial number
Notes:
- To get all attributes of a generation file which does not belong
to the current generation, the name of this generation has to be
entered.
- If the parameter is omitted, all files with or without generation
are displayed.
This parameter specifies the volume (medium) on which the file to
be processed is located.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, both disk files are accessed.
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices:
VSN000 for MDD-00 and
VSN001 for MDD-01.
DAM DAMAGED
If this parameter is entered, an extract of the disk catalog
is output with all mutilated and invalid files and files in the
process of being copied. This output includes the associated
generation names.
Notes:
- This parameter is illegal for tape / magneto optical disk files
and in conjunction with parameter ALL.
N DISPLAY ALL FILES
NO DISPLAY ALL FILES
Y DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
YES DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
Default: N
E N D
DISP FILE-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER FILE
This command transfers files between data carriers, i.e. hard disk,
floppy disk, optical disk, tape and cartridge. Files can be transferred
- between any local data carriers (local transfer) or
- between a local and a remote data carrier (remote transfer).
Notes:
Three file formats are defined for EWSD:
- The Post-Processing format is defined by the system conventions
for magnetic tape storage based on ISO standards. This format allows
data to be exchanged between processors of different manufacturers
and is used for customer files containing post-processing data.
- The SSW format is an EWSD-specific format. It also fulfills the
system conventions for magnetic tape storage and has an EWSD-specific
internal structure. It is used for creating save copies of EWSD-
system-files on tape/optical disk at the CP and transporting EWSD-
software from HOST to CP by tape.
- The CP format exists only on local disk. Files of data type TEXTCMP
or MMLCMPR contain compressed text data with mask numbers as editing
specification. These files are converted into Post-Processing format
producing target files containing printable text data. Source files
of data type TEXTCMP are only converted into editable files if these
target files have variable records with a maximum record length of
256 bytes. Editable files are always generated from source files of
data type MMLCMPR.
The following table shows the correlation between file format, file
type, data type and data carrier.
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! File ! File ! Possible ! Possible data carriers !
! format ! type ! data types ! local disk ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! ! local optical disk/ !
! ! 1) ! 2) ! ! remote data carrier !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! Post- ! SAM ! TRANSP ! X ! X !
! Processing ! ! ! ! !
! format ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! SSW format ! SAM ! TRANSP ! ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! CP format ! SAM ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! PAM ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! CYC ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! MMLCMPR ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
1) see output parameter type of file of command DISP FILE
2) see output parameter data storage form of command DISP FILE
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TRANS FILE : FILE= [,VSNS=] [,VSNR=] [,PRONAM=] [,USINF=] ]
] ]
] [,REQPSW=] [,SIZE=] [,MODE=] [,COPMOD=] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS FILE-1 +
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] [,RETPER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file to be transferred. The following
conventions must be observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the target file name, the old
parameter value specifies the source file name.
- If only a fully/partially qualified target file name or value X
is specified, the names of source and target files are identical.
- When copying from local disk to local disk, target and source
file names must neither be identical nor start with the same
partial qualification.
- Value X is only permitted for local transfers from tape/optical
disk.
- If a partially qualified name or value X is specified, all other
parameters apply to all files being copied.
- Partial qualification is only allowed for local transfers and for
remote transfers where CP is initiating and sending processor.
- By appending an * (asterisk) to the target file name, the exchange
code is appended.
- The exchange code can only be appended if the source file is on
local disk and the target file is not on local disk.
- If the target file name already ends with the exchange code, it
is not appended in duplicate.
- Input of * (asterisk) at the end of a fully qualified file name
or as fully qualified file name for local disk is not permissible.
- A . (period) is neither allowed at the end of a fully qualified
file name nor as a fully qualified file name.
- An initial . (period) and .. (successive periods) are not
allowed for files on local disk.
- Target files can only be created on local disk if their name does
not begin with a protected file name segment (see DISP FNS).
Notes:
- If a file at the remote processor is specified, the input of the
corresponding file password is requested after the command was
entered correctly. The following conventions must be observed:
- If the source file is at the remote processor, the password
which authorizes read access must be entered.
- If the target file is at the remote processor, the password
to be entered depends on the intended action.
If MODE = CR is specified, no file password is requested.
The output of the entered file password is suppressed.
n
n/o
VSNS VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER SENDER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the source file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than on disk, a VSNS
must be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNS must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNS must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNS is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
TRANS FILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VSNR VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the target file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than disk, a VSNR must
be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNR must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNR must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNR is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
a[-b]
a: LIST 1 ELEMENT=
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
first list of data carriers of the target file. The following
- Only one VSN is permitted for remote transfer or local
transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
b: LIST 2 ELEMENT=
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
second list of data carriers of the target file. The following
- This information unit must not be used for remote transfer
or local transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
This parameter specifies the receiving and the sending processor via
its symbolic processor name. The following conventions must be
observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the receiving processor, the old
parameter value specifies the sending processor.
Default : local processor/local processor
n/o
n/
/o
USINF USER INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the user identification and authorization
for the remote processor. The user authorization is composed of the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS FILE-3 +
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
user password and a user account number. The input of the user
password is requested separately after the command was entered
correctly. The output of the entered user password is suppressed.
Notes:
- The parameter may be omitted if a default identification for
file transfer exists and the file is to be processed under this
identity.
a[-b]
a: USER IDENTIFICATION=
User identification as required by remote processor.
b: USER ACCOUNT NUMBER=
Input of a user account number if required by remote processor.
REQPSW REQUEST PASSWORDS FOR REMOTE
This parameter specifies if passwords have to be requested for remote
processor.
Notes:
- Input and therefore requests for passwords for remote processor are
not necessary, if they are already stored there (e.g. FTAC-Profiles
at BS2000).
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: Y
SIZE SIZE OF RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of the target file for files on disk
in PAM pages (1 PAM page = 2048 bytes). The following conventions must
be observed:
- At the CP, a target file is reduced to the actual size after
transmission if MODE = CR/CRD is entered.
- At the DCP, the size of the file on disk remains unchanged.
- If the value specified for FILE is a partial qualification or
value X, SIZE applies to every file transferred.
The input is ignored if:
- the source file is in SSW format and the target file was created
on local disk
- the target file is on tape/optical disk
- MODE = OVWR or MODE = EXT
- COPMOD = SSWF.
If no input is made for SIZE, the file transfer determines the
size of the target file, except the following case:
If the source file is in Post-Processing format on tape/optical disk
and the target file is to be created on local disk, the system
attempts to correct the preset value of SIZE as far as possible. If
the difference between actual file size and preset value is too great,
the transfer may be aborted due to lack of space. In this case, the
transfer procedure must be repeated with the correct SIZE value.
Default: 100
TRANS FILE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODE MODE TO OPEN RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the opening mode of the target file.
CR CREATE
Create file before transfer.
CRD CREATE DOUBLE
Create file in duplicate before transfer
(only possible for local disk).
OVWR OVERWRITE
Existing file will be overwritten.
- If the file does not exist, it is created.
If SSW format is decomposed, the information
in the file key block applies.
- The parameter value is not valid for local tape/
optical disk.
- The parameter value is valid for the DCP tape if
the file is the last on the tape.
- If the target file is a CYC file, the parameter
value is not valid.
EXT EXTEND
Existing file will be extended.
- For tape/optical disk this parameter value is
only valid if the target file is the last on
the tape/optical disk.
- For DCP tape this parameter value is only valid
if the tape file is empty.
- The parameter value is not valid if the target
carrier is a tape/optical disk and a partial
qualification has been entered.
- The parameter value is not valid for the DCP
disk.
- The parameter value is not valid if the
target file is a PAM file/ CYC file or if
COPMOD = SSWF.
- If a file transfer with target file on local
disk is aborted due to lack of space and this
parameter value has been entered, the following
options exist:
a) use CR FILE to create a new file with
sufficient capacity,
b) use OVWR to transfer the file that was to
be extended to the newly created file,
c) use EXT to extend the newly created file.
Default: CR
COPMOD COPY MODE OF FILE
This parameter specifies the copy mode (file and/or data reformatting).
Assignment of parameter values to copy direction/default:
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! Copy from .. to .. ! Possible param. values ! Default !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! KEEP ! KEEP !
! local disk ! POST ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! ! !
! local optical disk / ! POST ! POST !
! local tape ! SSWF ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local optical disk / ! ! !
! local tape --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN !
! local optical disk / ! CHAR ! !
! local tape / ! ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------!
! remote data ! ! !
! carrier --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN
! local optical disk / ! CHAR !
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS FILE-5 +
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! local tape ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
BIN COPY BINARY DATA
This parameter value enables
1) a file in Post-Processing format containing
binary data to be copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The target file attributes are determined
by the source file attributes.
- The data are not reformatted.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
2) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! ! ! optical disk/!
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The SSW format is decomposed.
- By decomposing the SSW format, the file which
was copied with COPMOD = SSWF is
reconstructed.
- The target file attributes are taken from the
file key block, which is output as SSW
INFORMATION in connection with DISP FILE
for the local tape/optical disk.
3) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ !
! local ! !
! optical disk/! !
! local tape/ ! <-+
! remote data !
! carrier !
+--------------+
- The SSW format is not decomposed.
- DISP FILE for a file on local tape/
optical disk specifies whether it has
Post-Processing format or SSW format.
TRANS FILE-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHAR COPY CHARACTER
This parameter value enables a file in
Post-Processing format containing text data to be
copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The entry is ignored for source files in
SSW format.
- The target file attributes are determined by the
source file attributes.
- The data are recoded and stored on the target
data carrier
EBCDIC tape/
optical disk in EBCDIC.DF.03 code
ASCII tape/
optical disk in ASCII code
Disk in processor internal code.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of required copies is set
to 0 (zero).
SSWF CREATE SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file from local disk
creating SSW format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- This parameter value is primarily used for
creating save copies on EBCDIC tape/optical
disks.
- This parameter value is not possible for CYC
files and generation files.
- Since the target file is created in SSW format,
the following restrictions apply to the source
file:
a) record size <= 2048 byte, if record format is
variable,
b) record size <= 2040 byte, if record format is
fix.
- The copying information is ignored as the target
file attributes are defined by SSW format.
- The number of performed copies is not increased.
- The source file attributes are stored in the
file key block of the target file, enabling the
source file to be reconstructed when the target
file is recopied to local disk.
Notes:
- EBCDIC tape/optical disks created with this
parameter value can be processed by IMON.
- File copies produced with this parameter value
can be read by the host using SYSUPD.
- Files in SSW format are structured with:
a) file type SAM,
b) record format FIX,
c) data type TRANSP,
d) record size (block length) 2048 bytes.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS FILE-7 +
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEEP KEEP FILE STRUCTURE
This parameter value creates a 1:1 copy in the
directions
+--------------+
! !
+-- ! local disk !
! ! !
! +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- The parameter value is not possible for
CYC files.
- File attributes (especially file type and
data type) are retained. For exceptions see
below.
- For the target file on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of required copies file is set
to default 0 (zero),
c) the service process of the source file is not
assigned to the target file.
POST CREATE POST PROCESSING FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file creating
Post-Processing format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
+-- ! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! ! carrier !
! +--------------+ +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- This parameter value is only allowed for PAM
file if a service process exists.
- The target file is a file in
Post-Processing format with non-compressed data
(SAM/TRANSP or SAM/TEXTNCMP).
- The target file attributes are derived from the
copying information of the source file (see
DISP FILE output block COPY INFORMATION).
- The copy block length determines the block
length for the local tape/optical disk, but not
for a remote tape.
- The number of copies made is incremented by 1 if
the target file is on local tape/local optical
disk/remote data carrier and the number of
requested copies is > 0 (zero).
- If the target file is on local disk, then:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
- Reformatting is controlled via the data type or
is performed independently of the data type by a
service process, if one exists (see DISP FILE
output block FILEGROUP INFORMATION).
- The following table provides an overview of
reformatting controlled by data type:
CP ! !
source ! Data type ! File and/or data
file ! 1) ! reformatting
-------+-------------+--------------------------
TRANS FILE-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SAM ! TRANSP ! No reformatting
! ! (copy of binary data)
! !
! TEXTNCMP ! No reformatting
! ! Character conversion
! ! (ASCII <--> EBCDIC.DF.03)
! ! dependent on target data
! ! carrier or according to
! ! link protocol
! ! (copy of text data)
! !
! TEXTCMP ! Data edited into
! ! printable characters
! ! according to the
! ! editing information
! ! stored in the file
! ! and character conversion
! ! (as above)
! !
-------+-------------+--------------------------
CYC ! ! Decomposition of cyclic
! ! structure for all data
! ! types
! ! (target file type SAM)
! ! Depending on copy record
! ! size, records in cyclic
! ! files may also be split
! !
! ! )
! TRANSP ! !
! TEXTNCMP ! > data reformatting
! TEXTCMP ! ! all as above
! ! )
! !
! MMLCMPR ! As for TEXTCMP but with
! ! addition of conversion
! ! into a format that can
! ! be processed by text
! ! editors
! !
1) see output parameter data storage form of
command DISP FILE
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the retention period of the target file
in days. The following conventions must be observed:
- If no input is made for RETPER and COPMOD = POST, the copy
retention period of the source file is adopted implicitly as
retention period of the target file.
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TRANS FILE-9 -
MOD FILEAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to modify the access restrictions and/or the
number of safe copies in a file catalog.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD FILEAUT : FILE= <,AR= ,SAFCOP=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file whose catalog is to
be modified.
+,*,%,#
AR ACCESS RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the type of access restrictions.
Note:
- Any access restrictions not specified are reset
if they are set in the catalog.
NOCN NO CATALOG NAME
NOCR NO CATALOG RETENTION PERIOD
NODEL NO DELETE
NORD NO READ
NOWR NO WRITE
NOAR NO ACCESS RESTRICTION
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of safe copies
that have already been made.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FILEAUT-1 -
ACT FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FILE FEATURES
This commands activates features assigned to a certain file.
Prerequisites:
If the feature was previously not entered, the command will be rejected
The target file specified in the command must exist on the system disk.
Possible effects:
The data in the target file may be lost after this command.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for whom a feature will
be activated.
FEAT FEATURES
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT FILEFEAT-1 -
CAN FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE FEATURES
This command cancels features assigned to a file.
Prerequisites:
The feature to be canceled may not be active.
The target file must exist on the system disk.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which a feature will
be canceled.
FEAT FEATURES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FILEFEAT-1 -
DACT FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FILE FEATURES
This command deactivates features assigned to a certain file.
Prerequisites:
If the feature was previously not active, the command will be rejected.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which a feature will
be deactivated.
FEAT FEATURES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT FILEFEAT-1 -
DISP FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE FEATURES
This command displays the different features assigned to a certain
file. Together with the feature and its status, the name of the file
where the results of the assigned DISP FILEFEAT is stored.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FILEFEAT : FILE= [,FEAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which the assigned
DISP FILEFEAT will be displayed.
FEAT FEATURES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FILEFEAT-1 -
ENTR FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE FEATURES
This command enters feature(s) and assigns these feature(s) to a
targetfile. The result is stored in another file with the same
characteristics as the target file unless otherwise specified.
The result file name cannot be specified by the operator. It is
system internal defined in following manner "TARGET FILE NAME" + ".FLAM".
Prerequisites:
The file to which a feature is assigned, must already exist.
If the file -read application- is not supported by the system ,
the command will be rejected indicating that the application is
not supported.
Following files - read applications - are supported:
- IA.ICAMA
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= [,ACTION=] [,SIZE=] [,RECF=] ]
] ]
] [,RECSZ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which a feature is
entered.
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter specifies the assigned features
ACTION ADDITIONAL ACTIONS
This parameter specifies which additional action is done with the data
in the target file.
Possible effects can be that original data of the file is lost when the
entered feature is activated lateron.
REL RELEASE EXISTING FILE
The data in the target file is released after
successful feature execution.
NOREL NOT RELEASE EXISTING FILE
The data in the target file is kept after
successful feature execution.
Default: REL
SIZE RESULT FILE SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the result file. The size is
entered in number of PAM pages.
The default value depents on the target file:
- IA.ICAMA : 5000
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR FILEFEAT-1 +
ENTR FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECF RECORD FORMAT RESULT FILE
This parameter specifies the record format of the result file.
The default value is identical to the record format of the target file.
VAR VARIABLE FORMAT
FIX FIXED FORMAT
RECSZ RECORD SIZE RESULT FILE
This parameter specifies the record size of the result file. The record
size can be entered in bytes. The size must be minimum 80 bytes and
maximum 32768 bytes (32K).
The default value is identical to the record size of the target file
E N D
ENTR FILEFEAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR FILEPSW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE PASSWORD
This command enters a session file password.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR FILEPSW ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR FILEPSW-1 -
DISP FILETEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILETEXT
This command displays the content of a file.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file must be a sequential dataset with variable
record length.
- The records contain only ASCII characters (see note).
Notes:
- Unprintable characters are substituted by ..
- Continuation lines of a record start with >>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FILETEXT : FILE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter identifies the dataset for display with its
filename.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FILETEXT-1 -
CAN FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS
This command cancels FTAM file transfer(s).
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a FTAM file
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is checked against the actual jobstate (see output
parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are cancelled.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are cancelled.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FILETRF-1 -
DISP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS
This command displays data of FTAM file transfer(s) and comprises
the functions:
- list of all FTAM file transfers giving main job data.
- list of all job data for one FTAM file transfer.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is ignored.
- If X is entered, a list of all FTAM file transfers is displayed.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are displayed.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FILETRF-1 -
STOP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP FILE TRANSFERS
This command stops FTAM file transfer(s). The jobstate changes to
interrupted (see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
Prerequisites:
- the interruption of the FTAM file transfer(s) must be possible
(see output parameter interrupt possible of command DISP FILETRF).
- the FTAM file transfer(s) must be activ.
(see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF)
Input format
-
] ]
] STOP FILETRF : JN= [,INTRPER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
transfer.
Notes:
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are stopped
INTRPER INTERRUPT PERIOD
This parameter specifies the interrupt period for FTAM file
transfer(s) suggested by the operator. The value is entered
in the form HH-MM (H=Hour, M=Minute). As the value is
transferred in the form 2 to the power of x seconds by the
FTAM protocol, the entered value is calculated in seconds
and rounded up. Due to this exact values cannot be produced.
Default : 10 minutes
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP FILETRF-1 -
ACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command activates the filename segment protection
for one element or for all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT FNS : [FNS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment
for which the relevant function is to be carried out.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT FNS-1 -
CAN FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command cancels elements of the filename segment
table which were created retrospectively.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must be an external element
(created with ENTR FNS).
- Update must be switched on.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN FNS : FNS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FNS-1 -
DACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command deactivates the filename segment protection for
one element or all elements of the filename segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The file name segment element must exist.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT FNS : [FNS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file name segment.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT FNS-1 -
DISP FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command displays one or all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FNS : [FNS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FNS-1 -
ENTR FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command is used to add new elements to the file name segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
- The specified element may not exist.
- The table should not be full.
- The syntax of the specified element must be correct.
- Update must be switched on.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR FNS : FNS= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR FNS-1 -
CAN FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command cancels a frame handler reference.
Prerequisites:
- No depending NUC may exist for the frame handler.
- If a logical frame handler shall be cancelled, no packet data
path may exist for the assigned V5CHANID.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FRAMEHD-1 -
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command creates a frame handler reference.
1. CR FRAMEHD - CON CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
2. CR FRAMEHD - LOG LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
1. Input format
CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
In this path a concentrating frame handler is created.
This frame handler type consists of one (Simplex-Mode)
or two (Duplex-Mode) frame handler modules.
The Bd-ports of the frame handler modules are specified
by the parameters EQN1 and EQN2.
A frame handler with TYPE=CON can concentrate packet
data frames of DLUs and logical V5-communication channels
within EWSD.
-
] ]
] CR FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= [,TYPE=] ,MODE= <,EQN1= ,EQN2=> ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CONTCHK=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE FRAME HANDLER TYPE
This parameter specifies the frame handler type.
CON CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
Default: CON
MODE CONNECTION MODE
This parameter specifies the connection mode of the
Bd-channels of the frame handler to the packet handler.
NUC NAILED-UP BD-CHANNEL
SWITCHED SWITCHED BD-CHANNEL
EQN1 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 1
This parameter specifies the Bd-channel on the frame
handler module, which shall be assigned to equipment
number 1 of a concentrating frame handler.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FRAMEHD-1 +
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- The Bd-channel of the frame handler module has to be
connected with a PBX line of the category FHBD.
- The specified frame handler module must not be
assigned to an other frame handler reference.
a-b-c-d
This unit specifies the time stage group.
This unit specifies the line trunk group.
This unit specifies the line trunk unit of the frame
handler module.
d: PORT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the port number of the Bd-channel.
This parameter specifies the Bd-channel on the frame
handler module, which shall be assigned to equipment
number 2 of a concentrating frame handler.
Prerequisites:
- The Bd-channel of the frame handler module has to be
connected with a PBX line of the category FHBD.
- The specified frame handler module must not be
assigned to an other frame handler reference.
a-b-c-d
handler module.
d: PORT NUMBER=
CR FRAMEHD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTCHK CONTINUITY CHECK
This parameter specifies the type of the continuity check
on the Bd-channel.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
MNGFR BOTHWAY MANAGEMENT FRAME
Default: MNGFR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FRAMEHD-3 +
CR FRAMEHD
LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
In this path a logical frame handler is created.
The frame handler reference of a logical frame handler
have to be assigned to a logical V5-communication channel
of a V5.2 interface via the parameters V5IF and V5CHANID.
The logical frame handler executes no further concentration
of packet data frames within EWSD.
Note:
- The Bd-channels of a logical frame handler are reserved
automatically.
Prerequisites:
- The specified V5IF must be a V5.2 interface.
- The specified V5CHANID have to exist.
- No other frame handler reference or BDSILCCH must be
assigned to the specified V5CHANID.
- All ports of the SILCs in the LTGs, which are connected
with the V5.2 interface, must be connected with PBX lines
of the category FHBD.
-
] ]
] CR FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= ,TYPE= ,MODE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CONTCHK=] [,NUMBDCH=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE FRAME HANDLER TYPE
This parameter specifies the frame handler type.
LOG LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
Default: CON
MODE CONNECTION MODE
This parameter specifies the connection mode of the
Bd-channels of the frame handler to the packet handler.
NUC NAILED-UP BD-CHANNEL
SWITCHED SWITCHED BD-CHANNEL
V5IF V5 INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the V5 interface number of a
V5.2 interface.
V5CHANID V5 CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the V5-channel identification
CR FRAMEHD-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR FRAMEHD
LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for a logical V5-communication channel, which shall be
assigned to a logical frame handler.
This parameter specifies the type of the continuity check
on the Bd-channel.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
Default: MNGFR
NUMBDCH NUMBER OF BD-CHANNELS
This parameter specifies the number of the Bd-channels
for a logical frame handler.
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FRAMEHD-5 -
DISP FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command displays frame handler reference data.
Additionally to the administered frame handler data the reserved
SILC ports for logical frame handlers and the connected DLUs and
logical V5-communication channels for concentrating frame handlers
are displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FRAMEHD-1 -
MOD FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command modifies frame handler reference data.
For a concentrating frame handler the parameters EQN1,
EQN2 and CONTCHK may be modified.
For a logical frame handler the parameters CONTCHK and
NUMBDCH may be modified.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],EQN1= ] ]
] ],EQN2= ] ;- ]
] MOD FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= -,CONTCHK= - ]
] ],NUMBDCH=] !' ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter modifies the assignment of equipment number 1
to a concentrating frame handler.
If only the new equipment number is entered (n/ ), a new
frame handler module will be assigned to the frame handler
reference.
If only the old equipment number is entered ( /o), an already
assigned frame handler module will be released.
New and old equipment number may not be entered together (n/o).
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FRAMEHD-1 +
MOD FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
handler module.
d: PORT NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the assignment of equipment number 2
to a concentrating frame handler.
If only the new equipment number is entered (n/ ), a new
frame handler module will be assigned to the frame handler
reference.
If only the old equipment number is entered ( /o), an already
assigned frame handler module will be released.
New and old equipment number may not be entered together (n/o).
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c-d
handler module.
d: PORT NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the type of the continuity check on
the Bd-channel.
The modification will be activated at the next built-up of
the Bd-channels.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
NUMBDCH NUMBER OF BD-CHANNELS
This parameter modifies the number of the Bd-channels for a
logical frame handler.
E N D
MOD FRAMEHD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC FRAMEHANDLER
The command starts traffic measurement of all existing frame handlers
at an exchange.
Traffic data are delivered separately for those frame handler modules
which are accessible at the recording time.
The existence of a frame handler is not necessary to start a measurement
job. However, no traffic data will be recorded unless a frame handler
exists.
Prerequisites :
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT.
- Only one frame handler measurement job can be started.
UNIT=OMT is not permissible for the REC FRAMEHD measurement.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC FRAMEHD : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC FRAMEHD-1 +
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
REC FRAMEHD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
- Interval times BEG are only permitted if at least one
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. BEG =
interval times, e.g. BEG = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
times only.
BEG with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval BEG, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC FRAMEHD-3 +
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC FRAMEHD-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command cancels functional O&M terminals.
Prerequisites:
- the functional O&M terminal must exist.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned to any device group.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned as the output device
of the deactivated output suppression.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN FUOMT : FUOMT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN FUOMT-1 -
CR FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command creates functional O&M terminals to which a physical O&M
terminal is assigned at the same time; there is the option of assigning
a second O&M terminal as an alternative device.
Prerequisite:
- the functional device may not already exist.
- a physical device must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR FUOMT : FUOMT= ,OMT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Notes:
- the primary device must not be an alternative device.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR FUOMT-1 -
SEL FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS
This command selects a table of functional O&M terminals.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SEL FUOMT : OMT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a real (physical) terminal or a real
terminal and an alternative terminal.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
If parameter value a is specified, all
O&M terminals are displayed for which the
specified terminal is entered as first or
second O&M terminal.
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
If parameter values a and b are specified,
the O&M terminals are displayed which are
assigned to the terminal stated in the
first information unit as first terminal
and to the terminal stated in the second
information unit as alternative terminal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL FUOMT-1 -
DISP FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command displays a table of functional O&M terminals and their
assignment to physical terminals. A selection of functional terminals or
all functional terminals can be output.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP FUOMTLNK-1 -
MOD FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command modifies the assignment of physical O&M terminals to
functional O&M terminals. It can be executed for two or more functional
terminals provided that they are assigned the same combination of real
devices.
Prerequisite:
- the functional O&M terminals must exist.
- the physical terminals must exist.
- the specified original combination of physical O&M terminals must be
assigned to the functional O&M terminal.
- the combination of O&M terminals resulting from the modification may not
be identical with the existing one.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= ,OMT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Note:
- the primary device must not be an alternate device.
n/o
n/
/o
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD FUOMTLNK-1 -
ACT GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE GENERATION
This command activates a blocked File generation.
The generation must have been created by command ENTR GEN or
MOD DBSIZE.
The completeness of the generation and the validity of all files of the
generation will be checked.
The generation will be set VALID and introduced into the system immediately by
recovery if necessary. The necessary recovery level will be ascertained
automatically. It results of the differenz of generation files to the current
generation.
This command is part of the file generation concept of CP113.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT GEN : [GEN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GEN NAME OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be activated.
If no generation is specified, the list of generations will be searched
for a suitable generation.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT GEN-1 -
CAN GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GENERATION
With this command, file generations stored on disk are deleted logically
and physically. All files of the specified generation are marked as
being not associated with the generation and files which do not belong
to any other generation are physically deleted. Before this is done,
the generation list is specified and an acknowledgment requested.
The list of the physically deleted files is output.
A check is made whether the generation to be deleted is not identical
with the current one and whether it is not the only valid golden
generation.
Log files which belong to a generation are not deleted.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN GEN : GEN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be deleted. It is not
permissible to specify the current generation.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN GEN-1 -
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY GENERATION
This command copies either all files of a generation or only the
semipermanent files to disk or tape/optical disk. Only the current
generation, i.e. the loaded generation whose phase (code and data) is
active, can be copied to disk. Non-current generations, e.g. safeguarding
generations stored on disk can only be copied to tape / optical disk.
If a generation is copied to tape/optical disk, a modified generation
list (consisting of only one entry for the generation to be saved) is
also transferred to tape/optical disk.
The type of the generation to be created (command parameters TYPE=
GOLDEN,BACKUP) can be administrated.
If all files of a generation are copied, the destination generation is
of type backup (BACKUP) or golden (GOLDEN) and is set to valid (VALID).
If only the semipermanent data is copied, the destination generation is
of type fixpoint (FIX) and is set to blocked (BLOCKED).
A generation on tape/optical disk is assigned the same validity status it
has on disk.
The validity flag can be changed with the command MOD GEN.
COPY GEN is an essential part of the system for APS safeguarding: it can
be used to create safeguarding generations on tape/optical disk or disk.
For APS safeguarding, a distinction must be made between an initial
installation generation which is created with ENTR INSTGEN, and
a database extension which is performed with MOD DBSIZE. UPD GEN
belongs to the disk debugging procedures.
A generation is a consistent, self-contained subset of the EWSD system files
which are required for the operation of an EWSD switching center. One such
file can be assigned to several generations.
Each generation is assigned a generation name. This generation name is a
character string consisting of 8 digits.
All generations of a switching system are listed in a special system file,
i.e. SY.GENLIST, which is not assigned to any generation. The entries, i.e.
the generations that exist in the system, are in the sequence in which
a fallback, if any, is to take place. In general, new generations precede
elder generations. A maximum of 31 generations can be administrated.
Safeguarding generations are generations which can be created by a special
safeguarding action from the current, i.e. the loaded generation.
The following table indicates which files/file types belong to which type
of safeguarding generation:
File | Fixpoint | Snapshot | Remarks
(file type) |on disk |on tape / |on disk |on tape /|
| |opt. disk | |opt. disk|
-------------|----------|----------| ---------|---------|--------------------
SY.GENLIST | | * | | * |On tape, the SY.
| | | | |GENLIST has only
| | | | |one entry, no
| | | | |generation file
SY.INSTALL | | | | * |no generation
| | | | |file
SY.SEMILIB | * | * | * | * |
SY.SIMP | * | * | * | * |only in exchanges
| | | | |with CCNC
SY.TASKLIB | z | | * | * |Z: file is merely
SY.LOADLIB.LA| z | | * | * |assigned to safe-
SY.LOADLIB.CA| z | | * | * |guarding generation,
SY.LOADLIB.MA| z | | * | * |and not physically
SY.PSW.T<nnn>| z | | * | * |copied; it also
| | | | |belongs to
| | | | |other generations
Legend: * = physical copy of file
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 COPY GEN-1 +
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following types of safeguarding generations exist:
Fixpoint : Safeguarding generation consists physically only of the
semipermanent data, i.e. of the files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP;
all other files are identical with those of the current
generation and are only logically assigned to it.
Backup : Safeguarding generation consists of physical copies of all
files of an original generation;
Golden : Safeguarding generation is a backup having been tested with
startup by the operator.
A generation may have one of the validity flags BLOCKED, VALID and
invalid. The validity flag can be modified with the command MOD GEN,
but only from BLOCKED to VALID and vice versa. A generation on tape/
optical disk is assigned the same status it has on disk. With this command,
the type of a safeguarding generation can also be changed from BACKUP to
GOLDEN. This is useful especially in case one wants to adjust a generation
which was retransferred from tape/optical disk with TRANS SYFILE for a
specified purpose.
The validity status determines the startup capability of a generation. It
is of significance for all generation types. Only a valid generation can
be selected for the automatic fallback. A non-valid or blocked generation
is not used for automatic fallbacks.
However, a manual startup with blocked generations is always possible.
Generations which are to be copied to tape/optical disk are initially
copied to disk, if they contain the current semipermanent database
(SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP, if existing). Source generations having such a
property are either the current generation or generations originating from
merging a non-current generation with the current semipermanent database
("semicurrent" generation). The purpose of this procedure is to generate a
fixpoint of the semipermanent database on disk within a short period of time.
In a second step, this intermediate generation is copied to tape/optical disk.
On the other hand, source generations containing a non-current semipermanent
database are copied directly to tape/optical disk without using an
intermediate copy on disk.
In case the intermediate generation is not required to be permanent
(i.e., the source is semipermanent or OUTPUT = TAPMOD has been specified),
this intermediate generation is temporary, i.e. it appears to be an
invalid fixpoint generation.
Type and Validity of created generation on tape/optical disk
------------------------------------------------------------
(VSN /= SYSVSN) with COPY GEN
----------------------------
| | created with
Source generation | Destination generation | command parameters
TYPE / Actuality | TYPE / VALIDITY | OUTPUT / TYPE
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
NONE non-current | FIX * | FIX -
NONE non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
FIX non-current | FIX * | FIX -
| |
BACKUP non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
MERGED non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
GOLDEN non-current | GOLDEN * | GEN GOLDEN
| |
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
arbitrary current | BACKUP VALID | GEN/TAPMOD BACKUP
type | |
arbitrary current | GOLDEN VALID | GEN/TAPMOD GOLDEN
type | |
arbitrary current | FIX BLOCKED | FIX -
type | |
| |
Legend: * = Validity of copy on tape/optical disk is taken to be the
same as that of source generation
TYPE = TYPE
BACKUP = BACKUP
COPY GEN-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GOLDEN = GOLDEN
VALIDITY = VALIDITY
VALID = VALID
BLOCKED = BLOCKED
OUTPUT = OUTPUT
GEN = GEN
TAPMOD = TAPMOD
FIX = FIX
MERGED = generated by MERGE GEN
For copy to tape, other OUTPUT/TYPE parameter combinations of the
command COPY GEN than those listed in the third column are not possible.
If the current source generation is specified for COPY GEN, and
OUTPUT = FIX or OUTPUT = GEN, then also a permanent copy on disk
is generated besides the copy on tape/optical disk.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] COPY GEN : OUTPUT= [,VSN=] [,GEN=] [,TYPE=] [,VERIFY=] ]
] ]
] [,RETPER=] [,REWIND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUTPUT OUTPUT MODE OF COPYGEN
This parameter specifies whether all files of the generation or only
the semipermanent data (SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP) are to be copied or
the total current generation is to be copied directly to tape/optical
disk without generating a permanent copy on disk. If only the
semipermanent data are to be copied, the parameter TYPE is ignored.
FIX SAVE SEMILIB/SIMP ONLY
Copies only the semipermanent data.
GEN SAVE WHOLE GENERATION
Copies all files of the generation.
TAPMOD SAVE GEN TO TAPE/OPT.DISK ONLY
Copies the current generation to tape/optical disk
immediately.
In contrary to the other possible methods for
creating a copy of the current generation on tape/
optical disk (OUTPUT= FIX/GEN, VSN =
Volume Serial Number of the tape/optical disk
used), no permanent copy of the current generation
on disk prior to the final copy on tape/optical
disk will be made. Only that part of the current
generation which contains its semipermanent data
is put into a temporary copy on disk.
Specification of a generation different from the
current one is not allowed. VSN is mandatory.
With OUTPUT=TAPMOD, it is not possible to
generate a fixpoint (= semipermanent data only)
on tape/optical disk.
The resulting copy on tape/optical disk of
TYPE=BACKUP/GOLDEN is set to VALID.
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER LIST
This parameter list specifies whether the generation is to be copied
on disk (VSN=SYSVSN) or tape/optical disk. Up to 5 tapes/optical
disks can be specified in the list:
VSN = <tape1> & <tape2> & <tape3> & <tape4> & <tape5>
(<tape1>...<tape5>: Volume Serial Number of tapes/optical disks).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 COPY GEN-3 +
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It is not allowed to specify both VSN of tapes/optical disks and
SYSVSN in the list described above (VSN list).
The specification of VSNs of several tapes/optical disks before
starting the copy process to tape/optical disk allows COPY GEN
execution with automatic write access to continuation tapes/optical
disks. This is useful if the generation to be saved is very large.
The tapes/optical disks can be mounted on arbitrary tape/optical
disk units; not mounted tapes/optical disks will be requested by the
system. The system will also check if the initialization of the
continuation tapes/optical disks is identical with that of the first
one.
NOTE: for copy to tape/optical disk:
The copy of a generation may only occur either on tape OR on
optical disk (e.g. if copy has been started on tape then the
continuation medium must be tape!).
A compound of both mediums is not allowed!
The first tape/optical disk specified in the VSN list, must be
initialized before the copy to tape/optical disk starts. For this
action one has to use the following command:
For tape:
<INIT MT:VSN=<tape VSN>,CD=EBC,DENS=6250,MTD=<#tape device>;
For optical disk (MOD):
<INIT MO:VSN=<mod VSN>,CD=EBC,MOD=<#mod device>;
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be copied. The default
value is the current generation.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
TYPE TYPE OF SAVE GENERATION
This parameter can be used (for OUTPUT = GEN or OUTPUT = TAPMOD)
to select whether a backup or golden generation is to be created. The
default value is BACKUP. For OUTPUT = FIX, the parameter TYPE is
not evaluated.
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
Creates a backup generation.
If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent backup
generation on disk is created, all other
fixpoint and backup generations on disk are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
Creates a golden generation.
If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent golden
generation on disk is created, all other
COPY GEN-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
fixpoint, backup and golden generations are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
Default: BACKUP
VERIFY VERIFY CHECKSUM
This parameter specifies whether a checksum audit is to be initiated
during COPY GEN. If a copy on disk is created with this option,
checksum audits are initiated both for the generation files to be
copied and for their copies. In this way, the copying process disk to
disk can be checked. If a copy on tape/optical disk is created,
checksum audits are initiated for the source generation files, and the
calculated checksums, together with the copies, are transferred to
tape/optical disk. When writing to tape/optical disk, the consistency
of the checksum is not checked against the tape/optical disk contents.
This is not possible until the tape/optical disk contents have been
copied back to disk with the aid of command TRANS SYFILE using its
verify function.
If the result of the checksum check is negative, COPY GEN is aborted
with an error message. If, on the one hand, checksum errors are
reported for the source generation, the latter has been found to be
faulty before the start of COPY GEN. If, on the other hand, checksum
errors are reported for the destination generation, errors within
COPY GEN have occurred.
See also the description of the command parameter VERIFY belonging
to the command TRANS SYFILE.
YES ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
Y ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
NO DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
N DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
Default: YES
This parameter specifies the retention period of the copy on tape/
optical disk in days, taken from the creation date. During this time
period the tape/optical disk copy is protected against erasure. If no
value or 0 days is given, the tape/optical disk copy is not protected
at all. If VSN is not specified or VSN = SYSVSN, i.e. if only a
copy on disk is required, this parameter is ignored.
REWIND REWIND TAPE
This parameter specifies whether the tape/optical disk should be
rewound/reset after execution of the command COPY GEN or not. The
default value is YES.
If REWIND = YES is specified, the tape/optical disk is rewound/
reset and released after execution of the command COPY GEN. Otherwise
the tape/optical disk is only released and
- subsequent commands (e.g. TRANS FILE) are allowed to continue
writing on the tape/optical disk mounted for COPY GEN
- access of following commands to this tape/optical disk can be
specified either by the tape/optical disk VSN or by the VSN of the
first tape/optical disk used for COPY GEN (File Group Name).
Therefore one is not forced to evaluate the actual VSN for following
commands, but can always refer to the static File Group Name.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 COPY GEN-5 +
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
YES REWIND TAPE
Y REWIND TAPE
NO DONT REWIND TAPE
N DONT REWIND TAPE
E N D
COPY GEN-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERATION
This command displays file generation information for specific files or
for file generations.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP GEN : [DISPL=] [,GEN=] [,LIB=] [,VSN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DISPL DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the information to be output.
GEN GENERATION
Displays the generations with which a file given
in LIB is associated. LIB is mandatory,
GEN and VSN are ignored.
FILES FILES
Displays all files of the generation specified
in GEN. If GEN is not specified, the file
list of the currently loaded generation
is output. LIB and VSN are ignored.
LIST GENERATION LIST
Outputs the entire generation list in edited form
if GEN is not input, otherwise the desired
generation. LIB is ignored.
If VSN is specified and VSN is not identical
with SYSVSN, the information of the generation
list is output from tape/optical disk, otherwise
from disk.
Entries VSN000 and VSN001 are not permissible.
Default: LIST
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation, the information of which is to
be output.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies the library (i.e. generation file),
whose generation membership is to be output.
This parameter specifies whether either the generation information
of the disk or the tape/optical disk is to be output.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP GEN-1 -
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GENERATION
This command creates a new file generation. It is part of the file
generation concept of CP113.
A file generation is a summary of all systemfiles of an APS.
This command enables to change or introduce systemfiles. Files that
are not changed will be taken from the current generation to the new.
It is possible to exclude GP-files (SY.PSW.nnn).
For change of CP-loadlib (SY.TASKLIB) there are two possibilities:
- Take over of database from current generation
(inverse module exchange)
- No copy of database (REGEN-APS-change)
Depending on the state of the system the new generation will be set
valid and if necessary introduced into the system by recovery
immediately. Or it will be set blocked. The recovery level necessary
for bringing up the new generation will be ascertained automatically.
It results from the changed libraries.
The parameters of this command can be repeated via continuation mode.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR GEN : [LIB=] [,COPYDB=] [,EXCL=] [,FILEEX=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library which is to be taken into the new
generation. The library has to be a Core Image format. The type of
the library will be ascertained automatically. The parameter can be
repeated by continuation mode. The maximum of numbers of inputs is
dependent on the type of library:
- resident CP-SW(Tasklib) (1)
- non resident software (Loadlib.L) (1)
- non resident masks (Loadlib.M) (1)
- non resident command descriptions (Loadlib.C) (1)
- loadlib for peripheral software (20)
Non resident CP-libraries can be delta or basis libraries.
The libraries have to be available on disk. They have to be doubled
and non generation files. File names beginning with KS. or SY. are
not allowed.
+,*,%
COPYDB COPY DATABASE
This parameter specifies whether the database of the current
generation should be copied to the new semilib (inverse module
exchange) or not (REGEN-APS-exchange).
This parameter is allowed only, if the parameter LIB specifies a
library for resident CP-software (tasklib).
With COPYDB=YES it is possible to exclude single modules by
EXCL parameter.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR GEN-1 +
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPYDB=NO is allowed on the non switching system during system
split only.
NO NO COPY OF DATABASE
YES COPY ACTUAL DATABASE
Default: YES
EXCL EXCLUDE MODULE
This parameter specifies either a semipermanent datamodule or a
loadmodule of a CP-loadlib. The specified module (respectively the
data of the specified module) will not be taken from the current
generation to the new.
This parameter is dependent on the type of the library specified by
the LIB parameter.:
- Library for resident CP-software (tasklib)
Only allowed for COPYDB=YES.
The data of the specified datamodule (T/P-module) will not be
copied to the new semilib. It is possible to specify a maximum of 20
modules in continuation mode.
- CP-loadlib
Only allowed if the given loadlib is a delta library. The
specified loadmodule will not be taken to the loadlib of the new
generation. It is possible to specify a maximum of 50 modules in
continuation mode.
- GP-loadlib
This parameter is not allowed.
FILEEX EXCLUDE FILE
This parameter specifies a PSW-Lib of the current generation that
should not be taken to the new generation. It is possible to repeat
this parameter in continuation mode up to 10 times.
+,*,%
E N D
ENTR GEN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GENERATION
This command creates a new generation which contains the code of that
source generation specified as GENTASKL and the semipermanent data
of that one specified as GENSEMIL. The files are solely assigned to
the new generation, that is, they are not copied physically.
Subsequently, the newly created generation is set to blocked.
With command MOD GEN, such a generation can be set to VALID and from
VALID to BLOCKED subsequently.
One of the two source generations must be the loaded generation that
is in operation. The first six characters of the generation names of both
source generations must be identical.
This command can be used to save an APS from backup by (a) combining it with
a saved Semilib in the case of an APS whose Semilib is destroyed but whose
code is O.K., or (b) by combining it with code files in the case of an APS
whose code is destroyed (by patches) but whose Semilib is O.K.
Input format
-
] ]
] MERGE GEN : GENTASKL= ,GENSEMIL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GENTASKL FILE GENERATION OF TASKLIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose code is to be
transferred into the generation to be newly created, i.e., whose
tasklib, loadlibs and PSWlibs are to be used.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
GENSEMIL FILE GENERATION OF SEMILIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose semipermanent
data are to be transferred into the generation to be newly created,
i.e., whose files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP are to be used.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GEN-1 +
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
MERGE GEN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GENERATION
This command changes the validity flag and the type of a generation.
The latter is possible only if the specified generation is
of type backup.
Fixpoints and combined (merged) generations are always blocked at the time
they are created (BLOCKED), backups and golden generations always valid
(VALID).
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
The valid flag defines the startup capability of a generation. It is of sig-
nificance for both current and non-current generations as well as for all
generation types. A valid generation can be selected for the automatic fall-
back. An invalid or blocked generation is not used for automatic fallbacks.
A manual startup, however, is also possible with blocked generations.
In the following cases, a required change of validity is rejected:
- The generation is neither blocked nor valid
- The generation is a valid current generation
- The generation is the initial generation
- The generation is the only valid golden generation on the disk
The change of type of generations which are of other type than of
backup is rejected.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD GEN : GEN= ,VALIDITY= [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation whose validity flag is to be
changed. The current generation must not be specified.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
VALIDITY VALIDITY OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies whether a generation is to be set to blocked
or to valid.
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
BLOCKED SET GENERATION BLOCKED
The generation will be set to blocked.
VALID SET GENERATION VALID
The generation will be set to valid.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GEN-1 +
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE NEW TYPE OF GENERATION
This parameter can be used to change the type of a generation
simultaneously with its validity. If no value is specified, the type
will be left unchanged.
It is only allowed to specify TYPE = GOLDEN for a generation of
initial type backup.
This parameter value is not permitted, i.e.
it is not allowed to change a generation of
TYPE = GOLDEN into BACKUP.
A generation of TYPE = BACKUP is changed
to GOLDEN.
E N D
MOD GEN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
UPD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE GENERATION
This command is called after a double disk failure or when the Semilib of
the current generation is defective, invalid or no longer exists, in
order to restore an executable generation on disk and to continue system
operations.
UPD GEN can be used for saving the current status of the semipermanent
data during the debugging procedures for disk failures.
If the Semilib exists on disk after a double disk failure, the Semilib is
checked for compatibility with the semipermanent main memory area and is
then overwritten with the contents of the main memory area. If SY.SEMI-
LIB does not exist, it is newly created and overwritten with the contents
of the semipermanent main memory area of the CP (mass update).
UPD GEN does not perform a reconstruction of CCNC-Semilib SY.SIMP. Before
a command is executed, a check is made whether system file SY.SIMP, which
contains semipermanent CCNC data, is compatible with the current status of
the semipermanent main memory area in the CP.
Incompatibility may occur when, after a failure of the exchange, a SY.SIMP
with an old status has been read in with the aid of TRANS SYFILE. The
status of SY.SIMP is obsolete if CCNC commands have been processed between
the dump of this file and the failure. The SY.SIMP used before the failure
thus contains more recent entries which do not exist in the SY.SIMP read
in, but are in accordance with the current status of SY.SEMILIB. The SY.SIMP
read in is then not compatible with the current SY.SEMILIB.
The compatibility check consists of a checksum comparison between the
SY.SIMP read in (old status) and the checksum of the current SY.SIMP
stored in the main memory.
After a forced termination during the reconstruction with a recovery level
higher than a newstart of the processes without code or data reloading,
restoring the SY.SEMILIB is no longer possible. In this case, a recovery
with a safeguarding generation and an off-line disk reconstruction must be
carried out.
For general information on the generation concept, see command descrip-
tion for COPY GEN.
Input format
-
] ]
] UPD GEN ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 UPD GEN-1 -
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE
This command activates the recording function for grade-of-service data
for the entire exchange.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The traffic data are output to MDD file every 15 minutes within
the selected measurement intervals.
UNIT=OMT is not permissible
for the grade-of-service measurement.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC GOS : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC GOS-1 +
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
REC GOS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC GOS-3 +
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC GOS-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR
This command activates the recording function for the load data of the GP.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs REC GP and REC LTG may be entered at the
same time.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC GP : LTG= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG for which traffic
data have to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all LTGs (LTG=X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY].
Notes:
- A maximum of 5 single LTGs or LTG number ranges, or a
combination of both (single and range), may be linked
per command.
a-b
a: TSG=
This information unit specifies the time stage group.
unit values.
b: LTG=
This information unit specifies the GP number.
unit values.
output.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC GP-1 +
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
REC GP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC GP-3 +
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
REC GP-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command cancels global title translation calling party address
conversion data.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- no calling party address conversion data is entered
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN GTCGPACD-1 -
DISP GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command displays the global title translation calling party address
conversion data of the concerned tree(s).
The command is stoppable with the STOP DISP command.
Notes:
- When no data was found for the query, the message "NO (MORE) DATA FOR
DISPLAY AVAILABLE" will be displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP GTCGPACD : TRID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP GTCGPACD-1 -
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command enters global title translation calling party address conversion
data for an existing digit tree in a gateway node.
Whenever a SCCP message is transferred to another network (in a gateway node),
it might be necessary to transform the calling party address (e.g. if we, as
gateway node, transfer a message from the national network to the international
network, we have to transform the national global title number to an
international number).
The calling party address depends on the following items:
- Translation type of the calling party address
- Numbering plan of the calling party address
- Nature of address of the calling party address
- The netwerk border to be crossed.
Prerequisites:
- The digit tree should first be created with the CR GTDIGTR
command.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= [,TTID=] [,NP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,NA=] [,DICON=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD-1 +
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier for the
modified global title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the TTID-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
command will be used for the modified global title.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the NP-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the NA-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
ENTR GTCGPACD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- insertion/append of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be inserted
or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code, from
the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=00492134
DICON=..R32XXS
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD-3 -
CAN GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command cancels a global title translation code point.
Prerequisites:
- Associated global title translation destinations have to be cancelled
prior to the execution of this command.
Notes:
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- there is still a destination assigned to this code point
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN GTCPT-1 -
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command creates a global title translation code point.
This code point contains the information required for global title translation
purposes.
This command should be executed prior to the global title translation desti-
nation commands.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR command should be executed prior to the execution of
this command.
Notes:
- the global digit pattern exists already
- the code point digits or a part of the code point digits already
exist, e.g. :
The code point with GTDIG = 1234 already exists.
An attempt to create a code point with GTDIG = 12 or
GTDIG = 123456 will be rejected.
- a GTT database table is saturated
Input format
-
] ]
] CR GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,TTID=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ND=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTCPT-1 +
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be inserted
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same NP-value as given in the
CR GTDIGTR will be used.
global title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same NA-value as given in the
CR GTCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same TTID-value as given in the
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
It is only applicable for global titles with TTID=IMSI. The
parameter is used by internal applications (e.g. traffic data recording)
to discriminate the destination of the global title without analysing
the global title digits.
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTCPT-3 -
DISP GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command displays the global title translation code point.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the code point information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP GTCPT : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
If the parameter is omitted, all the code points of the concerned
TRID will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP GTCPT-1 -
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command merges a global title translation code point.
Parallel code points are code points that have all but their last digit
in common. If such code points ( and their associated destination
information ) exist, merging cancels those parallel code points (
and the associated destination ) and creates a new code point with a new
destination.
Compared with the parallel code points, the new code point has the
parallel code points digit combination, shortened by the last digit.
The digit combination of the new code point is given in the GTDIG
parameter.
The new code point can have one of the following destination types :
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- foreign route, i.e. signaling point in a foreign area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must have been created.
- The global title translation code points to be merged must have been created.
- The global title translation destinations of the code points to be
merged, must have been created.
- The particular destination route ( e.g. a translator service group )
must have been created in the SCCP database.
Notes:
- no parallel code points exist
- one or more parallel code points do not have associated destination
information
- one or more parallel code points have associated destination
information that requires retranslation in the own node
- the particular destination route does not exist in the SCCP
database
- the new code point exists already
- a specific global title translation database table is saturated
1. MERGE GTCPT - FOREIGN FOREIGN ROUTE
2. MERGE GTCPT - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
3. MERGE GTCPT - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
4. MERGE GTCPT - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
5. MERGE GTCPT - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
6. MERGE GTCPT - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
FOREIGN ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in a foreign
area as a global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified destination point code must have been created.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= ]
] ]
] [,SSID=] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-1 +
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ND=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
FOREIGN FOREIGN ROUTE
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
MERGE GTCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT1=
Default: 0
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT2=
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT3=
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
Default: INAT0
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the subsystem identification.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-3 +
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
MERGE GTCPT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-5 +
MERGE GTCPT
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter is used by internal applications
(e.g. traffic data recording)
Default: NATOWN
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
MERGE GTCPT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
as a global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified subsystem must have been created.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= ]
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ND=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
signaling point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-7 +
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
account )
a[-b[-c]]
Default: 0
Default: INAT0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
MERGE GTCPT-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-9 +
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
MERGE GTCPT-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-11 +
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG has to exist. For this purpose, the CR LTG command has
to be executed prior to the MERGE GTCPT command.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= ]
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ND=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
signaling point.
MERGE GTCPT-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
account )
This parameter specifies the LTG a message has to be relayed to by
the CP.
a-b
Default: 0
Default: INAT0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-13 +
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
MERGE GTCPT-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-15 +
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
MERGE GTCPT-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point as a
Prerequisites :
- The specified LTRID must have been created.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TTID=] [,ND=] ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
RETRANS RETRANSLATION IN OWN NODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-17 +
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
MERGE GTCPT-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
LTRID LINKED TRANSLATOR IDENTIF.
This parameter specifies the linked translator identification.
RDIG RETRANSLATION DIGIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the first digit to be retranslated in the
own node.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-19 +
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GTCPT-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a
Prerequisites:
- The subsystem group must have been created.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] ]
] ]
] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,ND=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-21 +
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
This parameter specifies the subsystem group.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
MERGE GTCPT-22 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-23 +
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
Default: NATOWN
MERGE GTCPT-24 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-25 +
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as a
Prerequisites:
- The translator service group must have been created.
-
] ]
] MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= ]
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ND=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP
signaling point.
account )
MERGE GTCPT-26 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies the translator service group.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-27 +
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
MERGE GTCPT-28 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MERGE GTCPT-29 +
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
MERGE GTCPT-30 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command modifies the global title translation code point.
Omitted parameters will not be taken into account, i.e. they keep their
current values.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR and CR GTCPT commands should be executed prior to
the execution of this command.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= <,DICON= ,NP= ,NA= ,TTID= ,ND=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTCPT-1 +
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ : The digit values following this control character are to beinserted
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDR. INDICATOR
MOD GTCPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the new network discriminator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTCPT-3 -
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command splits a global title translation code point.
Starting from an existing code point, NUM new global title code
points will be made. Compared to the old code point, the new code points
all have 1 different extra digit, ranging from 0 to ( NUM - 1 ).
All new code points get the same destination information as was
associated with the old code point.
The old code point - and its associated destination information - is
cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must be created.
- The global title translation code point to be split must be created.
- The codepoint associated global title translation destination
information must be created.
Notes:
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
- the destination assigned to this code point requires retranslation
in the own node
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SPLIT GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,NUM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SPLIT GTCPT-1 +
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NUM NUMBER OF NEW CODEPOINTS
This parameter specifies the number of new codepoints.
It denotes :
- how many ( NUM ) new code points will be created
- the range of the extra digit : 0 to (NUM-1).
Default: 10
E N D
SPLIT GTCPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command cancels a global title translation destination.
Notes:
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN GTDEST-1 -
CR GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command creates a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible:
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- foreign route, i.e. signaling point in a foreign area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- the code point does not exist
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
- a destination exists already for this codepoint
1. CR GTDEST - FOREIGN FOREIGN ROUTE
2. CR GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
3. CR GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
4. CR GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
5. CR GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
6. CR GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
FOREIGN ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in a foreign area
as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-1 +
CR GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
a[-b[-c]]
Default: 0
CR GTDEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-3 +
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
CR GTDEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-5 +
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
CR GTDEST-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
to be executed prior to the CR GTDEST command.
-
] ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-7 +
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the CP.
a-b
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
CR GTDEST-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-9 +
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
own node.
CR GTDEST-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-11 +
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a global title
translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
CR GTDEST-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-13 +
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR GTDEST-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as
a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= [,SSID=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-15 +
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
CR GTDEST-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDEST-17 -
DISP GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command displays the global title translation destination information.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the destination information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP GTDEST : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
If the parameter is omitted, the associated destination information
of all codepoints of the concerned TRID will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP GTDEST-1 -
MOD GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command modifies a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible ( see CR GTDEST ).
Parameters are treated as in the CR GTDEST command :
- all mandatory parameters have to be entered
- the default values as defined will be taken into account.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- A global title translation destination must have been created for
the code point.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- the code point does not exist
- no destination exists for this codepoint
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
1. MOD GTDEST - FOREIGN FOREIGN ROUTE
2. MOD GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
3. MOD GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
4. MOD GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
5. MOD GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
6. MOD GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
FOREIGN ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a signaling point in a foreign
area as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,DPC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-1 +
MOD GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
account )
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
MOD GTDEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
ISUP ISDN USER PART
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-3 +
MOD GTDEST
FOREIGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
MOD GTDEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a signaling point in the own
area as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,DPC= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-5 +
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
a[-b[-c]]
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
MOD GTDEST-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-7 +
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a LTG processor number
Prerequisites:
to be executed prior to the MOD GTDEST command.
-
] ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,LTGNR= ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
MOD GTDEST-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
the CP.
a-b
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-9 +
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
MOD GTDEST-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
own node.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-11 +
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD GTDEST-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a subsystem group as a global
title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,SSG= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-13 +
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
DBC DEBIT CENTER
MOD GTDEST-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-15 +
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a translator service group as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
-
] ]
] MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,TRLG= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
MOD GTDEST-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDEST-17 +
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
E N D
MOD GTDEST-18 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command cancels a global title translation digit tree.
Prerequisites:
- Associated global title translation destinations, code points and
calling party address conversion data have to be cancelled prior to
the execution of this command.
- Retranslated code points linked to this translator identification
have to be cancelled prior to the execution of this command
( see parameter LTRID in the commands CR GTDEST, MOD GTDEST and
MERGE GTCPT ).
Notes:
- there are still global title translation calling party address
conversion data assigned to this translator identification
- there are still global title digit patterns associated with this
translator identification
- there are still retranslated global title code points linked to
this translator identification
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN GTDIGTR : TRID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN GTDIGTR-1 -
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command creates a global title translation digit tree.
When signalling points in other CCS7 networks than the own one have to be
addressed, a signalling point code cannot be used, because a signalling point in
one CCS7 network cannot address the signalling points of all other CCS7
networks. So a global title is needed in order to have a world wide address
capability.
The global title, which may be the international ISDN number of a mobile
subscriber for instance, cannot be used for direct routing by the MTP, but will
be translated to an appropriate signalling point code by the SCCP.
This signalling point code is derived
- by evaluating the parameters of the global title (TTID, NP, NA)
- by a digit translation.
Several translations can be necessary until the final destination is reached.
The global title translation function is only available in the CP.
This command should be executed prior to all other global title transla-
tion commands (except the DISP GTDIGTR command).
Notes:
- the translator identification already exists
- the associated translator identification-parameters are already
assigned to another translator identification
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred
- a GTT database table is saturated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR GTDIGTR : TRID= ,TTID= ,NP= ,NA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
certain digit tree.
This parameter specifies the translation type identification.
The TTID refers to the root of a digit tree.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR GTDIGTR-1 +
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan.
The first digit of the tree root is always the NP-digit.
This parameter specifies the nature of address indicator.
E N D
CR GTDIGTR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command displays the global title translation digit tree information.
The TTID, NP and NA parameters allow a selective display. When a
parameter is omitted, all the corresponding values will be taken into
account.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP GTDIGTR : TRID= [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the translation type identification.
The TTID refers to the root of a digit tree.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP GTDIGTR-1 +
DISP GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan.
This parameter specifies the nature of address indicator.
E N D
DISP GTDIGTR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command modifies the global title translation digit tree information.
Omitted parameters will not be taken into account.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR command should be executed prior to the execution of
this command.
Notes:
- the associated translator identification parameters are already
assigned to another translator identification
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD GTDIGTR : TRID= <,TTID= ,NP= ,NA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD GTDIGTR-1 +
MOD GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan.
This parameter specifies the new nature of address indicator.
E N D
MOD GTDIGTR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL HOLIDAY
This command cancels only one holiday.
The holiday can either be specified by DATE only
or by DATE and WDCAT.
Even if there are several entries for a date in the
holiday table, only one existing entry is canceled
with the CAN HOLIDAY command. If the date is to be
canceled completely the command must be entered
several times.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected if the holiday does not exist
or the time is not SECURE.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN HOLIDAY : DATE= [,WDCAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
The parameter DATE specifies the date of a holiday.
This parameter has 3 units.
The first unit means year. It has a range from 0 to 99.
The second unit means month. It has a range from 1 to 12.
The third unit means day. It has a range from 1 to 31.
For the first unit X is also allowed (it means all values
from 0 to 99).
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
unit values.
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
The parameter WDCAT specifies the weekday category of
a holiday.
There are only 3 possible values:
portion of a day (any value between 1 and 24 hours).
- HO for full holiday national. It means a day with
International holidays apply to all countries.
National holidays apply to one country.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN HOLIDAY-1 +
CAN HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CAN HOLIDAY-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HOLIDAY
This command displays holidays.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP HOLIDAY ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP HOLIDAY-1 -
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER HOLIDAY
This command enters holidays.
Prerequisite:
- The time must be certain.
Following types of holidays can be entered:
- 8 fixed international half holidays (category HH)
- 8 fixed international full holidays (category HO)
- 8 fixed national full holidays (category HN)
- 16 movable international full holidays per year (category HO)
for 30 years in advance.
- 16 movable national full holidays per year (category HN)
for 30 years in advance.
Note:
- When <year> = X is entered, the date entered is interpreted as
a fixed holiday applicable for every year and the date does
not change from year to year.
- When <year> is entered, the date is interpreted as a movable
holiday only applicable in the specified year.
- Movable holidays must be specified each year and the date
changes from year to year.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR HOLIDAY : DATE= ,WDCAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date of the holiday.
Note:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
Corresponds to <year>
unit values.
b: MONTH=
Corresponds to <month>
c: DAY=
Corresponds to <day>
This parameter specifies the weekday category.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR HOLIDAY-1 +
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HH HALF HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HO FULL HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HN FULL HOLIDAY NATIONAL
E N D
ENTR HOLIDAY-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command is used to activate the hard to reach
control feature for destinations.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT HTRCDEST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT HTRCDEST-1 -
DACT HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command is used to deactivate the hard to reach control
feature.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT HTRCDEST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT HTRCDEST-1 -
DISP HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command displays the hard to reach control criteria.
The output is determined by the parameter FUNC.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP HTRCDEST : FUNC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FUNC FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the information that will be
output.
The following values can be entered:
STATUS for output of status of Hard to Reach
Control Destination Function
MON for output of all Monitored Destinations.
CNTL for output of all Controlled Destinations
(Automatic and Manual).
MON&CNTL for output of all Monitored and Automatic
Controlled Destinations.
STATUS STATUS
The status of the hard to reach control function.
MON MONITORING
The list of information concerning monitoring.
CNTL CONTROLLING OF HARD TO REACH
The list of information concerning controlling.
Default: STATUS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP HTRCDEST-1 -
MOD HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command modifies the criteria for hard to reach control.
The values for the parameters FUNC, ASR, MINCALLS,
NDICO and CDICO will overwrite the old values.
The parameter CDICO can be entered alone without any other
parameter.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]FUNC= ] ]
] MOD HTRCDEST : -CDICO= [,NDICO=] [,ASR=] [,MINCALLS=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FUNC FUNCTION
This parameter specifies which function is required:
Monitoring and/or Controlling.
MON MONITORING
CNTL CONTROLLING
CDICO CANCEL DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter defines the digit combination that will be
canceled from control or monitoring lists.
NDICO NEW DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter defines digit combination to be monitored
and / or controlled.
ASR ANSWER SEIZURE RATIO THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the answer seizure ratio threshold
for the automatic recognition of hard to reach destinations.
To be recognized as a hard to reach destination, the answer
seizure ratio of a destination must be lower than or equal to
ASR.
MINCALLS MINIMUM OF CALLS PER 5 MIN
This parameter defines the number of calls that must be exceded
for a destination to be considered a hard to reach
destination.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD HTRCDEST-1 +
MOD HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
MOD HTRCDEST-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT
This command cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface or a statistic index.
Notes:
For the canceling of an object, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other call processing elements (trunk groups, DN-blocks, etc.)
for the same object:
In this case, the IACHASTA object itself is not deleted. Only the connection
between the specified element and the object is canceled.
2/ No further elements exist for the object and the object does not participate
(i.e. as the origin or destination) in an active IACHASTA registration point.
In this case, the object is immediately canceled.
3/ No further elements exist for the object but the object still participates
in an active registration point.
The command is rejected. All registration points for this object must be
canceled before the object itself can be canceled.
1. CAN IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CAN IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
3. CAN IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
4. CAN IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
5. CAN IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
6. CAN IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
7. CAN IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This parameter specifies a recorded announcement group.
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IACOBJ-1 +
CAN IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies a digital line unit.
CAN IACOBJ-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
The parameter DN refers to the first directory number of the directory
number block.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IACOBJ-3 +
CAN IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
The parameter DN refers to the pilot directory number of the private
branch exchange.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
CAN IACOBJ-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
assigned to a zone point.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
STAT STATISTIC INDEX
This parameter specifies a statistic index assigned to a zone point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IACOBJ-5 +
CAN IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies a trunk group number.
.
CAN IACOBJ-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
This parameter specifies a V5 interface.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IACOBJ-7 -
CR IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT
This command creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface or a statistic index.
This object can then be used as the origin or destination of an
IACHASTA registration point. The same object name can be used for
multiple call processing elements of the same or a different type.
1. CR IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CR IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
3. CR IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
4. CR IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
5. CR IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
6. CR IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
7. CR IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IACOBJ-1 +
CR IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
CR IACOBJ-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
number block.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IACOBJ-3 +
CR IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
branch exchange.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
CR IACOBJ-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IACOBJ-5 +
CR IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
.
CR IACOBJ-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IACOBJ-7 -
DISP IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT
This command displays IACHASTA objects. The output depends
on the input format used.
1. DISP IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. DISP IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
3. DISP IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
4. DISP IACOBJ - OBJ OBJECT
5. DISP IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
6. DISP IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
7. DISP IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
8. DISP IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a recorded announcement
group.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : ANGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACOBJ-1 +
DISP IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a digital line unit.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : DLU= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DISP IACOBJ-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a directory number block.
number block.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACOBJ-3 +
DISP IACOBJ
OBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
OBJECT
When a specific IACHASTA object name is entered, this input format
displays all elements (trunk groups, directory number blocks, ...)
connected to that object.
When the value "X" is entered for parameter OBJ, an alphabetical
list of all existing IACHASTA objects (i.e. names) is displayed.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : OBJ= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies an IACHASTA object name.
DISP IACOBJ-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a private branch exchange.
branch exchange.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACOBJ-5 +
DISP IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a statistic index
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : STAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DISP IACOBJ-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a trunk group.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : TGNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACOBJ-7 +
DISP IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a V5 interface.
-
] ]
] DISP IACOBJ : V5IF= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
DISP IACOBJ-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command activates an IACHASTA registration immediately or at the specified
date and time. The registration will be deactivated automatically if a
termination time is specified.
1. ACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. ACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format activates a ticketing registration.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT IACRG : OUT= [,ALLTRAFF=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
ALLTRAFF ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
This parameter specifies whether all traffic combinations must be
registered without reference to the IACHASTA registration point
database.
NO NOT ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
YES ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
Default: NO
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IACRG-1 +
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
a-b-c-d
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
ACT IACRG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format activates a metering registration.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,FILEEXT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
MET METERING
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is activated.
It must be identical to the value that was used for activation.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
a-b-c-d
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IACRG-3 +
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
FILEEXT FILE EXTENSION
This parameter specifies the file extension. It offers the
possibility of labeling the account files made for the activated
meter registrations.
E N D
ACT IACRG-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command deactivates an IACHASTA registration.
1. DACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. DACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format deactivates a ticketing registration.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT IACRG : OUT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT IACRG-1 +
DACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format deactivates a metering registration.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
MET METERING
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is deactivated. It must be identical to the value that was used for
activation.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
E N D
DACT IACRG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACRG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command displays the status and characteristics of all activated
IACHASTA registrations.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IACRG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACRG-1 -
CAN IACRGPT
ANONYM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command cancels an anonymous or named IACHASTA registration point
or removes an origin/destination object combination from a named
registration point.
Notes:
For the canceling of a registration point, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other origin/destination object combinations created
for the same named registration point.
In this case, the link with the named registration point is canceled,
the registration point itself is not deleted.
2/ No further origin/destination object combinations exist and no
registration is active for the specified registration point.
In this case, the registration point is immediately canceled.
3/ No further origin/destination object combinations exist and a
registration is active for the specified registration point.
In this case, the registration point is placed in an inactive status.
The registration point remains inactive until accounting (automatic or
forced by MML) for the registration has taken place. The registration
point is then canceled automatically.
1. CAN IACRGPT - ANONYM ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CAN IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels an anonymous registration point.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IACRGPT-1 +
CAN IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels a named registration point.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,RGPT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
E N D
CAN IACRGPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IACRGPT
ANONYM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command creates an IACHASTA registration point.
In general this means that an output type (AMA and/or metering)
is assigned to the specified combination of origin and/or
destination IACHASTA objects.
1. CR IACRGPT - ANONYM ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CR IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
This input format creates an anonymous registration point.
This means that the point has no name of its own.
It is identified by the unique combination of origin and
destination objects and output type.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= [,SCHED=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
MET METERING
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the valid schedule. The parameter is
meaningless unless a metering registration point is created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IACRGPT-1 +
CR IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format creates a named registration point.
This means that the point has its own name and that different
origin/destination object combinations with the same output
type can be assigned to it.
Note: Any given ORIGIN/DESTINATION output type combination can only
exist once in the system.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= ,RGPT= [,SCHED=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
MET METERING
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the valid schedule. The parameter is
meaningless unless a metering registration point is created.
E N D
CR IACRGPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACRGPT
OBJDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command displays IACHASTA registration points. The output depends
on the input format used.
1. DISP IACRGPT - OBJDEST SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
2. DISP IACRGPT - OBJORIG SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
3. DISP IACRGPT - OTHER OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
4. DISP IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
1. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
This input format displays the single sided registration point(s)
for the specified destination object.
-
] ]
] DISP IACRGPT : OBJDEST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACRGPT-1 +
DISP IACRGPT
OBJORIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
This input format displays the single sided registration point(s)
for the specified origin object.
-
] ]
] DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
DISP IACRGPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACRGPT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format represents four output formats:
1. When the origin and destination object are specified, all information
of the corresponding anonymous and/or named double sided registration points
is displayed.
2. When the value "X" is entered for origin object and the destination object
is specified, a list of all the anonymous and/or named registration points for
the specified destination object is displayed.
3. When the value "X" is entered for destination object and the origin object
is specified, a list of all the anonymous and/or named registration points for
the specified origin object is displayed.
4. When the value "X" is entered for the origin and destination object, a list
of all the object combinations participating in a registration point is
displayed.
-
] ]
] DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACRGPT-3 +
DISP IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format displays named registration points.
When a name is specified, all the information of the registration
point is displayed. When the value "X" is entered, an
alphabetical list of all the named registration points is displayed.
-
] ]
] DISP IACRGPT : RGPT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
DISP IACRGPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD IACRGPT
ANONYM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command modifies the schedule that is to be used for the
specified IACHASTA metering registration point.
1. MOD IACRGPT - ANONYM ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. MOD IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
This input format modifies the schedule of an anonymous registration point.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,SCHED= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
of the modified registration point.
definition of the modified registration point.
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IACRGPT-1 +
MOD IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format modifies the schedule of a named registration point.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD IACRGPT : RGPT= ,SCHED= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
E N D
MOD IACRGPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command displays the specified IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IACSCHED : SCHED= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACSCHED-1 -
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command modifies an IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
The schedules contain sequences of valid time groups per weekday category.
This makes it possible to split the data collected for a registration
point across different time groups based on the time and weekday category.
In the default configuration, the schedules use time group 1 for all
weekday categories from 0 until 24 hours.
Using this command it is possible, for one schedule, to enter up to three
periods for one time group, for all weekday categories indicated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD IACSCHED : SCHED= ,TIMGRP= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
TIMGRP TIME GROUP
This parameter specifies the time group for which the entered
periods are valid.
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the valid time periods (i.e. intervals)
for the time group. The specified time group then becomes valid
for the entered time interval.
Time periods can only be entered in whole 15-minute increments.
Up to 3 time intervals can be linked
a-b
a: HOUR (0..24)=
b: MINUTES (ONLY 00-15-30-45 ALLOWED)=
This parameter specifies the weekday category for which the
schedule is modified.
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IACSCHED-1 +
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH WEEKEND HALF
EF WEEKEND FULL
Default: HO, HH, EF, EH, HN, WO
E N D
MOD IACSCHED-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command displays the current settings for IACHASTA meters.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IACSET ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACSET-1 -
ENTR IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command enters the settings for IACHASTA meters. These settings define
the meter layout (i.e. how large it must be), by specifying the number of
traffic distinction groups and the number of time groups that are used for
IACHASTA metering registration.
The command overwrites the existing values with the entered parameter values.
The command is rejected when registration points with meters exist.
The command is also rejected when the new values are incompatible with the
existing traffic distinction groups and schedules as entered with the
MOD IACTRADI and MOD IACSCHED commands.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR IACSET : TIMGRPMX= ,TRAGRPMX= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIMGRPMX TIME GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest time group that
will be used in an IACHASTA metering schedule.
TRAGRPMX TRAFFIC GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest traffic distinction
group that will be used for IACHASTA metering registration.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR IACSET-1 -
DISP IACTRADI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command displays the IACHASTA traffic distinction criteria
for metering registration.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IACTRADI ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IACTRADI-1 -
MOD IACTRADI
LINECAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command modifies the traffic distinction for the specified IACHASTA
meter registration point type. The traffic groups make it possible to split
the collected call data according to line category or transmission medium
requirement.
In the default situation, no distinction is made between traffic types.
1. MOD IACTRADI - LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
2. MOD IACTRADI - NONE NONE
3. MOD IACTRADI - TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
1. Input format
LINE CATEGORY
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
line category is required.
-
] ]
] MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TRAGRP3=]] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
This parameter value refers to the line category.
TRAGRP1 TRAFFIC GROUP 1
This parameter specifies the traffic group 1.
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IACTRADI-1 +
MOD IACTRADI
LINECAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
MOD IACTRADI-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD IACTRADI
NONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NONE
This input format is entered when no traffic distinction is required.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
Notes:
NONE NONE
This parameter refers to the default installation
(no traffic distinction criterion)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IACTRADI-3 +
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
transmission medium requirement is required.
-
] ]
] MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TRAGRP3= [,TRAGRP4=]]] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
Notes:
TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
MOD IACTRADI-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IACTRADI-5 -
CAN IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command cancels an international automatic call back
initiator address from the initiator address list.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IADLST : IAD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IAD INITIATOR ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the international
automatic call back initiator system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IADLST-1 -
DISP IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command displays all international automatic call back
addresses on the initiator address list.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IADLST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IADLST-1 -
ENTR IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command enters an address into the initiator address list
which is used to call back the international automatic call
back initiator system by the international call back responder
system.
The initiator address list contains up to 10 addresses with
a maximum of 12 digits each.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR IADLST : IAD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IAD INITIATOR ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the international
automatic call back initiator system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR IADLST-1 -
ACT IAFEAT
IOFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CALL DATA RECORDING FEATURE
This command activates the specified type of call data recording.
Prerequisites :
- The specified data type must not yet be active (advisory and command
rejection).
the exchange!
1. ACT IAFEAT - IOFEAT IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
2. ACT IAFEAT - NUMFILES DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
3. ACT IAFEAT - VARFORM DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
1. Input format
IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
This input format activates an immediate output feature.
Prerequisites :
- Immediate output features can only be activated if the APS
contains the relevant subsystems (advisory and command rejection).
-
] ]
] ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE CALL DATA RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of call data recording.
AMAI - AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
]CTEI ] CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
-MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
]MCRI ] MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
]MOBI ] METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
PMOBI ' PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IAFEAT-1 +
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
This input format activates a disk feature with the possibility to
provide one or two files.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated and the previous activation was carried out with another
record format, the feature will not be activated (advisory and command
rejection).
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated with the same record format, the existing disk file(s)
with the same size and contents is (are) restored (advisory and
command execution).
-
] ]
] ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= [,SIZE=] ,NUMFILES= [,FILRECSZ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
NUMFILES NUMBER OF FILES
This parameter specifies the number of files.
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/INA variable records
and possibly a filler record in order to fill up completely the
file record.
ACT IAFEAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IAFEAT-3 +
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
This input format activates a disk feature with a variable record format.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated,
the existing disk file with the same size and contents is restored
(advisory and command execution).
-
] ]
] ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
AMA - AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
]DNOB ] DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
]ERS ] ERROR STATISTICS
]FIR ] FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
]IARA ] INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
-INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
]MAL ] MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
]MCR ] MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
]MOB ] METER OBSERVATION
]PMOB ] PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
]TOB ] TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST ' TRAFFIC STRUCTURED MEASUREMENT
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/INA variable records
and possibly a filler record in order to fill up completely the
file record.
ACT IAFEAT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IAFEAT-5 -
CAN IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. FEATURE
This command cancels the individual call data recording for the
specified data type.
The associated disk file is retained, but the writing of new records
is prevented.
Before the command is executed, all data of the specified type still
present in the CP buffer are automatically transferred to the
appropriate disk files. The file access permission is changed,
allowing the system operator to delete this file. Files named
IA.XXXXX may not be deleted until the file contents have been saved.
Notes :
- IA data type MOB may not be canceled unless all meter observation
requests for subscribers have been deactivated.
- This command should only be used in special cases, for instance
APS change, ODAGEN run or change of disk file size.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IAFEAT : TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE IND. CALL DATA ADMIN. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of individual call data recording.
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
MOB METER OBSERVATION
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST TRAFFIC STRUCTURED MEASUREMENT
ERS ERROR STATISTICS
DNOB DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
CTEI CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
MCRI MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
MOBI METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
PMOBI PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IAFEAT-1 -
DISP IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. FEATURES
This command displays the requested and activated features for
individual call data administration (IA).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IAFEAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IAFEAT-1 -
ACT IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to activate the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to block the buffering of
administrative records.
The special optional record types can only be generated for activated
IA features with disk output. They are used to evaluate the following
information:
- BRD = Recovery level and restoral time after a system failure
(breakdown)
- DTC = Date/time change due to error or change of summer/winter time
- OVF = Start and end time of buffer overflow and number of records lost
due to overflow
Storage of feature-specific call data records is suppressed if the buffer
input block is set. This acts as a safeguard against multiple billing of
special subscriber services.
The block must be set before the REGEN command file is processed and
then reset immediately after processing.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]SPREC= ] ]
] ACT IAOPT : -BLBUFR= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
The activated optional special data records are not related
to data types TOB and UAM, consequently no administrative
data records are entered.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IAOPT-1 -
CAN IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to cancel the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to cancel the buffer input block
for individual call data administration records.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]SPREC= ] ]
] CAN IAOPT : -BLBUFR= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IAOPT-1 -
DISP IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command displays the activated special optional record types and
states whether buffers are blocked.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IAOPT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IAOPT-1 -
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD ISDN BASIC ACCESS D-CHANNEL LOAD
This command calls down the ISDN Basic Access D-channel load
traffic measurement data every 15 minutes within the specified
measurement period and outputs them to the specified output
device.
Prerequisites:
With this measurement up to 5 measurement tasks each for a
maximum of 10 directory numbers can be carried out in
parallel.
The user is able to specify up to 10 directory numbers for
each of the 5 tasks with this MML-command. Whether or not the
traffic of all selected directory numbers will be measured
depends on the total number of all BA-lines. The total number
of BA-lines over all active tasks may not be more than 50,
otherwise the task will be rejected.
Within a measurement task all these directory numbers must be
created either exclusively for ISDN-BA subscriber or
exclusively for PBX (ISDN- or mixed PBX) each with a minimum
of a ISDN PBX line at the BA. A mixture of both types within a
measurement task is not allowed.
The measured data can be output either to OMT or MDD. It
contains the following data for all directory numbers:
per BA :
- number of received frames
- number of received octets
- number of transmitted frames
- number of transmitted octets
The packet data and the signaling data (p+s data) are recorded
here.
For Private Branch Exchange (PBX) the counter values are
recorded per D Channel (per ISDN BA PBX line). There is an output
of sums of D channels belonging to a PBX.
The traffic measurement counters for D-channel Basic Access
load are installed on a port-related basis in the SLMD,SLMX or
SILC and run permanently. The SLMD,SLMX or SILC always count
all layer 2-frames and octets, in the D-channel for ISDN BA
connected to a SLMD port or connected via V5 interface to a
V5IF port.
For ISDN BAs connected via DLU the traffic measurement
counters in the SLMD or SLMX distinguish between I-,UI- and
S-Frames.
For ISDN BAs connected via V5.2 interface the traffic
measurement counters in the SILC collect seperate by the s- and
p-data-frames. The CP eliminates these differences by forming
and listing the sum of the frames.
As regards ISDN BA subscribers there is a correspondence
between port and directory number only if one directory number
is linked to the SLMD/V5IF port. If more than one directory
number is linked to the same SLMD/V5IF port as a Multiple
Subscriber Number (MSN), it is not possible to record separate
counter data for each of the directory numbers belonging to
the MSN, because the counters are port-related. So the data
recorded in this case represent the sum of D channel layer-2
frames and octets constituting the total traffic of all
concerned directory numbers belonging to the same MSN and
linked to the same port.
For all indicated valid directory numbers the equipment
numbers (DLU/V5IF-ports) as well as the corresponding line
trunk groups (LTGX way and LTGY way) are determined at the
moment of command acceptance in order to determine both
alternative paths for the CP access to the counters in the
SLMD,SLMX or SILC.
Directory numbers or PBX lines which are deleted or modified
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC IBADCH-1 +
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
after command acceptance are treated as follows. They remain
in the output list. However, deleted or modified directory
numbers or lines show blanks and a special availability
mark instead of measured traffic data in the output mask. For
directory numbers or PBX lines which have only been linked to
another port after command accept, the traffic data is
recorded further.
MSN directory numbers are indicated as such. In the output
list, the equipment number for each directory number appears.
For each MSN directory number, this is followed by information
about the number of all MSN directory numbers belonging to
this MSN port. If a command acceptance several directory
numbers are specified all of which are related to the same
port, the traffic data is recorded under this directory number
which was first specified at command acceptance. The reason
for this is the port individuality of the traffic data. The
other directory numbers of this MSN, which are jointly
responsible for these traffic data show no data in the output
mask, but they refer to the data of the first directory number
already listed, which is linked to the same MSN port.
As regards Private Branch Exchange including ISDN BA lines the
PBX directory numbers have to be specified as directory
number. Line Service Numbers are not allowed and will be
rejected, because the object of this traffic measurement is
the PBX and not seperate BA lines of a PBX.
In exchange with only one local network, this command
parameter LAC may be omitted.
Within the command parameter NSN the parameter LAC has to
be entered.
It is not allowed to use the command parameter NSN if no
LAC exists in the exchange.
1. REC IBADCH - DN DN SPECIFICATION
2. REC IBADCH - NSN NSN SPECIFICATION
1. Input format
DN SPECIFICATION
Input format to call down ISDN Basic Access
D-channel load traffic measurement data
with input parameter directory number.
-
] ]
] REC IBADCH : [PER=] [,IV=] [,TER=] [,BEG=] ,UNIT= ,DN= ]
] ]
] [,LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
are to be recorded.
Notes:
REC IBADCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart exept for measurement over
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC IBADCH-3 +
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
REC IBADCH-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the file. The start and the finish message
postprocessing.
Notes :
IF this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced. Daily files will be overwritten in
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, an
advisory is output to the OMT.
UNIT = MDD.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
A maximum of 10 directory numbers can be linked with &.
Restrictions:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC IBADCH-5 +
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NSN SPECIFICATION
Input format to call down ISDN Basic Access
D-channel load traffic measurement data
with input parameter national significant
number.
-
] ]
] REC IBADCH : [PER=] [,IV=] [,TER=] [,BEG=] ,UNIT= ,NSN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart exept for measurement over
midnight.
times only.
REC IBADCH-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for the
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC IBADCH-7 +
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
the file. The start and the finish message
postprocessing.
Notes :
IF this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced. Daily files will be overwritten in
UNIT = MDD.
NSN NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the national significant number,
consisting of local area code and the directory number.
A maximum of 10 national significant numbers can be linked
REC IBADCH-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
with &.
Restrictions:
a-b
a: AREA CODE=
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC IBADCH-9 -
SWOFF IDTONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWITCH OFF IDENTIFICATION TONE
This command switches off an identification tone to an incoming
trunk of a malicious call connection. This command does not
influence the holding state of the malicious call connection.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LNO=] ]
] SWOFF IDTONE : TGNO= -,CIC= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for
CCS7 signalling.
a-b
a: DIU-NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SWOFF IDTONE-1 -
SWON IDTONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWITCH ON IDENTIFICATION TONE
This command switches on an identification tone to an incoming
line of a malicious call connection.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LNO=] ]
] SWON IDTONE : TGNO= -,CIC= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
.
LNO LINE NUMBER
CCS7 signaling. The input 0-0 is illegal.
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SWON IDTONE-1 -
STAT ILAYER1
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS
This command displays the saved status of the layer 1 activation
procedure.
1. STAT ILAYER1 - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. STAT ILAYER1 - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
-
] ]
] STAT ILAYER1 : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT ILAYER1-1 +
STAT ILAYER1
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] STAT ILAYER1 : DLU= ,LC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
E N D
STAT ILAYER1-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION
This command removes the IN authorization for a subscriber identified
by its A-number id (ANI) or by a specific authentication code id (ACI).
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ANI=] ;- ]
] CAN INAUTH : -ACI= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which the IN
authorization must be removed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INAUTH-1 -
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to give a subscriber identified by its A-number id
(ANI) or by a specific authentication code id (ACI), the authorization to
make use of an IN service specified by the parameter PRID.
In case that the subscriber identified by ANI or ACI is a transit
exchange subscriber (TXS), this command is also used to identify the TXS
feature data.
Notice that TXS features are realized as "integrated service logic (ISL)
services".
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been
created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ANI=] ;- ]
] CR INAUTH : -ACI= ,PRID= ,SCMID= [,TXSPROF=] - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which IN authorization is given.
identification number) of the subscriber for which IN
authorization is given.
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization
is given.
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INAUTH-1 +
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the TXS feature data.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
E N D
CR INAUTH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to display the IN authorization data of a subscriber
identified by its A-number id (ANI) or by a specific authentication code
id (ACI).
For transit exchange subscribers (TXS), this command can also be used to
display the corresponding TXS profile.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been created
by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have been
created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ANI=] ]
] DISP INAUTH : -ACI= [,PRID=] [,SCMID=] [,TXSPROF=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ANI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ACI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
This parameter specifies the name of the IN trigger profile to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ACI) with the specified IN
service will be displayed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INAUTH-1 +
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ACI) with the specified IN
service class mark will be displayed.
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the TXS profile to be used as a selection
criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ACI) with the specified TXS
profile will be displayed.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
E N D
DISP INAUTH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the IN authorization data for a subscriber
identified by its A-number id (ANI) or by a specific authentication
code id (ACI).
Moreover, this command can be used to identify new TXS feature data
or the remove the TXS feature data for the specified subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- The new trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have
been created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The new service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the new TXS profile referenced by
the parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB
(with CAT=TXS).
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ANI=] ;- ]
] MOD INAUTH : -ACI= <,PRID= ,SCMID= ,TXSPROF= ,CTXSPROF=> - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
authorization data must be modified.
This parameter specifies the name of the new trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization is
given.
This parameter specifies the name of the new corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INAUTH-1 +
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the new TXS feature data.
Incompatibilities:
- CTXSPROF may not have been entered.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
CTXSPROF CANCEL TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the TXS profile must be removed for
the subscriber or not.
Incompatibilities:
- TXSPROF may not have been entered.
N TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL TXS PROFILE
YES CANCEL TXS PROFILE
Default: N
E N D
MOD INAUTH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERCEPT
This command cancels the data entered for the specified
intercept identification and applies an intercept tone coded
in the GP if the intercept is accessed by call processing.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INC : INCEPT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the
data are to be canceled.
a[-b]
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
SBLOAD SUB BLOCKING ADMINISTR. (ORIG)
SBLOMAIN SUB BLOCKING MAINT. (ORIG)
ACCSPORI ACCOUNT SUSPENSION (ORIG)
REQSPORI REQUESTED SUSPENSION (ORIG)
ABBRDERR ABBREVIATED DIALING ERROR
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
ACCSPTER ACCOUNT SUSPENSION (TERM)
REQSPTER REQUESTED SUSPENSION (TERM)
ADMIN ADMINISTRATION BLOCKING
ADMIN1 ADMINISTRATION BLOCKING 1
MAINT MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
MAINT1 MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 1
TESTCALL TEST CALL ONLY
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
CHGDNIND CHANGED DN INDIVIDUAL
SLTOUTO SUB LINE TEMP OUT OF ORDER
OPRVNA OPERATOR VERIF. NOT ALLOWED
TERMPERM TERMINATED SUB PERMANENT
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
MOBSUBAB MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ABSENT
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INC-1 +
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
CHCPTIND CHANGE CODE POINT INDIVIDUAL
RESANN RESERVE ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b is required.
ACTDIVOP CALL DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
ACTDVA1 DIV TO FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 01
ACTDIVND DO NOT DISTURB ACTIVE IDLE
ACTDIVOD ACTIVATED DIV. TO OPERATOR 1
DIVVMSF CALL DIV. TO VMS FIXED
ACTDIVTA ACT DIV. TELEPHONE ANNOUNCEM.
NOMULDIV NO MULTIPLE CALL DIVERSION
DIVIA1 DIV TO INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT 01
CALLFW CALL FORWARDED, PLEASE HOLD
NOCALLFW CALL CANNOT BE FORWARDED
INPERR INPUT ERROR
WUPCAS WAKE UP CASUAL
WUPDAY WAKE UP DAILY
WUPWEEK WAKE UP WEEKLY
ANNCDVDN ANNOUNCEM. DIV DN INDIVIDUAL
SWUPCAS SHIFT WAKE UP CASUAL
SWUPDAY SHIFT WAKE UP DAILY
CHRGANN ANN OF CHARGE
CAN INC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHRGNOTA ANN CHARGE NOT AVAILABLE
MALCALL MALICIOUS CALL TRACED
ANNSCLDN ANNOUNCEMENT SCREENING LIST DN
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
LANGA LANGUAGE ASSISTENCE
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
TCA TIME AND CHARGES AUTOMATIC
CCUNMAN CALL CATEG. ACTUALLY UNMANNED
CCNA CALL CATEG. NOT ASSISTED
ANNDN ANN. OF DIRECTORY NUMBER
AUTGREET AUTOMATIC GREETING
OSSCONF OSS CONFERENCE
ANIF ANI FAILURE
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
BILRUNA BILLING REGISTER UNOBT. AUTOM.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
CCS7OVL SIGNALING LINK OVERLOAD
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
DIDBSYT DIRECT INWARD DIALING BUSY
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
TMRNOTAV TMR NOT AVAILABLE
IPINOTAV IPI NOT AVAILABLE
EGMBUSY EXTERNAL GROUP MAKE BUSY
COINNEAR INTERNATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
CONANEAR NATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
TRSV TRUNK RESERVATION
COINFAR INTERNATIONAL FAR CONGESTION
CONAFAR NATIONAL FAR CONGESTION
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY
INFOTON INFORMATION TONE
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
NETOOS NET OUT OF SERVICE
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
PROTERRI PROTOCOL ERROR ISDN
UNCOFAR UNDEFINED CONGESTION FAR END
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
TESTWAIT WAITING FOR TEST OPERATOR
ECS EMERGENCY CALL SET UP
ECHOSIC ECHO SUPPRESSOR INCOMING
ECHOSOG ECHO SUPPRESSOR OUTGOING
MEETME MEET ME
PHONM2 TELEPHONE MEETING 2
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
RSCIUI REMOTE SCI USER INTERACTION
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INC-3 +
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLPOOLN5 BLOCKER POOL FOR MFNO5
CTXI1TR6 CTX INTERWORKING TO 1TR6
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING TO 1TR6
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BLICON BLOCKAGE INTERCONTIN.TRAFFIC
BLINAT BLOCKAGE INTERNATIONAL TRAFFIC
BLONAT4 BLOCKAGE NATIONAL TRAFFIC 4
BLOLOCAL BLOCKAGE LOCAL TRAFFIC
BLOP1 BLOCKAGE OPERATOR 1 TRAFFIC
ALLBLOCK ALL CONNECTIONS BLOCKED
OHQTO OFF-HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
OHQ OFF-HOOK QUEUEING
RBQ RING BACK QUEUEING
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUEING
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
DA DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b is required.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM. CALLBACK
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
IPRA IP ROUTING ADDRESS
Unit b is required.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
Compatibilities:
- If RESANN, DA, QOV, ANN or IPRA is in input,
there are restrictions for the second unit:
For RESANN only value 0..9 is permitted.
For DA only value 0..250 is permitted.
For QOV only value 0..30 is permitted.
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
For IPRA only value 0..127 is permitted.
E N D
CAN INC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERCEPT
This command creates an intercept code defining how a call is
to be handled if call processing diverts it to an intercept
code.
1. CR INC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR INC - NEWCB1NL NEW CODE B1 NUMBER NO LAC
3. CR INC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
4. CR INC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
5. CR INC - OPRCTYP OPERATOR VIA CALLTYPE
6. CR INC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
Input format for creating an intercept code which, when it
is accessed, causes the originally required connection to be
set up after all.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter is subdivided in functional blocks.
The subdivision is explained in the command DISP INC
by the parameter INTYP.
a[-b]
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
This value belongs to INTYP=CALLDIV.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-1 +
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=BLOTREAT.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIF ANI FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=AMA.
This value belongs to INTYP=SCPANN.
Unit b is required.
Sequencing is not allowed.
This value belongs to INTYP=SUBCONIN.
This value belongs to INTYP=OPREQ.
CR INC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
This value belongs to INTYP=NETWOMA.
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value belongs to INTYP=QUEUSUCC.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-3 +
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value belongs to INTYP=SSPANN.
CR INC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
This value belongs to INTYP=IPROUTES.
Unit b is required.
MEETME MEET ME
OHQ OFF HOOK QUEUEING
OHQTO OFF HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-5 +
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=QUEUFAIL.
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
CR INC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-7 +
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
Compatibilities:
there are restrictions for the second unit.
This parameter specifies which response is to be triggered
when the intercept code is accessed.
CR INC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NEW CODE B1 NUMBER NO LAC
Input format to create an intercept code via which the
digit translator is re-accessed. Only the dialled number
will be sent. (The Local Area Code will not be appended to
the number, if it was not dialled by the subscriber.)
An intercept code of this type serves to
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-9 +
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWDEST.
CR INC-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
INRES=NEWCB1.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-11 +
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
CR INC-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
MEETME MEET ME
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-13 +
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
CR INC-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-15 +
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
CODE NEW CODE
a[-b]
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
directly).
Default: CATAC
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
CR INC-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies in which position the response
created by this command is located if several responses are
created for one intercept code. This value must start with 1
and be entered without gaps.
Incompatibilities:
- DIVTYP exists on a previous sequence.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-17 +
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Input format to create an intercept code via which the
digit translator is re-accessed. An intercept code of this
type serves to
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,DIVTYP=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
CR INC-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWDEST.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-19 +
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
INRES=NEWCB1.
Unit b is required.
CR INC-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-21 +
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
MEETME MEET ME
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
CR INC-22 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-23 +
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
CR INC-24 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
a[-b]
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
directly).
Default: CATAC
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-25 +
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
DIVTYP CALL DIVERSION TYPE
This parameter specifies how an incoming call request is to
be diverted if the called party has activated call diversion
to the operator or an announcement.
This parameter is only allowed with the input of the
following INCEPT-values:
ACTDIVOP
ACTDVA1
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
Incompatibilities:
SEQ > 1
CR INC-26 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVDA CALL DIV. IF B1 DIDNT ANSWER
This value specifies that the call request is to
be diverted if the B1-subscriber does not reply
within a given time.
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
This value specifies that the call request
is to be diverted immediately.
DIVIP CALL DIV. IMMED. AND PARALLEL
This value specifies that a connection to the B1
subscriber is to be set up at the same time as a
connection to the B2-subscriber. The subscriber
whose response is first detected in the B1-LTG
cuts into the call.
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-27 +
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Input format for creating an intercept code reached via a
destination area to incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo
suppressors) into the connection.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,DEST= [,DIVTYP=] [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
CR INC-28 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWDEST.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-29 +
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
INRES=NEWCB1.
Unit b is required.
CR INC-30 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-31 +
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
MEETME MEET ME
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
CR INC-32 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-33 +
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
Compatibilities:
CR INC-34 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the destination area to be
accessed by the intercept code.
DIVTYP CALL DIVERSION TYPE
This parameter specifies how an incoming call request is to
be diverted if the called party has activated call diversion
to the operator or an announcement.
This parameter is only allowed with the input of the
following INCEPT-values:
ACTDIVOP
ACTDVA1
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
Incompatibilities:
SEQ > 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-35 +
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVDA CALL DIV. IF B1 DIDNT ANSWER
This value specifies that the call request is to
be diverted if the B1-subscriber does not reply
within a given time.
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
This value specifies that the call request
is to be diverted immediately.
DIVIP CALL DIV. IMMED. AND PARALLEL
This value specifies that a connection to the B1
subscriber is to be set up at the same time as a
connection to the B2-subscriber. The subscriber
whose response is first detected in the B1-LTG
cuts into the call.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
CR INC-36 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
OPRCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
OPERATOR VIA CALLTYPE
Input format for creating an intercept code via which an
OSS operator is accessed.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CTYP= [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-37 +
CR INC
OPRCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPRCTYP OPERATOR WITH CALL TYPE
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This parameter specifies the call type of the operator
being accessed.
For special operator call types see command CR CTYP.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
CR INC-38 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
OPRCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-39 +
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an
intercept tone is accessed.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INC : INCEPT= ,TONE= [,SEQ=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
CR INC-40 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWDEST.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-41 +
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
INRES=NEWCB1.
Unit b is required.
CR INC-42 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-43 +
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
MEETME MEET ME
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
CR INC-44 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-45 +
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
Compatibilities:
CR INC-46 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INC-47 -
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERCEPT
This command displays the created data for the specified intercept code.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INC : <INCEPT= ,INTYP=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are
to be displayed.
a[-b]
X ALL VALUES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-1 +
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
Unit b is required.
DISP INC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INPERR INPUT ERROR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-3 +
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DELN DELAY NATIONAL
DISP INC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
ONIREQ ONI REQUIRED
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-5 +
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
MEETME MEET ME
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
DISP INC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OHQTO OFF-HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
QOV QUEUE OVERFLOW
Unit b is required.
OHQ OFF-HOOK QUEUEING
Unit b is required.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
Compatibilities:
there are restrictions for the second unit:
INTYP INTERCEPT TYPE
This parameter restricts data display to the specified
intercept type.
An intercept type contains all intercept codes which are
accessed for similar reasons. For example, if the DIZO
intercept type is specified, the data are displayed for all
created intercept codes that are accessed if call set up
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-7 +
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
fails because of problems in digit translation or zoning.
Division of intercept codes into groups:
ORIG:
OCUB
SBLOAD
SBLOMAIN
ACCSPORI
REQSPORI
ABBRDERR
SCLSTO
CCBS
CCNR
TERM:
NOSERV
ACCSPTER
REQSPTER
ADMIN
ADMIN1
ADMIN2
ADMIN3
MAINT
MAINT1
MAINT2
MAINT3
SERVINC
TESTCALL
CHANGEDN
UNOBDN
CHGDNIND
SLTOUTO
OPRVNA
TERMPERM
ICUB
MOBSUBAB
SCLSTT
DIZO:
UNOBDE0
UNOBDE1
UNOBDE2
UNOBDE3
UNOBDE4
UNOBDE5
UNOBDE6
UNOBDE7
UNOBDE8
UNOBDE9
UNOBDE10
UNOBDE11
UNALLROU
ILLDEST
UNOBDE12
UNOBDE13
CHCPTIND
RESANN
CALLDIV:
ACTDIVOP
ACTDVA1
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
DISP INC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
SUBCONIN:
SCISUC
SCIUNSUC
FEAYACT
FEAYDACT
FEANSUB
FEAUNSUC
INPERR
INPACC
FEAACT
DACHKSUC
INPTREJ
INPREJ
FEAINACT
NODATA
DACHKERR
REPALC
CFWNOREJ
SCIREP2
SCIREP3
SCIREP4
SCIREP5
SCIREP6
SCIREP7
SCIREP8
SCIREP9
SCIREP10
WUPCAS
WUPDAY
WUPWEEK
ANNCDVDN
SWUPCAS
SWUPDAY
CHRGANN
CHRGNOTA
MALCALL
ANNSCLDN
ANNARDN
SWUPWEEK
OPREQ:
LANGA
NRCAL
IRCAL
TCN
TCI
DELN
DELOI
DELII
DELTI
TCA
VNOTF
NDELNS
IDELNS
OPRQFULL
CCUNMAN
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-9 +
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCNA
ANNDN
AUTGREET
OSSCONF
AMA:
ANIF
ONIREQ
BILRUNA
BILRUNO
ROUTING:
NOROUTE
NOALTROU
ALLROUBA
CCS7OVL
ANIFLIST
DIDBSYT
BLOCKLST
TMRNOTAV
IPINOTAV
EGMBUSY
NETWOMA:
NETWOMA0
NETWOMA1
NETWOMA2
NETWOMA3
NETWOMA4
NETWOMA5
COINNEAR
CONANEAR
NETWOMA6
TRSV
BASICAUS:
COINFAR
CONAFAR
SUBBUSY
INFOTON
CALLREJ
CAUSE1
CAUSE2
CAUSE3
NETOOS
USNRESP
CAUSE4
CAUSE5
PROTERR
PROTERRI
UNCOFAR
CAUSE6
COMDEST:
CALLWAIT
TESTWAIT
ECS
ECHOSIC
ECHOSOG
PHONMEET
MEETME
PHONM2
SUSCI
SUSCICTX
RSCIUI
CALLHLD
BLPOOLN5
CTXI1TR6
INI1TR6
FCOFFUI
CLASSFEA:
EQUALACC:
BLOTREAT:
BLOTRA0
DISP INC-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLICON
BLINAT
BLONAT4
BLONAT3
BLONAT2
BLONAT1
BLOLOCAL
BLOP1
BLOP2
BLOTRA10
BLOTRA11
BLOTRA12
BLOTRA13
BLOTRA14
BLOTRA15
ALLBLOCK
LORAFLEX:
QUEUFAIL:
OHQTO
QOV
QUEUSUCC:
OHQ
RBQ
OPRQ
PRIOQ
DA
SSPANN:
SNA0
SNA1
SNA2
SNA3
SNA4
OVL1
OVL2
OVL3
OVL4
INV1
INV2
INANIF
IACB
SCPANN:
ANN
IPROUTES:
IPRA
ORIG ORIGINATING TRAFFIC
TERM TERMINATING TRAFFIC
DIZO DIGIT TRANSLATION ZONING
CALLDIV CALL DIVERSION ACTIVATED
SUBCONIN SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
OPREQ OSS NATIONAL CALLS
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNT
ROUTING ROUTING
NETWOMA NETWORK MANAGEMENT
BASICAUS BACKWARD SIGNALED CAUSES
COMDEST COMMON DESTINATIONS
CLASSFEA CLASS FEATURES
EQUALACC EQUAL ACCESS FUNCTION
BLOTREAT BLOCKAGES TREATMENT
LORAFLEX LOCAL COIN RATE FLEXIBILITY
QUEUSUCC QUEUEING SUCCESSFUL
QUEUFAIL QUEUEING FAILURE
SSPANN SERVICE SWITCHING POINT ANN.
SCPANN SERVICE CONTROL POINT ANN.
IPROUTES INTELL. PERIPHERY ROUTING
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INC-11 -
DISP INDIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS
This command displays all functional units out of service, all blocked
trunks and all catastrophe conditions. The status information appears
as a continuous message.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INDIC : [OBJECT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OBJECT INDICATION OBJECT
This parameter specifies the object for an indication.
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
SIGLBL SIGNALING LINK BLOCKED
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CU CENTRAL UNITS
TGBL TRUNK GROUP BLOCKED
CAT1 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 1
CAT2 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 2
ALDSUP ALARM DISPLAY SUPPRESSION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INDIC-1 -
DISP INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command displays specific data of the home exchange concerning Intelligent
Network services.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INEXDATA ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INEXDATA-1 -
ENTR INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command creates exchange specific data concerning the Intelligent Network
service execution on the home exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR INEXDATA : <LAC= ,TDDIG= ,LCCODE=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the Service Switching
Point in the Intelligent Network.
If it will be used as zoning destination, the command CR ZOPT has to
be entered with the local area code specified in the CODE parameter.
TDDIG TRAFFIC DISCRIMINATION DIGITS
This parameter specifies the traffic discrimination digits that will
be used for all Intelligent Network application protocols for which
Service Filtering may be executed in the update mode (e.g. protocol
type SINAP1). It has to be specified in order to complete the vote
directory number given in the Update operation. In the corresponding
ENTR INSLDAT command the traffic discrimination digits are part of
the vote directory number.
Default: 01.
LCCODE LEG CONTROLLER CODE
This parameter specifies the code for the selection of a Leg
Controller LTG. The code must be created with command CR CPT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INEXDATA-1 -
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command removes the Congestion Control data.
Note:
Some guidelines have to be taken into account using the following
parameters:
- using CLGPTY : SKEY is mandatory,
LOCNO and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using LOCNO : SKEY is mandatory,
CLGPTY and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using CLDPTY : CLGPTY and LOCNO are incompatible.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,SCPORIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party number for
which the Congestion Control data will be removed.
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party number for
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number for
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
Congestion Control data have to be removed.
SCPORIG SCP ORIGIN
This parameter specifies whether SCP originated or operator originated
Congestion Control data have to be deleted.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INOVLCO-1 +
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO
Y YES
NO NO
YES YES
Default: NO
E N D
CAN INOVLCO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command displays data concerning specified or all Intelligent Network
Congestion Control data. These data can be the parameters or the statistics
about Congestion Control. It is also possible to distinguish between SCP
originated or operator originated Congestion Control data.
Note:
parameters:
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,FORMAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SCPORIG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the called party number for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the calling party number for which
This parameter specifies the location number for which
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INOVLCO-1 +
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for a
specified SKEY, CLDPTY, CLGPTY or LOCNO.
- ST has to be used for the selection of SKEY, CLDPTY,
CLGPTY or LOCNO specific statistic data.
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETERS
ST DISPLAY CONTROL STATISTICS
This parameter determines whether to display statistics
or the parameters of Congestion Control.
Default: PA
SCPORIG SCP ORIGIN
This parameter specifies whether SCP originated or operator originated
If no value is entered the data of both origins will be displayed.
N NO
Y YES
NO NO
YES YES
E N D
DISP INOVLCO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command enters the control data to prevent the SCP
from overload. This will be done for a control criterion,
i.e. either for a given service key SKEY, called party
number CLDPTY, calling party number CLGPTY or location
number LOCNO. The maximal number of controlled and allowed
requests to the SCP concerning the control criterion is
specified by the parameter BURST. The decrease value
DECVAL is expected to be the number of requests answered in
the decrease time DECTIME.
Prerequisites:
- a service key must have been created with the command
CR INTRIG.
Note:
parameters:
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR INOVLCO : CODURA= ,BURST= ,DECVAL= <,SKEY= ,CLDPTY= ]
] ]
] ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO=> [,DECTIME=] [,RELCA=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TREAT=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the control duration in seconds.
A value greater than 86400 means an infinite duration.
BURST BURST OF ALL. SIMUL. CALLS
This parameter specifies the maximal number of controlled and
simultaneous allowed requests to the SCP concerning the
control criterion.
DECVAL DECREASE VALUE
This parameter specifies the decrease value.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INOVLCO-1 +
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the IN service for which overload control data will be
entered.
the called party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
the calling party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
the location number for which overload control data will be
entered.
DECTIME DECREASE TIME
This parameter specifies the decrease time in milliseconds.
A value greater than 60000 means an infinite decrease time.
Incompatibilities:
- if BURST greater than 0,
this parameter value must not be greater than 60000
Default: 100
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to control the call release and intercept treatment. It is related
to the announcement determined by the TREAT parameter.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
ENTR INOVLCO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
Default: 42
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code for blocked IN calls.
a-b
a: ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
Default: TONE
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier this value is of range (1..31).
Default: 4
DURA ANNOUNCEMENT / TONE DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation of the entered tone or
announcement. It is related to the tone / announcement determined
by the TREAT parameter.
Default: 40
ANNCYC ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement. It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
Incompatibilities:
- if TREAT = TONE, this parameter is not allowed
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INOVLCO-3 -
CAN INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command removes an IN service class mark.
Prerequisites:
- For this service class no subscriber, PBX line, PBX, trunk group, centrex
group or digit code may exist to which the service class mark was assigned
per MML command CR INSCMREF.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCM : SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be removed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INSCM-1 -
CR INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command creates an INSCM that is used for the installation
of trigger detection points (TDP) of several types.
The following types of trigger detection points can be controlled
with IN service class marks:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object is detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits is collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer has expired.
TDP5O6 - Combines TDP5 and TDP6.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer has expired.
Precondition for the use of a trigger detection point is the assignment
of the IN service class mark to :
- a subscriber, PBX or PBX line of a certain category
- a trunk group
- a digit combination
- a centrex group
by the command CR INSCMREF and activation with ACT INSCMREF.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
1. CR INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
4. CR INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
10. CR INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-1 +
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP1.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,CLGPTY=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
CR INSCM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
type TDP12.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,CLGPTY=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-3 +
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
type TDP13.
-
] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,CLGPTY=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RELCA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
CR INSCM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-5 +
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
type TDP13O14.
-
] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
Notes:
CR INSCM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-7 +
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
type TDP14.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CLGPTY=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
CR INSCM-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-9 +
CR INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
type TDP2.
-
] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,COLDIG= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,ESCAPE=] [,CLGPTY=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected in case of TDP2, TDP3, TDP4, TDP5 or TDP5O6.
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
CR INSCM-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-11 +
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
type TDP3.
-
] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= [,PRID=] [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CLDPTY= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] [,CAT=] [,NCAT=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a dialled digit combination for TDP3, TDP4, TDP5, TDP6
or TDP5O6. It is used to detect an IN service request for
destination numbers starting with the entered digits.
CR INSCM-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
a NOT dialled digit combination for TDP3, TDP4, TDP5,
TDP6 or TDP5O6. It is used to detect an IN service request
for destination numbers NOT starting with the entered digits.
Notes:
Notes:
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-13 +
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter has the opposite effect as a.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
CR INSCM-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
type TDP4.
-
] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CLDPTY= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-15 +
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
CR INSCM-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
type TDP5.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CLDPTY= ]] ]
] CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ]-,NCLDPTY=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-17 +
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
CR INSCM-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
type TDP5O6.
-
] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CLDPTY= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-19 +
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
CR INSCM-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
type TDP6.
-
] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],CLDPTY= ]] ;- ]
] ]-,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] - ]
] ]] ]] !' ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCM-21 +
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
E N D
CR INSCM-22 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command displays the data concerning a specified or all
IN service class marks.
Depending on the TYPE parameter only service class marks of
special type will be displayed.
Depending on the FORMAT parameter specific data of the service
class mark related to the trigger condition or trigger profile
will be displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP INSCM : SCMID= [,TYPE=] [,FORMAT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be displayed.
for which the IN service class mark shall be displayed.
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed
for an Service Class Mark:
- PA has to be used to display the specific trigger conditions.
- CT has to be used to display the profile identification of the SCM.
PA PARAMETERS TRIGGER CONDITIONS
CT CALL TREATMENT
Default: PA
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INSCM-1 -
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command modifies an IN service class mark that is used for
the triggering at the following trigger detection points:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object was detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits was collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer has expired.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer has expired.
Notes:
- The type of service class mark must not be changed.
- The MOD command allows to overwrite existing parameter values.
- Removal of trigger conditions is only allowed for an escape code.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
1. MOD INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
4. MOD INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
8. MOD INSCM - TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
9. MOD INSCM - TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
10. MOD INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-1 +
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point
of type TDP1.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLGPTY=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
be started.
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
Notes:
MOD INSCM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP12.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLGPTY=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-3 +
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
type TDP13.
-
] ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLGPTY= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,RELCA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
Notes:
MOD INSCM-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-5 +
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
type TDP13O14.
-
] ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] <,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
MOD INSCM-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-7 +
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
type TDP14.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] <,CLGPTY=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
MOD INSCM-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-9 +
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
type TDP2.
-
] ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,ESCAPE= ,CESCAPE= ,CLGPTY=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the modified escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
MOD INSCM-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CESCAPE CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies if the escape code has to be cancelled.
N ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
YES CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-11 +
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
type TDP3.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,CAT= ,NCAT=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
MOD INSCM-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter can only be used if the Service Class Mark
does not contain the NCLDPTY parameter.
- This parameter is the opposite of NCLDPTY.
Notes:
does not contain the CLDPTY parameter.
- This parameter is the opposite of CLDPTY.
Notes:
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-13 +
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as CAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
MOD INSCM-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
type TDP4.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-15 +
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
MOD INSCM-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
type TDP5.
-
] ]
] MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLDPTY= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-17 +
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
MOD INSCM-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
type TDP5O6.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-19 +
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
MOD INSCM-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
type TDP6.
-
] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCM-21 +
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
E N D
MOD INSCM-22 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command activates an IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber,
PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a centrex group or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The corresponding INSCMREF must have been created with the command
CR INSCMREF.
1. ACT INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. ACT INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. ACT INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
4. ACT INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
5. ACT INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to
a digit combination (code).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT INSCMREF-1 +
ACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a centrex group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the centrex group.
ACT INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
LNO LINE NUMBER
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT INSCMREF-3 +
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT INSCMREF-5 +
ACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
ACT INSCMREF-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command cancels the assignment of an IN service class mark reference
to a subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a centrex group or a
digit code.
Notes :
- The SCMREF must be deactivated before it may be cancelled.
1. CAN INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CAN INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. CAN INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
4. CAN INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
5. CAN INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
may be entered.
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INSCMREF-1 +
CAN INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned to a centrex group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
CAN INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to a PBX line.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INSCMREF-3 +
CAN INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to
a subscriber or a PBX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
CAN INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INSCMREF-5 -
CR INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command assigns an IN service class mark to a subscriber, PBX,
PBX line, a trunkgroup, a centrex group or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The INSCM specified in parameter SCMID must have been created
with command CR INSCM.
1. CR INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CR INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. CR INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
4. CR INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
5. CR INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a digit combination (for office based
IN-triggering).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code) to
which the IN service class mark is assigned.
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCMREF-1 +
CR INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a centrex group.
Prerequisites :
- The parameter CXGRP must address a centrex group, previously created with
the command CR CXGRP.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the centrex group
to which the IN service class mark is assigned.
to be assigned.
CR INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a PBX line.
Prerequisites:
- The parameters LAC, DN, OPMODE and LNO must address a PBX line
previously created with command CR PBXLN.
- Terminating IN service class marks may only be assigned to PBX lines with
COS = DCANORM.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX line, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX line and no
reference to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the
belonging PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a PBX line, no terminating INSCM must
already be assigned to the PBX line.
- INSCMs are incompatible with:
- Originating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IOG
= AOG.
- Terminating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IIC
= AIC.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX line if the line itself
or the PBX is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
Notes:
- In case an IN service class mark is also assigned to the PBX, the IN service
class mark assigned to the PBX line will take precedence.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
Notes:
to the PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCMREF-3 +
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
to be assigned.
CR INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a subscriber or a PBX.
Prerequisites :
- The parameters LAC, DN must address a subscriber or a PBX
previously created respectively with commands CR SUB or CR PBX.
- Originating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs : IIC, AIC, IBW, ABW.
- Terminating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs: IOG, AOG, IBW, ABW.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a subscriber, no reference to
an originating INSCM must already exist for the subscriber.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX and no reference
to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the PBX lines
belonging to that PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a subscriber or a PBX, no terminating
INSCM must already be assigned to the subscriber or PBX.
- INSCMs may not be assigned to:
- PBX with TYPE = FRAMEHD
= PHI
- Originating INSCMs may not be assigned subscribers with CAT = VIRTSUB.
- Terminating INSCMs may not be assigned to Centrex users.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to subscribers with :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX if the PBX itself or
one of its lines is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INSCMREF-5 +
CR INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a trunk group (for trunk group
based IN-triggering).
Prerequisites :
- The parameter TGNO must address a trunk group, previously created with
the command CR TGRP.
Incompatibilities :
- INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the same object
simultaneously.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to which the
IN service class mark is assigned.
to be assigned.
E N D
CR INSCMREF-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF.
This command deactivates an IN service class mark previously activated.
1. DACT INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
2. DACT INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. DACT INSCMREF- PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
4. DACT INSCMREF- SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
5. DACT INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a digit combination (code).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
to be deactivated.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT INSCMREF-1 +
DACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a centrex group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
LNO LINE NUMBER
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be deactivated.
E N D
DACT INSCMREF-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command displays references of subscribers, PBXs, PBX lines, trunk groups,
centrex groups and digit codes to IN service class marks.
<job number>.
1. DISP INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. DISP INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. DISP INSCMREF- DN IN SCM REFERENCE SUB, PBX AND PBX LINES
4. DISP INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Displays references of digit combinations (codes) to IN service class marks.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INSCMREF-1 +
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
DISP INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Displays references of centrex groups to IN service class marks.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP INSCMREF : CXGRP= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE SUB, PBX AND PBX LINES
Displays references of subscribers, PBXs and PBX lines to IN service class
marks.
-
] ]
] DISP INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OTPTYPE=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
- If LAC=X is entered, DN=X has to be entered, too.
OTPTYPE ORIG./TERM. PARTY TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of originating or terminating
party.
Notes:
- If it is not entered, all types of originating or terminating
party are displayed.
PBX PBX
PBXLN PBX LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
Notes:
to the PBX.
DISP INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
DISP INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Displays references of trunk groups to IN service class marks.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP INSCMREF : TGNO= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
DISP INSCMREF-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command permits to replace an IN service class mark assigned to a
subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a centrex group or a
digit code by another IN service class mark.
Prerequisites :
- The IN service class mark specified in parameter SCMID must have been
created with command CR INSCM.
1. MOD INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. MOD INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
3. MOD INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
4. MOD INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
5. MOD INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCMREF-1 +
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD INSCMREF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark to assigned to a centrex group.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCMREF-3 +
MOD INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a PBX line.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
MOD INSCMREF-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber
or a PBX.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INSCMREF-5 +
MOD INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark to assigned to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
E N D
MOD INSCMREF-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the activation of the service with the
feature Service Filtering for the specified Intelligent Network subscriber
which was deactivated by the operator before.
Prerequisites:
- The subscriber activated by the partner Service Control Point has been
deactivated by the DACT INSLDAT command.
Notes:
- Generally the activation of the subscriber will be done by the Service
Control Point.
- At this activation the counter for valid votes will not be reset.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INSLDAT : VOTEDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT INSLDAT-1 -
CAN INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command removes the service logic data that are necessary for the
feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent Network vote directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified vote directory
number has to be inactive.
Notes:
- Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated by an administration
message from the partner Service Control Point. If it is not able to
send this message, the DACT INSLDAT command may be used.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INSLDAT : VOTEDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INSLDAT-1 -
DACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command deactivates the feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent
Network service subscriber. Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated
by an administration message from the partner Service Control Point or a timer.
If it is not able to send such a message, this command may be used. It can be
used in case of canceling an element, if the Service Control Point is not able
to do it.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified subscriber identifier
has to be active.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INSLDAT : VOTEDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT INSLDAT-1 -
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
numbers for the feature Service Filtering. In order to select a vote directory
number also the protocol type has to be entered. Depending on the FORMAT
parameter specific data for the control of Service Filtering related to a vote
directory number, for the treatment of filtered calls, a SCP address description
or specific statistics (counter) will be displayed. A further choice can be
reached by means of the parameters STATUS, SKEY and MODE to select
all active or inactive Service Filtering entities, all entities related to a
service or all entities related to a control mode, respectively.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INSLDAT : VOTEDN= [,PROT=] [,FORMAT=] [,SKEY=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,STATUS=] [,MODE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
for an Intelligent Network service subscriber on the own exchange:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for the
specified directory number.
- CT has to be used for the selection of information about the
treatment of filtered calls.
- AD has to be used for the selection of an address description
of the partner Service Control Point.
- ST has to be used for the selection of directory number
specific statistic data (counter).
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
AD ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
ST STATUS OF COUNTER
Default: PA
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INSLDAT-1 +
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering entities have to be displayed.
STATUS STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the state of the Service Filtering entities
which are selected to display. Omitting this parameter the active
and inactive entities are displayed. If a vote directory number is
specified, the STATUS parameter should be omitted.
INACT INACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
ACT ACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected for the display.
UP UPDATE CONTROLLED
TI TIME CONTROLLED
E N D
DISP INSLDAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the regeneration of Service Filtering
feature data for Intelligent Network subscriber. The execution of
this command includes the activation of the feature Service Filtering
for this subscriber. All counters assigned to the subscriber entities
(the subscriber with VOTEDN and all with SELCODES entered
consecutive numbered directory numbers). In case of expired TERDATE
and TERTIME, the subscriber will be canceled.
Entering this command not for the purpose of data regeneration but for
the creation, modification or cancelation purpose, a conflict for the
partner Service Control Point could be caused.
Prerequisites:
If MODE = TI then additional following prerequisites are necessary:
- The destination point referenced by the parameters DPC and NETIND has to
be created by command CR C7DP.
- If RTGP = SPC then the SCCP subsystem on the partner SCP identified by
parameter SSID has to be created by command CR SCSS.
- If RTGP = GT and no DPC was entered, i.e. the global title translation
will be executed in the own exchange, then a global title has to be created
in the corresponding global title tree (CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands
(CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If the SSP address used for non call associated dialogues with the
partner SCP shall be a global title then this global title has to be
administered by command CR SCCGPA.
Notes:
- The specified data correspond to the data sent by the Service Control
Point.
- If MODE = TI, all counters are sent to the Service Control Point
in case of modification or cancellation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR INSLDAT : VOTEDN= ,SKEY= ,CHARIND= ,TREAT= [,PROT=] ]
] ]
] - ]
] ],PRECVAL=] ]
] [,ACNSEL=] [,SELCODES=] [,MODE=] -,INTERV= ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,BEGDATE= ,BEGTIME=] [,CODURA=] [,TERDATE= ]
] ]
] ,TERTIME=] [,RELCA=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] ]
] ]
] [,RTGP=] [,NETIND=] [,TTID= ,NA= ,NP=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,GTDIG=] [,DPC=] [,SSID=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INSLDAT-1 +
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service
to be installed on the home exchange.
CHARIND CHARGE INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the kind of charging for calls to all IN
numbers, assigned to this subscriber.
Note:
- Up to two parameter values can be linked with &.
The parameter values PLSATT and PLSSUP can be
entered together.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INDICATOR
NOCHAR NOT TO BE CHARGED
ZONE CHARGED BY ZONE
NOACTR NO SPECIFIC ACTION REQUIRED
PLSATT PULSE CALL ATTEMPT TARIFF
Compatibilities:
- PLSSUP
PLSSUP PULSE SET-UP TARIFF AT ANSWER
Compatibilities:
- PLSATT
b: ZONE NUMBER / TARIFF=
Compatibilities:
- If CHARIND = ZONE, PLSATT or PLSSUP this parameter value
is mandatory.
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code to confirm a counted call
for a valid selection code while executing Service Filtering.
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier the b is of range (1..31).
a-b
a: TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
ENTR INSLDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
This parameter specifies an application context name
selector which is used for the selection of the protocol
version for the dialogue with the SCP.
SELCODES LIMIT OF SELECTION CODES
This parameter specifies the number of selection codes that will be
created for the subscriber.
Default: 1
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected.
TI TIME CONTROLLED
PRECVAL PRECOUNT VALUE
This parameter specifies the number of calls for valid selection codes
that have to be counted until a request to the partner Service Control
Point has to be initiated.
INTERV PRECOUNT INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval in seconds during which the
calls with valid selection code have to be counted. After expiration
a request to the partner Service Control Point has to be initiated.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INSLDAT-3 +
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
Default: current time
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECONDS=
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the time (in seconds) service filtering
will be performed for this entity after the BEGDATE / BEGTIME.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI .
Incompatibilities:
- If no value was entered, the TERDATE and TERTIME has to be entered.
TERDATE TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the stop date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TERTIME TERMINATING TIME
This parameter specifies the stop time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
ENTR INSLDAT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECONDS=
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
to control the call release and intercept treatment.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIVATE NETWORK LOCAL USER
PUL PUBLIC NETWORK LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUBLIC NETWORK REMOTE USER
PRR PRIVATE NETWORK REMOTE USER
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
Default: 31
DURA TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation (in seconds) of the
entered tone or announcement.
Default: 40
ANNCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement . It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
Default: 1
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a Signalling Connection Control Part message
to the Service Control Point.
SPC ROUTE BY SPC AND SSN
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INSLDAT-5 +
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
This parameter specifies the network of the
Service Switching Point.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier
of the global title.
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title.
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title.
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ENTR INSLDAT-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title. The digits can
be input in a structured format.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
a[-b[-c]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 1=
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 2=
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 3=
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the service
specific application part on the partner Service Control Point.
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SCP 2
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INSLDAT-7 +
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ENTR INSLDAT-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
END INSTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY
This command terminates the installation phase.
As a result of this command, normal handling of software faults via SW error
treatment and recovery action groups is possible.
Notes:
During the installation phase software faults cause a processor stop.
Input format
-
] ]
] END INSTALL ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 END INSTALL-1 -
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC
This command starts the recording of IN statistic measurement.
To store the data on disk a measurement file will be created and
the name of the file will be displayed at the OMT. A maximum of
2 commands can be entered.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC INSTAT : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first
be copied to a removable medium.
b: OUTPUT MODE
output to day files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created before
the command is accepted.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data
are output. Time parameters are not permissible
for these measurements.
A day file is closed at the end of the day and a
new file for the next day is automatically created
on the disk, or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the
file for the same day of the week is
overwritten.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC INSTAT-1 +
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(day file or single measurement file).
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in day files.
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
command entry.
a-b-c
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination date.
Notes:
entry.
- Throughout the specified recording period, the measurement data
are called down every 15 minutes and output on the relevant output
device.
specified.
in day files.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates the daily measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
REC INSTAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(BEG).
a-b-c-d
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data are to be recorded.
Notes:
- Up to 6 weekdays (MO..SU) may be linked with &.
The categories of weekdays (NO, WO, HO) may be entered alone.
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with a
termination date (TER).
- If the value HO is selected all sundays, national holidays
and international holidays will be measured.
- The parameter values NO, HO and WO are not usable in
combination with other parameter values.
- Exception: Time parameter may not be specified for the data
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
No input means measurement on all days.
NO EVERY DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC INSTAT-3 -
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION
This command creates an initial installation generation as part of the
initial installation of an application program system (APS) in a
switching processor.
Another differentiation must be made between the initial installation of an
APS and database extension for this APS. Once the initial installation
procedure has been performed, database extension is possible. For this
purpose, the commands MOD DBSIZE and DISP DBSIZE are used.
For creating the initial installation generation, the system files read in
from tape/optical disk are combined to form a file generation. The name of
the generation to be created is taken from the Tasklib. File SY.SEMILIB
(semipermanent database) is extracted from the Tasklib. File SY.SIMP is
extracted from file SY.PSW.T098, provided the latter exists. All these
starting files (production system files) are delivered as non-generation
files by the manufacturer on tape/optical disk. Only in course of
ENTR INSTGEN they are assigned to the generation to be introduced. The
loadlibs are attached and connected and update is activated.
If no files or not all of the files required for creating the initial
installation are specified, the disk is searched for the missing production
system files. Only those files that conform to the conventions for system
files and, of these, only the first file found in each case are used.
A precondition for creating the initial installation generation is that
the complete production system files exist (at least one PSW Lib must exist)
and that they do not belong to different APSs.
The specified file name need not be in accordance with the name conventions
for EWSD system files; if required, the name of the file is automatically
changed to a file name that is in accordance with the EWSD conventions,
when the file is introduced in the initial installation generation.
The name of the initial installation generation is formed as follows:
|---------------|
| ff kk 00 00 |
|---------------|
The command is rejected if a generation exists already.
For information about the generation concept see the command description
for COPY GEN.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR INSTGEN : [LIB=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library in the SSP LIB113D format. Only
TASKLIB, SEMILIB, LOADLIB.LA, LOADLIB.MA, LOADLIB.CA type files and
PSW libraries are accepted. The parameter can be used in the
continuation mode, i.e. several libraries can be specified one after
the other. If the library name is not a system file name, it will be
renamed.
This parameter is used to specify the system files that are to be
incorporated in the installation generation. The specified file must
be without generation,i.e., it must be a production system file read
in from the production tape/optical disk. Accordingly, it is not
permissible to specify a CP-Semilib or Simp-Semilib; these are not
automatically created from the production Tasklib until the initial
installation generation is created. In continuation mode, some or
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR INSTGEN-1 +
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
all production files can be specified one after the other.
E N D
ENTR INSTGEN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INTERNATIONAL TRUNK
This command starts a test of transmission performance and signaling
on international trunks using the test equipment ATE:TM (ATME2 DIR).
It can be used also for the ATME2 application self test.
job.
<job number>.
1. TEST INTLTRK - LNOINT LINE NUMBER INTERVAL
2. TEST INTLTRK - LNORAN LINE NUMBER RANGE
3. TEST INTLTRK - SELFTEST ATME2 SELFTEST
4. TEST INTLTRK - SINGLE SINGLE TRUNK OBJECT TEST
1. Input format
LINE NUMBER INTERVAL
Input format for the operator to request that more than one trunk
object is to be tested.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],LNO=]] ]
] TEST INTLTRK : TGNO= [,FULL=] ]-,CIC=] [,TSTSEL=] [,SCHED=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,HIGHER=] [,BERRPAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
For the ATME2 on demand selftest, this parameter must specify the TGNO
of an ATME2 responder.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST INTLTRK-1 +
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FULL FULL VIEW
Keep information of fault free test results.
If this parameter is specified in the command, the fault free test
result is outputed to the printer (for a transient test job) or kept in
a disk file (for a semipermanent test job). For this last case, it uses
the same file as the faulty results.
N DONT KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
NO DONT KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
Y KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
YES KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk number.
The operating personnel can specify one, a range or a list of trunks,
from one trunk group, to be tested.
This parameter defines the circuit identification code for CCS7 trunks.
The operating personnel can specify one or a list of trunks, from one
trunk group, to be tested.
a-b
TSTSEL TEST SELECTION
Selection of the tests to perform.
BERM BIT ERROR RATE MEASURING
Measurement of bit error rate.
LVLCF MEASURE LEVEL OF CARRIER FREQ.
Measurement of level at the carrier frequency.
LVLHF MEASURE LEVEL OF HIGH FREQ.
Measurement of the level at the high frequency.
LVLLF MEASURE LEVEL OF LOW FREQ.
Measurement of the level at low frequency.
NOISE MEASURING OF NOISE LEVEL
Measurement of the noise level.
QD QUANTIZING DISTORTION
Measurements of quantizing distortion at -10dbm0
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
Responder type C (for the test of busy flash
signal).
SIGTST SIGNALING TEST
Signaling test.
X EXECUTE ALL TESTS ABOVE
TEST INTLTRK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Perform all tests .
Depending on the trunk tests class and Responder type
there are the following default values:
# Test class Resp. Type Default values
1 127 Analog all but QD and BERM
2 127 Dig. Loopback LVLCF,NOISE,QD
3 128 Analog all but QD
4 128 Dig. Loopback as in #2 plus BERM
5 129 Analog BERM
6 129 Dig. Loopback as in #5
Restriction:
for level measurement there are only two possibilities:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
BERM is not allowed for test class 127
This parameter specifies the schedule number which determines the
sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated to a
schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED .
HIGHER HIGHER
Perform level measurings at 0 dbm0.
N NO LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
NO NO LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
Y LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
YES LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
BERRPAT BER RANDOM TEST PATTERN
This parameter specifies whether or not random bit test pattern
is to be used for bit error rate measurement.
NO FIXED BER PATTERN SELECTED
YES RANDOM BER PATTERN SELECTED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST INTLTRK-3 +
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE NUMBER RANGE
Input format for the operator to request that more than one trunk
object is to be tested.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],LNO=]] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,HIGHER=] [,BERRPAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
LNO LINE NUMBER
a-b
TEST INTLTRK-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
signal).
Signaling test.
Perform all tests .
5 129 Analog BERM
Restriction:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
HIGHER HIGHER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST INTLTRK-5 +
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INTLTRK-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST INTLTRK
SELFTEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ATME2 SELFTEST
Input format for the operator to request an ATME2 selftest.
-
] ]
] TEST INTLTRK : TGNO= [,FULL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST INTLTRK-7 +
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SINGLE TRUNK OBJECT TEST
Input format for the operator to request that a single trunk object
is to be tested.
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],LNO=]] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],BERFPAT=]] ]
] [,HIGHER=] [,BERTIME=] [,BERTHR=] ]-,BERRPAT=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
LNO LINE NUMBER
a-b
TEST INTLTRK-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
signal).
Signaling test.
Perform all tests .
5 129 Analog BERM
Restriction:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
HIGHER HIGHER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST INTLTRK-9 +
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BERTIME BER TEST TIME
This parameter specifies the bit error ratio measurement time.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in the trunk group
test data.
Restriction: this parameter is only allowed for single tests.
Corresponds to the duration of bit error ratio measurements, in
seconds.
BERTHR BER TEST THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the bit error rate threshold value, in
percentage.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in the trunk group
test data.
a-b
a: BER THRESHOLD INTEGER PART=
Corresponds to the integer part of threshold.
b: BER THRESHOLD FRACTIONAL PART=
Corresponds to the fractional part of threshold.
BERFPAT BER FIXED TEST PATTERN
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for the bit error rate
measurement.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in trunk group
test data.
Corresponds to the bit pattern.
If less than 8 bits entered, the pattern will be completely
filled with zeros at left.
The default bit pattern is "00000000", the values entered by
the operator overwrite this pattern starting on the rigth
position.
E N D
TEST INTLTRK-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command activates an already created Intelligent Network service.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of specific
code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points by means of
CR ZOPT, or of line triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and CR INSCMREF.
Prerequisites:
- A trigger profile for the specified profile identifier must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT INTRIG : PRID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be activated on
the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT INTRIG-1 -
CAN INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command removes an Intelligent Network service.
Prerequisites:
- The service has to be in inactive status.
- For this trigger profile no related Service Filtering data administered
by a partner SCP or per MML by command ENTR INSLDAT must exist.
- No IN Service Class Marks administered by command CR INSCM and
referring to this trigger profile must exist.
- No specific code or zone points for this trigger profile must exist.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN INTRIG : PRID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
to be removed from the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN INTRIG-1 -
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command creates a trigger profile which is used to install an
Intelligent Network (IN) service on an exchange.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of IN
specific code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points
by means of CR ZOPT or of line, trunk group, centrex group specific
or office based triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF.
The service has to be activated by ACT INTRIG.
Prerequisites:
- If RTGP = GT and no translator service group was entered, i.e. the
global title translation will be executed in the own exchange, then a global
title must have been created in the corresponding global title tree
(CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands (CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If RTGP = GT together with a translator service group was entered,
i.e. the global title translation will be executed in a remote node, then
the corresponding translator service group must have been created by means
of the SCCP command CR SCTRLG.
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
Notes:
- Generally for the protocol type SINAP1 no IN-IN interworking is supported.
Therefore the value GENPROP = FTRINH is set automatically.
1. CR INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. CR INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.
-
] ]
] CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,TTID= [,NP= ,NA=] ]
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],GTDIG= ]] ]
] ]-,PREFIX=] [,TRLG=] [,SSID=] [,PROT=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [,SKEY=] [,SSPGT=] ]
] ]
] [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG=] ]
] ]
] [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [,GENPROP=] [,IWRULE=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [,CHGPROF=] [,DACTINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-1 +
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified
with INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and
NA must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined
from the calling party address or the called party address,
respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA must
be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
Incompatibilities:
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
NP NUMBERING PLAN
CR INTRIG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
the prefix digits and the address signals of the called party number.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-3 +
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation in case the translation shall not be
executed in the SSP.
Prerequisites:
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the partner
Service Control Function (SCF).
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
If a destination point code which specifies an
EWSD node is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that EWSD node is addressed.
If a destination point code which specifies the
own EWSD node is entered together with this
subsystem identifier then the internal SCF on the
own node is addressed.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
Default: CS1
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
SSFTYPE SERVICE SWITCHING FUNCT. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Service Switching
Function for which the trigger profile was created. If an
CR INTRIG-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN trigger was detected the SSF can act as initiating
(normal) or assisting SSF.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
ASST ASSISTING
NORM NORMAL
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8 if PROT = SINAP1.
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
This parameter specifies if a global title for the SSP is to be
entered that will be used instead of the calling party address of
the IN application administered with the command CR SCCGPA.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
Default: NO
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-5 +
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
CR INTRIG-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile. The traffic type is
evaluated after detection of an IN trigger.
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
CLIREQ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CONINH CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-7 +
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DPINH DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
The activation of internal detection points is
not allowed for the current service key. This
property is only relevant for the execution of
special services, e.g. international calls and
Area Wide Centrex with CCBS.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
ENACPH ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
EODREQ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
FTRINH FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
Notes:
- For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
is set automatically.
MCIHLD MCI HOLD REQUESTED
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
MCIPRE MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
MHNCLI MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
ONLCHG ONLINE CHARGING
PCNCHG PER CONNECTION CHARGING
RCNCLI REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
Prerequisites:
- The intercept identifier INANIF must have been
created by the command CR INC.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
SFINH SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
UINCAT USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter specifies the number of the interworking rule
to be applied for the control of the SCP influence on the
interworking of IN with basic network features (project specific).
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
CR INTRIG-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
in case that an IN service request was detected with an
originating line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-9 +
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
Default: SNA0
CR INTRIG-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.
-
] ]
] CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETIND= [,RTGP=] ,SSID= ,DPC= [,PROT=] ]
] ]
] [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [,SKEY=] [,SSPGT=] ]
] ]
] [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG=] ]
] ]
] [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [,GENPROP=] [,IWRULE=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [,CHGPROF=] [,DACTINC=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
Default: SPC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-11 +
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
Default: CS1
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
ASST ASSISTING
NORM NORMAL
CR INTRIG-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
installed on the home exchange. The service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8 if PROT = SINAP1.
Default: NO
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-13 +
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
CR INTRIG-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-15 +
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
is set automatically.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Default: 0
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
a[-b]
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
CR INTRIG-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR INTRIG-17 +
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Default: SNA0
E N D
CR INTRIG-18 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command deactivates an Intelligent Network service.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT INTRIG : PRID= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be deactivated
on the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT INTRIG-1 -
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
trigger profiles. Depending on the FORMAT parameter the data for the
installation of a service, a description of the address of the partner
Service Control Point and, if available in the IN application, the own
address or, for PROT = SINAP1 service specific statistics will be
displayed. A further choice can be reached by the parameters STATUS
to select all active or inactive services, SKEY to select all profiles
related to the specified service key and PROT to select a single protocol
type, respectively.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP INTRIG : PRID= [,FORMAT=] [,SKEY=] [,PROT=] [,SSFTYPE=] ]
] ]
] [,STATUS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile to be
displayed.
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION
for an Intelligent Network service on the own exchange:
- PA may be used for the selection of installation data,
- CT may be used for the selection of call treatment data,
- AD may be used for the selection of address description data,
- ST may be used for the selection of service specific statistics.
Only data of trigger profiles with protocol type SINAP1 and a
service key in the range of 1 to 8 will be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If FORMAT = ST only a profile identifier may be specified. The
service key and the SCP address available in the trigger profile will
be used to select the service specific statistic. If any Service Con-
trol Point concerning the selected service is addressed by a global
title no address may be specified in the corresponding output mask.
PA TRIGGER PROFILE PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
Incompatibilities:
- SSFTYPE = ASST.
AD SCP AND SSP ADDRESSES
ST STATISTICS OF INTELL.NETWORK
Incompatibilities:
- The parameters PROT, STATUS and SKEY must not
be specified.
Default: PA
SKEY SERVICE KEY
displayed.
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP INTRIG-1 +
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The SKEY parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
Incompatibilities:
- The PROT parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
NORM NORMAL
ASST ASSISTING
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
service the data of which has to be displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- The STATUS parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
E N D
DISP INTRIG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command modifies the trigger profile data of an Intelligent
Network service on an exchange, independent of the status of the
service. The following parameters may be changed:
- the protocol type
- the application context name selector
- the network indicator of the SSP
- the complete SCP address
- the complete SSP address
- the traffic type
- the IN category
- the release indicator
- the charge information
- the interworking rule
- the general properties
- the intercept code for the service in status inactive
- the intercept code for an overload situation and
- the intercept code for invalid votes.
If the network indicator will be modified, a complete SCP address and - if
already available - the SSP address also has to be entered.
If the routing preferences for the SCP or the SSP address will be modified, i.e.
if a physical address has to be replaced by a logical or vice versa, then the
new address has to be entered completely.
In case the translation type identifier of the SCP address shall be modified,
then also a complete address including routing preferences has to be specified.
If the translator service group of the SCP address shall be omitted, then a
complete address including routing preferences has to be entered.
Furthermore single parameter values of an already existing logical or physical
address (e.g. the global title digits or the destination point code) may be
modified.
If the protocol type will be changed from SINAP1 to another protocol type the
overload and the invalid vote intercept id in the data base will be ignored.
If the protocol type will be changed from another protocol type to SINAP1,
then the overload resp. the invalid vote intercept id have to be entered. The
subsystem identifier has to be changed accordingly. In addition the parameter
GENPROP = FTRINH is set automatically.
Prerequisites:
- If the protocol type will be changed Service Filtering entities must not
exist for this trigger profile.
- If RTGP = GT and no translator service group was entered, i.e. the
global title translation will be executed in the own exchange, then a global
title must have been created in the corresponding global title tree
(CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands (CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If RTGP = GT together with a translator service group was entered,
i.e. the global title translation will be executed in a remote node, then
the corresponding translator service group must have been created by means
of the SCCP command CR SCTRLG.
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
- If GENPROP = SFINH will be entered Service Filtering entities must
not exist for this trigger profile.
1. MOD INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. MOD INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format has to be used to modify a trigger profile with
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-1 +
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.
-
] ]
] MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,TTID= ,NP= ,NA= ]
] ]
] ,GTDIG= ,PREFIX= ,TRLG= ,SSID= ,PROT= ,ACNSEL= ]
] ]
] ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ]
] ]
] ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= ,INCAT= ,GENPROP= ,CGENPROP= ]
] ]
] ,IWRULE= ,RELEASE= ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ,CCHGPROF= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,DACTINC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
GT ROUTE BY GT
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified with
INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and NA
must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined from
the calling party address or the called party address, respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA
must be entered.
Incompatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
MOD INTRIG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
NP NUMBERING PLAN
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-3 +
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
the prefix digits and the address information of the called party
number.
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation in case the translation shall not be
executed in the SSP.
Prerequisites:
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
MOD INTRIG-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-5 +
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
MOD INTRIG-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-7 +
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter INCAT
will be initialized.
MOD INTRIG-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
a[-b]
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-9 +
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
MOD INTRIG-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-11 +
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to modify a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.
-
] ]
] MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,DPC= ,SSID= ,PROT= ]
] ]
] ,ACNSEL= ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ]
] ]
] ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= ,INCAT= ,GENPROP= ]
] ]
] ,CGENPROP= ,IWRULE= ,RELEASE= ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,CCHGPROF= ,DACTINC=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c]]
MOD INTRIG-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-13 +
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
MOD INTRIG-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-15 +
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
MOD INTRIG-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter INCAT
will be initialized.
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-17 +
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
a[-b]
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
MOD INTRIG-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD INTRIG-19 -
TEST IO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM
This command tests all input/output processors and O&M equipment
which are active.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST IO : [SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST IO-1 -
CAN IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command cancels the input/output controllers IOC-2 and IOC-3.
Prerequisites:
- Both input/output controllers must be PLA.
- All input/output processors must be cancelled first.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IOC : IOC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies one of the input/output controllers to be
cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IOC-1 -
CONF IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command configures an input/output controller.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF IOC : IOC= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be
configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis of the input/output controller
before configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF IOC-1 -
CR IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command creates a second pair of input/output controllers (IOC-2/3).
Input format
-
] ]
] CR IOC : IOC= ,PBI= ,IOCR= ,PBIR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be created.
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
input/output controller.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the input/output controller specified by parameter IOC.
IOCR REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the redundant input/output controller to be
created.
PBIR PBI OF REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location of
the redundant input/output controller specified by parameter IOCR.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IOC-1 -
DIAG IOC
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
for an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output controller must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG IOC - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOC - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output controller.
-
] ]
] DIAG IOC : IOC= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG IOC-1 +
DIAG IOC
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an
input/output controller. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY
interface test.
-
] ]
] DIAG IOC : IOC= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
DIAG IOC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command displays all input/output processors attached
to the input/output controller and their associated bus
connection numbers.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IOC : IOC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IOC-1 -
TEST IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command tests an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output controller and the redundant input/output
controller must be in the operating state ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST IOC : [IOC=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active input/output
processors are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST IOC-1 -
CAN IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command cancels an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The specified input/output processor must be in the operating
state PLA.
- All devices on this input/output processor must be cancelled.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither
be created nor cancelled.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IOP : IOP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be cancelled.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IOP-1 -
CONF IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command configures an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must have been created.
- Load file SY.PSW.Tnnn (nnn = load type) must exist
on disk if IOPLAU or IOPUNI is to be entered subsequently.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF IOP : IOP= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the type and number of the processor
to be configured.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
b: IOP NUMBER=
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF IOP-1 -
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command creates a new input/output processor. The created
input/output processor is in the operating state PLA after
the command has been executed.
1. CR IOP - IOPLAU CREATE IOPLAU
2. CR IOP - IOPMB CREATE IOPMB
3. CR IOP - IOPUNI CREATE IOPUNI
4. CR IOP - SPEC CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
1. Input format
CREATE IOPLAU
This input creates an input/output processor for a link
adaption unit
-
] ]
] CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,IOPR= ,BIOCR= [,LOADTP=] ]
] ]
] [,LDPRTY=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
IOPR REDUNDANT IOP
This parameter specifies the number of the redundant input/output
processor for a redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- This input/output processor must be connected to the redundant
input/output controller specified by the IOC parameter.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IOP-1 +
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: TYPE OF REDUNDANT IOP
b: NUMBER OF REDUNDANT IOP=
BIOCR REDUNDANT B:IOC CONNECTION NO.
This parameter assigns the redundant input/output processor
to the bus connection number.
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
Default: 100
LDPRTY LOAD PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the load priority.
Notes:
- The load priority specifies the moment during system recovery
(initial start with reloading of the LTGs) at which the IOPLAU
is loaded.
The loading of a high priority IOPLAU delays the start of call
processing.
HIGH HIGH LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of high priority IOPLAUs
before or during loading of LTGs.
LOW LOW LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of low priority IOPLAUs
after loading of LTGs and start of
call processing.
Default: LOW
CR IOP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IOP
IOPMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE IOPMB
This input creates an input/output processor
for a message buffer.
-
] ]
] CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,SUBST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
SUBST SUBSTITUTE FOR IOP MSG BUFFER
This parameter specifies the substitute input/output processor
for the message buffer.
Notes:
- This parameter must only be specified in connection with this
processor type.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IOP-3 +
CR IOP
IOPUNI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE IOPUNI
This input creates an input/output processor unified for O&M devices.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither be
created nor be cancelled.
-
] ]
] CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= [,LOADTP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
Default: 121
CR IOP-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IOP
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
This input creates an input/output processor for:
- an OMT/operator terminal
- an operator terminal
- a MTD
-
] ]
] CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IOP-5 -
DIAG IOP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
for an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG IOP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output processor.
-
] ]
] DIAG IOP : IOP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG IOP-1 +
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
input/output processor.
-
] ]
] DIAG IOP : IOP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted there is no statistic output.
command.
DIAG IOP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG IOP-3 -
DISP IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command displays the operating state of the specified input/output
processor, the associated input/output controller, the connection number on
the B:IOC, the connected devices and the redundant partner for an IOPMB.
Additional information for IOPLAU: number and operating state of the
link adaption unit, load type and load priority of the IOPLAU and
the number of the redundant input/output processor.
Additional information for IOPUNI: load type and information whether
system or init part of the flash memory is used. During normal operation
code of system part is used. Code of init part is used during hardware
recovery of CP (basic input/output function) or in case of a missing or
destroyed system part.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP IOP : IOP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IOP-1 -
TEST IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command tests one or all input/output processors of one
type.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must be ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST IOP : IOP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be tested.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST IOP-1 -
CONF IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP
This command configures the input/output processor group belonging to
the specified input/output controller.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF IOPG : IOC= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor group.
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF IOPG-1 -
DIAG IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP
This command initiates diagnosis of the input/output processor group
belonging to the specified input/output controller. All input/output
processors with operating state MBL are diagnosed.
Prerequisites:
- Each input/output processor of the input/output processor group
must be MBL or PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG IOPG : IOC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG IOPG-1 -
TEST IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST IOP GROUP
This command tests an input/output processor group on the specified
input/output controller. All active input/output processors are tested.
Prerequisites:
- Each input/output processor of the input/output processor group
must be ACT or PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST IOPG : IOC= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST IOPG-1 -
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of IOP
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]PLF= ] ]
] DMP IOPIMDMP : -UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the platform number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the IOP loadlib
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP-1 +
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
single quote.
omitted.
Notes:
shorthand for
omitted.
instead of
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
address is entered.
DMP IOPIMDMP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP-3 -
ACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Permanent
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the IOP number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IOPPRPCH-1 -
CAN IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IOPPRPCH : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IOPPRPCH-1 -
DACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT IOPPRPCH-1 -
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH
by parameter PLF.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ID= ] ]
] DISP IOPPRPCH : -ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
symbolically.
structures:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH-1 +
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP IOPPRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH
Disk).
With each ENTR IOPPRPCH command one of the four different
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR IOPPRPCH command is
necessary.
parameter SUBPCHNO.
ENTR IOPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],INSRADDR=] ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR IOPPRPCH : ID= -,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= ]
] ],INSVREF= ] ]
] ],SUBPCHNO=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,OLDCNT=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
must be identical.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH-1 +
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or not.
&&"+offset" ,where
parameter ID.
of INSRADDR.
insert procedure.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
patch.
a-b
ENTR IOPPRPCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
declared.
ENTR IOPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
subpatch.
a[-b]
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH-3 +
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ENTR IOPPRPCH-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
UPD IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] UPD IOPPRPCH : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 UPD IOPPRPCH-1 -
ACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IOPTRPCH-1 -
CAN IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IOPTRPCH-1 -
DACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT IOPTRPCH-1 -
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],ID= ] ]
] DISP IOPTRPCH : PLF= -,ADDR= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
symbolically.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH-1 +
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
structures:
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP IOPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With each ENTR IOPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
ENTR IOPTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= -,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
identical.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR IOPTRPCH-1 +
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter ID.
ENTR IOPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
E N D
ENTR IOPTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command activates one or two ISDN packet data nailed-up
connections.
Prerequisites:
- The ISDN packet data nailed-up connection must be created with
CR IPNUC.
TYPE BDCH:
The BD-channel nailed-up connection is activated.
TYPE BDDLUCH or IPCH:
If the parameter NUC is specified without an extension X
or Y both nailed-up connections belonging to the given
identifier are activated.
If the parameter NUC is specified with an extension X
or Y only the one nailed-up connection with the given
identifier is activated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT IPNUC : NUC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet data nailed-up connection
to be activated.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT IPNUC-1 -
CAN IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command cancels existing nailed-up connections.
If the nailed-up connections are active they are first
deactivated automatically.
If the parameter NUC is specified with the extension X or Y
only the corresponding nailed-up connection is canceled.
Otherwise both nailed-up connections belonging to the NUC
identifier are canceled.
TYPE BDCH:
The specified nailed-up connection is canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN IPNUC : NUC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the packet data nailed-up connection to be
cancelled.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN IPNUC-1 -
CR IPNUC
BDCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command creates an ISDN packet data nailed-up connection.
It does not activate the nailed-up connection.
1. CR IPNUC - BDCH BD-CHANNEL NUC
2. CR IPNUC - BDDLUCH BD-DLU-CHANNEL NUC
3. CR IPNUC - BDSILCCH BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
4. CR IPNUC - BDV52CH BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
5. CR IPNUC - IPCH ISDN PACKET DATA NUC
1. Input format
BD-CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create a BD-channel nailed-up connection.
-
] ]
] CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,EQNIC= ,EQNOG1= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name
of a packet data nailed-up connection.
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
EQNIC EQUIPMENT NUMBER INCOMING
This parameter specifies the equipment number on the incoming side
of an ISDN packet data nailed-up connection.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDCH
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IPNUC-1 +
CR IPNUC
BDCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EQNOG1 EQUIPMENT NUMBER OUTGOING 1
This parameter specifies the equipment number on the outgoing side
of a nailed-up connection.
Only an equipment number connected to an outgoing or bothway access
is legal.
For nailed-up connections of TYPE IPCH or BDDLUCH it is
possible to enter two outgoing equipment numbers. In this case this
parameter specifies the operating channel.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
CR IPNUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IPNUC
BDDLUCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
BD-DLU-CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create one or two BD-DLU-channel nailed-up
connections.
If both outgoing equipment numbers are specified, two
nailed-up connections will be created.
In this case, only five characters are allowed for the
parameter NUC. The command extends this value by X
and Y for the two ways of the DLU.
If only one outgoing equipment number is specified, the
last character of the parameter NUC must be an X or a Y
to indicate which way of the DLU shall be used.
-
] ]
] CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,DLU= ,EQNOG1= [,EQNOG2=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDDLUCH BD DLU CHANNEL NUC
This parameter specifies the incoming <DLU number> of ISDN packet data
nailed-up connections.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
- TYPE = IPCH
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IPNUC-3 +
CR IPNUC
BDDLUCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
is legal.
parameter specifies the standby channel.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
CR IPNUC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IPNUC
BDSILCCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create an BD Silc channel nailed-up connection.
and Y for the two ways of the V5.2 C-channel.
to indicate which way of the V5.2 C-channel shall be used.
-
] ]
] CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= ,EQNOG1= ]
] ]
] [,EQNOG2=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDSILCCH BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
This parameter specifies the V5 interface number for ISDN packet
data nailed-up connections.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
V5CHANID V5 CHANNEL ID
This parameter specifies the V5 channel ID for ISDN packet
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IPNUC-5 +
CR IPNUC
BDSILCCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
CR IPNUC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IPNUC
BDV52CH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create an BD V52 channel nailed-up connection.
and Y for the two ways of the V5.2 C-channel.
to indicate which way of the V5.2 C-channel shall be used.
-
] ]
] CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= ,EQNOG1= ]
] ]
] [,EQNOG2=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDV52CH BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IPNUC-7 +
CR IPNUC
BDV52CH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
CR IPNUC-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR IPNUC
IPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
ISDN PACKET DATA NUC
Input format to create an ISDN packet data nailed-up connection.
and Y for the two ways of the DLU.
to indicate which way of the DLU shall be used.
-
] ]
] CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,DLU= ,EQNOG1= [,EQNOG2=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
IPCH ISDN PACKET CHANNEL NUC
This parameter specifies the incoming <DLU number> of ISDN packet data
nailed-up connections.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
- TYPE = IPCH
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR IPNUC-9 +
CR IPNUC
IPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
is legal.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
E N D
CR IPNUC-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates the specified ISDN packet data
nailed-up connection.
If the parameter NUC is specified with the extension X or Y
only the corresponding nailed-up connection is deactivated.
Otherwise both nailed-up connections belonging to the NUC
identifier are deactivated.
TYPE BDCH:
The specified nailed-up connection is deactivated.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT IPNUC : NUC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet nailed-up connection to be
deactivated.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT IPNUC-1 -
DISP IPNUC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command displays the data for specified or for all ISDN packet
<job number>.
1. DISP IPNUC - ALL DISPLAY ALL NUCS
2. DISP IPNUC - NAME DISPLAY ONE NUC
3. DISP IPNUC - UNIT DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL NUCS
Input format to display all packet data nailed-up connections.
The output can be restricted with the TYPE and STATE parameters.
-
] ]
] DISP IPNUC : [STATE=] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STATE NUC STATUS
Status of the ISDN packet data nailed-up connections to be displayed.
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
PCM ACTIVE NUC WITH PCM FAULT
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
TYPE NUC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the nailed-up connection.
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IPNUC-1 +
DISP IPNUC
NAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ONE NUC
Input format to diplay packet data nailed-up connections by their
NUC identifier.
-
] ]
] DISP IPNUC : [NUC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
DISP IPNUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP IPNUC
UNIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
Input format to display all packet data nailed-up connections
selected via equipment number.
The output can be restricted with the TYPE and the STATE
parameters.
-
] ]
] DISP IPNUC : [EQN=] [,TYPE=] [,STATE=] [,FRAMEHD=] ]
] ]
] [,V5CHANID=] [,V5IF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies either
- a certain DLU or
- an LTG equipment number
for wich ISDN packet data nailed-up connections shall be displayed.
Equipment numbers for an LTG can be specified completely or partly.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: TSG NUMBER=
For DLU: Equivalent to <DLU number>
Only the values 10,20,30...380,390...2550
are legal.
For LTG: Equivalent to <TSG number>
Only decimal numbers in the range 0-7 are legal.
b: LTG NUMBER=
Equivalent to <LTG number>
Incompatibilities:
- This information unit must not be entered
if a certain DLU is specified.
c: LTU NUMBER=
Equivalent to <LTU number>
Incompatibilities:
d: PORT NUMBER=
Equivalent to <PORT number>
Incompatibilities:
TYPE NUC TYPE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP IPNUC-3 +
DISP IPNUC
UNIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
STATE NUC STATUS
Status of the ISDN packet data nailed-up connections to be displayed.
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the frame handler reference number for
ISDN packet data nailed-up connections.
This value is determined automatically by the CR IPNUC command
depending on the entered outgoing equipment numbers.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
E N D
DISP IPNUC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD ISDN P DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates an existing ISDN packet nailed-up connection
and activates a new connection with the new port. When a port fails,
this command allows fast switchover to another port.
Prerequisites:
- the specified nailed-up connection must be active
- a suitable standby port must be available
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD IPNUC : NUC= ,EQN= ,NEWEQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet nailed-up connection.
For nailed-up connections with TYPE IPCH or BDDLUCH the
name must be entered with X or Y in the last position.
.,+,*,%,#
This parameter specifies the old equipment number.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the new equipment number.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD IPNUC-1 +
MOD IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
E N D
MOD IPNUC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST ISUB
DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BASIC ACCESS
This command initiates a test job for:
QUICK Test.
CTC, continuity test check.
The subscribers to be tested with QUICK test are
specified by entering either directory-number-oriented or
equipment-number-oriented data.
The subscribers to be tested with a continuity test check are
specified by entering equipment-number-oriented, data.
For CTC, it is possible to test multiple subscribers, but it is
not possible to perform a CTC for subscribers in DLU and
V5IF at the same time.
The CTC cannot be controlled by a schedule, and the addressing
of the subscribers is always done via the physical termination.
The routine test is a QUICK test with schedule, i.e. it is started
automatically. The schedule must first be created.
<job number>.
1. TEST ISUB - DLULC EQN ORIENTED
2. TEST ISUB - DNQUICK DN ORIENTED QUICK TEST
3. TEST ISUB - V5CTC V5 CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
1. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
Input format for dlu equipment-oriented continuity test check
or quick test.
-
] ]
] TEST ISUB : DLU= [,LC=] ,TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number where the test is to
be run.
When x is entered this command initiates parallel testing on
all DLUs.
Either DN or DLU must be specified, but not both in the case of
routine test type or quick test.
Either V5IF or DLU must be specified, but not both in the case of
a continuity test check.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
LC may only be used if parameter DLU was input.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST ISUB-1 +
TEST ISUB
DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
TYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test type.
QUICK in the case of quick or routine test type.
CTC in the case of continuity test check.
CTC CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
QUICK QUICK TEST
TEST ISUB-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST ISUB
DNQUICK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN ORIENTED QUICK TEST
Input format for directory-number-oriented quick test or routine
test type.
-
] ]
] TEST ISUB : DN= [,LAC=] [,SCHED=] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber
line.
A test job for a DN interval can be given by linking two parameters
with &&.
This parameter is only allowed for Routine test type or quick test.
Remark:
The following text "and/or parameter intervals" is not relevant
(not realized) at the moment.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code .It is required, if
there is more than one local network in the exchange.
LAC may only be used if parameter DN was input.
This parameter is only allowed for routine test type or quick test.
This parameter associates the test job with a pre-defined
test schedule (which must have already been set up using the
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE command). Instead of running immediately, the
test job will execute at the time specified in the Test
Schedule. This may be used to cause the test job
to run routinely (i.e. every night at a certain time).
TYPE TEST TYPE
CTC - CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
~QUICK - QUICK TEST
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST ISUB-3 +
TEST ISUB
V5CTC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
V5 CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
Input format for V5 interface-number-oriented continuity test check.
-
] ]
] TEST ISUB : V5IF= [,V5PORT=] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the v5 interface number where the
continuity test check is to be run.
When x is entered this command initiates parallel testing on
all V5IFs.
Either V5IF or DLU must be specified, but not both in the
case of a continuity test check.
V5PORT V5 PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the port number of one or more line circuits
in the V5 interface.
V5PORT only be used if parameter V5IF was input.
TYPE TEST TYPE
CTC - CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
~QUICK - QUICK TEST
E N D
TEST ISUB-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL JOB
This command cancels semipermanent jobs. Timer jobs scheduled
for predetermined times can be cancelled. Time jobs which are
running must first be stopped before they can be cancelled.
Notes:
- This command may not be entered from command files.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN JOB : JN= ,CMDCOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies the command code of the job to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN JOB-1 -
CONT JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTINUE JOB
This command reactivates user processes which were started by commands
with the attribute CONTINUE.
Prerequisite:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONT JOB : JN= [,STEP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the logical step up to which the job
should be processed.
Note:
With some processes this parameter is mandatory.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT JOB-1 -
DISP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOB
This command displays job data for one job or all jobs.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP JOB : [JN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP JOB-1 -
STOP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP JOB
This command stops transient jobs or part-jobs which have the command
attribute STOP.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] STOP JOB : JN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP JOB-1 -
DISP JOSITDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA
This command displays internal tracer data specified by the parameter
SELECT.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP JOSITDAT : [SELECT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SELECT SELECTION
This parameter determines the displayed tracer data.
X ALL AVAILABLE SS DATA
COLLECT PARAM VALUES OF LAST ACTOSITRA
Parameter values of the last ACT OSITRAC command.
TSTATE ACTUAL TRACER STATUS
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP JOSITDAT-1 -
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL KEYWORD
This command cancels a keyword for a subscriber, a PBX line
or a PBX.
Notes:
- If applicable an AMA-ticket can be generated.
- If applicable an FIR-ticket can be generated.
1. CAN KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. CAN KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX-line/PBX.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
Notes:
- This parameter is ommissible if only one OPMODE exists for the
chosen PBX.
ABW - ANALOG BOTHWAY
]AIC ] ANALOG INCOMING
]IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
~IIC - ISDN INCOMING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN KEYWORD-1 +
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
CAN KEYWORD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN KEYWORD-3 -
DISP KEYWORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY KEYWORD
This command displays a subscriber, a PBX line
or a PBX keyword.
Keywords may be displayed for:
- a single subscriber,
- a single PBX line,
- a single PBX,
- a range of directory numbers,
- all directory numbers in an exchange.
Notes:
- The Parameter KEY will not be displayed if it is a security
keyword.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
It is administered with the commands CR PBX and MOD PBX.
Notes:
- If OPMODE is specified, LNO must be entered too.
chosen PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP KEYWORD-1 +
DISP KEYWORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
]IIC ] ISDN INCOMING
~MBW - MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
E N D
DISP KEYWORD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER KEYWORD
This command enters a keyword for
- a subscriber (categories main station,ISDN basic access,
two party line, coinbox and cordless terminal mobility)
- a PBX line (bothway or incoming to the switch; categories main station,
ISDN basic access, B-channel of ISDN primary access fixed and cordless
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
(for TYPE = PBX, MLHG, PASLAVE or no special PBX-TYPE).
For some subscriber classes of service administered via SCI
(subscriber controled input) a keyword is mandatory.
Only Subscribers with security keyword are allowed to modify keyword per SCI.
Notes:
- A secure Keyword is stored and logged in coded form.
- If applicable a FIR-ticket can be generated.
- If no Keyword is entered, a default value is set
(see command DISP CALLPOPT).
1. ENTR KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. ENTR KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
-
] ]
] ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,KEY=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SECURE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR KEYWORD-1 +
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
chosen PBX.
]IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
~IIC - ISDN INCOMING
LNO LINE NUMBER
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword ist entered, a default value will be set.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
N -- NORMAL KEYWORD
]-NO ] NORMAL KEYWORD
]]Y ]] SECURITY KEYWORD
~YES '- SECURITY KEYWORD
Default: N
ENTR KEYWORD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,KEY=] [,SECURE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword ist entered, a default value will be set.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
N -- NORMAL KEYWORD
]-NO ] NORMAL KEYWORD
]]Y ]] SECURITY KEYWORD
~YES '- SECURITY KEYWORD
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR KEYWORD-3 -
CONF LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command configures a LAU.
The LAU is activated without test.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF LAU : LAU= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ACT ACTIVE
Because of its influence on the X25LINKs,
configuration of a LAU from ACT to MBL is
considered as dangerous. A dialog mask is output.
The operating personnel must decide, by entering
+ or -, whether the command should
be executed.
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF LAU-1 -
DIAG LAU
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
for a link adaption unit.
Prerequisites:
- The link adaption unit must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG LAU - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG LAU - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a link adaption unit.
-
] ]
] DIAG LAU : LAU= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG LAU-1 +
DIAG LAU
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a link
adaption unit.
-
] ]
] DIAG LAU : LAU= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
INT INTERRUPTION
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the interval between
statistic outputs in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the
DISP DIAGSTAT command.
E N D
DIAG LAU-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command tests LAUs. The interface to the IOPLAU
is tested, and also X25LINK specific HW parts of the LAU
in case a X25LINK is not ACT.
Prerequisite:
- The units which are to be tested must be ACT.
- The IOP must be active.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST LAU : [LAU=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the link adaption unit to be tested.
Note:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active
link adaption units are tested.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LAU-1 -
MOD LCVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT
This command modifies a line circuit variant in a created LTU.
Prerequisites:
- Higher-ranking objects (TSG, LTG, LTU) must already exist.
- The specified equipment number must not be in service.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LCVAR : EQN= ,LCVAR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the port equipment number.
a-b-c-d
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
This unit specifies the LTU number.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
This unit specifies the channel number.
LCVAR LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT
This parameter specifies the (new/old) line circuit variant
(serves to check attenuation and impedance).
Notes:
- Meaning of the parameter values
1. For TCB 800 C:
0 Transmit level -10.5 ... -11.0 dBm
Receive level + 5.5 ... + 6.0 dBm
1 As in LCVAR = 0, but test object disconnected,
HW exists, call location and distant operator not connected
2 As in LCVAR = 3, but test object disconnected
3 Transmit level 0.0 dBm
Receive level 0.0 dBm
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LCVAR-1 +
MOD LCVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. For ETEAE:
0 Receive threshold value is ignored in test
1 Receive threshold value + 3.0 ... - 4.0 dBm
2 Receive threshold value - 4.0 ... -13.0 dBm
3 Receive threshold value -12.5 ... -25.0 dBm
n/o
E N D
MOD LCVAR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LIC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINE CIRCUIT
This command tests circuits in an LTGA.
job.
<job number>.
1. TEST LIC - ALL
2. TEST LIC - SPEC
1. Input format
This input format is to be used for testing the circuits of a directory
number volume or all circuits in an exchange.
-
] ]
] TEST LIC : EQN= [,SCHED=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the lines to be
tested.
Restriction:
Channels 0 and 16 are not allowed in PCM-30 systems.
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <TSG No.>
unit values.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LIC-1 +
TEST LIC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <LTG No.>
unit values.
c: LTU NUMBER=
Corresponds to <LTU No.>
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
Corresponds to <PORT No.>
determines the sequence of the started job.
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
TEST LIC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LIC
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is to be used for testing a circuit. The parameters
PERM and STEP can only be used in connection with a test object.
-
] ]
] TEST LIC : EQN= [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] [,STEP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the lines to be
tested.
Restriction:
Channels 0 and 16 are not allowed in PCM-30 systems.
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <TSG No.>
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <LTG No.>
unit values.
c: LTU NUMBER=
Corresponds to <LTU No.>
unit values.
d: CHANNEL NUMBER=
Corresponds to <PORT No.>
determines the sequence of the started job.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test is to be
performed.
N NO PERMANENT TEST
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LIC-3 +
TEST LIC
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y PERMANENT TEST
Default: N
STEP STEP COMMAND
The test table of the test object is country-specific and is contained
in the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
E N D
TEST LIC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN
This command displays the enhanced status of a subscriber or of PBX lines. In
case of PBX lines this status is displayed also for the operating mode and the
PBX, to which the lines belong.
The enhanced status consists of both the transient and the semipermanent data
indicating the busy/idle status or any kind of blocking. In case of an ISDN
basic access the busy/idle information contains the number of busy B-channels.
More information about the basic access can be obtained by the command
STAT BA.
This command also displays the total number of lines of a PBX and the number
of lines blocked for administrative and maintenance reasons.
<job number>.
1. STAT LINE - DN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
2. STAT LINE - EQN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
3. STAT LINE - LSN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
1. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via directory number.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= [,LNO=]] [,FORMAT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more than one
local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or the
pilot directory number of the PBX with the line to be displayed.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT LINE-1 +
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line to be
displayed.
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter displays a table with the total number
of lines of a PBX and the number of lines blocked for
administrative and maintenance reasons.
BLOCKED BLOCKED PBX LINES
This identifier outputs the total number of
lines of a PBX and the number of lines blocked
for administrative and maintenance reasons.
The number of PBX lines will be listed
separately per each category and operating mode.
Incompatibilities:
Parameter:
OPMODE
LNO
STAT LINE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT LINE
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via equipment number.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] STAT LINE : EQN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the port, connected to
the subcriber or PBX line to be displayed.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG / DLU / V5IF=
- TSG number (0..7 for a LTG port)
- DLU number (10,20,30..2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000..8999 for a V5 port )
b: LTG / SHELF=
- LTG number (1..63 for a LTG port )
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..3 for a DLU16 port)
- (0 for a V5 port )
c: LTU / MODULE=
- LTU number (0..7 for a LTG port)
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port)
- V5 port number (0 for a V51 port,
0..20 for a V52 port)
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT=
- Channel number (0..31 for a LTG port )
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port)
- V5 port number (0..31 for a V51 port,
0..99 for a V52 port )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT LINE-3 +
STAT LINE
LSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via line service number.
This format can be used only for PBX lines with a line service number
associated.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,LSN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
LSN LINE SERVICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line service number of a PBX line to be
displayed. A line service number is a number associated with a
PBX line to make this line direct dialable or for billing purposes.
E N D
STAT LINE-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LINE
GROUPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINE
This command tests and monitors analog and digital subscriber lines
connected to DLUs or LTGAs and analog terminal equipment.
Prerequisites:
- A work station must be created and activated.
- This command may not be entered until a test and speech connection
has been set up to the test object using command START LTEST.
Notes:
- If the test object is busy, connection can be broken into.
1. TEST LINE - GROUPT GROUP TEST
2. TEST LINE - ONLYFCT TESTS WITHOUT FCTPAR
3. TEST LINE - SINGLET SINGLE TEST
4. TEST LINE - WITHFCTP TESTS THAT NEED PARAM FCTPAR
1. Input format
GROUP TEST
Input format, if the value GT is entered for parameter
FCT.
-
] ]
] TEST LINE : FCT= [,MEAVOL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the test function.
GT GROUP TEST
MEAVOL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE
This parameter specifies the volts value for resistance
and capacity measurements on analog and digital ba lines.
This parameter allow only the test type ST or GT
entered for parameter FCT.
The default value for analog line is 50.
The default value for digital BA line is 11.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LINE-1 +
TEST LINE
ONLYFCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TESTS WITHOUT FCTPAR
Input format for all test functions without parameter FCTPAR.
-
] ]
] TEST LINE : FCT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
DP DIAL PULSE TEST
DT DIAL TEST MF
Push button dialing
EC TEST OF EMERGENCY CALL
Test of coinbox emergency call equipment
EL EXTERN LINE
Switch test access to external line or
release an existing speech connection
ER EARTH RESISTANCE
ET TEST OF EMERGENCY TELEPHONE
FP FLASH PULSE
GR GENERAL RELEASE
Complete release of test and speech connection
GT GROUP TEST
HT HOWLER TONE
IL INTERN LINE
LF LINE FEED
LP LOOP
Test circuit loop detection
MO MONITORING
MT METER TEST
Increase private meter for functional test
OF FUNCTION OFF
End current test function
RI RINGING
RL RESISTANCE LOOP
SA SUPERVISION A
Foreign voltage end indication;
voltage to a-wire, ground to b-wire
SB SUPERVISION B
Foreign voltage end indication;
ground to a-wire, voltage to b-wire
SC SUPERVISION C
Indication of loop short on the subscriber line,
and search tone injection
SD SUPERVISION D
Indication of loop short or incoming call
SE SUPERVISION E
Indication of loop open or end of conversation
TO TONE
Search tone
TU SELFTEST TU
XL CROSS LINE
TEST LINE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LINE
SINGLET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SINGLE TEST
Input format, if the value ST is entered for parameter
FCT.
-
] ]
] TEST LINE : FCT= [,FCTPAR=] [,MEAVOL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
ST SINGLE TEST
FCTPAR FUNCTION PARAMETER
This parameter allows test types ST, CB or OA, entered for
parameter FCT, to be given more detailed classification.
(see MMN:TE)
Test type ST = SINGLE TEST
CAG or CAE CAPACITANCE A-wire to ground
CBG or CBE CAPACITANCE B-wire to ground
CAB CAPACITANCE A-wire to B-wire
RAG or RAE RESISTANCE A-wire to ground
RBG or RBE RESISTANCE B-wire to ground
RAB RESISTANCE A-wire to B-wire
AAG or AAE AC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
ABG or ABE AC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
AAB AC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
DAG or DAE DC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
DBG or DBE DC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
DAB DC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
<blank> Output of previous test results
Test type CB = COINBOX TEST
CM COINBOX PARAMETER - only world market
CP COIN PRESENT - only USA
CC COIN COLLECT - only USA
CR COIN RETURN - only USA
HT OWN EXCHANGE STATISTICS METER - only USA
Test type OA = OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
1 - 8 digits (0 to F) - world market
1 - 14 digits (0 to F) - only DBP
MEAVOL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE
This parameter specifies the volts value for resistance
and capacity measurements on analog and digital ba lines.
This parameter allow only the test type ST or GT
entered for parameter FCT.
The default value for analog line is 50.
The default value for digital BA line is 11.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LINE-3 +
TEST LINE
SINGLET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINE-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LINE
WITHFCTP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TESTS THAT NEED PARAM FCTPAR
Input format, if the values CB or OA are entered for
parameter FCT.
-
] ]
] TEST LINE : FCT= ,FCTPAR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
CB COINBOX TEST
OA OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
Test digit recognition of circuit
FCTPAR FUNCTION PARAMETER
This parameter allows test types ST, CB or OA, entered for
parameter FCT, to be given more detailed classification.
(see MMN:TE)
Test type ST = SINGLE TEST
CAG or CAE CAPACITANCE A-wire to ground
CBG or CBE CAPACITANCE B-wire to ground
CAB CAPACITANCE A-wire to B-wire
RAG or RAE RESISTANCE A-wire to ground
RBG or RBE RESISTANCE B-wire to ground
RAB RESISTANCE A-wire to B-wire
AAG or AAE AC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
ABG or ABE AC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
AAB AC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
DAG or DAE DC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
DBG or DBE DC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
DAB DC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
<blank> Output of previous test results
Test type CB = COINBOX TEST
CM COINBOX PARAMETER - only world market
CP COIN PRESENT - only USA
CC COIN COLLECT - only USA
CR COIN RETURN - only USA
HT OWN EXCHANGE STATISTICS METER - only USA
Test type OA = OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
1 - 8 digits (0 to F) - world market
1 - 14 digits (0 to F) - only DBP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LINE-5 -
DISP LINEDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE DATA
This command displays alternatively
- the International Portable User Identities (IPUI)
of Cordless Terminal Mobilities (CTM) SUB or PBXLN
- the public Business Group Identifications (BGID)
of SUB or PBX
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP LINEDATA : COSDAT= [,LAC=] [,DN=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter selects the display of the International Portable User
Identities or Business Group Identifications.
a[-b]
a: CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
IPUI INTERNATIONAL PORTABLE USER ID
b: NUMBER=
Following values are allowed:
IPUI 1..25 digits hexadecimal
BGID 2..16777215 range of decimal numbers
Note:
- If no value is entered, it represents the
entire range of unit values.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is only possible together with parameter DN.
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER (SDN/PDN)
Note:
- Input of a directory number is only allowed if no
number in parameter COSDAT is entered.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LINEDATA-1 -
DISP LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS
This command displays thresholds for monitoring individual and
PBX lines. These thresholds must have been entered with the
command ENTR LINETHR.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LINETHR ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LINETHR-1 -
ENTR LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS
This command is used to enter the thresholds for monitoring
individual or PBX lines in an exchange.
- Individual lines are monitored for over long events and for
port faults. If the threshold is exceeded, the alarm unnecessary
seizure appears on the system panel.
- PBX groups are monitored for the number of disturbed and seized
lines in the group. If for a group the disturbed lines exceed
the threshold, the alarm PBX group alarm appears on the system panel.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR LINETHR : <LNLOCKAL= ,PGATHR=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNLOCKAL LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
This parameter specifies the threshold for individual lines.
Note:
- The threshold for individual lines is entered as the maximum
number of disturbed lines.
Default: 5
PGATHR PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold for PBX trunks.
Note:
- All trunks (bothway, outgoing and incoming) of all PBXs are
monitored.
a[-b]
a: PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD=
The threshold for PBX trunks is entered as minimum availability
in percent.
Default: 50
b: MINIMUM NUMBER OF LINES IN PBX GROUP FOR THRESHOLD=
Monitoring is started for a PBX trunk when this minimum number
of lines is reached.
Default: 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LINETHR-1 -
DISP LISTTOAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT
This command displays the transient announcement lists for
one, anyone or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
Notes:
- The command can only display announcements which use
broadcasting.
- Announcements installed as normal trunks are
not displayed by this command.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LISTTOAN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Notes:
- For this parameter the value X is allowed to display the
announcement lists of all announcement trunk groups.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number within the recorded
announcement group.
Notes:
- up to 32 line numbers can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LISTTOAN-1 -
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command cancels a call processing block for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory numbers.
1. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKMD CANCEL BLOCKED PORT MULTIP. DN
2. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPB CANCEL BLOCKED PBX
3. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPG CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
4. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPL CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
5. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKSB CANCEL BLOCKED SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PORT MULTIP. DN
Input format for canceling blocked port with several different
directory numbers (all directory numbers of a specific equipment number
are unblocked).
-
] ]
] CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
MDN PORT WITH FEATURE MULTIPLE DN
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...15 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LMBLK-1 +
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
b: LTG/SHELF=
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
CAN LMBLK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX.
-
] ]
] CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LMBLK-3 +
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX line group.
-
] ]
] CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= ,DN= ,OPMODE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
PBXGRP PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
CAN LMBLK-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX line.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],EQN=] ]
] CAN LMBLK : TYPE= -,LAC= [,DN= ,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
PBXLN PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE LINE
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
b: LTG/SHELF=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LMBLK-5 +
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number associated with a PBX line.
CAN LMBLK-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED SUBSCRIBER
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a subscriber line
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],EQN=] ]
] CAN LMBLK : TYPE= -,LAC= [,DN=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
SUB SUBSCRIBER
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
b: LTG/SHELF=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LMBLK-7 +
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
E N D
CAN LMBLK-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command creates a call processing blocking for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory
numbers. Calls are diverted to a recorded announcement. If a blocking already
exists, it is overwritten when the new blocking is entered.
1. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBX BLOCKING A PBX
2. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXGR BLOCKING A PBX GROUP
3. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXLN BLOCKING A PBX LINE
4. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPMUDN BLOCKING PORT WITH MULTIPLE DN
5. ENTR LMBLK - BLKSUB BLOCKING A SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX
Input format for blocking a PBX.
-
] ]
] ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LMBLK-1 +
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXGR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX GROUP
Input format for blocking a PBX group.
-
] ]
] ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= ,DN= ,OPMODE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
to be blocked.
BLK BLOCKING
Note:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
ENTR LMBLK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX LINE
Input format for blocking a PBX line.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],EQN=] ]
] ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= -,LAC= [,DN= ,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
to be blocked.
BLK BLOCKING
Note:
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LMBLK-3 +
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
b: LTG/SHELF=
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number associated with a PBX line.
ENTR LMBLK-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPMUDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
BLOCKING PORT WITH MULTIPLE DN
Input format for blocking a port with several different directory numbers
(all directory numbers of a specific equipment number are blocked).
-
] ]
] ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
to be blocked.
BLK BLOCKING
Note:
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LMBLK-5 +
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPMUDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG/SHELF=
ENTR LMBLK-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LMBLK
BLKSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
BLOCKING A SUBSCRIBER
Input format for blocking a subscriber.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],EQN=] ]
] ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= -,LAC= [,DN=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
to be blocked.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
BLK BLOCKING
Note:
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LMBLK-7 +
ENTR LMBLK
BLKSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
b: LTG/SHELF=
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
E N D
ENTR LMBLK-8 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP LNLCKOUT
CONSOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE LOCKOUT
This command displays faulty subscriber, PBX lines, emergency call
stations or consoles.
If faulty elements have been found in the specified originator group,
they are displayed in tabular form.
<job number>.
1. DISP LNLCKOUT- CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
2. DISP LNLCKOUT- OTHER DN ORIENTED
1. Input format
ISDN DSB CONSOLE
This format specifies the input parameters for faulty ISDN DSB console.
-
] ]
] DISP LNLCKOUT : LNTYPE= ,EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNTYPE LINE TYPE
This parameter restricts the search for line lockout to a specified
line type.
CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
ECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
PBX PBX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of ISDN digital
switchboard console.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DLU=
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNLCKOUT-1 +
DISP LNLCKOUT
CONSOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
DISP LNLCKOUT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP LNLCKOUT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN ORIENTED
This input format specifies the input parameters for faulty
subscribers, PBX and emergency call station.
-
] ]
] DISP LNLCKOUT : LNTYPE= ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNTYPE LINE TYPE
This parameter restricts the search for line lockout to a specified
line type.
CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
ECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
PBX PBX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of subscriber,
PBX or emergency call station.
This parameter restricts the search for faulty analog PBX lines to
the specified operating mode.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
local network in the exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNLCKOUT-3 -
CAN LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command cancels one data entry in the local number portability
database.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LNPDAT : PORTEDN= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PORTEDN PORTED NUMBER
This number must be entered as national number (national prefix
included).
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LNPDAT-1 -
DISP LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command displays the new routing number and status for a ported
number in the local number portability database.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LNPDAT : PORTEDN= [,ROUTN=] [,STATUS=] [,DISPOPT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
included). The number may be specified partially.
ROUTN ROUTING NUMBER
If this number is specified, only the entries for which the routing
number begins with this specified number will be displayed.
STATUS STATUS OF PORTED NUMBER
If one of the following states is specified, only the entries with
this state will be displayed.
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
DISPOPT DISPLAY OPTIONS
This parameter specifies the kind of output.
Default: ALL
SINGLE SINGLE OUTPUT
Only one ported number will be displayed.
Incompatible parameters:
- ROUTN
- STATUS
Incompatible parameter value:
- PORTEDN = X
ALL ALL OUTPUT
A list of ported numbers beginning
with the digits specified by parameter
PORTEDN will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNPDAT-1 -
ENTR LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command enters the new routing number and status for a ported
For the parameter PORTEDN there is no need to determine exactly one
directory number, this means, it is also possible to enter the
beginning digits of a group of directory numbers. Furthermore you
are allowed to enter ambiguous digit chains (e.g., the digit
combinations 01234 and 01234567 may exist both at the same time).
Consequently, evaluating a given digit combination will lead to the
result, that belongs to an active digit combination in the database
corresponding with most of the beginning digits.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR LNPDAT : PORTEDN= ,ROUTN= [,STATUS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
included).
This number must contain the Porting Id (identifer for new operator/
location) and the full ported number.
Default: INACT
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LNPDAT-1 -
MOD LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command modifies the routing number and/or status for a ported
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LNPDAT : PORTEDN= <,ROUTN= ,STATUS=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
included).
This number must contain the Porting ID (identifier for new operator/
location) and the full ported number.
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LNPDAT-1 -
CAN LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command cancels an existing number portability trigger code point.
The used trigger profile is replaced.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies exactly a digit combination for which a local
number portability trigger exists.
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the trigger
This parameter must match exactly an existing entry for the given
CODE.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LNPTCPT-1 -
CR LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command defines a code point that initiates a trigger of evaluation of
number portability data. The trigger method used depends on the referred number
portability trigger profile.
All LNP trigger code points change their behaviour immediately when the trigger
profile attributes are modified with MOD LNPTPROF or when the profile status
is changed with ACT LNPTPROF or DACT LNPTPROF.
By default no LNP triggering is done. LNP triggering happens when
- the complete CODE of one LNP trigger code point is translated, and
- this trigger code point uses an active user-defined TPROF.
CODE is usually partly qualified compared to the complete called party
number, e.g. the local area code. The trigger code point is valid for all digit
combinations that begin with CODE.
It is possible to have a two or more trigger code points with CODE
parameters that share the initial digits. The longest CODE that matches
with the called party number determines which trigger is used for the set up of
the call.
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name "NOTRIG" allows to
suppress LNP triggering for more specific CODE if a shorter CODE
uses an active trigger.
The "NOTRIG" profile has no effect on call processing if it is assigned to a
CODE that has no shorter active trigger.
Example:
CR LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD1, TTYP=QOD, SRVLOC=INTERN;
CR LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD2, TTYP=QOR, SRVLOC=INTERN;
ACT LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD1;
ACT LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD2;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=089, TPROF=EWSD1;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=0891, TPROF=NOTRIG;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=08972, TPROF=EWSD2;
Given this data base these LNP triggers are executed for the following
called party numbers: 089 4xxxxx trigger profile EWSD1 is used,
089 71xxxx trigger profile EWSD1 is used,
089 722 61 trigger profile EWSD2 is used,
089 1xxxxx no trigger is done.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TPROF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination for which a local number
portability trigger is created.
entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LNPTCPT-1 +
CR LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the LNP trigger profile that is used by this
trigger code point.
This value must equal either a user-defined TPROF that was
created with CR LNPTPROF or the current name of the predefined
"NOTRIG" profile.
E N D
CR LNPTCPT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command displays the data of some or all number portability trigger code
points.
All trigger code points are displayed if CODE = X is entered.
The input of optional parameters has the effect of an output filter. The filter
works like a logical "AND" if two or more optional parameters are entered. Only
those data are displayed that meet all selected criteria.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,TPROF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination for which local number
portability trigger code points are displayed.
The entry is interpreted as a partly qualified input, i.e. all digit
combinations that start with the entered CODE are shown.
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger code
points are displayed that use the entered originating mark.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF
may be entered.
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger code
points are displayed that use the entered trigger profile(s).
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNPTCPT-1 -
MOD LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command modifies an existing number portability trigger code point.
The used trigger profile is replaced.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] <,TPROF=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies exactly a digit combination for which a local
number portability trigger exists.
This parameter must match exactly an existing entry for the given
CODE.
This parameter specifies the LNP trigger profile that is used by this
trigger code point.
This value must equal either a user-defined TPROF that was created
with CR LNPTPROF or the current name of the predefined "NOTRIG"
profile.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LNPTCPT-1 -
ACT LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command activates user-defined number portability trigger profile(s).
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" is always
active. It need not and must not be activated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT LNPTPROF : TPROF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies one or more number portability trigger
profile(s) that are activated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT LNPTPROF-1 -
CAN LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command cancels an user-defined number portability trigger profile.
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" exists
always. It must not be canceled.
- Prerequisite: The trigger profile is not in use, i.e. no other object has a
reference to this profile.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LNPTPROF : TPROF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies the number portability trigger profile that
is canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LNPTPROF-1 -
CR LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command defines a trigger profile that is used to route queries related to
number portability.
These number portability trigger profiles are referred to by number portability
trigger points. The usage of trigger profiles allows to modify easily the
routing of queries when the amount and/or location of number portability servers
is changed. It allows also to modify the query method (trigger type) with a
single action.
All LNP trigger profiles are deactive upon creation.
They have to be activated with ACT LNPTPROF to become operational.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR LNPTPROF : TPROF= ,TTYP= [,COLDIG=] ,SRVLOC= [,PRID=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies a unique name for a number portability trigger
profile. The user may specify any name not yet used in the system for a
number portability trigger profile.
This name is the key that identifies the profile. Therefore it is
assigned to the profile until the profile is canceled and must not be
changed.
One predefined trigger profile exists in the data base. This exists by
default. It need not and may not be created by any MML command. This
predefined trigger profile refers to the function "no trigger". It has
the initial name "NOTRIG" assigned. This name can be modified by MML
command.
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger type that is used when a query for
number portability is issued. This trigger type defines the call state
when a query may be issued.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
This trigger type sends always a query to a number
portability server during the initial routing.
This trigger is executed during a call only if it
was activated for the exchange with
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOD;
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
This trigger type sends a query to a number
portability server only if the first routing
attempt failed.
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOR;
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LNPTPROF-1 +
CR LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
additionally as soon as a call uses this LNP trigger profile.
The value "0" (zero) is used if this parameter is omitted.
SRVLOC SERVER LOCATION
This parameter defines the location of the portability data server that
is accessed with this trigger profile.
This location is described relative to the exchange where this command
is entered.
INTERN INTERNAL SERVER
The server is located internally of this exchange.
The addressing needs no additional data.
Therefore the parameter PRID is not to be
entered for this identifier.
EXTERN EXTERNAL SERVER
The server is located at another site.
The address parameters to access this server are
stored in a IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER.
Therefore the parameter PRID is mandatory
with this identifier.
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the identifier of a intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface.
The PRID must exist before it may be referred by this command.
It can be created with CR INTRIG.
This parameter is mandatory for SRVLOC = EXTERN.
It is incompatible with SRVLOC = INTERN.
E N D
CR LNPTPROF-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command deactivates user-defined number portability trigger profile(s).
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" is always
active. It must not be deactivated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT LNPTPROF : TPROF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies one or more number portability trigger
profile(s) that are deactivated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT LNPTPROF-1 -
DISP LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command displays the data of some or all number portability trigger
profiles.
All trigger profiles are displayed if TTYP = X is entered.
The input of optional parameters has the effect of an output filter. The filter
works like a logical "AND" if two or more optional parameters are entered. Only
those data are displayed that meet all selected criteria.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LNPTPROF : TPROF= [,TTYP=] [,SRVLOC=] [,PRID=] ]
] ]
] [,STATUS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies the number portability trigger profile(s)
that are displayed.
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that use the entered trigger type.
SRVLOC SRVLOC LOCATION
are displayed that use the entered server location.
INTERN ACCESS TO INTERNAL SRVLOC
EXTERN ACCESS TO EXTERNAL SRVLOC
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER
are displayed that refer to the entered IN trigger profile
identifier.
STATUS STATUS OF TRIGGER PROFILE
are displayed that have the entered activation status.
DACT DEACTIVE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNPTPROF-1 +
DISP LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
E N D
DISP LNPTPROF-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LNPTPROF
PREDEFNA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command modifies a number portability trigger profile. The modification has
immediate relevance for all number portability trigger points that refer to this
trigger profile.
The attributes of all user-defined trigger profiles - those that were created
with CR LNPTPROF - can be modified.
The predefined "no trigger" profile may be renamed only. No attributes may be
assigned to this trigger profile.
1. MOD LNPTPROF - PREDEFNA PREDEFINED PROFILE MODIFY TPROF NAME
2. MOD LNPTPROF - USERATTR USER-DEFINED PROFILES MODIFY ATTRIBUTES
1. Input format
PREDEFINED PROFILE MODIFY TPROF NAME
This path is used to modify the name of the predefined LNP trigger profile.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LNPTPROF : TPROF= ,NTPROF= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of a number portability trigger
profile that is being modified.
NTPROF NEW TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies a new name for the predefined trigger profile
that exists by default in the data base. The user may specify any name
not yet used in the system for a LNP trigger profile.
The initial name "NOTRIG" can be changed with
MOD LNPTPROF: TPROF = NOTRIG, NTPROF = new profile name;
if a different name is to be used.
The names of the user-defined trigger profiles must not be changed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LNPTPROF-1 +
MOD LNPTPROF
USERATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
USER-DEFINED PROFILES MODIFY ATTRIBUTES
This path is used to modify the attributes of the user-defined LNP trigger
profiles.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LNPTPROF : TPROF= <,TTYP= ,COLDIG= ,SRVLOC= ,PRID=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of a number portability trigger
profile that is being modified.
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger type that is used when a query for
number portability is issued. This trigger type defines the call state
when a query may be issued.
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOD;
attempt failed.
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOR;
additionally as soon as a call uses this LNP trigger profile.
SRVLOC SERVER LOCATION
This parameter defines the location of the portability data server that
is accessed with this trigger profile. This location is described
relative to the exchange where this command is entered.
EXTERN EXTERNAL SERVER
The server is located at another site.
The address parameters to access this server are
stored in a IN TRIGGER PROFILE ID..
Therefore the parameter PRID is mandatory
with this identifier.
INTERN INTERNAL SERVER
MOD LNPTPROF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LNPTPROF
USERATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The server is located internally of this exchange.
The addressing needs no additional data.
Therefore the parameter PRID is not to be
entered for this identifier. An existing
PRID entry is removed from the trigger
profile when the server location is changed to
internal.
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE ID.
This parameter specifies the identifier of a intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface.
The PRID must exist before it may be referred by this command.
It can be created with CR INTRIG.
This parameter is mandatory if SRVLOC is changed to EXTERN
with this command. It defines in this case the IN trigger profile to be
used.
This parameter is optional if SRVLOC has already the value
EXTERN. It modifies in this case the IN trigger profile to be
used.
This parameter is incompatible with SRVLOC = INTERN, not
regarding of this command or an earlier entered command define the
internal server location.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LNPTPROF-3 -
ACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command activates a trigger type for local number portability. A newly
entered trigger type is added to the already active trigger type(s). The initial
state is that all trigger types are deactive.
More than one trigger type may be active at the same time for one exchange. The
trigger that is actually used to set up calls to ported numbers depends on data
specified with other commands.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT LNPTTYP : TTYP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies a trigger type that becomes active in the
exchange.
REDIRECT CALL REDIRECTION
This trigger type is based on distributed data. It
equals the method that was introduced into EWSD
version 11.
The call is routed initially to that exchange
where the called directory number is originally
located. The directory number data base of that
exchange shows if a number is ported.
The query result for a ported directory number is
a new routing information. This may adress for
example the recipient network or the recipient
exchange, i.e. the new exchange where a number is
located after being ported. The actual content
depends on the project specific interconnection
standards that are the base for the administration
of the portability server.
A positive query result enables routing towards
the physical location where the called directory
number is connected to.
A query result indicating that the directory
number is not known by the server results in
normal routing of the call. This occurs for
unported numbers and for not connected numbers.
This trigger type works most efficient in a
network with a high degree of ported numbers,
because the queries generate less network load
than the unsuccessful routing attempts to the
donor networks or the donor exchanges (those
networks or exchanges where the numbers were
located before ever being ported) of ported
numbers would do.
attempt failed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT LNPTTYP-1 +
ACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The call is routed at first to that exchange where
the called directory number is originally located.
A query is sent to a number portability server if
a "release" message is returned. This happens if
the addressed exchange was not able to put the
call through to the called directory number. No
distinction is made between ported numbers and not
connected numbers.
The query returns new routing information for
ported directory numbers. A second routing is
performed using this data.
The query result for not connected numbers
indicates that the directory number is not known
by the server. The call is released in this case.
This trigger type works most efficient in a
network with a low degree of ported numbers,
because the unsuccessful routing attempts to
ported numbers cause less network load than one
query for every call would do.
E N D
ACT LNPTTYP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command deactivates a trigger type for local number portability.
Other active trigger type(s) stay active if this command is executed.
Number portability works only if at least one trigger type is active.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT LNPTTYP : TTYP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies a trigger type that is removed from service.
REDIRECT CALL REDIRECTION
Deactivating this trigger type is meaningful if a
trigger is prepared that works with a centralized
data base.
The deactivation of these distributed data can be
reversed by activating this trigger type again.
This is useful if the change over to a centralized
trigger fails.
Calls are routed to that exchange where the called
directory number is originally located without a
query if this trigger type becomes deactive.
Calls are released if the first routing attempt
fails if this trigger type becomes deactive.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT LNPTTYP-1 -
DISP LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command displays the status of all trigger types that exist for local
number portability.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LNPTTYP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LNPTTYP-1 -
DISP LOCDIAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT
This command displays the local dialing format, i.e. whether
subscriber directory numbers in their own local area may be accessed
with their local area code.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LOCDIAL ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOCDIAL-1 -
ENTR LOCDIAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT
This command specifies whether a directory number can be dialed from the
local area code as prefix.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR LOCDIAL : DIAL= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DIAL DIALLING FORMAT
This parameter defines the local dialing format.
LACDN DN WITH LOCAL AREA CODE ALLOW.
DN ONLY DN ALLOWED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LOCDIAL-1 -
DISP LOCDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCATION DIGITS
This command displays the exchange code of an exchange.
This command is only permitted for toll free service (TFS).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LOCDIG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOCDIG-1 -
ENTR LOCDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCATION DIGITS
This command is used to enter the exchange location digits, which are
used as a central code for partial MFC identification.
This command is only permitted for toll free service (TFS).
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR LOCDIG : CODE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies the exchange code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LOCDIG-1 -
CAN LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command cancels the lock function exceptions entered with
command ENTR LOCKRST.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LOCKRST : PROAPPL= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PROAPPL PROCESSOR AND APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the processor(s)/application(s) which
should be canceled from the table of lock function exceptions.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR=
b: APPLICATION=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LOCKRST-1 -
DISP LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command displays the processor(s)/application(s) which are
excepted from lock function.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LOCKRST ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOCKRST-1 -
ENTR LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command enters restrictions of the lock function for
processor(s)/application(s).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR LOCKRST : PROAPPL= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PROAPPL PROCESSOR AND APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the processor(s)/application(s) which
should be excepted from the lock function.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR=
b: APPLICATION=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LOCKRST-1 -
RSET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET LOG FUNCTION
This command resets the log function. The log function returns to
its basic off status if all log commands entered prior to RSET LOG are
already registered in the log file. Thereafter, no other commands will be
entered in the current log file. From this point of time onward, it is
available as input file for the command file processor (COFIP).
Notes:
- The LOG function can also be reset with the general command for
cancelling semipermanent jobs, CAN JOB.
- The command will be rejected if the log function is already
deactivated.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] RSET LOG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RSET LOG-1 -
SET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET LOG FUNCTION
This command sets the log function with the given log file code.
If the SET LOG or MOD LOGFILE command is entered, the
following log files are opened:
the collect log file with the file name stem LG and the index A0
which contains the EXEC CMDFILE command to start the index A1
log file,
the MML log file with the file name stem LG and the index A1 in which
all log commands are written and
the Q3 log file with the file name stem LQ and the index A1 in which
all Q3 log requests are written.
Notes:
- If the index A1 file is filled (end of file is reached), the file will
be automaticly expanded or a continuation file with index A2 will be
opened and the collect log-file gets a further EXEC CMDFILE command
to start the index A2 continuation file.
- If the command was entered without errors, the log function state is
changed from OFF to ON and from then on all log commands, or
all Q3 Requests which have been executed without errors, are entered
in the log file.
- The command is rejected if the log function is already activated.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] SET LOG : FILE= [,SIZE=] [,ERASE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies that part of the name of the log file that
can be defined by the user.
Notes:
- The name of a log file begins with a function identifier
(stem of file name: LG resp. LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
In between there is a user-definable part to distinguish between
different log files.
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on the user-definable
part of the file name must be in accordance with the name conventions
of the fixpoint function, in other cases it may be chosen between the
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions of
the fixpoint function.
- Formal definition of the name of a log file:
<name of log file> ::= <stem of file name>.<file identification>
<stem of file name> ::= LG/LQ
<file identification> ::= <file code>.<index>
<index> ::= A0..Z9
<file code> ::= fixpoint-file code / normal-file code
(user definable part of the name of a log file)
<normal-file code> ::= letter letter/digit (maximum of 4)
<fixpoint-file code> ::= FIX<name of generation>
<name of generation> ::= ffkkloii
ff ... function version of APS
kk ... correction version of APS
l ... local correction version
o ... ODAGEN counter
ii ... fixpoint counter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET LOG-1 +
SET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the desired size of the log file. The
continuation files have the same size as the first log file
(index A1).
Default: 3 PAM blocks.
ERASE ERASE
This parameter specifies whether existing files with the same file
code are to be erased.
If the parameter value is Y, all log files with the file code
as specified in the FILE will be erased.
If the parameter value is N and the filename is identical with
that of an existing log file, the latter will not be erased
and the command will be rejected with an error message.
The log files are protected so as to prevent the log function
from being interrupted by a user error. File protection is
provided by:
a) the use of a protected stem (LG/LQ) for the names of log files,
b) the assignment of protection attributes for users.
Log files are protected against
- write access,
- deletion by the user,
- filename changes by the user.
A log file is protected by these protection attributes until the
log function is reset or the log file is changed.
The read access to log files (e.g. with EDTS8) and the changing of
restriction periods for log files is always possible.
N DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
NO DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
Y OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
YES OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
E N D
SET LOG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LOG
This command displays the current status of the log function and the name
of the current log file.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT LOG ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT LOG-1 -
DISP LOGATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOG ATTRIBUTES
This command displays the log attributes of specific or of all MML commands.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP LOGATT : [CMDCOD=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies the command codes whose log attributes
are to be displayed. Only valid command codes may be entered.
Up to 34 command codes can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOGATT-1 -
CAN LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOGGING EVENTS
This command deletes the event(s) which are selected with command
ENTR LOGEVENT.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LOGEVENT : LOGEVENT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LOGEVENT LOGGING EVENTS
This parameter specifies the event(s) which should not be logged.
X ALL EVENTS
POSLOGIN POSITIVE LOGIN
NEGLOGIN NEGATIVE LOGIN
UACMDIA UNAUTHORIZED CMD/INTERACTION
UAFAC UNAUTHORIZED FILE ACCESS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LOGEVENT-1 -
DISP LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOGGING EVENT
This command displays the event(s) which are selected for
security logging.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LOGEVENT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOGEVENT-1 -
ENTR LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOGGING EVENTS
This command selects the event(s) which should be logged in the
security logging file "OP.ACTION".
Notes:
- The security logging objects must be adequately selected
in order that the selected event(s) can be surely logged.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR LOGEVENT : LOGEVENT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LOGEVENT LOGGING EVENTS
This parameter specifies the event(s) which should be logged.
X ALL EVENTS
POSLOGIN POSITIVE LOGIN
NEGLOGIN NEGATIVE LOGIN
UACMDIA UNAUTHORIZED CMD/INTERACTION
UAFAC UNAUTHORIZED FILE ACCESS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LOGEVENT-1 -
MOD LOGFILE
FNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOG FILE
This command modifies the name and the size of the current log file(s).
There are two different ways to use this command: Firstly,
by using the FILE and optionally the SIZE and ERASE
parameter, the user can close the current log file(s) and
define a new one;
Secondly, the user can use the parameter NFILE to close
the current log file(s) and rename it as the file name
specified by NFILE.
Then new log file(s) are created with the same file name which was used
before the log file(s) was renamed.
This parameter should be used if the fixpoint function has been
switched on and the state of the log function is locked.
After successful execution of the command, all commands to be recorded
are written to the new log file. There is no interruption of the log
function for the user.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if the log function is not activated.
- The command will be rejected if a switch is made to the log file that
is current at the time of entry.
the exchange!
1. MOD LOGFILE - FNAME
2. MOD LOGFILE - NEWFNAME
1. Input format
-
] ]
] MOD LOGFILE : FILE= [,SIZE=] [,ERASE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the part of the name of the log file that
can be defined by the user. With this file name the new log files are
created.
Notes:
(stem of file name: LG/LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on, the user-definable
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions
of the fixpoint function.
<index> ::= A0..Z9
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LOGFILE-1 +
MOD LOGFILE
FNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
i ... fixpoint counter
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the desired size of the MML log file.
The size of the Q3 log file is 15 times that of the MML log file.
Continuation files are the same size as the first log file
(index A1).
Default value: 3 PAM blocks.
ERASE ERASE
This parameter specifies whether existing files with the same file
code are to be deleted.
If the parameter value is Y, all log files with the file code
as specified in the FILE will be deleted.
If the parameter value is N and the file name is identical to
that of an existing log file, the latter will not be deleted
and the command will be rejected with an error message.
The log files are protected so as to prevent the log function
from being interrupted by a user error. File protection is
provided by:
a) the use of a protected stem (LG/LQ) for the names of log files,
b) the assignment of protection attributes for users.
Log files are protected against
- write access,
- deletion by the user,
- file name changes by the user.
A log file is protected by these protection attributes until the
log function is reset or the log file is changed.
The read access to log files (e.g. with EDTS8) and the changing of
restriction periods for log files is always possible.
N DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
NO DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
Y OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
YES OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
MOD LOGFILE-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LOGFILE
NEWFNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] MOD LOGFILE : NFILE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NFILE NEW FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the part of the name of the log file
that can be defined by the user. All current log files are renamed
as this file name.
Notes:
(stem of file name: LG/LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on, the user-definable
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions
of the fixpoint function.
<index> ::= A0..Z9
i ... fixpoint counter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LOGFILE-3 -
CAN LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command cancels the security logging object(s) selected
explicitly with command ENTR LOGOBJ.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LOGOBJ : <USERID= ,REMDEV= ,LOCDEV=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the user identification(s) which should
be canceled from the security logging objects list.
This parameter specifies the remote device(s) which should be
canceled from the security logging objects list.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
b: NAME OF REMOTE DEVICE=
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies the local device(s) which should be
canceled from the security logging objects list.
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
DSB DIGITAL SWITCHING BOARD
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LOGOBJ-1 -
DISP LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command displays the scope of validity of security logging,
and also the explicitly selected security logging objects, if
the parameter SELLIST is entered with YES or Y, or if the
parameter is omitted and the security logging scope has the value
SELOBJ.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LOGOBJ : [SELLIST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SELLIST INCLUDING SELECTION LIST
This parameter specifies whether the explicitly selected objects
should also be displayed, independent on the value of SCOPE.
YES SELECTION LIST IS INCLUDED
Y SELECTION LIST IS INCLUDED
NO SELECTION LIST IS NOT INCLUDED
N SELECTION LIST IS NOT INCLUDED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LOGOBJ-1 -
ENTR LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command determines, on the one hand, the general scope of
validity of the security logging function, and on the other hand
explicitly selects user identifications and/or devices/processors
as objects.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR LOGOBJ : <SCOPE= ,USERID= ,REMDEV= ,LOCDEV=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SCOPE SCOPE OF SECURITY LOGGING
This parameter specifies the scope of validity of security logging.
ALLOBJ ALL OBJECTS
SELOBJ SELECTED OBJECTS
NOOBJ NO OBJECT
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the user identification(s) which should
be selected as security logging object(s).
This parameter specifies the remote device(s) which should be
selected as security logging object(s).
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
b: NAME OF REMOTE DEVICE=
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies the local device(s) which should be
selected as security logging object(s).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LOGOBJ-1 +
ENTR LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
DSB DIGITAL SWITCHING BOARD
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
E N D
ENTR LOGOBJ-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LOOPBA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOOPBACK TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BA
This command initiates the loopback test when a demand test is done
or when localizing faults.
1. TEST LOOPBA - DN DN ORIENTED LOOP TEST
2. TEST LOOPBA - LC EQUIPMENT ORIENTED LOOP TEST
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED LOOP TEST
Input format for directory number oriented loopback testing.
-
] ]
] TEST LOOPBA : DN= [,LAC=] [,LOOPNO=] [,SWITCH=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number on which the
loopback test is to be run.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more
than one local network connected to the exchange.
LAC may only be used if parameter DN was input.
LOOPNO NUMBER OF LOOPBACK TEST
This parameter specifies the number of the loopback test which is to
be run. The following are possible:
1 = loop 1 LT-loop, line termination on SLMD.
2 = loop 2 NT-loop in the network termination.
4 = loop 4 buffer register-loop in the intermediate generator
11 = loop 11 Line Unit (near end).
12 = loop 12 Line Unit (far end).
The loop 11 and loop 12, are only valid for SLMDB, SLMDQFB and
SLMDTFB.
Default: 2
SWITCH SWITCH COMMAND FOR LOOPBACK
This parameter specifies whether loopback test is to be switched or
released.
OFF LOOP SWITCH OFF
ON LOOP SWITCH ON
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LOOPBA-1 +
TEST LOOPBA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: ON
TEST LOOPBA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LOOPBA
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT ORIENTED LOOP TEST
Input format for circuit position oriented loopback testing.
-
] ]
] TEST LOOPBA : DLU= ,LC= [,LOOPNO=] [,SWITCH=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number on which the test is to be
run.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
LC may only be used if parameter DLU was input.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
LOOPNO NUMBER OF LOOPBACK TEST
This parameter specifies the number of the loopback test which is to
be run. The following are possible:
1 = loop 1 LT-loop, line termination on SLMD.
2 = loop 2 NT-loop in the network termination.
4 = loop 4 buffer register-loop in the intermediate generator
11 = loop 11 Line Unit (near end).
12 = loop 12 Line Unit (far end).
The loop 11 and loop 12, are only valid for SLMDB, SLMDQFB and
SLMDTFB.
Default: 2
SWITCH SWITCH COMMAND FOR LOOPBACK
This parameter specifies whether loopback test is to be switched or
released.
OFF LOOP SWITCH OFF
ON LOOP SWITCH ON
Default: ON
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LOOPBA-3 -
SEND LOOPBACK
ACTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEND LOOPBACK
This command causes the ATE to loopback a received signal.
This can only be done if an ATE has been connected using command CONN ATE.
Sending is stopped automatically if the command is entered again with parameter
ACT=NO or if a new send command is entered.
1. SEND LOOPBACK- ACTNO DEACTIVATE SENDING
2. SEND LOOPBACK- LOOPBACK SEND LOOPBACK
1. Input format
DEACTIVATE SENDING
This input format deactivates the send job.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] SEND LOOPBACK : -TPDN= ,ACT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
operation.
operation.
ACT ACTIVATE
This parameter is used to activate and deactivate the job.
N - DEACTIVATE SENDING
NO ' DEACTIVATE SENDING
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEND LOOPBACK-1 +
SEND LOOPBACK
LOOPBACK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SEND LOOPBACK
This input format specifies the parameter combination to loop back a received
signal.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] SEND LOOPBACK : -TPDN= [,LOSS=] [,ACT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
operation.
operation.
LOSS LOSS
This parameter can be used to attenuate or amplify the signal level.
a-b-c
a: LOSS
N NEGATIVE
NEG NEGATIVE
P POSITIVE
POS POSITIVE
Corresponds to <positive/negative loss>
b: LOSS=
Corresponds to <dB value greater than 1>
c: LOSS=
Corresponds to <dB value less than 1>
ACT ACTIVATE
Y -- ACTIVATE SENDING
~YES '- ACTIVATE SENDING
SEND LOOPBACK-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEND LOOPBACK
LOOPBACK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: Y, YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEND LOOPBACK-3 -
START LTEST
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START LINE TEST
This command sets up test and speech connection from a line workstation
to a specified subscriber.
After establishment of this connection, individual testing and
monitoring of the analog and digital subscriber line and the analog
terminal can be started with the command TEST LINE.
The command START LTEST is then also used to switch over from
supervision to testing.
Prerequisites:
- A workstation must be created and activated.
Notes:
- If the subscriber (digital) is busy, the command is rejected.
- If the subscriber (analog) is busy, it is not possible to execute
test functions directly after the establishment of the test
configuration. The only possible functions in this case are
monitoring, general release, or supervision E (wait for end of
connection).
After activation of monitoring, it is possible to disconnect the
subscriber, switch the test access to extern and start testing
and measuring.
- The operator can not introduce the parameter TPDN. This parameter
is to be generated only by the PC Trunk/Line Work Station.
<job number>.
1. START LTEST - DN DN ORIENTED
2. START LTEST - EQN EQN ORIENTED
3. START LTEST - LC LC ORIENTED
4. START LTEST - TPNO TPNO ORIENTED
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED
Input format for setting up a test and speech connection or for ending
directory-number-orientated supervision.
-
] ]
] START LTEST : [TPDN=] [,LAC=] ,DN= [,TPNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port directory number.
It is only accepted when generated by the Trunk/Line Work Station.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START LTEST-1 +
START LTEST
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the workstation test port.
START LTEST-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START LTEST
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
equipment-orientated supervision.
-
] ]
] START LTEST : [TPDN=] ,EQN= [,TPNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the subscriber line
in the DLU or LTGA.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU OR TSG NUMBER=
b: SHELF OR LTG NUMBER=
c: MODULE OR LTU NUMBER=
d: PORT NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START LTEST-3 +
START LTEST
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LC ORIENTED
equipment-orientated supervision.
-
] ]
] START LTEST : [TPDN=] ,DLU= ,LC= [,TPNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of a line circuit in a DLU.
a-b-c
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT (PORT) NUMBER=
START LTEST-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START LTEST
TPNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TPNO ORIENTED
Input format for test-port-orientated end of supervision.
-
] ]
] START LTEST : [TPDN=] ,TPNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START LTEST-5 -
DISP LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS
This command displays the values of thresholds for testing subscriber lines.
With this command it is possible to display one, several or all test classes.
Its also possible a special display of values different from the default.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]SPCVAL=] ]
] DISP LTESTTHR : -THRCLA= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SPCVAL SPECIAL VALUES
This parameter defines if the display is special display.
In the special display option, the parameters with values different
from the default are surveyed.
Y SPECIAL VALUES DISPLAY
Correspond to the special display.
YES SPECIAL VALUES DISPLAY
THRCLA TEST CLASS INDEX
This parameter defines the test class index of the thresholds for
testing subscriber lines.
Correspond to the test class index.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTESTTHR-1 -
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS
This command modifies one or several parameters of a test class of
thresholds for testing subscriber lines.
Before any class modification all classes contains the limits of the
test equipment.
If the command enters only with TEST CLASS INDEX parameter without any
other parameter the specified threshold class will be loaded to all
relevants LTGs.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD LTESTTHR : THRCLA= [,CAE=] [,CBE=] [,UCAB=] [,LCAB=] ]
] ]
] [,RAE=] [,RBE=] [,URAB=] [,LRAB=] [,AAE=] ]
] ]
] [,ABE=] [,AAB=] [,DAE=] [,DBE=] [,DAB=] ]
] ]
] [,RL=] [,ER=] [,UDSP=] [,LDSP=] [,UPPR=] ]
] ]
] [,LPPR=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
THRCLA TEST CLASS INDEX
This parameter is the index of the test class.
Corresponds to the test class index.
CAE UPPER CAPACITANCE A-EARTH THR
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the capacitance
between A-wire and earth in microfarad.
Unit 1 represents the integer part and unit 2 the centesimal
part, e.g. 9-5 means 9.05 microfarad.
The maximum value for the threshold is 10.00 microfarad.
The minimum value for the threshold is 0.00 microfarad.
a-b
a: INTEGER PART OF THRESHOLD=
Default: 10
b: CENTESIMAL PART OF THRESHOLD=
Corresponds to the centesimal part of threshold.
Default: 0
CBE UPPER CAPACITANCE B-EARTH THR
between B-wire and earth in microfarad.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTESTTHR-1 +
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
Default: 10
Default: 0
UCAB UPPER CAPACITANCE A-B WIRE THR
between A-wire and B-wire in microfarad.
a-b
Default: 10
Default: 0
LCAB LOWER CAPACITANCE A-B WIRE THR
This parameter defines the lower threshold for the capacitance
between A-wire and B-wire in microfarad.
a-b
Default: 0
Default: 0
MOD LTESTTHR-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RAE LOWER RESISTANCE A - EARTH THR
This parameter defines the lower threshold for the resistance
between A-wire and earth.
Unit 1 specifies the integer part, unit 2 specifies the
centesimal part and unit 3 specifies the exponential part,
e.g. 1-55-EXP3 means 1.55 kiloohm.
The maximum value for the threshold is 10.0 megaohm.
The minimum value for the threshold is 0.0 ohm.
There are special rules that restrict the use of unit 2
depending on the input of unit 1 and unit 3:
Unit 3 Unit 1 Possible unit 2 Example
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
EXP3 2:19 multiple of 10 15-60-EXP3
EXP3 20:199 must be 0 87-0-EXP3
EXP6 0 free 0:99 0-95-EXP6
EXP6 10 must be 0 10-0-EXP6
a-b-c
Default: 0
Default: 0
c: EXPONENT PART OF THRESHOLD
EXP0 REFERENCE UNIT = OHM
Correspond to ohm reference.
EXP3 REFERENCE UNIT = KOHM
Correspond to kiloohm reference.
EXP6 REFERENCE UNIT = MOHM
Correspond to megaohm reference.
Corresponds to the exponential part of threshold.
Default: EXP0
RBE LOWER RESISTANCE B - EARTH THR
between B-wire and earth.
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
EXP3 20:199 must be 0 87-0-EXP3
EXP6 0 free 0:99 0-95-EXP6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTESTTHR-3 +
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: EXP0
URAB UPPER RESISTANCE A-B WIRE THR
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the resistance
between A-wire and B-wire.
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
EXP3 20:199 must be 0 87-0-EXP3
EXP6 0 free 0:99 0-95-EXP6
a-b-c
Default: 10
Default: 0
MOD LTESTTHR-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: EXP6
LRAB LOWER RESISTANCE A-B WIRE THR
between A-wire and B-wire.
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
EXP3 20:199 must be 0 87-0-EXP3
EXP6 0 free 0:99 0-95-EXP6
a-b-c
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: EXP0
AAE UPPER AC-VOLTAGE A - EARTH THR
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the ac-voltage
between A-wire and earth in volt.
Unit 1 represents the integer part and unit 2 the decimal
part e.g., 125-7 means 125.7 volt.
The maximum value for the threshold is 250.0 volt.
The minimum value for the threshold is 0.0 volt.
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTESTTHR-5 +
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 250
b: DECIMAL PART OF THRESHOLD=
Corresponds to the decimal part of threshold.
Default: 0
ABE UPPER AC-VOLTAGE B - EARTH THR
between B-wire and earth in volt.
a-b
Default: 250
Default: 0
AAB UPPER AC-VOLTAGE A-B WIRE THR
between A-wire and B-wire in volt.
a-b
Default: 250
Default: 0
DAE DC-VOLTAGE A-EARTH THRESHOLD
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the dc-voltage
between A-wire and earth in volt.
MOD LTESTTHR-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
Default: 150
Default: 0
DBE DC-VOLTAGE B-EARTH THRESHOLD
between B-wire and earth in volt.
a-b
Default: 150
Default: 0
DAB DC-VOLTAGE A-B WIRE THRESHOLD
between A-wire and B-wire in volt.
a-b
Default: 150
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTESTTHR-7 +
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RL UPPER RESLOOP THRESHOLD
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the resistance
loop.
The maximum value for the threshold is 10.0 kiloohm.
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
a-b-c
Default: 10
Default: 0
Default: EXP3
ER UPPER EARTH RESISTANCE THR
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the earth
resistance.
The maximum value for the threshold is 10.0 kiloohm.
EXP0 0:199 must be 0 197-0-EXP0
EXP3 0:1 free 0:99 0-43-EXP3
a-b-c
MOD LTESTTHR-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 10
Default: 0
Default: EXP3
UDSP UPPER DIAL SPEED THRESHOLD
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the
dial speed in hertz.
part e.g., 24-9 means 24.9 hertz.
The maximum value for the threshold is 25.4 hertz.
The minimum value for the threshold is 2.0 hertz.
a-b
Default: 25
Default: 4
LDSP LOWER DIAL SPEED THRESHOLD
This parameter defines the lower threshold for the
dial speed in hertz.
part e.g., 24-9 means 24.9 hertz.
The maximum value for the threshold is 25.4 hertz.
The minimum value for the threshold is 2.0 hertz.
a-b
Default: 2
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTESTTHR-9 +
MOD LTESTTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPPR UPPER PULSE/NO PULSE RATIO THR
This parameter defines the upper threshold for the
pulse / no pulse ratio in percentage.
The maximum value for the threshold is 100%.
The minimum value for the threshold is 0%.
Corresponds to the threshold value.
Default: 100
LPPR LOWER PULSE/NO PULSE RATIO THR
This parameter defines the lower threshold for the
pulse / no pulse ratio in percentage.
The maximum value for the threshold is 100%.
The minimum value for the threshold is 0%.
Corresponds to the threshold value.
Default: 0
E N D
MOD LTESTTHR-10 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG
This command cancels an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The associated LTG must exist.
- Its ports must not be in service.
- All LTUs and code receivers of the specified LTG must
be cancelled.
- The LTG must be PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LTG : LTG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LTG-1 -
CONF LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command configures the LTG.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF LTG : LTG= ,OST= [,OLDOST=] [,SUP=] [,LOAD=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG to be configured.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
Compatibilities:
+------------+-----------------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL CBL PLA !
+------------+-----------------------------+
! ACT ! - !! + - !
! MBL ! + - + + !
! CBL ! + + - - !
! NAC ! - + - - !
! UNA ! + + + - !
! PLA ! - + - - !
! SEZ ! * * * * !
+------------+-----------------------------+
+ : legal state transition
- : illegal state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or loss of
calls.
* : The unit to be configured is reserved for another
safeguarding process and therefore cannot be configured.
The command is rejected with an appropriate fault message.
The occupying process automatically releases the unit in
question.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF LTG-1 +
CONF LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OLDOST OLD OPERATING STATUS
NAC NOT ACCESSABLE
X ALL VALUES
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs. If SUP= Y
is specified, messages from the periphery are suppressed during
command execution.
N NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Displays all test progress and fault messages.
NO NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Y SUPPRESSION
Suppresses all test progress and fault message
displays.
YES SUPPRESSION
LOAD LOAD OF CODE
This parameter is used to load the LTG with code. If LOAD = YES
is specified, the LTG is loaded with code.
N NO LOAD OF LTG CODE (DEFAULT)
The LTG is configured without loading code.
NO NO LOAD OF LTG CODE (DEFAULT)
Y LOAD OF LTG CODE
If an LTG is to be activated, the LTG is loaded
with code.
YES LOAD OF LTG CODE
E N D
CONF LTG-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command creates an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- Memory space for the LTG must be provided in the database.
- The capacity stage of the two switching network sides must
permit the connection of a further LTG.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR LTG : LTG= ,TYPE= ,LDPARP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
TYPE LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE
This parameter specifies the LTG type.
LTGB LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE B
LTGC LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE C
LTGD LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE D
LTGH LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE H
LDPARP LOADING PARAMETER FOR GP PROGR
This parameter specifies the load module with which
the LTG is to be loaded when it is configured to
ACT. Only 48 LTGs capable of handling V5.2
interfaces can be created within one TSG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LTG-1 -
DIAG LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE LTG
This command diagnoses LTG errors.
Prerequisite:
- The LTG to be tested must be in operating status MBL.
- There may not be another diagnosis.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG LTG : LTG= ,TA= [,LOAD=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter indicates the LTG.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies what is to be diagnosed.
ALL COMPLETE LTG
CENTRAL TESTS CENTRAL PARTS OF LTG
LOAD LOAD LTG
This parameter specifies wether the LTG has to be loaded.
YES LOAD UNCONDITIONALLY
NO LOAD CONDITIONALLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG LTG-1 -
DISP LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG
This command displays the data for one, several or all created LTGs
in an exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LTG : LTG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
1. <tsg> - <ltg>
The specified LTG is displayed.
2. <tsg> - <ltg> && <tsg> - <ltg>
All LTGs in the specified range are displayed.
3. <tsg> - X
The LTGs for the specified TSG are displayed.
4. X - X
All LTGs in the exchange are displayed.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTG-1 -
MOD LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command modifies the parameter specifying the program
that has to be loaded to the LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be PLA or MBL.
- If the new LTG program is not as powerful as the one
already assigned, all LTUs and code receivers of the
specified LTG must be cancelled.
The capabilities of an LTG program can be displayed via
the command DISP LTGRES.
Notes:
Whenever an LTG has been modified, a subsequent
configuration of this LTG (command CONF LTG) has to be
done with parameter LOAD = YES.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD LTG : LTG= ,LDPARP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
LDPARP LOADING PARAMETER FOR GP PROGR
This parameter specifies the load module with which
the LTG is to be loaded when it is configured to
ACT. Only 48 LTGs capable of handling V5.2
interfaces can be created within one TSG.
n/o
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD LTG-1 -
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command activates the recording function for the GP and LTG traffic data.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs REC GP and REC LTG may be entered at the
same time.
Input format
-
] ]
] REC LTG : LTG= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ]
] ]
] [,CRDATA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG for which traffic
data have to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all LTGs (LTG=X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY].
Notes:
- A maximum of 5 single LTGs or LTG number ranges, or a
combination of both (single and range), may be linked
per command.
a-b
a: TIME SWITCHING GROUP NUMBER=
This information unit specifies the time stage group.
unit values.
This information unit specifies the GP number.
unit values.
output.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC LTG-1 +
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
REC LTG-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REC LTG-3 +
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
CRDATA CODE RECEIVER DATA
This parameter specifies the output of code receiver data.
Default: output of all data (code receiver data inclusive).
NO NO CODE RECEIVER DATA
ONLY ONLY CODE RECEIVER DATA
YES WITH CODE RECEIVER DATA
E N D
REC LTG-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STAT LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LTG
This command displays LTG operating states.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT LTG : LTG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
unit values.
If omitted, the default is all possible values.
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT LTG-1 -
ACT LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LTG BREAKPOINT
This command activates one or more predefined LTG breakpoints.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT LTGBPT : ID= ,LTG= [,LIMIT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies a breakpoint. Up to 6
identifiers can be entered.
.
The TIME STAGE GROUP (a) and LINE TRUNK GROUP (b) must be given.
a-b
LIMIT NUMBER OF TIMES TO EXECUTE BPT
This parameter specifies a limit for execution when the breakpoints
are activated.
If no limit is entered, the breakpoint will be active until a
CANCEL LTG BREAKPOINT or a recovery.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT LTGBPT-1 -
CAN LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG BREAKPOINT
This command deactivates all active breakpoints. Breakpoint administration
only changes the status of the cancelled breakpoints. There will still be
entries for these cancelled breakpoints by administration.
If an entry in the breakpoint administration is to be deleted, the
DEL LTGBPT command has to be used.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN LTGBPT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LTGBPT-1 -
DEL LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DELETE LTG BREAKPOINT
This command deletes breakpoints from the breakpoint administration, in
case of the given breakpoints are not active.
Input format
-
] ]
] DEL LTGBPT : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies a breakpoint. Up to 6 identifiers can be
entered.
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DEL LTGBPT-1 -
DISP LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG BREAKPOINT
This command displays the breakpoints defined in the breakpoint
administration.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LTGBPT : ID= [,FULL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies a breakpoint. Up to 6 Identifiers can be
entered.
.
FULL FULL VIEW
This parameter specifies the information to be displayed. In all cases
information about entered breakpoints relative to identification, LTG,
address, overlay number, limit and state are given.
If full view is desired, additional information about condition,
register, stack, data, update register and update data will be issued.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTGBPT-1 -
DMP LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP LTG BREAKPOINT
This command dumps the data which occur at breakpoint pass-through
time from the cyclic collection file in the CP.
Prerequisites:
- The command is only executed if the breakpoint function is not active.
The dump can at present only be done on the OMT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP LTGBPT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP LTGBPT-1 -
ENTR LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LTG BREAKPOINT
This command enters a LTG breakpoint in the breakpoint administration.
In this command no communication with the GP will be performed.
The ENTER LTG BREAKPOINT command has to be entered before a breakpoint can be
activated by ACTIVATE LTG BREAKPOINT command.
The entries in the breakpoint administration can be displayed by the
DISPLAY LTG BREAKPOINT command.
If a entry in the breakpoint administration should be deleted the
DELETE LTG BREAKPOINT command has to be used.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR LTGBPT : ID= ,ADDR= [,COND=] [,REG=] [,STACK=] ]
] ]
] [,DATA=] [,UPREG=] [,UPDATA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies a breakpoint in the administration.
.
ADDR ADDRESS
Please specify only valid segments
The parameter "a" has different meanings. In case of
- LTG in Protected Mode : Selector
- LTG in Real Mode : Segment
"b" stands always for offset
"c" is not used here
a-b[-c]
a: ADDRESS=
1,2,3...4, range of hexadecimal numbers
b: ADDRESS=
1,2,3...4, range of hexadecimal numbers
c: ADDRESS=
COND CONDITION
This parameter specifies the conditions for execution. The syntax
of a Boolean expression cannot be checked by the MMI. The
conditions are therefore entered in text form and checked by the
PDF system.
Syntax:
Condition ::= "Boolexpr" /
"Boolexpr Boolop Boolexpr"
Boolop ::= AND/OR/XOR
( two logically linked expressions )
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LTGBPT-1 +
ENTR LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Boolexpr ::= Value Compop Value /
Value Compop Container /
Container Compop Value /
Container Compop Container /
Container MASKED BY Value = Value
Compop ::= / = ; < ; > ; < = ; > = ; =
( comparison of register or
address contents )
Container ::= Register/Address
Address ::= Se-Offs / *)
Se-Indexregister / *)
DEREF (Se-Offs) *)
Seg ::= Hex/Segmentregister
Offs ::= Hex
Register ::= Segmentregister/
Indexregister/
AX/CX/DX
Segmentregister ::= DS/ES
Indexregister ::= DI/SI/BX
Value ::= Hex/Dec (RANGE:0 to FFFF)
Hex ::= Hhexadecimal number
Dec ::= Decimal number
*) The parameter "Se" has different meanings. In case of
The operand addressing is subject to the limitations of the
microprocessor used in the GP.
Example of CONDITION input:
CONDITION = "AX>125 AND HAFFE=H00FF-H0001"
REG REGISTER
This parameter outputs the register contents.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
STACK STACK
This parameter outputs the STACK contents.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
DATA DATA
This parameter specifies the data addresses. The data addressing
syntax cannot be checked by the MMI. The data addresses are
therefore input in text form and checked by the PDF system.
Syntax:
Field ::= "Address - Length"
Address ::= Se - Offs / *)
Se - Indexregister / *)
DEREF (Se - Offs) *)
Seg ::= Hex / Segmentregister
Offs ::= Hex
ENTR LTGBPT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Indexregister ::= BX/DI/SI
Length ::= Hex/Dec (RANGE : 1 to 64)
Value ::= Hex/Dec
The operand addressing is subject to the limitations of the
microprocessor used in the GP.
Up to 2 addresses separated by & can be specified.
Example of DATA input:
DATA = "H00FF-H0003-H0F"
UPREG UPDATE REGISTER
This parameter updates registers. The data addressing syntax
cannot be checked by the MMI. The data addresses are therefore
input in text form and checked by the PDF system.
Syntax:
Upreg ::= "Register := Value"
Register ::= AX/BX/CX/DX/SI/DI/DS/ES/BP
Value ::= Hhexadecimal number / Decimal number
RANGE (0:FFFF) / RANGE (0:65535)
Up to 2 update registers separated by & can be specified.
Example of UPREG input:
UPREG = "AX := HA0"
UPDATA UPDATE DATA ADDRESS
This parameter updates transient data. The data addressing
syntax cannot be checked by the MMI. The data addresses are
therefore entered in text form and checked by the PDF system.
Syntax:
Update ::= "Address := Value"
Address ::= Se - Offs / *)
Se - Indexregister / *)
DEREF (Se - Offs) *)
Seg ::= Hex / Segmentregister
Offs ::= Hex
Indexregister ::= BX/DI/SI
Value ::= Hex/Dec (RANGE : 0 to FFFF)
Up to 2 update data values separated by & can be specified.
Example of UPDATA input:
UPDATA = "H00FF-H0001 := HFFFF"
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LTGBPT-3 +
ENTR LTGBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ENTR LTGBPT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ALLOW LTGFRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLOW LTG FAULT REPORT
This command resets the detection bits in the LTG fault list, enabling fault
analysis FA:LTG to be restarted.
A detection bit is set in the LTG fault list and fault analysis FA:LTG is
activated whenever a fault occurs for the first time in a LTG. If the same
fault recurs after the detection bit has been set, fault analysis is not
started again. Fault analysis restart requires detection bit reset.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be ACT or CBL.
Input format
-
] ]
] ALLOW LTGFRPT : LTG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG number to be reset.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ALLOW LTGFRPT-1 -
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP LTG MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of LTG
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]PLF= ] ]
] DMP LTGIMDMP : -UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the time stage group number.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the LTG loadlib
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP LTGIMDMP-1 +
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
single quote.
omitted.
Notes:
shorthand for
omitted.
instead of
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the number of bytes which shall
be dumped if only a start address is entered.
DMP LTGIMDMP-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP LTGIMDMP-3 -
TEST LTGPOS
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CIRCUIT IN LTG POSITION
This command tests circuits in an LTGA.
job.
<job number>.
1. TEST LTGPOS - ALL ALL CIRCUITS IN A MODULE
2. TEST LTGPOS - IND INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT
1. Input format
ALL CIRCUITS IN A MODULE
This input format is to be used for testing all circuits in a module.
-
] ]
] TEST LTGPOS : LTG= ,LCPOS= [,SCHED=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter specifies the line circuit position in an LTU.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LTGPOS-1 +
TEST LTGPOS
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
determines the sequence of the started.
TEST LTGPOS-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
TEST LTGPOS
IND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT
This input format is to be used for testing an individual circuit.
-
] ]
] TEST LTGPOS : LTG= ,LCPOS= [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] [,STEP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter specifies the line circuit position in an LTU.
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
determines the sequence of the started.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test is to be
performed.
N NO PERMANENT TEST
Y PERMANENT TEST
Default: N
STEP STEP COMMAND
The test table of the test object is country-specific and is contained
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST LTGPOS-3 +
TEST LTGPOS
IND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
E N D
TEST LTGPOS-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT LTGPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Permanent
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT LTGPRPCH-1 -
CAN LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG PERMANENT PATCH
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN LTGPRPCH : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LTGPRPCH-1 -
DACT LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT LTGPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT LTGPRPCH-1 -
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG PERMANENT PATCH
by parameter PLF.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]ID= ] ]
] DISP LTGPRPCH : -ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
symbolically.
structures:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTGPRPCH-1 +
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP LTGPRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LTG PERMANENT PATCH
Disk).
With each ENTR LTGPRPCH command one of the four different
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR LTGPRPCH command is
necessary.
parameter SUBPCHNO.
ENTR LTGPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],INSRADDR=] ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR LTGPRPCH : ID= -,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= ]
] ],INSVREF= ] ]
] ],SUBPCHNO=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
] [,OLDCNT=]] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
must be identical.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH-1 +
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or not.
&&"+offset" ,where
parameter ID.
of INSRADDR.
insert procedure.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
patch.
a-b
ENTR LTGPRPCH-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
declared.
ENTR LTGPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
subpatch.
a[-b]
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH-3 +
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
ENTR LTGPRPCH-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
UPD LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] UPD LTGPRPCH : ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 UPD LTGPRPCH-1 -
DISP LTGRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG RESOURCES
This command displays either limits and features of a
specified LTG load type or features, limits and available
resources of specified LTGs.
The LTG load type is specified via the parameter LDPARP.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LTG= ] ;- ]
] DISP LTGRES : -LDPARP= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTG equipment number.
a-b
LDPARP LOAD PARAMETER
This parameter specifies the load parameter.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTGRES-1 -
ACT LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT LTGTRPCH-1 -
CAN LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LTGTRPCH-1 -
DACT LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT LTGTRPCH-1 -
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],ID= ] ]
] DISP LTGTRPCH : PLF= -,ADDR= [,LIB=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTGTRPCH-1 +
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolically.
structures:
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
DISP LTGTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With each ENTR LTGTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
ENTR LTGTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],REPADDR= ] ]
] ENTR LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= -,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
identical.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR LTGTRPCH-1 +
ENTR LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter ID.
ENTR LTGTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
E N D
ENTR LTGTRPCH-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command cancels a created LTU.
Prerequisites:
- The ports of the associated LTU must not be in service.
- The LTU must be PLA.
- The last LTU of type U07 in the specified LTG must not be
canceled if an OCANEQ variant still exists.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN LTU : LTG= ,LTU= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
Notes:
If the LTU data and/or port data cannot be sent to the GP even
though the LTG is operational, it is possible to configure the
associated LTG to MBL. If the LTG is configured from this
state to ACT, the LTG receives the data stored in the CP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN LTU-1 -
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command creates an LTU in an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- LTU type, LTG type, load type, application and LTU mounting location
must be compatible.
- No LTU may be created in the specified mounting location.
1. CR LTU - D24D30 DIU24 DIU30
2. CR LTU - NOAPPL LTU TYPES WITH NO APPLICATION
1. Input format
DIU24 DIU30
In this path the LTU types D24 and D30 can be created.
An entry must be made in APPLIC .
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR LTU : LTG= ,LTU= ,TYPE= ,APPLIC= [,MODVAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
The exchange configuration data of the 32 ports correspond to the
specified LTU type and the module variants entered.
Notes:
Available mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange
documents. These documents should be kept up to date.
TYPE LINE TRUNK UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies an LTU type according to the exchange
configuration documentation.
D24 LTU TYPE D24
D30 LTU TYPE D30
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LTU-1 +
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
APPLIC APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the application of a DIU.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for LTU type
D24 and
D30.
- The entry for TYPE and APPLIC values is LTG-type dependent.
! LTGA ! LTGB ! LTGC ! LTGD ! LTGH !
-----------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------!
TYPE (1) ! ! ! ! ! !
D24 ! - ! x ! x ! - ! - !
D30 ! - ! x ! x ! x ! - !
-----------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------!
APPLIC ! ! ! ! ! !
no applic. ! x ! - ! - ! - ! x !
CASCAS ! - ! x ! x ! x ! - !
CCSCCS ! - ! x ! x ! x ! - !
CCSCAS ! - ! x ! x ! x ! - !
NO5CCS ! - ! - ! - ! x ! - !
NO5CAS ! - ! - ! - ! x ! - !
CCSPA ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
EXTPA ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
CCSDLU ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
EXTDLU ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
CCSLDI ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
EXTLDI ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
CASRCA ! - ! x ! x ! - ! - !
V52IF ! - ! x ! - ! - ! - !
(1) Other LTU types than
D24 and
D30
are not considered in this context.
(2) If the application is assigned to CCSLDI or EXTLDI,
the value D30 may be entered for the parameter TYPE.
x Parameter value may be entered.
- Parameter value is not legal for this LTG type.
- The entry for APPLIC is LTG-type dependent.
If type D24 or D30 is entered with the CR LTU command,
a value for application is always requested.
Values allowed for ! D24 ! D30 !
---------------------+-----+-----!
APPLIC ! ! !
no applic. ! - ! - !
CASCAS ! x ! x !
CCSCCS ! x ! x !
CCSCAS ! x ! x !
NO5CCS ! - ! x !
NO5CAS ! - ! x !
CCSPA ! x ! x !
EXTPA ! x ! x !
CCSDLU ! x ! x !
EXTDLU ! x ! x !
CCSLDI ! x ! x !
EXTLDI ! x ! x !
CASRCA ! x ! x !
V52IF ! - ! x !
x parameter value is legal
- parameter value is not legal
CASCAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK CAS
CASRCA RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
CCSCAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK CAS AND CCS
CCSCCS CCSDIU FOR TRUNK CCS
CCSDLU DLU WITH CCS
CCSLDI LOCAL DLU INTERFACE WITH CCS
CCSPA PRIMARY ACCESS WITH CCS
EXTDLU DLU EXTENSION
CR LTU-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTLDI LOCAL DLU INTERFACE EXTENSION
EXTPA PRIMARY ACCESS EXTENSION
NO5CAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK NO5
NO5CCS CCSDIU FOR TRUNK NO5
V52IF V5.2 INTERFACE
MODVAR MODULE VARIANT
This parameter identifies the variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange specific
documentation).
Syntax: (MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..)))
Up to 6 values can be assigned to the corresponding module variants.
Notes:
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2
or 3) and are dependent on the module types. The value 0
must be entered for non-addressable ports of the LTU
(module not inserted).
Incompatibilities:
This parameter is not allowed for the following LTU types:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
INS
PMA
U06
U07
V15
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
b: MODULE VARIANT=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LTU-3 +
CR LTU
NOAPPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTU TYPES WITH NO APPLICATION
In this path all LTU types excluding D24 and D30 can be created.
No application may be entered.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR LTU : LTG= ,LTU= ,TYPE= [,MODVAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
The exchange configuration data of the 32 ports correspond to the
specified LTU type and the module variants entered.
Notes:
Available mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange
documents. These documents should be kept up to date.
TYPE LINE TRUNK UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies an LTU type according to the exchange
configuration documentation.
ATE LTU TYPE ATE
ATM LTU TYPE ATM
INS LTU TYPE INTEGRATED SILC
MCT LTU TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
PMA LTU TYPE PROT. HANDLER MOD. A
U06 LTU TYPE U06
U07 LTU TYPE U07
V01 LTU TYPE V01
V02 LTU TYPE V02
V03 LTU TYPE V03
V04 LTU TYPE V04
V05 LTU TYPE V05
V06 LTU TYPE V06
V07 LTU TYPE V07
V09 LTU TYPE V09
V10 LTU TYPE V10
V11 LTU TYPE V11
V12 LTU TYPE V12
V13 LTU TYPE V13
V14 LTU TYPE V14
CR LTU-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR LTU
NOAPPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
V15 LTU TYPE V15
Y21 LTU TYPE Y21
Y22 LTU TYPE Y22
Y23 LTU TYPE Y23
Y24 LTU TYPE Y24
Y25 LTU TYPE Y25
This parameter identifies the variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange specific
documentation).
Syntax: (MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..)))
Notes:
or 3) and are dependent on the module types. The value 0
Incompatibilities:
This parameter is not allowed for the following LTU types:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
INS
PMA
U06
U07
V15
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
b: MODULE VARIANT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR LTU-5 -
DISP LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command displays the LTU data of one, several or all created LTUs.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP LTU : LTG= [,LTU=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
1. <tsg> - <ltg>
The specified LTUs of one LTG are displayed.
2. <tsg> - <ltg> && <tsg> - <ltg>
All LTUs for the specified range of LTG numbers are displayed.
3. <tsg> - X
The LTUs of all LTGs for the specified TSG are displayed.
4. X - X
All LTUs of the exchange are displayed.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT
Default value: All LTUs are displayed
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP LTU-1 -
EXT LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command enables a partially extended LTU to be extended further.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must exist.
- The LTU to be extended must exist.
- The module variant must not already have been extended (value 0).
- At least one module variant must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- A LTUs of the following types cannot be extended:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
INS
PMA
U06
U07
V15
MCT
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] EXT LTU : LTG= ,LTU= [,MODVAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter identifies the module variants with reference to
the corresponding mounting locations (see exchange-specific
documentation).
Syntax: MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..))
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EXT LTU-1 +
EXT LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2 or 3)
and are dependent on the module type. The value 0 must be entered
for non-addressable ports of the LTU (module not inserted).
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
b: MODULE VARIANT=
E N D
EXT LTU-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
RED LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command cancels certain modules for an LTU. The module variants
to be canceled must be specified with 0.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must have been created.
- The specified LTU must be created.
- The ports to be downgraded must not be in service.
These ports must be PLA.
- At least one module variant must have been specified.
- The variant value of the module to be cancelled is not 0.
Incompatibilities:
- A LTUs of the following types cannot be reduced:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
INS
PMA
U06
U07
V15
MCT
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] RED LTU : LTG= ,LTU= [,MODVAR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
This parameter specifies the LTU variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange-specific documentation).
syntax: MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..))
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RED LTU-1 +
RED LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
or 3) and are dependent on the module type. The value 0
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
b: MODULE VARIANT=
E N D
RED LTU-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
STOP MACID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP MALICIOUS CALL ID
This command has the following effects:
- if entered in the terminating exchange for the incoming line of a
malicious call connection:
the hold state of the incoming line is cancelled and if an identification
tone has been applied, it is switched off. The line is released if the
calling party has already gone on-hook.
- if entered in the transit exchange for an outgoing line of a malicious
call connection:
outgoing link cleared up to next exchange
incoming link cleared up to origin
- if entered in the originating exchange for an outgoing line of a malicious
call connection:
malicious call connection cleared forward up to next exchange.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LNO=] ]
] STOP MACID : TGNO= -,CIC= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
CCS7 signaling. The input 0-0 is illegal.
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP MACID-1 -
DISP MAL
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS
This command is used either to trace a malicious call connection for
which the called party number is known or to trace malicious call
connections back from a transit/originating exchange.
Prerequisites:
-Before entering the display job, some records in main memory may need
to be transferred to disk. Records waiting for immediate printout are
not necessarily written to disk.
<job number>.
1. DISP MAL - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER TRACING
2. DISP MAL - TGNO TRUNK TRACING
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER TRACING
Input format to trace malicious call connections to the specified
subscriber.
-
] ]
] DISP MAL : DN= [,DATE= ,TIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber who is
authorized for call identification.
Notes:
-The directory number must be entered with the terminal selection
number for ISDN subscribers.
DATE DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MAL-1 +
DISP MAL
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
DISP MAL-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MAL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRUNK TRACING
Input format to trace malicious call connections for which the outgoing
trunk is known.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],CIC=] ]
] DISP MAL : TGNO= -,LNO= [,DATE= ,TIME=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for a CCS7
trunk.
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LNO LINE NUMBER
DATE DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MAL-3 +
DISP MAL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECONDS=
E N D
DISP MAL-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL MAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL DATA
This command displays malicious call identification data.
This function is used in the terminating exchange to trace
a malicious call for which :
- the concurrent displaying was deactivated or
- the printer output was impossible.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] SEL MAL : [NO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NO FILE SECTION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the file section number, which is always
added at the display begin.
Notes :
- If a display job is interrupted (e.g. by recovery or because
the STOP JOB command is entered) it may be repeated by entering
this number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL MAL-1 -
CAN MALAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA
This command cancels the malicious call types for which the
concurrent display of the malicious call identification data
should take place and/or the system panel alarm for call
identification should be triggered.
Additionally the printout of the A-party directory number in malicious
call identification printouts can be deactivated.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MALAD : <DISP= ,ALARM= ,FEAT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DISP DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the type of malicious call trace for
which the printout is disabled.
MALREQCO MALCALL ID.REQ.,A-DN KNOWN
MALREQIC MALCALL ID.REQ.,A-DN UNKNOWN
MALREQ MALCALL ID.REQ.
MALIMCO MALCALL ID.IMMED.,A-DN KNOWN
MALIMIC MALCALL ID.IMMED.,A-DN UNKNOWN
MALIM MALCALL ID.IMMED.
MALTRU MALCALL ID.OVER TRUNK
ALARM ALARM
This parameter specifies the malicious call types for which the
triggering of the system panel alarm for call identification
is to be canceled.
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the malicious call identification
features which are to be canceled.
DNDISP DISPLAY A-PARTY DN
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MALAD-1 -
DISP MALAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA
This command is used to display the administrative data for different
cases of malicious call identification, i.e. whether there is automatic
printer output and/or an alarm on the system panel. It also displays
whether the A-directory number display is switched on.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MALAD ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MALAD-1 -
ENTR MALAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA
This command enters the malicious call types for which the
concurrent display of the malicious call identification data
should take place and/or the system panel alarm for call
identification should be triggered.
Additionally the printout of the A-party directory number in malicious
call identification printouts can be activated.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR MALAD : <DISP= ,ALARM= ,FEAT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DISP DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the malicious call for which the automatic
printer output function and/or the display of malicious call alarms
is activated, or alternately, the malicious call for which these
features are activated/deactivated.
ALARM ALARM
This parameter specifies the malicious call types for which the
system panel alarm for call identification is to be triggered.
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the malicious call identification
features which are to be activated.
DNDISP DISPLAY A-PARTY DN
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR MALAD-1 -
DISP MALCON
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HELD MALCIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS
This command either displays all malicious call connections in the
hold state or whether a malicious call connection is being held.
<job number>.
1. DISP MALCON - ALL ALL HELD CONNECTIONS
2. DISP MALCON - CODE CODE DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
3. DISP MALCON - TGNO TGNO DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
4. DISP MALCON - TRUNK TRUNK DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
1. Input format
ALL HELD CONNECTIONS
Input format for the output of all held malicious call connections.
-
] ]
] DISP MALCON : [BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
-This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME.
Default value of parameters BEGDATE, BEGTIME:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
x x (BEGDATE,BEGTIME)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
-This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE.
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MALCON-1 +
DISP MALCON
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
-This parameter can be used in combination with ENDTIME.
Default value of parameters ENDDATE, ENDTIME:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
x x (ENDDATE,ENDTIME)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
DISP MALCON-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MALCON
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CODE DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
Input format for all held malicious call connections in a certain direc-
tion specified by a digit combination.
-
] ]
] DISP MALCON : CODE= [,TGNO=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination for determination
of malicious call data.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MALCON-3 +
DISP MALCON
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
DISP MALCON-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MALCON
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TGNO DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
Input format for all held malicious call connections in a certain direc-
tion specified by a given trunk group.
-
] ]
] DISP MALCON : TGNO= [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] ]
] ]
] [,ENDTIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MALCON-5 +
DISP MALCON
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECONDS=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
c: SECONDS=
DISP MALCON-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MALCON
TRUNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRUNK DEFINED HELD CONNECTIONS
Input format for the held malicious call connection in a certain direc-
tion specified by a given trunk.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],LNO=] ]
] DISP MALCON : TGNO= -,CIC= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for a CCS7
trunk.
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MALCON-7 -
ACT MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command is used to activate the mass-calling function
with or without seizure reduction.
Recognition starts immediately.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT MASSC : [REDUCT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REDUCT REDUCTION
This parameter specifies whether or not reduction is activated
for the mass-calling function.
N REDUCTION NOT ACTIVATED
NO REDUCTION NOT ACTIVATED
Y REDUCTION ACTIVATED
YES REDUCTION ACTIVATED
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT MASSC-1 -
CAN MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command is used to reset the criteria for the mass-calling
function.
Prerequisites: there are no digit combinations in the lists of
particular answer seizure ratio thresholds and excluded (not
monitored) destinations (the contents of these lists can be
erased using the command MOD MASSC).
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MASSC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MASSC-1 -
DACT MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command is used to deactivate the mass-calling function.
The command is entered without parameters.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT MASSC ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT MASSC-1 -
DISP MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command displays the mass-calling criteria and/or the digit
combination tables. The output is determined by the parameter
FORMAT.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MASSC : [FORMAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the information that will be
output.
STATUS OUTPUT STATUS
The status of the mass-calling function resulting
from the commands ENTR MASSC/ACT MASSC/DACT MASSC/M
displayed:
- the values of ASR, MINCALLS, LBUCLCR and RTIME
- whether there are digit combinations with a
special answer seizure ratio
- whether there are digit combinations which have
been excluded from recognition and reduction or
only from reduction.
DICO DIG. COMB. WITH SPECIFIC ASR
The list of digit combinations with a special
answer seizure ratio is displayed.
EXCDICO EXCLUDED DIGIT COMBINATIONS
The list of digit combinations which have been
excluded from recognition and reduction or only
from reduction is displayed.
ALL OUTPUT ALL INFORMATION
Default: STATUS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MASSC-1 -
ENTR MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command is used to enter the criteria for the mass-calling
function.
Afterwards the mass-calling function has to be activated with
ACT MASSC.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR MASSC : ASR= ,MINCALLS= [,LBUCLCR=] [,RTIME=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
for the automatic recognition of mass-calling destinations.
To be recognized as a mass-calling destination, the answer
seizure ratio of a destination must be lower than ASR.
a[-b]
a: VALUE FOR THE FIRST DIGITS=
This unit specifies the answer seizure ratio threshold to
recognize possible mass-calling . If Unit2 does not exist
then the Unit1 applies to all digit chain.
b: VALUE FOR 5TH UP TO 14TH DIGIT=
recognize possible mass-calling destinations after the first
4 digits have been found. This value must always be less
than or equal to the first unit. If this unit is not entered
the value from the first unit will be considered for all
steps.
MINCALLS MINIMUM OF CALLS PER 10 SEC
This parameter defines the number of calls that must be
exceeded for a destination to be considered a mass-calling
destination.
This parameter defines the limit of seizures (seizures per
second) by the Leaky Bucket method.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR MASSC-1 +
ENTR MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: LCPS1P0
RTIME REDUCTION TIME
This parameter defines the time (2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 minutes) after
entry of ACT MASSC during which the traffic is reduced by the
Leaky Bucket method. The reduction together with recognition
can be manually stopped with DACT MASSC.
Note: during the reduction phase no further mass-calling
destinations can be recognized.
Default: 4
E N D
ENTR MASSC-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS
This command modifies the criteria for the mass-calling function.
The values for the parameters ASR, MINCALLS, LBUCLCR and
RTIME will overwrite the old values.
Prerequisites: The mass-calling function is not active and
ENTR MASSC has already been entered.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD MASSC : [ASR=] [,MINCALLS=] [,LBUCLCR=] [,RTIME=] ]
] ]
] [,NDICO= [,ASRD=]] [,CDICO=] [,NEXCDICO=] ]
] ]
] [,EXCRECOG=] [,CEXCDICO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
for the automatic recognition of mass-calling destinations.
To be recognized as a mass-calling destination, the answer
seizure ratio of a destination must be lower than ASR.
a[-b]
a: VALUE FOR THE FIRST DIGITS=
recognize possible mass-calling destinations. If Unit2
does not exist then the Unit1 applies to all digit chain.
b: VALUE FOR 5TH UP TO 14TH DIGIT=
recognize possible mass-calling destinations after the first
4 digits have been found. This value must always be less
than or equal to the first unit. If this unit is not entered
the value from the first unit will be considered for all
steps.
MINCALLS MINIMUM OF CALLS PER 10 SEC
This parameter defines the number of calls that must be
exceeded for a destination to be considered a mass-calling
destination.
This parameter defines the limit of seizures (seizures per
second) by the Leaky Bucket method.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD MASSC-1 +
MOD MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTIME REDUCTION TIME
This parameter defines the time (2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 minutes) after
entry of ACT MASSC during which the traffic is reduced by the
Leaky Bucket method. The reduction together with recognition
can be manually stopped with DACT MASSC.
Note: during the reduction phase no further mass-calling
destinations can be recognized.
This parameter defines digit combinations of four digits
with a particular answer seizure ratio threshold. It is always
entered together with the parameter ASRD.
ASRD ASR FOR SPECIFIC DESTINATION
This parameter defines the particular answer seizure ratio
threshold that is assigned to the digit combination entered
with NDICO.
CDICO CANCEL DIGIT COMBINATION
canceled from the list of digit combinations with a particular
answer seizure ratio threshold.
NEXCDICO NEW EXCLUDE. DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter defines digit combinations to be excluded
from mass-calling recognition and reduction through their
first 4 digits or only from mass-calling reduction.
It is entered together with the parameter EXCRECOG.
MOD MASSC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD MASSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXCRECOG EXCLUDED FROM RECOGNITION
This parameter specifies whether recognition and reduction
or only reduction are excluded through the digit combination
entered with NEXCDICO.
This parameter entered with YES means that the digit
combination is excluded from recognition and reduction.
This parameter entered with NO means that the digit
combination is excluded only from reduction.
N ONLY EXCLUDED FROM REDUCTION
NO ONLY EXCLUDED FROM REDUCTION
Y EXCL. FROM RECOGN. AND REDUCT.
YES EXCL. FROM RECOGN. AND REDUCT.
Default: NO
CEXCDICO CANCEL EXCL. DIGIT COMBINATION
canceled from the list of excluded destinations.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD MASSC-3 -
CONF MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB
This command configures the message buffer (MB).
Prerequisites:
- All MB units must be in the same state (except PLA).
This is only valid for DE4 and DE5 since there is no classification
of the MB in configurable subunits for DE3.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MB : MB= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer side.
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
Compatibilities:
+------------+---------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL !
+------------+---------------+
! ACT ! - !! !
! MBL ! + - !
! UNA ! + + !
! PLA ! - + !
+------------+---------------+
+ : legal operating state transition
- : illegal operating state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or lost calls.
This operating state transition is only permitted, if there is
redundance.
ACT ACTIVE
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP = Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MB-1 -
DIAG MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER
This command diagnoses the message buffer of a system side.
Prerequisites:
- The SN must be of the capacity stages SN:31LTG or SN:63LTG.
- The message buffer to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process should be running in the message buffer.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG MB : MB= ,TA= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in
which the diagnosis is to be done.
TA TEST AREA
ALL COMPLETE MESSAGE BUFFER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MB-1 -
STAT MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF MESSAGE BUFFER
This command displays the MB operating state.
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT MB ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT MB-1 -
CONF MBUL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB UNIT LTG
This command configures the message buffer unit for line/trunk groups.
This command is only relevant for DE4 and DE5.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MBUL : MB= ,MBUL= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer side.
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR LTG
This parameter specifies the number of the TSG.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL PLA !
+------------+----------------------+
! ACT ! - !! - !
! MBL ! + - 3 !
! UNA ! + + - !
! NAC ! - + - !
! PLA ! - + - !
+------------+----------------------+
redundance.
3 : This state transition is only possible if MBUL-0-x and MBUL-1-x
and TSG-0-x and TSG-1-x have the same operating state.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
If SUP = Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
N NO
NO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MBUL-1 +
CONF MBUL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y YES
YES
E N D
CONF MBUL-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG MBUL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MB UNIT FOR LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command diagnoses a message buffer unit for LTG (MBU:LTG).
Prerequisites:
- The MBU:LTG to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in the message buffer.
- The associated MBU:SGC must be ACT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG MBUL : MB= ,MBUL= ,TA= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in which
the diagnosis is to be done.
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR LTG
This parameter specifies the MBU:LTG in which the diagnosis is to be
done.
Compatibilities:
Restrictions for different DE capacity stages
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! !SN:31LTG!SN:63LTG!SN:126LTG!SN:252LTG!SN:504LTG!
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! MBUL ! 0 ! 0 ! 0,1 ! 0...3 ! 0...7 !
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
TA TEST AREA
ALL COMPLETE MB UNIT FOR LTG
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MBUL-1 -
CONF MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB UNIT SPACE GROUP CONTROL
This command configures the message buffer unit for the switch group
controls in the switching network.
This command is only relevant for DE4 and DE5.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MBUS : MB= ,MBUS= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer (MB) side.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR SGC
This parameter specifies the number of the SSG.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL PLA !
+------------+----------------------+
! ACT ! - !! - !
! MBL ! + - 3 !
! UNA ! + + - !
! NAC ! - + - !
! PLA ! - + - !
+------------+----------------------+
redundance.
3 : This state transition is only possible if MBUS-0-x and MBUS-1-x
and SSG-0-x and SSG-1-x have the same operating state.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
If SUP= YES is specified, messages from the periphery
are suppressed during command execution.
N NO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MBUS-1 +
CONF MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
CONF MBUS-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE UNIT SWITCH GROUP CONTROL
This command diagnoses a message buffer unit for SGC (MBU:SGC).
Prerequisites:
- The MBU:SGC to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in the message buffer.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG MBUS : MB= ,MBUS= ,TA= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in which
the diagnosis is to be done.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR SGC
This parameter specifies the MBU:SGC number in which the diagnosis is
to be done.
Compatibilities:
Restrictions for different DE capacity stages
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! !SN:31LTG!SN:63LTG!SN:126LTG!SN:252LTG!SN:504LTG!
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! MBUS ! 0 ! 0 ! 0 ! 0,1 ! 0...3 !
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
TA TEST AREA
ALL COMPLETE MB UNIT FOR SGC
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MBUS-1 -
CONF MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
This command configures the receivers of a Line Trunk Unit of
type Mid Call Trigger to one of the states PLA, MBL or
ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MCT : LTG= ,MCTNO= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
MCTNO LTUNO TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
This parameter specifies the target operating status.
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MCT-1 -
DIAG MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
This command starts diagnosis of a Line Trunk Unit of type
Mid Call Trigger.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be in the operating status ACT or CBL
- The Mid Call Trigger Receiver must be in the operating
status MBL.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG MCT : LTG= ,MCTNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MCT-1 -
STAT MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP. STATUS MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
- one LTU of type Mid Call Trigger of a particular LTG
- one LTU of type Mid Call Trigger of all LTGs
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger of one LTG
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger of all LTGs
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger in a particular operating
status of a particular LTG
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger in a particular operating
status of all LTGs
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT MCT : LTG= [,MCTNO=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
unit values.
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT MCT-1 -
DISP MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC DISK
This command displays the following information for each magnetic disk:
- label
- capacity
- number of available PAM blocks,
- number of available F1 labels,
- number of disk files.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MD ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MD-1 -
INIT MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC DISK
This command initializes and formats a magnetic disk. If a faulty
sector is detected, an alternative sector is automatically assigned.
The disk is labelled automatically when it is activated.
Prerequisite:
- The magnetic disk device must be available.
- The magnetic disk device must be in the correct operating state.
- The data carrier must be available.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] INIT MD : MDD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the logical device number
of the magnetic disk device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 INIT MD-1 -
CONF MDD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This command configures a magnetic disk device.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MDD : MDD= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MDD-1 -
DIAG MDD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
for a magnetic disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic disk device must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG MDD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MDD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magnetic disk device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MDD : MDD= [,SUP=] [,TA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies the test area.
Default: T1 - T6
DIAGST STATISTICS AFTER FORMATTING
T1 FORMATTING OF DISK
T2 TEST OF SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
T3 TEST OF ADDRESS FUNCTIONS
T4 TEST OF DATA TRANSFER
T6 READ CHECK OF DISK CONTENTS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MDD-1 +
DIAG MDD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magnetic
disk device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MDD : MDD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] [,TA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
TA TEST AREA
Default: T1 - T6
T1 FORMATTING OF DISK
DIAG MDD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG MDD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MDD-3 -
TEST MDD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This command tests a magnetic disk device.
Prerequisite:
- The magnetic disk device must be ACT.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST MDD : [MDD=] [,SUP=] [,TA=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be tested.
Note:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active units of
the relevant type are tested.
Default: YES
TA TEST AREA
Default: T1-T6
T1 DISPLAY OF DISK PARAMETERS
TESTST DISPLAY OF STATISTICS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST MDD-1 -
CONT MDDACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTINUE MDD-ACTIVATION
This command instructs the file control processor to reactivate the disk
with files after a double disk out. Before this however, the most up-to-
date generation is sent to the terminal.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONT MDDACT : [LABEL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LABEL LABEL OF TARGET COMMAND
This parameter specifies whether the disk, is to be re-labelled.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONT MDDACT-1 -
STOP MDDACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP ACTIVATION OF DISC
This command stops disk activation after a double disk failure. This is done
via the file control processor.
Input format
-
] ]
] STOP MDDACT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STOP MDDACT-1 -
ACT MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE MDD AUDIT
This command starts a specified Checksum MDD Audit On Demand.
If the user wants to check only one file or one generation of
a generation TYPE, he has to provide the parameter FILE with the
file name and/or the parameter GEN with the generation name.
Providing the parameter RESTORE the user can control or initiate
different Audit functions. The automatic restoration function
during this running Audit can be locked or a restoration can be
carried out for a selected file half. The specified file copy
of MDD-0 or MDD-1 will be signed as mismatched and restored using
the copy of the other disk MDD-1 or MDD-0.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT MDDAUDIT : TYPE= [,GEN=] [,FILE=] [,RESTORE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE GENERATION TYPE
This parameter specifies a generation type.
X ALL GENERATION TYPES
ACTUAL ACTUAL GENERATION
FIXPOINT FIXPOINT GENERATION
GEN NAME OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation name.
FILE NAME OF FILE
This parameter specifies a file name of a generation.
RESTORE RESTORATION ORDER
This parameter controls or initiates the restoration function
of the MDD Audit On Demand.
REST RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALFS
The restoration of a defective file half will be
done automatically by the Checksum MDD Audit.
CHECK CHECK ONLY
Checks only the file halves without restoration.
The automatic restoration function of this
MDD Audit will be locked. The Audit delivers only
the F1-label checksum informations and the
computed checksums.
HALF0 RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALF 0
Restore the file half on MDD-00.
HALF1 RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALF 1
Restore the file half on MDD-01.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT MDDAUDIT-1 -
DACT MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE MDD AUDIT
This command deactivates a running Routine Checksum MDD Audit or
an running Checksum MDD Audit On Demand.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT MDDAUDIT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT MDDAUDIT-1 -
DISP MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MDD AUDIT ATTRIBUTES
This command displays the attributes of the Checksum MDD Audit.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MDDAUDIT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MDDAUDIT-1 -
MOD MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DATA FOR ROUTINE MDD AUDIT
This command modifies the attributes of the Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
To change the start time of the Routine Checksum MDD Audit provide
the parameter TIME.
To lock or unlock the Routine Checksum MDD Audit for one generation
type, provide the parameter TYPE and LOCKSTAT.
To lock or unlock the Routine Checksum MDD Audit for all generation
types, provide only the parameter LOCKSTAT.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD MDDAUDIT : <TIME= ,LOCKSTAT=> [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME START TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the
Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
a-b
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTE=
LOCKSTAT LOCK STATUS
This parameter specifies the lock status of one or all generation
types, which has to be tested by the Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
LOCKED LOCKED
UNLOCKED UNLOCKED
TYPE GENERATION TYPE
This parameter specifies a generation type.
X ALL GENERATION TYPES
ACTUAL ACTUAL GENERATION
FIXPOINT FIXPOINT GENERATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD MDDAUDIT-1 -
CAN MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command cancels the modem tone generator ports belonging to a
modem tone generator unit (MDTOG).
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the modem tone generator unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MDTOG-1 -
CONF MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command configures a modem tone generator to one of the states
PLA, MBL or ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the target operating status.
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MDTOG-1 -
CR MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command creates the modem tone generator ports belonging to a
modem tone generator unit (MDTOG).
Prerequisites :
- The LTU must have previously been created with the appropriate type for
modem tone generator unit.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MDTOG-1 -
DIAG MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command starts diagnosis of a modem tone generator in a
line trunk group.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be in the operating status ACT or CBL
- The modem tone generator must be in the operating status
MBL.
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MDTOG-1 -
DISP MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command displays one or all MDTOGs
within a specified range (interval) of LTGs.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MDTOG : LTG= [,MDTOG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MDTOG-1 -
STAT MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF MODEM TONE GENERATOR
- one Modem Tone Generator in a particular LTG
- one Modem Tone Generator in all LTGs
- all Modem Tone Generators in one LTG
- all Modem Tone Generators in all LTGs
- all Modem Tone Generators in a particular operating
status in a particular LTG
- all Modem Tone Generators in a particular operating
status in all LTGs
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT MDTOG : LTG= [,MDTOG=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
unit values.
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT MDTOG-1 -
DISP MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGE METERS
This command displays the meter contents for the specified subscriber
directory numbers, or Toll free Service number or Inter Administration
Charging Statistics (IACHASTA) registration point.
1. DISP MET - IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
2. DISP MET - METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
3. DISP MET - METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
1. Input format
METERS FOR IACHASTA
This input format displays the meters for a registration point (IACHASTA).
Notes:
- Display for a running registration:
It is only possible to display the meters of an individual registration
point.
- for a named registration point: parameter RGPT must be entered.
- for an anonymous registration point: parameters OBJORIG and/or OBJDEST
must be entered.
- Display from an account file.
The parameters are the same as for a running registration, with additionally
the parameter SOURCE.
It is possible to display the meters of an individual registration, or for
the whole file.
-
] ]
] DISP MET : TYPE= <,RGPT= ,OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST= ,SOURCE=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT
This parameter specifies the named registration point.
This parameter specifies the origin object of an anonymous
registration point.
This parameter specifies the destination object of an anonymous
registration point.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MET-1 +
DISP MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOURCE SOURCE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the accounting file to be used as
input.
Notes:
SOURCE file name format: CA.IR.rnnns.fffff
CA = Call Data Administration
IR = IACHASTA Counters
r = S in case of a SINGLE sided registration
= D in case of a DOUBLE sided registration
= M in case of a MIXED registration
nnn = day number 001-366 or 400-999
s = sequence number (0-9)
fffff = the file extension which has (eventually) been entered at
the start of the registration with parameter FILEEXT of
command ACT IACRG.
DISP MET-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
This input format displays the metering charges for the specified
subscriber directory numbers, when the directory numbers are not
suppressed by the suppression criterion (DNSUP) by the ENTR METADM
command.
-
] ]
] DISP MET : TYPE= ,DN= [,LAC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number(s) or directory
number interval(s).
Notes:
- Up to 7 directory numbers/directory number intervals
can be linked.
- All explicitly entered directory numbers (including start and end
values of intervals) must exist.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- LAC=X is only allowed with DN=X.
- No value for LAC is only allowed when only 1 areacode exists
in the exchange.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MET-3 +
DISP MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
This input format displays the metering charges for Toll Free Service
numbers.
-
] ]
] DISP MET : TYPE= ,SDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
SDN TFS SERVICE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the service directory number of a Toll Free
Service (TFS) subscriber. The number is entered in two units, of which
the second is optional. The first unit is the directory number and
the second is the option code.
It is only useful to enter the option code when displaying a single
TFS meter. A list is output for all destination codes of the service
directory number.
a[-b]
a: 3 TO 6 DIGIT SDN=
b: SERVICE OPTION CODE=
E N D
DISP MET-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDIT CHARGE METER
This command creates charge meter files on the EWSD-system disk.
These files contains the current meter readings for one of the following
charging types:
- METSUB subscriber directory numbers
- METSTAT statistic indices
- METTR trunks
- METTFS Toll Free Service directory numbers
- IACMET inter administration charging (IACHASTA)
File creation is only possible for charging types that have been activated
with the command ENTR EXDDAT (not applicable to IACHASTA).
Prerequisites:
- Time must be SECURE.
1. EDIT MET - IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
2. EDIT MET - METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
3. EDIT MET - METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
4. EDIT MET - METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
5. EDIT MET - METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
1. Input format
METERS FOR IACHASTA
This input format creates disk files with the meter readings for IACHASTA.
By default, the meters contents are read from memory.
It is however, also possible to read the meter contents from a dedicated
disk file.
Notes:
- CREATED account file name format: CA.IC.rnnns.fffff
with r = kind of contained registration points
- S in case of a SINGLE sided registration
- D in case of a DOUBLE sided registration
- M in case of a MIXED registration
nnn = day number 001-366 or 400-999
s = sequence number
In normal cases, no more than 10 account files per day will
be generated for a given registration. For these, nnn indicates
the current day number of the year and s the sequence number,
starting with 0, for that day.
If more than 10 files are generated then, for the 11th and
further files of that day, nnns defaults to the first free
number (no such file with this number on disk) starting from
4000.
fffff = the file extension which has (eventually) been entered at the
start of the registration with parameter FILEEXT of command
ACT IACRG (optional).
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],SOURCE= ]] ]
] EDIT MET : TYPE= ]-,RGPTTYPE=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT MET-1 +
EDIT MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOURCE SOURCE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file to be used as the
source for the meter readings. Otherwise, the current memory
contents are used.
If a source file is entered, a file is created for each registration
contained in the source file.
Notes:
- INPUT file name format: CA.IC.UCHA.nnnhhs (optional)
CA = Call Data Administration
IC = IACHASTA counters
UCHA = update charges
nnn = day number (001-366) or (400-999)
hh = hour (00-23)
s = sequence number (0-9)
+,*,%,#
This parameter specifies the registration point type.
Notes:
- The parameter RGPTTYPE is incompatible with parameter SOURCE.
If neighter SOURCE nor RGPTTYPE is specified, an account file
is created per active meter registration (SINGLE/ DOUBLE/ MIXED).
The parameter RGPTTYPE allows to specify the generation for
one specific registration instead of all active registrations.
- Default = value of the defined registrations.
DOUBLE DOUBLE REGISTRATION
MIXED MIXED REGISTRATION
SINGLE SINGLE REGISTRATION
EDIT MET-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT MET
METSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERS FOR STATISTICS
This input format creates disk files with the current meter readings for
statistic charging.
-
] ]
] EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the output file.
Notes:
- File name layout: CA.meter type.function.identifier
CA = call data administration
meter type = SU METSUB
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
function = CHA for charge accounting
APS for APS change
identifier = 1...7 alphanumerical characters
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (requested action) of the
command.
Notes:
- If the parameter FUNC is not specified, the value ACCOUNT is default.
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT FILE
APSCHANG APS CHANGE FILE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT MET-3 +
EDIT MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
subscriber charging.
Notes:
- The parameters ACCMO, ACC, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for subscribers and FORMAT=2 was specified with
the ENTR METADM command.
-
] ]
] EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,DNGRP=] [,LAC=] ]
] ]
] [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] [,ACC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
APS for APS change
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
command.
Notes:
This parameter specifies the directory number group.
Notes:
- If the parameter DNGRP was specified, only the charges for the
directory numbers which group agrees with the parameter value, are
included.
EDIT MET-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- If the parameter LAC is specified, the charges for those directory
numbers which are contained in the specified local network are
included.
METSGN METER TYPE SIGNIFICANCE
This parameter specifies the significance of the generated meter file.
FIRST FIRST CHARGE DISK FILE
LAST LAST CHARGE DISK FILE
NORMAL NORMAL CHARGE DISK FILE
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
This parameter specifies the accounting month.
ACC ACCOUNT OFFICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the accounting location.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT MET-5 +
EDIT MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
Toll Free Service numbers.
Notes:
- The parameters ACCMO, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for TFS meters and FORMAT=3 was specified
with the ENTR METADM command.
-
] ]
] EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] ]
] ]
] [,ACC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
APS for APS change
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
command.
Notes:
EDIT MET-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
ACC ACCOUNT OFFICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the accounting location.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT MET-7 +
EDIT MET
METTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
METERS FOR TRUNKS
trunk charging.
- The parameters ACCMO, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for trunk meters and FORMAT=3 was specified
with the ENTR METADM command.
-
] ]
] EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
APS for APS change
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
command.
Notes:
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
EDIT MET-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
EDIT MET
METTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 EDIT MET-9 -
REG MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REGENERATE CHARGE METER
This command regenerates the meter readings for the specified charging
type after an APS change. The regeneration of the charging data (for sub-
scriber, statistic, trunk meters or toll free service meters) is carried
out from a charging type specific disk file.
Prerequisites:
- The regeneration of subscriber charges after an APS change is only
possible if the number of local networks, their designation
(local area code) and the thresholds for the individual counters
have not changed.
Input format
-
] ]
] REG MET : FILE= ,TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the input file.
Notes:
- Filename is arbitrary. The file is a copy of the file CA.xx.APS.xxxxx
which was created with EDIT MET:FUNC=APSCHANG.
+,*,%,#
TYPE TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REG MET-1 -
SAVE MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SAVE CHARGE METER
This command, depending on the requested function:
- verifies the checksum
- saves the contents
- repairs the contents
- initiates a reload of the meter from the backup file
after a change of APS-generation.
Input format
-
] ]
] SAVE MET : [TYPE=] [,REFILE=] [,ZEROIN=] [,FUNC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies for which charging type the meters are to be
saved. Leaving out this parameter automatically saves the meters of all
charging types which have been activated with the ENTR EXDDAT command.
Notes:
The command is particularly important after an automatic generation
fallback. In both cases it is possible that the generation that becomes
active does not contain all the matrix points that where present in the
original APS and, therefore, in the disk files.
REFILE REPAIR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the repair file, used for
repairing corrupted charge meters.
Notes:
- The repair file is an older copy of a backup file.
- The repair file is the file used to repair defective charge meters
when a safeguarding file is corrupted.
- The entered file must already exist on disk.
- The validity of a repair file is verified (correct file and charging
type) before use.
- This parameter should only be entered after a system request
(the repairable meters have already been repaired, only the remainder
will be loaded from the repair file).
ZEROIN ZERO INITIALIZE
This parameter forces the initialization to zero of corrupted charge
meters.
Notes:
- Initialization should only be performed if the charge meters in
the transient area, safeguarding file and repair file are detected
as being defective (if more than 10 errors are found in one
logical block, the entire block is treated as defective).
- This parameter should only be entered after a system request
(the already repairable meters have been repaired, so only the not
repairable meters, double errors, are reset to zero).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SAVE MET-1 +
SAVE MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (intended use) of the command.
Notes:
- Default value is SAVE.
CHECK CHECK METERS
SAVE SAVE METERS
FALLBACK START FALLBACK
E N D
SAVE MET-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER ADMINISTRATION DATA
This command displays the general meter administration data.
The following values are displayed for all the charging types:
- the central dispatch office
- the number of the booking office
- the postprocessing format
- the charge meter threshold values
- Toll Free Service account number prefix
- directory number type .
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP METADM ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP METADM-1 -
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER METER ADMINISTRATION DATA
This command enters exchange specific settings for the meter administration:
- the central dispatching office
- the number of the booking office
- the postprocessing format
- Toll Free Service account number prefix
- counter threshold values
- directory number suppression criteria
Prerequisites:
- The FORMAT parameter must be entered before an account file for
the corresponding TYPE can be created.
- The DPATCH and BOOKOF parameters must be entered before the
first subscriber metering account file of FORMAT=2 is created
and before a TFS-account file is created.
- The ACNOPR parameter must be entered before the first Toll Free
Service account file is created.
- CNTRTHR values, if they differ from the default, must be entered
before charge meters from the previous APS are regenerated.
Warnings:
The following should be considered when changing the thresholds of
individual counters:
- In the case of counter overflow, postprocessing can not determine
whether the overflow took place before or after the threshold was
changed.
- Regeneration of meter readings is only allowed if all the thresholds
in the regeneration file correspond with the current values in memory.
Changing these values can, therefore, invalidate the APS-change files.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR METADM : [DPATCH=] [,BOOKOF=] [,TYPE=] [,FORMAT=] ]
] ]
] [,ACNOPR=] [,CNTRTHR=] [,DNSUP=] [,PDNLEN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DPATCH CENTRAL DISPATCHING OFFICE
This parameter specifies the central dispatching office.
Notes:
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not
changed.
- This parameter is only relevant if Toll Free Service
account files are to be generated.
.,+,*,%,#
BOOKOF NUMBER OF THE BOOKING OFFICE
This parameter specifies the identification of the booking office.
Notes:
changed.
- This parameter is only relevant if subscriber metering
account files of FORMAT=2 or Toll Free Service ac-
count files are to be generated.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR METADM-1 +
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the selected charging type and, therefore,
controls the meaning of the accompanying CNTRTHR and FORMAT para-
meters.
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS .
FORMAT ACCOUNT FILE FORMAT
This parameter, depending on the value of TYPE, specifies the
charging type specific postprocessing format of the account file.
Notes:
- There is no default value for this parameter.
It must be entered before any account file of the corresponding
type can be generated.
- Subscriber charging: FORMAT 1 = world market, counters 1-3,
33-byte records
FORMAT 2 = DBP, counter 2, 32-byte records
FORMAT 3 = world market, counters 1-5,
50-byte records
+ header (with creation date
and creation time), 50-byte
records
with extended directory numbers,
54-byte records
- Trunk charging : FORMAT 1 = TGNO-LNO trunk identification;
combined counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
FORMAT 2 = TGNO-LNO-CIC trunk identification;
combined counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
FORMAT 3 = TGNO-LNO-CIC trunk identification;
separate counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
- Statistic charging : FORMAT 1 = without call duration; standard
assignment identification
FORMAT 2 = with call duration
FORMAT 3 = with call duration; extended
assignment identification
- Toll Free Service : FORMAT 2 = world market
FORMAT 3 = DBP (max. counter value 999999999)
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not changed.
ACNOPR ACCOUNT NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the account number prefix for Toll Free
Service.
Notes:
- There is no default value for this parameter.
- It must be entered before a Toll Free Service account file is
generated.
ENTR METADM-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNTRTHR COUNTER SPECIFIC THRESHOLD
This parameter, depending on the value of TYPE,
specifies the overflow thresholds for either the
normal subscriber or the Toll Free Service subscriber
charge and call counters.
Notes:
- For normal subscribers, the thresholds for all five
counters can be changed.
- Threshold administration for TFS subscribers
is restricted to counters 2 and 3 (counter 1
is a dummy).
changed.
Compatibilities:
The maximum threshold for a specific counter is
limited by its physical length:
TYPE=METSUB
- counters 1 and 3 are 2 bytes long and have a
maximum value of 65535.
- counters 2,4 and 5 are 3 bytes long and can go
up to 16777215.
TYPE=METTFS
- all counters have a minimum threshold of 999999
- the maximum thresholds depend on the value of the
accompanying format parameters:
FORMAT 2:
max. value for counter 2 = 99999999
FORMAT 3:
- default:
for TYPE=METSUB : the highest possible value as
defined by the physical counter
length.
for TYPE=METTFS : 999999
a-b
a: THRESHOLD VALUE=
b: COUNTER NUMBER=
DNSUP DIRECTORY NUMBER SUPPRESSION
This parameter specifies the selection criterion "directory
number suppression" and controls all output of subscriber
meters.
Notes:
- This parameter is valid for all functions of the meter
administration and only meters which are not suppressed
by this criterion:
- are collected in the account file
- are displayed with DISP MET
- are displayed for DN related objects with meter
assignment
- are displayed in case of repaired meters
- are displayed when they cannot be regenerated
- When no suppression criterion exists (=NONE),
all standard directory numbers are output.
Standard directory numbers are all directory numbers,
except:
- directory numbers for trunk work stations
- directory numbers for large conference units
- directory numbers for OSS operators
- directory numbers for CTX attendants
- additional directory number for PBX
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR METADM-3 +
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Entering a suppression criterion overwrites the existing
one.
NONE NONE
No suppression, this means all standard
directory numbers are included.
NOTCONN NOT CONNECTED
Suppress the directory numbers:
- all not connected numbers
- with announcement for changed number
- with ported number
METPDN METERING UNDER PILOT DN
Suppress the line service numbers (LSN)
with CHRG=METPDN (no counting on this line).
NONDEC NONDECIMAL
Suppress all directory numbers with a nondecimal
digit in the digit combination.
Suppress all directory numbers with the feature
detailed billing.
The line service number of a PBX line is sup-
pressed when either the PBX or the PBX line
itself has DEB.
Remark: The pilot DN of a PBX without DEB
is not suppressed, even when the special line
(LSN=pilot DN) has the feature DEB.
PDNLEN PILOT DIRECTORY NUMBER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the pilot DN length.
The value VAR is the default and indicates that only the
pilot DN part as stored in the DN-database must be used for
DISP MET and account files.
The value FIX forces the combined length of LAC+DN for dis-
play and accounting to the value "n". I.e. shorter combina-
tions are padded to the right with "0" (LAC without discrimination
digits).
This is important for DDI PBX as in countries with a fixed DN
length.
Restrictions:
- The PDNLEN setting is valid for all account file formats
except FORMAT=2.
- For DISP MET the combined length does not include the
national prefix part which is always added to the LAC.
- Padded LAC+DN combinations exceeding the available space
in the account record are truncated.
a[-b]
a: LENGTH SETTING
VAR VARIABLE LENGTH
FIX FIXED LENGTH
b: FIXED LENGTH=
E N D
ENTR METADM-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP METSAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER SAVE TIMES
This command displays all the automatic check and save times of the
meter safeguarding system.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP METSAV ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP METSAV-1 -
ENTR METSAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER METER SAVE TIMES
This command specifies up to 8 automatic meter save times.
Each day the memory-based meter readings data are checked at these
save times and, corrected with them, previously saved, equivalents if
necessary.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR METSAV : TIME= ,CHEKNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the requested automatic save time.
Notes:
- Up to eight times of the day can be entered.
- Only 0, 15, 30, 45 minute values are allowed.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
CHEKNO CHECK NUMBER
This parameter specifies how often the meter readings must
be checked between the individual saving times.
Notes:
- This check is done regularly in 15-minute intervals.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR METSAV-1 -
MEAS MFC
ACTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MEASURE MFC-SIGNAL
This command allows MFC signals to be analyzed using the ATE.
The rise and fall of the specified MFC signal is displayed on
the trunk workstation.
If the MFC signal falls, no values are output other than the
MFC signal.
If the signal is analyzed as an MFC signal, but not as
the specified one, only the measured frequencies and levels,
pulse or pause are output.
The signal can be analyzed only if the pulse duration is
longer than 30 ms, otherwise no values are output than pulse
or pause.
This can only be done if an ATE has been connected using
command CONN ATE.
Measurement is stopped automatically if the command is
entered again with parameter ACT=NO, if a new measurement
command is entered or if a pulse or pause is greater than 8
seconds.
In order to perform tests, the station at the far end must
also be operated manually.
This station could, for example, be an ATE operated in manual
mode by agreement with the communicating station.
1. MEAS MFC - ACTNO DEACTIVATE MEASURING
2. MEAS MFC - MFCSIG MEASURE MFC WITHOUT THRESHOLD
3. MEAS MFC - MFCSIGTH MEASURE MFC WITH THRESHOLD
1. Input format
DEACTIVATE MEASURING
This input format deactivates the measurement job.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] MEAS MFC : -TPDN= ,ACT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the workstation test port number of
the test port, to which the ATE is connected.
It must be used for local operation.
This parameter specifies the workstation test port directory
number of the test port to which the ATE is connected.
It must be used for remote operation.
ACT ACTIVATE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MEAS MFC-1 +
MEAS MFC
ACTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N - DEACTIVATE MEASURING
NO ' DEACTIVATE MEASURING
Default: YES
MEAS MFC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MEAS MFC
MFCSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MEASURE MFC WITHOUT THRESHOLD
This input format specifies the parameter combination for
measuring mfc without threshold.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] MEAS MFC : -TPDN= ,MFCTYP= [,ACT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MFCTYP TYPE OF MULTIFREQUENCY CODE
NO5 MULTIFREQUENCY CODE NO 5
R1 MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R1
R2A MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R2 A/B
R2I MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R2 I/II
ACT ACTIVATE
Y -- ACTIVATE MEASURING
~YES '- ACTIVATE MEASURING
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MEAS MFC-3 +
MEAS MFC
MFCSIGTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MEASURE MFC WITH THRESHOLD
This input format specifies the parameter combination for
measuring mfc with threshold.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] MEAS MFC : -TPDN= ,MFCTYP= ,LEVEL= [,ACT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MFCTYP TYPE OF MULTIFREQUENCY CODE
NO5 MULTIFREQUENCY CODE NO 5
R1 MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R1
R2A MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R2 A/B
R2I MULTIFREQUENCY CODE R2 I/II
LEVEL LEVEL OF SIGNAL
This parameter specifies the threshold for the measurement
job in dBm0.
It must lie in the range +3.1 dBm0 to - 66 dBm0.
Two parameter values must be specified.
a-b-c
a: SIGN POSITIVE / NEGATIVE
N NEGATIVE LEVEL
NEG NEGATIVE LEVEL
P POSITIVE LEVEL
POS POSITIVE LEVEL
Corresponds to <positive/negative loss>
b: VALUE OF LEVEL INTEGER PART=
Corresponds to <dBm0 value greater than 1>
MEAS MFC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MEAS MFC
MFCSIGTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: VALUE OF LEVEL DECIMAL PART=
Corresponds to <dBm0 value less than 1>
ACT ACTIVATE
Y -- ACTIVATE MEASURING
~YES '- ACTIVATE MEASURING
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MEAS MFC-5 -
SEND MFC
ACTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEND MULTI FREQUENCY CODE SIGNAL
This command causes the ATE to send various MFC signals.
This can only be done if an ATE has been connected using command CONN ATE.
Sending is stopped automatically if the command is entered again with parameter
ACT=NO or if a new send command is entered.
1. SEND MFC - ACTNO DEACTIVE SENDING
2. SEND MFC - MFCPERM PERMANENT MFC SIGNAL
3. SEND MFC - MFCTRIG TRIGGERED MFC SIGNAL
1. Input format
DEACTIVE SENDING
This input format deactivates the send job.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] SEND MFC : -TPDN= ,ACT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
operation.
operation.
ACT ACTIVATE
N - DEACTIVATE SENDING
NO ' DEACTIVATE SENDING
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEND MFC-1 +
SEND MFC
MFCPERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PERMANENT MFC SIGNAL
This input format specifies the parameter combination for a permanent multi
freqeuncy code signal.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] SEND MFC : -TPDN= ,MFC= [,ACT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
operation.
operation.
MFC MULTI FREQUENCY CODE
a-b
a: SIGNALLING TYPE
NO5 MFC-NO5
R1 MFC-R1
R2A MFC-R2 GROUP A/B
R2I MFC-R2 GROUP I/II
b: SIGNAL=
ACT ACTIVATE
Default: YES
SEND MFC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEND MFC
MFCTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRIGGERED MFC SIGNAL
This input format specifies the parameter combination for a triggered multi
frequency code signal.
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]TPNO=] ]
] SEND MFC : -TPDN= ,MFC= ,PULSE= [,PAUSE=] [,SEQU=] [,ACT=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
operation.
operation.
MFC MULTI FREQUENCY CODE
a-b
a: SIGNALLING TYPE
NO5 MFC-NO5
R1 MFC-R1
R2A MFC-R2 GROUP A/B
R2I MFC-R2 GROUP I/II
b: SIGNAL=
PULSE PULSE DURATION
This parameter specifies the pulse duration in ms.
PAUSE PAUSE DURATION
This parameter specifies the pause duration in ms.
Default: 0
SEQU SEQUENCE
This parameter specifies how often the MFC signal is to be sent. If the
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEND MFC-3 +
SEND MFC
MFCTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter is omitted or if SEQU=255, the signal is sent as a continuous
signal.
Default: 255
ACT ACTIVATE
Default: YES
E N D
SEND MFC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command displays the information from the label of a
magneto optical disk.
Prerequisite:
- The magneto optical disk device must be available.
- The magneto optical disk must be available.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]VSN=] ]
] DISP MO : -MOD= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
magneto optical disk.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for magnetic
disk devices and are therefore illegal:
VSN000 and VSN001.
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magneto optical disk device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MO-1 -
INIT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command is used to initialize a magneto optical
disk (generate its VOL1 label).
Prerequisites:
- The specified data carrier must be available.
- The specified data carrier must be a magneto optical disk.
- If it is a new magneto optical disk, the device number must
also be specified.
- The expiration date must have been passed, or it must be
specified.
Input format
-
] ]
] INIT MO : VSN= ,CD= [,MOD=] [,OWNER=] [,EXPDAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the new or the old and new volume
serial numbers of the magneto optical disk.
Notes:
VSN000 and VSN001.
n
n/o
CD CODE
This parameter specifies the code (defined in the label)
to be used for writing to the magneto optical disk.
EBC EBCDIC-CODE
ISO ASCII-CODE
Notes:
- If a new value is entered for the parameter VSN, then
this parameter is mandatory.
OWNER OWNER OF THE DEVICE
This parameter allows the magneto optical disk owner
to be identified by name.
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 INIT MO-1 +
INIT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the magneto
optical disk.
It is entered to indicate that the retention period of the
magneto optical disk has been noted.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
E N D
INIT MO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOUNT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOUNT MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
Following a system request for magneto optical disk, this
command can be used to inform the system whether magneto
optical disk processing should be interrupted or whether it
should be continued using a magneto optical disk on any disk
station.
Prerequisite:
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by
another process.
Notes:
- After a magneto optical disk request, no MOUNT MO command
should be entered while disk positioning (after inserting
the follow-up disk) is still in progress.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]DEV= ] ]
] MOUNT MO : -REJECT= [,VSN=] ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter defines the magneto optical disk device
where disk processing is to be continued. It is the
logical device number of the magneto optical disk device
where the relevant magneto optical disk is inserted.
a-b
a: DEVICE NAME
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
REJECT REJECT OPTICAL DISK REQUEST
This parameter tells the system that the requested magneto
optical disk cannot be provided and disk processing must be
terminated.
N DONT REJECT MOD REQUEST
NO DONT REJECT MOD REQUEST
Y REJECT MOD REQUEST
YES REJECT MOD REQUEST
Default: N
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk volume
serial number.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOUNT MO-1 +
MOUNT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
MOUNT MO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
RSET MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command releases the magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by
another process.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]VSN=] ]
] RSET MO : -MOD= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
VSN000 and VSN001.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RSET MO-1 -
ACT MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE METER OBSERVATION
This command activates meter observation for a subscriber.
All outgoing and/or incoming calls for a specified subscriber directory
number are then observed in respect to the number of charge units
recorded per call.
At activation, a meter observation record is generated which includes
the current values of the subscribers charge counters and the date
and time.
Usage:
To prevent the loss of data due to the cyclic overwriting of the
meter observation disk file, it is recommended that the file
should be saved when an occupancy level of 75% is reached (command
TRANS FILE).
There are the following alternatives:
- local mode: transfer to a local magnetic tape/optical disk.
- remote mode: transfer to DCP (data communication processor)
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation. The
following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
ORIG ORIGINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class of
service for monitoring originating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the old
entry must first be cancelled.
TERM TERMINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class
of service for monitoring terminating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the
old entry must first be cancelled.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is activated for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT MOBS-1 +
ACT MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: ORIG
E N D
ACT MOBS-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL METER OBSERVATION
This command has following functions:
- without entry of COS = CONCUR, meter observation for the
subscriber is deactivated. This means that all active classes of
service (ORIG,TERM and/or CONCUR) are deactivated.
At the same time, a MOB record is generated which includes
the current values of the subscribers charge meters and the date and
time of cancellation.
- with entry of COS = CONCUR only the concurrent output for a
subscriber is deactivated. The feature meter observation
remains active.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter
observation. The following directory number types can be entered:
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is cancelled for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MOBS-1 -
DISP MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION
This command displays the meter observation classes of service
for one specific subscriber.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation.
The following directory number types can be entered:
Notes:
- The subscribers directory numebr must be entered without
local area code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MOBS-1 -
SEL MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT METER OBSERVATION
This command displays all selected subscribers for which meter
observation has been activated.
Notes:
- The following parameter entries are possible:
LAC DN
- - all the subscibers with MOB of the exchange are displayed
x - all the subscribers with MOB of this LAC are displayed
- x all the subscribers with MOB of the specified DN interval are
displayed (only allowed when DN volume is unique).
x x all the subscribers with MOB of the specified LAC and DN interval
are displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] SEL MOBS : [LAC=] [,DN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the subscribers
to be selected for meter observation.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the range of directory numbers of the
subscribers to be selected for meter observation.
Following directory number types can be entered:
Notes:
- The directory numbers must be entered without local area code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL MOBS-1 -
DISP MOBSDAT
MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION DATA
This command displays the meter observation data records of one subscriber.
The following variants are possible, depending on the input parameters:
- Input without time parameters (DATE and TIME)
display all meter observation data records for the last
observation period stored for a subscriber.
- Input with time parameters
display all meter observation data records generated for a subscriber
since the time specified.
The records may stem from different observation periods. A SUMMARY
printout is generated for each observation period.
Usage:
Before entering the command any data records still buffered
in the main memory must be transferred to disk using command
TRANS BUFFER: TYPE = MOB (forced output).
Remark:
It is not assured that the records in the protocoll are
cronological when date time changes are performed.
Date time changes are visualized in the print out (for the world
market only!) if the generation of date time change records is
activated by the craftperson by means of the ACT IAOPT command.
<job number>.
1. DISP MOBSDAT - MD MAGNETIC DISK
2. DISP MOBSDAT - MT MAGNETIC TAPE
1. Input format
MAGNETIC DISK
Input format for the display from magnetic disk
-
] ]
] DISP MOBSDAT : DN= ,FORMAT= [,DATE= ,TIME=] [,FILE=] ]
] ]
] [,DISPSN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
- account number for Toll Free Service
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered with local area
code (without trunk or international prefix), or without local area
code, if no one is implemented.
This parameter specifies the data format in the MOB printout.
FORMAT = 1 => world market print out
FORMAT = 2 => BRD print out
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MOBSDAT-1 +
DISP MOBSDAT
MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the start date from which the meter
observation data must be displayed.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the start time from which the meter
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk or
tape/optical disk file. The following variants are
possible:
- Name of the cyclic disk file for meter observation.
Default name= FILE=IA.ICMOB
- Name of a copy of the meter observation file generated
using TRANS FILE. Printer output is only possible if
the format of this file matches the format of the cyclic
disk file.
- Name of the magnetic tape/optical disk file generated
using TRANS FILE (DEFAULT = IA.ICMOB). Printer
output is only possible if the tape/optical disk
format matches the format of the cyclic disk file.
DISPSN DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
This parameter allows a secret number contained in a terminating
MOB record, to be displayed in the DISP MOBSDAT print out.
If this parameter is not entered or the value NO is entered, a secret
A-number will not be displayed and FFFFFF will appear in the print out.
N DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
NO DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Y DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
YES DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Default: NO
DISP MOBSDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MOBSDAT
MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MAGNETIC TAPE
Input format for the display from magnetic tape/optical disk
-
] ]
] DISP MOBSDAT : DN= ,FORMAT= ,VSN= [,DATE= ,TIME=] [,FILE=] ]
] ]
] [,DISPSN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
- account number for Toll Free Service
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered with local area
code (without trunk or international prefix), or without local area
code, if no one is implemented.
This parameter specifies the data format in the MOB printout.
FORMAT = 1 => world market print out
FORMAT = 2 => BRD print out
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of
the tape/optical disk.
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the start date from which the meter
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the start time from which the meter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MOBSDAT-3 +
DISP MOBSDAT
MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk or
tape/optical disk file. The following variants are
possible:
- Name of the cyclic disk file for meter observation.
Default name= FILE=IA.ICMOB
- Name of a copy of the meter observation file generated
using TRANS FILE. Printer output is only possible if
the format of this file matches the format of the cyclic
disk file.
- Name of the magnetic tape/optical disk file generated
using TRANS FILE (DEFAULT = IA.ICMOB). Printer
output is only possible if the tape/optical disk
format matches the format of the cyclic disk file.
DISPSN DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
This parameter allows a secret number contained in a terminating
MOB record, to be displayed in the DISP MOBSDAT print out.
If this parameter is not entered or the value NO is entered, a secret
A-number will not be displayed and FFFFFF will appear in the print out.
N DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
NO DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Y DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
YES DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Default: NO
E N D
DISP MOBSDAT-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command cancels a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The magneto optical disk device must be PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MOD : MOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to
be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MOD-1 -
CONF MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command configures a magneto optical disk device.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MOD : MOD= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be
configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MOD-1 -
CR MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command creates a magneto optical disk device. The created
magneto optical disk device is in the operating state PLA after the
command has been executed.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR MOD : IOP= ,MOD= ,SCSIADDR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to which the
magneto optical disk device is to be connected.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the number of the magneto optical disk device
to be created.
SCSIADDR SCSI ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address at the SCSI bus.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MOD-1 -
DIAG MOD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
for a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magneto optical disk device must be MBL.
- A magneto optical disk must be inserted.
<job number>.
1. DIAG MOD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MOD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magneto optical disk device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MOD : MOD= [,SUP=] [,LABELMO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
diagnosed.
Default: YES
LABELMO LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This parameter specifies that the inserted magneto optical disk
is labelled and prepared for the diagnosis.
Notes:
- The label function must only be used for new disks and disks
with wrong format. Otherwise the existing files are deleted.
N DO NOT LABEL MO
NO DO NOT LABEL MO
Y LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
YES LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MOD-1 +
DIAG MOD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magneto
optical disk device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MOD : MOD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
DIAG MOD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command displays the magneto optical disk device, the preceding
IOP and the address at the SCSI bus.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MOD : MOD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MOD-1 -
TEST MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command tests a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magneto optical disk device must be ACT and a magneto optical
disk must also be inserted.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST MOD : [MOD=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active units
of the relevant type are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST MOD-1 -
SEL MSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT MESSAGE
This command outputs all messages associated with a specified message group.
In addition, the allocation of message to standard message group is displayed
if the message is allocated to customer a message group.
If only GRPNO=0 is input, all messages that are not assigned to a
standard message group or were assigned retrospectively to a message
group are output.
To display the allocation of message to message group, use command DISP MSGLNK
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SEL MSG : <MSGRP= ,GRPNO=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter designates a message group.
Note:
- message group names can also be entered left-justified and
partially qualified.
GRPNO MESSAGE GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the group number which corresponds to the
OMDS data type.
Note:
- a maximum of 5 parameter values can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL MSG-1 -
DISP MSGLEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE LENGTH
This command displays the office specific message length.
Notes:
- This command will be rejected during correction request of
the office specific message length.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MSGLEN ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MSGLEN-1 -
MOD MSGLEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MESSAGE LENGTH
This command modifies the office specific message length.
Prerequisites:
- All message buffer units must be ACTIVE.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD MSGLEN : [LENGTH=] [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LENGTH MESSAGE LENGTH
This parameter specifies the office specific message length.
Valid values:
- 32 or 128
Default value:
- 32
Meaning:
- Maximum message length which depends on the following MB types:
MB type ! message length
---------+---------------
MB ! 32
MB(B) ! 32, 128
MBUL(C) ! 32, 128
This parameter controls the plausibility test.
Valid values:
- No or yes
Default value:
- No
Meaning:
- This parameter allows/inhibits the plausibility test.
value ! action
-------+---------------------------
yes ! inhibit plausibility test
no ! allow plausibility test
Notes:
- Value yes is only allowed in installation recovery.
NO PLAUSIBILITY CHECK IS ON
N PLAUSIBILITY CHECK IS ON
YES PLAUSIBILITY CHECK IS OFF
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD MSGLEN-1 +
MOD MSGLEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y PLAUSIBILITY CHECK IS OFF
E N D
MOD MSGLEN-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE LINK
This command displays the specified messages which are assigned to
the message groups.
If a message is allocated to a customer device group, this
connection is always active.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MSGLNK : [MSG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter designates a message.
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following possible
values:
Alarm contexts:
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
SAL SERVICE ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
ATMF ATM FABRIC
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MSGLNK-1 +
DISP MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
unit values.
b: FORMAT=
E N D
DISP MSGLNK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
RSET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET MESSAGE LINK
This command restores the standard assignment of messages to message
groups. If a message was assigned to a customer message group,
this link is removed. This results in the messages being output
according to their standard message groups again.
Prerequisite:
- the messages must exist.
The standard allocation to which the message is to be reset can be
displayed with the command SEL MSG or DISP MSGLNK.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] RSET MSGLNK : MSG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
values:
Alarm contexts:
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
SAL SERVICE ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
ATMF ATM FABRIC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 RSET MSGLNK-1 +
RSET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
.,+,*,%,#
b: FORMAT=
E N D
RSET MSGLNK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET MESSAGE LINK
This command modifies the assignment of messages to message groups.
A distinction should be made between the following two cases:
- the original message group is a standard message group. In this case, the
assignment to the original message group remains but the message control
only takes account of the assignment to the new message group.
- the old message group is not a standard message group. In this case,
there is no assignment to the old message group; the messages are
assigned to the new message group.
Prerequisite:
- the messages and the message group must exist.
- the message group must have been created via MML command or must be
a standard message group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SET MSGLNK : MSG= ,MSGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and system
messages.
values:
Alarm contexts:
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
SAL SERVICE ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
ATMF ATM FABRIC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET MSGLNK-1 +
SET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- a maximum of ten parameter values can be linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
.,+,*,%,#
b: FORMAT=
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
Note:
- the last character may not be a period.
n/o
E N D
SET MSGLNK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MESSAGE GROUP
This command cancels message groups which have been created via
the MML command CR MSGRP.
Prerequisite:
- The message groups may not be standard message groups.
- The message groups must exist.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN MSGRP : MSGRP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MSGRP-1 -
CR MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MESSAGE GROUP
This command creates a customer message group and the assignment to a
customer device group or a standard device group.
Prerequisite:
- the name of a standard message group may not be specified in the
command.
- The device group corresponding to parameter DVGRP must have been
created with the command CR DVGRP.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR MSGRP : MSGRP= ,GRPNO= [,DVGRP=] [,STDDG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
Note:
This parameter specifies the group number which corresponds to the
OMDS data type.
Notes:
- 2800<=GRPNO<=3295: reserved for standard message groups;
3296<=GRPNO<=3299: reserved for message groups which can
register unknown messages;
- if one of the three numbers 3296, 3297 or 3298 are entered for
the parameter GRPNO, the following implicit assignment is made:
- GRPNO = 3296 : the message group which has been created contains all
unknown command messages.
unknown alarm messages.
unknown spontaneous messages.
- the group numbers can only be specified at random in the area
3300-3500.
- A list of the unknown messages can be obtained using command SEL MSG
: GRPNO=0;
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
STDDG STANDARD DEVICE GROUP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MSGRP-1 +
CR MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WPB WASTE PAPER BASKET
Messages belonging to a message group
which is assigned to device group
WPB are suppressed, if OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
is not deactivated.
SRCOMT SOURCE TERMINAL
assigned to device group SRCOMT
are output on the input device.
E N D
CR MSGRP-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
SEL MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT MESSAGE GROUP
This command outputs all message groups are assigned to the
specified device group, or all message groups assigned
to a standard device group.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] SEL MSGRP : <DVGRP= ,STDDG=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
is not deactivated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SEL MSGRP-1 -
DISP MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE GROUP LINK
This command displays all customer and standard device
groups associated with one of the specified message groups. At least one
of the two parameters must be specified.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP MSGRPLNK : [MSGRP=] [,GRPNO=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter specifies a message group. Names of message groups
can be input partially qualified and left-justified. Up to five
parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter specifies the data type assigned to the message
group. Up to five parameter values can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MSGRPLNK-1 -
SET MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET MESSAGE GROUP LINK
This command sets the assignment of message groups to their device group.
The device group may either be a standard device group (STDDG) created
by the system or a device group created via MML command (DVGRP).
Prerequisites:
- The device group which corresponds to parameter DVGRP must have
previously been created using command CR DVGRP.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],DVGRP=] ;- ]
] SET MSGRPLNK : MSGRP= -,STDDG= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter specifies a message group.
Notes:
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a device group of the message control.
Notes:
- If one of the linked values of parameter MSGRP is
MSYP.ALARM or MSYP.REPORT the DVGRP must consist of
output devices of DCP type or applications which can handle
binary structured outputs.
These applications must have been created with the command
CR APPL with APPLID = SMMLB.
This parameter specifies a standard device group.
is not deactivated.
Incompatibilities:
- In context of parameter STDDG with
identifier SRCOMT none of the linked
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 SET MSGRPLNK-1 +
SET MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
values of parameter MSGRP may be
MSYP.ALARM or MSYP.REPORT.
E N D
SET MSGRPLNK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE
This command displays the information from the label of a magnetic
tape.
Prerequisite:
- The tape device must be available.
- The tape must be available.
- The tape device must be suitable for the required recording density.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]VSN=] ]
] DISP MT : -MTD= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
tape.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices and
are therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
magnetic tape device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MT-1 -
INIT MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC TAPE
This command is used to initialize a magnetic tape (generate its VOL1 label).
Prerequisites:
- The specified data carrier must be available.
- The specified data carrier must be a magnetic tape.
- If it is a new magnetic tape, the device number must also
be specified.
- The expiration date must have been passed, or it must be specified.
- The specified recording density must be available.
Input format
-
] ]
] INIT MT : VSN= ,CD= [,MTD=] [,OWNER=] [,EXPDAT=] [,DENS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the new or the old and new volume
serial numbers of the tape.
Notes:
n
n/o
CD CODE
This parameter specifies the code (defined in the
label) to be used for writing to the magnetic tape.
EBC EBCDIC-CODE
ISO ASCII-CODE
Notes:
- If a new value is entered for the parameter VSN, then this
parameter is mandatory.
OWNER OWNER OF THE DEVICE
This parameter allows the tape owner to be identified by name.
.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 INIT MT-1 +
INIT MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the tape.
It is entered to indicate that the retention period of the tape
has been noted.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
DENS DENSITY
This parameter specifies the recording density
used on the magnetic tape.
E N D
INIT MT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
REWIND MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REWIND MAGNETIC TAPE
This command rewinds a magnetic tape and releases the tape device.
Prerequisite:
- The tape device must be available.
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by another process.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]VSN=] ]
] REWIND MT : -MTD= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
tape.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 REWIND MT-1 -
CONN MTA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONNECT METALLIC TEST ACCESS
This command establishes a Metallic Test Access to EWSD as result of
a request from an external test equipment.
ATTENTION !!
------------
DO NOT INPUT THAT COMMAND AT THE OMT.
The external request is converted to MML format in order to be
processed by EWSD. It is not allowed to use CONNECT METALLIC TEST ACCESS as a no
MML command.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONN MTA : MODE= ,DN= [,MI=] ,EXI= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MODE OPERATION MODE
See helptext of command
CONN CONNECT MTA
DISCONN DISCONNECT MTA
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
MI MEASUREMENT INTERFACE
EXI EXTERNAL INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONN MTA-1 -
DISP MTAERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR LIST
This command displays metallic test access error data for subscriber line
testing associated with the Test Bus Continuity Check.
When the MTA error list threshold is set, the System Alarm Panel may be reset
and the MTA error list initialized.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MTAERR : [CLRSYP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CLRSYP MTA CLEAR SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
This parameter specifies the System Operator lamp is cleared when
CLRSYP equals Y or YES.
N DO NOT CLEAR SYS PANEL ALARM
NO DO NOT CLEAR SYS PANEL ALARM
Y CLEAR SYS PANEL ALARM
YES CLEAR SYS PANEL ALARM
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MTAERR-1 -
CAN MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command cancels a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- A connecting IOPMTD must be PLA or MBL.
A connecting IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The magnetic tape device must be PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MTD : MTD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MTD-1 -
CONF MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command configures a magnetic tape device.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF MTD : MTD= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF MTD-1 -
CR MTD
IOPMTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command creates a magnetic tape device. The created magnetic
tape device is in the operating state PLA after the command
has been executed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified IOPMTD must not be ACT, however the specified
IOPUNI may be ACT.
1. CR MTD - IOPMTD CREATE MTD AT IOPMTD
2. CR MTD - IOPUNI CREATE MTD AT IOPUNI
1. Input format
CREATE MTD AT IOPMTD
This input creates a magnetic tape device at an
input/output processor for magnetic tape device.
-
] ]
] CR MTD : IOP= ,MTD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
magnetic tape device is to be connected.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the number of the magnetic tape device
to be created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MTD-1 +
CR MTD
IOPUNI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE MTD AT IOPUNI
This input creates a magnetic tape device at an
input/output processor unified for O&M devices.
-
] ]
] CR MTD : IOP= ,MTD= ,SCSIADDR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
magnetic tape device is to be connected.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the number of the magnetic tape device
to be created.
SCSIADDR SCSI ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address at the SCSI bus.
E N D
CR MTD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DIAG MTD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
for a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic tape device must be MBL.
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring must be inserted.
<job number>.
1. DIAG MTD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MTD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magnetic tape device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MTD : MTD= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG MTD-1 +
DIAG MTD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magnetic
tape device.
-
] ]
] DIAG MTD : MTD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
DIAG MTD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command displays the magnetic tape device, the preceding IOP
and the address at the SCSI bus.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MTD : MTD= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MTD-1 -
TEST MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command tests a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic tape device must be ACT and an initialized
tape with a file protection ring must also be inserted.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST MTD : [MTD=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be tested.
Notes:
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST MTD-1 -
CAN MUX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER
This command cancels the connection of one or both multiplexers.
Multiplexers are the connective part between the SILT and the switching
network.
Prerequisites :
- All signaling links belonging to the relevant multiplexer must have been
cancelled.
For MUXM0 all links with the SILT number 1 to 127 and for MUXM1
all links with the SILT number 129 to 255 must be cancelled.
Possible effects:
- If both multiplexers are entered, the command will either be executed
completely (not partially executed) or rejected.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MUX : <MUXM0= ,MUXM1=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MUXM0 MULTIPLEXER MASTER NO 0
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the multiplexer 0.
a-b
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MUX-1 -
CR MUX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MULTIPLEXER
This command creates the connection of one or both multiplexers.
Multiplexers are the connective part between the SILT and the switching
network.
Prerequisites:
- The associated modules must be inserted. Otherwise the attempt to
enter this command may lead to system failure.
- The capacity stage of the switching network which is set by MOD TSG
must include the equiment number of the MUXM.
The command is not rejected if the equipment number is invalid.
Possible effects:
- If both multiplexers are entered, the command will either be executed
completely (not partially executed) or rejected.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR MUX : <MUXM0= ,MUXM1=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
TSG-Number
LTG-Number
a-b
TSG-Number
LTG-Number
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MUX-1 -
DISP MUX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MULTIPLEXER
This command displays the following data of the multiplexers which
connects the CCNC to the switching network (SN):
- the time stage group (TSG) number to which the multiplexer is
connected
- the line trunk group (LTG) number via which the CCNC can be reached
- the multiplexer master b (MUXMB).
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP MUX ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP MUX-1 -
CAN MUXMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER MASTER B
This command cancels up to four multiplexer units MUXMBs.
The possible values for MUXMB are: 00, 01, 10, 11 or X for all.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding multiplexer masters must be in state
maintenance blocked (MBL) or planned (PLA).
- All associated links must be canceled.
For the MUXMB00/10 all links connected to the switching network
by the SILTSs with SILT numbers from 56 to 127 and
for the MUXMB01/11 all links connected to the switching network
by the SILTSs with SILT numbers from 184 to 255 are associated
Possible effects:
- If more multiplexers MUXMB are entered than corresponding
multiplexer masters are in state maintenance blocked or planned
the command execution is indicated as only partly executed.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN MUXMB : MUXMB= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MUXMB MULTIPLEXER MASTER B
This parameter specifies the multiplexer MUXMBs which will be
canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN MUXMB-1 -
CR MUXMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MULTIPLEXER MASTER B
This command creates up to four multiplexer units MUXMB.
The MUXMBs are used to expand the multiplexer masters whose position
at the switching network was entered with the command CR MUX.
By the MUXMBs more SILTs can be connected to the switching network.
The possible values for MUXMB are: 00, 01, 10, 11 or X for all.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding multiplexer masters must be in state
maintenance blocked (MBL) or planned (PLA).
Possible effects:
- If more multiplexers MUXMB are entered than corresponding
multiplexer masters are in state maintenance blocked or planned
the command execution is indicated as only partly executed.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR MUXMB : MUXMB= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MUXMB MULTIPLEXER MASTER B
This parameter specifies the multiplexer MUXMBs which will be
created.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR MUXMB-1 -
DISP NBOOK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY NOTE BOOK
This command
- initiates an immediate printout of the error symptoms from
from the various CCNC processors,
- sets the switches for reading the notebooks (scratchpads) in the
various CCNC processors (only for software versions lower than or
equal to V4.2/Rel.6).
If execution of the command is not successful, the following error
messages are output, displaying the reason for the failure :
Possible errors are :
Module 6:
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
30 | LACK OF RESOURCES : UIO AND TIMER ; | try again later
| NOTEBOOKDATA OUTPUT NOT POSSIBLE |
| POSSIBLE NOW |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
31 | LACK OF RESOURCES : UIO AND TIMER ; | try again later
| NOTEBOOKDATA OUTPUT NOT |
| POSSIBLE NOW |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
81 | NAK FROM REPORTING CCNC : | no operator measures
| NOTEBOOK EMPTY | necessary
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
82 | NAK FROM REPORTING CCNC : | wait for output and
| REPORTING IN PROGRESS | try again
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
83 | PROCESSOR NOT AVAILABLE | load processor and
| | try again
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP NBOOK : UNIT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+-------+----------------+
! CPI ! 0,1 !
! SIPA ! 0...7, 10...17 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! SIMP ! 0,1 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: TYPE
CPI COORDINATION PROCESSOR INTERF.
SILTC SIGNALING TERMINAL CONTROL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NBOOK-1 +
DISP NBOOK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: NUMBER=
E N D
DISP NBOOK-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS
This command cancels previously entered NEATT transport addresses.
The specified address name can only be cancelled if it is no longer
used for processors or applications. The NEATT transport system
addresses of the local processor (with ADRNAM=NEASSP and NEABDL)
cannot be entered.
The specified data are deleted in the semipermanent table on the
background memory.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN NEATSADR : ADRNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name for an address
defined by CR NEATSADR.
Note:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA, the
rest can be freely assigned by the operator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN NEATSADR-1 -
CR NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS
This command defines an address in a NEATT data network. The necessary
network address and the processor connection to be used are specified and
an address name is assigned.
Prerequisite:
- The NEATT transport system address with ADRNAM=NEASSP and NEABDL
and NADR=0-0 is predefined as a default value for the own processor,
and is entered in the address table as an element.
- This command can only be executed if the new name does not yet exist.
- The PVC name is determined by the local application which registers
itself in the database with its data.
- If the PVC name does not relate to the address name, the command
is rejected.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR NEATSADR : ADRNAM= ,NADR= ,PROCON= [,STATNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name.
Note:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA; any
characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
NADR NETWORK ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the processor in the O&M
network which consists of regional and processor numbers.
Note:
- The default value NADR=0-0 is only valid with ADRNAM=NEASSP and
NEABDL.
a-b
a: REGION NUMBER=
PROCON PROCESSOR CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the name of the processor connection.
Note:
- One or two CSC group names can be specified.
- These CSC group names must first be defined using the command
CR CSCGRP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR NEATSADR-1 +
CR NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATNO STATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the station number of the application
and possibly an assigned PVC name.
a[-b]
a: STATION NUMBER=
b: PVC NAME=
E N D
CR NEATSADR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS
This command displays all information pertaining to an address name
or to all defined address names.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP NEATSADR : ADRNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name for an address specified
by CR NEATSADR.
Note:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA; the
remaining characters can be freely assigned by the operator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NEATSADR-1 -
MOD NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS
This command modifies a NEATT transport address which is already assigned.
Notes:
- The processor connections are entered in the table in the same order as
the entries, i.e. the processor connection entered first is accepted as
the connection to be used first.
- The database must be previously informed of the computer connection using
command CR CSCGRP.
- If an application in an OSS processor type has already been assigned to
the modified address name, the corresponding server will be informed of
this modification.
- If the local application acknowledges this modification negatively,
- If a NEATT transport address is to be modified for a remote application
in an OSS processor type, note that the local station numbers have the same
values as the remote applications.
- A station number and the associated application address must be
modified simultaneously. If the station number were modified first,
then the application address, the command would be rejected.
- If a NEATT transport system address is to be modified, a corresponding
network address with a different name, but with the same PROCON,
regional and processor numbers must already be available for a DCP.
- The PVC name is determined by the local application which reports itself
with its data to the database. If the PVC name entered does not correspond
to that of the local application, the command will be rejected.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD NEATSADR : ADRNAM= [,NADR=] [,PROCON=] [,STATNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name for an address which is
defined by CR NEATSADR.
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA; any
NADR NETWORK ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the processor in the O&M
network which consists of regional and processor numbers.
Note:
- The default NADR=0-0 is only valid with ADRNAM=NEASSP and
NEABDL.
n/o
a-b
a: REGION NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD NEATSADR-1 +
MOD NEATSADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROCON PROCESSOR CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the name of the processor connection.
Notes:
- One or two CSC group names can be specified.
- These CSC group names must first be defined using the command
CR CSCGRP.
STATNO STATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the station number of the application
and possibly an assigned PVC name.
Notes:
- For data streams to applications AMA, EADAS, RMAS and SCCS, a maximum
of four default local station numbers per application are specified.
In this case, the following restriction applies:
The new station number must not be in the predefined area 330, 331,
332, 333, 334, 396, 397, 398, 399, 335, 336, 337, 338.
The only exception to this is when a previously modified station
number is remodified to its original value.
n/o
a[-b]
a: STATION NUMBER=
b: PVC NAME=
E N D
MOD NEATSADR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN NMCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL
This command cancels the network management control data of a single
trunk group. When cancelling both SKIP/CANTO instances for primary
and alternate routed traffic, it is necessary to enter two commands.
The function CANFROM has to be cancelled via the TGNO parameter.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN NMCNTL : TGNO= [,NAME=] [,PRIM=] [,ALT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group name for which network
management control is processed.
NAME SKIP/CANTO OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the SKIP/CANTO instance for primary
resp. alternate routed traffic.
PRIM PRIMARY ROUTE PERCENTAGE
This parameter specifies the percentage of primary route traffic to be
rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
ALT ALTERNATE ROUTE PERCENTAGE
This parameter specifies the percentage of alternate route traffic to
be rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN NMCNTL-1 -
DISP NMCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL DATA
This command displays network management control data for either
- one trunk group,
- several trunk groups,
- all trunk groups with same value of the parameter CNTRL or
- all trunk groups.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP NMCNTL : <TGNO= ,CNTRL=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number / trunk group name
for which network management control is processed.
SKIP SKIP
This parameter value specifies that rejected
traffic is to be routed via other trunk groups.
CANTO CANCEL TO
traffic may not be routed via this or any other
trunk group. Traffic is diverted to an intercept.
CANFROM CANCEL FROM
traffic may not be routed via this or any other
trunk group if all trunks of this trunk group
are busy. Traffic is diverted to an intercept.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NMCNTL-1 -
ENTR NMCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
This command enters network management control data for bothway and out-
going trunk groups.
It determines
- the name identifying a SKIP/CANTO instance for primary resp.
alternate routed traffic,
- the type of control,
- the percentage of calls to be rejected (CANTO or CANFROM)
or to overflow to the next trunk group of the appropriate routing
list (SKIP),
- the percentage of calls to be rejected (CANTO or CANFROM)
or to overflow to the next trunk group of the appropriate routing
list (SKIP) for hard to reach traffic,
- the intercept parameter defining the system reaction for
rejected calls (e.g. tone or announcement),
- whether priority traffic is to be excluded (parameter
PRIOTRAF = NOCNTRL) or included (parameter PRIOTRAF = CNTRL,
standard value) by the entered network management function.
There is a difference in handling the input parameters of the controls
CANFROM and SKIP/CANTO:
The parameter NAME may not be input for the function CANFROM,
all other parameters may be input at once, within one command.
The following conditions apply for both the controls SKIP and CANTO:
The parameter NAME is optional for these controls. If no value is
entered for this parameter, a name will automatically be created by
the system.
When creating both instances for primary and alternate routed traffic,
two commands have to be entered for one trunk group (with two different
names).
Parameter PRIMHTR may only be entered together with PRIM, ALTHTR
only with ALT. PRIM and ALT are mutually exclusive.
Different INCEPT and PRIOTRAF values can be administrated for PRIM
and ALT traffic.
Modification of the network management function (e.g. from SKIP to
CANFROM) is not possible.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR NMCNTL : TGNO= <,NAME= ,CNTRL= ,PRIM= ,ALT= ,PRIMHTR= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,ALTHTR= ,INCEPT= ,PRIOTRAF=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group name for which
network management control is to be processed.
NAME SKIP/CANTO OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies a unique name for a "skip" or "canto" object.
This name is the key that identifies such an object and must not be
changed.
Four control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR NMCNTL-1 +
ENTR NMCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
This parameter specifies the type of control.
SKIP SKIP
This parameter value specifies the percentage of
traffic which is rejected for this trunk group
and overflows to the next trunk group of the
routing list.
CANTO CANCEL TO
traffic which is rejected for this trunk group.
Overflow to the next trunk group is prevented.
CANFROM CANCEL FROM
traffic which is rejected if all trunks of this
trunk group are busy. Overflow to the next trunk
group is prevented.
PRIM PRIMARY ROUTE PERCENTAGE
This parameter specifies the percentage of primary route traffic to be
rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
ALT ALTERNATE ROUTE PERCENTAGE
This parameter specifies the percentage of alternate route traffic to
be rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PRIMHTR PRIMARY ROUTE PERC. FOR HTR
This parameter specifies the percentage of primary route and hard to
ENTR NMCNTL-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR NMCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
reach traffic to be rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
ALTHTR ALTERNATE ROUTE PERC. FOR HTR
This parameter specifies the percentage of alternate route and hard to
reach traffic to be rejected for this trunk group.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the intercept, which defines the system
reaction for rejected calls.
Default value :
NETWOMA0.
PRIOTRAF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the priority traffic.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that priority
traffic is excluded by the entered network mana-
gement function.
CNTRL CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that priority
traffic is included by the entered network mana-
gement function.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR NMCNTL-3 -
ACT NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO.
This command activates the Network Traffic Management Information
functions as defined by the commands CR NTMINFO or MOD NTMINFO.
After the successful execution of this command, the EWSD - NTM Center
application layer protocol is activated, and the NTM Center can initiate
the protocol operations.
Prerequisites:
- Command CR NTMINFO must have been entered.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT NTMINFO ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT NTMINFO-1 -
CAN NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO.
This command cancels the Network Traffic Management Information
functions and the NTM Center characteristics entered with the command
CR NTMINFO.
Prerequisites:
- Command CR NTMINFO must have been entered.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN NTMINFO ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN NTMINFO-1 -
CR NTMINFO
BRD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO
This command creates the Network Traffic Management Information (NTMI)
functions specifying its attributes.
These attributes are:
- protocol type which includes format type and the way in which the NTM
data can be retrieved by the NTM Center;
- the object classes included in the NTM information (optional);
- threshold values for performance calculations of the trunk group NTM
indicators (answer seizure ratio - ASR, overflow - OVL, occupancy -
OCC), (optional);
- the period during which real-time NTM information is integrated (optional).
Prerequisites:
- Installation of a X.25 data link between the EWSD and the NTM Center.
1. CR NTMINFO - BRD Q3 PROTOCOL TYPE
2. CR NTMINFO - EWSD EWSD PROTOCOL TYPE
1. Input format
Q3 PROTOCOL TYPE
Input format for creating the Network Traffic Management Information
functions for Q3 protocol type.
-
] ]
] CR NTMINFO : PROTYP= [,OBJCL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PROTYP PROTOCOL TYPE SPECIFICATION
This parameter specifies the protocol type characteristics.
These characteristics are:
- format type, which is country specific;
- the way in which the data are output (polled or forward), only for
EWSD format.
BRD Q3 PROTOCOL
OBJCL OBJ. CL. TO INCLUDE IN NTMI
This parameter allows the inclusion of a specific object class in the
NTM Information if the object class name is specified.
In the absence of the parameter, all object classes are included in
the NTMI.
Furthermore, for each object class entered as input parameter value,
real-time data of that class is automatically collected by EWSD and
made available for the NTM Center.
CODE DESTINATION CODES
C7LINK CCS7 LINK
C7LSET CCS7 LINK SET
C7RSET CCS7 ROUTE SET
EXCH EXCHANGE DATA
TGRP TRUNK GROUPS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR NTMINFO-1 +
CR NTMINFO
EWSD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EWSD PROTOCOL TYPE
Input format for creating Network Traffic Management Information
functions for EWSD protocol type.
-
] ]
] CR NTMINFO : PROTYP= [,OBJCL=] [,THRASR=] [,THROVL=] ]
] ]
] [,THROCC=] [,TIMINT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PROTYP PROTOCOL TYPE SPECIFICATION
This parameter specifies the protocol type characteristics.
These characteristics are:
- format type, which is country specific;
- the way in which the data are output (polled or forward), only for
EWSD format.
EWSD EWSD PROTOCOL
OUTFORW DATA IS AUTOMATICALLY SENT
OUTPOLL DATA IS POLLED BY NTM CENTER
This parameter allows the inclusion of a specific object class in the
NTM Information if the object class name is specified.
In the absence of the parameter, all object classes are included in
the NTMI.
real-time data of that class is automatically collected by EWSD and
DEST CODE BLOCKING POINTS
EXCH EXCHANGE DATA
TGRP TRUNK GROUPS
THRASR THR VAL FOR ANSWER SEIZ. RATIO
This parameter specifies the threshold value for answer seizure ratio
performance calculations of trunk groups.
Default: 0
THROVL THR VAL FOR OVERFLOW
This parameter specifies the threshold value for overflow performance
calculations of trunk groups.
Default: 0
THROCC THR VAL FOR OCCUPANCY
This parameter specifies the threshold value for occupancy performance
CR NTMINFO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR NTMINFO
EWSD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
calculations of trunk groups.
Default: 0
This parameter specifies the time interval (in minutes) for real-time
NTM Information integration.
Default: 5
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR NTMINFO-3 -
DACT NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO.
This command deactivates the Network Traffic Management Information
functions.
When this command is entered and successfully executed, for an
EWSD - NTM CENTER connection, the EWSD Application Layer is removed
from service and the NTM Center will no longer be able to receive
real-time NTM Information.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT NTMINFO ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT NTMINFO-1 -
DISP NTMINFO
ALLOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO.
This command displays the following:
1 - The Network Traffic Management Information Status and the
attributes entered with commands CR NTMINFO and MOD NTMINFO.
2 - all or individual objects included in the NTM Information (trunk
groups, destination areas, route sets and destination codes) entered
with the command ENTR NTMINFO with the parameters NTGNO, NDEST,
NDICO or NNETIND and NDPC.
<job number>.
1. DISP NTMINFO - ALLOBJ ALL OBJ. ENTERED IN NTM INFO.
2. DISP NTMINFO - CODE DEST CODES IN NTM INFORMATION
3. DISP NTMINFO - C7RSET CCS7 ROUTE SET IN NTM INFO.
4. DISP NTMINFO - DEST DEST AREAS IN NTM INFORMATION
5. DISP NTMINFO - STATUS STATUS OF NTMI FUNCTIONS
6. DISP NTMINFO - TGRP TGRPS IN NTM INFORMATION
1. Input format
ALL OBJ. ENTERED IN NTM INFO.
Input format for displaying all objects included in NTM Information.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORMAT IDENTIFIER OF INFO.TO DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the mask that should be displayed for the
action to be performed.
Incompatibilities:
- Value DEST is invalid when PROTYP = EWSD or BRD.
ALLOBJ ALL OBJ. ENTERED IN NTM INFO.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NTMINFO-1 +
DISP NTMINFO
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DEST CODES IN NTM INFORMATION
Input format for displaying all or some destination codes included
in NTM Information.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= [,DICO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
CODE DESTINATION CODES IN NTM INFO.
DICO DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the destination
code.
Prerequisites:
- The destination code must be contained in the NTM Information.
DISP NTMINFO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP NTMINFO
C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CCS7 ROUTE SET IN NTM INFO.
Input format for displaying route sets included in NTM Information.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= [,NETIND= ,DPC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
C7RSET CCS7 ROUTE SETS IN NTM INFO.
This parameter specifies the Network Indicator for which the route sets
should be displayed.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NTMINFO-3 +
DISP NTMINFO
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DEST AREAS IN NTM INFORMATION
Input format for displaying all or some destination areas included
in NTM Information.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= [,DEST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
DEST DEST. AREAS IN NTM INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the destination area(s) name(s).
Prerequisites:
- The destination area must be contained in the NTM Information.
Incompatibilities:
- PROTYP = EWSD and BRD.
.
DISP NTMINFO-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP NTMINFO
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
STATUS OF NTMI FUNCTIONS
Input format for displaying NTM Information Status and Attributes.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
STATUS STATUS OF NTMI FUNCTIONS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NTMINFO-5 +
DISP NTMINFO
TGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TGRPS IN NTM INFORMATION
Input format for displaying all or some trunk groups included in the
NTM Information.
-
] ]
] DISP NTMINFO : FORMAT= [,TGNO=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Incompatibilities:
TGRP TGRP IN NTM INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s).
Prerequisites:
- The trunk group must be contained in the NTM Information.
.
E N D
DISP NTMINFO-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO.
This command selects individual objects to be included or excluded from
the Network Traffic Management Information. These objects can be trunk
groups, destination areas (project specific), destination codes (project
specific) and route sets (only own area).
According to the parameter input,
- one or more objects are included in the NTM Information;
- one, more or all objects are excluded from the NTM Information (in
case of trunk groups and destination areas);
- one or more objects are excluded from the NTM Information.
Prerequisites:
- Only a trunk group or destination area or route set already created
by the command CR TGRP or CR DEST or CR C7DP may be included in
the NTM Information.
the exchange!
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]NTGNO= ] ]
] ]NDEST= ] ]
] ]NDICO= ] -- ]
] ]CTGNO= ] ]],NDPC=]] ]
] ENTR NTMINFO : -CDEST= ]-,CDPC=] ; ]
] ]CDICO= ] ]] ]] ]
] ]NNETIND=] ~ '- ]
] ]CNETIND=] ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NTGNO NEW TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group numbers to be included in the
NTM Information (maximum: 34).
Incompatibilities:
- PROTYP = BRD.
Prerequisites:
The trunk groups that can be included must be of the following type:
- For Brazil specific protocol:
Ordinary or
CCS7TUP
- For EWSD protocol:
Ordinary or
CCS7TUP or
CCS7TUPP or
CCS7IUP
NDEST NEW DEST. AREA NAME
This parameter specifies the destination area names to be included in
the NTM Information (maximum: 34).
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR NTMINFO-1 +
ENTR NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- PROTYP = EWSD or BRD.
Prerequisites:
- The destination area to be included must already have been created by
the command CR DEST without input of the parameter NEWCODE.
This parameter specifies the new digit combination to be
included in the NTM Information.
With this measurement, it is possible to measure:
- all possible digit combinations with a maximum of 10
digits, including LACs and parts of LACs of the
local exchange, Carrier Acces Code;
- internal, terminating and outgoing traffic;
- destination in the same digit combination.
CTGNO TGRP NUMBER TO BE CANCELED
This parameter specifies the names of the trunk groups to be removed
from the NTM Information (maximum: 34).
Incompatibilities:
- PROTYP = BRD.
CDEST DEST. AREA TO BE CANCELED
This parameter specifies the names of the destination areas to be
removed from the NTM Information (maximum: 34).
Incompatibilities:
- PROTYP = EWSD and BRD.
CDICO DIGIT COMBINATION FOR CANCEL
This parameter specifies the digit combination to be
removed from the NTM Information.
NNETIND NEW NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the Network Indicator for which new route sets
are to be included in the NTM Information.
ENTR NTMINFO-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
CNETIND NETWORK INDICATOR FOR CANCEL
This parameter specifies the Network Indicator for which route sets
are to be removed from the NTM Information.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NDPC NEW DESTINATION POINT CODE
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
CDPC DEST. POINT CODE FOR CANCEL
a[-b[-c]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR NTMINFO-3 -
MOD NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO
This command modifies the NTM Information attributes according to the
object classes to be included or removed in the NTMI, the threshold
values for performance monitoring calculations and the integration time
interval.
Each time this command is entered, the previous attributes are replaced
by the new values entered with the input command parameter.
Prerequisites:
- This command should only be entered if EWSD or BRD protocol type was
chosen in the command CR NTMINFO
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]OBJCL= ] ]
] ]THRASR=] ]
] MOD NTMINFO : -THROVL= ; ]
] ]THROCC=] ]
] ]TIMINT=] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter includes a specific object class in the NTM Information,
when the object class name is specified in the parameter value.
Every time this parameter is entered, only the new object classes
entered as parameter values are included in the NTM Information.
real-time data of that class are automatically collected by EWSD and
TGRP TRUNK GROUPS
DEST CODE BLOCKING POINTS
EXCH EXCHANGE DATA
C7LINK CCS7 LINK
C7LSET CCS7 LINK SET
C7RSET CCS7 ROUTE SET
CODE DESTINATION CODES
THRASR THR VAL FOR ANSWER SEIZ. RATIO
This parameter specifies the new threshold value for answer seizure
ratio indication over trunk groups.
THROVL THR VAL FOR OVERFLOW
This parameter specifies the new threshold value for overflow
indication over trunk groups.
THROCC THR VAL FOR OCCUPANCY
This parameter specifies the new threshold value for occupancy
indication over trunk groups.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD NTMINFO-1 +
MOD NTMINFO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new time for the real-time NTM data
integration interval.
E N D
MOD NTMINFO-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT NUC
PERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command activates a nailed-up connection.
1. ACT NUC - PERM PERMANENT ACTIVATION
2. ACT NUC - TEMP TEMPORARY ACTIVATION
1. Input format
PERMANENT ACTIVATION
Input format to activate a permanent nailed-up connection.
-
] ]
] ACT NUC : NUC= [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
This parameter specifies wether busy ports should be released.
If YES is entered, an existing connection on the new port of
the nailed-up connection is released.
N NO RELEASE OF BUSY PORTS
NO NO RELEASE OF BUSY PORTS
Y RELEASE OF BUSY PORTS
YES RELEASE OF BUSY PORTS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT NUC-1 +
ACT NUC
TEMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TEMPORARY ACTIVATION
Input format to set time values for temporary nailed-up
connections.
If values are entered for the parameters BEG, TER, IV
and PER, the nailed-up connection created as permanent
becomes temporary.
-
] ]
] ACT NUC : NUC= [,UNCOND=] <,BEG= ,TER= ,IV= ,PER= ]
] ]
] ,BEGTIME= ,TERTIME=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
If YES is entered, an existing connection on the new port of
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the date on which the temporary
nailed-up connection is to be activated for the first time.
a-b-c
This parameter specifies the date on which the temporary
nailed-up connection is to be activated for the last time.
Default: No termination date
a-b-c
ACT NUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT NUC
TEMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time period during which the
temporary nailed-up connection is to be active on the days
specified.
Default: 24 hour activation
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN=
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION=
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION=
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which a
temporary nailed-up connection will be activated.
Default: daily activation
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter indicates the time on which the temporary
Default: activation at begin of day
a-b
a: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN TIME=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT NUC-3 +
ACT NUC
TEMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TERTIME TERMINATION TIME
nailed-up connection is to be deactivated for the last time.
Default: deactivation at end of day
a-b
a: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
b: MINUTE OF TERMINATION TIME=
E N D
ACT NUC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN NUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command cancels a nailed-up connection from the nailed-up
connection table. If the nailed-up connection is active, it is
first deactivated. The ports return to their original type.
Active nailed-up connections with TYPE = MUX can only be
canceled if the corresponding link is blocked.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN NUC : NUC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN NUC-1 -
CR NUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command creates a nailed-up connection.
It does not activate the nailed-up connection.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR NUC : NUC= ,EQNIC= ,EQNOG= ,TYPE= [,BCHIC=] [,BCHOG=] ]
] ]
] [,FEAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the nailed-up connection.
.,+,*,%,#
EQNIC EQUIPMENT NUMBER INCOMING
This parameter specifies the equipment number on the incoming side of
the nailed-up connection. Special ports (e.g. announcements or coin
boxes) or ports that are not in service are not accepted.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG OR DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
- DLU number : 10, 20, 30, ... for DLU port
b: LTG OR SHELF NUMBER=
- 0 for V5IF port
c: LTU OR MODULE NUMBER=
- V5IF : 0..20 for V5IF port (the upper 2 digits)
d: CHANNEL OR CIRCUIT NUMBER=
- Channel : 0..99 for V5IF port (the lower 2 digits)
EQNOG EQUIPMENT NUMBER OUTGOING
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the outgoing side of
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR NUC-1 +
CR NUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the nailed-up connection.
Special ports (e.g. announcements or coin boxes) or ports that are
not in service are not accepted.
If a nailed-up connection is to be created for a signaling link
(TYPE=MUX), refer to the following table to see which SILT numbers
are assigned to the MUX LTU numbers and MUX PORT numbers.
silt ltu port ! silt ltu port ! silt ltu port ! silt ltu port
----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------
0 - - ! 64 0 8 ! 128 - - ! 192 0 8
1 0 16 ! 65 0 24 ! 129 0 16 ! 193 0 24
2 1 0 ! 66 1 8 ! 130 1 0 ! 194 1 8
3 1 16 ! 67 1 24 ! 131 1 16 ! 195 1 24
4 2 0 ! 68 2 8 ! 132 2 0 ! 196 2 8
5 2 16 ! 69 2 24 ! 133 2 16 ! 197 2 24
6 3 0 ! 70 3 8 ! 134 3 0 ! 198 3 8
7 3 16 ! 71 3 24 ! 135 3 16 ! 199 3 24
8 0 1 ! 72 0 9 ! 136 0 1 ! 200 0 9
9 0 17 ! 73 0 25 ! 137 0 17 ! 201 0 25
10 1 1 ! 74 1 9 ! 138 1 1 ! 202 1 9
11 1 17 ! 75 1 25 ! 139 1 17 ! 203 1 25
12 2 1 ! 76 2 9 ! 140 2 1 ! 204 2 9
13 2 17 ! 77 2 25 ! 141 2 17 ! 205 2 25
14 3 1 ! 78 3 9 ! 142 3 1 ! 206 3 9
15 3 17 ! 79 3 25 ! 143 3 17 ! 207 3 25
16 0 2 ! 80 0 10 ! 144 0 2 ! 208 0 10
17 0 18 ! 81 0 26 ! 145 0 18 ! 209 0 26
18 1 2 ! 82 1 10 ! 146 1 2 ! 210 1 10
19 1 18 ! 83 1 26 ! 147 1 18 ! 211 1 26
20 2 2 ! 84 2 10 ! 148 2 2 ! 212 2 10
21 2 18 ! 85 2 26 ! 149 2 18 ! 213 2 26
22 3 2 ! 86 3 10 ! 150 3 2 ! 214 3 10
23 3 18 ! 87 3 26 ! 151 3 18 ! 215 3 26
24 0 3 ! 88 0 11 ! 152 0 3 ! 216 0 11
25 0 19 ! 89 0 27 ! 153 0 19 ! 217 0 27
26 1 3 ! 90 1 11 ! 154 1 3 ! 218 1 11
27 1 19 ! 91 1 27 ! 155 1 19 ! 219 1 27
28 2 3 ! 92 2 11 ! 156 2 3 ! 220 2 11
29 2 19 ! 93 2 27 ! 157 2 19 ! 221 2 27
30 3 3 ! 94 3 11 ! 158 3 3 ! 222 3 11
31 3 19 ! 95 3 27 ! 159 3 19 ! 223 3 27
32 0 4 ! 96 0 12 ! 160 0 4 ! 224 0 12
33 0 20 ! 97 0 28 ! 161 0 20 ! 225 0 28
34 1 4 ! 98 1 12 ! 162 1 4 ! 226 1 12
35 1 20 ! 99 1 28 ! 163 1 20 ! 227 1 28
36 2 4 ! 100 2 12 ! 164 2 4 ! 228 2 12
37 2 20 ! 101 2 28 ! 165 2 20 ! 229 2 28
38 3 4 ! 102 3 12 ! 166 3 4 ! 230 3 12
39 3 20 ! 103 3 28 ! 167 3 20 ! 231 3 28
40 0 5 ! 104 0 13 ! 168 0 5 ! 232 0 13
41 0 21 ! 105 0 29 ! 169 0 21 ! 233 0 29
42 1 5 ! 106 1 13 ! 170 1 5 ! 234 1 13
43 1 21 ! 107 1 29 ! 171 1 21 ! 235 1 29
44 2 5 ! 108 2 13 ! 172 2 5 ! 236 2 13
45 2 21 ! 109 2 29 ! 173 2 21 ! 237 2 29
46 3 5 ! 110 3 13 ! 174 3 5 ! 238 3 13
47 3 21 ! 111 3 29 ! 175 3 21 ! 239 3 29
48 0 6 ! 112 0 14 ! 176 0 6 ! 240 0 14
49 0 22 ! 113 0 30 ! 177 0 22 ! 241 0 30
50 1 6 ! 114 1 14 ! 178 1 6 ! 242 1 14
51 1 22 ! 115 1 30 ! 179 1 22 ! 243 1 30
52 2 6 ! 116 2 14 ! 180 2 6 ! 244 2 14
53 2 22 ! 117 2 30 ! 181 2 22 ! 245 2 30
54 3 6 ! 118 3 14 ! 182 3 6 ! 246 3 14
55 3 22 ! 119 3 30 ! 183 3 22 ! 247 3 30
56 0 7 ! 120 0 15 ! 184 0 7 ! 248 0 15
57 0 23 ! 121 0 31 ! 185 0 23 ! 249 0 31
58 1 7 ! 122 1 15 ! 186 1 7 ! 250 1 15
59 1 23 ! 123 1 31 ! 187 1 23 ! 251 1 31
60 2 7 ! 124 2 15 ! 188 2 7 ! 252 2 15
61 2 23 ! 125 2 31 ! 189 2 23 ! 253 2 31
62 3 7 ! 126 3 15 ! 190 3 7 ! 254 3 15
63 3 23 ! 127 3 31 ! 191 3 23 ! 255 3 31
CR NUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR NUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
- 0 for V5IF port
- V5IF : 0..20 for V5IF port (the upper 2 digits)
- Channel : 0..99 for V5IF port (the lower 2 digits)
TYPE TYPE
PERM PERMANENT NUC
Nailed-up connection between any two ports
If the nailed-up connection is activated
as temporary nailed-up connection, this
value will be changed automatically by the
ACT NUC command.
MUX CCS7 MULTIPLEXER CONN.
Nailed-up connection for CCS7 signaling links
TEST TEST CONNECTION
Nailed-up connection for test purposes
BCHIC B-CHANNEL INCOMING
This parameter specifies the B-channel of the incoming access.
For an ISDN basic access, this parameter is mandatory.
For other accesses, this parameter is illegal.
B1 B1 CHANNEL
B2 B2 CHANNEL
BCHOG B-CHANNEL OUTGOING
This parameter specifies the B-channel of the outgoing access.
B1 B1 CHANNEL
B2 B2 CHANNEL
FEAT NUC FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features which are available
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR NUC-3 +
CR NUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for the nailed-up connection.
ECINC ECHO SUPPRESSION INCOMING
Incompatibilities:
- ECOUT
ECOUT ECHO SUPPRESSION OUTGOING
Incompatibilities:
- ECINC
VCINC DCME CONTROL VOICE INCOMING
Incompatibilities:
- NVCINC
VCOUT DCME CONTROL VOICE OUTGOING
Incompatibilities:
- NVCOUT
NVCINC DCME CONTROL NONVOICE INCOMING
Incompatibilities:
- VCINC
NVCOUT DCME CONTROL NONVOICE OUTGOING
Incompatibilities:
- VCOUT
E N D
CR NUC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT NUC
PERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates the specified nailed-up connection.
Nailed-up connections with TYPE = MUX can only be
deactivated if the corresponding link is blocked.
1. DACT NUC - PERM DEACTIVATION OF PERMANENT NUC
2. DACT NUC - TEMP DEACTIVATION OF TEMPORARY NUC
1. Input format
DEACTIVATION OF PERMANENT NUC
Input format to deactivate a permanent nailed-up connection.
-
] ]
] DACT NUC : NUC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT NUC-1 +
DACT NUC
TEMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DEACTIVATION OF TEMPORARY NUC
Input format to reset time values for temporary nailed-up
connections.
The values of the parameters BEG, TER, IV and PER
must be entered like in the corresponding ACT NUC command.
If the nailed-up connection is active because of the
corresponding ACT NUC command, it is also deactivated.
-
] ]
] DACT NUC : NUC= <,BEG= ,TER= ,IV= ,PER= ,BEGTIME= ]
] ]
] ,TERTIME=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the begin date for temporary nailed-up
connections.
a-b-c
This parameter indicates the termination date for
temporary nailed-up connections.
a-b-c
IV TIME INTERVAL
This parameter indicates the time interval for
temporary nailed-up connections.
DACT NUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DACT NUC
TEMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN=
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION=
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION=
This parameter indicates the days of the week, on which a
tempory nailed-up connection is activated.
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Default: activation at begin of day
a-b
a: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN TIME=
TERTIME TERMINATION TIME
nailed-up connection is to be deactivated for the last time.
Default: deactivation at end of day
a-b
a: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
b: MINUTE OF TERMINATION TIME=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT NUC-3 -
DISP NUC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command displays the data for specified or
for all nailed-up connections.
<job number>.
1. DISP NUC - ALL DISPLAY ALL NUCS
2. DISP NUC - NAME DISPLAY ONE NUC
3. DISP NUC - UNIT DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL NUCS
Input format to display the data of all nailed-up connections.
The output can be restricted to nailed-up connections with a
given TYPE and/or STATE.
-
] ]
] DISP NUC : [STATE=] [,TYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STATE NUC STATUS
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
TYPE NUC TYPE
PERM PERMANENT NUC
TEMP TEMPORARY NUC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NUC-1 +
DISP NUC
NAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ONE NUC
Input format to display the data of a certain nailed-up connection
selected by name.
-
] ]
] DISP NUC : [NUC=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
DISP NUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP NUC
UNIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
Input format to display the data of nailed-up connections
selected via equipment number.
The output can be restricted to nailed-up connections with a
given TYPE and/or STATE.
-
] ]
] DISP NUC : [EQN=] [,TYPE=] [,STATE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
- 0 for V5IF port
- 0 for V5IF port
d: PORT OR CIRCUIT NUMBER=
- Channel : 0..29 for V5IF port
TYPE NUC TYPE
PERM PERMANENT NUC
TEMP TEMPORARY NUC
STATE NUC STATUS
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP NUC-3 -
MOD NUC
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates an existing nailed-up connection and activates
a new connection with the new port. When a port fails, this command
allows fast switchover to another port.
Prerequisites:
- The specified nailed-up connection must be active.
- A suitable standby port must be available.
1. MOD NUC - EQN MODIFY NUC ACCESS
2. MOD NUC - TYPE MODIFY NUC TYPE
1. Input format
MODIFY NUC ACCESS
Input format to change the access of one side of
a nailed-up connection.
-
] ]
] MOD NUC : NUC= ,EQN= [,NEWEQN=] [,BCH=] [,NEWBCH=] ]
] ]
] [,UNCOND=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
This parameter specifies the old equipment number.
a-b-c-d
- 0 for V5IF port
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD NUC-1 +
MOD NUC
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- 0 for V5IF port
This parameter specifies the new equipment number.
a-b-c-d
- 0 for V5IF port
- 0 for V5IF port
BCH B-CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the old B-Channel.
B1 B1 CHANNEL
B2 B2 CHANNEL
NEWBCH NEW B-CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new B-Channel.
B1 B1 CHANNEL
B2 B2 CHANNEL
If Y is entered, an existing connection on the new port of
MOD NUC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD NUC
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD NUC-3 +
MOD NUC
TYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY NUC TYPE
Input format to modify the TYPE of a nailed-up connection.
-
] ]
] MOD NUC : NUC= [,NEWTYPE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
NEWTYPE NEW TYPE
This parameter specifies the new type of the nailed-up connection.
It is only possible to switch between PERM and TEST.
PERM PERMANENT NUC
Nailed-up connection between any two ports
Nailed-up connection for test purposes
E N D
MOD NUC-4 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CONF OCANEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
With this command a operator controlled announcement equipment
can be configured to one of the states MBL, ACT, CBL or
PLA.
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF OCANEQ : LTG= ,OCNO= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG-NUMBER=
b: LTG-NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
PLA <-> MBL
MBL --> ACT
ACT --> MBL (when the LTG is not active)
MBL <-> CBL
UNA --> MBL or CBL or ACT
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF OCANEQ-1 -
DIAG OCANEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNCEM. EQU.
This command diagnoses an operator controlled announcement
equipment.
ACT or CBL and the associated OCANEQ must be in the
Input format
-
] ]
] DIAG OCANEQ : LTG= ,OCNO= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG-NUMBER=
b: LTG-NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG OCANEQ-1 -
DISP OCANEQ
BASICERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This command displays the firmware of an operator controlled
announcement equipment (OCANEQ), or a table of announcement
related errors.
If an OCANEQ variant is assigned to the entered LTG by a
previously executed ENTR OCAVAR command, this OCANEQ variant
is displayed too.
Prerequisites:
- The OCANEQ must be available, and incompatible maintenance
functions (audible checking, configuration or diagnosis)
must not be in progress.
- If an OCANEQ service PC is logged on, it must operate in
monitor mode only.
- The LTG containing the LTU:OCANEQ must be in the operating
state ACT or CBL.
- The LTU:OCANEQ must not be in the operating state PLA.
Possible Effects:
- The processing of the command is aborted by any start of
audible checking, configuration, remote loading, or diagnosis.
Notes:
- Depending on the different versions of OCANEQ hardware,
it may not be possible to read all parts of data from OCANEQ.
- In particular, if the fragment headers are requested, but only
the fragment list can be read, this list is displayed instead.
<job number>.
1. DISP OCANEQ - BASICERR BASIC OR ERROR DATA
2. DISP OCANEQ - FRAGMDAT OCANEQ FW FRAGMENT DATA
1. Input format
BASIC OR ERROR DATA
This input format displays the basic OCANEQ firmware data,
and if required additionally the announcement related errors.
It consists of the
- OCANEQ variant assigned to the specified LTG,
- speech firmware,
- OCANEQ identification,
- location identification, and if required
- error table with fragment numbers or announcement element numbers.
-
] ]
] DISP OCANEQ : LTG= ,OCNO= ,DATA= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OCANEQ-1 +
DISP OCANEQ
BASICERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATA OCANEQ FW DATA AND ERROR LISTS
This parameter specifies which data are displayed.
BASIC - BASIC DATA
ERROR ' ANN. RELATED ERRORS
DISP OCANEQ-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP OCANEQ
FRAGMDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OCANEQ FW FRAGMENT DATA
This input format displays the basic OCANEQ firmware data,
and additionally the OCANEQ firmware fragment data.
It consists of the
- OCANEQ variant assigned to the specified LTG,
- speech firmware,
- OCANEQ identification,
- location identification, and
- fragment number list or fragment headers.
-
] ]
] DISP OCANEQ : LTG= ,OCNO= ,DATA= ,FRAGM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
DATA OCANEQ FW DATA AND ERROR LISTS
This parameter specifies which data are displayed.
FRAGMHD - FRAGMENT HEADER DATA
- If the fragment headers are not available, but
] ] the list of fragment numbers can be read, this
] ] list is displayed instead.
FRAGMLST' FRAGMENT NUMBER LIST
FRAGM OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER
Up to 32 fragment numbers and/or ranges can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OCANEQ-3 -
STAT OCANEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS OF OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
- one OCANEQ in a particular LTG
- one OCANEQ in all LTGs
- all OCANEQs in a particular LTG
- all OCANEQs in all LTGs
- all OCANEQs with a particular operating status in a
particular LTG
- all OCANEQs with a particular operating status in all LTGs
Input format
-
] ]
] STAT OCANEQ : LTG= [,OCNO=] [,OST=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: TSG NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
With this parameter an operator controlled announcement
equipment with an particular operating status can be
searched.
The following states are allowed:
PLA, MBL, ACT, CBL or UNA
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 STAT OCANEQ-1 -
CAN OCAVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL OCANEQ VARIANT
This command cancels the OCANEQ variant for one LTG.
Prerequisites :
- All those LTU of the LTG created as LTU:OCANEQ must be
in operating status PLA (except installation recovery).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN OCAVAR : LTG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group for which
the assigned OCANEQ variant is to be canceled.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN OCAVAR-1 -
DISP OCAVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OCANEQ VARIANT
This command displays the OCANEQ variant(s) assigned to one or more LTG.
Notes :
- If no LTG is specified, the command also displays those
OCANEQ variants, for which the OCANEQ database is edited
or an User Interaction database entry is created,
even if no LTG assignment exists.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]]OCAVAR=]] ]
] DISP OCAVAR : ]-LTG= ] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group for which
the assigned OCANEQ variant is to be displayed.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OCAVAR-1 -
ENTR OCAVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER OCANEQ VARIANT
This command enters the OCANEQ variant for one LTG.
Prerequisites :
- At least one LTU of the LTG must have been created already
as LTU:OCANEQ.
- All those LTU of the LTG created as LTU:OCANEQ must be
in operating status PLA (except installation recovery).
Notes :
- An OCANEQ variant previously entered for this LTG will be
overwritten.
- If the OCANEQ variant is not yet registered by ENTR OCAVAR or
EDIT ANELEM or User Interaction database administration beforehand,
a new element will be occupied in the data table.
- The command is rejected if 10 OCANEQ variants are already registered
in system (see also EDIT ANELEM).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR OCAVAR : OCAVAR= ,LTG= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group to which
the entered OCANEQ variant is to be assigned.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OCAVAR-1 -
ACT OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OCT LOADER
This command may start a lot of long running downloading tasks.
This command starts the downloading of an OCT (Object Control
Table also called CARS APS) from EWSD Disk to an external console.
Optional parameters can be used to specify the following:
- an OCT (Object Control Table) to be loaded to the corresponding
external consoles
- a single external console to be loaded.
- whether the new OCT should be activated in the console or not
- whether all OCT files or only the modified files should be
loaded.
A downloading task via the command ACT OCTLOAD is accepted and
stored into the downloading task table.
The command is executed successfully if the downloading task is
accepted by the downloading server in CP. All stored downloading
tasks are executed sequentially under the control of the
downloading server.
The downloading server has control over the installed OCTs
of the external consoles. This means, that the downloading server
checks the existence and consistency of the installed OCTs.
Notes:
- ACT OCTLOAD updates the correction version kk (e.g. OC.vvff.Vkk)
of an existing OCT (Object Control Table) in the semipermanent
database only. If the downloading was started in preparation mode,
no database change is made.
- A downloading task which is in blocking state "BLOCKED" or
"DEFECT" can only be restored with a new command ACT OCTLOAD.
The blocking state "BLOCKED" means that there is an inconsistency
between the OCT in the database and the installed OCT of
the external console. Only new downloading can eliminate the
inconsistency.
- As regards the input of parameters OCT and EQN it is
possible to specify only OCT, only EQN or both together.
- If only parameter OCT is specified, it initiates downloading
of the relevant files of this OCT library for all
corresponding consoles referenced in the DSB database.
- If parameters OCT and EQN are specified, they initiate
downloading of the relevant files of this OCT for a specific
external console.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OCTLOAD : <OCT= ,EQN=> [,MODE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the CARS APS file name.
The parameter allows entry of a single 11 char value only.
This parameter must have the format "OC.vvff.Vkk", where
OC. - specifies CARS APS files,
vv - specifies customer id. part one (e.g. Q1),
ff - specifies customer id. part two (e.g. 33),
.V - is a filler (the first sign in a filename or after
a "." in a filename must be a character (must be "V" for
a CARS APS), this is necessary because "kk" is numeric).
kk - two digits from 0-9 (e.g. 26).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OCTLOAD-1 +
ACT OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF NUMBER=
- 0 for V5IF port
c: MODULE NUMBER OR V5.2IF PORT DIGITS 1=
- V5.1IF : 0
- V5.2IF : 0..20 first and second digit of
port number
(V5.2IF port number: 0..2047)
d: CIRCUIT, V5.1IF PORT OR V5.2IF PORT DIGITS 2=
- Channel : 0..31 for V5.1IF port
- Channel : 0..99 for third and fourth digit of
V5.2IF port number.
(V5.2IF port number : 0..2047)
The port number will be calculated
in the following way:
[third unit (c) * 100] + fourth unit (d)
MODE MODE OF LOAD INSTRUCTION
This parameter can be used to specify the following:
- whether the new OCT (Object Control Table)
should be activated or not.
- whether all files or only the modified files
of the OCT library should be loaded.
NORMAL NORMAL SPECIFICATION
The OCT (only changed or modified files)
is loaded and activated. The database is
changed.
CORR CORRECTION SPECIFICATION
The OCT (all files) is loaded and activated.
The database is changed.
Input of CORR is only allowed in combination
with the EQN parameter.
PREPN PREPARE NORMAL SPECIFICATION
The OCT (only changed or modified files)
is loaded and not activated. No changes are
made in the database. The parameter is used
for DSB console preparation for APS change.
PREPC PREPARE CORR. SPECIFICATION
The OCT (all files) is loaded and not
activated. No changes are made in the database.
The parameter is used for DSB console preparation
for APS change.
ACT OCTLOAD-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NORMAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OCTLOAD-3 -
DACT OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE OCT LOADER
This command deactivates accepted downloading tasks.
This command deactivates accepted OCT (Object Control Table
also called CARS APS) downloading task commands. Consoles
already loaded will be disregarded by DACT OCTLOAD. Optional
parameters allows the selection of a specific external console
or OCT (Object Control Table) to be deactivated.
Note:
- The DACT OCTLOAD command has no influence on an active OCT
(Object Control Table) in external consoles.
- This command will neither delete nor modify the database for
the console.
An entry with a new correction version of an OCT (Object
Control Table) still remains in the semipermanent database
even if no OCT is downloaded.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]EQN=] ]
] DACT OCTLOAD : -OCT= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
If parameter EQN is specified, the command
stops the downloading task of the specified
console.
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF NUMBER=
- 0 for V5IF port
c: MODULE NUMBER OR V5.2IF TH=
- V5.1IF : 0
port number
d: CIRCUIT,V5IF OR V5.2IF PORT=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT OCTLOAD-1 +
DACT OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
V5.2IF port number.
This parameter allows entry of a single 11 char value only.
Note:
If parameter OCT is specified, the command stops
and finishes all downloading tasks for consoles of
the specified OCT.
E N D
DACT OCTLOAD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OCT LOADER
This command displays the OCT (Object Control Table also called
CARS APS) downloading state of external consoles (default) as read
from the downloading task table. Optional parameters allow the
selection of a specific external console.
If the optional parameter REMOTE is used, the information about
the OCT version (both, active and standby OCT) loaded in the
specified external console is retrieved from the console by means
of messages. The parameter REMOTE can only be used in combination
with the parameter EQN only, i.e. for one specific console.
Notes:
- Only the active tasks are displayed. It is not possible to display
already finished tasks.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],OCT= ]] ]
] DISP OCTLOAD : [EQN=] ]-,REMOTE=] ; ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Note:
- This parameter allows entry of a single value.
- If only parameter EQN is specified, the command
displays the loading state of active or waiting tasks
for this EQN (loading state in downloading task table).
- If parameters EQN and REMOTE are specified, the command
displays the loading state retrieved from the external console
by means of messages.
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF NUMBER=
- 0 for V5IF port
c: MODULE NUMBER OR V5.2IF TH=
- V5.1IF : 0
port number
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OCTLOAD-1 +
DISP OCTLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CIRCUIT, V5IF OR V5.2IF PORT=
V5.2IF port number.
The parameter allows entry of a single 11 char value only.
Note:
If parameter OCT is specified, for this OCT the command
displays the loading states of tasks for all external
consoles (loading state in downloading task table).
REMOTE LOADING STATE REMOTE CONSOLE
If parameters EQN and REMOTE are specified, the command
displays the console installation information retrieved from
the external console by means of messages.
N NO DISPLAY
NO NO DISPLAY
Y DISPLAY
YES DISPLAY
Default: N, NO
E N D
DISP OCTLOAD-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT ODR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE ODR
This command activates a barred optimized dynamic routing list
or optimized dynamic routing generally.
Prerequisites:
- at least one active route of the ODR list exists.
Note:
- if less than MAXATT routes are semipermanently active,
the user will be warned.
- this command activates transiently all ODR which
are semipermanently active.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ACT ODR : [ODR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the optimized dynamic
routing list.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT ODR-1 -
CAN ODR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ODR
This command cancels an existing optimized dynamic routing list.
Prerequisites:
- All links from the destinations must first be canceled with the
command MOD DEST,
- the ODR list is deactivated,
- all routes of this ODR list are canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ODR : ODR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
routing list.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ODR-1 -
CR ODR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ODR
This command creates an optimized dynamic routing list.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ODR : ODR= [,MAXATT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
routing list.
MAXATT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ATTEMPTS
This parameter describes the maximum number of attempts which are
made to find an alternate route of the optimized dynamic routing
list with an idle circuit.
Default: 4
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ODR-1 -
DACT ODR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE ODR
This command deactivates an optimized dynamic routing list
or optimized dynamic routing generally.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DACT ODR : [ODR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
routing list.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT ODR-1 -
DISP ODR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ODR
This command displays the data of one or all specified optimized
dynamic routing (ODR) lists or the global ODR data.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP ODR : [ODR=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
routing list.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ODR-1 -
MOD ODR
ODRGLOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ODR
This command modifies the maximum number of attempts of an existing
optimized dynamic routing list or whether rerouting for optimized
dynamic routing is generally active or not.
1. MOD ODR - ODRGLOB MODIFY ODR GLOBAL
2. MOD ODR - ODRLIST MODIFY ODR LIST
1. Input format
MODIFY ODR GLOBAL
This input format is entered in order to allow global
rerouting for optimized dynamic routing.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD ODR : [REROUTE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
REROUTE REROUTING FLAG
This parameter describes whether rerouting for optimized
dynamic routing is generaly active or not.
NO REROUTING IS DEACTIVE
YES REROUTING IS ACTIVE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ODR-1 +
MOD ODR
ODRLIST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY ODR LIST
This input format is entered in order to modify the maximum
number of attempts to find an idle route of the optimized dynamic
routing list.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD ODR : [ODR= ,MAXATT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
routing list.
MAXATT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ATTEMPTS
This parameter evaluates the maximum number of attempts to
each route of the optimized dynamic routing list to find an
idle route.
Note:
- if this command results in less semipermanently active
ODR routes the user will be warned than the maximum number
of attempts.
Default: 4
E N D
MOD ODR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
START OM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START O&M PROCESSES
This command starts the following operation and maintenance processes:
update,
dynamic link loader,
debug and patch function,
timer administration,
tariff administration,
maintenance craft interface,
(Q3 function.)
Notes:
The command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
The use of the optional parameter causes only the start of the Q3 interface.
To start the other processes as well, the command must be executed first
without parameter.
Input format
-
] ]
] START OM : [APPL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
APPL APPLICATION
This parameter specifies an additional application to be activated.
Standard Behavior:Basis functionality with update, dynamic link
loader, debug and patch function, timer
administration, tariff administration and
maintenance craft interface.
Q3IF Q3 INTERFACE
Specifies the interface of telecommunication
management network.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 START OM-1 -
CONF OMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE O&M TERMINAL
This command configures an O&M terminal.
Notes:
Input format
-
] ]
] CONF OMT : OMT= ,OST= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CONF OMT-1 -
DIAG OMT
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE O&M TERMINAL
for an O&M terminal.
Prerequisites:
- The O&M terminal must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG OMT - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG OMT - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an O&M terminal.
-
] ]
] DIAG OMT : OMT= [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DIAG OMT-1 +
DIAG OMT
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
O&M terminal.
-
] ]
] DIAG OMT : OMT= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
DIAG OMT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP OMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY O&M TERMINAL
This command displays the environment of an O&M terminal.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OMT : OMT= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OMT-1 -
MOD OMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY O&M TERMINAL
This command modifies the device parameters of an O&M terminal. The
parameters have default values in the IOPUNI. The device parameters
can be displayed with the DISP OMT command.
Prerequisites:
- The specified O&M terminal must be MBL or PLA.
- The corresponding IOP of the specified O&M terminal must be an IOPUNI
and it must be ACT.
If the O&M terminal to be modified is connected to either IOPUNI-0
or IOPUNI-1, then both of those IOPs must be ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD OMT : OMT= <,BAUDRATE= ,HANDSHK= ,CONNECT=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal.
BAUDRATE BAUDRATE
This parameter specifies the baud rate of an O&M terminal.
B300 300 BAUD
B600 600 BAUD
B1200 1200 BAUD
B2400 2400 BAUD
B4800 4800 BAUD
B9600 9600 BAUD
HANDSHK HANDSHAKING
This parameter specifies whether a handshaking procedure for
communication is used or not.
N NO HANDSHAKING
NO NO HANDSHAKING
Y WITH HANDSHAKING
YES WITH HANDSHAKING
CONNECT CONNECTION TO IOP
This parameter specifies the kind of connection to the IOP.
DIRECT DIRECT CONNECTION
MODEM CONNECTION WITH MODEM
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OMT-1 -
TEST OMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST O&M TERMINAL
This command tests an O&M terminal.
Prerequisites:
- The terminal must be ACT.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST OMT : [OMT=] [,SUP=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies the O&M terminal to be tested.
Notes:
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST OMT-1 -
ACT OPRCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OPERATOR CONDITION
This command activates the operator status continuous display for
specific supervisory group
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OPRCOND : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,SUPGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of existing
This parameter specifies the directory number of an existing
SUPGRP SUPERVISORY GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OPRCOND-1 -
DISP OPRCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR CONDITION
This command displays the operator condition snaphot report.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OPRCOND : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,SUPGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
SUPGRP SUPERVISORY GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRCOND-1 -
DISP OPRCONF
CSGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR CONFIGURATION REPORT
This command displays the operator configuration report for
- up to 32 specified task groups
- all task groups of a specified force
- all task groups of a specified common service group.
<job number>.
1. DISP OPRCONF - CSGDN DISPLAY ALL TASKGROUPS OF CSGRP
2. DISP OPRCONF - FORCE DISPLAY ALL TASKGROUPS OF FORCE
3. DISP OPRCONF - TASKGRP DISPLAY SPECIFIED TASKGROUPS
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL TASKGROUPS OF CSGRP
This input format is used to display the operator configuration report
for all task groups of a specified common service group.
-
] ]
] DISP OPRCONF : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRCONF-1 +
DISP OPRCONF
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ALL TASKGROUPS OF FORCE
for all task groups of a specified force.
-
] ]
] DISP OPRCONF : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORCE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORCE FORCE
This parameter specifies the force.
DISP OPRCONF-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP OPRCONF
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY SPECIFIED TASKGROUPS
for up to 32 specified task groups.
-
] ]
] DISP OPRCONF : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASKGROUP
This parameter specifies the task group.
Notes:
- Up to 32 parameter values can be linked.
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRCONF-3 -
ACT OPRCTP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT
This command activates the operator call type performance report for
specific operator.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OPRCTP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the operator identification.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OPRCTP-1 -
DACT OPRCTP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT
This command deactivates the operator call type performance report for
specific operator.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DACT OPRCTP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,ID= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT OPRCTP-1 -
DISP OPRCTP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR CTYPE PERF. REPORT
This command displays the operator call type performance report.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OPRCTP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= <,FORCE= ,ID=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FORCE FORCE
This parameter specifies the force.
ID IDENTIFICATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRCTP-1 -
CAN OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL OPERATOR DATA
This command cancels all data associated with an assigned operator
identification.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN OPRDATA : OPR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OPR OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the operator identification number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN OPRDATA-1 -
CR OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE OPERATOR DATA
This command creates a new operator identification entry in the system.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR OPRDATA : OPR= [,NAME=] ,PSW= ,OPRTYP= [,FORCE=] ]
] ]
] [,SUPGRP=] [,CCAT=] [,CCSEQ=] [,CTREST=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the operator.
.
PSW PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the password. This parameter allows
only alphanumeric characters.
.
OPRTYP OPERATOR TYPE
This parameter specifies the operator type.
+----------------------------------+-----------------------------+
! ! OPRTYP= !
! Valid Parameter Combinations +-------+-------+-----+-------+
! !CHIEF !SUPER !OPR !MAINT !
+==================================+=======+=======+=====+=======+
!Organizational Parameters/ ! Attribute ! !
!Functional ! ! !
+========+=========================+=======+=======+=====+=======+
!OPR !Used for log on identifi-! Req ! Req ! Req ! Req !
! !cation and as directory ! ! ! ! !
! !number. ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+-------+-----+-------+
!PSW !Insures system security. ! Req ! Req ! Req ! Req !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+-------+-----+-------+
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR OPRDATA-1 +
CR OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!NAME !Identifies individual ! Opt ! Opt ! Opt ! Opt !
! !operator. ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+-------+-----+-------+
!SUPGRP !Organizes SUPERs and ! N/A ! Req ! Req ! N/A !
! !OPRs into a supervisory ! ! ! ! !
! !group. ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+-------+-----+-------+
!FORCE !Organizes SUPGRPs into ! Req ! Req ! Req ! N/A !
! !a work force. ! ! ! ! !
+========+=========================+=======+=======+=====+=======+
!Call distribution Parameters/ ! Attribute ! !
!Functions ! ! !
+========+=========================+=======+======+======+=======+
!CCAT !Distributes CCATs to ! N/A ! Opt ! Opt ! N/A !
! !SUPER/OPR ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+------+------+-------+
!CCSEQ !Defines distribution ! N/A ! Opt ! Opt ! N/A !
! !sequence of CCATs to ! ! ! ! !
! !SUPER/OPR ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+------+------+-------+
!CTREST !Restricts distribution of! N/A ! Opt ! Opt ! N/A !
! !call types to SUPER/ ! ! ! ! !
! !OPR. ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+------+------+-------+
!LANG !Languages spoken by ! N/A ! Opt ! Opt ! N/A !
! !SUPER/OPR ! ! ! ! !
+--------+-------------------------+-------+------+------+-------+
Req=Required parameter, Opt=Optional parameter, N/A=Not Applicable
OPR OPERATOR
SUPER SUPERVISOR
CHIEF CHIEF
MAINT MAINTENANCE
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the supervisory group number.
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the handled call categories. Up to 16
parameter values can be linked with &. This parameter allows
.
CCSEQ CALL CATEGORY SEQUENCE
This parameter specifies the call category sequence.
a[-b[-c]]
a:
CR OPRDATA-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b:
c:
CTREST CALL TYPE RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the call type restrictions. Up to 64
parameter values can be linked with &. This parameter allows
.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the handled languages. Up to 16
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR OPRDATA-3 -
DISP OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR DATA
This command displays certain data associated with an assigned operator
identification.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],FORCE= ]] ]
] DISP OPRDATA : [OPR=] [,OPRTYP=] ]-,SUPGRP=] [,CCAT=] ]
] ]] ]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,CTREST=] [,LANG=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
OPRTYP OPERATOR TYPE
This parameter specifies the operator type.
OPR OPERATOR
SUPER SUPERVISOR
CHIEF CHIEF
MAINT MAINTENANCE
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the handled call categories.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRDATA-1 +
DISP OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.
This parameter specifies the call type restrictions.
.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the handled languages.
E N D
DISP OPRDATA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY OPERATOR DATA
This command modifies certain data associated with an assigned operator
identification.
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD OPRDATA : OPR= [,NAME=] [,PSW=] [,SUPGRP=] [,CCAT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,CCSEQ=] [,CTREST=] [,LANG=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the operator.
.
PSW PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the password.
.
n/o
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the handled call categories. Up to 16
n/o
n/
/o
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OPRDATA-1 +
MOD OPRDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.
CCSEQ CALL CATEGORY SEQUENCE
This parameter specifies the call category sequence.
n/o
n/
/o
a[-b[-c]]
a:
b:
c:
This parameter specifies the call type restrictions. Up to 64
n/o
n/
/o
.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the handled languages. Up to 16
n/o
n/
/o
E N D
MOD OPRDATA-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CAN OPRLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL OPERATOR LOCATION
This command cancels a specified operator location (booth or
attendant operator).
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN OPRLOC : LOCNAM= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LOCNAM OPERATOR LOCATION NAME
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN OPRLOC-1 -
DISP OPRLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR LOCATION
This command displays operator locations of booth/attendant
operators. The following data are displayed:
- Operator location
- Call category
- Call type
- Operator identification
- Call treatment types
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRLOC-1 -
ENTR OPRLOC
ATTENOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER OPERATOR LOCATION
This command creates an operator location for a booth or
attendant operator.
1. ENTR OPRLOC - ATTENOPR ATTENDANT OPERATOR
2. ENTR OPRLOC - BOOTHOPR BOOTH OPERATOR
1. Input format
ATTENDANT OPERATOR
Input format for creating an attendant operator
Prerequisites:
- A special call category must be created.
- A special call type must be created (with a central
call category)
- The operator data required for the attendant position must be created
(with its own operator identification and call category).
- The operator data for the associated central operators must
be created (with the central call category).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,TREAT= ,CCAT= ,CTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Up to 31 different operator locations can be created.
.,+,*,%,#
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
CDL CALL DURATION LIMITATION
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
Prerequisites:
- The specified call type must be created.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OPRLOC-1 +
ENTR OPRLOC
ATTENOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This parameter specifies the call type.
Prerequisites:
.,+,*,%,#
ENTR OPRLOC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR OPRLOC
BOOTHOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
BOOTH OPERATOR
Input format for creating a booth operator
Prerequisites:
- A special call category must be created.
- The operator data required for the booth must be created (with its
own operator identification and call category).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] ENTR OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,TREAT= ,CCAT= ,OPR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
Up to 31 different operator locations can be created.
.,+,*,%,#
TREAT TREATMENT
be linked with &.
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
Prerequisites:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OPRLOC-3 -
MOD OPRLOC
CCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY OPERATOR LOCATION
This command modifies certain data of a booth or attendant operator.
The following data can be modified:
- Operator location
- Call treatment type
- Call type (for an attendant operator)
- Call category
- Operator identification (of a booth operator)
1. MOD OPRLOC - CCAT CALL CATEGORY
2. MOD OPRLOC - CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
3. MOD OPRLOC - LOCNAM OPERATOR LOCATION NAME
4. MOD OPRLOC - OPR OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION
5. MOD OPRLOC - TREAT TREATMENT
1. Input format
CALL CATEGORY
Input format for modifying a call category for a booth/
attendant operator
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,CCAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
CCAT CALL CATEGORY
Prerequisites:
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OPRLOC-1 +
MOD OPRLOC
CTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CALL TYPE NAME
Input format for modifying a call type of an attendant operator
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,CTYP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
CTYP CALL TYPE NAME
This parameter specifies the call type.
Prerequisites:
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
MOD OPRLOC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD OPRLOC
LOCNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OPERATOR LOCATION NAME
Input format for modifying an operator location name
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD OPRLOC : LOCNAM= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OPRLOC-3 +
MOD OPRLOC
OPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION
Input format for modifying the identification of a booth operator.
- Modification of the operator identification with OPR=new/old
- Creation of an additional operator identification with OPR=new/
- Cancellation of an operator identification with OPR=/old
Prerequisites:
- The new operator identification must be created and assigned
to the call category of the booth operator.
- At the operator location at least one further operator must be
created in addition to the one to be canceled.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,OPR= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
Prerequisites:
- The operator identification must be created.
n/o
n/
/o
MOD OPRLOC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD OPRLOC
TREAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TREATMENT
Input format for modifying call treatment types.
- Modification of treatment type with TREAT=new/old
- Creation of an additional treatment type with TREAT=new/
- Cancellation of treatment type with TREAT=/old
Prerequisites:
- For the operator location concerned, at least one further treatment
type must be defined in addition to the one to be canceled.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD OPRLOC : LOCNAM= ,TREAT= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
n
n/o
.,+,*,%,#
TREAT TREATMENT
This parameter specifies which call treatment types are
processed at the operator location.
n/o
n/
/o
DELAY DELAY
RECALL RECALL
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OPRLOC-5 -
DISP OPRPERF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR PERFORMANCE REPORT
This command displays the operator performance report for
- up to 128 specified operators
- all operators of a specified supervisor group.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],SUPGRP=] ]
] DISP OPRPERF : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= -,ID= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
Notes:
- Up to 128 parameter values can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRPERF-1 -
DISP OPRSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OPERATOR STATUS
This command displays the current operator status, i.e. a list of the
operators which have just logged in (in the specified supervisor
group) is displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OPRSTAT : SUPGRP= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OPRSTAT-1 -
CAN ORIGDAT
BLSTWLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ORIGINATING DATA
This command cancels data for determining the calling party number evaluation.
The object(s) to cancel must be specified by entering CODE and FEATURE. If
there is no feature for the entered CODE remaining, the digit chain will be
removed as far as possible.
1. CAN ORIGDAT - BLSTWLST BLACKLIST AND WHITELIST
2. CAN ORIGDAT - ORIGROZO ORIG DEPENDANT ROUTING/ZONING
1. Input format
BLACKLIST AND WHITELIST
Input format for cancelation of a blacklist (FEATURE=BLACKLST)
or a whitelist (FEATURE=WHITELST) entry.
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ORIGDAT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,FEATURE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digits for which originating data
shall be canceled.
ORIG1 ORIG. MARK FOR BLACKL. WHITEL.
This parameter specifies the destination which can be
reached via originating code. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, may be entered.
FEATURE FEATURES TO BE CANCELED
This parameter specifies the feature(s) to be canceled. If no feature
remains for the complete digit string than digits are removed from
the digit string until feature(s) are assigned to the remaining
digit string.
CBLACK - CANCEL BLACKLIST ASSIGNMENTS
] ] All blacklist assignments FEATURE=BLACKLST and
] ] NOBLACK will be canceled.
~CWHITE - CANCEL WHITELIST ASSIGNMENTS
All whitelist assignments FEATURE=WHITELST and
NOWHITE will be canceled.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN ORIGDAT-1 +
CAN ORIGDAT
ORIGROZO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ORIG DEPENDANT ROUTING/ZONING
Input format for special routing (FEATURE=ROUTING)
or special zoning (FEATURE=CHARGING).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN ORIGDAT : CODE= ,FEATURE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
shall be canceled.
FEATURE FEATURES TO BE CANCELED
This parameter specifies the feature(s) to be canceled. If no feature
remains for the complete digit string than digits are removed from
the digit string until feature(s) are assigned to the remaining
digit string.
CHARGING- SPECIAL ZONING
~ROUTING - SPECIAL ROUTING
E N D
CAN ORIGDAT-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ORIGDAT
BLSTWLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ORIGINATING DATA
This command creates data for determining the calling party number evaluation.
The entered directory number must be national significant. For parameter CODE
there is no need to determine exactly one directory number, this means, it is
also possible to enter the beginning digits of a group of directory numbers.
Furthermore you are allowed to enter extended digit chains, e.g., the digit
combinations 01234 and 01234567 may exist both at the same time.
Consequently, evaluating a given digit combination will lead to the result,
that belongs to a digit combination in data base corresponding with most of
the beginning digits.
1. CR ORIGDAT - BLSTWLST BLACKLIST AND WHITELIST
2. CR ORIGDAT - ORIGROZO ORIG DEPENDANT ROUTING/ZONING
1. Input format
Input format for creating a blacklist (FEATURE=BLACKLST)
or a whitelist (FEATURE=WHITELST) including the specification
of destination which can be reached via originating code (ORIG1).
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ORIGDAT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,FEATURE= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digits for which the A-No. evaluation
shall be done.
FEATURE FEATURE FOR A-NO. EVALUATION
This parameter specifies the feature(s) to be assigned to the digit
combination. For every entered feature, an own logical object is
created.
BLACKLST- BLACKLIST
] ] Connection is blocked for a single number or a
] ] range of numbers, depending on parameter CODE.
] ]
] ] Incompatibilities:
] ] FEATURE=NOBLACK
]NOBLACK ] NO BLACKLIST ENTRY
] ] This value is used to determine an exception
] ] within a blacklist group, e.g. digit combination
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ORIGDAT-1 +
CR ORIGDAT
BLSTWLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] 123 has feature blacklist and digit combination
] ] 12345 is excluded from the blacklist.
] ]
] ] FEATURE=BLACKLST
]NOWHITE ] NO WHITELIST ENTRY
] ] This value is used to determine an exception
] ] within a whitelist group, e.g. digit combination
] ] 123 has feature whitelist and digit combination
] ] 12345 is excluded from the whitelist.
] ]
] ] FEATURE=WHITELST
~WHITELST- WHITELIST
Connection is allowed for a single number or a
range of numbers, depending on parameter CODE
(inverse function of blacklist).
Incompatibilities:
FEATURE=NOWHITE
CR ORIGDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR ORIGDAT
ORIGROZO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR ORIGDAT : CODE= ,FEATURE= [,NORIG1=] [,NORIG2=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digits for which the A-No. evaluation
shall be done.
This parameter specifies the feature(s) to be assigned to the digit
combination. For every entered feature, an own logical object is
created.
NORIG1 NEW ORIG. MARK FOR ROUTING
This parameter determines the new originating mark 1 for routing
assigned to the given digit combination. If no value is entered and
FEATURE=ROUTING is given, the original NORIG1-value is not
substituted by call processing (Only used if extended digit chains
exist).
Prerequisites:
FEATURE=ROUTING
NORIG2 NEW ORIG. MARK FOR ZONING
This parameter determines the new originating mark 2 for zoning
FEATURE=CHARGING is given, the original NORIG2-value is not
exist).
Prerequisites:
FEATURE=CHARGING
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR ORIGDAT-3 -
DISP ORIGDAT
ALLFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ORIGINATING DATA
This command displays the originating data related to the specified
restrictions. Only data that match all entered restrictions will be
displayed.
1. DISP ORIGDAT - ALLFEAT ALL FEATURE VALUES DISPLAYED
2. DISP ORIGDAT - BLSTWLST BLACKLIST AND WHITELIST
3. DISP ORIGDAT - ORIGROZO ORIG DEPENDANT ROUTING/ZONING
1. Input format
ALL FEATURE VALUES DISPLAYED
Input format to display all entered features for the entered code.
-
] ]
] DISP ORIGDAT : CODE= [,FEATURE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter restricts the originating data to be displayed as
follows:
Only originating data that begin with the entered digits will be
displayed.
This parameter restricts the originating data to be displayed
as follows:
Only originating data that contain the entered feature(s) will
be displayed.
[X ] ALL VALUES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ORIGDAT-1 +
DISP ORIGDAT
BLSTWLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format for display of blacklist (FEATURE=BLACKLST)
or whitelist (FEATURE=WHITELST) entries.
If (ORIG1) is specified, only the entries with this value
will be displayed.
-
] ]
] DISP ORIGDAT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,FEATURE=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
follows:
displayed.
as follows:
be displayed.
BLACKLST- BLACKLIST
] ] FEATURE=NOBLACK
]NOBLACK ] NO BLACKLIST ENTRY
] ] FEATURE=BLACKLST
]NOWHITE ] NO WHITELIST ENTRY
] ] FEATURE=WHITELST
~WHITELST- WHITELIST
Incompatibilities:
FEATURE=NOWHITE
DISP ORIGDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP ORIGDAT
ORIGROZO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
-
] ]
] DISP ORIGDAT : CODE= [,FEATURE=] [,NORIG1=] [,NORIG2=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
follows:
displayed.
as follows:
be displayed.
follows:
Only originating data that contain the entered NORIG1 value will
be displayed.
follows:
Only originating data that contain the entered NORIG2 value will
be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP ORIGDAT-3 -
MOD ORIGDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ORIGINATING DATA
This command modifies originating data. Only additional information to
existing features may be modified.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] MOD ORIGDAT : CODE= ,FEATURE= [,NORIG1=] [,NORIG2=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
shall be modified.
This parameter specifies the feature(s) to be modified. Adding or
removing features is only possible using the commands CR ORIGDAT
and CAN ORIGDAT.
ROUTING SPECIAL ROUTING
CHARGING SPECIAL ZONING
This parameter determines the new originating mark 1 for routing
FEATURE=ROUTING is given, the original NORIG1-value is not
exist).
Prerequisites:
FEATURE=ROUTING
This parameter determines the new originating mark 2 for zoning
FEATURE=CHARGING is given, the original NORIG2-value is not
exist).
Prerequisites:
FEATURE=CHARGING
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD ORIGDAT-1 -
CAN OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL OSI ADDRESSES
This command cancels OSI addresses. The specified address name can only
be cancelled if it is no longer used for applications and remote addresses.
Input format
-
] ]
] CAN OSIADR : ADRNAM= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
defined by CR OSIADR.
Note:
- The first three characters of the name must be OSI; any
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN OSIADR-1 -
CR OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE OSI ADDRESSES
This command creates a new address in a specific network.
Input format
-
] ]
] CR OSIADR : ADRNAM= ,NSADR= [,LOCADR=] [,NET=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an address.
This address can be common to several applications.
Notes:
- The first three characters must be OSI.
NSADR ADRVAL NET SERV ACC POINT
This parameter specifies the NSAP (Network Service Access Point)
address value in the format AFI-IDI-DSP. AFI (Authority and Format
Identifier), IDI (Initiator Domain Identifier) and DSP (Domain
Specific Part) are data units. The AFI and IDI parts together are
known as IDP (Initial Domain Part).
a-b[-c]
a: AUTHORITY AND FORMAT IDENTIFIER=
This data unit specifies the Authority Format Identifier for
the NSAP (Network Service Access Point) address format:
AFI-IDI-DSP.
Notes:
- Since V10 the AFI value of a X25 address can also
be 44, 45, 58 and 59.
Compatibilities:
- NET = X25 : AFI = 36, 37, 52, 53,
44, 45, 58, 59.
- NET = ISDN : AFI = 44, 45, 58, 59.
- NET = X25LC : AFI = 48.
b: INITIATOR DOMAIN IDENTIFIER=
This data unit specifies the Initiator Domain Identifier for
AFI-IDI-DSP. The values entered for IDI are dependent on the
AFI value:
+-----------------------------------------------+
! AFI ! IDI (digits) !
! value ! --------------------------------------!
! ! Max. Length ! Valid zeros on the left!
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 36,37 ! 14 ! No !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR OSIADR-1 +
CR OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! 52,53 ! 14 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 44,45 ! 15 ! No !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 58,59 ! 15 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 48 ! 1 (=0) ! --- !
+-----------------------------------------------+
c: DOMAIN SPECIFIC PART=
This data unit specifies the Domain Specific Part for the NSAP
(Network Service Access Point) address format: AFI-IDI-DSP The
values entered for DSP are dependent of the AFI value:
+--------------------------------------+
! AFI ! DSP !
! value !------------------------------!
! ! Syntax ! Max. Length !
!-------!------------------------------!
! 36,52 ! Decimal Digits ! Up to 24 !
!-------!------------------------------!
! 37,53 ! Binary Octets ! Up to 9 !
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
! 48 ! Decimal Digits ! Up to 38 !
+--------------------------------------+
If the entered IDI is already connected to data terminal
equipment the DSP length cannot exceed the length of the
subaddressing. This subaddressing is defined by the operator
when the CR X25DTE command is entered.
LOCADR LOCAL ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the local address name in an OSI data network
if a remote OSI address is to be defined.
Notes:
- In the case of remote addresses, the previously defined local OSI
address of the partner application has to be specified.
NET NETWORK
This parameter specifies in which network the address will be created.
The following networks are available: ISDN, X25 and X25LC.
The network entered for this parameter has to be compatible with the
value of AFI data unit in NSADR parameter.
E N D
CR OSIADR-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OSI ADDRESSES
This command displays information about address names or all defined
address names.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OSIADR : ADRNAM= [,NET=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
defined by CR OSIADR.
NET NETWORK
This parameter specifies the name of the network whose contents are to
be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OSIADR-1 -
MOD OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY OSI ADDRESSES
This command modifies either the AFI, or the IDI, or the DSP or the
IDP (AFI and IDI) as a part of the NSAP (Network Service Access
Point).
Input format
-
] ]
] MOD OSIADR : ADRNAM= ,NSADR= ,NNSADR= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an address.
Notes:
- The first three characters must be "OSI".
NSADR ADRVAL NET SERV ACC POINT
This parameter specifies the NSAP (Network Service Access Point)
address value in the format: AFI-IDI-DSP. AFI (Authority and Format
Identifier), IDI (Initiator Domain Identifier) and DSP (Domain
Specific Part) are data units. The AFI and IDI parts together are
known as IDP (Initial Domain Part). The NSAP was previously created
with CR OSIADR command.
a-b[-c]
AFI-IDI-DSP. The address was previously created.
The AFI values are dependent on the NET parameter.
Compatibilities:
-NET = X25 : AFI = 36, 37, 52, 53.
-NET = ISDN : AFI = 44, 45, 58, 59.
-NET = X25LC : AFI = 48.
the NSAP (Network Service Access Point) address format :
AFI value:
-------------------------------------------------
! value ! --------------------------------------!
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 36,37 ! 14 ! No !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 52,53 ! 14 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 44,45 ! 15 ! No !
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OSIADR-1 +
MOD OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 58,59 ! 15 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 48 ! 1 (=0) ! --- !
-------------------------------------------------
The NSAP was previously created with CR OSIADR command.
(Network Service Access Point) address format: AFI-IDI-DSP.
The values entered for DSP are dependent on the AFI value:
----------------------------------------
! AFI ! DSP !
! value !------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
----------------------------------------
The NSAP was previously created with CR OSIADR command.
NNSADR NEW ADRVAL NET SERV ACC POINT
This parameter specifies the new NSAP address value in the format
AFI-IDI-DSP. AFI (Authority and Format Identifier), IDI (Initiator
Domain Identifier) DSP (Domain Specific Part) are data units. The AFI
and IDI parts together are known as IDP (Initial Domain Part).
a-b[-c]
AFI-IDI-DSP.
The AFI values are dependent on the NET parameter.
Compatibilities:
-NET = X25 : AFI = 36, 37, 52, 53.
-NET = ISDN : AFI = 44, 45, 58, 59.
-NET = X25LC : AFI = 48.
AFI value:
-------------------------------------------------
! value ! --------------------------------------!
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 36,37 ! 14 ! No !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 52,53 ! 14 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 44,45 ! 15 ! No !
MOD OSIADR-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD OSIADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 58,59 ! 15 ! Yes !
!-------!--------------!------------------------!
! 48 ! 1 (=0) ! --- !
-------------------------------------------------
(Network Service Access Point) address format:
AFI-IDI-DSP. The values entered for DSP are dependent on
the AFI value:
----------------------------------------
! AFI ! DSP !
! value !------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
!-------!------------------------------!
----------------------------------------
If the IDI is already connected to a data terminal equipment
the new DSP length can not exceed the subaddressing length
defined during the entered of CR X25DTE command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD OSIADR-3 -
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OSI TRACER
This command activates the OSI tracer.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OSITRAC : <CONT= ,COLCON=> [,BODDAT=] [,STORE=] ]
] ]
] [,STACON=] [,STPCON=] [,STPAFT=] [,BODLEN=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CONT CONTINUE DATA TRACE
This parameter specifies whether a trace is continued with the previous
parameter values, or whether a new trace is started, with default
values being used for all those parameters for which no specific
values are entered.
NO TAKE DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES
Input of NO, N or no input at all:
default values are used for all parameters for
which no value is specified.
N TAKE DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES
See NO.
YES TAKE OLD PARAMETER VALUES
Input YES OR Y :
The trace is continued with the previous parameter
values, unless other values are specified.
Y TAKE OLD PARAMETER VALUES
See YES.
COLCON COLLECT CONDITIONS
This parameter determines the conditions that trace data must fulfill
in order to be collected. Up to 6 collect conditions may be specified.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: LAYER NAME
X ALL LAYERS
L31 LAYER 3.1
L32A LAYER 3.2 ADMINISTRATION
L32P LAYER 3.2 PROTOCOL
L4 LAYER 4
L5 LAYER 5
L6 LAYER 6
L7A L7 ASSOC. CRTL. SERV. ELEMENTS
L7B L7 SMML SERVER
L7C L7 CMISE
L7F L7 FILE TRANSFER ACC. & MANAG.
L7H L7 HOT OP SERVER
L7Q L7 Q3 ASSOCIATION SERVER
Q3ED Q3 EN-/DECODER
L7R L7 ROSE
L7S L7 SAS SERVER
L7T L7 MMLCM SERVER
This unit specifies the trace data source, i. e. the layer
identification.
Default: X
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OSITRAC-1 +
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TRACE POINTS
X ALL TRACEPOINTS
TP1 TRACEPOINT 1
TP2 TRACEPOINT 2
TP3 TRACEPOINT 3
TP4 TRACEPOINT 4
TP5 TRACEPOINT 5
TP6 TRACEPOINT 6
TP12 TRACEPOINTS 1 AND 2
TP34 TRACEPOINTS 3AND 4
TP123 TRACEPOINTS 1, 2 AND 3
TP1234 TRACEPOINTS 1, 2, 3 AND 4
TP12345 TRACEPOINTS 1, 2, 3, 4 AND 5
This unit specifies the trace points to be activated. For every
layer, a maximum of 6 trace points can be defined.
Default: X
c: EVENT NAME=
This unit specifies the event to be traced. A name of up to 8
characters in accordance with the meaning in the associated
ACT OSITRAC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
layer can be input.
Entry of X or no entry specifies all events.
unit values.
d: STATUS NAME=
This unit specifies the status of the layer to be traced.
A name of up to 8 characters in accordance with the meaning in
the associated layer description can be input.
unit values.
BODDAT COLLECT DATA BODY
This parameter determines the body of the trace data
to be collected. COLCON corresponds to BODDAT, i.e. the
first parameter argument of COLCON refers to the first parameter
argument of BODDAT etc.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ALTERNATIVE BODY DATA
N TAKE DELIVERED BODY DATA
Y ALTERNATIVE BODY DATA DEMANDED
This unit specifies the type of body data to be collected.
b: MODULE NAME=
This unit specifies the module that contains the body data to
be collected.
c: ADDRESS OFFSET=
0...F4240, range of hexadecimal numbers
This unit specifies the offset of the body data relative to the
module begin.
d: LENGTH OF BODY DATA=
This unit specifies the length of body data.
STORE TRACE DATA STORAGE
This parameter specifies the medium for trace data storage and the
type of usage.
a[-b]
a: STORAGE MEDIUM
MEM MEMORY STORAGE
Data are stored in memory.
DISK DISK FILE STORAGE
Data are stored in a disk file
(name:JOSIT.TRACEDATA).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OSITRAC-3 +
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: DATA STORE USAGE
CYCL CYCLIC USAGE
When the store is full the oldest trace data are
overwritten.
NONCYCL NON CYCLIC USAGE
The OSI tracer deactivates itself when the store
is full.
STACON START CONDITIONS
This parameter specifies the start conditions.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: LAYER NAME
X ALL LAYERS
L31 LAYER 3.1
L4 LAYER 4
L5 LAYER 5
L6 LAYER 6
L7B L7 SMML SERVER
L7C L7 CMISE
Q3ED Q3 EN-/DECODER
L7R L7 ROSE
L7S L7 SAS SERVER
L7T L7 MMLCM SERVER
identification.
Default: X
b: TRACE POINTS
X ALL TRACEPOINTS
TP1 TRACEPOINT 1
TP2 TRACEPOINT 2
TP3 TRACEPOINT 3
TP4 TRACEPOINT 4
TP5 TRACEPOINT 5
TP6 TRACEPOINT 6
ACT OSITRAC-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: X
c: EVENT NAME=
layer description can be input.
unit values.
d: STATUS NAME=
unit values.
STPCON STOP CONDITIONS
This parameter specifies the stop conditions.
In contrast to the start conditions, no input means no stop conditions.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: LAYER NAME
X ALL LAYERS
L31 LAYER 3.1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OSITRAC-5 +
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L4 LAYER 4
L5 LAYER 5
L6 LAYER 6
L7B L7 SMML SERVER
L7C L7 CMISE
Q3ED Q3 EN-/DECODER
L7R L7 ROSE
L7S L7 SAS SERVER
L7T L7 MMLCM SERVER
identification.
Default: X
b: TRACE POINTS
X ALL TRACEPOINTS
TP1 TRACEPOINT 1
TP2 TRACEPOINT 2
TP3 TRACEPOINT 3
TP4 TRACEPOINT 4
TP5 TRACEPOINT 5
TP6 TRACEPOINT 6
ACT OSITRAC-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ACT OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: X
c: EVENT NAME=
unit values.
d: STATUS NAME=
unit values.
STPAFT STOP AFTER STOP CONDITIONS
This parameter specifies the number of data records to be collected
after the stop conditions are fulfilled. These data records are not
selected by the collect conditions.
BODLEN BODY LENGTH
This parameter specifies a uniform trace data record body
length. This may be useful, for example, if only the
data record headers (BODLEN=0) are required.
The record will be collected if the layer software delivers
less than BODLEN bytes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OSITRAC-7 -
DISP OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OSI TRACE DATA
This command displays the "environment", i. e. the data records
surrounding the data record specified under CURRNO.
If the tracer is active the command is ignored and the message
"TRACER IS RUNNING" is displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OSITRAC : [CURRNO=] [,DIRECT=] [,NUMDAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
CURRNO CURRENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the current number of the data record whose
environment is checked. If the parameter is omitted, the environment
of the first data record in the trace data store is displayed.
DIRECT DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the data records to be displayed.
BOTH BOTH DIRECTIONS
Data records before and after the data record
specified by CURRNO are displayed.
UP DATA RECORDS BEFORE
Data records before the data record specified by
CURRNO are displayed.
DOWN DATA RECORDS AFTER
Data records after the data record specified by
CURRNO are displayed.
Default: BOTH
NUMDAT NUMBER OF DATA RECORDS
This parameter determines the number of data records to be displayed.
Default: 5
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OSITRAC-1 -
DMP OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP OSI TRACE DATA
This command enables a rough selection of trace data records according to the
parameter inputs.
If the tracer is active the command will be ignored and the message
"TRACER IS RUNNING" will be displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DMP OSITRAC : [MATCH=] [,CEPI=] [,NUMDAT=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
MATCH MATCH CONDITIONS
This parameter specifies trace data to be displayed. Its structure
corresponds to STACON and STPCON in the command ACT OSITRAC.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: LAYER NAME
X ALL LAYERS
L31 LAYER 3.1
L4 LAYER 4
L5 LAYER 5
L6 LAYER 6
L7B L7 SMML SERVER
L7C L7 CMISE
Q3ED Q3 EN-/DECODER
L7R L7 ROSE
L7S L7 SAS SERVER
L7T L7 MMLCM SERVER
identification.
Default: X
b: TRACE POINTS
X ALL TRACEPOINTS
TP1 TRACEPOINT 1
TP2 TRACEPOINT 2
TP3 TRACEPOINT 3
TP4 TRACEPOINT 4
TP5 TRACEPOINT 5
TP6 TRACEPOINT 6
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP OSITRAC-1 +
DMP OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: X
c: EVENT NAME=
unit values.
d: STATUS NAME=
unit values.
CEPI CONNECTION ENDPOINT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the connection endpoint identifier for
selection of data belonging to special connections.
DMP OSITRAC-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DMP OSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: FIRST NUMBER OF CONNECTION ENDPOINT IDENTIFIER=
unit values.
b: SECOND NUMBER OF CONNECTION ENDPOINT IDENTIFIER=
unit values.
NUMDAT NUMBER OF DATA RECORDS
This parameter determines the number of data records to be displayed.
Default: 15
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DMP OSITRAC-3 -
DISP OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OSS DATA
This command displays all current operator service
system data on the printer terminal.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OSSDAT ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OSSDAT-1 -
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER OPERATOR SERVICE SYSTEM DATA
This command enters the office data of the operator. The current
operator office data are replaced by values which are entered with
this command. For parameters which are not defined, the old values
remain valid.
Input format
-
] ]
] ENTR OSSDAT : <PIPNAT= ,PIPINT= ,PIPTIM= ,PIPNOT= ,PCTI= ]
] ]
] ,ACCMOD= ,DISTHR= ,LGFTHR= ,MONSEP= ,AUTPRI= ]
] ]
] ,FCHAPH1= ,FCHAPH2= ,FCHATIM= ,FORCANS= ]
] ]
] ,CHBOEXT= ,CHINCRD= ,CHOUTRD= ,COMONINT= ]
] ]
] ,SUPERAUT= ,PRTC= ,TIRACT= ,TIMTIR= ,LANG= ]
] ]
] ,SAVEBKGS= ,SWRE12= ,SWRE13= ,SWRE14= ,SWRE15= ]
] ]
] ,SWRE16= ,SWRE17= ,TIMRES1= ,TIMRES2=> ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PIPNAT PIP TONE NATIONAL
This parameter specifies the basic time interval for the
piping tone fade-in for a national call.
Notes:
- When this interval has expired, a piping tone is faded
in for a national call.
a-b
a: BASIC PIP TONE INSERTION NATIONAL=
This value means the basic interval for the insertion of piping
b: OVERTIME PIP TONE INSERTION NATIONAL=
This value means the overtime interval for the insertion of pipi
PIPINT PIP TONE INTERNATIONAL
This parameter specifies the basic time interval for an
international call.
Notes:
- When this interval has expired, a piping tone is faded in.
a-b
a: BASIC PIP TONE INSERTION INTERNATIONAL=
This value means the basic time rate for piping tone.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OSSDAT-1 +
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OVERTIME PIP TONE INSERTION INTERNATIONAL=
This value means the overtime interval for the insertion of pipi
PIPTIM PIP TONE LEAD TIME
This parameter specifies the piping tone fade-in time.
Notes:
- This time specifies the time interval between the fading-in
of the piping tone and the end of the charge period which
this piping tone signals.
PIPNOT NOTIFY BY PIP TONE
This parameter specifies the ability of an operator to notify the
parties involved in a call by a piping tone.
At the request of one of the parties involved in a call the operator
marks this call for notification.
Notes:
- This notification is done by a piping tone.
NO NO NOTIFICATION BY PIPTONE
YES NOTIFICATION BY PIPTONE
PCTI POST CALL TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the post-call time interval.
Notes:
- This interval specifies the time span between the
operators floating, parking or release of a call and
the presentation of a new call to the operator.
ACCMOD ACCEPTANCE MODE
This parameter specifies the call acceptance mode.
Notes:
- The call acceptance mode specifies the type of presentation
of a call to the operator (automatic or manual acceptance).
MANUAL MANUAL CALL ACCEPTANCE
Manual call acceptance
AUTO AUTOMATIC CALL ACCEPTANCE
Automatic call acceptance
DISTHR DISABLE THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold value for the operator
disable.
Notes:
- This threshold value specifies the interval between the
disabling of an operator and the transition to a disabled
state.
ENTR OSSDAT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LGFTHR LOGOFF THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold value for the
operator logoff.
Notes:
- This threshold value specifies the interval between
the disabled state of an operator and the transition
to the logoff state.
This parameter specifies
whether the currency in which the charges of this office are
calculated has a decimal subdivision.
NO NO SEPARATOR PRESENT
YES SEPARATOR PRESENT
This parameter specifies the automatic charge notification,
which specifies the charge data for the automatic charge
message.
a-b-c
This parameter specifies that forced charging of A-OP-B-conversation,
will be done after a certain time is passed.
NO NO FORCED CHARGING PHASE 1
YES FORCED CHARGING PHASE 1
This parameter specifies that forced charging of a A-OP-B-Conversation
will be done, if the operator again enters an existing conversation and
a certain time is passed.
NO NO FORCED CHARGING PHASE 2
YES FORCED CHARGING PHASE 2
This parameter specifies the time after that the forced charging
starts.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OSSDAT-3 +
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the ability of simulating a missed B-Party
Answer-Line-Signal to start the timing for charging.
NO NO FORCED ANSWER ACTIVE
YES FORCED ANSWER ACTIVE
CHBOEXT CHARGEABLE B-OPR. EXTENTION
This parameter specifies whether the charging of an outgoing B-Operator
extention will be done.
NO NO CHARGEABLE B-OPR EXTENTION
YES CHARGEABLE B-OPR EXTENTION
This parameter specifies whether the charging of incoming
ringdown line for answer B will be started in case the operator doesnt
start the timer for it.
NO NO CHARGING
YES CHARGING
This parameter specifies whether the charging of outgoing
ringdown line will be started in case the call is parked and the
operator does not start the timer for it.
NO NO CHARGING
YES CHARGING
COMONINT CONVERS.MONITOR INTRUSION TONE
This parameter specifies the ability of inserting an intrusion tone,
whenever the operator listens to a conversation.
NO NO CONV.MONITOR INTRUSION TONE
YES CONV.MONITOR INTRUSION TONE
SUPERAUT SUPERVISOR AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization of a supervisor for
handling of operator data.
NO NO SUPERVISOR AUTHORIZATION
YES SUPERVISOR AUTHORIZATION
PRTC PRESENT T&C CALLS TO OPERATOR
This parameter specifies which kind of T&C-Calls will be
presented to the operator.
ALL ALL T&C CALLS
ENTR OSSDAT-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHARGE CHARGEABLE T&C CALLS
TIRACT TICKET RETRIEVAL ACTIVE
This parameter specifies the activation of Ticket Retrieval Function.
NO NO ACTIVATION OF TICKET RETR.
YES ACTIVATION OF TICKET RETR.
TIMTIR TIMER TICKET RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the Ticket Retrieval Stay Time in hours.
LANG VALID OSS LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the valid OSS-system language.
SAVEBKGS SAVE BOOKINGS
This parameter activates the saving of bookings for system upgrade.
NO
YES
SWRE12 RESERVE SWITCH BYTE:1 BIT:2
Software switch for future development.
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ENTR OSSDAT-5 +
ENTR OSSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO
YES
NO
YES
TIMRES1 RESERVE TIMER 1
Reserve timer for future development.
TIMRES2 RESERVE TIMER 2
Reserve timer for future development.
E N D
ENTR OSSDAT-6 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
COPY OSSFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY OSS FILE
This command copies the OSS traffic data from disk to tape.
Input format
-
] ]
] COPY OSSFILE ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 COPY OSSFILE-1 -
ACT OUTDIV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION
This command diverts the output of subsequent jobs to a disk file.
Some or all of the output can be displayed on the affected terminal.
The diversion remains in effect during a session until the command
is entered again or the diversion is deactivated.
If the command ACT OUTDIV is in a command file, the following is valid:
- it remains in effect until the command is entered again or until
DEC OUTDIV is entered from the command file.
- in a command file addressed from this command file (lower level)
it remains in effect until the command ACT OUTDIV/DEC OUTDIV is
entered from the lower level command file. When the higher level command
file is entered, the last ACT OUTDIV/DEC OUTDIV entered there
remains in effect.
- otherwise the command is valid up to the end of the command file.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OUTDIV : FILE= [,VSN=] [,SIZE=] [,MODE=] [,ACKIN=] ]
] ]
] [,ACKCF=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the output target file.
The name must begin with "PT." (function code for list files).
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the disk
on which the diversion file is to be created.
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the number of PAM pages to be reserved.
Compatibilities:
- The Parameter SIZE must be given as following:
MODE = CR (Optional) : SIZE must be given
MODE = OVWR : SIZE may be given
MODE = EXT : SIZE must not be given
MODE MODE
This parameter specifies whether a new diversion file is to
be created, or whether the existing file is to be overwritten
or continued.
CR CREATE FILE
OVWR OVERWRITE FILE
EXT EXTEND FILE
Default: CR
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OUTDIV-1 +
ACT OUTDIV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACKIN ADDITIONAL DISPLAY -INPUT MODE
This parameter specifies how much of the output is to be
displayed on the source terminal when command jobs are executed
from dialog input.
ALL ALL
Default: CMDERR
ACKCF ADDITIONAL DISPLAY OF CMD FILE
This parameter specifies how much of the output is to be
displayed additionally at the source terminal when command
jobs are executed from command files.
ALL ALL
ERROR ERROR ACKNOWLEDGE
NONE NONE
Default: ERROR
E N D
ACT OUTDIV-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DEC OUTDIV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION
This command deactivates output diversion. If entered in dialog, the
output diversion is entirely canceled.
Input format
-
] ]
] DEC OUTDIV : [STD=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
STD STANDARD
In connection with commands from a command file, this parameter
specifies whether output diversion is to be cancelled generally
(STD=Y) or whether it is to be reset to that of the next higher
level (STD=N).
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DEC OUTDIV-1 -
ACT OUTSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
This command activates output suppression. All messages linked to a
message group which is assigned to the wastepaper basket are suppressed.
The waste paper basket has its original function.
Input format
-
] ]
] ACT OUTSUP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 ACT OUTSUP-1 -
DACT OUTSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
This command deactivates the output suppression.
All messages linked to a message group assigned to the wastepaper
basket are no longer suppressed. They are either displayed on a local
or remote output device.
Prerequisite:
- The output suppression must be activated.
- The output device must have been created with:
CR FUOMT, CR AFILE, CR PRO or possibly CR APPL.
Input format
-
] ]
] - ]
] ]LOCDEV=] ]
] DACT OUTSUP : -REMDEV= ; ]
] ] ] ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
a-b
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter designates an output device in the processor network.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DACT OUTSUP-1 -
DISP OUTSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
This command displays whether or not output suppression is active.
If output suppression is not active, the assigned output devices are
also displayed.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OUTSUP ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OUTSUP-1 -
DISP OVLD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OVERLOAD
This command specifies if an overload state exists in the coordination
processor CP or in the line trunk groups LTG. The LTGs to be tested
may be selected.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP OVLD : [LTG=] [,OPL=] ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line/trunk group. Only active LTGs are
displayed. If this parameter is omitted, all active LTGs are
displayed.
a[-b]
unit values.
unit values.
OPL OVERLOAD PRIORITY LEVEL
This parameter specifies the overload priority levels. Overload
priority levels greater than or equal to the entered value are
displayed. If no value is specified, all states are displayed.
A value higher than 0 indicates a lack of memory resources or of
process resources.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP OVLD-1 -
CAN PA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
This command cancels a Primary Rate Access consisting of one
Digital Interface Unit with Primary D-Channel.
Prerequisites:
- A Primary Rate Access with the given name must exist.
- The Primary Rate Access must not be connected anymore.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN PA : PA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
PA NAME OF PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN PA-1 -
CR PA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
This command creates a Primary Rate Access consisting of one
Digital Interface Unit with Primary D-Channel.
Prerequisites:
- A Primary Rate Access with the given name doesnt exist yet.
- The Line Trunk Group and the Digital Interface Unit must exist.
- The type and application of the Digital Interface Unit must be
feasible for the Primary Rate Access.
- The ports of the Digital Interface Unit must not be connected.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CR PA : PA= ,TYPE= ,LTG= ,LTUP= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
This parameter specifies the type (kind of the B Channel assignment)
of the primary rate access.
FIXED FIXED B-CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
FREE FREE B-CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
a-b
LTUP LINE TRUNK UNIT PRIM. D-CH.
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PA-1 -
DISP PA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
This command displays one or all Primary Rate Access of the
exchange. The following data will be output:
- The name of the Primary Rate Access,
- The type of the Primary Rate Access,
- The Line Trunk Group, on which the Primary Rate Access is created,
- The Line Trunk Unit with Primary D-channel, to which the
Primary Rate Access is assigned.
- The Equipment number of the Primary D-Channel.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] DISP PA : PA= - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PA-1 -
TEST PA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST PRIMARY RATE ACCESS
This command starts a function or single loop test.
The function test FUNCTEST, consisting of a loop test at network
termination NT1LOOP, check of network termination power supply and
exchange temination loop test.
The single loop test performs a loop test at network termination
NT1LOOP or at line termination LTLOOP.
The loops can only be inserted when no connection is present.
Therefore, the DIU must first be configured to MBL and established
calls must be force-released. The affected LTG must be in state ACT
or CBL. At present, the test can only be performed with DIU type
D30. The test command is rejected for other DIU types. A complete
test loop job takes about 45 seconds in the worst case. The command is
therefore acknowledged with an "ACCEPTED" message.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] TEST PA : EQN= ,FUNC= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the test object.
a-b-c
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
FUNC TEST FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the test function, a function or single loop
test.
FUNCTEST FUNCTION TEST
NT1LOOP LOOP ON NETWORK TERMINATION 1
LTLOOP LOOP ON LINE TERMINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 TEST PA-1 -
DISP PACHSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY PA CHANNEL STATUS
- the sum of the D-channel transactions on a primary rate access (PA)
- the number of call diversions for a primary rate access
- for each B-channel: the maintenance status of the B-channel
: the number of transactions in the B-channel
: the service for the seized B-channel.
Prerequisites:
- The primary rate access must be ready for operation.
- The line/trunk group (LTG) must be in operating state active/conditionally
blocked.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP PACHSTAT : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the primary rate
access.
a-b-c
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PACHSTAT-1 -
DISP PAFAULT
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY PA FAULT
This command causes all current fault information stored in
the CP to be output for a specified PA and/or a specified
fault type. The PA must be assigned to one DIU only. If the
DIU is not of type DIU30D, the command is rejected.
1. DISP PAFAULT - ALL ALL
2. DISP PAFAULT - ALLPA ALL PA
3. DISP PAFAULT - SPEC SPECIFIED
1. Input format
ALL
Input format for displaying all faults present in the specified PA.
-
] ]
] DISP PAFAULT : EQN= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number. If only
parameter EQN is specified, all recorded faults for the
specified PA are output.
a-b-c
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PAFAULT-1 +
DISP PAFAULT
ALLPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ALL PA
Input format for displaying all PAs which indicate the given faults.
-
] ]
] DISP PAFAULT : TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the fault type. If only parameter
TYPE is specified, data are output for all PAs subject to
the specified fault.
AISNT1U2 AIS NT1 TO U2M
AISPUFRM AIS IN PULSE FRAME
ALCNTOFL ALARM COUNTER OVERFLOW
BERGEXP3 BIT ERR. RATIO GREATER 10EXP-3
CDVIOLER CODE VIOLATION ERROR
DALARM D-ALARM
DCHSGDST D-CHANNEL SIGNALING DISTURBED
DCHSGNFA D-CHANNEL SIGNALING FAULT
LOSINSIG LOSS OF INCOMING SIGNAL
LOSNT1S2 LOSS OF SIGNAL NT1 TO S2M
LOSNT1U2 LOSS OF SIGNAL NT1 TO U2M
LSPFRMAL LOSS OF PULSE FRAME ALIGNMENT
MNCLSDLP MANUALLY CLOSED LOOP
NT1POWFA NT1 POWER SUPPLY FAULT
RBEREXP6 LAST OCCUR. RECEIV. BER>10EX-6
TBEREXP6 LAST OCCUR. TRANSM. BER>10EX-6
DISP PAFAULT-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PAFAULT
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SPECIFIED
Input format for displaying a given fault from the specified PA.
-
] ]
] DISP PAFAULT : EQN= ,TYPE= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number. If only
parameter EQN is specified, all recorded faults for the
specified PA are output.
a-b-c
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the fault type. If only parameter
TYPE is specified, data are output for all PAs subject to
the specified fault.
AISNT1U2 AIS NT1 TO U2M
AISPUFRM AIS IN PULSE FRAME
ALCNTOFL ALARM COUNTER OVERFLOW
BERGEXP3 BIT ERR. RATIO GREATER 10EXP-3
CDVIOLER CODE VIOLATION ERROR
DALARM D-ALARM
DCHSGDST D-CHANNEL SIGNALING DISTURBED
DCHSGNFA D-CHANNEL SIGNALING FAULT
LOSINSIG LOSS OF INCOMING SIGNAL
LOSNT1S2 LOSS OF SIGNAL NT1 TO S2M
LOSNT1U2 LOSS OF SIGNAL NT1 TO U2M
LSPFRMAL LOSS OF PULSE FRAME ALIGNMENT
MNCLSDLP MANUALLY CLOSED LOOP
NT1POWFA NT1 POWER SUPPLY FAULT
RBEREXP6 LAST OCCUR. RECEIV. BER>10EX-6
TBEREXP6 LAST OCCUR. TRANSM. BER>10EX-6
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PAFAULT-3 -
DISP PASTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY PA LINK STATISTICS
This command is used to display the counts of the total number of
transmitted and errored frames in the receive direction.
Input format
-
] ]
] DISP PASTAT : EQN= ,RESET= ; ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the PA.
a-b-c
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
RESET RESET LINK STATISTICS COUNTERS
This parameter specifies whether the counters in the GP should be
reset.
NO NO RESET OF LINK STAT. COUNT.
YES RESET OF LINK STATIS. COUNTERS
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PASTAT-1 -
CAN PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL PBX
This command cancels a PBX. Incoming calls are either connected to a NU tone
(number unobtainable) or are diverted to the announcement entered when the
PBX is cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- All lines of the PBX are cancelled.
- The directory number volume is unique or the local area code must be entered.
- The local area code and/or directory number exist and are assigned
to a PBX.
- No data tables exist which are not administered by subscriber/line/PBX
commands.
- For the update a note-book entry must be available.
Input format
-
] ]
] ;- ]
] CAN PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,INCEPT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple
DN volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the PBX.
a[-b]
Incoming calls are diverted to announcement for
modified directory numbers.
CHGDNIND ANNOUNCEMENT CHANGED DN
Incoming calls are diverted to an individual
announcement.
Dependent on the data administered with command
CR INC the number will be either interpreted as
the new directory number of the PBX or it
will be used to determine the announcement text
provided by the announcement machine.
b: NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CAN PBX-1 +
CAN PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
CAN PBX-2 - P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE PBX
This command creates private branch exchanges.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code is compatible with the specified directory number.
- The specified directory number exists but is not assigned.
- The specified features are compatible with each other.
- The prerequisites for the specified features exist.
- The specified features are compatible with the country code.
- A sufficient number of free storage elements is available.
1. CR PBX - FRAMEHD CREATE A FRAME HANDLER
2. CR PBX - IP CREATE AN INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL
3. CR PBX - NORMPBX CREATE AN ANALOG/MIXED/ISDN PBX
4. CR PBX - PASLAVE CREATE A PRIMARY RATE ACCESS SLAVE
5. CR PBX - PHI CREATE A PACKET HANDLER
6. CR PBX - QSIG CREATE A PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
7. CR PBX - RSN CREATE A REMOTE SERVICE NUMBER
1. Input format
CREATE A FRAME HANDLER
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,BLK=] ]
] ]
] [,TRARSTR=] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a PBX.
The directory number must be within the created DN.
Notes:
- Only directory numbers consisting entirely of decimal
digits can be directly dialed.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-1 +
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE PBX TYPE
This parameter specifies the PBX type.
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER
Specifies a PBX as Frame Handler.
Administration of LTGH. This LTGH concentrates
the D-channel information of the subscribers to
the EWSP-switch.
Notes:
- Creation of more than one PBX with TYPE=FRAMEHD
within one switch will be rejected.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line. Incoming
(xIC) refers to lines coming to the switch from a PBX. Outgoing (xOG)
refers to lines going from the switch to the PBX.
All input group-specific parameters, e.g. DIAL, GCOS, apply to
each input OPMODE where appropriate. Omitted group-specific
parameters will be provided with default values if appropriate.
Defaults:
- ABW, AOG and AIC are set, if no SERV and no OPMODE
is entered.
- IBW, IOG and IIC are set, if at least one ISDN-SERV
in accordance with CCITT-Recommendation Bluebook and no
OPMODE is entered.
- ABW, AOG, AIC, IBW, IOG and IIC are set, if the
SERV= ANALOG and a Bluebook-SERV is entered.
(and no OPMODE is entered).
- IBW, IOG and IIC are set, if TYPE=PHI or PASLAVE
or IP and no OPMODE is entered.
- IBW is set, if TYPE=FRAMEHD and no OPMODE is entered.
Notes:
- The Redbook-SERVs/Bluebook-SERVs assigned for the office
can be displayed with command DISP CALLPOPT.
[IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
- Services entered in the command to create an ISDN-PBX
will be check against the services allowed for the office.
If a service is entered which is not allowed for the office
then the command will be terminated with appropriate error
message; otherwise all entered services will be assigned
for the PBX. The allowed services (depending on CCITT-
Recommendation Redbook resp. Bluebook and OPMODE,TYPE)
- If no services are entered in the command to create an
ISDN-PBX then the standard services for the office will be
assigned. The standard services assigned for the office can
be displayed with command DISP CALLPOPT.
ALLGRP - ALL SERVICE GROUP
]ANALOG ] ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
]CMAUDIO ] CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
]CMAUDI7K] CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
]CMSPEECH] CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
]CMUNRST ] CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
]FAX4 ] TELEFAX GROUP 4
]NONVCGRP] NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
]PMBCHANN] PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
]PMBDCHAN] PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
]PMDCHANN] PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
CR PBX-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]TEL3K ] TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
]TEL7K ] TELEPHONY 7KHZ
]TTX64K ] TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
] ] Telex 64 kilobits per second.
]VIDEOTEL] VIDEO TELEPHONY
]VIDEOTEX] VIDEO TEXT
~VOICEGRP- VOICE SERVICE GROUP
BLK BLOCKING ADMINISTRATIVE
ACCSPORI- ACCOUNT SUSPENSION ORIGINATING
] ] Originating calls blocked.
] ] Calls are diverted to an intercept via the
] ] intercept identifier table (see DISP INC).
]ACCSPTER] ACCOUNT SUSPENSION TERMINATING
] ] Terminating calls blocked.
~ACCSUSP - ACCOUNT SUSPENSION
All calls blocked, equivalent to ACCSPTER and
ACCSPORI. Calls are diverted to an intercept via
the intercept identifier table (see DISP INC).
ADMIN -- ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
]] ]] Calls are diverted to an intercept via the
]] ]] intercept identifier table (see DISP INC).
]]ADMIN1 ]] ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK 1
]- ] Calls are diverted to an intercept via the
~ADMIN3 '- ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK 3
Calls are diverted to an intercept via the
intercept identifier table (see DISP INC).
TRARSTR TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
REQSPORI- SUB REQUESTED ORIG. CALL SUSP.
] ] Calls from subscriber are diverted to an intercept
] ] via the intercept identifier table.
] ] (See DISP INC).
~REQSPTER- SUB REQUESTED TERM. CALL SUSP.
Calls to subscriber are diverted to an intercept
via the intercept identifier table.
(See DISP INC).
This parameter defines minimum and maximum length of the directory
number used to determine dial end for PBXs with direct dialing. Dial
end is reached after entering the maximum number of digits or, after
the minimum number of digits have been entered, it is determined by
a time-out procedure.
The minimum may not exceed the maximum. The maximum and the
minimum may not be less than the length of the pilot directory
number.
Notes:
- MIN will be set to the length of the pilot directory number
(i.e. DN of the PBX) unless another value is entered.
- MIN will be set in case of directory number economy: length of
DN-1
unless another value is entered.
- MAX is set to 24 unless another value is entered.
Incomptibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-3 +
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: MIN. LENGTH OF DN=
b: MAX. LENGTH OF DN=
DINO DIGIT NUMBER FOR HOLDING
This parameter is only relevant for PBXs with direct inward dialing.
In order to avoid unnecessary B-side seizures, lines are only seized
after, in addition to the digits of DN respectively of
DN-1 in case of DN-economy, the specified number of digits
have been received.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
ACTDGMB - DIG. GAMB ACTIVATION
] ] Activation of digital group make busy.
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
~ADMIN - ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
Administrative subscriber block.
DLYDIAL -- DELAY DIALING
]] ]] Indicates that signalling may start
]- ] after a defined time period.
]]IMMDIAL ]] IMMEDIATE DIALING
]] ]] Indicates that signalling will
]] ]] start immediately.
~WINKDIAL'- WINK START DIALING
Indicates that signalling will start
upon a wink from the PBX.
HUNT HUNTING PROCEDURE
Notes:
- NONSEQ will be set for the OPMODEs
AOG, IBW, IOG unless another value is entered.
- SEQSRCH will be set for the OPMODE = ABW, unless another
value is entered.
NONSEQ -- RANDOM / NON SEQUENTIAL SEARCH
]] ]] No sequential search is performed. The lines
]] ]] will be queued in the idle list when they
]] ]] become free. The FIFO principle is applied.
]] ]] NONSEQ is incompatible with DCAHUNT.
]] ]]
]] ]] Incompatibilities:
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]]SEQSRCH ]] SEQUENTIAL SEARCH
]] ]] If the pilot DN is dialed, the search starts
]] ]] with the first line (LNO=1) in the OPMODE.
]- ] If the LSN (COS=DCAHUNT) is dialed, the
]] ]] search starts with the corresponding line
]] ]] number and ends at the line with the highest
CR PBX-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] number (LNO=max).
]] ]] But for traffic observation the counter is
]] ]] updated only for successful calls on this
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] - HUNT=SEQSRCH is incompatible with a PBXLN
]] ]] with CAT=IPABCH and OPMODE=IBW
~UCD '- UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
The search starts after the line which
was seized for the previous call.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- HUNT=UCD is incompatible with a PBXLN
with CAT=IPABCH and OPMODE=IBW
SSDI START POSITION DIGITS TO SEND
This parameter specifies from which digit on the dial information must
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
- SSDI will be set to the length of the pilot directory
number + 1 (i.e. DN of the PBX);
in case of directory number economy: length of DN.
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
EOS END OF SELECTION
Notes:
- SIGN will be set for the OPMODEs
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
unless another value ist entered and DIAL is
not NOTDIAL.
PROG -- EOS OVER TRUNK-SEND NO SIGNAL
]] ]] Only relevant for direct dial PBX groups. Dial end
]] ]] is determined by time-out, after the minimum
]] ]] number of digits or when the maximum number of
]] ]] digits has been dialed.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] - DIAL= NOTDIAL
~SIGN '- EOS PROGRAMMED-SEND NO SIGNAL
Only relevant for direct dial PBX groups. Dial end
must be signaled from B-side.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-5 +
CR PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] Specifies length of time-out for clearing
]] ]] connection after call termination.
]] ]] See TLIM=CLEATM1
]] ]] No time-out for clearing connections.
]] ]] This value will not be displayed.
Connections are released immediately when clear
back signal is received.
CONVTM0 -- NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
]] ]] No limit on duration of calls.
]]CONVTM1 ]] CONVERSATION TIME 1
]] ]] Limit on duration of calls.
]] ]] See TLIM=CONVTM1
]-CONVTM3 ] CONVERSATION TIME 3
~CONVTM7 '- CONVERSATION TIME 7
See TLIM=CONVTM1
]] ]] Limit for interdigit time during dialing.
]] ]] See TLIM=DIALTM1
No limit on interdigit dial time.
This value will not be displayed.
RINGTM0 -- NO RING TIME LIMIT
]] ]] No limit on the ring duration.
]] ]] Limit on ring duration if called party does not
]] ]] answer.
]- ] See TLIM=RINGTM1
]] ]] See TLIM=RINGTM1
See TLIM=RINGTM1
CR PBX-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE AN INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,CHRG=] ]
] ]
] [,COS=] [,COSDAT=] [,OPN=] [,BLK=] [,TRARSTR=] ]
] ]
] [,OPTRCL=] [,SUBTRCL=] [,DEBCL=] [,ABB=] [,ABURSTR=] ]
] ]
] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] [,SSDI=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,EOS=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
IP INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL
Specifies a PBX as an IP/SN (Intelligent
Peripheral/Service Node).
The feature COS=DDI (Direct Dialling Inward)
will be implicitly set for this type.
Consequent deleting of DDI with MOD PBX will be
rejected.
Defaults:
is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-7 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPMODE is entered.
Notes:
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
~IOG - ISDN OUTGOING
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
CHRG CHARGING
This parameter specifies the charging features.
ACTDEBCL- DET. BILLING CLASS ACTIVATION
] ] Activates detailed call billing according to the
] ] existing billing class.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
]AMAIO ] AMA IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
] ] Automatic message accounting with immediate
] ] output.
CR PBX-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]AOCFC ] AOC FORMAT CURRENCY
] ] Charging data will be displayed in currency
] ] format. Is this value not entered, the data
] ] will be displayed in meterpuls format.
] ] This feature is only allowed for ISDN
] ] objects.
]DEB ] DETAILED BILLING
] ] - CHRG= ACTDEBCL
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
]DEBCLACT] DET. BILLING CLASS ACT. AUTH.
] ] Authorizes activation/deactivation via SCI of
] ] detailed billing according to charge codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] At least one of the following values:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
]DEBCLMOD] DET. BILLING CLASS MOD. AUTH.
] ] Authorizes changes via SCI to the current charge
] ] codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLACT
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
]DEBNC ] DET. BILLING NEXT CALL ONLY
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of detailed billing
] ] for the next call.
] ]
] ] DEB
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
]HANDSET ] SERVICE HANDSET
] ] Subscriber with this feature is marked for
] ] postprocessing.
]IPCHRG ] IP/SN SPECIFIC CHARGING
] ] Flexible charging of IP/SN-based services
] ] via proprietary D-channel messages.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEB
]NCOLCACT] NOCOLC ACTIVATION AUTH.
] ] Authorizes activation, deactivation and status
] ] enquiry of the feature CHRG=NOCOLC via SCI.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - LOAD PARAMETER dependencies exist
] ] (see command DISP LTGRES)
]NOCHARG ] NO CHARGE FOR A-SUBSCRIBER
] ] No charge to calling party (called party feature).
]NOCOLC ] NO I/C COLLECT CALLS ALLOWED
] ] Blocks incoming collect calls.
] ]
] ] Notes:
]PRTSF ] PRINTED RECORD SUB.FAC.
] ] Printed records for subscriber facility are
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - For project OES CHRG=PRTSFAUT is
] ] prerequisite for PRTSF.
~PRTSFAUT- PRINTED RECORD SUB.FAC.AUTH.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-9 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Authorization to print records for subscriber
facility.
CALLPCAT- CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
] ] Calling Party Category and National Calling
] ] Party Category will be delivered.
]CFWCOLDD] COLLECT ALL DIGITS FOR CFW
] ] Collect all digits for Call forwarding.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS = DDI for ISDN objects
] ]
] ] - DIAL = NOTDIAL for analog objects
]CPLFIRST] CONNECT PILOT LINE FIRST
] ] A call to a PBX with this feature will
] ] always use the pilot line ( line with
] ] LSN=DN ) first.
]DDI ] DIRECT DIALING IN AUTH.
] ] Authorization for direct dialing-in.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - This feature isnt allowed for pure
] ] analog PBXs.
]DIVNOOVR] DIVERSION NUMBER OVERWRITE
] ] If Bn user has this feature, the number of
] ] the Bn-1 user will be delivered to the
] ] Bn user.
] ] This feature is only relevant for
] ] TYPE = IP.
]GFRESET ] GENERAL FACILITY RESET AUTH.
] ] The subscriber may reset all facility
] ] activations under his/her control with a single
] ] SCI request.
] ]
]ILNRES ] ISDN LINES RESERVED
] ] All connections with services that can also
] ] be established via analog lines/trunks, are
] ] set up exclusively via analog lines/trunks.
]SEGLAY3 ] SEGMENTATION OF LAYER 3 MSG.
] ] Authorizes segmentation of Layer-3-Messages.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - This feature is only allowed for ISDN PBX.
]SERVINC ] SERVICE INTERCEPT
] ] Incoming calls are directed to a fixed number
] ] defined by the administration, usually an
] ] announcement or switchboard.
~TOLLCAT - TOLL CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY
Authorizes origination of long-distance calls
during catastrophe conditions
entered via ENTR TOLLCAT
even if no trunk line is free. In this case a
forced release will be initiated for a not
authorized connection.
CDCTRL -- CALLED PARTY CONTROL
]- ] Connection is cleared down as soon as called
]] ]] party goes on-hook (called party feature).
~JTCTRL '- JOINT CONTROL
Connections are cleared down only when both
parties go on-hook.
INATNO -- INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
]] ]] The international number will be sent to
]] ]] the called party.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] Prerequisites:
]- ] - COS=DDI
]]NATNO ]] NATIONAL NUMBER
]] ]] The national number will be sent to the
CR PBX-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] called party.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS=DDI
~SUBNO '- SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
The subscriber number will be sent to the
called party.
Prerequisites:
- COS=DDI
FCTPROT - FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
] ] The request of supplementary services
] ] is allowed using the functional
] ] protocol.
] ] see COS=STIPROT
~STIPROT - STIMULUS PROTOCOL
The request of supplementary services
is allowed using the stimulus protocol.
If one of the following values is not entered
on the command to create an ISDN-PBX:
COS=STIPROT
COS=FCTPROT
then the default value(s) specified for the
office will be assigned.
The default values specified for the office
can be determined with command DISP CALLPOPT.
Prerequisites:
- Both protocols (functional and stimulus
protocol) are supported by the network.The
protocols which are supported by the network
LANGU1 -- LANGUAGE 1
]] ]] Language 1 will be used for feature control
]] ]] offline.
]] ]] If no language is specified, the country
]] ]] specific language will be used.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] - The values LANGU1, LANGU2, LANGU3,
]] ]] LANGU4 and SCLANGU overwrite each other.
]]LANGU2 ]] LANGUAGE 2
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]- ] LANGU4 and SCLANGU overwrite each other.
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
~SCLANGU '- SUB. CONTROLLED LANGUAGE
The subscriber is able to choose a language
per subscriber controlled input at the
beginning of each feature control offline
action.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-11 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If no language is specified, the country
specific language will be used.
Notes:
- The values LANGU1, LANGU2, LANGU3,
LANGU4 and SCLANGU overwrite each other.
This parameter specifies the classes of service features
with data.
Notes:
- Overflowattempts will be done in the order:
OVRFIN1 - OVRFIN2 - OVRFIN3 - OVRFEX
If one of these features are not existing, the
attempt is treated like a not successful attempt.
- Shared ABB is only allowed within the same CTX-Group.
This means for command CR PBX, that with Shared ABB
a CTX-object must not be referenced.
a[-b]
SABBD10 -- SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.
]] ]] Authorization to use the one digit abbreviated
]- ] dialing list (ABBD10) of another subscriber.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5
~SABBD5 '- SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.
Authorization to use the one digit abbreviated
dialing list (ABBD5) of another subscriber.
Notes:
- Input of a DN, which is used as additional
number (see command MOD PBX) is not allowed.
- Input of a DN, which is used as public
number for a CTX-group (see command CR CXGRP)
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB =ABBD5
ABBD10
SABBD10T-- SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.2 D.
]] ]] Authorization to use the two digits abbreviated
]] ]] dialing list (ABBD10T) of another subscriber.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]]SABBD100]] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.100 SHORT NO.
]] ]] dialing list (ABBD100) of another subscriber.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]]SABBD20 ]] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.20 SHORT NO.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
CR PBX-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]]SABBD5T ]] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.2 D.
]- ]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] - Input of a DN, which is used as additional
]] ]] number (see command MOD PBX) is not allowed.
]] ]] - Input of a DN, which is used as public
]] ]] number for a CTX-group (see command CR CXGRP)
]] ]] is not allowed.
]] ]]
]] ]] - ABB=ABBD5T,ABBD10T,ABBD20-100
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
Authorization to use the two digits abbreviated
Incompatibilities:
- See SABBD5T
BGID - BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
] ] The business group identification is used for
] ] handling corporate network integrity. It is
] ] provided in the originating exchange, transported
] ] via ISUP to the B-side and compared on the
] ] QSIG access with the business group
] ] identification of the terminating exchange. In
] ] case of different BGID the network integrity is
] ] activated, feature transparency is not
] ] supported and the presentation indicator of the
] ] party number is evaluated.
]CAC ] CARRIER ACCESS CODE
] ] If an A-user has this feature, all his long
] ] distance calls are routed via the entered
] ] Carrier Access Code, unless a Carrier Access
] ] Code is dialled.
]CACMOD ] CARRIER ACCESS CODE MOD. AUTH.
] ] Authorizes administration via SCI of the
] ] Carrier Access Code number.
] ]
] ] - COSDAT=HOTLIMM
~DUAL - DUAL HOMING
This feature enables a PBX to be connected to two
local exchanges.
Notes:
- The second unit has to contain the codepoint for
rerouting.
In case of DN-volume is multiple, the second
unit has to contain the LAC.
- This feature is only allowed for ISDN PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-13 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CUSTID - CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
] ] This number identifies a customer who may
] ] have customer specific features.
] ] Customer is used here in the sense
] ] of a bill paying customer. As the same customer
] ] may use several access points to the network
] ] the same customer identification may be
] ] administered for several objects.
~CUSTROUT- CUSTOMER ROUTING
Activation of Customer dependant routing at
the international gateway.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
b: NUMBER=
HOTLINE (DESTINATION NUMBER): 1..24 digits hexadecimal,
SERCOMP (DESTINATION NUMBER): 1..12 digits hexadecimal,
SABBD5..100 (MASTER NUMBER): 1..12 digits hexadecimal,
CAC (CODE NUMBER): 2..6 digits hexadecimal,
OVRFIN1 (INTERNAL NUMBER 1): 2..12 digits hexadecimal,
OVRFEX (EXTERNAL NUMBER): 2..24 digits hexadecimal,
CUSTID (CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION): 1..999 range of
decimal numbers,
BGID (BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION), 2..16777215
range of decimal numbers;
Notes:
- All identifiers except DNHLMOD, HOTLDEL,
CACMOD and CUSTROUT require a number.
For either DNHLMOD or HOTLDEL a destination
number must be present.
OPN OPERATOR NUMBER
The OPN contains the Pilot Directory number.
Additional digits must be added (maximum 6 digits).
The operator of the private branch exchange can
generally be reached at this directory number.
In case of a directory number economy, the OPN
must contain the PDN without the last digit;
additional digits must be added (maximum 6 digits).
Notes:
- In case of a directory number economy, the first
additional digit must be a digit within the
economy interval.
CR PBX-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTTRACL- TRAF.RESTR. CLASS ACTIVATION
] ] Indicates that traffic restriction for a traffic
] ] class is active.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
]REQSPORI] SUB REQUESTED ORIG. CALL SUSP.
] ] (See DISP INC).
]REQSPTER] SUB REQUESTED TERM. CALL SUSP.
] ] Calls to subscriber are diverted to an intercept
] ] (See DISP INC).
]RSCIAUT ] RESTRICTION FOR SCI AUTH.
] ] Authorizes modification via SCI of SCI traffic
] ] restriction classes.
]RSTSCI1 ] RESTRICTION FOR SCI 1
] ] Traffic restriction for subscriber controlled
] ] inputs class 1.
] ] (See DISP SCFEA).
] ] inputs class 2.
] ] inputs class 3.
] ] inputs class 4.
]TRACLACT] TRAFFIC RESTR. CLASS ACT.AUTH.
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of traffic
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] At least one of the following values :
] ] - TRARSTR=TRACLMOD
] ] - SUBTRCL
]TRACLMOD] TRAFFIC RESTR. CLASS MOD.AUTH.
] ] Authorizes modification via SCI of traffic
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - TRARSTR=TRACLACT
~TRARSUSP- TRAFFIC RESTR.CLASS SUSPENSION
Per subscriber conctrolled input, the calling
party is authorized, to deactivate an active
subscriber traffic restriction class for the
next call.
After this call the traffic restriction class
is active again.
Prerequisites: (at least one of the following)
- TRARSTR = TRACLACT
ACTTRACL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-15 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = HOTLIMM
OPTRCL TRAFFIC RSTR.CLASS BY OPER.INP
This parameter specifies the traffic restriction class,
which can be entered by the operator and may not be changed
by the subscriber. No seperate activation is necessary.
For further information on traffic restrictions
see command DISP TRABLOCK.
SUBTRCL TRAFFIC RSTR.CLASS BY SUB.REQ.
which can be administered by the subscriber if the
relevant authorization (TRARSTR=TRACLMOD) is present.
The traffic restriction class will be activated
by subscriber or operator via TRARSTR=ACTTRACL.
For further information see command
DISP TRABLOCK.
Prerequisites:
- TRARSTR=TRACLACT
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=HOTLIMM
Prerequisites:
At least one of the following values:
- CHRG=ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG=DEB
DEBNC
This parameter specifies the abbreviated dialing data.
a[-b[-c]]
a: ABBREVIATED DIALING DATA
ABBD10 -- ABBREVIATED DIALING 10 NUMBERS
]] ]] Abbreviated dialing with a one digit dialing
]- ] list for a maximum of 10 directory numbers.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See ABB=ABBD5
~ABBD5 '- ABBREVIATED DIALING 5 NUMBERS
Abbreviated dialing with a one digit dialing
list for a maximum of 5 directory numbers.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT= SABBD5
SABBD10
ABBD10T -- ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO. 2. D.
]] ]] Abbreviated dialing with a two digits dialing
CR PBX-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] list for a maximum of 10 directory numbers.
]] ]]
]] ]] - See ABB=ABBD5T
]]ABBD100 ]] ABBREVIATED DIALING100 NUMBERS
]] ]]
]]ABBD20 ]] ABBREVIATED DIALING 20 NUMBERS
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]-ABBD5T ] ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO. 2 D.
]] ]]
]] ]] - COSDAT= SABBD5T
]] ]] SABBD10T
]] ]] SABBD20-100
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
Abbreviated dialing with a two digits dialing
Incompatibilities:
- See ABB=ABBD5T
ABNMOD1 - ABB.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.1 DIG.
] ] Authorizes update via SCI of a one digit
] ] abbreviated dialing list.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] At least one of the following values
] ] - ABB= ABBD5,ABBD10
]ABNMOD2 ] ABB.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.2 DIG.
] ] Authorizes update via SCI of a two digits
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-17 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - ABB= ABBD5T,ABBD10T,ABBD20,30...100
]SNOLIM1 ] SHORT NO. LIM. 1 DIG.
] ] Defines the lowest short number for a dialing list
] ] with one digit short numbers.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
~SNOLIM2 - SHORT NO. LIM. 2 DIG.
Defines the lowest short number for a dialing list
with two digit short numbers.
Prerequisites:
At least one of the following values
- ABB= ABBD5T,ABBD10T,ABBD20,30...100
b: SHORT NO.RESP.SHORT NO.LIMIT=
Short number for ABBD5-ABBD100 or
short number limit for SNOLIM1-2
c: LONG NUMBER=
ABURSTR ABBREVIATED DIAL. UNRESTRICTED
This parameter marks a number in an abbreviated dialing list (see
ABB,COSDAT) as being excluded from the dialing restriction
(OPTRCL, SUBTRCL) assigned to the line.
The number must be in the range of abbreviated numbers for a
subscriber abbreviated dialing feature. A long number corresponding
to the entered abbreviated number must be entered or exist in the
objects database.
number.
Notes:
DN-1
Incomptibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
CR PBX-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
have been received.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-19 +
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
CR PBX-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=CONVTM1
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-21 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE AN ANALOG/MIXED/ISDN PBX
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,TYPE=] [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,CHRG=] ]
] ]
] ]
] [,OPTRCL=] [,SUBTRCL=] [,DEBCL=] [,DIV=] [,ABB=] ]
] ]
] [,ABURSTR=] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,DIAL=] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
MLHG -- MULTI LINE HUNTING GROUP
]] ]] Specifies a PBX as Multi Line Hunting Group
]] ]] which means that each telephone is connected
]] ]] directly via an own line to the local exchange
]- ] ( like subscriber lines ).
]] ]]
]] ]] - all DIAL-features except NOTDIAL
]] ]] - COS = DDI
~PBX '- PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
Specifies a PBX as a conventional privat
branch exchange which means that several
lines connect the privat branch exchange to
the local exchange.
CR PBX-22 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Defaults:
is entered.
OPMODE is entered.
Notes:
]AOG ] ANALOG OUTGOING
]IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
CHRG CHARGING
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-23 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] output.
] ] objects.
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLACT
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ]
] ] DEB
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ] postprocessing.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
CR PBX-24 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Notes:
]PRTSFAUT] PRINTED RECORD SUB.FAC.AUTH.
] ] Authorization to print records for subscriber
] ] facility.
~VACNC - VERBAL ANN. CHARGES NEXT CALL
This feature enables a user to get a verbal
announcement about the charges of the next
call after having finished it.
Notes:
- This feature is only allowed for analog PBX.
CALP - CALLED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
] ] If a Bn-user has this feature, the number of
] ] the B1-user will be presented to him in case
] ] of a forwarded call.
] ] The presentation will be suppressed, if the
] ] B1-user has the feature COS=CALR.
]CALR ] CALLED LINE IDENT. RESTR.
] ] If a B1-user has this feature, the presentation
] ] of his number will be suppressed at the Bn-users
] ] station in case of a forwarded call.
] ] This restriction will be ignored, if the Bn-user
] ] has the feature COS=CALRIGN.
]CALRACT ] CALR ACTIVATION AUTH.
] ] enquiry of the feature COS=CALR via SCI.
]CALRIGN ] CALR IGNORED
] ] If a Bn-user has this feature, the restriction
] ] entered by COS=CALR at the B1-users station
] ] will be ignored in case of a forwarded call.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS=CALP
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
]CIDCRIAL] CALID CRITICAL ALARMING
] ] Indicates that the alarming for call
] ] identification, that is to be performed in
] ] the terminating exchange, is urgent.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] one of the following values:
] ] - COS=CALIDIMM
] ] CALIDREQ
]CLIP ] CALLING LINE IDENT.PRESENT.
] ] The calling number will be presented to the
] ] called partys station.
] ] calling party has the feature COS=CLIR.
] ] This restriction will be ignored, if the
] ] called party has the feature COS=CLIRIGN.
]CLIRACT ] CLIR ACTIVATION AUTH.
] ] enquiry of the feature COS=CLIR via SCI.
] ]
] ] - COS=CLIRREQ
] ] CLIRSUSP
]CLIRIGN ] CLIR IGNORED
] ] Ignore the restriction entered by CLIR.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS= CLIP
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-25 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]CONFL ] LARGE CONFERENCE
] ] Authorizes setup of a large conference.
] ] Use DISP CONFL to see the maximum number of
] ] participants.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] LSN=DN ) first.
]CT ] CALL TRANSFER
] ] Enables the user to transfer an active call
] ] to a third party.
] ]
] ] Notes:
]CTAS ] CALL TRANSFER A-SIDE
] ] Enables an A-user to transfer an active
] ] call to a third party.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] analog PBXs.
]DIGCONN ] END TO END DIGITAL CONNECTION
] ] Authorizes setup of a fully digital connection for
] ] data transmission.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - Both parties must have this feature.
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
]FSK ] FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
] ] The frequency shift keying mehtod is supported.
] ] If not subscribed, the dual tone multi
] ] frequency method is used.
] ] This value is only allowed for analog objects.
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = IOG
] ] IIC
] ] IBW
] ] SCI request.
] ]
]INHTROFF] INHIBIT TRUNK OFFERING
] ] General prevention of barge-in, e.g.:
] ] - special tone for call waiting,
] ] - listening-in by operator,
] ] - SULIM test, etc.
]LNSTAMON] LINE STATUS MONITORING
] ] Monitoring of calling party line status
] ] (on-hook/off-hook) possible.
]MWI ] MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
] ] An acoustic indication is generated, when a
] ] new message is waiting in the mailbox of the
] ] voice mail system.
] ] Together with COS=FSK (analog) or
] ] COS=STIPROT (DSS1) a visual indication is
CR PBX-26 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] generated too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=VMSREC
]PCONAC ] PREV.CALL OFF.F.NON-AUTH.CALLS
] ] Enables the B-subscriber to receive only
] ] special IN-service-calls.
]RSCI ] REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
] ] Authorization for remote subscriber
] ] controlled input.
]SASNETOP] SAS NETWORK OPERATOR
] ] PBX may be used to provide the operator
] ] services during RCU stand-alone service.
]SDT ] SPECIAL DIAL TONE
] ] A special dial tone is applied when at least one
] ] of the following features is active:
] ] - selective call acceptance / rejection
] ] - selective call forwarding
] ] - selective ringing / call waiting
] ] - unconditionl call forwarding
] ] - call forwarding, if the called line is busy
] ] - call forwarding, if the called line
] ] doesnt reply
] ]
] ] Notes:
]STHACT ] STOP HUNT ACT. AUTH.
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of stop hunt.
CLIR -- CALLING LINE IDENT. RESTR.
]] ]] Presentation of the calling number will be
]] ]] suppressed at the called partys station.
]] ]] This restriction will be ignored, if the
]] ]] called party has the feature COS=CLIRIGN.
]]CLIRREQ ]] CLIR ON REQUEST
]- ] Presentation of the calling number will be
]] ]] suppressed at the called partys station on
]] ]] request.
]] ]] This restriction will be ignored if the
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS = CLIRACT
~CLIRSUSP'- CLIR SUSPENSION
Presentation of the calling number at the
called partys station will be suppressed,
but the calling party can interrupt this
restriction.
This restriction will be ignored if the
called party has the feature COS=CLIRIGN.
Incompatibilities:
- COS = CLIRACT
parties go on-hook.
CALIDIMM-- CALL IDENTIFICATION IMMEDIATE
]] ]] Calling party is identified and registered
]- ] immediately.
]]CALIDREQ]] CALL IDENTIFICATION ON REQUEST
]] ]] Authorizes calling subscriber identification
]] ]] on request.
~SERVINC '- SERVICE INTERCEPT
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-27 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incoming calls are directed to a fixed number
defined by the administration, usually an
announcement or switchboard.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]- ] - COS=DDI
]] ]] called party.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS=DDI
called party.
Prerequisites:
- COS=DDI
CIDHOLD1-- CALID HOLD ABSOLUTE
]] ]] Denotes a hold variant for calling line
]] ]] identification. A party line will be
]- ] hold absolute.
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS= CALIDIMM or CALIDREQ
~CIDHOLD2'- CALID HOLD WITHOUT A-DN
Denotes a hold variant for calling line
identification. The A-party line will be
held if A-number is not available,
otherwise not.
Prerequisites:
- COS= CALIDIMM or CALIDREQ
] ] protocol.
] ] see COS=STIPROT
COS=STIPROT
COS=FCTPROT
Prerequisites:
BLACKLST-- BLACK LIST SCREENING
]- ] A-number will be screened using the official
]] ]] blacklist (see command CR ORIGDAT).
~WHITELST'- WHITE LIST SCREENING
A-number will be screened using the official
whitelist (see command CR ORIGDAT).
]] ]] offline.
CR PBX-28 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
action.
Notes:
with data.
Notes:
a[-b]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-29 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB =ABBD5
ABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]- ]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
CR PBX-30 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- See SABBD5T
] ]
]DNHLMOD ] DELAYED HOTLINE MOD. AUTH.
] ] Authorizes activation/deactivation via SCI
] ] and changes via SCI of the destination
] ] number for the hotline delayed feature.
] ]
]DUAL ] DUAL HOMING
] ] This feature enables a PBX to be connected to two
] ] local exchanges.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The second unit has to contain the codepoint for
] ] rerouting.
] ] In case of DN-volume is multiple, the second
] ] unit has to contain the LAC.
]OVRFEX ] EXTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER
] ] When a call cannot be delivered because of
] ] busy, blocked or out of order, and all overflow
] ] attempts to existing internal overflow numbers
] ] have been unsuccessful, an overflow to this
] ] external number will be done.
] ] This external overflow number can be within the
] ] same exchange as the PDN or within another
] ] exchange and must therefore include the LAC.
] ] This identifier is only allowed for analog or
] ] pure DSS1 or analog-DSS1 PBX.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - By subscriber-administration it will not
] ] be checked, if the entered number is
] ] connected to a PBX.
] ]
] ] - COSDAT=SERCOMP
]OVRFIN1 ] INTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER 1
] ] busy, blocked or out of order, an overflow
] ] will be done to the entered number.
] ] This overflow-PBX must be located within the
] ] same exchange as the PDN and therefore must be
] ] entered without LAC.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - By subscriber-administration it will be
] ] checked, if the entered number is located
] ] within the same exchange as the PDN, but not,
] ] if the entered number is connected to a PBX.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-31 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] busy, blocked or out of order, and an overflow
] ] attempt to the first internal overflow number
] ] has been unsuccessful, a further attempt will
] ] be done to the entered number.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] busy, blocked or out of order, and overflow
] ] attempts to the first and second internal
] ] overflow numbers has been unsuccessful, a
] ] further attempt will be done to the entered
] ] number.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
~SERCOMP - SERIES COMPLETION
If this subscriber is busy then the calls to
this subsciber are forwarded to the series
completion number.
Notes:
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = OVRFIN1
OVRFIN2
OVRFIN3
OVRFEX
HOTLDEL -- DELAYED HOTLINE
]] ]] A call is automaticaly routed to a specified
]] ]] number, if subscriber does not dial before
]- ] time-out.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] - The hotline number must be entered
]] ]] in the same command.
~HOTLIMM '- IMMEDIATE HOTLINE
A call is automatically routed to
a specified number when subscriber
goes off-hook.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB
CR PBX-32 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SUBTRCL
- COSDAT=DNHLMOD
CACMOD
- DIV=DIVA
DIVI
DIVDA
DIVBY
DIVIAACT
DIVND
DIVOP
DIVOPD
DIVTA
VMSREC
DIVIS
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers,
Notes:
OPN OPERATOR NUMBER
Notes:
economy interval.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-33 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] inputs class 1.
] ] inputs class 2.
] ] inputs class 3.
] ] inputs class 4.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
CR PBX-34 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
next call.
is active again.
ACTTRACL
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = HOTLIMM
DISP TRABLOCK.
Prerequisites:
- TRARSTR=TRACLACT
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=HOTLIMM
Prerequisites:
- CHRG=ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG=DEB
DEBNC
DIV DIVERSION
Notes:
- On entering diversion features/activations, the
following default notifications are set:
If office data CFWNOT=NO is set, then no
default notification is set.
If office data CFWNOT=WITHOUT is set, then
the notification "Calling user receives notification
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-35 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
without B2-number that his call is diverted" is set
unless operator specifies another optiion.
If office data CFWNOT=WITH is set, then the
notification "Calling user receives notification
with B2-number that his call is diverted" is set
unless operator specifies another option.
This applies only for diversion features that
require a diversion number.
Notification options may be switched but not
deleted if required as per office data.
Use command DISP CALLPOPT to display the
office data.
a[-b]
a: DIVERSION
ACTDIVIA-- IND. ANNOUNCEMENT DIV. ACT.
]] ]] Activation for diversion to an individual
]] ]] announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] At least one of the following values:
]] ]] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVND]] DO NOT DISTURB DIV. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to an announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVOD]] DELAY.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the operator if called
]] ]] party does not answer within a specified time.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVOP]] IMMED.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the operator immediately.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]- ] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVTA]] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted immediately to a telephone
]] ]] announcement.
]]ACTDVA1 ]] FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV. ACT.
CR PBX-36 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the specified announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDVA10]] FIXED ANNOUNCEM. 10 DIV. ACT.
]] ]] See DIV=ACTDVA1
~ACTDVA9 '- FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 9 DIV. ACT.
See DIV=ACTDVA1
DIVA - FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of call diversion to
] ] a fixed announcement.
] ]
]DIVBY ] BUSY LINE DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of call diversion if
] ] called party busy.
] ]
]DIVDA ] DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
] ] called party does not answer.
] ]
]DIVI ] IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of immediate call
] ] diversion.
] ]
]DIVIAACT] IND.ANNOU.DIV.AUTH.ACT.
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of call
] ] diversion to an individual announcement.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
]DIVIS ] IMMEDIATE SELECTIVE DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of selective
] ] immediate call diversion. If the feature is
] ] active incomming calls are screened against
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-37 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] a screening list, which contains a selection
] ] of A-party numbers. If it is detected that a
] ] call shall be forwarded this will be done
] ] without further conditions.
] ] (for the administration of screening lists
] ] see command ENTR SCLST.)
] ]
] ] - COSDAT = HOTLIMM
]DIVND ] DO NOT DISTURB DIVERSION
] ] an announcement.
] ]
]DIVOP ] OPERATOR DIVERSION
] ] diversion to the operator.
] ]
]DIVOPD ] DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of delayed call
] ]
]DIVTA ] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of diversion
] ] to telephone announcemenet.
] ]
~VMSQUERY- VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY AUTH.
Authorizes the subscriber to use the voice mail
query service.
The subscriber is authorized to use a special
service code for a sequential replay of all
recorded messages and status without further
user interaction.
The second unit contains the directory number
of the voice mail service equipment and the
control code for the message query function, as
specified by the voice mail service provider.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = VMSREC
VMSREC -- VOICE MAIL SERVICE REC. AUTH.
]] ]] Authorizes the subscriber to use the voice mail
]] ]] recording feature via SCI.
]] ]] The subscriber is authorized to use related
]] ]] service codes for activation, deactivation and
]] ]] status enquiry. The voice mail service may be
]] ]] active for "busy" and "dont answer" conditions
]] ]] as well as unconditionally.
]] ]] The second unit, if entered, contains the
]] ]] directory number of the voice mail service
]- ] equipment and the control code for the message
]] ]] recording function, as specified by the voice
]] ]] mail service provider.
]] ]] If no second unit is entered, the destination,
]] ]] which is defined at office-level, will be used.
]] ]] (see command DISP INC).
]] ]] The features VMSREC and VMSWOSCI overwrite
]] ]] each other.
]] ]]
]] ]] - COSDAT=HOTLIMM
~VMSWOSCI'- VOICE MAIL SERVICE WITHOUT SCI
recording feature.
The subscriber is not authorized to use related
service codes for activation, deactivation and
status enquiry. The voice mail service may be
active for "busy" and "dont answer" conditions
as well as unconditionally.
CR PBX-38 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
control code for the message recording function,
as specified by the voice mail service
provider.
The features VMSREC and VMSWOSCI overwrite
each other.
Prerequisites: (at least one of following)
- DIV = ACTVMSBY
ACTVMSDA
ACTVMSI
DIVIA1 -- IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV.
]] ]] Specifies the device that issues an individual
]] ]] announcement.
]] ]] Within the second unit the content of the
]] ]] variable part of the announcement is specified,
]] ]] if necessary.
]]DIVIA10 ]] IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 10 DIV.
]] ]] See DIV=DIVIA1
]]DIVIA14 ]] IND ANNOUNCEMENT 14 DIV.
]- ] See DIV=DIVIA1
]]DIVIA15 ]] IND ANNOUNCEMENT 15 DIV.
~DIVIA9 '- IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 9 DIV.
See DIV=DIVIA1
ACTDIVBY- BUSY LINE DIVERSION ACTIVATION
] ] Calls are diverted to another number if called
] ] party is busy.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The call diversion directory number must
] ] be entered in the same command or exist in
] ] the objects database.
] ]
] ] - DIV=ACTDVA1-15
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSBY
] ] (dependent on office value,
] ] see command DISP CALLPOPT)
]ACTDIVDA] DONT ANSWER DIV. ACTIVATION
] ] party does not answer within a specified time.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The call diversion directory number must be
] ] entered in the same command or exist in the
] ] objects database.
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-39 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSDA
]ACTDIVI ] IMMEDIATE DIVERSION ACTIVATION
] ] Calls are diverted immediately to another number.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSI
]ACTDIVIS] IMM.SEL.DIV.ACT.
] ] Calls are diverted immediately to another
] ] number, if screening detects that the call
] ] must be forwarded.
] ] The scrrening is done via a screening list
] ] which can be administered by command ENTR SCLST.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] be entered in the same command.
] ]
] ] - DIV= ACTDVA1-15
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
]ACTVMSBY] BUSY LINE DIV. TO VMS ACT.
] ] Calls for this subscriber are redirected to the
] ] subscribers voice mail recording service using
] ] the number specified with DIV=VMSREC or at
] ] office level, if the subscriber is busy.
] ] This classmark is set either by the operator or
] ] by the subscriber himself via SCI using the
] ] service code provided in the switch.
] ] The input of a second unit is not allowed.
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] - DIV=ACTDIVBY
]ACTVMSDA] DONT ANSWER DIV. TO VMS ACT.
] ] office level, if the subscriber doesnt answer
] ] the call.
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
CR PBX-40 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] - DIV=ACTDIVDA
~ACTVMSI - IMMED. DIV. TO VMS ACTIVATION
All calls for this subscriber are immediately
redirected to the subscribers voice mail
recording service using the number specified
with DIV=VMSREC or at office level.
This classmark is set either by the operator or
by the subscriber himself via SCI using the
service code provided in the switch.
The input of a second unit is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- DIV=ACTDVA1-15
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
ACTDIVOP
ACTDIVIA
- DIV=ACTDIVI
(dependent on office value,
see command DISP CALLPOPT)
DIVBYMOD- BUSY LINE DIV. MOD. AUTH.
] ] destination number for the DIVBY feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVBY
]DIVDAMOD] DONT ANSWER DIV. MOD. AUTH.
] ] destination number for the DIVDA feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVDA
]DIVIMOD ] IMMEDIATE DIVERSION MOD. AUTH.
] ] destination number for the DIVI feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVI
~DIVISMOD- IMM.SEL.DIV.MOD.AUTH.
Authorizes administration via SCI of the
destination number for the DIVIS feature.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = DIVIS
DDVAN - DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.NO.
] ] If B1-user has this feature then calling user
] ] receives notification that his call is diverted
] ] to a fixed announcement. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVA or ACTDVA1-15
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVA
]DDVBYN ] DISP.BUSY LINE.DIV.NO.
] ] to the DIVBY number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVBY or ACTDIVBY
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVBY
]DDVDAN ] DISP.DONT ANSWER DIV.NO.
] ] to the DIVDA number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-41 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] - DIV=DIVDA or ACTDIVDA
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVDA
]DDVIAN ] DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.NO.
] ] to an individual announcement. The B2-number will
] ] be delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVIA
]DDVIN ] DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.NO.
] ] to the DIVI number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVI or ACTDIVI
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVI
]DDVISN ] DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.NO.
] ] immediately with screenng of calling number.
] ] The B2-number will be delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV = DIVIS or ACTDIVIS
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVIS
]DDVNDN ] DISP.DO NOT DISTURB DIV.NO.
] ] to the DIVND destination. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVND or ACTDIVND
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVND
]DDVODN ] DISP.DELAYED DIV.TO OP.NO.
] ] If the called user has this feature and has
] ] activated the delayed diversion to the
] ] operator, then his number will be displayed
] ] to the calling user.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVOPD or ACTDIVOD
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVOPD
]DDVOPN ] DISP.OPERATOR DIV.NO.
] ] to the operator. the B2-number will be delivered
] ] too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVOP or ACTDIVOP
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVOP
~DDVTAN - DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.NO.
If B1-user has this feature then calling user
receives notification that his call is diverted
to a telephone announcement. The B2-number will
be delivered too.
CR PBX-42 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- DIV=DIVTA or ACTDIVTA
Incompatibilities:
- DIV=DDVTA
DDVA - DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.
] ] to a fixed announcement. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVAN
]DDVBY ] DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.
] ] to the DIVBY number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVBYN
]DDVDA ] DISP.DONT ANSWER DIV.
] ] to the DIVDA number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVDAN
]DDVI ] DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.
] ] to the DIVI number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVIN
]DDVIA ] DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.
] ] receives notification that his call is deverted
] ] to an individual announcement. No B2-number will
] ] be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] At least one of the following features:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVIAN
]DDVIS ] DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.
] ] No B2-number will be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVISN
]DDVND ] DISP.DO NOT DISTURB DIV.
] ] to the DIVND destination. No B2-number will be
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-43 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVNDN
]DDVOP ] DISP.OPERATOR DIV.
] ] to the operator. No B2-number will be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVOPN
]DDVOPD ] DISP.DELAYED DIV.TO OP.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVODN
~DDVTA - DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.
to a telephone announcement. No B2-number will
be delivered.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- DIV = DDVTAN
DDVBYFN - DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.FORW.NO.
] ] If the B1-User or the Bn-1-User has this feature
] ] and has activated DIVBY, then the numbers of
] ] these users are given to the Bn-User.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVBY or ACTDIVBY
]DDVDAFN ] DISP.DONT ANSW.DIV.FORW.NO.
] ] and has activated DIVDA, then the numbers of
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVDA or ACTDIVDA
]DDVIFN ] DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.FORW.NO.
] ] and has activated DIVI, then the numbers of
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVI or ACTDIVI
~DDVISFN - DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.FORW.NO.
If the B1-User or the Bn-1-User has this feature
and has activated DIVIS, then the number of
these users are given to the Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = DIVIS
b: NUMBER=
CR PBX-44 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT= SABBD5
SABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] SABBD10T
]] ]] SABBD20-100
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-45 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- See ABB=ABBD5T
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
Prerequisites:
c: LONG NUMBER=
objects database.
CR PBX-46 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
number.
Notes:
DN-1
Incomptibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
have been received.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-47 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CIRSRCH -- CIRCULAR SEARCH
]] ]] If the pilot DN is dialed, the search
]] ]] starts with the first line (LNO=1).
]] ]] If the LSN-DN (COS=DCAHUNT) is dialed,
]] ]] the search starts with this line number in
]] ]] ascending LNO order and ends before this
]] ]] line number.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]] - HUNT=CIRSRCH is incompatible with a PBXLN
]]NONSEQ ]] RANDOM / NON SEQUENTIAL SEARCH
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]]REGSRCH ]] REGULAR SEARCH
]] ]] If the LSN (COS=DCAHUNT) is dialed, the
]- ] search starts with the corresponding line
]] ]] The traffic counter will be updated with each
]] ]] seize.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]] - HUNT=REGSRCH is incompatible with a PBXLN
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
DIAL DIALING PROCEDURE
Notes:
- Not allowed for following OPMODEs:
IBW
IOG
IIC
- PULSDIAL is set in case of analog OPMODEs =
ABW, AOG and not TYPE=MLHG, unless another
value is entered.
CR PBX-48 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- NOTDIAL is set in case of analog OPMODEs =
ABW, AOG and TYPE=MLHG, unless another
value is entered.
MFCR2 -- MFC R2 DIALING
]]MFV ]] MULTI FREQUENCY DIALING
]]NOTDIAL ]] WITHOUT DIRECT INWARD DIALING
]] ]] - DINO
]- ] - SSDI
]] ]] - MINMAX ( if MIN /= length of DN,
]] ]] in case of directory number economy:
]] ]] if MIN /= length of DN-1 )
]] ]] - EOS
]]PULSDIAL]] PULSE DIALING
~SFDIAL '- SINGLE FREQUENCY DIALING
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-49 +
CR PBX
NORMPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=CONVTM1
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
CR PBX-50 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CREATE A PRIMARY RATE ACCESS SLAVE
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,CHRG=] ]
] ]
] ]
] [,OPTRCL=] [,SUBTRCL=] [,DEBCL=] [,ABB=] [,ABURSTR=] ]
] ]
] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] [,SSDI=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,EOS=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
PASLAVE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS SLAVE
PBX with direct dailing and lines connected as
primary rate access with D-channel protocol DSS1.
Prerequisites:
- COS = DDI
Defaults:
is entered.
OPMODE is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-51 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
CHRG CHARGING
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] output.
CR PBX-52 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] objects.
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLACT
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ]
] ] DEB
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ] postprocessing.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
facility.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-53 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CFWCOLDD- COLLECT ALL DIGITS FOR CFW
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] LSN=DN ) first.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] analog PBXs.
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
] ] SCI request.
] ]
] ] doesnt reply
] ]
] ] Notes:
parties go on-hook.
]] ]]
CR PBX-54 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]- ] - COS=DDI
]] ]] called party.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS=DDI
called party.
Prerequisites:
- COS=DDI
] ] protocol.
] ] see COS=STIPROT
COS=STIPROT
COS=FCTPROT
Prerequisites:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-55 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
action.
Notes:
with data.
Notes:
a[-b]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5
Notes:
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB =ABBD5
ABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
CR PBX-56 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]- ]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
Incompatibilities:
- See SABBD5T
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-57 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]DUAL ] DUAL HOMING
] ] This feature enables a PBX to be connected to two
] ] local exchanges.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The second unit has to contain the codepoint for
] ] rerouting.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - By subscriber-administration it will not
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
~OVRFIN3 - INTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER 3
When a call cannot be delivered because of
busy, blocked or out of order, and overflow
attempts to the first and second internal
overflow numbers has been unsuccessful, a
further attempt will be done to the entered
number.
This overflow-PBX must be located within the
CR PBX-58 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
same exchange as the PDN and therefore must be
entered without LAC.
This identifier is only allowed for analog or
pure DSS1 or analog-DSS1 PBX.
Notes:
- By subscriber-administration it will be
checked, if the entered number is located
within the same exchange as the PDN, but not,
if the entered number is connected to a PBX.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=SERCOMP
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers,
Notes:
OPN OPERATOR NUMBER
Notes:
economy interval.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-59 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] inputs class 1.
] ] inputs class 2.
] ] inputs class 3.
] ] inputs class 4.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ]
CR PBX-60 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Prerequisites:
next call.
is active again.
ACTTRACL
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = HOTLIMM
DISP TRABLOCK.
Prerequisites:
- TRARSTR=TRACLACT
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=HOTLIMM
Prerequisites:
- CHRG=ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG=DEB
DEBNC
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-61 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT= SABBD5
SABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] SABBD10T
]] ]] SABBD20-100
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
CR PBX-62 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- See ABB=ABBD5T
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
Prerequisites:
c: LONG NUMBER=
objects database.
number.
Notes:
DN-1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-63 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incomptibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
have been received.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
CR PBX-64 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-65 +
CR PBX
PASLAVE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
CR PBX-66 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CREATE A PACKET HANDLER
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,BLK=] ]
] ]
] [,COSDAT=] [,TRARSTR=] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,HUNT=] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE
Specifies a PBX as Packet Handler Interface,
which is necessary to enable transmission of
packet data from EWSD to EWSP.
The allowed services and standard services can
be administered in the office.
Defaults:
is entered.
OPMODE is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-67 +
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
CR PBX-68 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
with data.
Notes:
a[-b]
[BGID ] BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
The business group identification is used for
handling corporate network integrity. It is
provided in the originating exchange, transported
via ISUP to the B-side and compared on the
QSIG access with the business group
identification of the terminating exchange. In
case of different BGID the network integrity is
activated, feature transparency is not
supported and the presentation indicator of the
party number is evaluated.
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers,
Notes:
] ] (See DISP INC).
(See DISP INC).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-69 +
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
number.
Notes:
DN-1
Incomptibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
have been received.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
CR PBX-70 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-71 +
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1
CR PBX-72 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-73 +
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
CREATE A PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,TYPE=] [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] [,CHRG=] ]
] ]
] [,COS=] [,COSDAT=] [,BLK=] [,OPTRCL=] [,DEBCL=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
QSIG PBX WITH QSIG-PROTOKOLL
Specifies a PBX, which supports the
QSIG-protocol. It is used for connection
of several privat telecommunication
network exchanges.
The exploitation of the PBX-TYPE QSIG requires
a special arrangement with the manufactorer.
Defaults:
is entered.
OPMODE is entered.
CR PBX-74 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
CHRG CHARGING
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] output.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-75 +
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] objects.
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
facility.
CPLFIRST- CONNECT PILOT LINE FIRST
] ] LSN=DN ) first.
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
parties go on-hook.
with data.
Notes:
CR PBX-76 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
~DUAL - DUAL HOMING
This feature enables a PBX to be connected to two
local exchanges.
Notes:
- The second unit has to contain the codepoint for
rerouting.
- This feature is only allowed for ISDN PBX.
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers,
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-77 +
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- CHRG=ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG=DEB
DEBNC
] ] - OPMODE= AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
CR PBX-78 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-79 +
CR PBX
QSIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
CR PBX-80 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
CREATE A REMOTE SERVICE NUMBER
-
] ]
] CR PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [,OPMODE=] [,BLK=] [,COS=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,DIAL=] [,HUNT=] [,TLIM=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
TYPE PBX TYPE
RSN REMOTE SERVICE NUMBER
Specifies a PBX as remote service number,
which can be used for remote subscriber
controlled input, for message waiting
indication or for feature controll offline.
The function is specified by the features
COS = RSNSCI, RSNMWI or SUSCI.
Prerequisites:
- One of the following features:
COS=RSNSCI
RSNMWI
SUSCI
Defaults:
is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-81 +
CR PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPMODE is entered.
Notes:
~AOG - ANALOG OUTGOING
RSNMWI - REMOTE SERVICE NO. MWI
] ] Specifies the PBX as remote service number
] ] for message waiting indication.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
- - TYPE=RSN
]RSNSCI ] REMOTE SERVICE NO. SCI
] ] Specifies the PBX as remote service number
] ] for subscriber controlled input.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - TYPE=RSN
SUSCI ' SERVICE USER FOR SCI
Specifies the PBX as remote service number
which is used as service user for remote
subscriber controlled input, feature controll
offline and message waiting indication.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE = RSN
CR PBX-82 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
IBW
IOG
IIC
ABW, AOG and not TYPE=MLHG, unless another
value is entered.
ABW, AOG and TYPE=MLHG, unless another
value is entered.
[NOTDIAL ] WITHOUT DIRECT INWARD DIALING
Incompatibilities:
- DINO
- SSDI
- MINMAX ( if MIN /= length of DN,
in case of directory number economy:
if MIN /= length of DN-1 )
- EOS
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]] line number.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]- ] search starts with the corresponding line
]] ]] The traffic counter will be updated with each
]] ]] seize.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-83 +
CR PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1
CR PBX-84 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
CR PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 CR PBX-85 -
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY PBX
This command displays data for:
- a single PBX,
- a range of PBXs,
- all PBXs within a local area,
- all PBXs in an exchange.
Notes:
- Selective display according to specified criteria is also possible.
Selection criteria may consist of either DN-specific or service
specific parameter values. To search for service specific parameter
values input of parameter SERV is mandatory.
A search for DN- and service specific values in one command is not
allowed. PBX group data are considered as DN-specific data.
Together with parameter OPMODE only the input of PBX group
specific data is allowed.
- If selection criteria are entered the display is restricted to the
address parameters
LAC
DN
OPMODE
SERV
of the PBXs or PBX groups possessing the selected data.
- Display of the number of PBXs matching the specified
criteria is also possible. In this case, the total number of
PBXs will be displayed, too. The same rules apply for the selection
criteria as in the selective display case.
- If service specific criteria are input and SUMMARY=COUNT, the
number of PBXs is displayed, not the number of ISDN services with
the specified data.
- If PBX-group specific criteria are input and SUMMARY=COUNT, the
number of PBXs is displayed, not the number of PBX groups with the
specified data.
- The input of SORT Parameter is only allowed, if DN=X and at least
one selection criterion is entered.
<job number>.
Input format
-
] ]
] -- ]
] ]],FORMAT= ]] ]
] DISP PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= ]-,SORT= ] [,OPMODE=] [,SERV=] ]
] ]],SUMMARY=]] ]
] ~ '- ]
] ]
] [,ADDNO=] [,CHRG=] [,COS=] [,COSDAT=] [,BLK=] ]
] ]
] [,TRARSTR=] [,OPTRCL=] [,SUBTRCL=] [,DEBCL=] ]
] ]
] [,DIV=] [,ABB=] [,SUBADDR=] [,MINMAX=] [,DINO=] ]
] ]
] [,GCOS=] [,HUNT=] [,DIAL=] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,TLIM=] [,TYPE=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-1 +
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the pbx.
Notes:
- Up to 34 single DNs and intervals can be linked with &.
FORMAT FORMAT TYPE
NSERVDAT NO SERVICE DATA
This parameter value suppresses the output of
service specific data.
Only the parameters LAC and DN are allowed
together with this parameter value.
SERVDATA SERVICE DATA
Display the service specific data of services
selected through parameter SERV.
Only the parameters LAC, DN and SERV
(except SERV=ALL) are allowed together with
this parameter value.
Prerequisites:
- SERV
SORT SORTED OUTPUT
This parameter can be used to select sorted/unsorted (by LAC, DN)
output of address parameters for PBXs meeting the selection criteria.
N UNSORTED
NO UNSORTED
Y SORTED
YES SORTED
SUMMARY SUMMARY TYPE
This parameter activates the display of the number of PBXs
matching the specified criteria.
NOCOUNT DISP. OF OBJECT WITHOUT COUNT
COUNT COUNT OF PBX OBJECTS
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX.
DISP PBX-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
IIC ISDN INCOMING
SERV SERVICE
This parameter of ISDN services can be entered to:
- specify a subset of services as a selection criterion to search
for ISDN PBXs having specified services assigned.
Incompatibilities in this case:
- every additional parameter other than the address parameters
LAC and DN.
- specify exactly one service identifier to address service specific
search of additional selection criteria on entered service.
In this case following conditions hold:
Additional criteria must consist of service specific parameters /
parameter values.
If SERV=ALL entered, search for entered criteria will be
performed for arbitrary services.
ALL ALL ENTERED SERVICES
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies an additional number of the PBX.
Only one additional number can be searched
for within one DISP PBX command.
If ADDNO=X is entered, a list of all PBX with at
least one ADDNO will be displayed.
CHRG CHARGING
ACTDEBCL DET. BILLING CLASS ACTIVATION
CHATIMM CHARGE TRANSFER IMMEDIATE
Service specific for ISDN objects.
CHATREQ CHARGE TRANSFER ON REQUEST
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-3 +
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEBCLACT DET. BILLING CLASS ACT. AUTH.
DEBCLMOD DET. BILLING CLASS MOD. AUTH.
DEBNC DET. BILLING NEXT CALL ONLY
HANDSET SERVICE HANDSET
CHACONTP CHARGE CONTINUE PERMANENT
CHAENDP CHARGE ON END PERMANENT
NOCHARG NO CHARGE FOR A-SUBSCRIBER
NOCOLC NO I/C COLLECT CALLS ALLOWED
CHABEGP CHARGE ON BEGIN PERMANENT
CHABEGC CHARGE ON BEGIN PER CALL
CHACONTC CHARGE CONTINUE PER CALL
CHAENDC CHARGE ON END PER CALL
PRTSFAUT PRINTED RECORD SUB.FAC.AUTH.
PRTSF PRINTED RECORD SUB.FAC.
NCOLCACT NOCOLC ACTIVATION AUTH.
IPCHRG IP/SN SPECIFIC CHARGING
AOCFC AOC FORMAT CURRENCY
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD FOR ENQUIRY
CALIDREQ CALL IDENTIFICATION ON REQUEST
CDCTRL CALLED PARTY CONTROL
CONF3 THREE-WAY CALLING
DIGCONN END TO END DIGITAL CONNECTION
AOCSTI AOC BY STIMULUS PROTOCOL
JTCTRL JOINT CONTROL
LNSTAMON LINE STATUS MONITORING
CALIDIMM CALL IDENTIFICATION IMMEDIATE
SASNETOP SAS NETWORK OPERATOR
ILNRES ISDN LINES RESERVED
STHACT STOP HUNT ACT. AUTH.
AOCFCT AOC BY FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
CLIP CALLING LINE IDENT.PRESENT.
NOSCCLIP NO SCREENING OF CALLING LINE
UTUSIG USER TO USER SIGNALLING
CLIRIGN CLIR IGNORED
CLIRREQ CLIR ON REQUEST
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT. RESTR.
CIDHOLD1 CALID HOLD ABSOLUTE
CIDHOLD2 CALID HOLD WITHOUT A-DN
NATNO NATIONAL NUMBER
INATNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
DISP PBX-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLR CONNECT.LINE IDENT.RESTRICT.
COLRIGN COLR IGNORED
COLRSUSP COLR SUPPRESSED
COLP CONNECT.LINE IDENT.PRESENT.
NOSCCOLP NO SCREENING OF COLP
NOCDIV NO DIVERTED CALLS ACCEPTED
CT CALL TRANSFER
DDI DIRECT DIALING IN AUTH.
STIPROT STIMULUS PROTOCOL
FCTPROT FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
SEGLAY3 SEGMENTATION OF LAYER 3 MSG.
CPLFIRST CONNECT PILOT LINE FIRST
CALP CALLED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
CALR CALLED LINE IDENT. RESTR.
CALRACT CALR ACTIVATION AUTH.
CALRIGN CALR IGNORED
CLIRACT CLIR ACTIVATION AUTH.
GFRESET GENERAL FACILITY RESET AUTH.
RSNSCI REMOTE SERVICE NO. SCI
RSNMWI REMOTE SERVICE NO. MWI
PCONAC PREV.CALL OFF.F.NON-AUTH.CALLS
CIDCRIAL CALID CRITICAL ALARMING
DIVNOOVR DIVERSION NUMBER OVERWRITE
CALLPCAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
CCBS CALL COMP.TO BUSY SUB.
CFWCOLDD COLLECT ALL DIGITS FOR CFW
BLACKLST BLACK LIST SCREENING
WHITELST WHITE LIST SCREENING
SCLANGU SUB. CONTROLLED LANGUAGE
LANGU1 LANGUAGE 1
LANGU2 LANGUAGE 2
LANGU3 LANGUAGE 3
LANGU4 LANGUAGE 4
SDT SPECIAL DIAL TONE
a[-b]
DNHLMOD DELAYED HOTLINE MOD. AUTH.
HOTLDEL DELAYED HOTLINE
HOTLIMM IMMEDIATE HOTLINE
SABBD5 SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.
SERCOMP SERIES COMPLETION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-5 +
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SABBD5T SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.2 D.
SABBD10T SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.2 D.
CACMOD CARRIER ACCESS CODE MOD. AUTH.
CUSTROUT CUSTOMER ROUTING
OVRFIN1 INTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER 1
OVRFEX EXTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER
DUAL DUAL HOMING
b: LONG NUMBER=
- All values of this parameter but ALLCONN can be either
service- or DN-specific for ISDN objects.
Incompatibilities:
- BLK= ADMIN1
ADMIN2
ADMIN3
ADMIN1 ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK 1
Incompatibilities:
- BLK= ADMIN
ADMIN2
ADMIN3
Incompatibilities:
- BLK= ADMIN
ADMIN1
ADMIN3
Incompatibilities:
- BLK= ADMIN
ADMIN1
ADMIN2
MAINT1 MAINTENANCE BLOCK 1
ALLCONN ALL CONNECTIONS BLOCKED
DISP PBX-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTTRACL TRAF.RESTR. CLASS ACTIVATION
Can be either service- or DN-specific
for ISDN objects.
REQSPORI SUB REQUESTED ORIG. CALL SUSP.
for ISDN objects.
REQSPTER SUB REQUESTED TERM. CALL SUSP.
for ISDN objects.
TRACLACT TRAFFIC RESTR. CLASS ACT.AUTH.
for ISDN objects.
TRACLMOD TRAFFIC RESTR. CLASS MOD.AUTH.
for ISDN objects.
RSCIAUT RESTRICTION FOR SCI AUTH.
RSTSCI1 RESTRICTION FOR SCI 1
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTR.CLASS SUSPENSION
for ISDN objects.
- All values of this parameter can be either service-
or DN-specific for ISDN objects.
All values of this parameter can be either service-
or DN-specific for ISDN objects.
DIV DIVERSION
Notes:
- All values of this parameter are service specific
for ISDN objects.
a[-b]
a: DIVERSION
ACTDVA1 FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV. ACT.
ACTDIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION ACTIVATION
ACTDIVDA DONT ANSWER DIV. ACTIVATION
ACTDIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION ACTIVATION
ACTDIVND DO NOT DISTURB DIV. ACTIVATION
ACTDIVOD DELAY.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
ACTDIVOP IMMED.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
ACTDIVIA IND. ANNOUNCEMENT DIV. ACT.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-7 +
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVBYMOD BUSY LINE DIV. MOD. AUTH.
DIVDAMOD DONT ANSWER DIV. MOD. AUTH.
DIVIMOD IMMEDIATE DIVERSION MOD. AUTH.
ACTDIVCD CONDITIONAL DIV. ACTIVATION
ACTDIVTA TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT ACTIVATION
DIVCDMOD CONDITIONAL DIV. MOD. AUTH.
DIVTA TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
DDVTACF DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVTAFN DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVTA DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.
DDVTAN DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.NO.
DDVACF DISP.FIX.ANN.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVAFN DISP.FIXED.ANN.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVA DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.
DDVAN DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.NO.
DDVBYCF DISP.BUSY L.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVBYFN DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVBY DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.
DDVBYN DISP.BUSY LINE.DIV.NO.
DDVDACF DISP.DONT A.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVDAFN DISP.DONT ANSW.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVDA DISP.DONT ANSWER DIV.
DDVDAN DISP.DONT ANSWER DIV.NO.
DDVIACF DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVIAFN DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVIA DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.
DDVIAN DISP.IND.ANN.DIV.NO.
DDVICF DISP.IMM.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVIFN DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVI DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.
DDVIN DISP.IMMEDIATE DIV.NO.
DDVNDCF DISP.D.N.DIS.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVNDFN DISP.DO NOT DIST.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVND DISP.DO NOT DISTURB DIV.
DDVNDN DISP.DO NOT DISTURB DIV.NO.
DDVOPCF DISP.OP.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVOPFN DISP.OPERATOR DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVOP DISP.OPERATOR DIV.
DDVOPN DISP.OPERATOR DIV.NO.
DDVOPDCF DISP.DEL.DIV.OP.CALL IS FORW.
DDVODFN DISP.DEL.DIV.TO OP.FORW.NO.
DDVOPD DISP.DELAYED DIV.TO OP.
DDVODN DISP.DELAYED DIV.TO OP.NO.
ACTDVA10 FIXED ANNOUNCEM. 10 DIV. ACT.
DIVIA1 IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV.
DISP PBX-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVIAACT IND.ANNOU.DIV.AUTH.ACT.
DACTDVIS DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.ACT.
DDVISCF DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.CALL IS FORW.
DDVISFN DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.FORW.NO.
DDVIS DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.
DDVISN DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.NO.
DIVCDE CALL DEFLECTION DIVERSION
VMSWOSCI VOICE MAIL SERVICE WITHOUT SCI
DDVCDEFN DISP. CALL DEFL. DIV. FORW.NO.
DDVCDE DISP. CALL DEFL. DIV.
DDVCDEN DISP. CALL DEFL. DIV. NO.
DIVIS IMMEDIATE SELECTIVE DIVERSION
ACTDIVIS IMM.SEL.DIV.ACT.
DIVISMOD IMM.SEL.DIV.MOD.AUTH.
VMSREC VOICE MAIL SERVICE REC. AUTH.
VMSQUERY VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY AUTH.
ACTVMSBY BUSY LINE DIV. TO VMS ACT.
ACTVMSDA DONT ANSWER DIV. TO VMS ACT.
ACTVMSI IMMED. DIV. TO VMS ACTIVATION
b: LONG NUMBER=
ABBD5 ABBREVIATED DIALING 5 NUMBERS
ABNMOD1 ABB.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.1 DIG.
ABBD5T ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO. 2 D.
ABBD10T ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO. 2 D.
ABBD100 ABBREVIATED DIALING100 NUMBERS
ABNMOD2 ABB.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.2 DIG.
SUBADDR SUBADRESSING INFORMATION
Notes:
- All values of this parameter are service specific
for ISDN objects.
a[-b]
a: SUBADRESSING INFORMATION
SADTRANS SUBADRESSING TRANSMISSION
HOTLN HOTLINE SUBADRESS
HOTLNMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR HOTLINE SUBADDR
DIVBY SUBADRESS FOR DIVBY
DIVBYMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR DIVBY SUBADRESS
DIVCD SUBADRESS FOR DIVCD
DIVCDMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR DIVCD SUBADRESS
DIVDA SUBADRESS FOR DIVDA
DIVDAMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR DIVDA SUBADRESS
DIVI SUBADRESS FOR DIVI
DIVIMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR DIVI SUBADRESS
DIVIS SUBADRESS FOR DIVIS
DIVISMOD MOD. AUTH. FOR DIVIS SUBADRESS
b: SUBADRESSING DATA=
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-9 +
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
ACTDGMB DIG. GAMB ACTIVATION
DLYDIAL DELAY DIALING
IMMDIAL IMMEDIATE DIALING
WINKDIAL WINK START DIALING
SEQSRCH SEQUENTIAL SEARCH
NONSEQ RANDOM / NON SEQUENTIAL SEARCH
REGSRCH REGULAR SEARCH
CIRSRCH CIRCULAR SEARCH
UCD UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
SFDIAL SINGLE FREQUENCY DIALING
PULSDIAL PULSE DIALING
MFCR2 MFC R2 DIALING
MFV MULTI FREQUENCY DIALING
NOTDIAL WITHOUT DIRECT INWARD DIALING
SIGN EOS PROGRAMMED-SEND NO SIGNAL
PROG EOS OVER TRUNK-SEND NO SIGNAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
CONVTM0 NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
CONVTM1 CONVERSATION TIME 1
DISP PBX-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
DISP PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OFFEND SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
CLEATM1 CLEAR BACK TIME 1
RELCLEA RELEASE CLEAR BACK
OFFDIA SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
DIALTM1 DIAL TIME 1
DIALTM2 DIAL TIME 2
DIALTM3 DIAL TIME 3
RINGTM0 NO RING TIME LIMIT
RINGTM1 RING TIME 1
RINGTM2 RING TIME 2
RINGTM3 RING TIME 3
RINGTM4 RING TIME 4
RINGTM5 RING TIME 5
RINGTM6 RING TIME 6
RINGTM7 RING TIME 7
TYPE PBX TYPE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER
MLHG MULTI LINE HUNTING GROUP
IP INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL
PASLAVE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS SLAVE
RSN REMOTE SERVICE NUMBER
QSIG PBX WITH QSIG-PROTOKOLL
E N D
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 DISP PBX-11 -
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY PBX
This command modifies the features of a PBX.
Notes:
- Switch from Mixed PBX to Analog PBX is rejected, if
Closed User Group data are existing. All existing Closed
User Group data (see DISP SERVCUG and DISP CUG) have to
be deleted first.
- After switching from Analog PBX with Closed User Group data
to Mixed PBX, service dependent Closed User Group data have
to be assigned to the service ANALOG, if the analog part
of the Mixed PBX shall be a member of a Closed User Group.
- A service can only be deleted, if no service dependent Closed
User Group data exist for the relevant service.
- Deleting of COS=DDI (Direct Dialling Inward) of a PBX
with the TYPE=IP is not allowed.
- The PBX data may also interact with other functions
(see output parameter ADDINF of DISP PBX command).
These interactions are described in the CML for the relevant
functions.
- CTX-PBX must have an uniform dial-type. That means, the
OPMODEs of a CTX-PBX must be created either all with direct
inward dialing or all without direct inward dialing. For
ISDN OPMODEs the dial-type is defined by COS=DDI for
direct inward dialing. For analog OPMODEs the dial-type
is defined by parameter DIAL, DIAL=NOTDIAL means no
direct inward dialing, all other DIAL-features mean direct
inward dialing.
The dial-type of the whole CTX-PBX must not be changed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified directory number is assigned to a PBX.
- The specified features are compatible with each other and with the features
already existing.
- The prerequisites for the specified features exist.
- The specified features are compatible with the country code.
- The specified features are different for ENTER and CANCEL parameters.
- A sufficient number of free storage elements is available.
- The specified data are compatible with all LTG load types.
1. MOD PBX - ANALOG DATA FOR AN ANALOG-PBX
2. MOD PBX - CHNGTYPE CHANGE OR RESET SPECIFIED PBX TYPE
3. MOD PBX - DN DN DATA FOR ISDN/MIXED-PBX
4. MOD PBX - FRAMEHD DATA FOR A FRAME HANDLER
5. MOD PBX - PHI DATA FOR A PACKET HANDLER
6. MOD PBX - QSIGDN DN DATA FOR PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
7. MOD PBX - QSIGSERV SERV DATA FOR A PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
8. MOD PBX - RSN DATA FOR REMOT SERVICE NUMBER
9. MOD PBX - SERV SERV DATA FOR ISDN/MIXED-PBX
10. MOD PBX - SERV1TR6 SERV DATA FOR ISDN/MIXED-PBX - 1TR6
1. Input format
DATA FOR AN ANALOG-PBX
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,COPMODE= ,ADDNO= ,CADDNO= ]
] ]
] ,CHRG= ,CCHRG= ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= ,CCOSDAT= ]
] ]
] ,OPN= ,BLK= ,CBLK= ,TRARSTR= ,CTRARSTR= ,OPTRCL= ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-1 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ,SUBTRCL= ,DEBCL= ,CCL= ,DIV= ,CDIV= ,ABB= ]
] ]
] ,CABB= ,ABURSTR= ,CABURSTR= ,MINMAX= ,DINO= ]
] ]
] ,GCOS= ,CGCOS= ,HUNT= ,DIAL= ,SSDI= ,EOS= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
The directory number must be a created DN.
Notes:
- Only directory numbers consisting entirely of decimal digits can
be directly dialed.
In the MOD PBX only one OPMODE can be entered to create a new
hunting group or change data for an existing OPMODE.
Only the DSS1-Opmodes IOG, IIC and IBW are compatible
with the TYPE=IP.
The opmodes AOG, AIC and ABW are incompatible with the
CTX feature CONP (see command ENTR CXPBX).
If originating trigger detection points are assigned to the
PBX only incoming and bothway OPMODEs are allowed.
If terminating trigger detection points are assigned to the
PBX only outgoing and bothway OPMODEs are allowed.
(see commands CR INSCM and CR INSCMREF).
ABW -- ANALOG BOTHWAY
]]AIC ]] ANALOG INCOMING
~AOG '- ANALOG OUTGOING
COPMODE CANCEL VALUES FOR OPMODE
See parameter OPMODE for further information.
Notes:
- When screening lists for selective ringing / call
waiting are existing, at least one ABW- or
AOG-OPMODE with DIAL=NOTDIAL must exist.
(for more information about screening lists see
command ENTR SCLST)
MOD PBX-2 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Additional number, which can be used for
expanding the diract dialing volume of a
PBX.
Up to 9 different additional numbers can be
linked to one PBX, but only one number can be
entered within one MOD PBX command.
The input of CADDNO within the same command
is not allowed.
Administration of the PBX via the
additional numbers is not allowed.
The additional numbers must be within the
same exchange as the PDN.
Additional numbers are only relevant for PBXs
with diract inward dialing.
For correct functionality all analog PBX lines
must have assigned COS=ANIOPN.
Additional numbers are only allowed for analog
or pure DSS1 or analog-DSS1 PBX.
Notes:
- If object is a CTX-PBX, the ADDNO must not be
reserved for another CENTREX GROUP.
Prerequisites:
- OPN
Incompatibilities:
- Multiple Pilot Number for all PBX-lines
(see command CR PBXLN)
CADDNO CANCEL VALUES FOR ADDNO
The additional number, which should be deleted,
must be entered exactly.
The input of ADDNO within the same command
is not allowed.
CHRG CHARGING
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-3 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] output.
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLMOD
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLACT
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ]
] ] DEB
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ] postprocessing.
] ]
] ] Default value : (not assigned)
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] Authorization to print records for subscriber
] ] facility.
This feature enables a user to get an verbal
announcement about the charges of the next
call after having finished it.
MOD PBX-4 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCHRG CANCEL VALUES FOR CHRG
See parameter CHRG=values for further information.
] ] Cancelled automatically when parameter DEBCL
] ] is cancelled. When both DEBCLACT and
] ] ACTDEBCL are cancelled, parameter DEBCL is
] ] automatically cancelled, too.
] ] Cancelled automatically, when DEBCL and
] ] DEBCLMOD are both cancelled.
] ] DEBCLMOD is automatically cancelled when
] ] DEBCLACT is cancelled.
] ] When both DEBCLACT and ACTDEBCL are
] ] cancelled, parameter DEBCL is automatically
] ] cancelled, too.
] ] Cancelled automatically when DEBCLACT is
] ] cancelled.
] ] DEBCLACT is automatically cancelled,
] ] when both DEBCLMOD and DEBCL are cancelled.
CALP - CALLED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS=CALP
] ] Collect all digits for call forwarding.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-5 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] - COS=CALIDIMM
] ] CALIDREQ
] ] The calling number will be
] ] presented to the called partys station.
] ] The presentation will be suppressed if
] ] the calling party has one of the features
] ] CLIR,CLIRSUSP or CLIRREQ.
] ] This restriction will be ignored if the
] ] enquiry of the feature COS=CLIR via SCI.
] ]
] ] - COS = CLIRREQ
] ] CLIRSUSP
] ] Ignore the restrictions entered by
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS= CLIP
] ] Use DISP CONFL to see the maximum number or
] ] participants.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - This feature is only allowed for special
] ] services, which can be determined by
] ] command DISP CALLPOPT.
] ] - This feature is not allowed for CTX-objects.
] ] (see command ENTR CXPBX).
] ] A call to a PBX with this feature will always
] ] use the Pilot Line ( line with LSN = PDN ) first.
]CT ] CALL TRANSFER
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] Enables an A-user to transfer an active call
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
] ] The frequency shift keying method is supported.
] ] If not subscribed, the dual tone multi
] ] frequency method is used.
] ] SCI request.
] ]
] ] All connections with services that can be
MOD PBX-6 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] established via analog lines/trunks, are
] ] generated too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=VMSREC
] ] doesnt reply
] ]
] ] - TYPE=IP
]] ]]
]] ]] - ADDNO
]] ]] request.
]] ]]
]] ]] - Not allowed for analog CTX-objects.
]] ]] (see command ENTR CXPBX).
restriction.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-7 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- COS = CLIRACT
- Not allowed for analog CTX-objects.
(see command ENTR CXPBX).
]- ] Connections are cleared down as soon as called
parties go on-hook.
]] ]] Calling party is identified and registered
]- ] immediately.
]]CALIDREQ]] CALL IDENTIFICATION ON REQUEST
]] ]] Authorizes calling subscriber identification
]] ]] on request.
~SERVINC '- SERVICE INTERCEPT
Calls are directed to a fixed number
defined by the administration, usually an
announcement or switchboard.
]] ]] identification. The A party line is always
]- ] held.
]] ]]
held if A-number is not available, otherwise
not.
Prerequisites:
]] ]] A-number will be screened using the official
]- ] blacklist (see command CR ORIGDAT).
]] ]]
]] ]] - TYPE = IP
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE = IP
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
MOD PBX-8 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
action.
Notes:
CCOS CANCEL VALUES FOR COS
See parameter COS=values for further information.
BLACKLST- BLACK LIST SCREENING
]CALIDIMM] CALL IDENTIFICATION IMMEDIATE
]CALIDREQ] CALL IDENTIFICATION ON REQUEST
]CALP ] CALLED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
] ] CALRIGN is automatically cancelled,
] ] when CALP is cancelled.
]CDCTRL ] CALLED PARTY CONTROL
] ] CIDCRIAL is automatically cancelled,
] ] when CALIDIMM and CALIDREQ are cancelled.
]CIDHOLD1] CALID HOLD ABSOLUTE
]CIDHOLD2] CALID HOLD WITHOUT A-DN
]CLIP ] CALLING LINE IDENT.PRESENT
] ] CLIRIGN is automatically cancelled,
] ] when CLIP is cancelled.
]CLIR ] CALLING LINE IDENT. RESTR.
]CLIRREQ ] CLIR ON REQUEST
]CLIRSUSP] CLIR SUSPENSION
]CT ] CALL TRANSFER
]JTCTRL ] JOINT CONTROL
]LANGU1 ] LANGUAGE 1
]SCLANGU ] SUB. CONTROLLED LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-9 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]TOLLCAT ] TOLL CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY
~WHITELST- WHITE LIST SCREENING
with data.
Notes:
This means for command MOD PBX, that with Shared ABB
only CTX-objects within the same CTX-group as the PBX
itself or non-CTX-objects can be referenced.
- Overflow (OVRFIN1, OVRFIN2, OVRFIN3, OVRFEX)
is not allowed for CTX-objects.
a[-b]
] ]
] ] - COSDAT= HOTLIMM
] ] Authorizes activation/dectivation via SCI
] ] and changes via SCI of the destination
] ] number for the hotline delayed feature.
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - By subscriber-aministration it will not
] ]
MOD PBX-10 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] checked, if the entered number is located within
] ] the same exchange as the PDN, but not, if
] ] the entered number is connected to a PBX.
] ]
] ] busy, blocked or out of order, and overflow
] ] attempts to the first and second internal
] ] overflow numbers have been unsuccessful, a
] ] further attempt will be done to the entered
] ] number.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
If this user is busy then the calls to
this user are forwarded to the series
completion number.
Notes:
- Only allowed for analog objects or
for SERV=ANALOG.
- Input of a DN, which is used as ADDNO,
is not allowed.
is not allowed.
- This feature is not allowed for CTX-objects.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = OVRFIN1
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-11 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OVRFIN2
OVRFIN3
OVRFEX
HOTLDEL -- DELAYED HOTLINE
]] ]] A call is automatically routed to a specified
]] ]] number if subscriber does not dial before
]] ]] time-out.
]- ]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] - The hotline number must be entered in
]] ]] the same command or exist in the
]] ]] objects database.
~HOTLIMM '- IMMEDIATE HOTLINE
A call is automatically routed to
a specified number when subscriber
goes off-hook.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB
- SUBTRCL
- COSDAT=DNHLMOD
CACMOD
- DIV=DIVA
DIVI
DIVDA
DIVBY
DIVIAACT
DIVND
DIVOP
DIVOPD
DIVTA
VMSREC
DIVIS
- TRARSTR=TRARSUSP
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5
Notes:
is not allowed.
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB =ABBD5
ABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] Incompatibilties:
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
MOD PBX-12 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]- ] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
Incompatibilities:
- See SABBD5T
] ] This number identifies a customer who may have
] ] customer specific features. Customer is
] ] used here in the sense of a bill paying
] ] customer. As the same customer may use several
] ] access points to the metwork the same customer
] ] identification may be administered for several
] ] objects.
Activation of Customer dependant routing
at the international gateway.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-13 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
CCOSDAT CANCEL VALUES FOR COSDAT
See parameter COSDAT=values for further information.
a[-b]
a: VALUES FOR COSDAT
]CUSTID ] CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
]CUSTROUT] CUSTOMER ROUTING
]HOTLDEL ] DELAYED HOTLINE
]HOTLIMM ] IMMEDIATE HOTLINE
]SABBD10 ] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.
]SABBD10T] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.2 D.
]SABBD100] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.100 SHORT NO.
]SABBD5T ] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.2 D.
b: NUMBER
ASCNO ASSOCIATED NUMBER
The associated number will be cancelled.
Notes:
- This information unit is only allowed for
HOTLDEL and DNHLMOD. In both these cases
HOTLDEL is cancelled too.
OPN OPERATOR NUMBER
Notes:
economy interval.
MOD PBX-14 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Incoming calls possible.
CBLK CANCEL VALUES FOR BLK
See parameter BLK=values for further information.
]ACCSUSP ] ACCOUNT SUSPENSION
]ADMIN ] ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
]ADMIN1 ] ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK 1
~ADMIN3 - ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK 3
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] inputs class 1.
] ] inputs class 2.
] ] (See ENTR SCFEA).
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-15 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] inputs class 3.
] ] inputs class 4.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
next call.
is active again.
ACTTRACL
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = HOTLIMM
CTRARSTR CANCEL VALUES FOR TRARSTR
See parameter TRARSTR=values for further information.
] ] Cancelled automatically when both SUBTRCL
] ] and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
] ] TRACLMOD and SUBTRCL are automatically
] ] cancelled, when TRACLACT is cancelled.
] ] Cancelled automatically when TRACLACT is
] ] cancelled.
] ] TRACLACT is cancelled automatically when both
] ] SUBTRCL and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
Cancelled automatically when both TRACLACT
and ACTTRACL are cancelled.
MOD PBX-16 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- TRARSTR=TRACLACT
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=HOTLIMM
Prerequisites:
- CHRG= ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG= DEB
DEBNC
CCL CANCEL CLASS
This parameter is used to delete the traffic restriction or
detailed billing class by entering a specific value.
DEBCL - DETAILED BILLING CLASS
] ] Deletion of the existing detailed billing
] ] class.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - ACTDEBCL is automatically cancelled, when
] ] DEBCL is cancelled.
] ] - DEBCLACT is automatically cancelled, when
] ] DEBCL and DEBCLMOD are cancelled.
]OPTRCL ] OPERATOR RESTRICTION CLASS
] ] Deletion of the existing operator traffic
] ] restriction class.
~SUBTRCL - SUBSCR. RESTRICTION CLASS
Deletion of the existing subscriber traffic
restriction class.
Notes:
- TRACLACT is automatically cancelled, when
SUBTRCL and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
- ACTTRACL is automatically cancelled, when
SUBTRCL is cancelled.
DIV DIVERSION
Notes:
- On entering diversion features/activations, the
following default notifications are set:
If office data CFWNOT=NO is set, then no
default notification is set.
If office data CFWNOT=WITHOUT is set, then
the notification "Calling user receives notification
without B2-number that his call is diverted" is set
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-17 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unless operator specifies another optiion.
If office data CFWNOT=WITH is set, then the
notification "Calling user receives notification
with B2-number that his call is diverted" is set
unless operator specifies another option.
This applies only for diversion features that
require a diversion number.
Notification options may be switched but not
deleted if required as per office data.
Use command DISP CALLPOPT to display the
office data.
a[-b]
a: DIVERSION
ACTDIVIA-- IND. ANNOUNCEMENT DIV. ACT.
]] ]] Activation for diversion to an individual
]] ]] announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] At least one of the following values:
]] ]] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVND]] DO NOT DISTURB DIV. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to an announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVOD]] DELAY.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the operator if called
]] ]] party does not answer within a specified time.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVOP]] IMMED.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the operator immediately.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]- ] ACTDIVBY
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
]]ACTDIVTA]] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT ACTIVATION
]] ]] Calls are diverted immediately to a telephone
]] ]] announcement.
]] ]] Calls are diverted to the specified announcement.
]] ]]
]] ]] - DIV=ACTDIVI
]] ]] ACTDIVBY
MOD PBX-18 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] ACTDIVDA
]] ]] ACTVMSI
]] ]] ACTVMSBY
]] ]] ACTVMSDA
]] ]] ACTDIVIS
~ACTDVA9 '- FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 9 DIV. ACT.
See DIV=ACTDVA1
DIVIA1 -- IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV.
]] ]] Specifies the device that issues an individual
]] ]] announcement.
]] ]] Within the second unit the content of the
]] ]] variable part of the announcement is specified,
]] ]] if necessary.
]- ] See DIV=DIVIA1
~DIVIA9 '- IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 9 DIV.
See DIV=DIVIA1
DIVA - FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
] ] a fixed announcement.
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-19 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] called party busy.
] ]
] ] called party does not answer.
] ]
] ] diversion.
] ]
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of call
] ] diversion to an individual announcement.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of selective
] ] immediate call diversion. If the feature is
] ] active incomming calls are screened against
] ] a screening list, which contains a selection
] ] of A-party numbers. If it is detected that a
] ] call shall be forwarded this will be done
] ] without further conditions.
] ] (for the administration of screening lists
] ] see command ENTR SCLST.)
] ]
] ] Prerequisites (one of following):
] ] - TYPE = PBX
] ] MLHG
] ] no special PBX-TYPE
] ]
] ] - COSDAT = HOTLIMM
] ] an announcement.
] ]
] ] Incompatibilties:
] ]
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of delayed call
] ]
]DIVTA ] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
] ] Authorizes activation via SCI of diversion
] ] to telephone announcement.
] ]
~VMSQUERY- VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY AUTH.
query service.
The subscriber is authorized to use a special
service code for a sequential replay of all
recorded messages and status without further
user interaction.
MOD PBX-20 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
control code for the message query function, as
specified by the voice mail service provider.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = VMSREC
VMSREC -- VOICE MAIL SERVICE REC. AUTH.
]] ]] Authorizes the subscriber to use the voice mail
]] ]] recording feature via SCI.
]] ]] The subscriber is authorized to use related
]] ]] service codes for activation, deactivation and
]] ]] status enquiry. The voice mail service may be
]] ]] active for "busy" and "dont answer" conditions
]] ]] as well as unconditionally.
]] ]] The second unit, if entered, contains the
]] ]] directory number of the voice mail service
]- ] equipment and the control code for the message
]] ]] recording function, as specified by the voice
]] ]] mail service provider.
]] ]] If no second unit is entered, the destination,
]] ]] which is defined at office-level, will be used.
]] ]] (see command DISP INC).
]] ]] The features VMSREC and VMSWOSCI overwrite
]] ]] each other.
]] ]]
]] ]] - COSDAT=HOTLIMM
~VMSWOSCI'- VOICE MAIL SERVICE WITHOUT SCI
recording feature.
The subscriber is not authorized to use related
service codes for activation, deactivation and
status enquiry. The voice mail service may be
active for "busy" and "dont answer" conditions
as well as unconditionally.
control code for the message recording function,
as specified by the voice mail service
provider.
The features VMSREC and VMSWOSCI overwrite
each other.
Prerequisites: (at least one of following)
- DIV = ACTVMSBY
ACTVMSDA
ACTVMSI
] ] party is busy.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] be entered in the same command or exist in
] ] the objects database.
] ]
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSBY
] ] party does not answer within a specified time.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-21 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSDA
] ] Calls are diverted immediately to another number.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] - DIV=ACTVMSI
] ] Calls are diverted immediately to another
] ] number, if screening detects that the call
] ] must be forwarded.
] ] The scrrening is done via a screening list
] ] which can be administered by command ENTR SCLST.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] be entered in the same command.
] ]
] ] - DIV= ACTDVA1-15
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] office level, if the subscriber is busy.
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
] ] - DIV=ACTDIVBY
] ] office level, if the subscriber doesnt answer
] ] the call.
] ]
] ] ACTDIVND
] ] ACTDIVOD
] ] ACTDIVOP
] ] ACTDIVIA
MOD PBX-22 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] - DIV=ACTDIVDA
~ACTVMSI - IMMED. DIV. TO VMS ACTIVATION
All calls for this subscriber are immediately
redirected to the subscribers voice mail
recording service using the number specified
with DIV=VMSREC or at office level.
This classmark is set either by the operator or
by the subscriber himself via SCI using the
service code provided in the switch.
The input of a second unit is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- DIV=ACTDVA1-15
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
ACTDIVOP
ACTDIVIA
- DIV=ACTDIVI
(dependent on office value,
see command DISP CALLPOPT)
DIVBYMOD- BUSY LINE DIV. MOD. AUTH.
] ] destination number for the DIVBY feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVBY
] ] destination number for the DIVDA feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVDA
] ] destination number for the DIVI feature.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV= DIVI
~DIVISMOD- IMM.SEL.DIV.MOD.AUTH.
Authorizes administration via SCI of the
destination number for the DIVIS feature.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = DIVIS
DDVAN - DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.NO.
] ] to a fixed announcement. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVA
]DDVBYN ] DISP.BUSY LINE.DIV.NO.
] ] to the DIVBY number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVBY
] ] to the DIVDA number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-23 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVDA
] ] to an individual announcement. The B2-number will
] ] be delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVIA
] ] to the DIVI number. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVI
] ] The B2-number will be delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVIS
] ] to the DIVND destination. The B2-number will be
] ] delivered too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVND
] ] If the called user has this feature and has
] ] activated the delayed diversion to the
] ] operator, then his number will be displayed
] ] to the calling user.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVOPD
] ] to the operator. the B2-number will be delivered
] ] too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVOP
~DDVTAN - DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.NO.
to a telephone announcement. The B2-number will
be delivered too.
MOD PBX-24 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- DIV=DDVTA
DDVA - DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.
] ] to a fixed announcement. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVAN
]DDVBY ] DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.
] ] to the DIVBY number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVBYN
] ] to the DIVDA number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVDAN
] ] to the DIVI number. No B2-number will be
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVIN
] ] receives notification that his call is deverted
] ] to an individual announcement. No B2-number will
] ] be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=DIVIA1-15
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVIAN
] ] No B2-number will be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV = DDVISN
] ] to the DIVND destination. No B2-number will be
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-25 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVNDN
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVOPN
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] - DIV=DDVODN
~DDVTA - DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.
to a telephone announcement. No B2-number will
be delivered.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- DIV=DDVTAN
DDVBYFN - DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.FORW.NO.
] ] and has activated DIVBY, then the numbers of
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] and has activated DIVDA, then the numbers of
] ] these users are given to the Bn-user.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] and has activated DIVI, then the numbers of
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
~DDVISFN - DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.FORW.NO.
If the B1-User or the Bn-1-User has this feature
and has activated DIVIS, then the number of
these users are given to the Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- DIV = DIVIS
b: NUMBER=
CDIV CANCEL VALUES FOR DIV
See parameter DIV=values for further information.
MOD PBX-26 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: DIVERSION
] ] If ASCNO is entered in the same command, the
] ] associated number is cancelled along with the
] ] feature activation.
]ACTDIVIA] IND. ANNOUNCEMENT DIV. ACT.
]ACTDIVND] DO NOT DISTURB DIV. ACTIVATION
]ACTDIVOD] DELAY.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]ACTDIVOP] IMMED.DIV. TO OPER. ACTIVATION
]ACTDIVTA] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT ACTIVATION
]ACTDVA1 ] FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV. ACT.
]ACTDVA10] FIXED ANNOUNCEM. 10 DIV. ACT.
]ACTVMSI ] IMMED. DIV. TO VMS ACTIVATION
]DDVA ] DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.
]DDVAN ] DISP.FIXED ANN.DIV.NO.
]DDVBY ] DISP.BUSY LINE DIV
]DDVBYFN ] DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.FORW.NO.
]DDVBYN ] DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.NO.
]DDVISFN ] DISP.IMM.SEL.DIV.FORW.NO.
]DDVTA ] DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.
]DDVTAN ] DISP.TEL.ANN.DIV.NO.
]DIVA ] FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
] ] If ASCNO is entered in the same command, then
] ] only the number and activation associated with the
] ] feature are cancelled. The basic feature is not
] ] cancelled. DIVBYMOD are automatically cancelled
] ] when DIVBY is cancelled.
]DIVBYMOD] BUSY LINE DIV. MOD. AUTH.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-27 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Cancelled automatically when DIVBY is
] ] cancelled.
] ] cancelled. DIVDAMOD is automatically cancelled
] ] when DIVDA is cancelled.
] ] Cancelled automatically when DIVDA is
] ] cancelled.
] ] cancelled. DIVIMOD is automatically cancelled
] ] when DIVI is cancelled.
]DIVIA1 ] IND.ANNOUNCEMENT 1 DIV.
] ] DIVIAACT and ACTDIVIA are automatically
] ] cancelled when this feature is cancelled.
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] See CDIV=DIVIA1
] ] Cancelled automatically when DIVI is cancelled.
] ] cancelled. DIVISMOD are automatically cancelled
] ] when DIVIS is cancelled.
]DIVISMOD] IMM.SEL.DIV.MOD.AUTH.
] ] Cancelled automatically when DIVIS is
] ] cancelled.
]DIVTA ] TEL. ANNOUNCEMENT. DIVERSION
]VMSQUERY] VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY AUTH.
] ] Cancelled automatically when VMSREC is cancelled.
]VMSREC ] VOICE MAIL SERVICE REC. AUTH.
] ] VMSQUERY is automatically cancelled, when this
] ] feature is cancelled.
~VMSWOSCI- VOICE MAIL SERVICE WITHOUT SCI
b: NUMBER
MOD PBX-28 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT= HOTLIMM
SABBD5
SABBD10
ABBD10T -- ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO. 2 D.
]] ]]
]] ]] -See ABB=ABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]]ABBD5T ]] ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO. 2 D.
]- ] Abbreviated dialing with a two digits dialing
]] ]]
]] ]] - COSDAT= HOTLIMM
]] ]] SABBD5T
]] ]] SABBD10T
]] ]] SABBD20-100
]] ]]
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-29 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- See ABB=ABBD5T
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
Prerequisites:
Short number for ABBD5 - ABBD100 or
c: LONG NUMBER=
CABB CANCEL VALUES FOR ABB
See parameter ABB=values for further information.
a[-b]
ABBD10 - ABBREVIATED DIALING 10 NUMBERS
] ] See CABB=ABBD5
]ABBD10T ] ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO. 2 D.
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
]ABBD100 ] ABBREVIATED DIALING100 NUMBERS
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
]ABBD20 ] ABBREVIATED DIALING 20 NUMBERS
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
MOD PBX-30 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] An abbreviated dialing list with 1 digit short
] ] numbers may not be cancelled if:
] ] - another object sharing the list
] ] (see COSDAT=SABBDxx),
] ]
] ] ABNMOD1 is automatically cancelled when ABBD5
] ] is cancelled.
] ] An abbreviated dialling list with 2 digit
] ] short number may not be cancelled if:
] ]
] ] ABNMOD2 is automatically cancelled when ABBD5T
] ] is cancelled.
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] Cancelled automatically when ABBDxxx is cancelled.
~ABNMOD2 - ABBR.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.2 DIG.
Cancelled automatically when ABBDxxx is cancelled.
b: SHORT NUMBER=
objects database.
CABURSTR CANCEL VALUES FOR ABURSTR
This parameter marks an abbreviated dialing number which may only be
modified by operator. (Not possible via SCI.)
See parameter ABURSTR for further information.
number.
Notes:
(i.e. DN of the PBX)
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-31 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN-1.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
have been received.
Notes:
- If this parameter is entered together with a new OPMODE,
the input of a DIAL-feature /= NOTDIAL is mandatory.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
CGCOS CANCEL VALUES FOR GCOS
See parameter GCOS=values for further information.
]DLYDIAL ] DELAY DIALING
]IMMDIAL ] IMMEDIATE DIALING
MOD PBX-32 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~WINKDIAL- WINK START DIALING
Notes:
- SEQSRCH will be set for the OPMODE = ABW unless another
value is entered.
]] ]] line number.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] starts with the first line (LNO=1) in
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] If the LSN (COS=DCAHUNT) is
]- ] dialed, the search starts with the
]] ]] corresponding line number and ends at the
]] ]] line with the highest number (LNO=max).
]] ]] The traffic counter will be updated with
]] ]] each seize.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] dialed, the sarch starts with the
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
The search starts after the line which was
seized for the previous call.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-33 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IIC
Notes:
IBW
IOG
IIC
ABW, AOG and TYPE=MLHG existing unless
another value is entered.
ABW, AOG unless another value is entered,
when the DIAL procedures of all resulting
OPMODEs are without inward dialing.
OPMODEs are with inward dialing.
- PULSDIAL iss set in case of analog OPMODEs =
OPMODEs are both with and without inward
dialing.
]] ]] - DINO
]- ] - SSDI
]] ]] - EOS
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
in case of directory economy: length of DN.
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
MOD PBX-34 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
]] ]] See TLIM=CONVTM1.
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-35 +
MOD PBX
ANALOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] answer.
]- ] See TLIM=RINGTM1.
]] ]] See TLIM=RINGTM1.
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
MOD PBX-36 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
CHNGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CHANGE OR RESET SPECIFIED PBX TYPE
-
] ]
] - ]
] ],TYPE= ] ;- ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= -,CTYPE= - ]
] ] ] !' ]
] ' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
TYPE PBX TYPE
This parameter is used to change the specified
PBX-type.
Notes:
- No other parameter than LAC and DN is allowed
within the command, when this parameter is entered.
- Following TYPEs are allowed for CTX-PBX:
PBX
MLHG
RSN with COS=RSNSCI or SUSCI
QSIG
- If object is a CTX-PBX, changing of PBX-type is
not allowed.
]] ]] Specifies a PBX as Multi Line Hunting Group
]] ]] which means that each telephone is connected
]] ]] directly via an own line to the local exchange
]- ] ( like subscriber lines ).
]] ]]
]] ]] - all DIAL-features except NOTDIAL
]] ]] - COS = DDI
Specifies a PBX as a conventional privat
branch exchange which means that several
lines connect the privat branch exchange to
the local exchange.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-37 +
MOD PBX
CHNGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CTYPE CANCEL VALUES FOR PBX TYPE
This parameter is used to reset the specified
PBX-type to no special PBX type.
Notes:
- No other parameter than LAC and DN is allowed
within the command, when this parameter is entered.
- If object is a CTX-PBX, changing of PBX-type is
not allowed.
MOD PBX-38 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DN DATA FOR ISDN/MIXED-PBX
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,COPMODE= ,ADDNO= ,CADDNO= ]
] ]
] ,CHRG= ,CCHRG= ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= ,CCOSDAT= ]
] ]
] ,OPN= ,BLK= ,CBLK= ,TRARSTR= ,CTRARSTR= ,OPTRCL= ]
] ]
] ,SUBTRCL= ,DEBCL= ,CCL= ,ABB= ,CABB= ,MINMAX= ]
] ]
] ,DINO= ,GCOS= ,CGCOS= ,HUNT= ,DIAL= ,SSDI= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,EOS= ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
ABW -- ANALOG BOTHWAY
]]AIC ]] ANALOG INCOMING
]-AOG ] ANALOG OUTGOING
]]IBW ]] ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-39 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]]IIC ]] ISDN INCOMING
~IOG '- ISDN OUTGOING
Notes:
command ENTR SCLST)
]AOG ] ANALOG OUTGOING
]IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
Additional number, which can be used for
expanding the diract dialing volume of a
PBX.
Up to 9 different additional numbers can be
linked to one PBX, but only one number can be
entered within one MOD PBX command.
The input of CADDNO within the same command
is not allowed.
Administration of the PBX via the
additional numbers is not allowed.
The additional numbers must be within the
same exchange as the PDN.
Additional numbers are only relevant for PBXs
with diract inward dialing.
For correct functionality all analog PBX lines
must have assigned COS=ANIOPN.
Additional numbers are only allowed for analog
or pure DSS1 or analog-DSS1 PBX.
Notes:
- If object is a CTX-PBX, the ADDNO must not be
reserved for another CENTREX GROUP.
Prerequisites:
- OPN
Incompatibilities:
- Multiple Pilot Number for all PBX-lines
(see command CR PBXLN)
CADDNO CANCEL VALUES FOR ADDNO
The additional number, which should be deleted,
must be entered exactly.
The input of ADDNO within the same command
is not allowed.
CHRG CHARGING
MOD PBX-40 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] output.
] ]
] ] - TYPE = IP
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLMOD
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] codes.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEBCLACT
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ]
] ] DEB
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] - DEBCL
] ] postprocessing.
] ] Flexible charging of IP/SN-based services
] ] via proprietary D-channel messages.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - CHRG=DEB
] ] - TYPE=IP
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-41 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Default value : (not assigned)
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
facility.
] ] Cancelled automatically, when DEBCL and
] ] DEBCLMOD are both cancelled.
] ] DEBCLMOD is automatically cancelled when
] ] DEBCLACT is cancelled.
] ] When both DEBCLACT and ACTDEBCL are
] ] cancelled, parameter DEBCL is automatically
] ] cancelled, too.
] ] Cancelled automatically when DEBCLACT is
] ] cancelled.
] ] DEBCLACT is automatically cancelled,
] ] when both DEBCLMOD and DEBCL are cancelled.
CALLPCAT- CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
] ] Calling Party Category and National Calling
] ] Party Category will be delivered.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - TYPE = IP
] ] Collect all digits for call forwarding.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
MOD PBX-42 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Authorization for direct inward dialing.
] ] This value is set automatically, when
] ] one of the OPMODEs IOG, IBW,
] ] is entered as the first OPMODE of this
] ] group and the DIAL procedures of all
] ] existing analog OPMODEs are with
] ] inward dialing.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] analog-PBXs.
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
] ] SCI request.
] ]
] ] All connections with services that can be
] ] established via analog lines/trunks, are
] ] doesnt reply
] ]
] ] - TYPE=IP
] ] Calls are directed to a fixed number
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-43 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parties go on-hook.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]- ] - COS=DDI
]] ]] called party.
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - COS=DDI
The subscriber number will be sent
to the called party.
Prerequisites:
- COS=DDI
] ] protocol.
] ] see COS=STIPROT
In case of switching an analog-PBX to an ISDN-PBX
and not at least one of the following values is
entered:
COS=STIPROT
COS=FCTPROT
In case of switching an ISDN/MIXED-PBX to an
Analog-PBX (CSERV=ALL or CSERV= <all existing
services>) the above protocol-features are
cancelled implicitly.
Prerequisites:
protocol) are supported by the network. The
]] ]]
]] ]] - TYPE = IP
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE = IP
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
MOD PBX-44 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
]] ]] offline.
]] ]]
]] ]] Notes:
action.
Notes:
]CALLPCAT] CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
] ] Cancelled automatically, when one of the
] ] OPMODEs IOG, IBW
] ] is entered as the first OPMODE of this
] ] group and the DIAL procedures of all
] ] existing analog OPMODEs are without
] ] inward dialing.
]FCTPROT ] FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
]INATNO ] INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
]NATNO ] NATIONAL NUMBER
]SCLANGU ] SUB. CONTROLLED LANGUAGE
]STIPROT ] STIMULUS PROTOCOL
] ] Must not be cancelled, if PBX has
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-45 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] screening list features with subscriber
] ] controlled input authorizations assigned.
] ] (see command ENTR SCLST).
]SUBNO ] SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
with data.
Notes:
a[-b]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5
Notes:
is not allowed.
is not allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- ABB =ABBD5
ABBD10
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] Incompatibilties:
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
MOD PBX-46 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]- ] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]] - See SABBD5T
Incompatibilities:
- See SABBD5T
] ]
] ] - COSDAT= HOTLIMM
]DUAL ] DUAL HOMING
] ] This feature enables a PBX to be connected to
] ] two local exchanges.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The second unit has to contain the codepopint
] ] for rerouting.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-47 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - By subscriber-aministration it will not
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
~OVRFIN3 - INTERNAL OVERFLOW NUMBER 3
When a call cannot be delivered because of
busy, blocked or out of order, and overflow
attempts to the first and second internal
overflow numbers have been unsuccessful, a
further attempt will be done to the entered
number.
This overflow-PBX must be located within the
same exchange as the PDN and therefore must be
entered without LAC.
This identifier is only allowed for analog or
pure DSS1 or analog-DSS1 PBX.
Notes:
- By subscriber-administration it will be
checked, if the entered number is located within
the same exchange as the PDN, but not, if
the entered number is connected to a PBX.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=SERCOMP
] ] This number identifies a customer who may have
] ] customer specific features. Customer is
MOD PBX-48 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] used here in the sense of a bill paying
] ] customer. As the same customer may use several
] ] access points to the metwork the same customer
] ] identification may be administered for several
] ] objects.
Activation of Customer dependant routing
at the international gateway.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers.
Notes:
a[-b]
]CUSTID ] CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
]CUSTROUT] CUSTOMER ROUTING
]DUAL ] DUAL HOMING
]SABBD10T] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO.2 D.
]SABBD100] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.100 SHORT NO.
]SABBD5T ] SHRD.ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO.2 D.
~SABBD90 - SHRD.ABB.DIAL.90 SHORT NO.
b: NUMBER
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-49 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPN OPERATOR NUMBER
Notes:
economy interval.
MOD PBX-50 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] (See DISP INC).
] ] inputs class 1.
] ] inputs class 2.
] ] inputs class 3.
] ] inputs class 4.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - SUBTRCL
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
next call.
is active again.
ACTTRACL
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT = HOTLIMM
] ] Cancelled automatically when both SUBTRCL
] ] and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-51 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] TRACLMOD and SUBTRCL are automatically
] ] cancelled, when TRACLACT is cancelled.
] ] Cancelled automatically when TRACLACT is
] ] cancelled.
] ] TRACLACT is cancelled automatically when both
] ] SUBTRCL and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
Cancelled automatically when both TRACLACT
and ACTTRACL are cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- TRARSTR=TRACLACT
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=HOTLIMM
Prerequisites:
- CHRG= ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG= DEB
DEBNC
CCL CANCEL CLASS
] ] class.
] ]
] ] Notes:
]OPTRCL ] OPERATOR RESTRICTION CLASS
] ] Deletion of the existing operator traffic
MOD PBX-52 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] restriction class.
~SUBTRCL - SUBSCR. RESTRICTION CLASS
Deletion of the existing subscriber traffic
restriction class.
Notes:
- TRACLACT is automatically cancelled, when
SUBTRCL and TRACLMOD are cancelled.
- ACTTRACL is automatically cancelled, when
SUBTRCL is cancelled.
a[-b[-c]]
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT= HOTLIMM
SABBD5
SABBD10
ABBD10T -- ABB.DIAL.10 SHORT NO. 2 D.
]] ]]
]] ]] -See ABB=ABBD5T
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
]]ABBD5T ]] ABB.DIAL.5 SHORT NO. 2 D.
]- ] Abbreviated dialing with a two digits dialing
]] ]]
]] ]] - COSDAT= HOTLIMM
]] ]] SABBD5T
]] ]] SABBD10T
]] ]] SABBD20-100
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-53 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]]
]] ]]
Incompatibilities:
- See ABB=ABBD5T
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
Prerequisites:
Short number for ABBD5 - ABBD100 or
c: LONG NUMBER=
CABB CANCEL VALUES FOR ABB
See parameter ABB=values for further information.
a[-b]
MOD PBX-54 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ABBD10 - ABBREVIATED DIALING 10 NUMBERS
] ] See CABB=ABBD5
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
]ABBD100 ] ABBREVIATED DIALING100 NUMBERS
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] An abbreviated dialing list with 1 digit short
] ] numbers may not be cancelled if:
] ]
] ] ABNMOD1 is automatically cancelled when ABBD5
] ] is cancelled.
] ] An abbreviated dialling list with 2 digit
] ] short number may not be cancelled if:
] ]
] ] ABNMOD2 is automatically cancelled when ABBD5T
] ] is cancelled.
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] See CABB=ABBD5T
] ] Cancelled automatically when ABBDxxx is cancelled.
~ABNMOD2 - ABBR.DIAL.NO.MOD.AUTH.2 DIG.
Cancelled automatically when ABBDxxx is cancelled.
b: SHORT NUMBER=
number.
Notes:
DN-1.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-55 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
have been received.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
MOD PBX-56 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] line number.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] each seize.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW
IOG
IIC
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-57 +
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
dialing.
]] ]] - DINO
]- ] - SSDI
]] ]] - EOS
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
MOD PBX-58 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-59 +
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DATA FOR A FRAME HANDLER
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,SERV= ,CSERV= ,BLK= ]
] ]
] ,CBLK= ,TRARSTR= ,CTRARSTR= ,MINMAX= ,DINO= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,GCOS= ,CGCOS= ,HUNT= ,SSDI= ,EOS= ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
[IBW ] ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
- Entering only services (except OPMODE and
OPMODE depending data) in the command, these
services will be assigned to the PBX.
- Entering services and service data, the
PBX will get these services (if not existing)
MOD PBX-60 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and the service data for all entered
services.
- The entered services will be checked against
the allowed services (see DISP CALLPOPT) in the
office.
- Only the DSS1-Services are compatible with the
TYPE=IP.
ALL - ALL ENTERED SERVICES
]ALLGRP ] ALL SERVICE GROUP
CSERV CANCEL VALUES FOR SERV
See parameter SERV=values for further information.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-61 +
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] (See DISP INC).
(See DISP INC).
number.
Notes:
DN-1.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
MOD PBX-62 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
have been received.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-63 +
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]- ] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
MOD PBX-64 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
]] ]] answer.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-65 +
MOD PBX
FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
MOD PBX-66 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DATA FOR A PACKET HANDLER
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,COPMODE= ,SERV= ,CSERV= ]
] ]
] ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= ,CCOSDAT= ,BLK= ,CBLK= ]
] ]
] ,TRARSTR= ,CTRARSTR= ,SUBADDR= ,CSUBADDR= ,MINMAX= ]
] ]
] ,DINO= ,GCOS= ,CGCOS= ,HUNT= ,SSDI= ,EOS= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
IBW -- ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-67 +
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
command ENTR SCLST)
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
services.
office.
TYPE=IP.
MOD PBX-68 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CLIP - CALLING LINE IDENT.PRESENT.
] ] Presentation of the calling number will be
] ] suppressed at the called partys station.
] ]
] ] - ADDNO
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS= CLIP
]NOSCCLIP] NO SCREENING OF CALLING LINE
] ] Validation of the A-party number will be
] ] suppressed.
]UTUSIG ] USER TO USER SIGNALLING
] ] Authorizes transparent transmission of user
] ] signalling information.
]UTUSIG2 ] USER TO USER SIGNALLING 2
] ] signalling information (service 2).
~UTUSIG3 - USER TO USER SIGNALLING 3
Authorizes transparent transmission of user
signalling information (service 3).
CLIP - CALLING LINE IDENT.PRESENT
] ] CLIRIGN is automatically cancelled,
] ] when CLIP is cancelled.
with data.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-69 +
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
The business group identification is used for
handling corporate network integrity. It is
provided in the originating exchange, transported
via ISUP to the B-side and compared on the
QSIG access with the business group
identification of the terminating exchange. In
case of different BGID the network integrity is
activated, feature transparency is not
supported and the presentation indicator of the
party number is evaluated.
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers.
Notes:
a[-b]
b: NUMBER
Notes:
MOD PBX-70 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] (See DISP INC).
(See DISP INC).
SUBADDR SUBADRESSING INFORMATION
[SADTRANS] SUBADRESSING TRANSMISSION
The transmitted subaddress information will
not be suppressed at the B-party.
CSUBADDR CANCEL VALUE FOR SUBADDR
See parameter SUBADDR=values for further information.
[SADTRANS] SUBADRESSING TRANSMISSION
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-71 +
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
number.
Notes:
DN-1.
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
a-b
have been received.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
- DIAL= NOTDIAL
Default: 0
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
MOD PBX-72 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]- ] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
be sent to the PBX.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-73 +
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- DIAL = NOTDIAL
- OPMODE = AIC
IIC
Notes:
IBW, IOG,
ABW, AOG
not NOTDIAL.
]- ] (See MINMAX.)
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE=AIC
IIC
- DIAL=NOTDIAL
TLIM TIME LIMITS
MOD PBX-74 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
PHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-75 +
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
DN DATA FOR PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,COPMODE= ,CHRG= ,CCHRG= ]
] ]
] ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= ,CCOSDAT= ,BLK= ,CBLK= ]
] ]
] ,OPTRCL= ,DEBCL= ,CCL= ,GCOS= ,CGCOS= ,HUNT= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
IBW -- ISDN BOTHWAY
MOD PBX-76 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
command ENTR SCLST)
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
CHRG CHARGING
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] - CHRG= DEB
] ] DEBNC
] ] output.
] ]
] ] - TYPE = IP
] ] DEBCLACT
] ] DEBCLMOD
] ] DEBNC
] ] - DEBCL
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] issued.
] ]
] ] Notes:
facility.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-77 +
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CPLFIRST- CONNECT PILOT LINE FIRST
] ] Bn user.
] ] TYPE = IP.
] ] Calls are directed to a fixed number
parties go on-hook.
]] ]]
]] ]] - TYPE = IP
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE = IP
with data.
MOD PBX-78 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
a[-b]
~DUAL - DUAL HOMING
This feature enables a PBX to be connected to
two local exchanges.
Notes:
- The second unit has to contain the codepopint
for rerouting.
b: NUMBER=
decimal numbers.
Notes:
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-79 +
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~DUAL - DUAL HOMING
b: NUMBER
Notes:
Prerequisites:
MOD PBX-80 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- CHRG= ACTDEBCL
DEBCLACT
Incompatibilities:
- CHRG= DEB
DEBNC
CCL CANCEL CLASS
] ] class.
] ]
] ] Notes:
~OPTRCL - OPERATOR RESTRICTION CLASS
Deletion of the existing operator traffic
restriction class.
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-81 +
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]- ] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
TLIM TIME LIMITS
MOD PBX-82 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
]] ]] answer.
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-83 +
MOD PBX
QSIGSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
SERV DATA FOR A PBX WITH QSIG PROTOKOLL
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,COPMODE=] <,SERV= ]
] ]
] ,CSERV=> [,CHRG=] [,CCHRG=] [,BLK=] [,CBLK=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,OPTRCL=] [,CCL=] [,GCOS=] [,CGCOS=] [,HUNT=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
IBW -- ISDN BOTHWAY
Notes:
MOD PBX-84 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command ENTR SCLST)
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
services.
office.
TYPE=IP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-85 +
MOD PBX
QSIGSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHRG CHARGING
CHABEGC - CHARGE ON BEGIN PER CALL
] ] At the beginning of the next call the user will
] ] receive a display information, that shows him,
] ] whether the call is free of charge or the
] ] period of time for one charge unit or a
] ] specified charge.
]CHACONTC] CHARGE CONTINUE PER CALL
] ] (ISDN) Charges are indicated continuously
] ] during the next call.
~CHAENDC - CHARGE ON END PER CALL
(ISDN) Charges are indicated at the end of
the next call.
~CHAENDC - CHARGE ON END PER CALL
MOD PBX-86 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
QSIGSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCL CANCEL CLASS
[OPTRCL ] OPERATOR RESTRICTION CLASS
Deletion of the existing operator traffic
restriction class.
] ]
] ] - OPMODE = AIC
] ] IIC
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-87 +
MOD PBX
QSIGSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]- ] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
MOD PBX-88 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
DATA FOR REMOT SERVICE NUMBER
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,OPMODE= ,COPMODE= ,BLK= ,CBLK= ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] ,DIAL= ,HUNT= ,TLIM=> - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-89 +
MOD PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command ENTR SCLST)
Notes:
IBW
IOG
IIC
MOD PBX-90 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
dialing.
[NOTDIAL ] WITHOUT DIRECT INWARD DIALING
Incompatibilities:
- DINO
- SSDI
- MINMAX ( if MIN /= length of DN,
in case of directory number economy:
if MIN /= length of DN-1 )
- EOS
Notes:
value is entered.
]] ]] line number.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] each seize.
]] ]]
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
]] ]] IBW
]] ]] IOG
]] ]] the OPMODE.
]] ]] line.
]] ]]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-91 +
MOD PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
]] ]] - OPMODE= AIC
]] ]] IIC
Incompatibilities:
- OPMODE= AIC
IIC
TLIM TIME LIMITS
See TLIM=CONVTM1.
]] ]] answer.
MOD PBX-92 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
RSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See TLIM=RINGTM1.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-93 +
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
SERV DATA FOR ISDN/MIXED-PBX
-
] ]
] MOD PBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,COPMODE=] <,SERV= ]
] ]
] ,CSERV=> [,CHRG=] [,CCHRG=] [,COS=] [,CCOS=] ]
] ]
] [,COSDAT=] [,CCOSDAT=] [,BLK=] [,CBLK=] [,TRARSTR=] ]
] ]
] [,CTRARSTR=] [,OPTRCL=] [,SUBTRCL=] [,CCL=] [,DIV=] ]
] ]
] [,CDIV=] [,SUBADDR=] [,CSUBADDR=] [,MINMAX=] ]
] ]
] [,DINO=] [,GCOS=] [,CGCOS=] [,HUNT=] [,DIAL=] ]
] ]
] ;- ]
] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=] - ]
] !' ]
] ]
~-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
be directly dialed.
with the TYPE=IP.
IBW -- ISDN BOTHWAY
MOD PBX-94 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
command ENTR SCLST)
IBW - ISDN BOTHWAY
SERV SERVICE
Notes:
services.
office.
TYPE=IP.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-95 +
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHRG CHARGING
] ] At the beginning of the next call the user will
]CHABEGP ] CHARGE ON BEGIN PERMANENT
] ] At the beginning of the call the user will
] ] (ISDN) Charges are indicated continuously
] ] during the next call.
]CHACONTP] CHARGE CONTINUE PERMANENT
]CHAENDC ] CHARGE ON END PER CALL
] ] (ISDN) Charges are indicated at the end of
] ] the next call.
~CHAENDP - CHARGE ON END PERMANENT
(ISDN) Charges are indicated at the
end of call.
CHATIMM -- CHARGE TRANSFER IMMEDIATE
]- ] (ISDN) Charges are transferred to the called party
]] ]] immediately. Called party with this feature always
]] ]] takes over charges.
~CHATREQ '- CHARGE TRANSFER ON REQUEST
(ISDN) Charges are transferred to the called party
on request.
]CHABEGP ] CHARGE ON BEGIN PERMANENT
]CHACONTP] CHARGE CONTINUE PERMANENT
]CHAENDC ] CHARGE ON END PER CALL
]CHAENDP ] CHARGE ON END PERMANENT
]CHATIMM ] CHARGE TRANSFER IMMEDIATE
~CHATREQ - CHARGE TRANSFER ON REQUEST
CALLHOLD- CALL HOLD FOR ENQUIRY
] ] Enables subscriber to interrupt a call for
] ] connection to another subscriber and then resume
] ] the former call.
]CALP ] CALLED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
MOD PBX-96 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS=CALP
]CCBS ] CALL COMP.TO BUSY SUB.
] ] If a B-user has this feature and is busy, the
] ] A-user is allowed to request a recall by
] ] subscriber-controlled input. At the time when
] ] the B-user becomes free, the A-user will be
] ] recalled automatically.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] - SERV = ANALOG
]CCNR ] CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY
] ] If a B-user does not reply and the A-user has this
] ] feature, A-user is allowed to request a recall by
] ] subscriber-controlled input. When the B-user goes
] ] on hook after the next call, the A-user will be
] ] recalled automatically.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] - SERV = ANALOG
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS=CALIDIMM
] ] CALIDREQ
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS= CLIP
]COLP ] CONNECT.LINE IDENT.PRESENT.
] ] The connected number will be
] ] presented to the calling partys station.
] ] the called party has one of the features
] ] COLR,COLRSUSP or COLRREQ.
] ] calling party has the feature COS=COLRIGN.
]COLRIGN ] COLR IGNORED
] ] Ignore the restriction entered by
] ] COLR,COLRSUSP or COLRREQ.
] ]
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-97 +
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - COS=COLP
] ] Use DISP CONFL to see the maximum number or
] ] participants.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - This feature is only allowed for special
] ] services, which can be determined by
] ] command DISP CALLPOPT.
] ] - This feature is not allowed for CTX-objects.
] ] (see command ENTR CXPBX).
]CONF3 ] THREE-WAY CALLING
] ] Authorizes setup of three-way conference.
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] - The function of this feature can only be
] ] guaranteed for lines with CAT = IBA.
] ]
] ] - SERV = ANALOG
]CT ] CALL TRANSFER
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] Enables an A-user to transfer an active call
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ]
] ] Notes:
] ] generated too.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - DIV=VMSREC
]NOCDIV ] NO DIVERTED CALLS ACCEPTED
] ] No incoming forwarded calls are accepted.
] ] Validation of the A-party number will be
] ] suppressed.
]NOSCCOLP] NO SCREENING OF COLP
] ] Validation of the b-party number will be
] ] suppressed.
]TERMPORT] TERMINAL PORTABILITY
] ] Authorization to change the terminal
] ] during the call.
] ] signalling information.
] ] signalling information (service 2).
MOD PBX-98 + P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Authorizes transparent transmission of user
signalling information (service 3).
]- ] Calling party is identified and registered
]] ]] immediately.
~CALIDREQ'- CALL IDENTIFICATION ON REQUEST
Authorizes calling subscriber identification
on request.
]] ]] identification. The A party line is always
]- ] held.
]] ]]
held if A-number is not available, otherwise
not.
Prerequisites:
]] ]]
]] ]] - ADDNO
]] ]] request.
]] ]]
]] ]] - Not allowed for analog CTX-objects.
]] ]] (see command ENTR CXPBX).
restriction.
Incompatibilities:
- COS = CLIRACT
- Not allowed for analog CTX-objects.
COLR -- CONNECT.LINE IDENT.RESTRICT.
]] ]] Presentation of the connected number will
]] ]] be suppressed at the calling partys station.
]] ]] calling party has the feature COS=COLRIGN.
]-COLRREQ ] COLR ON REQUEST
]] ]] Presentation of the called number will be
]] ]] suppressed at the calling partys station on
]] ]] request.
]] ]] calling party has the feature COS=COLRIGN.
~COLRSUSP'- COLR SUPPRESSED
Presentation of the called number at the
calling partys station will be suppressed,
but the called party can interrupt this
restriction.
calling party has the feature COS=COLRIGN.
P30305-V6000-Z362-1-7619 MOD PBX-99 +
MOD PBX
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AOCFCT - AOC BY FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
] ] The charging information will be sent
] ] to the called party using the
] ] functional protocol.
] ] see COS=AOCSTI
]AOCSTI ] AOC BY STIMULUS PROTOCOL
] ] The charging information will be sent
] ] to the called party using the
] ] stimulus protocol.
] ]
] ] Prerequisites:
] ] - Both protocols (functional and stimulus
] ] protocol) are supported by the network.
] ] The protocols supported by the network
] ] can be determined with command DISP CALLPOPT.
] ] - At least one of the following charging features
] ] is entered:
] ] CHRG= CHABEGP
] ] CHABEGC
] ] CHACONTP
] ] CHACONTC
] ] CHAENDP
] ] CHAENDC
] ] If at least one of the advice of charge
] ] protocols:
] ] COS= AOCSTI
] ] AOCFCT
] ] is not entered together with the above
] ] charging features then the default value(s)
] ] specified for the office will be assigned.
] ] When the last of the above charging features
] ] is cancelled for a given service then the
] ] associated advice of charge protocol featur

A 0053333

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A 0053333

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S I E M E N S

This document requires 10 50 mm binder

Hints for interpreting the change designations:

The designations mean:

N ] New, no previous chapter

0 ] Chapter removed, no replacement

This document comprises a total of 4923 pages.

Index of Issue: Issue: Pages:

ADMINISTRATION SECTION 01 ADMIN -1... 3

Contents and Issue Information

You might also like